PanSystem UG 20150701 PDF

PanSystem 5.
0
User Guide
Pa n Sy stem
We l l Te s t A n a l y s i s
USER GUIDE
COPYRIGHT AND WARRANTY
PanSystem
2015 Weatherford International
This document contains information proprietary to Weatherford, with all rights

reserved worldwide. Any reproduction or disclosure of this publication, or any part
hereof, to persons other than Weatherford personnel is strictly prohibited, except by
written permission of Weatherford.
DISCLAIMER
Information in this guide is subject to change without notice and does not constitute a
commitment on the part of Weatherford. It is supplied on an as is basis without any
warranty of any kind, either explicit or implied. Information may be changed or
updated in this guide at any time.
The screen shots depicted in this user guide are for illustration purposes only. Several
product features shown on the screen shots and described in the guide are specific to
the integration options selected while configuring the system, and may not be
available on your installation.
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE
The following products and organizations have been mentioned in this
documentation. Various trademarks are owned by the respective owners.
Microsoft, Windows XP and Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries, http://www.microsoft.com.
USING THIS MANUAL

This manual is designed to address the needs of both the new and advanced user. It
assumes you have knowledge of basic oil field terminology and have minimal
familiarity with Microsoft Windows.
2 User Guide | PanSystem

CONTENTS
SECTION I: GETTING STARTED
CHAPTER 1: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Welcome to PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using PanSystem for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using PanSystem for Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PanSystem Views and Ribbon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
File Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Save All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Send as E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Exit PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SECTION II: IMPORT/EXPORT DATA
CHAPTER 2: Import/Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Import/Export Data View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CHAPTER 3: Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Import Data Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Import from ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Import from Pan 3.x or Earlier File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
User Guide | PanSystem 3

Import from Excel (Spreadsheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Import from ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Import from Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Import from DPK/LAS Wireline Formation Tester File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Import from PLAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
AER PRD File Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
AER Report Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
CHAPTER 4: Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Export Data Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Export to ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Export to Type-Curve File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
CHAPTER 5: Managing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

View Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Overlay Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overlay Pressure Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Mark Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Marker Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Show/Hide Marker Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Delete Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tile Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tile Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cascade Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
SECTION III: DATA PREPARATION
CHAPTER 6: Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Data Preparation View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CHAPTER 7: Test Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Test Period Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CHAPTER 8: Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Gauge Data Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Enter New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4 PanSystem | User Guide

Edit Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Deleting Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Going to a Specific Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Clearing Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Finding a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Inserting Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Editing Function Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Editing a Single Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Editing the Time Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Append Files (or Copy and Paste) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
THP to BHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Difference Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Copy, Resample and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Copy and Resample to a New Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
CHAPTER 9: Rate Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Rate Schedule Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Edit Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create Rate Column Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mark Exact Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Pick Nearest Data Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Mark Point from Intersection of Two Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Automatic Flow Period Generation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rate Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
CHAPTER 10: Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Processing Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Select Shift Stream Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
About Advanced Data Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Steps Involved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Data Conditioning Workflow Savitzky-Golay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Example Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Data Reduction and Smoothing Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Show Number of Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Ungroup Flow Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

CHAPTER 11: Tidal Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tidal Filtering - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Maritime Tide Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Edit the Tide Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Subsea Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Select Sub-sea Pressure Gauge Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Edit the Tidal Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tidal Filter Mode Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Calculate Tidal Lag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
CHAPTER 12: Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Edit Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Test Design Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
CHAPTER 13: Master Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Master Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
CHAPTER 14: Well Reservoir and Fluid Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Well Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Add New Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Copy Well/Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Layer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Model Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Water Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 372
Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog . . . 378
Create Composite Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Create Commingled Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
PVT Tuning Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Numerical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
PanMesh Data Preparation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
PanMesh Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
PanMesh Graphic Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
SECTION IV: ANALYSIS
CHAPTER 15: Analysis View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Analysis View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
CHAPTER 16: Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Workflow Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Test Overview Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
CHAPTER 17: Conventional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Conventional Analysis Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Plot Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Test Overview Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Cartesian Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Semi-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Linear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Bilinear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Spherical Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Type-Curves Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
CHAPTER 18: Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Tools Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Global Point Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Auto Match Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Windowed Point Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Smoothing Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Change T0/P0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Time Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Zero Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Unit Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Half Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Negative Half Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Quarter Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Negative Unit Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Floating Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Average Line Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Flow Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Confirm Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Change Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Line Details and Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Autofit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Select Type-Curve Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Type-Curve Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Type-Curve Pd Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Filter Type Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Derivative Smoothing Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Tidal Filter Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Change Extrapolated Pressure Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
CHAPTER 19: Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Model Selection Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Select Analysis Model Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Input/Model Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Suggest Models Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
CHAPTER 20: Skin Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Skin Analysis Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Correct for Rate Dependency (Change F) Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
CHAPTER 21: PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
CHAPTER 22: Shale Oil/Gas 593

Shale Oil/Gas Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Shale Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Square Root Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Material Balance 1 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Material Balance 2 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Shale Type-Curve Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
History Match Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
CHAPTER 23: Mini-Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Mini-Frac Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Pre-Closure Plot Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
G-Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Square Root Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Mini_Frac Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Post-Closure Plot Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Semi-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Linear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
KGD/PKN Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Mini-Frac Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Auto Fit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Change T0/PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Confirm Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Derivative Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Fit Line of Known Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Fit Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Floating Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Flow Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Half Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Line Details and Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Negative Half Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Negative Unit Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Pick Closure Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Pick Fracture Init Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Zero Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
CHAPTER 24: Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Transformation Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Pressure Transformation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Time Transformation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
SECTION V: SIMULATION
CHAPTER 25: Simulation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Simulation View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
CHAPTER 26: Analytical Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Analytical Simulation Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Quick Match Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Copy Layer Pressure Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Boundary Type Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Automatic Matching Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

About Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Advanced Simulation - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Advanced Simulation - History Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Advanced Automatic Matching Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Matching Progress Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Advanced Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
PanFlow Rate Simulation - Progress Sub-Dialog (Calculating Advanced Simulation) . . 709
PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
PanFlow Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
CHAPTER 27: Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

PanMesh Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
PanMesh New Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
PanMesh Control Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
PanMesh Graphical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
View Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Toolbar Button Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Graphing Window (Numerical Simulation only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
PanMesh View Layer Volumes and Production Rates Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
PanMesh View Flow into Completions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
PanMesh Data View Controls Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
PanMesh Flow Plane Settings Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
PanMesh Saved Views Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
PanMesh Edit the View Title Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
PanMesh Enter the New View/Graph Title Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
PanMesh Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
PanMesh Edit Mesh Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
PanMesh Change Graph Area Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
PanMesh Edit Number of Points Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
PanMesh Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
PanMesh Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

PanMesh From TCX File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
SECTION VI: DELIVERABILITY
CHAPTER 28: Deliverability View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

Deliverability View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
CHAPTER 29: Gas Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

Gas Deliverability Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Select Test Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
LIT Flow-After-Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
LIT Isochronal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
LIT Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
C&n Analysis Flow-After-Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
C&n Analysis Isochronal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
C&n Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
CHAPTER 30: IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water) Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Model Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
CHAPTER 31: Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Forecasting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Flow Rate v Time Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Flow Rate and Cumulative Production v Time Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP v Time Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Production v Time Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

SECTION VII: REPORTS
CHAPTER 32: Reports View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851

Reports Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Report Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Configure Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Editing File Header and Report Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Numerical Reporting Options Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Edit Report Data File Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Edit Report Analysis Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Edit Report Deliverability Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Page Setup Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Save As Word Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
SECTION VIII: CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER 33: Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

Configuration View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
General Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Units Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
New Unit System Based On/Edit Unit System Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Unit Classes Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Create New Unit Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Units Detail Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Gauge Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Gauge Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Graphing Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
CHAPTER 34: Windows System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

Windows System Commands Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

System Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
System Maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
System Minimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
System Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
System Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
SECTION IX: SCREEN REGIONS
CHAPTER 35: PanSystem and Windows Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Application/Window Exit Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Maximize Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Minimize Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Restore Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Window Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
CHAPTER 36: PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
PanSystem Navigation Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Help Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
General Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Keyboard Procedures Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Commands Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Procedures Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Screen Regions Help Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
About PanSystem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Printing to Hard Copy or File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Help Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

PanSystem Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
PanSystem Plot Toolbar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Print Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Copy to Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Export to Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Edit Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Edit Hardcopy Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Edit Image Copy Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Data Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Select Points in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Zoom a box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Zoom Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Zoom Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Zoom Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Axes Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Resume Original View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Delete n Selected Points (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Undo (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Restore All Unconfirmed Data Changes (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Confirm (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Ruler Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Status Bar Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
CHAPTER 37: Graphing Specific Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

PanSystem Graphing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Graphs/Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Graphing Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Graphing Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Graphing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Graphing X-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Graphing Y-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Graphing R-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Graphing T-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

SECTION X: PRINTING, WINDOWS, AND GRAPH MANAGEMENT
CHAPTER 38: Managing Print and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Printing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Printing the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Setting Up The Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Manipulating Windows Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Closing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Maximizing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Minimizing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Moving a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Restoring a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Sizing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
CHAPTER 39: Managing Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

Managing Graphs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Adding and Removing the Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Removing the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Altering the Appearance of the Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Altering the Appearance of the Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Altering the Appearance of the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Changing the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Plot Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Zooming In and Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
SECTION XI: KEYBOARD PROCEDURES
CHAPTER 40: Keyboard Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Keyboard Procedures Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
PanSystem and Windows Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Graphing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Switching to Another Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

SECTION XII: APPENDIXES
APPENDIX A: PanSystem Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

Definition of PanSystem Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
APPENDIX B: PanSystem Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

Mini-Frac Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Data Edit Plot Mini-Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Mini-Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
Pre-Closure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Mini-Frac G-Function Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Mini-Frac Square-Root Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Post-Closure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Presets Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Multiple Hydraulic Fracture Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Multiple Vertical Fracture Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Multiple Hydraulic Fracture . . . . . . 1007
Shale Oil/Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Shale Oil/Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Data Edit Plot Shale Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Shale Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Analysis Shale Oil/Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Shale Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Square-Root Plot Shale Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Material Balance-1 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Material Balance2 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
History Match Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure 1025
Analysis and Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Dietz Shape Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

PanSystem Derivative Diagnostic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Closed Reservoir Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Constant Pressure Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Horizontal Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite Systems . . . . . . . . . . 1041
Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Vertical Fractured Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Wellbore Storage Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
PanSystem Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Oil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
PanSystem File Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
PanSystem File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Type-Curve File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
*.PAN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
*.PIC (Pressure/ z-Factor/Viscosity) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
PanSystem Test Period Analysis Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
Slug Test Analysis Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
Gas Analysis (Linear Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
APPENDIX C: PanSystem Technical References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205

Technical References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
APPENDIX D: Supplementary Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Index .............................................................................................................. 1217

SECTION I
GETTING STARTED
This section provides an introduction to the PanSystem application.
CHAPTER 1
Overview ...................................................................... 21
Chapter 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter contains the following topics:
Welcome to PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using PanSystem for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using PanSystem for Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PanSystem Views and Ribbon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
File Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Save All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Send as E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Exit PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PanSystem | User Guide 21

1 OVERVIEW
Welcome to PanSystem
WELCOME TO PANSYSTEM
PanSystem is a powerful tool for:
Preparing and editing Well Test Data from conventional gauges and
wireline formation testers.
Analyzing and history matching Transient Well Test Data using Analytical
and Numerical* methods.
Analyzing and history matching long-term Flowing Pressure and

Production Data using Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) methods.
Analyzing and history matching wireline formation tester probe or

packer data simultaneously with observation probe data. if available
Computing Well Deliverability/Injectivity and Forecasting long-term

production.
Designing Well Tests.
Preparing detailed Reports on Well Test Analysis.
All these functions (apart from Numerical Simulation*) are provided in one
integrated program. PanSystem uses the familiar Windows interface to make
it easy for users to move around and assimilate the program options.
i *The PanMesh Numerical Simulator is an optional extra.
For a quick introduction to PanSystem features and concepts, some useful

links are provided below:
For an explanation of nomenclature used within the program, refer to

Definition of PanSystem Terms.
An index to the PanSystem menu system and Windows features can be

found in PanSystem Views and Ribbon Options.

OVERVIEW
Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem 1
For a description of the Reservoir Flow Models (including external Customer
Models) and Flow Model Parameters used within PanSystem and their
application, refer to Model Parameters.
For a description of the Reservoir Parameters used in PanSystem and their

application, refer to Layer Parameters.
Refer to PanMesh Data Preparation Overview for a description of

PanMesh Data Preparation; the PanMesh Graphical Interface is described in
Numerical (PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
Information relating to the various Help systems can be accessed via the
Help Menu.
PREPARING DATA FOR ANALYSIS IN

PANSYSTEM
Overview:
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow to
create a .Panx System File for Analysis (Analysis View Overview). The
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning module uses wavelet analysis and is
designed for efficient processing of large datasets. Refer to the PanMesh
Data Preparation view for additional information on selected topics:

1 OVERVIEW
Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem
Figure 1: Creating a .Panx System File for Analysis

OVERVIEW
Using PanSystem for Analysis 1
USING PANSYSTEM FOR ANALYSIS

Overview:
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow
when using PanSystem to analyze Well Test results. Information on each
option is available from the Analysis View Overview:
Figure 2: Using PanSystem to Analyze Well Test Results

1 OVERVIEW
Using PanSystem for Test Design
USING PANSYSTEM FOR TEST DESIGN

Overview:
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow
when using PanSystem for Test Design and Advanced Simulation:
Figure 3: Using PanSystem for Test Design and Advanced Simulation

OVERVIEW
PanSystem Views and Ribbon Options 1
PANSYSTEM VIEWS AND RIBBON

OPTIONS
General:
Select one of the following links to open up a sub-index of topics or a specific

topic related to each specific command:
File Management
Import/Export Data
Data Preparation View Overview
Analysis View Overview
Simulation View Overview
Deliverability View Overview
Reports Overview
Configuration View Overview
Windows System Commands Overview
FILE MANAGEMENT
File Management Overview
The following program commands provide control over the application as a

whole (e.g. file input and output, printing and page configuration. For more
specific details on each topic, select the relevant links outlined below:
New - Clears the existing analysis from memory prior to beginning a

new analysis.
Open - Opens an existing analysis from file.
Save - Saves the current analysis to file.
Save All - Saves all open files.

1 OVERVIEW
New
Save As - Saves the current analysis under a different filename.
Send as E-mail - Sends the currently open file to another user via a
MAPI-compliant mail system.
Page Setup -Sets up the page layout.
Print -Prints out the current plot window.
Exit PanSystem - Exits from PanSystem.
New
General:
This option is used to prepare a new system file. PanSystem clears the
computer's internal memory ready to recall or input new data.
When the New command is selected, PanSystem clears anything formerly

displayed in the plot area. All other current data will also be cleared.
! This option will clear any data currently stored in the computer's internal
memory. To keep this data, it must be saved by using the Save option.
Open
General:
This option is used to locate and load an existing system file (*.PANX).
The names of the last 15 files opened appear at the right of the File
Management Menu, . To open one of these, use the left mouse button to
highlight and select the filename, then double-click.

OVERVIEW
Open 1
PanSystem uses a range of file types and it is important to know about these
before starting a work session. Users should familiarize themselves with the
following types of files (default extensions in brackets):
Gauge Data files (*.TPR)

System files (*.PANX or *.PAX)
Tide Table files (*.SEA)
Report files (text only) (*.RPT)
i
The file extensions (*.TPR, *.PANX, *.PAX, *.SEA and *.RPT) are default file
extensions used in PanSystem. If required, users can assign their own
extensions.
!
The File Open option will overwrite any data currently stored in the internal
memory. To keep this data, it must be saved using the Save option before
opening a new file.
Screen Dialog and Operational Instructions:
This is a standard Windows Open dialog and users should refer to the
Windows Reference Manual or Windows Online Help if assistance is required
with any of the Windows-specific options.
The default file type is the ASCII (*.PANX) file. The alternative
ASCII-formatted (*.PAX) file, used for UNIX versions of PanSystem, may be
selected from the List Files of Type drop-down menu section of the dialog
window.
As files are selected, summary information from the selected file (e.g. test
data, well details, etc.), is displayed in the lower text field part of the dialog.
With the required file highlighted, select Open to open. Files can also be
opened on an individual basis, by double-clicking on the desired file icon in
the viewing field to open directly.
If users are trying to locate a PanSystem file with specific criteria, a Search
button is located at the base of this dialog for this purpose. Select the button
to open a Search Criteria sub-dialog and specify:
The Directory to search for appropriate files via the Browse button.

1 OVERVIEW
Open
Specify the Search Criteria to locate appropriate files by checking the

relevant fields (e.g. Field, Well, Reservoir Model, Fluid Type, Number of
Layers, etc.) and selecting/inputting appropriate information (where
required).
On selecting OK, a Search Results dialog is generated. When files are

selected/highlighted in the list field, the report parameters from the
selected file (e.g. test data, well details, etc.), are displayed in the lower
text field part of the dialog. Select/highlight the required file, then select
the Open button to load the file into PanSystem.
i
If an existing file has been saved in plot display mode that file will re-open in
plot display mode. In cases where files have been saved in blank screen
mode, the file will re-open in blank screen mode, awaiting user input.
Other points to note:
The default working directory path can be pre-set via the General option
on the Configuration ribbon (General Configuration Dialog). This will
be the default path for Open, Save and Save as... whenever a PanSystem
session is started.
If the user subsequently browses to a folder that is different from the

preset working directory and opens a file, the Save and Save as...
operations will target the new folder and will continue to do so until a
new folder is browsed, or until the PanSystem session is terminated.
Upon starting a new session, the preset working folder will be reinstated.
When a (*.PANX) file has been opened, users can start to enter, edit or
analyze data.
To enter or edit data use the Data Preparation ribbon options.
To analyze the data use the Analysis ribbon options.
i Also refer to the help topic for Gauge Data Files.

OVERVIEW
Close 1
Close
General:
This option is used to close a file.
This is a standard Windows Open dialog and users should refer to the
Save
General:
This option is used to save the data currently stored in the computer's internal
memory to a file. PanSystem will give the file the default extension (*.PANX).
Users can change this and use another extension if required.
!
If an existing file is being edited, Save will overwrite it with the current data. No
warning is given. To retain the original file, use the Save As option and give
the current data a new filename.
This is a standard Windows Save dialog and users should refer to the
When saving the current PanSystem data to a file, the default file type is the
ASCII (*.PANX) file.
of the Configuration ribbon. This will be the default path for Open, Save
and Save as whenever a PanSystem session is started.
If the user subsequently browses to a folder which is different from the

preset working directory and opens a file, the Save and Save as operations
will target the new folder and will continue to do so until a new folder is
browsed, or until the PanSystem session is terminated. Upon starting a
new session, the preset working folder will be reinstated.

1 OVERVIEW
Save All
Save All
General:
This option is used to save data of all of the currently opened files in their
respective file. PanSystem will give the file the default extension (*.PANX).
Users can change this and use another extension if required.
This is a standard Windows Save All dialog and users should refer to the
Save As
General:
This option should be used when an existing file has been edited and the
current data stored in the computer's internal memory is to be saved without
overwriting the original data. The Save As option prompts users to supply a
new filename for the data.
This is a standard Windows Save As dialog and users should refer to the
This dialog can be used to save the current data to a new filename. The
default file type is the ASCII (*.PANX) file.
of the Configuration ribbon. This will be the default path for Open, Save
and Save as whenever a PanSystem session is started.
If the user subsequently browses to a folder which is different from the

preset working directory and opens a file, the Save and Save as operations
will target the new folder and will continue to do so until a new folder is
browsed, or until the PanSystem session is terminated. Upon starting a
new session, the preset working folder will be reinstated.

OVERVIEW
Send as E-mail 1
Send as E-mail
General:
Use this option to send the currently active PanSystem file by e-mail.
Selecting this option from the menu opens an e-mail dialog and attaches the
currently active (*.PANX) file to a new MAPI compliant e-mail message.
Users can select recipients, add textual information and send from this
dialog.
The e-mail dialog also has a self-contained help which can be consulted for
e-mail specific queries.
Page Setup
General:
This option can be used to set-up how the plot will appear on the printed
page prior to using the Print option.
This dialog is primarily used to edit items for inclusion on the plot and to set
the plot size and margins. To set the plot orientation, choose from portrait or
landscape options via the Print Setup option from the File menu. The Page
Setup dialog has three sections:
Paper:
Size: Select to specify the paper size.
Source: Select a tray or manual feed source for paper supply to the
current printer. The default is Automatically Select. The Advanced
button gives users access to a further sub-dialog where current print
settings can be reviewed and Paper Size can be specified from a
drop-down menu.
Orientation: Select to print the plot in either Portrait or Landscape format.
Margins: Select from four options to set the margins on the page.
Printer: Select to choose a specific printer.

1 OVERVIEW
Print
To save the page setup, click OK.
Refer also to the help files for:
Print Graph
Print
General:
This option is used to print the currently displayed plot as a hard copy. Users
can also optionally print out model and line results if these have been selected
in the General Configuration Dialog option.
The Print option brings up a standard Windows Print dialog. Select the target
printer, set the printer Preferences, and proceed. As an alternative to direct
paper output, plots can be saved as Graphics Files - for example, in PDF
format by installing the Adobe PDF Converter in the printer list.
If Page Set-up Definition in the General Configuration option has been

configured to include textual output, the Print option will bring up an
intermediate dialog with a choice of sending the graphic and text to the
printer, or of saving the textual content to a text file (extension .RPT).
As an alternative, to capture the plot for use in a word processor or graphics

package, use the Copy to Clipboard option or the Windows Alt + Print Screen
command, to transfer the plot window to the ClipBoard, where it then
becomes available for pasting into other applications.
Use this dialog to print the currently displayed plot to hard copy or file, along
with any additional information selected under the Page Setup option.
The form of the Print dialog will depend on the printer selected. The main
characteristics are as follows:

OVERVIEW
Print 1
Printer: Select a printer to use. The PanSystem default printer is
highlighted.
Name: Displays the name of the currently selected printer or

application that data will be assigned to. Users can select an
alternative printer or application from the drop-down menu on the
right-hand side of the text field.
The Properties button gives the user access to a further print sub-dialog
where additional Layout and Paper/Quality properties can be specified.
For example:
Orientation: Select from Portrait and two Landscape options

(options are displayed graphically).
Page Order: Set the printing order for multiple documents from
Back to Front or Front to Back.
Pages per Sheet: This option can be used to tile multiple plots on a
single page by using the drop-down menu to specify the number
of plots (pages) required per single sheet (options are displayed
graphically).
Paper Source: Select a tray or manual feed source for paper

supply to the current printer. The default is Automatically Select.
The Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog
where current print settings can be reviewed and Paper Size can
be specified from a drop-down menu.
An Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog

Status: Supplies information on the current printer status (i.e.

operational or off-line).
Type: Supplies technical specification of the current printer.
Where: Supplies location of the current printer.
Comment: Supplies additional system information about the

current printer.

1 OVERVIEW
Exit PanSystem
Print Range:
All: By default, all pages will be printed.
Copies:
Number of copies: Select the number of copies required via the

drop-down menu.
If the file is sent directly to a printer, a box showing the status of the printer
appears on the screen while the plot and/or hard copy is being printed.
If the text file option is selected, a Save As dialog will be displayed with the
option to save a Report file with the default extension (*.RPT).
To print a fuller Report consisting of an input data summary, the results of

several selected plots, and other data, the Print Preview from the Reports
menu should be used.
Exit PanSystem
General:
Use this option to quit PanSystem.
!
If a file is currently open, users will be prompted by a Confirm dialog to Save
the Current Data to File. If the No option is selected, current data will not be
saved.

SECTION II
IMPORT/EXPORT DATA
This section provides information on Importing and Exporting Data in the

PanSystem application.
CHAPTER 2
Import/Export Data ..................................................... 39
CHAPTER 3
Import Data ................................................................. 41
CHAPTER 4
Export Data ................................................................. 83
CHAPTER 5
Managing Views ........................................................... 87
Chapter 2
IMPORT/EXPORT DATA
This chapter contains the following topic:
Import/Export Data View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

2 IMPORT/EXPORT DATA
Import/Export Data View Overview
IMPORT/EXPORT DATA VIEW OVERVIEW

The Import/Export Data view is used for importing and exporting data files.
The Import/Export Data view uses the Office 2007 interface style for accessing
options.
For more information about importing and exporting data, refer to:
Import Data Ribbon Overview

Export Data Ribbon Overview
For information about editing and viewing data, refer to View Ribbon
Overview.

Chapter 3
IMPORT DATA
Import Data Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Import from ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Import from Pan 3.x or Earlier File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Import from Excel (Spreadsheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Import from ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Import from Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Import from DPK/LAS Wireline Formation Tester File . . . . 75
Import from PLAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
AER PRD File Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
AER Report Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

3 IMPORT DATA
Import Data Ribbon Overview
IMPORT DATA RIBBON OVERVIEW

You can load data into the PanSystem application using the following file
types. For more specific details on each item, refer to the following topics:
Import from ASCII File

Import from Pan 3.x or Earlier File
Import from Excel (Spreadsheet)
Import from ODBC
Import from RMS
Import from Clipboard
Import from DPK/LAS Wireline Formation Tester File
Import from PLAS
AER PRD File Import
AER Report Editor Dialog
IMPORT FROM ASCII FILE

General:
This dialog is generated either by the selecting the ASCII option on the Import
data ribbon or by selecting the OK or Cancel button on the Select a File dialog,
and then clicking the Open button on the Open Configuration File dialog.
Up to nine Columns of data can be read in via the ASCII method. Two of these
must contain the Time and Pressure values, which are mandatory for Analysis.
ASCII Style: This sub-dialog allows users to select which Columns of data
they want to import into PanSystem and to define what type of data is present
in each Column.
Select this text to see an example of what the Non-Spreadsheet Style dialog
looks like

Figure 4: Non-Spreadsheet Style Dialog:
The main features of the sub-dialog are described below:
File Name: The Name assigned to the incoming file will be the default
displayed in this File Name field, but if users want to give the file a new
internal working Name, just enter it into this field (i.e. the File Name used
here does not have to be the same as the physical data File Name).
View Data File: Use this option to check the data format in the file. This
sub-dialog remains active behind the Data File display window, so users
may switch freely between the two without having to close down the
display window. This is useful for checking if Header data is present
before using the Append to File option in the Append Files (or Copy and
Paste) dialog.
i
Header lines marked with an asterisk (*), are automatically recognized as
Header information and will be ignored; other lines similarly marked (including
lines of Gauge Data) will also be ignored.

3 IMPORT DATA
Time Column Number: Specify the Column where the Time is recorded.
This is normally recorded in Column 1 by default.
i Ensure that only one Time Column is defined. If the file contains more than
one Time Column, pick only one of them.
Time Format: Select the Time Format from the drop-down menu.
i
It is very important to select the correct Time Format or PanSystem may read
the data from the file incorrectly. A number of different Time Formats are
available:
hours - cumulative decimal Hours.
hhhh:mm: ss - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
If the Hours are in 24-hour clock format and reset to zero at the start of each
i
new Day, check the 24hr. Update checkbox and PanSystem will add 24 hrs. to
the counter each time it resets. If the clock time is cumulative (i.e. increasing
monotonically, with no zero reset), do not enable the 24hr. Update option (i.e.
leave the 24hr. Update checkbox unchecked).
dd: hh:mm: ss - Cumulative days. The Hours should reset to zero at the
start of each new Day. The delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
minutes - decimal minutes.
seconds - decimal seconds.

IMPORT DATA
Import from ASCII File 3
(DATE) hh:mm: ss - This is a Time Column in hh:mm: ss format, associated
with a Date, which appears in a separate Column as in the examples
above. The Hours will be 24-hour clock and will restart at zero each new
Day. Use this option in Fixed Column Width mode when Dates are being
imported.
Select the (DATE) hh:mm: ss Time format if Date information is being read-in;
i
this format is strictly Date-driven and will not increment correctly at midnight if
no Date is imported (i.e. Column is skipped). Using the Optional Start Date
feature in Tab Delimited mode, requires the hhhh:mm: ss option to be used
with the 24hr. Update option enabled, and will not work correctly with this
(DATE) hh:mm: ss Time format.
(DATE) hh:mm: ss:c - the same format as - (DATE) hh:mm: ss, but with
1/10th secs after the last delimiter.
hhhhmmss - the same format as hhhh:mm: ss, but with no delimiter

between Hours, Minutes and Seconds.
i Refer also to comment under hhhh:mm: ss about 24 hr. Update.
ddhhmmss - no delimiter between Days, Hours, Minutes and Seconds.

Cumulative Days, Hours in 24-hr clock format.
hhhh:mm: ss: tt - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The tt
refers to ticks, or 1/ 60th seconds.
i Refer also to comment under hhhh:mm: ss about 24 hr. Update.
dd: hh:mm: ss: tt - as for dd: hh:mm: ss, but with 1/60th secs.

3 IMPORT DATA
hhhh:mm:ss:cc - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The cc

refers to 1/100th seconds.
i Refer also to comment under hhhh:mm:ss about 24 hr. Update.
dd:hh:mm:ss:cc - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/100th secs.
hhhh:mm:ss:c - same as hhhh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
dd:hh:mm:ss:c - same as dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
Column Number: Enter the Column Numbers for each Column of data to be
imported from the selected file. It is not necessary to import every Data
Column in the file. For Analysis, only Time and Pressure are required (plus
the optional Simultaneous Rate), but other Columns can be imported for
editing and display purposes. If a record of the Rate History is being
imported, it will probably be Time and Rate only.
Column Type: Specify the type of data by selecting from the drop-down
menu.
Column Name: Give the Column a working Name (e.g. Upper Gauge or
Pressure #1, etc.). This is the Name that is used to identify the data within
PanSystem.
On completion of the data formatting process, select the Import button to Save
and Import the data and close this sub-dialog. As this sub-dialog closes, the
File Import Status dialog is generated and Data Points are imported.
When all the data has been Imported users will be returned to the Import Data
view.

IMPORT DATA
Import from Pan 3.x or Earlier File 3
IMPORT FROM PAN 3.X OR EARLIER FILE

General:
This option can be used to import data that was prepared using the DOS
PanSystem v1.80 or earlier versions. These files will normally have the
extensions (*.OIL), or (*.GAS) and (*.PRO). Once imported via this option, the
data can be analyzed in the usual way. On completion, users can save the
re-worked imported data as a PanSystem v3 compatible system file (*.PANX),
using the Save As option.
Users can choose the file type they wish to recall and select OK. The Open
dialog is then generated, with the appropriate default file extension
displayed.
Other points to note:
When the file has been opened, users can start to enter, edit or analyze the
data.
The data directory can be pre-set to locate your files via the General
option of the Configuration view.
To enter or edit data use the Data Preparation view.
To analyze the data use the Analysis view.
i
For v1.80 Gas Welltests, the Gas Pseudo-Pressure Tables in the (*.PRO) file
must also be imported. Once loaded into PanSystem, the tables can be saved
as part of the (*.PANX) file and are no longer separate.

3 IMPORT DATA
IMPORT FROM EXCEL (SPREADSHEET)

General:
This dialog is accessed from either the selecting the Excel option on the
Import data ribbon or by selecting the OK or Cancel button on the Select a
File dialog, and then clicking the Open button on the Open Configuration File
dialog. The Gauge Data filename for the file selected in the Open Data Files
dialog is displayed in the window Title Bar with the full file path and default
file extension (*.TPR).
Figure 5: Import Data Files:
A Gauge Data File contains the recorded Gauge Test Data. This will normally
be supplied on disk by the company that carried out the welltest.
Users can select MS EXCEL (*.xls) files from the Files of type: drop-down list
to import Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.

IMPORT DATA
Import from Excel (Spreadsheet) 3
Figure 6: Import Excel files:
Up to 20 Columns of data can be read in. Two of these must contain the Time
and Pressure values, which are mandatory for Analysis.
It is also possible to import Flow Rate data versus Time independently of the
Pressure data, if it exists as a separate record. Cumulative Production data can
be used as an alternative to Flow Rate data. An optional Flow Rate data
Column may also be read in for use in Analysis.
Other Columns of data (e.g. Temperature) will not be used in Analysis but users
may still want to import them into PanSystem for Editing, Reporting, Plotting,
etc. Users may also have another set of Pressure data in the same file, in
which case they will be able to compare two (or more) Gauge records, and
analyze each in turn.
Users must tell PanSystem which type of Data is in which Column before
importing the file for Analysis.
Once the Data has been Imported, additional Columns can be created through
Editing, Smoothing, Copy/Pasting, up to a maximum of 100 Columns per file.
The data in the Gauge Data File must be arranged in Columns separated by
spaces or other valid de-limiters (refer to Importing gauge data using
Space/Tab Delimited modefor details of valid delimiters). Various Import
modes are available depending on the layout of the data.

3 IMPORT DATA
A special Fixed Column Width mode can be used to import Columns containing
missing data (blank entries).
Spreadsheet Style: This option allows users to preview Gauge Data files in
the form of a spreadsheet and select/name the columns to be Imported.
Figure 7: Spreadsheet Style Dialog:
This is a very flexible Import facility capable of handling a wide range of data
formats, including Dates and Columns with missing values, and will also
import File Headers. The main features of the dialog are described below in
terms of a suggested workflow:
File Name: The Gauge Data filename defaults to the file selected in the
Open Data Files dialog. If users wish to give the file a new internal
working name, it can be entered in this field (i.e. the file name used here
for importation purposes does not have to be the same as the original
Gauge Data file name).

IMPORT DATA
Column Name: The name of the column currently selected (i.e.
highlighted) within the display window of this sub-dialog. If the
Automatically Set Name checkbox is checked, the column name is
determined by the type of Gauge selected in the adjacent section of the
sub-dialog. Alternatively, users can uncheck this checkbox and allocate
their own unique column name for the file import (refer also to Gauge
section below).
Number of Lines in Header: If the data file contains Header information, this
can be imported as a separate block of data from the Gauge record. Enter
a value in this field. The lines covered will appear in blue. Adjust the
number if necessary to select the required data for the Header.
i
Header lines marked with an asterisk (*) are automatically recognized as
Header information and will be ignored; other lines similarly marked (including
lines of Gauge Data) will also be ignored.
i
If users are in Space/Tab Delimited mode, they will only see the numerical
content of the Header on screen. However, the full Header will be read in
during the Import process.
i
If the Header lines in the data file have been tagged with an asterisk (*)
character at the beginning, they will be automatically recognized by the
spreadsheet viewer as Header data. In this case, the entire text strings will be
displayed.
Data Column Definition: This section (top right of the sub-dialog), is used
to specify whether the data columns will be Delimited (i.e. by spaces, tabs,
commas, etc.), or will be a Fixed Width. Check either the Space/Tab
Delimited or Fixed Column Widths button as appropriate.
This will affect the organization of the Gauge Data on the screen,
depending on how the selected file is structured. Some file structures
lend themselves to both methods, some do not.
It is always good practice to scroll down through the data to check for any
anomalies and to ascertain whether Space/Tab Delimited or Fixed
Column Widths should be used.

3 IMPORT DATA
Space/Tab Delimited mode:
Figure 8: Importing gauge data using Space/Tab Delimited mode
Importing gauge data using Space/Tab Delimited mode
This is illustrated in the example above. The data are automatically allocated
to columns based on valid Delimiters such as spaces, tabs, commas (,),
semi-colons (;), backward slashes (\) and asterisks (*), but not colons (:),
forward slashes (/) or hyphens (-).
The date, if present, will be seen as a single column. Date formats (DMY,
MDY, etc) can be selected from the Date selection menu.
The Delimited import mode will handle most file formats. It will not handle
columns with missing data (blank entries) correctly if spaces or tabs are used
as delimiters; null entries must be bracketed by two commas or other
delimiter type. Zeroes are recognized as data entries.
Do not use this mode for times which are in 12-hr clock format with am and
pm. Please refer to the section on Fixed Column Width mode for help in
importing this type of time format.
If users select Space/Tab Delimited mode, they should scroll down through the
file to make sure all the data has been correctly grouped before proceeding.
Missing data will cause the column assignments to become jumbled.

IMPORT DATA
Fixed Column Widths Mode:
Figure 9: Section from a sample Gauge Data File containing Dates and
data from two gauges with missing entries
(an ideal candidate for the Fixed Column Widths Import mode)
This mode can only be used if the data columns are truly of a Fixed Width
when viewed in a text editor such as Notepad. The individual columns are
defined using the mouse. The Space/Tab Delimited option (above) will
handle most formats, but this mode will handle missing data (blank entries,
as shown above) provided the columns remain aligned. It should also be
used to import time formats using the 12-hour clock with am and pm (see
example below).
Column markers (i.e. vertical lines) should be moved and/or created using the
mouse as follows to define the distinct Data Columns.
To move an existing Column Boundary, press the keyboard CTRL key and
drag a Column Edge with the left mouse button.
To create a new Column Boundary, press the keyboard CTRL key and click
with the left mouse button to the right of the last character in the Column
and a new Column Boundary will appear.

3 IMPORT DATA
To delete a Column Boundary, press the keyboard CTRL key and

double-click the left mouse button on the Boundary.
Figure 10: Importing Gauge Data Using Fixed Column Width Mode.
Importing gauge data (two gauges) using Fixed Column Width mode
If users wish to read in Dates, the Date format is flexible and will
accommodate any order, any valid delimiter, and the Month as a number or
word (short (Jan) or in full (January)). Choose a separate Column for the Day,
Month and Year. Position the right-hand side of the Column to the right of the
Delimiter. In the example below, the Date format is Day-Month-Year with a
dash as a separator:
e.g. 24-Feb-96 should be divided up as 24-| Feb-| 96|:
Decide which Columns are required for Import and identify the type of data in
i
each Column. It is not necessary to import every data Column in the file. For
Analysis, only Time and Pressure are required, plus optional simultaneous
Rate, but other Columns can be Imported for editing and display. If a record of
the Rate History has been Imported, it will probably be Time and Rate only.
Identifying Columns (Fixed Column Widths and Space/Tab Delimited

Modes):
Choose a Column and select one of the following items from the upper middle
section of the sub-dialog:

IMPORT DATA
Date: The two modes are described as follows:
When using Fixed Column Width mode, a selection field with

drop-down menu is present. Click on one of the Date columns, then click
on the Date button and select Day, Month or Year as appropriate. Repeat
as necessary until the three Date Columns have been defined.
In Space/Tab delimited mode, the date is treated as a single column.

Select the date format from the Date drop-down menu (DMY, MDY, etc)
i Select the (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format if Date information is being read-in

(refer to Time section below).
i Refer below to the note for the hhhh:mm:ss Time format regarding the 24 hr.
Update checkbox.
Time: Select the Column, check the Time button, and select the Time format
from the drop-down menu.
i
Ensure that only one Time Column is defined. If the file contains more than
one Time Column, pick only one of them and Skip the others (as explained
below). A number of different formats are available:
hours - cumulative decimal Hours.
hhhh:mm:ss - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
i
If the Hours are in 24-hour clock format and reset to zero at midnight, leave
the 24hr. Update checked and PanSystem will add 24 hrs. to the counter each
time it resets. If the clock time is cumulative (i.e. increasing monotonically,
with no zero reset), switch off the 24hr. Update option.
dd:hh:mm:ss - Cumulative days. The Hours should reset to zero at the

start of each new Day. The delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
minutes - decimal minutes.
seconds - decimal seconds.

3 IMPORT DATA
(DATE)hh:mm:ss - This is a Time Column in hh:mm:ss format, intended for

use when a Date column is being imported. The Time will be either:
24-hour clock and will restart at zero each new Day, or
12-hour clock with am and pm, restarting at zero at midday and

midnight.
Select this (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format only if Date information is being

read-in; this format is strictly Date-driven and will not increment correctly at
i
midnight if no Date is imported (i.e. Date Column is Skipped). In most
situations, it is equivalent to the hhhh:mm:ss format with 24-hr update.
However, there are exceptions; for example, a data stream where there are no
readings during an entire day will be only correctly parsed by this date-driven
format.
Figure 11: Importing date and 24-hr clock time with Space/Tab Delimited
mode

IMPORT DATA
Figure 12: Importing date and time in 12-hr clock (am/pm) format using
Fixed Column Width mode
(DATE)hh:mm:ss:c - the same format as - (DATE)hh:mm:ss, but with

1/10th secs after the last delimiter.
hhhhmmss - the same format as hhhh:mm:ss, but with no delimiter

between Hours, Minutes and Seconds.
ddhhmmss - no delimiter between Days, Hours, Minutes and Seconds.

Cumulative Days, Hours in 24-hr clock format.
hhhh:mm:ss:tt - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The tt

refers to ticks, or 1/ 60th seconds.
dd:hh:mm:ss:tt - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/60th secs.

3 IMPORT DATA
hhhh:mm:ss:cc - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The cc

refers to 1/100th seconds.
dd:hh:mm:ss:cc - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/100th secs.
hhhh:mm:ss:c - same as hhhh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
dd:hh:mm:ss:c - same as dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the

last delimiter.
HHHH:ss (EUB); this is the Canadian Alberta EUB format for time. A
time of 2:30:15 PM (14:30:15) is represented as 1430:15 in this
format.
Gauge: Select the Column, check the Gauge button, and select the Gauge
Type:
If the Automatically Set Name checkbox is checked in the Column Name

section, the Column Name will change according to the Gauge Type chosen.
If one Pressure Column has been identified and automatically named
Pressure #1 and a second one is then selected, the name Pressure #2 will
automatically appear. If a large number of Pressure Gauge Columns are
present, the system will successively number these Pressure # 1, Pressure #
2, etc. Users can also allocate unique Column Names by unchecking the
Automatically Set Name checkbox (refer also to Column Name section
above).
Skip: If users do not wish to Import a Column, select and highlight the
Column with the left mouse button, then select the Skip button.
TPR Format Template: The Template section is situated at the lower

right-hand corner of the sub-dialog. If other files are to be Imported which
have the same Column characteristics as the initially Imported file,
repetition of the formatting process can be avoided by saving the initial
file format as a Template. Users are prompted to Save a Template when they
select Import.

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
After preparing the initial Import settings as described above, select the
Save Template button. This will generate a Save As dialog box for TPR
Template Files (*.tpt) file type. The default directory is the one nominated
for PanSystem Reports.
Templates can be loaded for use with the Load Template button which
generates a standard Windows Open dialog to locate previously saved
Template Files.
On completion of the data formatting process, select the Import button to

import the data and close this sub-dialog. When all the data has been
Imported, the system will return to the Import Data view.
Alternatively, select the Import and Plot button, to Import the data and close
this sub-dialog to go directly to the Data Edit Plot Overview.
In either case, a File Import Status dialog is generated as this sub-dialog is

closed and data points are Imported.
IMPORT FROM ODBC

ODBC Import
The ODBC import process has been changed to save the engineer from
having to deal with database, tables, fields, relationships and connections.
The new process is now split into two functions, one for IT and one for the
user / engineer.
ODBC Process for IT Overview
The responsibility for managing a database normally resides with the IT

department. PanSystem incorporates the ODBC functionality through a
one-time setup created by IT. The IT will create a data mapping file that
PanSystem will use to enable the engineer to import the data.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
The data mapping file is an XML file that contains the database connection,
data table and data relationships used to select and filter the data to import.
The data mapping file also contains, for a limited time, an encrypted user ID
and password that allows security access to the database. Without going into
the details the first time the file is used the password and ID is transferred to a
local database and is removed from the XML file. This way the engineers can
exchange XML files without risk of information security issues.
The data mapping file will also contain up to five levels of filters that can be
used in the design of the data import. The filters are Company, Field, Group,
Well, and Wellbore. Only one filter Well is always mandatory, the others are
optional. This is done for data consistency during the import. After the filters
are configured the user can then configure the data table which is also
mandatory.
ODBC Process for IT in Detail Level
An ODBC IT Setup button has been added to PanSystem General

Configuration dialog box.

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
Figure 13: General Configuration Dialog
When the ODBC IT Setup button is clicked the following Database Mapping
Setup dialog box is displayed. The dialog box allows the IT user to easily
maintain and create new data mapping files on demand. As shown below,
each mapping file includes a detailed description that engineers and IT can
use to determine which mapping file to select for import.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
Figure 14: Database Mapping Setup Dialog
When New is clicked, the following Data Mapping Utility dialog box is
presented. The user can enter a mapping name and description. The user can
enter a connection string or select from a system DSN. Once a connection is
made the categories can be configured based on the database connection. The
categories are configured by clicking on the appropriate setup button.
Another option is to use configurations from existing data mapping files. By
clicking Load from other mapping, the categories will be copied from
another mapping.

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
Figure 15: Data Mapping Utility Dialog
The setup is similar for each category. All fields must be completed as shown
in the following Company Setup dialog box to save the configuration. The
information in the Alias field is used as a label for the user / engineer dialog
screen for that category name (see Figure 21). The Schema, if one is present, is
used to filter off tables that are not necessary in this configuration. There are
slight differences in the first selected category and Wellbore. The first selected
category will not show any fields from the previous category.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
Figure 16: Company Setup Dialog
You can see from the next Field Setup dialog box an additional field named,
Company ID, which makes a link or relationship between the two tables.
Figure 17: Field Setup Dialog
To see the relationship in another way, a MS-Access view would look like the
following:

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
Figure 18: Relationships MS-Access View
The only other configuration dialog which is slightly different is for the
Wellbore as shown in the following Wellbore Setup dialog box. Because of
the type of data, there is no Name field shown.
Figure 19: Wellbore Setup Dialog
The final step to creating a data mapping file is to configure the data table (see
the following Data Table Setup dialog box). The data table must have a
Date/Time field. Since Well is a mandatory configuration, the Well ID field
must also be in the data table. The Depth ID is not mandatory and can be
used if it is present. If the Depth configuration is not used, it will not be
shown here. Add the data columns to import and select the proper units.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
Figure 20: Data Table Setup Dialog
ODBC Process for Users / Engineers Overview
The user can start the import process from the Select a File dialog by selecting
the OK or Cancel button.
The following Import Selection dialog box is presented to the user for the data
import. A list at the top shows the available data mapping files previously
setup by IT. As a selection is changed, the user is changing database
connections, tables, and fields without any direct interaction. A description
for the selected mapping file is shown in the panel directly beneath the list.
Well category does not have an option for Do not filter. It will start off with
the first well in the list. Select the date options below to control how much
data to import. Clicking Preview will allow you to see a graphic chart for the
selected time period. Click Import to start the data import into the
PanSystem.

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
Figure 21: Import Selection Dialog
The following dialog is accessed from the Import data ribbon by clicking the
RMS option.
i Note: If this dialog will not open make sure your .Net windows components are
fully updated.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
Figure 22: Data Source Selection Dialog
i If the desired database does not appear in the list, users should consult their IT
Department for assistance.
The dialog contains five main sections, each described below:
Data Source List: Select a Data Source from the menu.
Optionally, if you dont have a Data Source in the menu, click the Use
Connection String checkbox to manually specify the data source.
Use the following guidelines to manually specify data sources:
Database Connection String
Driver={Microsoft ODBC for

Oracle Oracle};Server=ORACLE8i7;
UID=odbcuser;PWD=odbc$5xr
Driver={Microsoft Access Driver (*. mdb)};

Access
DBQ=c:\ Northwind.mdb

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
Database Connection String
Driver={Microsoft Excel Driver (*. xls)};

Excel
DBQ=c:\bin\book1.xls
Driver={Microsoft Text Driver (*. txt; *. csv)};

Text
DBQ=c:\
" DRIVER={SQL Server};

SERVER=MyServer;
SQL Server
UID=sa;PWD=Qvr&77xk;
DATABASE=northwind;"
Database Login: Enter the user's login information, if necessary.
Password: Enter the user's password, if necessary.
The user should then select a RMS-Weatherford ODBC-type database from

the drop-down menu.
i If the database is not an RMS database, the user can select Standard ODBC
from the drop-down menu.
Once the selections have been made, select Connect to import the data.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
RMS Database Import:
Figure 23: RMS Current Database Import Sub-Dialog
Sub-dialog shown if RMS - ODBC was selected in the Import from ODBC
Dialog.
A list of well names will be shown along with each sensor, depth, type and
available dates to import. The user only needs to check the sensor they wish
to import and then click Import.

IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC 3
Figure 24: Import-ODBC-Next Sub Dialog
Sub-dialog shown after the sensors are selected and the dates of import are
chosen. The selectable columns and radio buttons are available only for RMS
import. For ODBC import, all columns are pre-defined and set appropriately.
Select each column and use the radio buttons and drop-down menus to set
the data types. When all the columns have been satisfactorily edited, select
Import to accept the settings and complete the import process.
To save the current selections as a template file, click Save template. Enter a
name for the template file (of type *. dbt), and click Save. The template then
can be loaded directly from the main Import from ODBC dialog by selecting
Load Template.
ODBC Real Time
The ODBC import feature has been extended to allow users to collect data in a
real time fashion after a successful ODBC import has been completed. This
process is highly complex and has been simplified through the following
dialogs to keep the user away from the complexities.
To start or stop the real time feed, select Start ODBC Real Time or Stop
ODBC Real Time located in the General Configuration dialog box as shown
below.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from ODBC
Figure 25: General Configuration Real Time Dialog Box
When Start ODBC Real Time is selected, the following dialog will allow the
user to choose an update frequency and a maximum number of records
during each update.
Please note that if your ODBC connection is slow, you may experience a
program hang up. This is based on your connection and database speed. If
this happens, please select a slower frequency to correct the problem. You can
choose from a range of update frequencies. The fastest frequency is three
updates per minute and the slowest is once every four hours. During each
update, you can also choose from a range of maximum records (500 - 20,000).

IMPORT DATA
Import from Clipboard 3
Figure 26: Real Time ODBC Update Dialog
ODBC Support
For more information about ODBC Import support, see ODBC Import
Support Documentation.
IMPORT FROM CLIPBOARD

General:
This sub-dialog is generated either by selecting the Clipboard option on the

Import data ribbon or by selecting the OK or Cancel button on the Select a File
dialog. View Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog. Before selecting this
option, select the columns of data that you wish to import from an external
application (Notepad, Excel, etc.), and copy them to the Clipboard.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from Clipboard
Figure 27: Import from Clipboard Dialog
Import Data Files dialog containing data from the Clipboard.
Once the data is pasted into the dialog from the clipboard, the functionality
follows the standard Import from Excel (Spreadsheet) dialog. This dialog
functions in the same way whether the data was pasted from the clipboard or
imported from another file type.
The Import from Excel (Spreadsheet) dialog comprises several sections.

Select each column and use the radio buttons and drop-down menus to set
the data types. When all the columns have been satisfactorily edited, select
the Import button to accept the settings and complete the import process.

IMPORT DATA
Import from DPK/LAS Wireline Formation Tester File 3
IMPORT FROM DPK/LAS WIRELINE

FORMATION TESTER FILE
General:
This sub-dialog is generated either by the selecting the DPK/LAS option on

the Import data ribbon or by selecting the OK or Cancel button on the Select a
File dialog. It is based on a standard Windows Open dialog and is used to
import data (curves) from a DPK or LAS file into PanSystem.
Users can select from any of the data curves present, but many of will not be
relevant to pressure transient analysis and can be skipped. Elapsed time is
always imported and is not a user option. The minimum requirement is a
pressure curve. Flowrate data would normally also be imported, either as a
direct measurement, or in the form of piston swept volume (from which
flowrate will be calculated). Temperature is optional.
There is no limit to the number of data points (i.e. lines of data) that can be
imported, providing there is enough disk space.
Formation tester files from one or many tests can be saved to one system file
(.PAN). After import and editing, the data can, if desired, be exported in
ASCII format (*.TPR).
The Open dialog is based on a standard Windows dialog used for file
opening. The main features of the dialog are described below:
Look In: The current data folder being used to locate Gauge Data files (e.g.
C:\...\Application Data \Weatherford\Pansystem 4.0\Data). If data files
have been stored elsewhere on the network or user's system, use the
drop-down menu to browse for the correct data folder. Available files are
displayed in the list field below.
File Name: Select the Formation Tester Data file that data is to be imported
from by highlighting the required file in the list field with a left
mouse-click.

3 IMPORT DATA
Import from PLAS
Files of Type: This field displays the file extension for Formation Tester
Data Files. The default file extensions are .LAS and . DPK. You van view
both types, or select one or the other from the drop-down menu.
IMPORT FROM PLAS

General:
This sub-dialog is generated either by the selecting the PLAS option on the
Import data ribbon or by selecting the OK or Cancel button on the Select a File
dialog. It is based on a standard Windows Open dialog and is used to import
data (curves) from a PLAS file into PanSystem.
Users can select from any of the data curves present, but many of will not be
relevant to pressure transient analysis and can be skipped. Elapsed time is
always imported and is not a user option. The minimum requirement is a
pressure curve. Flowrate data would normally also be imported, either as a
direct measurement, or in the form of piston swept volume (from which
flowrate will be calculated). Temperature is optional.
There is no limit to the number of data points (i.e. lines of data) that can be
imported, providing there is enough disk space.
Formation tester files from one or many tests can be saved to one system file
(.PAN). After import and editing, the data can, if desired, be exported in
ASCII format (*.TPR).
The Open dialog is based on a standard Windows dialog used for file
opening. The main features of the dialog are described below:
Look In: The current data folder being used to locate Gauge Data files (e.g.
C:\...\Application Data \Weatherford\PanSystem\Data). If data files have
been stored elsewhere on the network or user's system, use the
drop-down menu to browse for the correct data folder. Available files are
displayed in the list field below.
File Name: Select the Formation Tester Data file that data is to be imported
from by highlighting the required file in the list field with a left
mouse-click.

IMPORT DATA
AER PRD File Import 3
Files of Type: This field displays the file extension for Formation Tester
Data Files. The default file extension is .PLAS.
AER PRD FILE IMPORT

General:
This sub-dialog is generated from the Select a File dialog by selecting the OK
or Cancel button. This sub-dialog allows users to import rate data information
in PRD.PAS files, a file format often required by the Energy Resources
Conservation Board (AER) for reporting well data.
If necessary, users can select up to 10 PRD.PAS files, from which PanSystem

will extract the necessary data, including the Timestamp, Gas Rate, Oil Rate,
Condensate Rate and Water Rate. PanSystem will then sort this data by the
Timestamp and write a *. CSV (comma-separated values) file with a *.TPR
extension in a location chosen by the user. The user can then import this
*.TPR file quickly to speed their Analysis.
The main features of the AER PRD File Import sub-dialog are described below:
Click the Add button to open another Open file dialog, from which users can
choose their PRD.PAS formatted file. The default file type is Canadian AER
files (*.PAS). Select a PRD.PAS file, and click Open. The selected file, and its
full path, will be added to the list box at the top of the AER PRD File Import
sub-dialog. Repeat this process as necessary to add additional files containing
Production Data for the well.
Once the file(s) have been added to the list, the user can specify the location of
the resulting concatenated file either by typing in the edit box directly above
the Add button or by clicking the Browse button to the right of the edit box.
Clicking Browse will create a Save File Dialog, in which the user may choose
the path and filename of the resulting file.

3 IMPORT DATA
This is a *. CSV file (Comma Separated Values) and its data is not documented
in the file itself. The order of the data is: Timestamp, Gas Rate, Oil Rate,
Condensate Rate, Water Rate.
i If the user does not specify a file to be created and presses OK, the Save File
dialog will be opened.
A new *.TPR file is created and appears in the original Open File Dialog. Select
the recently created *.TPR file to import, and click OK. The user can then
specify the data type for each column and the units through the Import from
Excel (Spreadsheet) sub-dialog to complete the import process.
It is recommended that users save the initial file format as a Template if there
will be much PRD data. Templates allow users to avoid repetition of the
formatting process. See TPR Format Template (in Import from Excel
(Spreadsheet)) for information on saving and loading Templates.
AER REPORT EDITOR DIALOG

General:
This tabbed dialog is generated by selecting the AER option from the Import
data ribbon option. This menu option is available for the import of well test
data and reports in the Pressure ASCII Standard (PAS) format defined by the
Energy Resources Conservation Board (AER) of Canada in their Draft Guide
52 Electronic Capture of Well Test Data dated June 1998 and revised
January 1999.
Submission of test data in (PAS) format became mandatory on 1-March-1999.
!
Users should refer to Section 16 of Guide 52 (January 1999) and ensure that
they meet the AER system and security requirements before submitting (PAS)
files to them for certification. Currently, PanSystem uses version 4.0 of the
PAS format.

IMPORT DATA
AER Report Editor Dialog 3
The tabbed pages of the AER Report Editor import facility have been arranged
in the order they appear in the PAS file:
Version
Well Information
Test Data
AOF/IPR Results Summary
Pressure Results Summary
Analysis Input Parameters
Gauge 1, 2, 3

3 IMPORT DATA

Chapter 4
EXPORT DATA
Export Data Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Export to ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Export to Type-Curve File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

4 EXPORT DATA
Export Data Ribbon Overview
EXPORT DATA RIBBON OVERVIEW

You can import data using the following files and locations. For more specific
details on each item, refer to the following topics:
Export to ASCII File

Export to Type-Curve File
EXPORT TO ASCII FILE

General:
This dialog is accessed by selecting a data file in the Workspace, and then
selecting the ASCII option from the Export data ribbon. This option can be
used at any time to export selected columns of data to a new Gauge Data file
(ASCII). Use this facility when Gauge Data has been edited and it is desirable
to save as a separate file. It can also be used to save selected columns of data
from a multi-column file to a smaller file.
i
Only the sampled (or re-sampled) gauge data are saved. To save any
supporting fluid and reservoir parameters with gauge data, users are advised
to save to the system file (*.PANX), using the Save or Save As commands.
The Export Data Files dialog is comprised of three sections. Use this option to
export, or save, selected columns of data to a new Gauge Data file. The main
features of the dialog are described below:
Column numbers to write to: This section contains the data columns in the
selected file. You can organize the exported data in any column order. If
users do not wish to export a particular data column from the original
file, select the drop-down menu on the right-hand side of the data entry
field and select the Not Used option.
Data file to export: Select the Gauge Data file for export by using the
drop-down menu.

EXPORT DATA
Export to Type-Curve File 4
Time format to export: Select the time format to be used by using the
drop-down menu.
Column Delimiter: Select the delimiter for the columns of data to be

exported by selecting the relevant button (i.e. choice of space delimited,
comma delimited or tab delimited).
Option: Activate the Include Header Info checkbox to include header

information.
Select the OK button, to accept the settings and export the data.
EXPORT TO TYPE-CURVE FILE

General:
This dialog is accessed by selecting a data file in the Workspace, and then
selecting the Type Curve option from the Export data ribbon.
i This option is only enabled on the Log-Log Plot.
Use the Export TC facility to save data in Dimensionless Type-Curve Format.

This would normally only be of interest if data has been generated using
Advanced Simulation and the Results are to be stored in Dimensionless form for
future Type-Curve Matching against real data. The User Selected Type-Curve
option on the Select Type-Curve Match dialog allows users to load their
own Type Curves.
The facility could also be used as a means of comparing one data set (saved in
Dimensionless form) with others.
The form of Type-Curve that can be saved depends on the Reservoir Flow Model
selected. Different Reservoir Flow Models require different definitions of the
Dimensionless Time (Td) function, and the files are given different file
extensions to distinguish them. Each extension corresponds to a different
Dimensionless Time-Axis formulation.

4 EXPORT DATA
Export to Type-Curve File
The dialog is comprised of a single data entry section (i.e. Type-Curve Type),
and two function buttons, described as follows:
The (*.TCH) file extension corresponds to the Wellbore Storage Analysis

format (Pd vs Td/Cd).
The (*.TCB) file extension corresponds to the Bounded Reservoir Analysis

format (Pd vs Td/Ld2). This format is available for all Flow Models, any
others are Flow Model specific.
The (*.TCX) file extension corresponds to the special (Pd versus Td) format
used by Advanced Simulation. It is only available for the Radial
Homogeneous Flow Model. This enables users to generate their own (Pd
versus Td) functions and use them for response simulation.
When the appropriate file type is chosen and OK is selected, a standard

Windows Save As dialog is generated.
Depending on the Type-Curve Type, users may be prompted to Enter a Model

Parameter value needed in the computation of the Dimensionless Times. For the
Bounded Reservoir (*.TCB) Type-Curve, this will be the Distance to the Nearest
Boundary (L), required for calculating (Td/Ld2).
Users may also be prompted for a User Defined Curve Label (to identify the
Type-Curve during Matching). Enter up to 15 alpha-numeric characters or
leave blank as required.

Chapter 5
MANAGING VIEWS
View Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Overlay Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overlay Pressure Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Mark Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Marker Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Show/Hide Marker Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Delete Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tile Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tile Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cascade Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5 MANAGING VIEWS
View Ribbon Overview
VIEW RIBBON OVERVIEW

The following options on the View ribbon are used to manage and edit
plotting and display parameters for the current analysis.
Overlay
Overlay Pressure - Overlay an additional pressure record in

conjunction with pressure from a second gauge run on the same test.
Markers:
Mark Points - Mark currently selected points with a number and

text string.
Marker Text - Add text to the currently marked points, edit existing
text, delete a marker.
Show/Hide Marker Text - Turn the display of the marker text on or

off.
Delete Marker - Delete currently selected marker and text.
Windows:
If you want to view more than one window at a time while working with
the PanSystem application, you can tile the window using one of the
following options.
Tile Vertical
Tile Horizontal
Cascade Windows

MANAGING VIEWS
Overlay Pressure 5
OVERLAY PRESSURE
Overlay Pressure Dialog
General:
This option is used to overlay an additional pressure record in conjunction

with the currently displayed pressure being analyzed (e.g. pressure from a
second gauge run on the same test).
i
This Overlay Pressure option is available on all analysis plots, but the
additional pressure data must be a column of data that is already present in
the current Master Data File, otherwise users will receive the error message -
"There are no Pressure Columns to Overlay".
Within the Data files/columns list area, select the pressure/s that is/are to be
overlaid. This list area contains the names of any other pressure data
column/s present in the current Master Data File.
An additional data field entitled P0 for Overlaid Pressure (i.e. the pressure at
the start of the test period) is activated for plots that have p, p2 or m(p) on
the Y-axis (e.g. Log-Log Plot), because this important pressure obviously
affects the Y-axis values. The pressure value corresponding to T0 will be read
automatically from the selected data column. If there is no value exactly at
T0, the preceding data point will be selected if there is one. Change the value
in the edit box if required. To reset to the default value, select the pressure
name in the list box and it will be reset to the default value each time the
dialog is opened. Users have a choice of up to five data columns for
overlaying.
To remove pressure overlays, right-click the Data Edit file in the Overlays area
of the Workspace, and then select Delete Overlay.
i If there are no other pressure datasets in the current Master data file/columns
selected for analysis, no pressure column names will be listed.

5 MANAGING VIEWS
Overlay Pressure Dialog
Copying Data into the Master File:
If an additional gauge pressure exists within the (*.PANX) file, but is not
listed when the Overlay Pressure option is selected, this is because it is not part
of the current Master Data File. Gauge pressure data can be copied into the
Master Data File through the following process:
1. From the Data Preparation view, select the Gauge Data ribbon to open a Gauge
Data Preparation dialog.
2. Select the required file from the Data Files/Column List section of the Gauge
Data Preparation dialog, then select the Add to List button to make the file
appear in the List to Plot section of the dialog. Ensure the master pressure file
is also included in the List to Plot section.
3. Select the Plot button to generate a Data Edit plot in the viewer.
4. Select the Copy and Resample to a New Column button. The plotted
column of the source data file is listed on the left, in the Copy from Column
field. Type a name for the new data column to be created in the master file, in
the Paste into Column field (users should ensure that they paste into the Master
Data File), then OK from dialog. The Master Data File now contains the
additional data and the pressure column/s are now ready to be overlain.
5. Select Analysis/Plot from the main menu and follow the procedure for the Edit
Overlay Pressure Dialog outlined earlier.
Data Importation:
Where data has not already been imported, the following procedure applies:
1. As before, select the Data Preparation /Gauge Data menu option to open a
Gauge Data Preparation dialog.
2. Additional gauge pressure data can be imported in via the Import button from
the Data File section located in the lower left-hand side of the dialog. This
generates an Open sub-dialog from which gauge files (*.TPR), can be selected
and imported in Spreadsheet Style (refer to the Gauge Data Open File dialog for
additional information on this method of gauge data importation).
Alternatively, use the Append button in the Gauge Data Preparation dialog, to
append to the designated Master Data File (refer to Gauge Data Preparation for
details of this process).
3. Select and import the pressure data which should now appear within the
Data Files/Column List section of the Gauge Data Preparation dialog.
4. Perform steps 2 to 5 from Copying Data into the Master File described in the
previous section.
Overlay Plots from Different Files:

MANAGING VIEWS
Overlay Pressure Dialog 5
To overlay plots from different files, open the files and prepare the plot (e.g.,
Log-Log) in each file that you want to overlay.
Starting with one of the files, right-click on the test period (e.g., TP4) under
the chosen plot type in the tree, and select Overlay/New.
A new plot name (e.g., Log-Log1) will appear at the bottom of the Navigation
Pane in a new panel called Overlays, and the plot will be displayed.
Now right-click on the test period to be overlaid in the second file, and then
select Overlay/Log-Log1. The second plot will be overlaid on the first. This can
be repeated for any number of files.
It is not possible to run Quick Match directly on the overlay. But, if you run,
or rerun, Quick Match on any of the base plots, the overlay plot will be
updated.
Note that you must delete any overlays before you can remove a file from the
Workspace. The overlay or overlays cannot be saved in the file.
Overlay Test Periods on the Same Plot:
To overlay two or more test periods on the same plot type, select the test
periods in the ruler bar of the Test Overview plot using the left-click + {Ctrl}
key. Then select the plot type in the ribbon bar.
The y-axis of the plot is rate-normalized, so it is possible to compare test

periods with different flowrates, drawdown and buildup. On the Log-Log
plot, the derivatives are computed using superposition (equivalent time), but
the x-axis can be plotted as equivalent or elapsed time.

5 MANAGING VIEWS
Markers
MARKERS
Mark Points
General:
This option allows users to identify selected events on plots generated from
the Data Preparation and Analysis views of PanSystem by numbering selected
data points. Textual identification can also be applied to each mark and
displayed on the plot. Up to 50 marks and text can be applied to each plot
and subsequently edited within this dialog. The marks and text are carried
through to all other plots and saved with the *.PANX data file. The font used
for the marker text is the same as the one selected for the legend.
Users should first select a data point or series of points from the plot by left
mouse-clicking over the required point/s. A small arrow will appear around
the selected point/s. Select Mark Points from the View ribbon to open the Edit
Marker Text dialog and the currently selected data points will be numbered in
order of increasing time, and listed in the Marker Text List section of the
dialog.
To append text to a number, select and highlight the required number in the
Marker Text List section and type appropriate identification text into the
Marker Text section of the dialog. The text will subsequently appear beside
the point in the Marker Text List and on the plot when the OK button is
selected to close the dialog.
To remove points that are no longer required, select and highlight the points
in the Marker Text List section and then select the Delete button.
Marker Text
General:
This option allows users to edit existing text for markers that have already
been placed. Select this option to generate an Edit Marker Text dialog box.
To place new markers and add text, use the Mark Points option.

MANAGING VIEWS
Show/Hide Marker Text 5
Users should first select a data point or series of points from the plot by left
mouse-clicking over the required point/s. A small arrow will appear around
the selected point/s. Select Mark Points from the View ribbon to open the
Edit Marker Text dialog and the currently selected data points will be
numbered in order of increasing time, and listed in the Marker Text List
section of the dialog.
To append text to a number or edit existing text, select and highlight the
required number in the Marker Text List section and either type text into or
edit text within the Marker Text section of the dialog. The text will
subsequently appear beside the point in the Marker Text List and on the plot
when the OK button is selected to close the dialog.
To remove points that are no longer required, select and highlight the points
in the Marker Text List section and then select the Delete button.
Show/Hide Marker Text

General:
This menu check option is used to show or hide the marker text displayed on
the plot. The marker numbers will still be displayed when the text is hidden.
If the marker text display is switched on, the Hide Marker Text option is
available on the View ribbon (The text is still retained in the Edit Marker Text
dialog, and can be re-displayed by switching the Show Marker Text option on).
When switched off, the Show Marker Text option is available on the View
ribbon.
To modify or edit marker text, use the Mark Points or Marker Text
options from the View ribbon.
Delete Marker
General:
This option is used to delete one or more marked points and any associated
text.
Using the left mouse-button, select and highlight the point marker/s to be
cleared (a small arrow will appear around the point), then select the Delete
Marker option from the View ribbon.

5 MANAGING VIEWS
Windows
The selected marks and text will disappear from the plot and any remaining
markers will be re-numbered accordingly.
The data points themselves will not be deleted!
This process can also be carried out in the Edit Marker Text dialog.
WINDOWS
Tile Vertical
Functionality:
The Tile Vertical option displays open data files in windows that are stacked
one above the other.
Tile Horizontal
Functionality:
The Tile Horizontal option displays open data files in windows that are
stacked side by side.
Cascade Windows
Functionality:
The Tile Horizontal option displays open data files in windows that are
stacked descending from the upper-left to the lower-right of the screen.

SECTION III
DATA PREPARATION
This section provides information on Data Preparation within the

PanSystem application
CHAPTER 6
Data Preparation ......................................................... 97
CHAPTER 7
Test Type ..................................................................... 99
CHAPTER 8
Gauge Data ............................................................... 103
CHAPTER 9
Rate Schedule ............................................................ 131
CHAPTER 10
Processing ................................................................. 155
CHAPTER 11
Tidal Filtering ............................................................ 249

CHAPTER 12
Test Design ............................................................... 267
CHAPTER 13
Master Data .............................................................. 277
CHAPTER 14
Well Reservoir and Fluid Description ......................... 279
Chapter 6
DATA PREPARATION
Data Preparation View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

6 DATA PREPARATION
DATA PREPARATION VIEW OVERVIEW

The following ribbons are used for Data Preparation prior to performing an
analysis (i.e. data entry, import, export, editing, copy and paste). For more
Test Type
Gauge Data
Rate Schedule
Processing
Tidal Filtering
Test Design
Master Data
Well Reservoir and Fluid Description
For information about editing and viewing data, click View Ribbon
Overview.

Chapter 7
TEST TYPE
Test Period Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

7 TEST TYPE
Test Period Classification
TEST PERIOD CLASSIFICATION

General:
Test Periods are time intervals, spanning one or several Flow Periods, on which
analysis will be performed. They are marked on the Data Edit plot as tick
marks along the upper half of the Ruler Bar and can be edited on the plot.
Each Flow Period defined in the Data Preparation view automatically becomes
a Test Period in the Analysis view, unless several Flow Periods are grouped
into a single Test Period.
Select with a single left mouse-click on the Ruler Bar. Edit by applying a
double left mouse-click to generate this Test Period Classification dialog (i.e.
only necessary for Slug Tests and Interference Tests).
In PanSystem, Test Periods are classified as:
Normal Test(default): This is simply a Test which is not an Interference or

Slug Test. It includes conventional Drawdowns, Build-Ups, Injection and
Fall-Off Tests involving flow at surface.
Slug Test: This category includes Wellbore Fill-Up and Leak-Off Tests with
no flow at surface and the Well open at surface. Slug Tests can be
analyzed using the Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Slug Test Type-Curves
(Reference 40) or the Pressure Integral Method of Peres, Onur and Reynolds
(Reference 96) if this Test Type is selected.
i
When this Test Type is selected, the lower half of this dialog (i.e. Slug Test
Analysis Parameters), is enabled for additional data entry. Also refer to Slug
Test Analysis Workflow for more details on setting-up this type of Analysis.
i Implementation of the Pressure Integral Method was sponsored by Petrobras.

TEST TYPE
Test Period Classification 7
Interference Test: This Test applies to the Pressure Response in a Shut-In
Well located some distance from a Well producing at a constant Surface
Rate. Users will be able to access the Interference Test (Exponential Integral)
Type-Curve if this Test Type is selected.
i
For an Interference Test, it is also necessary to initialize the Inter-Well Distance
in the Well Parameters dialog under Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical).
Additional Data Entry Requirements for Slug Tests:
When a Slug Test is selected in the upper half of the dialog, the Slug Test
Analysis Parameters section is enabled to enter the following data:
Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure: This is the wellbore pressure to

which the sandface is subjected at the instant that flow is initiated. It
usually corresponds to the column or cushion of liquid in the tubing,
and it determines the initial underbalance or overbalance (Player - Pcushion).
This is required to compute the Y-axis pressure functions used in the
type-curve and pressure integral methods.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient: This is a mandatory input. For a Slug Test,

the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) is given by:
where:
d = Pipe Inside Diameter or ID (inches)
= Wellbore Fluid Density (gm/cm3)

= Average Angle of Pipe Deviation (degrees) over the Fill-Up (or Leak-Off)
Interval (i.e. over the Length of Tubing along which the liquid movement
occurs).
i These parameters are all assumed to be constant for the duration of the Slug
Test.
i
If a value for the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) has already been entered in
the Wellbore Storage Model Parameters sub-dialog, it will appear in this dialog
by default.

7 TEST TYPE
Test Period Classification
For Two-Phase (Oil/Water) Flow, the Wellbore Fluid (Mixture) Density is

defined as:
where:
fw = In-Situ Water-Cut
o and w = In-Situ Phase Densities for Oil and Water respectively
i This represents the Total (Two-Phase) Storage Coefficient.
Estimated Layer Pressure: Enter a value for Estimated Layer Pressure.

This is also required to compute the Y-axis Pressure Functions used in the
Type-Curve and Pressure Integral Methods. Analysis may indicate that this
estimate needs to be revised.
i If a value for the Layer Pressure has already been entered in the Layer
Parameters dialog, it will appear in this dialog by default.
Use Pressure Integral Method: This checkbox should be left unchecked

to use the classical Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Slug Test Type-Curves
(Reference 40) for Slug Test Analysis. Proceed to the Type-Curve section in
Analysis.
i Also refer to Slug Test Analysis Workflow for more details on setting-up this
type of Analysis.
This checkbox should be checked to use the Pressure Integral Method of Peres,
Onur and Reynolds (Reference 96). Proceed to the Diagnostic Plots in Analysis.
i Also refer to Slug Test Analysis Workflow for more details on setting-up this
type of Analysis.

Chapter 8
GAUGE DATA
Gauge Data Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Enter New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Edit Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Deleting Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Going to a Specific Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Clearing Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Finding a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Inserting Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Editing Function Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Editing a Single Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Editing the Time Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Append Files (or Copy and Paste) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
THP to BHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Difference Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Copy, Resample and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Copy and Resample to a New Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

8 GAUGE DATA
Gauge Data Overview
GAUGE DATA OVERVIEW

General:
This option is accessed by clicking Data Preparation in the Navigation pane,

and then clicking the Gauge data ribbon. It allows you to import and prepare
Gauge data for Analysis, Simulation and Test Design. For a description of any of
the terms used here, refer to the Glossary.
Some of the options available depend on the fluid type selected in the Well
i
Reservoir & Fluid Description Analytical Model or Numerical Material
Properties Tabbed Dialog. You should ensure that if they have Gas Well
Gauge Data to prepare, you must first change the Fluid Type from the default
Oil option.
Stages for Gauge Data Preparation:
The raw Gauge data files are ASCII files which contain the Time (T), Pressure
(P) and (optionally) Rate (Q) and Cumulative Production (Np/Gp) data used to
perform the analyses. Files may contain other data, including additional
Pressure records, but only the Time, Pressure and Rate data are used in
analyses. It is also possible to import other Columns of data for editing,
plotting and inclusion in reports. The suggested stages for setting up
analyses include:
Import Columns of data from raw Gauge data file/s into PanSystem.
Append data if acquired as a series of sequential files.
Quality-control the raw data.
Edit Gauge Data - with shifts, copy and paste, data resampling,
smoothing.
Identify and enter flow Rate Changes within the test
Optionally, export edited Columns of Gauge Data to an ASCII file.
Select the Gauge Data file or data Column required for analysis (if several
have been imported).
Apply Tidal Corrections.

GAUGE DATA
Gauge Data Overview 8
At the end of gauge data preparation, you can begin to analyze any one of the
data sets by selecting it as the Master Data file. Any other Gauge data file read
in can be analyzed by simply selecting it as the Master Data file. All the
imported data can be stored in the *.PANX system file, along with supporting
information about the Well, Fluids and Reservoir.
There are several types of data used in PanSystem which are referred to
throughout the program. It is essential to know about this data in order to
understand how the program works:
Well - Create from the Well Control section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description Dialog.
Data Files - Import, Export, Edit, Delete and Plot via this dialog.
System Data File - New, Open, Save, Save As and Import V-1.80 files via the
main File Management menu.
Master Data File - Select via the Master Data dialog.
Master Pressure and Rate Columns - Select via this dialog.
Rate Changes - Enter/Edit in tabular form via the Edit Rate Changes dialog.
Create or edit on the plot using the relevant plot tool options from the
Rate changes ribbon.
Flow Periods - Can be Grouped and Ungrouped on the plot.
Test Periods - Can be edited on the plot using the Ruler Bar by
double-clicking on the Test Periods with the left mouse button (i.e. top half
of Ruler Bar).
Rate Column (optional) - Edit contents via the Create Rate Column
Dialog. A rate column can be created using the Create Rate Column
button on the Rate changes view.

8 GAUGE DATA
Gauge Data Overview
Figure 28: Gauge Data Ribbon
The ribbon contains nine options, each described below:
Enter New Data - Used to specify the format of a new Gauge data file to
be entered manually (not imported).
Edit Data - Used to edit Columns of Gauge data. Enter, edit and view
selected Columns of Gauge data files in spreadsheet format. At least one
Column must be selected in the Data File/Column List section before this
button is selected.
Append Data Files: This button can be used to append data from a selected
file to the currently selected Master Data File. Only the master file and the
file to be appended should be listed in the Selected Items box.
i Only two selected files at a time can be handled by this facility and one of
these must be the Master Data File.
If the selected Master Data File contains a Column that is not present in
the selected file to Append, the appended section will contain zeros
for that Column.
If the file to Append contains a Column that is not present in the Master
Data File, no data from that particular Column will be appended (i.e.
the Master Data File determines which Columns will be used).
In the event of a Time overlap (i.e. the second Gauge starts before the
first Gauge (Master) ends), the overlap section in the Master Data File is
replaced by the section from the appended file.

GAUGE DATA
Enter New Data 8
When the button is selected, the Append Files (or Copy and Paste)
sub-dialog is generated. Users can either accept or adjust the Column
mapping as required, then select the OK button to close the sub-dialog and
perform the Append.
THP to BHP - Used to convert a THFP versus Time record to a BHFP

versus Time record, allowing for Well Completion and instantaneous Flow
Rate, Phase Ratios, Gas-Lift, etc. at each point. This conversion can be
performed on the basis of using either a:
VFP (*.VFP) file

WellFlo (*.WFL) file (i.e. with licensed version of WellFlo)
Simple Gas Model
to compute the pressure difference.
Difference Facility/Dialog: Used to calculate deference between two

Data Columns.
Append Files (or Copy and Paste): Used to copy and paste Block Data
with Time.
Copy, Resample and Paste: Used to copy, resample and paste form a
Data Column.
Copy and Resample to a New Column: Used to copy and resample to

new Data Column.
ENTER NEW DATA

General:
The Select a File dialog is used to select an existing *.PAN or *.PANX file to
which to add the imported data. To access the Select a File dialog, select a data
file/column list from the Workspace; from the Data Preparation view, select the
Gauge data ribbon, and then select Enter New Data.
1. Perform one of the following actions:

8 GAUGE DATA
Edit Gauge Data
To add the imported data to an existing *.PANX file, from the drop-down
list, select the file for which to add the imported data, and then click OK.
To add the imported data to a new .PANX file, select the Create a new panx
file option, type a name for the new panx file in the text box, and then
click OK.
The Define New Data File dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter data in the Define New Data File as required.
EDIT GAUGE DATA

General:
The Edit Data option is used to enter, view, or edit the Gauge data for the
selected Well and Master Data File. To access the Edit Test Design dialog, select
a data file/column list from the Workspace; from the Data Preparation view,
select the Gauge data ribbon, and then select Edit Data.
The number of Columns displayed will depend on the number of Data

Columns that were selected in the Workspace area, but within the table field,
only 16 rows can be viewed at a time. You can scroll through the file using
the scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to move cell by cell (i.e.
left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left mouse-click on scroll
bar either side of slider).
The scroll bar also has right mouse button functionality. By selecting
anywhere on the vertical scroll bar with the right mouse button, a short menu
is activated that allows you to move the table cells to selected locations (e.g.
with the menu command Scroll Here - the table cells will be moved to the
exact position on the scroll bar on which you right-click. The other
commands are self explanatory - Top/Bottom of table column, Page Up/Down to
the next block of data, Scroll Up/Down by one cell).
Individual cells can be edited by highlighting and entering a new value. The
edit buttons located at the top of the dialog can also be used for the following:

GAUGE DATA
Edit Gauge Data 8
Deletes the highlighted row. Refer to Deleting Rows.
Jumps to a specified row within the table range. Refer to Going to

a Specific Row.
Clear values from a range of cells. Refer to Clearing Rows.
This option opens the Finding a Value sub-dialog, which allows

you to find a value in a selected column. The first occurrence of that value
will appear at the top of the screen.
Insert a number of rows. Refer to Inserting Rows.
Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the

Clipboard. These columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a
spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
This button allows users to paste in columns of data from an

external source via the windows Clipboard.
Change values in a range of cells. Users can also Re-scale and Shift
the tidal signal during the filtering operation, so use of this facility at this
stage is not essential. Refer to Editing Function Data.

8 GAUGE DATA
Edit Gauge Data
The source data must contain the same number of columns as those in the
table being pasted into, and must also be tab-separated. The Time data may
be input in any of the usual accepted formats (e.g. hours, hh:mm:ss, etc.),
except minutes or seconds. The Time data must also be cumulative (i.e. it
must not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is in dd:hh:mm:ss
format).
To import data via the Clipboard, use the Edit/Copy menu command or Ctrl+C
keyboard command to copy the columns to Clipboard from the editor being
used (e.g. Notepad, Excel, etc.). Switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at the
insertion point in the time column and select the Paste button - do not use
Ctrl+V from the keyboard. The Paste option will automatically translate the
incoming Time format into the format being used for the current PanSystem
display, if different.
Data will be pasted in from the insertion point downwards and will
overwrite existing data within overlapping cells. To prevent data being
overwritten in this manner, first use the Insert option to open up the
appropriate number of empty lines, then Paste.
Change the value in a selected cell. Refer to Editing a Single Cell.
Change the time format. Refer to Editing the Time Format.
This option opens the File Header Editor, which displays any
header information within the file, and allows users to annotate the file
with any relevant information for reporting purposes.

GAUGE DATA
Deleting Rows 8
Deleting Rows
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the button in any of the following

dialog boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge
Edit Test Design
It is used to delete one or more rows at any point in the current file displayed
within the data editor main dialog.
Start Row: Select the row number where the deletion is to start.
End Row: Select the row number where the deletion is to end.
Going to a Specific Row

General:

dialog boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
Edit Test Design
Edit Skin & Storage Table
It is used to move to any row within the current file displayed in the editor
main dialog.

8 GAUGE DATA
Clearing Rows
Row Number: You select the row you wish to move to. The row number
entered in the entry field then becomes the first row displayed in the
editor main dialog after selecting OK.
Range: Displays the range of row numbers available (e.g. 1-125).
Clearing Rows
General:

dialog boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
Edit Test Design
It is used to clear the values from any cell or range of cells within any of the
columns displayed in the data editor main dialog.
Start Row: Select the first row to be cleared.

End Row: Select the last row to be cleared.
All Columns: Check this option to clear all available columns.
Single Column: Check this option to clear a single selected column.
Column Name: Select the column to be cleared using the drop-down
menu.
This is only applicable if the single column option has been selected.

GAUGE DATA
Finding a Value 8
Finding a Value
General:

dialog boxes:
Edit Tide Table

Edit Test Design
It is used to find a specific value within the current file displayed in the editor
main dialog.
From Column: You must select a Column on which to search.

that is Equal to
In the text box, you must enter a value for the Find function to work on.
i You should type in the Value field in the same format used in the Gauge Data
Editor.
After the fields are set, click the OK button to start the search. The dialog
moves to the found row.

8 GAUGE DATA
Inserting Rows
Inserting Rows
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the button, in any of the following

dialog boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
Edit Test Design
It is used to insert one or more rows at any point in the current file displayed
within the data editor main dialog.
Start Row: Select the row number where the insertion is to start or end
depending on whether the Before or After button has been checked.
Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to be inserted.
Before: Insertion will be before the row specified in the Start Row field.
After: Insertion will be after the row specified in the Start Row field.
Editing Function Data

General:
This dialog is generated by the button, in any of the following dialog

boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
Edit Test Design

GAUGE DATA
Editing a Single Cell 8
It is used to adjust the value/s in any single cell or range of cells within a
column of data from the current file displayed in the Gauge Data Editor dialog
using a shift and multiplier (i.e. [x' = ax+b] function). This may be necessary
for shifting Gauge Pressures to a different datum, re-calibrating Gauge
Pressures, converting spinner rps to Flow Rates or for shifting Times to a
common reference.
Column to Function: Select the column that the function is to be applied to.
Start Row: Select the first row that the function is to be applied to.
End Row: Select the last row that the function is to be applied to.
Multiplier: Enter a multiplier value for the function.
Shift: Enter a shift value for the function.
Editing a Single Cell

General:
This dialog is generated by the button, in any of the following dialog

boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
Edit Test Design
It is used to adjust the value in any single cell within a column of data from
the current file displayed in the Gauge Data Editor dialog.

8 GAUGE DATA
Editing the Time Format
Row: Select the row that contains the value you want to adjust.
Column: Select the column that contains the value you want to adjust.
Old value: Displays the old value of the selected cell.
New value: Enter the new value for the selected cell.
Shift: Enter a shift value for the cell.
Editing the Time Format

General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the button, in any of the following

dialog boxes:
Edit Rate Changes

Edit Tide Table
It is used to change the Time Data Format for the current file displayed within
the main Data Editor dialog.
Time Format: Select the required Time Format from the drop-down menu.
The Time field within the current file displayed in the main Data Editor
dialog will be updated after selecting OK from this sub-dialog.

GAUGE DATA
Append Files (or Copy and Paste) 8
APPEND FILES (OR COPY AND PASTE)

General:
Use the Append Data Files option (or the Copy and Paste option) to copy
selected data from one file to the corresponding columns of another file.
i This tool provides the same functionality as the Copy and Paste button from
the Gauge Data ribbon.
i All data columns, including times will be copied over, obliterating any data
already present in the corresponding section of the target file.
This option can also be used to copy and paste data onto the beginning or end
of the target file.
If the source file has fewer columns of data than the target file, the missing
data will be pasted in as zeroes. If it has more columns than the target, the
extra columns will not be copied over.
Acts on: An area defined by a click and drag box (i.e. all data in the time
interval spanned by the box).
i
The operation is only enabled when two files are plotted. The target file for the
patch is the file that has been selected as "Master" data file. The source file for
the data is the other plotted file. The source data is left intact in the source file,
since it is copied, not cut.
The following procedure should be adopted:
Before using the Copy and Paste button, select the target data file to
receive the paste as the Master data file (refer to the Help topic for
Gauge Data tab).

8 GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP
Plot the Master data file and the file to be used as the source for the
paste (it is sufficient just to plot pressures, there is no need to plot
everything, since all the other data will be copied over).
Select the time range to be copied and pasted by clicking and dragging a
box around it. If a box is not drawn, the entire plotted time interval will
be used.
Now select the Copy and Paste button. The Select Columns to Append (or to
Copy and Paste) sub-dialog will be generated.
The columns of the Master file are listed on the right-hand side (i.e. the
target) - these are non-editable. The columns of the source file are listed
by corresponding type on the left-hand side (e.g. pressure alongside
pressure, rate alongside rate, etc.).
Where there is a choice of source data columns of a particular type, select

one from the drop- down menu (e.g. the source file may have several
columns of Rate Data that could be pasted into the Rate Column of the
target file). If users do not want to transfer data, select ZERO OUT, and
zeroes will be patched in. Where there is no corresponding type in the
source file, only ZERO OUT will be available.
Time is always pasted across, replacing the times in the corresponding

interval of the target file.
Select OK, to copy and paste the selected data to the target file.
THP TO BHP
General:
This option is accessed from the Gauge Data ribbon from the Data Preparation
view after selecting a Pressure Column (and optionally, measured Flow Rate or
Cumulative Production) in the Data Files/Columns List section of the Workspace,
and then the THP to BHP option. The THP to BHP option displays the
Wellhead to Bottom-Hole Pressure Conversion dialog box that is used to convert a
THP versus Time record to a BHP versus Time record, allowing for Well
Completion and instantaneous Flow Rate, Phase Ratios, Gas-Lift, etc. at each
Pressure point.

GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP 8
Three methods are available for performing the conversion:
Using VFP Tables

Using a WellFlo (*.WFL) File containing the Well and Fluid Models.
i This option requires a licensed version of WellFlo.
Simple Gas (for Dry Gas Wells)
i This facility can also be used to convert from any Gauge Depth to BHP
provided the VFP file or WellFlo Model is set-up appropriately.
The three conversion methods are implemented via separate tabs in the
dialog, described as follows:
Using VFP Tables
This option is used to open a selected VFP file for a Production Well (using the
Browse facility described below).
PanSystem uses the selected Gauge Pressure (THP) Column, one Pressure at a
time (and depending on the keywords used in the VFP file), supplies the
appropriate data to the interpolation routine (e.g. WCT or WOR, etc.). A
complete set of values is supplied to the conversion routine for each THP to
BHP calculation:
The Water-Cut (WCT) or Water/Oil Ratio (WOR) is computed from the Oil
and Water Flow Rates. The Water/Gas Ratio (WGR) is derived from Water
and Gas Flow Rates in Gas and Condensate Wells.
The Solution Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) or Gas/Liquid Ratio (GLR) is computed

from the Gas and Oil (and Water) Flow Rates. The Condensate/Gas Ratio
(CGR) or Oil/Gas Ratio (OGR) is derived from Oil and Gas Rates in a
Condensate Well.

8 GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP
Qgi (Gas Injection Rate): Enter a constant value for Qgi if no Gas-Injection
Rate was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the Rate Data
Preparation dialog.
Figure 29: THP to BHP
In a Gas-Lifted Oil Well, the Total Gas Rate and Lift-Gas Injection-Rate must be
supplied as sampled data. The Solution GOR is calculated as:
[(Total Gas Rate) minus (Gas-Injection Rate)] / (Oil Flow Rate).
If any sampled data (e.g. Flow Rate, Water Rate, etc.) are not available or have
not been selected with the Pressure, users can specify a single value of each
missing parameter to be used for all Pressures (e.g. this would allow the
conversion to be performed with only measured THPs (i.e. users specify the
constant principal phase Flow Rate, a constant Water-Cut/GOR or WOR/CGR,
or constant Gas-Injection Rate/Qgi)).

GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP 8
On selecting the Calculate button, PanSystem interpolates in the
multi-dimensional VFP Table and extracts the BHP for each input THP.
Where a parameter is represented by only a single value in the VFP Table
(e.g. a Water-Cut is supplied by PanSystem, but VFP has only one (different)
value), it will assume the VFP value.
WellFlo will calculate bottom hole pressures AT THE FORMATION LAYER
i
NODE IN THE WELLFLO MODEL - regardless of the node selected as the
solution node in WellFlo. If the user wishes to calculate pressures at a
different depth in the wellbore, the WellFlo model must be altered so that the
formation layer is located at the depth where pressure calculations are desired.
PanSystem checks that the Fluid Type in the VFP File Header is appropriate to
the Fluid Type selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog
within PanSystem.
Users can check the third item in the Header Line after the VFPPROD line (i.e.
usually this will be Line Three, but there may be Comment lines too). An
example is given below:
--PRODUCTION WELL VFP TABLE 5
VFPPROD
1 9100 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' 'THP' ' ' 'FIELD' 'BHP' /
i 'LIQ' and 'OIL' are both acceptable for Oil Fluid Type and 'GAS' is acceptable
for Gas and Condensate Fluid Type.
PanSystem will display an appropriate error message if the VFP file is not
compatible with the current settings for PanSystem (e.g. PanSystem set to Oil
Fluid Type, but the VFP file is for a Gas Well).
i
ESP Wells and Injection Wells cannot be used with this facility at present.
Also note that 'WAT' Fluid Type is only allowed under VFPINJ and is therefore
not compatible with the current release.

8 GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP
Oil Rate (Oil)/Gas Rate (Gas or Condensate): Enter a constant value for the
principal phase Flow Rate if no Oil Flow Rate/Gas Flow Rate (or Cumulative)
Column was selected in the Data Files/Columns List section of the
Workspace (e.g. to represent a Constant Rate Drawdown).
Water-Cut/WGR: Enter a constant value for Water-Cut/WGR if no Water

Rate (or Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data File/Column List
section of the Workspace.
GOR (Oil)/CGR (Condensate): Enter a constant value for GOR/CGR if no

Gas Rate/Oil Rate (or Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data
File/Column List section of the Workspace. This GOR is the Solution GOR
(corresponding to the VFP Table definition).
Qgi (Gas Injection Rate): Enter a constant value for Qgi if no Gas-Injection
Rate was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the Workspace.
Figure 30: THP to BHP II
VFP File/Browse button: Use the Browse button to generate a standard

Windows File Open dialog and locate/select an appropriate *.VFP file on
the system/network. Once the required file is located/selected, choose the
Open button to load the *.VFP file into PanSystem.
Name for BHP Column: Enter a Name for the BHP Column that will be
generated after selecting Calculate (i.e. default Name is BHP).

GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP 8
Time Hours/THP/BHP Data Field: Initially, this field displays the Time and
THP Values associated with the selected Pressure Column. After the
Calculate button is selected, the field will also be populated with the
corresponding BHP Values derived from the calculation process.
Calculate button: Select this button to perform the BHP computation; the
current THP and the corresponding BHP will be displayed in the
overlying Data Field. VFP interpolation is performed for each input
Pressure. If a value input to the VFP Table is outside the table range, linear
extrapolation will be used to complete the calculations.
For a zero principal phase Flow Rate during a Shut-In, the Phase Ratios will
be the values used with the last non-zero Flow Rate (i.e. the Shut-In will be
i
treated like the end of the preceding Flow Period). If the very first Flow Rate
point is zero, Phase Ratios of zero will be used (i.e. unless constant values
have been specified in this dialog, in which case these will be used
throughout). Any negative Flow Rate value in any of the Rate Columns will
stop the calculation and a warning will be issued, since Injection is not handled
in this release.
On completion of the calculations, click OK on this dialog to return to the

Gauge Data ribbon, where the new BHP Column will be listed in the Data
Files/Columns List section of the Workspace.
Using WellFlo
This option is used to call WellFlo (if licensed) over a DDE link and open a
WellFlo *.WFL file containing the Well and Fluid Models (i.e. the file is selected
from PanSystem using the Browse facility described below and opened via
WellFlo).
i The location of WellFlo.exe is specified in the Windows Registry.
PanSystem supplies the selected Gauge Pressure (THP) Column, one Pressure at
a time, to WellFlo. With each Pressure there will be a Liquid Flow Rate,
Water-Cut, GOR, (and Qgi); or Gas Flow Rate with WGR and CGR, depending
on the Fluid Type selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog. A complete set of values is supplied to the conversion routine for
each THP to BHP calculation:

8 GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP
The Water-Cut (WCT) or Water/Oil Ratio (WOR) is computed from the Oil
and Water Flow Rates. The Water/Gas Ratio (WGR) is derived from Water
and Gas Flow Rates in Gas and Condensate Wells.
The Solution Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) or Gas/Liquid Ratio (GLR) is computed

from the Gas and Oil (and Water) Flow Rates. The Condensate/Gas Ratio
(CGR) or Oil/Gas Ratio (OGR) is derived from Oil and Gas Rates in a
Condensate Well.
In a Gas-Lifted Oil Well, the Total Gas Rate and Lift-Gas Injection-Rate must
be supplied as sampled data. The Solution GOR is calculated as:
[(Total Gas Rate) minus (Gas-Injection Rate)] / (Oil Flow Rate).
If any sampled data (e.g. Flow Rate, Water Rate, etc.) are not available with the
Pressure, users can specify a single value of each missing parameter to be
used for all Pressures (e.g. this would allow the conversion to be performed
with only measured THPs (i.e. users specify the constant principal phase
Flow Rate, a constant Water-Cut/GOR or WOR/CGR, or constant Gas-Injection
Rate/Qgi)).
On selecting the Calculate button, WellFlo will run a top-down Pressure Drop
calculation for each THP starting from the Wellhead (or another specified Start
Node) to the mid-perforation (i.e. Casing) Node. The BHP is produced as
output and appears as a Column of Pressures in the same file as the THP.
PanSystem checks that the Fluid Type in the *.WFL file is appropriate to the
Fluid Type selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog
within PanSystem.
i The Volatile Oil Fluid Type available in WellFlo has no direct equivalent in
PanSystem and is not compatible with this facility.
i
WellFlo only recognizes a Start Node at the Outlet, Wellhead/Xmas Tree or
Pressure Gauge Nodes. The Pressure Gauge Node must be downstream of
the Wellhead/Xmas Tree. If a Gauge Node is present in the WellFlo Model, the
top-down calculation will always start there.

GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP 8
i ESP Wells and Injection Wells cannot be used with this facility at present.
Oil Rate (Oil)/Gas Rate (Gas or Condensate): Enter a constant value for the
principal phase Flow Rate if no Oil Flow Rate/Gas Flow Rate (or Cumulative)
Column was selected in the Data Files/Columns List section of the Workspace
(e.g. to represent a Constant Rate Drawdown).
Water-Cut/WGR: Enter a constant value for Water-Cut/WGR if no Water Rate

(or Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data Files/Columns List section of
the Workspace.
GOR (Oil)/CGR (Condensate): Enter a constant value for GOR/CGR if no Gas

Rate/Oil Rate (or Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data Files/Columns
List section of the Workspace. This GOR is the Solution GOR (corresponding
to the VFP Table definition).
Qgi (Gas Injection Rate): Enter a constant value for Qgi if no Gas-Injection Rate
was selected in the Data Files/Columns List section of the Workspace.
WellFlo File/Browse button: Use the Browse button to generate a standard

Windows File Open dialog and locate/select an appropriate *.WFL file on
the system/network. Once the required file is located/selected, choose the
Open button to load the *.WFL file into PanSystem.
THP at: Use the drop-down menu to select the location where the THP
measurements were obtained (i.e. Wellhead/Xmas Tree Gauge or Outlet).
generated after selecting Calculate (default Name is BHP).
Time Hours/THP/BHP Data Fields: Initially, this area displays the Time
and THP Values associated with the selected Pressure Column. After the
Calculate button is selected, the BHP field will also be populated with the

8 GAUGE DATA
THP to BHP
overlying Data Fields.
For a zero principal phase Flow Rate during a Shut-In, the Phase Ratios will
be the values used with the last non-zero Flow Rate (i.e. the Shut-In will be
i
treated like the end of the preceding Flow Period). If the very first Flow Rate
point is zero, the Phase Ratios from the *.WFL file will be used (i.e. unless
constant values have been specified in this dialog, in which case these are
used throughout). Any negative Flow Rate value in any of the Rate Columns
will stop the calculation and a warning will be issued, since Injection is not
handled in this release.
On completion of the calculations, click OK on this dialog to return to the

Gauge Data ribbon, where the new BHP Column will be listed in the Data
Fils/Columns List section of the Workspace.
Simple Gas
This option provides a simplified approach for Dry Gas using the Energy
Equation (Reference 78), for single-phase flow (i.e. Gravity plus Pipe Friction
components only).
i
This tab is only activated when a *.PANX file with a Gas Fluid Type is currently
loaded or a Gas Fluid Type is selected in the Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog.
Gas Rate: Enter a constant value if the Gas Rate Column was not selected
in the Data Files/Columns List section of the Workspace.
Wellhead Temperature: Enter a constant value if the Wellhead Temperature

Gauge Data Column was not selected in the Data Files/Columns List section
of the Workspace.
Bottom Hole Depths (MD) and (TVD): Enter values for each of these Depths;
PanSystem can then derive average Well Deviation.
Tubing ID: Enter the Internal Diameter of the Tubing (i.e. Monobore Tubing
Completion).
Bottomhole Temperature: Enter a constant value (PanSystem will default to

the Reservoir Temperature if this has already been entered in the Layer
Parameters dialog).

GAUGE DATA
Difference Facility/Dialog 8
generated after selecting Calculate (default Name is BHP).
Time/THP/BHP Data Fields: Initially, this area displays the Time and THP
Values associated with the selected Pressure Column. After the Calculate
button is selected, the BHP field will also be populated with the
overlying Data Fields.
i
Gas Gravity is derived from the Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog. If this is
zero, PanSystem will prompt users to enter a value (at this stage, the Layer
Parameters and Fluid Parameters may not have been initialized by users).
i A default Pipe Roughness of 0.0012 is used (i.e. same default as WellFlo).
On completion of the calculations, OK from this dialog to return to the Gauge

Data ribbon, where the new BHP Column will be listed in the Data
Files/Columns List section of the Workspace.
DIFFERENCE FACILITY/DIALOG
General:
This option is accessed from the Gauge Data ribbon on the Data Preparation
view. Use the Difference Between Two Data Columns button to create a third
column of data by taking the difference between two existing columns of
data.
Acts on: The two columns of data must be plotted. They may be in the same
file or in different files, but must be of the same type (e.g. both pressures). If
users take the difference between pressure PA contained in File A and PB
contained in File B:

8 GAUGE DATA
Copy, Resample and Paste
Difference = PA - PB
and the Difference data column will be created in File A.
Plot the two columns to be differenced (other data columns may be

plotted as well).
Select the Difference Between Two Data Columns button. The Select Columns
to Difference dialog is generated, allowing users to choose the columns
they want to difference and to enter the name of the new column.
Select the columns to be differenced. The difference column will be

written in the file selected in the left-hand Data File/Column field. The
right-hand Data File/Column field will only contain columns of the same
type as the left-hand Data File/Column field.
Enter a name for the new difference column in the New Column field.
Select OK. The difference column will be plotted on the screen.
COPY, RESAMPLE AND PASTE

General:
Use the Copy, Resample and Paste option to copy a single column of data from
one file into the corresponding column in another file. If the times of the two
sets of data are not identical, then the incoming data are re-sampled (i.e. by
linear interpolation) at the times in the target file.
Acts on: An area defined by a click and drag box (i.e. all data in the time
interval spanned by the box).
The operation is only enabled when two files are plotted. The target file for the
i
paste is the file that has been selected as Master data file. The source file for
the data is a second plotted file. Data in the selected column in the target file
are replaced by the incoming data, which will be re-sampled to match the target
file times. Other data in the target file are not affected. The source data is left
intact in the source file, since it is copied, not cut.

GAUGE DATA
Copy and Resample to a New Column 8
Before using the Copy, Resample and Paste option, select the target data file
to receive the paste as the Master data file (refer to the Help topic for
Gauge Data tab).
Plot the two data columns to be used in the operation (i.e. the target data
column is in the Master file and the source data column is in the other
file).
Select the time range to be copied and pasted by clicking and dragging a
box around it. If a box is not drawn, the entire plotted time interval will
be used.
Now select the Copy, Resample and Paste option. A Select Column to Copy,
Resample and Paste dialog will be generated.
The plotted columns of the Master data file are listed on the right-hand
side of the dialog under Paste Into Column In. Select the target data
column, if more than one has been plotted, using the drop-down menu.
The source column/s of the corresponding type are listed on the left-hand
side of the dialog under Copy From Column In (e.g. pressure alongside
pressure, rate alongside rate, etc.). Select the source data column, if more
than one has been plotted, using the drop-down menu.
Select OK, to copy and paste the selected data to the target file.
COPY AND RESAMPLE TO A NEW

COLUMN
General:
Use the Copy, Resample to New Column option to copy values of a single
column from one file into a new column in another file. If the times of the two
files are not the same, then the incoming data are re-sampled (i.e. by linear
interpolation) at the times in the target file.

8 GAUGE DATA
Copy and Resample to a New Column
Acts on: The whole time-span of the Master data file. The target file for
paste is the Master data file.
i
The operation is only enabled when data from the target and source files are
plotted. Other data in the target file are not affected. The source data is left
intact in the source file, since it is being Copied, not Cut.
Before using the Copy and resample to new column option, select the target
data file to receive the paste as the Master data file (refer to the Help
topic for Gauge Data Overview.
Plot the source data column, and any column from the Master data file
(i.e. target), so that both files are on-screen. Since the new target data
column does not yet exist, something else must be plotted from the target
file.
There is no need to click and drag to draw a box; the entire target file time
interval will be used.
Now select the Copy and resample to new column button. A Select Column to
Copy, Resample and Create dialog will be generated.
The plotted column/s of the source data file are listed on the left-hand
side of the dialog under Copy From Columns in. Select the source data
column, if more than one has been plotted using the drop-down menu.
Type a name for the new data column to be created in the target file,
under Create New Column In.
Select OK, to create the new column in the target file.

Chapter 9
RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Schedule Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Edit Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create Rate Column Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mark Exact Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Pick Nearest Data Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Mark Point from Intersection of Two Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Automatic Flow Period Generation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rate Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Schedule Overview
RATE SCHEDULE OVERVIEW

The following options on the Rate Schedule ribbon are used to enter, view or
edit the Rate Changes Table for a selected Well and Master Data File. For more
Edit Rate Changes

Create Rate Column Dialog
Mark Exact Position
Pick Nearest Data Point
Mark Point from Intersection of Two Lines
Automatic Flow Period Generation Dialog
EDIT RATE CHANGES

General:
This dialog is accessed from the Rate schedule ribbon on the Data Preparation
view and then selecting the Rate Schedule button. It is used to enter, view, or
edit the Rate Changes Table for the selected Well and Master Data File.
Rate Changes are Events where the surface Flow Rate changes. This includes
Rate History (prior to a Test, perhaps before the Gauge started recording), and
Rate Variations during a Test or sequence of Tests. A maximum of 2000 entries
is allowed in a Rate Changes Table.
i A file cannot be analyzed unless a Rate Changes Table has been set up.
Once entered, the Rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot. The
Events are marked by Arrows in the Ruler Bar and dashed vertical lines on the
Plot.

RATE SCHEDULE
Edit Rate Changes 9
To define a Rate Changes Table, select the file and associated Data Columns as
the "Masters" and proceed as outlined below.
1. Select the Well for defining a Rate Changes Table in the Workspace pane.
2. Select the Rate Changes option on the Rate Changes ribbon of the Data
Preparation view.
3. Enter/edit the Rate Changes data. Individual cells can be edited by
highlighting and entering a new value. The editing buttons situated down
the right-hand side of this dialog may also be used.
Users can scroll through a lengthy table with the scroll bar (which will appear
at the side of the window if there are more than 16 lines in the table). Refer to
the Edit Gauge Data dialog for additional details on the editing buttons and
right-mouse click functions for scrolling (post-Windows 2000 users only).
If more than one Well has been defined, it is necessary to define Rate Changes
separately for each Data File imported for each of the Wells.
i
Rate Changes are normally defined graphically by identifying the Points
where the Flow Rate changed on the Data Edit Plot. Editing can be
subsequently performed in this dialog or in the Rate Change dialog (i.e.
generated from the Data Edit Plot).
Within the table field, only 16 rows can be viewed at a time. Users can scroll
through the file using the scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to
move cell by cell (i.e. left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left
mouse-click on scroll bar either side of slider).
For post-Windows 2000 users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button
functionality. By selecting anywhere on the vertical scroll bar with the right
mouse button, a short menu is activated that allows users to move the table
cells to selected locations (e.g. with the menu command Scroll Here - the table
cells will be moved to the exact position on the scroll bar that the user
right-clicks on. The other commands are self explanatory - Top/Bottom of
table column, Page Up/Down to the next block of data, Scroll Up/Down by one
cell).
Individual cells can be edited by highlighting and entering a new value.
The table field is comprised of five columns:

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Edit Rate Changes
Data Point: Identification number for Rate Change Data Points, set in
chronological order.
Time: The Time at the selected Rate Change Data Points.
Pressure: The Pressure at the selected Rate Change Data Points.
Rate: The Flow Rate leading up to the selected Rate Change Data Points (as
illustrated below by the red line):
Figure 31: Flow Rate for Rate Change Data Points
Np or Gp: The Cumulative Production (or Injection) of Oil, Gas or Water at the
selected Rate Change Data Points.
i
Even if the imported data is Cumulative Production (or Injection), it will be
converted to Flow Rates for the Rate Changes Table and a Cumulative (Np or
Gp) value will be computed from these Rates.
The edit buttons located at the top of the dialog can also be used for the
following:
: Deletes the highlighted row. Refer to Deleting a Row.
: Jumps to a specified row within the table range. Refer to Going to

a Specific Row.

RATE SCHEDULE
Edit Rate Changes 9
: Clear values from a range of cells. Refer to Clearing Rows.
: This option opens the Finding a Value sub-dialog, which allows

users to find a value in a selected column. The first occurrence of that
value will appear at the top of the screen.
: Insert a number of rows. Refer to Inserting Rows.
: Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the

ClipBoard. These columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a
: This button allows users to paste in columns of data from an

external source via the windows ClipBoard.
: Change values in a range of cells. Users can also Re-scale and Shift
except minutes or seconds. The Time data must also be cumulative (i.e. it must
not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is in dd:hh:mm:ss
format).

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Edit Rate Changes
To import data via the ClipBoard, use the Edit/Copy menu command or Ctrl+C
keyboard command to copy the columns to ClipBoard from the editor being
used (e.g. NotePad, Excel, etc.). Switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at the
Change the value in a selected cell. Refer to Editing a Single Cell.
This button generates the Rate Data Averaging sub-dialog; this is

used to Average Flow Rates over pre-defined Flow Periods. Using this
facility, a series of Flow Rate or Cumulative Production measurements
(i.e. as loaded from a Production Report), can be made compatible with
Rate Change Events picked from the Pressure record. This provides a
means of:
Converting Cumulative Data to Flow Rates for the Rate Changes Table.
Synchronizing the Rate Data to Pressure events.
Simplifying the Rate Data by averaging, where Test Periods span

several Rate measurements.
Respecting Cumulative Production.
This button generates the Rate Data Transfer sub-dialog; this is

used for:

RATE SCHEDULE
Edit Rate Changes 9
Importing Rate Changes Data from an external source: This is
useful if the Test has an extensive History and the Time/Rate data are
already in ASCII file format (e.g. exported from a spreadsheet). This
can also be achieved using the Paste button.
Transferring a Rate Changes Table: A Rate Changes Table already

entered for one dataset (e.g. an Upper Gauge), can be transferred into a
new Rate Changes Table required for a second dataset (e.g. Lower
Gauge).
i
Rate Changes can also be defined graphically by identifying the Points where
the Flow Rate changed on the Data Edit Plot (refer to the Data Edit Plot
Overview for details). Users can still view or edit Rate Changes created
graphically within this dialog.
Operational Checklist:
The first entry (i.e. line 1) should be the start of the first Flow Period in the
recorded Test, or the start of its Rate History (if there was flow before the
Test was recorded). It should therefore have a Flow Rate of zero.
If it is the start of the Test Record, users should enter a Pressure in the
first line.
If it is the start of the Flow History, with no recorded data, there is no

need to enter an initial Pressure - PanSystem will estimate this for
users during Analysis.
In each line, enter the Flow Rate leading up to the specified Time.
The Pressure entered for the start of a Flow Period will be used in Analysis
as P0 ( Pressure at Start of Test ). This affects any diagnostic plot with p
on the Y-axis, and any Skin Factor computations which use P0. Users
should ensure that the correct Pressure has been entered at the start of any
Flow Period they intend to analyze.
For other Flow Periods, such as the history before the Test, the Pressure is
unimportant and can be left at zero.
In a DST, users will not often know the initial Pressure (i.e. line 1) at the
start of the Test - leave it at zero or put in an estimate (i.e. it may be one of
the things that users wish to obtain from the Analysis).

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Edit Rate Changes
The last line should correspond to the end of the last Flow Period. If users
do not define the end of the last Flow Period, its associated data will not be
recognized in Analysis.
Enter negative Flow Rates for Injection/Fall-Off Tests.
For Oil fluid type with either of the Multi-Phase options (i.e.
oil/water/gas), enter the oil Flow Rates. The Flow Rates of the other phases
will be computed from the water/oil and gas/oil ratios.
For Condensate fluid type:
If Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is not being used, the gas Flow Rates

entered should correspond to the primary (i.e. high pressure)
Separator Offtake corrected to standard conditions (also refer to
Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog).
If Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is being used, the gas Flow Rates

entered should correspond to the total Produced gas, corrected to
standard conditions.
Special Set-Up for Slug Tests:
If the status of Slug Test is assigned to a Test Period whilst operating in the
Data Edit Plot, users will find the following special set-up in the Rate Changes
Table. This is performed automatically on exit from the Data Edit Plot:
Initial Pressure (i.e. Start of Slug Test) set to:
Layer Pressure for the Ramey et al Type-Curve Method (i.e. because the
Initial Sandface Pressure, on the Formation side of the Valve, is the Layer
Pressure).
Zero for the Pressure Integral Method (i.e. a consequence of the

mathematics employed).
i
The Initial Pressure must be left at Layer Pressure if the Ramey et al
Type-Curve Method is being used, and at Zero if the Pressure Integral Method
is being used.
Flow Rate (i.e. second line of Slug Test) set to a nominal value of 1. Slug
Test Analysis does not require a Flow Rate here, but PanSystem requires a
non-zero value to permit entry into the Analysis section.

RATE SCHEDULE
Create Rate Column Dialog 9
These values are set-up automatically, and do not normally need to be
edited.
CREATE RATE COLUMN DIALOG

Functionality:
Use the Create Rate Column option to create a Rate column from the defined
Rate Changes. This is not mandatory. PanSystem requires a Rate column for
use in Analysis and Advanced Simulation, but if users have not imported a Rate
column, and do not create one, PanSystem will use a temporary one derived
automatically from the Rate Changes Table when users enter Analysis.
Acts on: The Rate Changes associated with the "Master" file for the well. This
tool can only be used when the "Master" data file is plotted and Rate Changes
have been identified (i.e. using either the Mark Exact Position, Pick
Nearest Data Point or Mark Point from Intersection of Two Lines
facilities).
A new Rate column is created in the "Master" data file, with Flow Rates
computed using one of three methods described below. In all three cases, a
Flow Rate value is computed at each clock time (i.e. every Pressure reading
will now have a Flow Rate associated with it).
With the appropriate "Master" data file plotted, select the Create Rate
button to generate the Create Rate Column dialog, which allows users to
select the method by which Flow Rates will be computed. The dialog is
described as follows:
Interpolation Type area: This area contains three selection options:
Step-Rate: Creates a step profile between the Rate Change marks,

using the specified Time and Flow Rate at each change.

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Create Rate Column Dialog
Piece-Wise Linear: Creates a ramp or chord between the Rate

Change marks, using the specified Time and Flow Rate at each
change (i.e. a quick method of "filling-in" a slowly changing Flow
Rate).
dP/ dT (Wellbore Storage): Calculates from dP/ dT and the Wellbore

Storage Coefficient (Cs). This will replicate the theoretical Downhole
or Sandface Flow Rate at standard conditions.
For Oil, the Sandface Rate is represented by:
where:
Qo(t) = Surface Oil Rate from the Rate Changes Table at Time (t).
Cs = Wellbore Storage Coefficient
The same equation is used for Water, with the appropriate

fluid-specific parameters (i.e. qw, Bw, etc.).
Note that for Multi-Phase Flow (with the Perrine or Multi-Phase
i
Pseudo-Pressure options enabled), Cs should represent the Total Wellbore
Storage Coefficient for the Oil and Water phases combined. However, the
computed Flow Rate is the Oil Flow Rate, since PanSystem always works with
the Principal Phase Flow Rates (i.e. Oil in the case of Oil/Water flow).
In Multi-Phase (Oil + Water) Flow, the Oil Flow Rate is computed from
dp/ dt using a Storage Coefficient ( Cso) for the Oil Fraction in the
equation above; this is given by (Reference 106):
where:
fw = Surface Water-Cut
Cs = Input Total Wellbore Storage Coefficient.

RATE SCHEDULE
Create Rate Column Dialog 9
For Gas or Condensate, Pseudo-Pressure m(p) is used instead of Pressure (p),
and the Sandface Flow Rate is represented by:
where:
Qg(t) measured in MMscf/day, is the surface Gas Rate from the Rate
Changes Table at time (t).
Cs ( bbls/psi) is the "initial" Wellbore Storage Coefficient defined as Cs = Vcgi,

with V being the Wellbore Volume ( bbls) and cgi being the Gas
Compressibility (psi -1 ) at Reservoir Pressure and Temperature T ' (R).
(t) is Real Time or (optionally) Pseudo-Time.
i
Users must set up their Fluid Parameters and Pseudo-Pressure Data in the
Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog before using this facility for a
Gas or Condensate Well Test.
Target Column Name: Enter the new Rate Column Name in this field.
For the Step-Rate and Piece-Wise Linear options, the computed rate will appear
immediately on the plot.
For the dP/ dT (Wellbore Storage) option with Oil or Water fluid type, a dP/ dT
Parameters sub-dialog is generated:
Enter the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and appropriate Volume Factor
(i.e. Bo or Bw), then select OK. The computed Flow Rate will appear
immediately on the plot.
For the dP/ dT (Wellbore Storage) option with a Gas or Condensate fluid type, a
Gas Flow Rate sub-dialog is generated:
Enter the Initial Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) or the Wellbore Volume (V).
These fields are linked by the relationship Cs = Vcgi, as described above.
After selecting OK, the computed Flow Rate will appear immediately on
the plot.

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Mark Exact Position
There is an additional option to use Pseudo-Time (i.e. instead of Real Time)

in dm(p)/ dt for Drawdowns and/or Build-Ups, to cater for the various
schools of thought on the use of Pseudo-Time.
i
Agarwal's original reference (Reference 41), recommended Pseudo-Time for
Build-Ups only. PanSystem will respect the user's choice here as it runs
through the test sequence. Any Test Period with a non-zero Flow Rate will be
considered as a Drawdown, and any with zero Flow Rate as a Build-Up.
MARK EXACT POSITION

Functionality:
Use the Mark Exact Position option to define the Rate Changes at the start and
end of the different flow periods.
i
This function marks a Rate Change at the exact cursor position, whether it
coincides with a data point or not. To pick an exact data point, use the
Nearest Point facility.
PanSystem stores the co-ordinates in the Rate Changes Table for use in Analysis.
Once entered, the rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot. The
events are marked by arrows in the Ruler Bar and dashed vertical lines on the
Plot.
Acts on: This facility only acts on the selected Master file for the well. This
tool can only be used with a single data file plotted, and this must be the
Master file.
With the appropriate Master data file plotted, select the Exact Point
button. It will normally be de-activated after a Rate Change event has
been chosen.

RATE SCHEDULE
Mark Exact Position 9
If users wish to mark several Rate Changes, select and hold down the
CTRL key while selecting the Exact Point button with the left mouse
button.
Alternatively, select the Exact Point button with the right mouse button;
this will lock the facility on. Select the button again to de-activate it.
Users can read the co-ordinates of the cursor in the status bar.
When users left click the mouse at a position on the plot, a Rate Change
dialog is generated showing the co-ordinates of that position (these
co-ordinates will also be displayed in the status bar). These values can be
confirmed or edited as required. Users will probably need to type in a
flow rate, but if a rate column is present in the Master data file, the
nearest value to the selected time will appear in the dialog.
Select OK to confirm and the rate change co-ordinates will be transferred

to the Rate Change Table. The event is also marked by an arrow on the
Ruler Bar above the plot.
Select Delete to abort the pick not Cancel.
Users can also access the Rate Changes dialog for editing using the Ruler
i Bar by holding down the Ctrl key and left clicking the rate change marker
arrow on the bottom half of the toolbar. Flow periods can also be defined by
text entry using the Rate Changes facility on the Rate Changes ribbon of the
Data Preparation view.
i Users can see the rate changes if they select Plot Rate Schedule from the
Data files/Columns list in the Workspace.

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Pick Nearest Data Point
PICK NEAREST DATA POINT

Functionality:
Use the Pick Nearest Data Point option to define the Rate Changes at the start
and end of the different flow periods.
i
This function marks a Rate Change at the pressure data point nearest to the
cursor position. Otherwise, this button performs the same function as the
Mark Exact Position button.
PanSystem stores the co-ordinates in the Rate Changes Table for use in Analysis.
Once entered, the rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot. The
events are marked by arrows in the ruler bar and dashed vertical lines on the
plot.
Master file.
With the appropriate Master data file plotted, select the Nearest Point
button. It will normally be de-activated after a Rate Change event has
been chosen.
If users wish to mark several Rate Changes, select and hold down the
CTRL key while selecting the Nearest Point button with the left mouse
button.
Alternatively, select the Nearest Point button with the right mouse button;
this will lock the facility on. Select the button again to de-activate it.
Users can read the co-ordinates of the cursor in the status bar.

RATE SCHEDULE
Mark Point from Intersection of Two Lines 9
When users left click the mouse at a position on the plot, a Rate Change
dialog is generated showing the co-ordinates of that position (these
co-ordinates will also be displayed in the status bar). These values can be
confirmed or edited as required. Users will probably need to type in a
flow rate, but if a rate column is present in the Master data file, the
nearest value to the selected time will appear in the dialog.
Select OK to confirm and the rate change co-ordinates will be transferred

to the Rate Change Table. The event is also marked by an arrow on the
Ruler Bar above the plot.
Select Delete to abort the pick not Cancel.
Users can also access the Rate Changes dialog for editing using the Ruler Bar
i
by holding down the Ctrl key and left clicking the rate change marker arrow on
the bottom half of the toolbar. Flow periods can also be defined by text entry
using the Rate Changes facility on the Rate Changes ribbon of the Data
Preparation view.
i Users can see the rate changes if they select Plot Rate Changes from the Data
files/Columns list in the Workspace.
MARK POINT FROM INTERSECTION OF

TWO LINES
Functionality:
Use the Mark point from intersection of two lines option to define the Rate
Changes at the start and end of the different flow periods. This function
marks a Rate Change at the intersection of two lines which are fitted through
four points, two on either side of the rate change.
Master file.

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Mark Point from Intersection of Two Lines
Plot the Master data file columns that are required.
Select four points, two on either side of where the Rate Change occurs.
i If some points are already selected, de-select them first with the Esc key, then
select four new points.
Select the Mark point from intersection of two lines button. Two lines will be
fitted through the points, and an intersection will be calculated. The Rate
Change dialog will also appear. Enter a value for the Rate and select OK.
Users may also right-click on the lines, then move them by left-clicking
and dragging the appropriate handles (i.e. black squares) if they wish to
revise the position of the Rate Change. Select the Mark point from
intersection of two lines button again and OK to confirm the new position.
! Select Delete to erase the event, not Cancel.
i The lines will disappear when users left-click anywhere in the plot area.
The event is now marked by an arrow on the Ruler Bar above the plot,
and the rate change co-ordinates will be transferred to the Rate Changes
Table. If four points straddling an existing Rate Change were chosen, a
new rate change is not introduced; instead the existing one is shifted to
the new intersection.
Users can also access the Rate Changes dialog for editing using the Ruler Bar
i
by holding down the Ctrl key and left clicking the rate change marker arrow on
the bottom half of the toolbar. Flow periods can also be defined by text entry
using the Rate Changes facility on the Rate Changes ribbon of the Data
Preparation view.

RATE SCHEDULE
Automatic Flow Period Generation Dialog 9
AUTOMATIC FLOW PERIOD GENERATION

DIALOG
Functionality:
This facility is used to invoke an automatic pick of the Rate Change Times from
the pressure change events. Where a Master Rate Channel is available, the
measured rate values will be picked up at the event times too. Any existing
Rate Changes will be deleted unless a zoom box has been drawn first, in which
case the automatic pick facility will only operate within the box, leaving any
existing Rate Changes lying outside the box untouched.
Acts on: The Rate Changes can be picked from:
The entire test (any existing Rate Change markers will be cleared).
A portion in the zoom box (any existing rate changes outside the zoom
box will be retained, any inside the zoom box will be deleted).
Within an existing Flow Period or Test Period, if highlighted in the Ruler

Bar. This takes priority over a zoom box, if both are present.
When the button is selected, an Automatic Flow Period Generation dialog is

generated in which the user can select two criteria:
Pressure Gradient Threshold: This represents the minimum ratio of

slopes required to qualify as a potential Rate Change event. Referring
to the diagram below, at data point (j), the forward difference slope to
point (j+1) is compared with the backward difference slope to point
(j-1).

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Automatic Flow Period Generation Dialog
Figure 32: Rate Change Minimum Slope Ration
If the absolute of the ratio (or of the inverse ratio), exceeds the specified value,
then point (j) qualifies as a potential "event", subject to the noise check
described below. A default value of 5 is a good starting point, but the best
value will depend on the data. The slope ratio has the advantage of being, to
some extent, normalized for any test, and is also independent of units.
Noise Threshold: If point (j) has been identified as a potential event from
the slope ratio criterion described above, it is necessary to check the
difference between pressures (Pj) and (Pj+2), to see if a significant
pressure change ensues. This distinguishes between a minor wobble or
noise (i.e. small pressure change) and a real Rate Change (i.e. large
pressure change). If |(Pj - Pj+2)| exceeds the noise threshold, point (j) is
marked as a Rate Change.
i
The Noise Threshold criterion works best when there is a large change in
pressure between the Rate Change point and the next Data Point, as is often
the case. It works less well when there is a high sampling rate and the
pressure changes slowly.
In addition to handling genuine gauge and background noise, the Noise

Threshold can be used to discriminate against minor wobbles in the
pressure record caused by wellbore effects, surface activities, etc. The
user should inspect the test data to get a feel for what is, or is not
considered to be a significant pressure change.
Once a Rate Change has been identified, the automatic pick facility is
disabled until the slope ratio falls below the specified value again. This is
necessary to prevent spurious picks from occurring, though it may
occasionally cause genuine changes to be skipped.

RATE SCHEDULE
Automatic Flow Period Generation Dialog 9
It is unlikely with real data, that the auto pick algorithm will correctly
identify every genuine rate change and ignore every occurrence of noise.
The sort of Rate Change where a relatively shallow slope (i.e. late
drawdown or build-up) suddenly steepens is easily picked out by the
slope ratio test as illustrated below:
Figure 33: Slope Ratio Test
In this example below, the red colored point passes the slope test;
providing the pressure change two points ahead of it exceeds the
specified threshold, it will be picked as a Rate Change. Some of the earlier
noisy points pass the slope test, but fail the noise test:
Figure 34: Passed Slope Test with Failed Noise Test
Increasing the noise threshold will eventually prevent the red colored
point from being selected, and closely sampled data (i.e. where P is
small), with a lot of noise, will not produce good results.
If a drawdown is shut-in early while it is still steep, this will result in a

Rate Change with a large negative slope (i.e. drawdown), suddenly
becoming a large positive slope (i.e. build-up).

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Change Dialog
Figure 35: Rate Change - Drawdown followed by Build-UP
This produces an absolute slope ratio close to 1, which will probably fail the
slope test, so an obvious event is missed. Any Rate Changes that are missed
can either be picked manually, or the relevant portion of the test data can be
boxed-off and the slope ratio reduced until the Rate Change is recognized.
RATE CHANGE DIALOG

General:
These are events where the surface Flow Rate changes. This includes Rate
History (i.e. prior to a Test, perhaps before the Gauge started recording) and
major Flow Rate variations during a Test or sequence of Tests. A maximum
of 2000 lines may be included in the table.
Associated with a Rate Change event are:
Time
Pressure (not always required)
The Flow Rate leading up to the selected Point (i.e. the Point marks the
end of the Flow Period - as illustrated below).

RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Change Dialog 9
These TPR (Time/Pressure/Rate) entries can be edited from the Edit Rate
Changes dialog, or on the Data Edit Plot. The Rate Changes will be marked as
Arrows along the lower half of the Data Edit Plot Ruler Bar.
When a particular Test Period is being analyzed, PanSystem computes

superposition for the period up to the start of that Test Period by referring to
the Rate Changes Table. Superposition during the Test being analyzed is
computed from the Rates in the Master Rate column.
Once entered, the Flow Rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot.
The Rate Change Events are marked by upward pointing Arrows in the Ruler
Bar and dashed vertical lines on the plot.
This dialog can be accessed at any time for editing by:
For an existing Rate Change marker; holding down the CTRL key and
clicking the left mouse button on one of the Arrows in the Ruler Bar, or
clicking the right mouse button on one of the Arrows in the Ruler Bar.
To create a new Rate Change marker; using one of the Point Selection
buttons from the Rate Changes ribbon (e.g. Exact Point, Nearest Point or
Define Point tools), then left-clicking on a Point in the Plot.

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Change Dialog
The dialog has three entry fields for Time, Pressure and Rate as described
above. You can edit these values if required.
The Mark as END of Build-Up check box is only required for Flow Rate
Averaging purposes (refer to the guideline section below, Edit Rate Changes
i
and Rate Data Averaging for details). As the check box name suggests, it
should only be used to Mark the Point representing the end of a Shut-In
Period. It is only required when the measured Flow Rate Data that is to be
averaged does not record a zero rate during that Shut-In Period (i.e. the
presence of a zero rate tells PanSystem it is a Shut-In. If there is no zero rate
recorded, the Shut-In period is too short and you must tell PanSystem).
Press OK to confirm any changes and the Rate Change co-ordinates will be
transferred to the Rate Change Table. Any new Rate Change Events will also be
marked by an upward pointing Arrow on the Ruler Bar above the plot (i.e.
Black Arrow for the end of a Flow Period and a Red Arrow for the end of a
Build-Up identified with the Mark as END of Build-Up check box).
! Press the Delete button on the dialog to abort the pick - not Cancel.
i You can also define and edit Flow Periods on a tabular basis using the Rate
Changes Table, accessed via the Edit Rate Changes facility.
Guidelines for Identifying Shut-In Periods:
Shut-In Periods can be identified in two ways:
Automatically (by PanSystem): The Test Period must contain at least one
zero rate measurement, for the Shut-In to be identified correctly.
Manually (by you): This allows short Shut-Ins to be positively identified if

they do not contain a zero rate measurement. The Test Period is identified
as a Shut-In by using this dialog and the Mark as END of Build-Up facility
(described above). There are two cases to consider (illustrated below):

RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Change Dialog 9
Special treatment of short Shut-In Periods that do not have a zero rate to
identify them automatically
Type I (from illustration above):
In this case, the first Average Rate measurement during the Shut-In
represents production during the preceding Flowing Period up to the
Shut-In time. This will need to be back allocated.
The first Average Rate measurement during the next Flowing Period
represents production since the end of Shut-In. This will need to be
forward allocated.
Type II (from illustration above):
In this case, there is no Average Rate measurement during the Shut-In. The
next Average Rate measurement is during the next Flowing Period and
represents production just prior to the Shut-In plus production since the
Shut-In (i.e. it has to be allocated to two Flow Periods).

9 RATE SCHEDULE
Rate Change Dialog
For the Flowing Period before the Shut-In, check if the next Period is a
Shut-In, and check if there is an Average Rate (or Cumulative)
measurement. If yes, proceed normally (refer to Rate Data Averaging
dialog). If no, get the measurement from the next Period, divide this up in
proportion to the two Residual Flowing Times and give the appropriate
portions to the two Periods.
Where the "Residual Flowing Time"
i
= (Time from the last measurement to Shut-In) for the Flowing Period before
the Shut-In
= (Time from the end of Shut-In to the next measurement) for the Flowing
Period after the Shut-In.
Thus in the illustration above, if Rate measurements are made at 12:00

every day, and the Well was Shut-In between 15:00 and 21:00, the
production measured at 12:00 next day has to be split so that 3/15 goes to
the first Flowing Period and 12/15 to the second Flowing Period.

Chapter 10
PROCESSING
Processing Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Select Shift Stream Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Data Reduction and Smoothing Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Show Number of Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Ungroup Flow Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

10 PROCESSING
Processing Ribbon Overview
PROCESSING RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The Processing ribbon includes the following options. For more specific
details on each topic, select the relevant links outlined below:
Deconvolution
Select Shift Stream Dialog
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
Data Reduction and Smoothing Details
Show Number of Points
Ungroup Flow Periods
DECONVOLUTION
1. Introduction
The Deconvolution module in PanSystem is based on work done at Imperial

College, London, using the Total Least-Squares (TLS) method1.
In a series of flowing and shut-in periods, it is quite possible that no

individual transient is long enough to detect remote boundaries or, more
importantly, closure. The deconvolution process converts any variable rate
pressure record into an equivalent constant rate drawdown response with
duration equal to the total duration of the pressure record. It does not require
any prior knowledge or assumptions about a reservoir or boundary model.
This long constant rate response has a far larger radius of investigation than
the short transients, and therefore has the potential (data quality permitting!)
to reveal boundaries, closure, remote pressure support, etc very clearly.
The deconvolved constant rate drawdown response function represents a

model which is, as yet, unidentified and unquantified in geological terms.
It is delivered to the user for analysis as a record of pressure vs time for a
nominal constant production rate.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
In the same way as the standard constant rate drawdown models supplied in
PanSystem for reservoir and boundaries, the deconvolved response can be
convolved with the test flowrates to generate a pressure record of the whole
test, which can be compared (history matched) with the measured data as a
quality check. The closeness of this match is one of the criteria for minimizing
an error function, E, in the TLS equation (see Appendix 2). In addition to the
pressure match criterion, E also allows for some adjustment of the input
flowrates, and for the appearance (smoothness) of the pressure derivative.
The user has control over the smoothness and rate optimization aspects of the
process, and can therefore make repeated runs until satisfied with the results.
The preferred deconvolved pressure response can then be analyzed using the
standard constant rate drawdown techniques for model identification and
parameter estimation in PanSystem. Once the model has been quantified in
physical terms, it can be used to history match the test data, using, if desired,
the optimized flowrates, and further adjustments to the model can be made.
2. Entering the Deconvolution module
The Deconvolution work-flow starts in the Data Preparation section in

PanSystem. You must have a valid pressure record, with flow periods set up
in the Rate Changes table, and well, reservoir and fluid input parameters
initialized. There are two ways to start the Deconvolution process:
1. Press {F2} while on a plot
2. Select Deconvolution from the Processing ribbon on the Data

Preparation view.
With this second option, there are two choices as illustrated below:
Figure 36: Processing Ribbon
Accessing the Deconvolution module from the Processing ribbon
New: this will start a new session in the Deconvolution module, and clear
any previous passes.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
From existing deconvolution: This is only enabled if you have already run
the Deconvolution module with this file in the current PanSystem session.
It will display your previous passes, and default to the last-used
Deconvolution settings.
The other two starting options do not offer this choice, and will take you into
the module in From existing deconvolution mode if previous runs have been
made.
It takes several seconds to start up the module for the first time, but
subsequent start-ups are faster.
i
If you have imported more than one pressure file (TPR) into PanSystem, you
will have to choose which one you wish to use for Deconvolution, as illustrated
below. The default will be the current or master file that you selected during
Data Preparation.
Figure 37: Select a Data Set TPR Sub-Dialog
Selecting a dataset to deconvolve
If you choose a file that has multiple pressure columns, you will also be able
to select the pressure column to work with. For the master file, the default
will be the master pressure.
The Deconvolution Toolset screen is illustrated below, with the pressure and
flow rate schedule for the entire test.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 38: Deconvolution Toolset Screen
The initial screen in the Deconvolution module
3. Using the Deconvolution toolset
3.1 Initial pressure
The default Initial Pressure value (illustrated below) will be the larger of the
pressure in the first line of the Rate Changes table, the Layer Pressure
specified in the Layer Parameters, and the first measured pressure data point.
Set: Use the default value, or edit it.
Optimize: The Set value is ignored, and the Deconvolution module will
estimate an optimum value for initial reservoir pressure. This will be
displayed at the end of the processing.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 39: Initial reservoir pressure area
i
If you do not select all of the flow periods for inclusion in Deconvolution (see
Section 3.2), the Initial Pressure corresponds to the reservoir pressure at the
beginning of the first selected flow period. Depletion must therefore be taken
into account if you are imposing a Set pressure value.
3.2 Flow Period selection
The Flow Periods button allows you to use all, or a subset, of the flow periods
in the test. The Flow Period Selection dialog is illustrated below. The default
selection is all of the periods. Use the Range Selection area to choose a subset
of contiguous periods. The Used check box is for information only, and
cannot be used for selection.
Figure 40: Flow Period Selection Dialog
i
If you do not select all of the flow periods, the Initial Pressure corresponds to
the reservoir pressure at the beginning of the first selected flow period.
Depletion must therefore be taken into account if you are imposing a Set
value. This will be done automatically if using the Optimize option.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
i
Leaving out part of the rate history by starting some way through the test might
adversely affect the results, since the excluded flow periods will not be
contributing to the superposition function. This omission is less significant if
you start after a long shut-in period.
3.3 Pressure Period selection
The Pressure Periods button allows you to use the pressures from all, or a
subset, of the flow periods in the test. The Pressure Period Selection dialog is
illustrated below.
Figure 41: Pressure Period Selection Dialog
The default selection is all of the periods within the range of Flow Periods you
have selected via the Flow Periods button. Use the Range Selection area to
choose a subset of contiguous periods, or select the 'Use' column check boxes
to pick non-contiguous periods, as in the Figure.
If you select the flow periods first, the periods for pressure will be constrained
i
to lie within this selected range. If you select pressure periods first, and then
flow periods, it will be possible to have an inconsistent mix with pressure
periods not covered by flow periods. In this situation, a warning message will
appear (as illustrated below). You may continue, but the results might suffer.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 42: Inconsistent flow and pressure period selection
3.4 Initialization
Figure 43: TLS parameters after initialization
The edit box below Optimize Q contains the weighting value (***) for the
optimization of the rate term in the TLS equation. When Optimize Q is
unchecked, the flowrates will not be modified and this term is set to zero
internally.
The edit box below Lambda ( ) contains the value that will be used as the
regularization parameter for the derivative smoothness term in the TLS
equation.
When you click the Initialize button, the values for Lambda ( ) and Optimize Q
( ) will be calculated and displayed. You may edit these if you wish. Upon
first entry into the Deconvolution screen, initialization will also enable the
Run button.
3.5 Running the Deconvolution
When the Run button is pressed, the Deconvolution process is started and a
progress bar will give an (approximate) indication of progress.
On completion (typically after 5-20 iterations), several plots will be displayed

by default as illustrated below.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 44: Deconvolution screen after the first run
The Viewable Plots control, as illustrated below, allows you to pick and
choose different plots to display.
Figure 45: Plot display options with default selection
You may double-click any single plot to magnify the viewing area (hiding the
other plots), and double-click again to return it to its previous size. A single
click in the plot area can be used to select that plot as the current window for
the toolbar controls to act on (see Figure 56).

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
As previously illustrated, the default plot display consists of:
The deconvolved pressure derivative (right side): This represents the

constant rate drawdown response which has been deconvolved from the
measured data and, as such, can be analyzed to identify a possible
reservoir and boundary model or models. Different values of the ?
coefficient will affect the smoothness of this curve. The default value is
usually adequate. Altering the number of nodes (see Advanced options)
will also affect its quality. There is, therefore, a subjective element in the
optimization.
Rate Match: Compares the input measured flowrates with the output
optimized flowrates;
Pressure Match: Compares the input measured pressure record with the
pressure generated by convolving the constant rate response with the
optimized rates;
Pressure + Rate: This is a display of the input measured pressures and

flowrates;
Pressure Difference: The difference between the pressures in the
Pressure Match plot, expressed as a percentage: x100%
The other plot options are:
Rate Difference: The difference between the rates in the Rate Match plot,
expressed as a percentage: x100%;
Pressure: The input measured pressures.
Rate: The input measured flowrates.
3.6 Advanced options
The Advanced button allows you to specify the number of nodes used for
deconvolution, and the maximum number of iterations. The initial defaults are
set to 40 and 50 respectively.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 46: Advanced Deconvolution options
The Number of Nodes used in the deconvolution will affect the quality of
the deconvolved derivative in terms of coarseness. It does not have the
same effect as the weighting coefficient **** , which is an integral part of
the error minimization in the TLS process.
This is demonstrated below. The black trace is the pressure derivative

deconvolved using the default and number of nodes (40). The purple
trace shows the effect of too small a (left), and only 15 nodes (right).
i
In some cases, 15 nodes might be adequate. Since a higher setting implies a
slower computation, you are advised - at least for a large dataset - to start with
15 to make sure that the process will run OK, before using a larger setting.
The choice of Maximum Iterations will have no effect on the process as

long as it terminates naturally before the maximum number is reached.
Processing takes, typically, fewer than 25 iterations.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 47: Left: l-coefficient too small. Right: Number of nodes too small
3.7 Deconvolved Datasets
Each run of the Deconvolution module will appear in the Deconvolved Datasets
window as a colored bar, up to a maximum of 8 (as illustrated below).
Figure 48: The Deconvolved Datasets
The properties of each pass can be viewed by hovering the mouse pointer
over the corresponding bar (as illustrated below).

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 49: Delete Dialog
All of the datasets are displayed on all of the selected plots by default. To
remove a dataset from the plots, clear the check box in the Deconvolved
Datasets window. To remove (or add) a plot, clear (or select) a check box in
the Viewable Plots window.
The Delete a Run button will open a Delete dialog where you can select any
datasets to delete permanently from the list.
Figure 50: Delete Dialog
The Cancel button on the main screen cancels any runs that you have made
during the current session in the Deconvolution module, and exits the
module. The exit button in the top right corner of the Deconvolution Toolset
window has the same effect.
3.9 Test Data Derivative overlay
Use the Plot Test Derivatives button to overlay derivatives from the test data
on the deconvolved derivative.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 51: Derivative Period Selection dialog for derivative overlays
You can select up to five flow periods by checking the check boxes in the Plot
column. The derivatives will be computed with respect to full superposition
(using the rate history in the Rate Changes Table) and will be plotted against
elapsed time and with a rate normalized y-axis, to make them compatible
with the deconvolved derivative as shown below.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 52: Test derivative overlays (points) on deconvolved derivative (line)
3.10 Saving your deconvolved pressure for further analysis
The deconvolved datasets are, so far, internal to the Deconvolution module.

The Save button on the main screen passes one selected dataset out of the
module to PanSystem for analysis. If you have more than one dataset in the
module, you will have to deselect the others in the Deconvolved Datasets list
prior to saving, but you do not have to delete them.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
The following data are passed from the module and will appear in the Data
File/Column list:
Deconvolved pressure vs time: This is computed at a nominal constant

flowrate of 100 STB/day or 1 MMscf/day. The time-steps are
logarithmically spaced, and of duration equal to the total time spanned
by the selected pressure periods (Section 3.3). If you enter Data
Preparation > Gauge Data you will see this as a new pressure column called
Deconvolved Pressure #1 in a new TPR dataset called DECON. If another
run is subsequently saved, the new pressure will be Deconvolved
Pressure #2, and so on.
Optimized flowrate vs time: This is on the same time-base as the

measured data, and appears in the same TPR group. These rates track the
input measured flowrates, but may differ from them as a result of the
optimization. In the Workspace the flowrates will appear in the test TPR
file as Optimized Rate #1, Optimized Rate #2, etc from successive saved
runs.
Figure 53: File Hierarchy of the Flowrates
The deconvolved data saved from the module (shown here after two runs
have been saved)
The Master data file/columns panel will be automatically switched to the new
deconvolved pressure so that it is ready for analysis:

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 54: The deconvolved pressure selected for analysis
Once the Save button is clicked, you will be taken to the log-log plot with the
new DECON: Deconvolved Pressure #n plotted as illustrated below.
Figure 55: Log-log diagnostic plot with the deconvolved pressure and its
derivative

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
You can now proceed to identify the reservoir and boundary models, and to
solve for reservoir properties, using conventional constant rate drawdown
analysis techniques. Once the model has been quantified in physical terms, it
can be used to history match the test data, by switching the Master Data File
back to the test data. By default, the original rate changes table will be used as
the Master Rate. If you wish to use the optimized flowrates, switch the Master
Rate Column to the appropriate rate. (This is demonstrated in the Tutorial.)
Further adjustments to the model can then be made in the usual way. The
pressures and derivatives from several runs can be compared using the View /
Overlay pressure... option in the plot menu.
i
During a PanSystem session, you will be able to exit and reenter the
Deconvolution module without losing any of the datasets, as long as you select
the 'From existing deconvolution' option each time you reenter.
When you save the PAN file itself, only the last selected Deconvolution dataset
will be retained in the Deconvolution section. Consequently, when you
re-open the PAN file later, and select the 'From existing deconvolution'
option, only that one dataset will be found in the Deconvolution module. All
of the deconvolved TPR data and optimized rates will, of course, be retained
in the Workspace.
3.11 Gas wells with rate-dependent skin
The deconvolution processing assumes a constant skin factor (S). When there
is a rate-dependent component (D), it will attempt to compensate by
optimizing (i.e., adjusting) the flowrates to minimize the TLS error function.
Thus, the deconvolved derivative might be of reasonable quality, sufficient to
allow identification of the model and some of the key parameters.
A rigorous approach to dealing with rate-dependent skin would require:
1. Estimation of the D-coefficient from conventional rate-dependent skin

analysis (multi-rate test or wellbore storage);
2. Computation the rate-dependent pressure drop from DQ (through m(p), or
an approximation using p2);
3. Subtraction of this from the test pressures;
4. Deconvolution of the resulting 'clean' pressure.
This extra functionality will be considered for the next upgrade.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 56: Plot toolbar
The plot area contains a toolbar with the following buttons to facilitate
various viewing options. All changes to plot properties made here will be
temporary, and will revert to the defaults when a new run is made, or when
you exit the Deconvolution module.
A drop-down menu to the right of the button can be used to Resume on all
plots or on a selected plot.
Print Graph: This will print the selected plot.
Copy to clipboard: This button copies an image of the selected plot, or a

list of the data values, to the clipboard. The choice between image and data is
made via a drop-down menu to the right of the button.
Export to Image File: This button displays the Save As dialog box. Use
the Save As dialog box to save the currently loaded plot to a new file and
alternative location.
Edit Display Properties: This button brings up the run-time property

editor for the selected plot. (It takes several seconds to come up.) Here you
can make temporary edits to plot scales, trace and symbol properties, etc.
Properties can be saved to a configuration file which can be reloaded
subsequently via the File I/O option on the Control tab.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 57: Dialog box for editing chart properties that appear on the
screen
Edit Hardcopy Properties: This button displays the Plot Hardcopy Color
Properties dialog box. Here you can change the chart properties (color, line
type, size, trace/maker, non-column, etc.) for the hardcopy (i.e., printed
version) of the currently displayed plot.
Edit Image Copy Properties: This button displays the Plot Image Color
Properties dialog box. Here you can change the chart properties (color, line
type, size, trace/maker, non-column, etc.) for the image that you plan to copy
to another application, such as Microsoft Word or PowerPoint, without
changing the display (i.e., screen) properties for the images.
Fonts: Use this button to edit font attributes. To change the font for an
attribute, click the button preceding the attribute name to display the Font
dialog box. Using the Font dialog box, edit the following attributes as
required:
Font: For selecting a different Font Type (e.g. Arial, Verdana, etc.).
Font Style: For selecting Bold, Regular, Italic, etc.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Size: For entering a different Font Size.
Effects: For selecting Line Through, Regular (default setting) or Underlined

text.
Script: For selecting different Language Scripts (i.e. Western by default).
Sample: Provides a preview of the current Font selection parameters.
After editing, click OK to close the Font dialog box, and then select the Apply
button to view any changes on the current plot.
Data-Cursor: The Data-Cursor button provides a cross-hair on the

selected plot, and displays the x- and (left-hand axis) y- coordinates of the
crosss position. Drag the cross-hair with the mouse to read the (x, y)
coordinates on any part of the plot.
Select: This button allows you to magnify a particular region of a

selected plot by drawing a box with the cursor.
Zoom Back: Use this button to unzoom, and to generally reset plot
scaling.
Zoom Forward: Use this button to display a plot in the zoom setting
(magnification) that was displayed prior to clicking Zoom Back.
Zoom In: When this button is clicked, the selected plot is zoomed in by a
factor of 2. Unzoom using the Zoom out or Tracking Resume button.
Zoom Out: When this button is clicked, the selected plot is zoomed out
by a factor of 2. Unzoom using the Zoom in or Tracking Resume button.
Zoom Axes: The x- or y-axis of the selected plot can be expanded or

compressed by mouse movement.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Axes Scroll: When the Axes Scroll button is active, the user can drag the
plot view around with the mouse the axes scales will scroll automatically.
This is useful if you have zoomed in and wish to get to another part of the
plot while still zoomed. You can reset the scales using the Tracking Resume
button.
Resume Original View: This button can be used to unzoom, and to

generally reset plot scaling. It enables tracking on all axes - the axes will
adjust their minimum and span values based on the tracking style - all
cursors will be hidden, and the axes minimum and span will be restored to
the values they had when the axes tracking was initially disabled.
Data Grid: This button displays numerical values of plotted data as a

table, with an option to copy some or all to the Clipboard.
Appendix 2: Theoretical background
The Total Least Squares1 method is based on the following equation:
The deconvolution algorithm minimizes the total least squares error function
E, which is a weighted combination of pressure match (first term), rate match
(second term), and a penalty term (third term) based on the overall curvature
of the graphed derivative, whose purpose is to enforce smoothness.
In the TLS equation:
is the pressure match component. pi is the average reservoir

pressure, p is the measured pressure, y is the optimized flowrate, and g is a
matrix function of the response coefficients (see Ref 1 for details). y.g
represents the result of re-convolving the deconvolved constant rate response
with the optimized flowrates.
is the rate match component. q is the measured flowrate, y is the

optimized flowrate and is the relative weighting (user input).

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
and is the curvature term. z is a vector of response coefficients,

with operators: matrix D, vector k. is the regularization parameter (user
input).
The objective is to minimize E over y and z, and over pi if the Optimize pi

option has been chosen. Outputs from the minimization are:
Record of deconvolved pressure vs time, representing the constant rate

drawdown response function that best satisfies the minimization criteria;
Optimized flowrates vs time (if the Optimize Q option has been selected).
Average reservoir pressure (if the Optimize pi option has been chosen).
References
Ref 1: Deconvolution of Well-Test Data as a Nonlinear Total Least-Squares Problem;

T. von Schroeter, F. Hollaender and A.C. Gringarten; SPE 77688 (San Antonio
2002), SPEJ (Dec. 2004).
Deconvolution Tutorial
The file used in the following tutorial is DeconOilExample.panx, which can

be found in the PanSystem installation default data folder. It contains a
simulation of about 110 days of production with several shut-ins. The
flowrates have been modified post-simulation to introduce measurement
errors so that we can demonstrate the Optimize rates facility.
The tutorial is presented in oilfield units. You may use your own units system
if you prefer.
Basic Workflow
1. Open the file and enter the Deconvolution module.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 58: Deconvolution Module
Figure 59: Deconvolution Toolset
2. By default, all of the flow periods and all of the pressure periods are selected.
You can check this via the Flow Periods and Pressure Periods buttons.
Leave the initial reservoir pressure set to 5000 psia and click Initialize. The two
coefficients will be updated.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 60: TLS Parameters II
3. Click Run. The Deconvolution will take eight iterations.
Figure 61: Deconvolution After a Run
The deconvolved derivative is of good quality using the default coefficients.
The pressure match plot shows a good match over all flow periods...

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 62: Pressure Match Plot
... and the % pressure differences are close to zero.
Figure 63: Percent Differences
Some adjustments were made in the TLS computation to optimize the

flowrates (DC1 trace):
The optimized rates are in fact very close to the original rates used in the
simulation to generate the test data.
4. Click the Plot Test Derivatives button, and then select the five buildups (or
any other flow periods if you wish):

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
5. Click Save to return to the main screen, to see the derivative overlays:

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 64: Derivative overlays
The test derivatives are rate-normalized using the test rates. They do not
overlay perfectly in the radial flow portion because of the flowrate errors.
6. Click the Save button to exit the deconvolution module.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 65: Log-Log Plot
This constant rate drawdown has the same duration as the original test (2700
hrs) and shows the pure response trend underlying the multi-rate test record.
The deconvolved data can be analyzed in the usual way to identify reservoir
and boundary model types and to estimate the parameters.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 66: Derivative Analysis
7. If you wish to take a short-cut here, go to Analysis / Model Selection / Model

and select the 'After' tab. The 'After' interpretation contains the full set of
results.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 67: Cartesian Plot Analysis
Figure 68: Pressure and derivative match to the constant rate drawdown
response

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Having identified and quantified the model, we can now test it by attempting
a history match to the test data.
8. On the Data Preparation view, go to the Master Data dialog via the Master data
ribbon.
Figure 69: Master Data Dialog
9. Click OK.
10. On the Analytical simulation ribbon of the Simulation view, run Quick Match:

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 70: History Match to the Test Data Using the Measured Flowrates
The match is reasonable, but there are discrepancies, which are most likely
due to rate measurement errors or, of course, a deficiency in the model.
11. We can rerun this history match using the optimized rates. Return to the
Master Data screen via the Master Data ribbon on the Data Preparation view,
and change the master rate to Optimized Rate #1.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 71: Master Data Dialog
Figure 72: Information Dialog Box
!
Warning: At this point, your Rate Changes table will be updated with the
optimized rate values, and the original flowrates will be lost. If you wish to keep
a record of the original rates so that you can restore them to the table at some
later stage, please refer to the note at the end of this tutorial.
Now return to the Test Overview and rerun Quick Match. The match is much
closer, and can be improved by a small reduction in the skin factor.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 73: History Match Using the Optimized Flowrates
That summarizes the basic workflow. Now for some details.
Optimizing Initial Pressure
Now return to the Deconvolution module via the Processing ribbon on the Data
Preparation view, selecting From existing deconvolution and DST-1 on the
way. You will find your previous deconvolution run on the screen.
Select Optimize in the Initial Pressure area, and then click Initialize and Run.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 74: Initialization and Run I
In this case the deconvolution will compute an optimum value for Pi. A
second deconvolved derivative will be plotted, and will be almost
indistinguishable from the first one. The flowrates, which were already
optimized by the first run, will be almost unchanged.
If you wanted to save this second run, you would have to either deselect the
first one (clear the check box), or to delete it (via Delete a Run) before clicking
the Save button.
Deconvolving only part of the test
Selected flow periods
So far we have used all of the pressure record. If you have bad pressure data
in some of the flow periods, you might prefer to exclude it from the
deconvolution. For example, you might want to use only some, or all, of the
buildup pressures. The Flow Period selection is, by default, all periods, and
this should be kept because the flowrates are required to keep the
superposition correct. Open the Pressure Period Selection dialog and select the
buildups. (You do not have to select them all, but remember that the
deconvolution only spans the time range of your selection. Selecting the first
and last buildup would give the maximum time-span.)

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 75: Selecting a subset of the test pressures
Save the selection, Initialize and Run. The new deconvolved derivative is very
close to the others.
Second half of test
Since the middle buildup is fairly long and has almost stabilized, it should be
possible to obtain a reasonable deconvolution of just that part of the test
coming after it.
In the Flow Period Selection dialog, select the range 10 - 13 and Save.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 76: Flow Period Selection Dialog
In the Pressure Period Selection dialog, note that the range is already restricted
to 10 - 13 (to prevent you picking pressure periods that would have no rate
history - #5 for example). Within this range you may pick and choose the
pressure periods to deconvolve. We will keep all of them. Save the selection.
If the reservoir is behaving as a closed system, there will have been depletion.
The options here for Initial Pressure are:
Derive an estimate of current average reservoir pressure from analysis of

the long buildup, from a material balance calculation, etc and enter this as
the Set value;
Select Optimize and let the TLS processing derive an estimate for you.
Click the Optimize radial button, then Initialize and Run.

PROCESSING
Deconvolution 10
Figure 77: Initialization and Run II
The new deconvolved derivative is very close to the others, but of shorter
duration because of the shorter time range covered by the selected pressure
periods. The optimized initial pressure is 4713 psia. From the simulation that
was used to generate this example, we know that it should be 4730 psia - an
error of 6% in terms of depletion from an initial 5000 psia. This will be, in part,
a consequence of excluding the first 9 flow periods from the history.
From here you may decide to Save some of the runs, or to Delete some.
You may select any of the DECON pressures for analysis by setting the
master file and pressure. You may overlay any of the other DECON
pressures (and their derivatives) on it for comparison using the Overlay
pressure option on the View ribbon.
To work on the measured data in Analysis, select DST-1 as the master file. P1
will automatically become the master pressure (because there are no others in
the DST-1 file). Next choose an optimized flowrate.
Note: To preserve the original (measured) Rate Changes
PanSystem currently assigns only one Rate Changes table to each pressure
column. Initially, we had pressure P1 with its measured rate history in the
table, and Rate Changes was assigned as the master rate column. These rates
are lost if replaced by optimized rates, and cannot be restored except by
retyping or re-importing.
To make a backup of the original rates, before running Deconvolution (or, at

least, before selecting an optimized rate as master):
1. Plot P1 on the Data Edit plot. The measured Rate Schedule will also be
plotted.
2. Select the Create Rate Column option on the Rate Changes ribbon, and then
select Step-rate as the Interpolation Type. Enter a Target Column Name for the
rate column that you are about to generate, and then click OK.

10 PROCESSING
Deconvolution
Figure 78: Create Rate Column Option
3. A new rate column will appear:
Figure 79: New Rate Column
4. To restore the original measured rates to the Rate Changes table at any time,
simply select this rate column as the master. The values at the rate change
times will be read into the table:
Figure 80: Restoring Original Measured Rates

PROCESSING
Select Shift Stream Dialog 10
SELECT SHIFT STREAM DIALOG

General:
Use the Shift option on the Processing ribbon to shift selected data. This can be
done in three ways:
By time.
By signal value.
By both the above.
Users can shift an entire dataset or a portion of it. The shift can be made
graphically by clicking and dragging the data, or the exact shift values can be
typed in.
Acts on: Any plotted column can be selected for shifting. The whole dataset
of the selected column or a portion of it can be shifted. A box can be clicked
and dragged around a portion of the data to mark it. Users tell the program if
they want to limit the shift to the boxed-in data, or apply it to the whole
column of data. If time is shifted, then all columns in the file are shifted by
the same amount (i.e. so they remain synchronized in time).
Generate the Data Edit Plot, and include the column to be shifted.
If users only want to shift a portion of the data, they should click and drag
to draw a box around the required portion, otherwise the whole data set
will be shifted.
If a large number of points are plotted and users want to shift them all,
the process can be speeded up by drawing a box around a small portion
of the data (e.g. some correlatable event). The box can then be
maneuvered to the correct position quite rapidly (i.e. reduced re-draw
time), then a shift can be automatically applied to the rest of the data.
Select the Shift option to generate the Select Shift Stream dialog.
Select the Column to Shift from the drop-down menu at the top of the
dialog. Remember that time-shifts will be applied to all columns in the
same file.

10 PROCESSING
Select Shift Stream Dialog
Select the shifting option from the central left area of the dialog:
Shift time only: The value (i.e. signal) of the data stays the same, but
users can move it (i.e. horizontally shift) with respect to time.
Shift signal only: The time stays the same, but users can increase or
decrease (i.e. vertically shift) the value (i.e. signal).
Shift both time and signal: Data can be moved in any direction.
If users want to shift the data graphically by dragging it, they may
proceed to the next step at this stage. To shift by a known amount, check
the Type in Value(s) check box and enter the Time and/or Signal shift
manually in the activated data entry fields.
If users have drawn a box round a portion of the data, they can elect to
shift just this portion by checking the Shift only selected points check box
option at the bottom left of the dialog. Otherwise, the shift will be
applied to the whole dataset.
Select OK.
If users have typed in the shift parameters, the plot will be re-drawn with
the shift/s in place.
If users are performing a graphical shift, left-click and drag the data until
it is in the required position. Note the following points:
The cursor changes to a double- or four-headed arrow to indicate the

permitted directions of shifting.
The cumulative shift/s relative to the starting position are shown in

the status bar below the plot during the current shift session.
The ESC key cancels the current shift and exits shift mode, so nothing
is changed.
The Shift button stays depressed and no other command or button

can be used until the button is released at the end of the shift.
When the data shifting operation has been completed, select the Shift
button again to switch-off the facility.
The last shift can be undone using the Undo button.

PROCESSING
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning 10
To confirm the shift (and clear the ghost trace of the pre-shift data), click
the Confirm button. Note that you will not be able to Undo after
confirming.
ADVANCED GAUGE DATA

CONDITIONING
Overview
This topic provides details about the following:
About Advanced Data Conditioning

Steps Involved
Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform
Example Tutorial
About Advanced Data Conditioning

Modern pressure gauges record pressure at a high sampling rate. The
pressure versus time data obtained is sometimes huge and it is difficult to
store and analyze this amount of data. Also the conventional techniques for
noise removal lead to suppression of small transients which are of interest to
the reservoir engineer. Similarly, the standard data reduction techniques do
not preserve all the transients and hence any analysis performed on this
reduced data may lead to incorrect estimation of well and reservoir
parameters.
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning offers the choice of:
Wavelet transform algorithms

Savitzky-Golay finite impulse response filtering
to remove single point outliers, denoise the data, and identify transients
(buildups and drawdowns) and to reduce the data in such a manner that
these transients are preserved in the reduced dataset.

10 PROCESSING
Acronyms & Definitions
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning can be used to analyze pressure data

obtained from conventional gauges, permanent down-hole gauges and from
Formation Tester systems.
Acronyms & Definitions

Term Definition
ADC Advanced data Conditioning/Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
TPR Time, Pressure, Rate
FIR Finite Impulse Response (Savitzky-Golay method)
Steps Involved
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning consists of the following steps:
Accessing the Menu Option

Selecting a Dataset for Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
Selecting the Processing Method
Configuration File Selection
Preprocessing: Preparing the Data for Data Conditioning
Performing the workflow steps. For more information, see Data
Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform on page 205.
For information about using the Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning dialog
box, refer to Screen Dialog and Operational Instructions on page 201.
Accessing the Menu Option

The Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning menu option is available on the
Processing ribbon of the Data Preparation view. The ADC menu gets enabled
when at least one file with a pressure column is loaded into PanSystem.

PROCESSING
Selecting a Dataset for Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning 10
Figure 81: Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning Menu Option
Selecting a Dataset for Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning

Upon clicking the Adv Gauge Data Conditioning menu option, the list of all the
TPRs that have at least one pressure column will appear in a list box as shown
in the figure below. This dialog will appear only if there are more than one
such TPR. If there is only one TPR then this dialog will not appear and the
TPR will be considered for ADC by default.
Figure 82: Dataset selection dialog
The dataset that you are currently analyzing will appear as the default
selection in the list, but you can choose another dataset. Only one can be
selected as ADC can be performed on only one dataset at a time.
Select the dataset, and then click OK, or else Cancel the operation.

10 PROCESSING

OK will bring up a dialog for the selection of the processing algorithm you are
going to use:
Figure 83: Processing algorithm selection dialog
Choose either Savitzky-Golay or Wavelet transform.
Configuration File Selection

After selecting the processing method, the system asks to load a previously
saved configuration file (if any). The configuration file contains the
configuration parameters required to perform ADC on a given dataset. This is
usually specific to a particular dataset, but can, of course, be used with others.
The message box shown in the following figure will appear. Select Yes to load
an existing configuration file, or select No. If a configuration file is not
selected, the ADC module calculates default values for the configuration
parameters and shows them in the ADC screens.
Figure 84: Configuration file selection prompt
If you select Yes, it opens up a Windows File Open dialog and you can select
the file. Configuration files are xml files with a .CFG file extension.

PROCESSING
Preprocessing: Preparing the Data for Data Conditioning 10
After selecting the configuration file, data is loaded into the ADC module and
is preprocessed to remove:
Data points with negative pressure values.

Data points where pressure is 0 psia.
Data points where the pressure value is greater than 20,000 psia (deemed
to be spurious).
Any data point that is a duplicate in time. Only one point is kept for each
time stamp.
A status bar is displayed during preprocessing as shown below:
Figure 85: Preprocessing status bar
The preprocessed data are shown in red in the following figure.
Screen Dialog and Operational Instructions

Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning gives a wizard-like interface for the
various steps of the workflow. The screen is divided into three panes as
shown below.

10 PROCESSING
Figure 86: Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning wizard
The following items are in the left pane:
Data Conditioning Workflow: The first group box named Data Conditioning
Workflow shows the steps in the data conditioning process. The order is
predefined and cannot be changed. The only difference between the two
processing methods is that Event Detection comes after Denoising in the
Wavelet Transform workflow, and before it in the Savitzky-Golay workflow.
Wavelet Transform Savitzky-Golay
Outlier Removal Outlier Removal
Interpolation Interpolation
Denoising Event Detection
Event Detection Denoising
Data Reduction Data Reduction
The currently workflow step is highlighted in bold text.

PROCESSING
Preprocessing: Preparing the Data for Data Conditioning 10
Configuration parameters: The title and contents of each box change according
to the current workflow step. The user enters values for the configuration
parameters, or accept the defaults. The configuration parameters for each
workflow step will be explained in detail in later sections.
Add data as TPR: Processed data obtained at each workflow step can be saved
as an individual TPR for further analysis if required. However, in most cases,
the outlier-removed data and denoised data will not be required in separate
TPR form outside of the ADC module. The user can select the datasets to save
as TPRs.
Click Run & Plot to run the current step of the processing with the
configuration values entered, and view the results in the plot area. A progress
bar along with an Abort button is displayed to show the status of the
processing. The newly processed data is plotted along with the previous
steps processed data. If one or more previous steps were skipped by the user,
then the skipped steps will be performed internally before performing the
current step. The user may Run & Plot any number of times with different
configuration values until satisfied with the results. Each new run will restart
from the original data that came through from the previous stage.
Example: If the user is on the Denoising step and clicks Run & Plot, the Denoising
operation will be performed on the interpolated data, and denoised data will be plotted
against interpolated data. If the Interpolation step was skipped by the user then
interpolation will be performed internally using the default configuration values
before performing Denoising. If you denoise again with different parameters, the
operation will be rerun on the interpolated data.
Click Next to move to the next workflow step. Once you are
satisfied with the results of the current step. Clicking the Next button will
display the configuration parameters for the new step.
Configuration values will be saved at each Next click if the

Save all configuration option is checked. Use the Browse button to define the
destination folder and file name (extension .CFG).
Example: If the current step is Denoising and the Next button is clicked, then the
next workflow step (Data Reduction) is selected and the configuration parameters for
Data Reduction are displayed. A plot of denoised data will be shown in the plot area,
ready for reduction.

10 PROCESSING
Click the Back button to navigate to the previous workflow step in

the ADC wizard.
The plot area displays the plot of the latest processed data versus previous
workflow step data. The plot toolbar is similar to the one on the other
PanSystem plots and is described in PanSystem Plot Toolbar Overview.
The bottom pane contains the following wizard buttons.
This button restores default values for configuration

parameters in all the workflow steps. If a configuration file is loaded initially,
then it restores the values from the configuration file. Otherwise the default
calculated values will be restored.
Click this button to run all the workflow steps at any point during
data conditioning. This is a quick way to perform ADC and should be done if
the user is sure about the configuration values entered. If specific workflow
steps have been performed individually by clicking Run & Plot, then Run All
will skip those steps and perform the remaining steps. After processing, Run
All closes ADC, adds the reduced data as a new TPR in PanSystem, and plots
the reduced data on the Data Edit Plot. If the option to add other processed
data was selected in Add data as TPR, then those datasets will also be added as
TPRs. Flow periods (events) will be marked on the Data Edit Plot as shown in
Figure 96.
This button cancels ADC and returns to the PanSystem Data Edit
Plot window. If any data has been processed before clicking Cancel and Add
data as TPR is switched on for that data set, this processed data will be
added to PanSystem as a new TPR. You can click Cancel if you are in the
middle of ADC and you need to close ADC without losing the processed
data. The processed data can be loaded again by performing ADC all over
again on the saved/processed TPR.
Example: After performing outlier removal you cancel ADC. If you had switched on
Add outlier removed data as TPR, then the outlier removed data will be added as a
new TPR. You can restart ADC later, but this time pick the TPR added for outlier
removed data in the selection list box. Make sure that you load the configuration file
you saved last time. The outliers that were removed last time will not appear.

PROCESSING
Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform 10
This button cancels ADC and does not save any data. In other
words this is a way to quit ADC without saving any processed data or
configuration data.
This button opens the ADC help file for user reference. This help
file can also be opened by pressing F1.
Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform

Wavelet decomposition is an analysis of the gauge data in terms of a range of
frequency levels from low to high. Low frequency components represent
trend information, while the high frequency end represents detail and abrupt
features (noise and events). The method can be used to denoise (smooth) data
and to identify events or break-points induced by flowrate changes.
For a review of wavelet filtering, see Processing and Interpretation of

Long-Term Data from Permanent Downhole Gauges by Athichanagorn, Horne
and Kikani, SPE 56419, ATCE Houston Oct 1999.
This topic contains the following sub-topics:
Outlier Removal
Interpolation
Denoising
Event Detection
Data Reduction
Abort Functionality
Addition of Reduced Data to Data Edit Plot Window
Outlier Removal
Outliers are data points that lie away from the trend of the data. They can
be identified by their misalignment with the rest of the data.

10 PROCESSING
Outlier Removal
Figure 87: Outliers in a dataset
Since an outlier is isolated and lies away from the rest of the data, it causes
discontinuities in the data stream, creating two consecutive singularities. For
example, an outlier that lies above the trend of the data departs from the data
trend, creating the first singularity. The second singularity is a result of a
sudden decrease from the outlier back to the trend of the signal. These
singularities are detected by using wavelets and analyzing their detail
coefficients.
Show Coefficients Plot: The Coefficient plot shows the detailed wavelet
coefficients. As mentioned in the previous paragraph, whenever there
exists an outlier in the data, the detail coefficient will first change sharply
in one direction, either increasing or decreasing, and then change again in
the opposite direction. Therefore, the singularities created by the outliers
can be detected by screening for two large amplitude detail coefficients
with opposite signs. An appropriate threshold can be selected by
carefully observing the coefficients plot.

PROCESSING
Outlier Removal 10
Figure 88: Wavelet coefficients plot for outlier removal
Show Stacked Plot: By default, the gauge and coefficient data will be
plotted in the lower and upper parts of the plot area (split plot mode)
as in the plot above. Check the Show Stacked Plot option at bottom left to
have both traces share the full plot area.
Threshold: This is the coefficient threshold (in pressure units) to remove

outliers. The default value is calculated by statistically analyzing the
coefficients plot. An outlier point in the original data will be removed
when two consecutive coefficients of opposite sign cross this threshold. A
rule of thumb in choosing a threshold is to ask oneself how far a point has
to be from the general trend to be considered an outlier. Since pressure
data may be spurious with outliers of different magnitudes, the obvious
outliers should be eliminated first, thus revealing the main structure of
the signal, and the less obvious ones can be eliminated iteratively.
Recursive: If the Recursive option is switched off, each new run will
restart from the original data that came through to this stage. If it is
switched on, successive runs will operate on the data left from the
previous run.
If, after making several runs in recursive mode, you wish to restart from
the original data, simply uncheck the box and run again.

10 PROCESSING
Interpolation
Outliers whose coefficients are higher than, say, 20 psi should be removed
first. Then, the threshold should be reduced successively to 15 psi, 10 psi,
and 5 psi and so on. Each time you enter a new threshold click Run & Plot
to perform outlier removal and view the results in the plot area.
Outlier Removed data set name: This will be the name of the dataset if
the Add outlier removed data as TPR option has been checked.
Figure 89: Outlier removed (red) data after applying iterative thresholding
Interpolation
In many cases, the pressure data is unevenly spaced. In order to obtain the
wavelet transform, the input data must be sampled uniformly. Interpolation
is a method of constructing new, evenly spaced, data points within the range
of a discrete set of known data points.
i Each new run will restart from the preprocessed data that came through to this
stage.
Type of Interpolation: There are two types of interpolation algorithms

implemented. One is Linear and other is Nearest.

PROCESSING
Interpolation 10
1. Linear Interpolation: A new point(s) is introduced between two
data points at a predetermined time. The pressure is determined by
interpolating on a line between the two neighboring input data
points.
2. Nearest Interpolation: A new point(s) is introduced between two

points at a predetermined time. The pressure is determined to be
the pressure of the point nearest (in time) among the two
neighboring input data points.
The default linear interpolation is recommended. Nearest interpolation

might not work as well as the linear interpolation method since they tend
to smear out the regions where there are rapid changes.
Interpolation Interval: This is the interpolation interval in seconds to

interpolate the data. A default value is suggested based on a preliminary
analysis of the data. This will usually be close to, and slightly less than,
the average sampling interval. The interpolation interval should not be
too small otherwise it would introduce many points, resulting in a huge
data set. Also if there are too many interpolated points between any two
points, the local behavior will be dominant and the overall trend will be
affected. On the other hand, if the interpolation interval is large then it
may end up losing data points. If the data points lost lie in the fast
changing early transient region then the results will be affected and the
algorithm may not be able to detect the exact rate change events in later
steps.
The Interpolation Interval must, of course, be less than the total time
range.
The Information dialog that appears after the run should show about the
same number of points as the original.
Tolerance Factor: During interpolation, if the difference between the

predetermined time of the point to be interpolated and time coordinate of
one of the neighboring data points is less than a certain tolerance factor,
then no interpolated point is created and the original point is preserved
with its time and pressure coordinates.
The tolerance factor must be less than 10% of the interpolation interval.

10 PROCESSING
Denoising
Figure 90: Interpolated data (red) using linear interpolation
Denoising
Denoising (smoothing) is a procedure that is applied to the data to reduce
the scattering and the fluctuations in the data values in order to extract the
most representative features. One of the most effective ways to denoise data
without making prior assumptions about their behavior is the wavelet
thresholding method. While most denoising methods tend to smear out sharp
features in the data, the wavelet thresholding method generally preserves
most of these features. In any case, the smearing effect cannot be avoided
when data spacing is large. The denoising process thus gives the best results
when the data is collected at a high sampling frequency.
i Each new run will restart from the outlier-removed data that came through to
this stage.
Wavelet type: Select a wavelet type: Haar or Sym8.

PROCESSING
Denoising 10
Decomposition level: Select the level of decomposition. The level of
decomposition represents the frequencies that will be smoothed out.
Level 1 represents frequencies that lie between the maximum frequency
fmax and fmax/2. Level 2 represents frequencies that lie between fmax/2 and
fmax/4 and so on. Therefore, Level 1 represents highest frequency noise
and level 10 is lowest frequency noise.
The decomposition level should satisfy the following equation: For the
maximum level (LMAX): 2LMAX number of interpolated points.
Smooth all levels up to this level: If this is ON then smoothing will

be applied to all the levels starting from level 1 up to the selected
level - that is, all the frequencies that lie between fmax and fmax / (2LMAX)
will be smoothed. If this is off, then only the frequencies
corresponding to selected level will be smoothed.
Thresholding Rule: Thresholding Rule: Select the threshold calculation

rule. Available selections are Rigrsure, Heursure, Minimax and Sqtwolog.
Rigrsure: This is an adaptive threshold selection using the principle

of Stein's Unbiased Risk Estimate (quadratic loss function). One gets
an estimate of the risk for a particular threshold value t. Minimizing
the risks in t gives a selection of the threshold value. Threshold is
where j is the level of decomposition.
[Ref:
http://www.mathworks.com/access/helpdesk_r13/help/toolbox/
wavelet/ch06_a44.html ]
[Ref: Wavelet Estimators in Nonparametric Regression: A Comparative

Simulation Study by Anestis Antoniadis, Jeremie Bigot, et al.,
Journal of Statistical Software, 6, Issue 6, 183 (2001).(Available
from http://www.jstatsoft.org/v06/i06/paper.)]

10 PROCESSING
Denoising
Sqtwolog: The square-two-log strategy adopted consists of

thresholding the coefficients of wavelet transform, not according to
the coefficients of the data with the threshold , but directly with a
threshold T suitably determined according to the noise model. We
assume Gaussian white noise; the estimator is obtained by preserving
only the coefficients of data that cross the threshold T= <
and replacing the others with 0 is satisfactory since it leads to almost
as good results (up to a logarithmic factor). (See the second reference
below, pg.228.)
[Ref:
[Ref: Wavelets and their Applications; Edited by Michel Misiti, Yves

Misiti, Georges Oppenheim]
Heursure: Heursure is a mixture of the two previous options. If the

signal-to-noise ratio is very small, the RIGSURE estimate is very
noisy. If such a situation is detected, the fixed form threshold
obtained from a universal thresholding method like RIGSURE is used
for lower levels of wavelet analysis where the noise content is not
appreciable, and Sqtwolog is used for higher levels where noise
content is appreciable.
[Ref:
[Ref: Discrete Wavelet-Based Thresholding Study On Acoustic

Emission;
www.engg.le.ac.uk/fss/DWT%20THRESHOLDING%20STUDY%20ON
%20AE%20TO%20DETECT%20BEARING%20DEFECT.pdf ]

PROCESSING
Denoising 10
Minimax: Minimax uses a fixed threshold chosen to yield minimax
performance (that is to minimize errors in the worst case scenario) for
mean square error against an ideal procedure. The minimax principle
is used in statistics in order to design estimators. Since the denoised
signal can be assimilated to the estimator of the unknown regression
function, the minimax estimator is the one that realizes the smallest
of the maximum mean square errors obtained for the worst function
in a given set.
[Ref:
[Ref: Wavelet Estimators in Nonparametric Regression: A Comparative

Simulation Study; by Anestis Antoniadis, Jeremie Bigot, et al;
Journal of Statistical Software, 6, Issue 6, 183 (2001).(Available
from http://www.jstatsoft.org/v06/i06/paper)]
Thresholding Type: Select a threshold type: Hard or Soft.
Hard Thresholding: Hard thresholding can be described as the usual

process of setting to zero the elements whose absolute values are
lower than the threshold. The hard threshold signal is x if x >
threshold, and is 0 if x threshold.
Soft Thresholding: Soft thresholding is an extension of hard

thresholding, first setting to zero the elements whose absolute values
are lower than the threshold, and then shrinking the non-zero
coefficients towards 0. This produces a rounded cut-off instead of a
sharp one.
Denoised data set name: This will be the name of the dataset if Add
denoised data as TPR has been checked.

10 PROCESSING
Event Detection
Figure 91: Noisy Data (purple) versus denoised Data (red) using sym8,
Decomposition level 6, Rigrsure and Soft Thresholding
Event Detection
Event detection is a wavelet-based algorithm to identify events or
break-points corresponding to sudden changes in the pressure in response
to a change in flowrate, (e.g., buildups and drawdowns). This behavior can be
recognized by applying appropriate wavelets.
i Unless the Multiple Step option is switched on, each new run will restart from
the original denoised data that came through to this stage.

PROCESSING
Event Detection 10
Shortest Transient Interval: This is the length of the shortest transient in
the dataset and is used to determine the level of wavelet decomposition.
The wavelet modulus maxima at different levels of decomposition
provide different types of information. Specifically, at intermediate levels,
the singularities caused by noise disappear while the signal singularities
are still present. From this characteristic, the beginning of a new transient
can be detected at an intermediate level of decomposition. This
intermediate level of decomposition depends on data spacing as well as
the length of the shortest transient in the data set. Zoom into various parts
of data set to estimate this value.
i Shortest transient interval should be greater than or equal to two times the
interpolation interval.
Show Coefficients Plot: This shows the wavelet coefficients plot at the
intermediate level. There will be spikes in the coefficient plot
corresponding to the events in the data set. By applying a threshold the
approximate location of these events can be determined.
Figure 92: Wavelet Coefficients Plot along with denoised data (split plot)

10 PROCESSING
Event Detection
Noise Threshold: Noise is an inherent characteristic of the signal.

Although we have denoised the signal in the previous step, there is still
some residual noise. Enter a value for the noise threshold in the denoised
signal. A pressure change up to this value between two points will not be
considered as the start of an event. Rerun Event Detection to see the
result.
Pressure Threshold: This is the wavelet coefficients threshold that will be

used to determine the approximate location of events in the dataset. A
suitable threshold should be entered by looking at the coefficients plot. A
lower threshold will increase the sensitivity to small pressure changes
that are responses to small variations in flow rate. However, the threshold
should not be too small or all minor variations such as noise may be
misinterpreted as new transients.
Multiple step mode: Sometimes the pressure signal contains small

transients as well as large transients. The small transients generally occur
due to small variations in flow rate while large transients are the response
to major rate changes. These transients cannot all be detected by entering
one single set of values for shortest transient interval and pressure
threshold. So the process needs to be repeated with different sets of
configuration values. Switch on the Multiple Step Mode option to enter a
new set of configuration values and to identify new events, which can, if
desired, be added to existing events using the Keep button.
Keep: This button will only be enabled if new events are detected in
Multiple Step Mode. Click Keep to save the new events identified in the
current pass. The events identified in the current pass will be added to the
previously identified events.
Clear: Click the Clear button to clear the new events identified in the
current pass.

PROCESSING
Data Reduction 10
Figure 93: Events detected (red markers) in the denoised data (blue)
If you have made a number of passes in Multiple Step Mode and you have kept
the results, to clear all kept events and replace them with a new set, switch off
the Multiple Step Mode option and click Run & Plot.
Data Reduction
The size of data sets acquired with permanent downhole pressure gauges is
enormous. A gauge system with a 10-second recording interval registers
more than three million data points a year. It is cumbersome even to plot the
data to see the general behavior, not to mention analyzing them. Data
reduction using wavelets reduces the data in such a manner that the events
are preserved in the reduced data set. The reduction is applied in the region
where pressure changes slowly.
Data reduction uses event information obtained from the previous step. Each
event has two phases, one is rapid phase (or transient region) and other is
gradual phase.
Rapid phase: The initial part of the event where pressure changes rapidly.
In this region the slope will be steep. The rate of change of pressure
decreases slowly and reaches a threshold at a certain point. The region
from the start of the event until this point is referred to as the rapid
phase.

10 PROCESSING
Data Reduction
Gradual phase: The rate of change of pressure with time is below the
threshold. The region from the end of the rapid phase to the start of the
next event is referred to as the 'gradual phase'.
The data in the rapid phase is not reduced, thereby preserving the early-time
detail required in transient analysis. The data in the later (and often longer)
gradual phase is reduced.
In order to determine the end of the rapid phase and start of the gradual
phase, a slope detection algorithm is applied for each event. The user inputs
the following parameters:
Slope Threshold: This is the maximum change in pressure per hour. If the
slope goes below this value at a certain time, then that point can be taken
as the start of the gradual phase.
Averaging Window Size: The slope is measured between two points a

certain time apart (see Moving window size). The slope between two points
can be spuriously high or low if there is noise or disturbance in the data,
so rather than use the actual time and pressure values at the two points,
an average is calculated for each, over a number of consecutive points
that lie on either side in the averaging window.
Moving Window Size: In order to avoid taking the slope between two
points that lie in noise or a disturbance, minimum time spacing can be
specified between the points.
Maximum Interval: Since the data is reduced logarithmically, the spacing

between consecutive points increases with time. Maximum Interval caps
the time spacing between points in the reduced data. Once this spacing is
reached, all the reduced points coming after this will be separated by this
interval. This can be used to control the amount of reduction in the
gradual phase.
Reduced data set name: Name of the reduced data set.
A logarithmic reduction is applied to the data in the gradual phase. The

reduced data here is therefore equally spaced in the log time domain, and
logarithmically spaced in the normal time domain.

PROCESSING
Abort Functionality 10
Figure 94: Reduced dataset (red) with unreduced (blue) (Zoomed
portion)
Abort Functionality
A progress bar is displayed when Run & Plot or Run All is clicked. The
progress bar displays the current step that is being processed. An Abort
button is provided on the progress bar to abort the processing at any time.
On aborting the Run & Plot command, the current operation will be
canceled, and the data will be returned to the state it was in before
starting the current process.
On aborting the Run All command, all processing will be canceled, and
you will be returned to the preprocessed data screen (Figure 87).
i You will not be able to do anything after Abort is invoked until it completes. This
might take some time be patient!

10 PROCESSING
Figure 95: The progress bar

Once you click Finish or Run All on ADC, any pending workflow steps will be
performed and the reduced data added as a new dataset. The Rate Changes
Table will be populated with the event data obtained in the ADC (if selected
to add).
The reduced data, along with flow periods if saved, is plotted in the Data Edit
Plot window. The previously plotted (raw) data, and rate changes (if any),
will be removed from the plot window.
Figure 96: Reduced data plotted in the Data Edit Plot window along with
flow periods

PROCESSING
Data Conditioning Workflow Savitzky-Golay 10
Figure 97: Rate changes table after ADC
Data Conditioning Workflow Savitzky-Golay

The Savitzky-Golay Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filter is a filter that fits
polynomials of various degrees to the data in a moving window. The
coefficients of the polynomials are determined automatically for a least
squares best-fit. The method has proven to be effective in identifying events
or break-points induced by abrupt flowrate changes, and in denoising the
data. For a review of this and other filtering methods, see Analyzing
Simultaneous Rate and Pressure Data from Permanent Downhole Gauges by Rai
and Horne (SPE 110097, Anaheim ATCE Non 2007).
This topic contains the following sub-topics:
Outlier Removal
Interpolation
Event Detection
Denoising
Data Reduction
Abort Functionality

10 PROCESSING
Outlier Removal
Outlier Removal
For more information about Outlier Removal, see the corresponding section
of Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform.
Figure 98: Coefficients plot for outlier removal
Interpolation
An even data spacing in the time domain is required for the Savitzky-Golay
method. This is ensured by creating a temporary dataset consisting of values
interpolated at equal time-steps. For more information about the
methodology and operation, see the corresponding section of Data
Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform.

PROCESSING
Event Detection 10
Figure 99: Interpolated data (red) using linear interpolation
Event Detection
Click on the Show S-G Derivative button. A split plot showing the interpolated
pressure and the Savitzky-Golay first derivative will appear. This can take
several tens of seconds with large datasets.

10 PROCESSING
Event Detection
Figure 100: Savitzky-Golay Derivative for event detection
The event break-points will appear as spikes in the derivative.

PROCESSING
Event Detection 10
Figure 101: Savitzky-Golay Derivative detail (stacked plot presentation
mode, adjusted scales)
Click on Run & Plot to activate the event detection process. Make the
following adjustments until satisfactory results have been obtained:
Derivative Noise Threshold: Any derivative feature larger than this

threshold setting will be treated as an event. Refer to the plotted
derivative to get an idea of the noise level. The threshold can be adjusted
by trial-and-error until the best results are obtained.
Sliding Window: This controls the number of points on either side of the
center-point for the derivative calculation. A wider window will produce
a stronger derivative amplitude, but the event spikes will be broader. This
should be adjusted in conjunction with the Noise Threshold.
Polynomial Degree: This is internal to the Savitzky-Golay algorithm. The

default setting of 4 has been found to produce good results.

10 PROCESSING
Denoising
With typical PDG data containing a large number of events, it will rarely be
possible to identify all of the valid break-points, or to avoid triggering on
noise or spurious pressure changes. The final settings will most likely be a
compromise, and some post-process cleaning up and editing is to be
expected.
Figure 102: Events detected (red markers) in the interpolated data

(brown)
Denoising
Two smoothing algorithms are offered in the Denoising section:
Savitzky-Golay:
The degree of smoothing is controlled by:
Sliding Window: The window width is expressed in terms of the

number of points on either side of the center-point. The larger the
number, the smoother the data.
Polynomial Degree: This is internal to the Savitzky-Golay algorithm.

The default setting of 4 has been found to produce good results.

PROCESSING
Denoising 10
Loess Local Regression Fit: a local linear estimator based on nearest
neighbors. A smoothed estimate of the data is constructed by local linear
regression about each point in the time series by fitting simple models
(polynomials) to localized subsets of the data) defined by the width of the
Sliding Window.
Sliding Window: This defines the number of points to be used in the

regression and is expressed in terms of the number of points on either
side of the center-point.
Weight Basis: There are two options available:
Linear Time: The weighting profile is defined in real time about

the central point.
Log Time: The weighting profile (see below) is defined in

logarithmic time about the central point.
With high density data acquisition, you will probably not see much
difference between the two weighting methods. The Log Time option
is recommended for a logarithmically (or delta-p) sampled gauge,
where the raw data will appear fairly evenly spaced in log time.
Weight Shape: Each point in the averaging window is multiplied by

a weighting factor for the local least-squares estimate. Points further
from the current center-point are assigned less weight than points
nearer to it. The functions used for calculating the weights are:
Peaked: This discriminates strongly against points not

immediately adjacent to the current center-point.
Distributed: The weighting is more evenly distributed over the

window, with a less severe discrimination against the remoter
points.
Minimize End Effect: This attempts to reduce any artificial

end-effects that result from smoothing. (These are most easily seen on
the Log-Log Plot as kicks at the end of the derivative.) The end
effect minimization gradually reduces the sliding window width
towards 1 as the end of the data set is approached. This is done in
reverse at the start of the data set, where the number of nearest
neighbors is increased from 1 initially.

10 PROCESSING
Data Reduction
Figure 103: Data denoised using the Savitzky-Golay smoothing filter
Data Reduction
For information about Data Reduction, see the corresponding section of
Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform.
Abort Functionality
For information about Abort Functionality, see the corresponding section of
Data Conditioning Workflow Wavelet Transform.

For information about the Addition of reduced data to Data Edit Plot
Window, see the corresponding section of Data Conditioning Workflow
Wavelet Transform.

PROCESSING
Example Tutorial 10
Example Tutorial
Lets take an example data set and perform advanced gauge data
conditioning on it. Load test2.tpr from the installation data folder and plot it
in PanSystem. The pressures in this file are psia, and the tutorial is described
using oil field (absolute) units. After import, you may work through this
tutorial using an alternative units system if you prefer, making the necessary
conversions to the cited threshold values, etc. as you go.
Figure 104: Example Tutorial Pressure Plot
Go to the Data Preparation menu option and select Adv Gauge Data
Conditioning. Click No when asked about loading a configuration file.
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning opens up the following screen
displaying the pre-processed data.

10 PROCESSING
Example Tutorial
Figure 105: Example Tutorial Pressure Plot Pre-Processed Data
Observe outliers in the data. Click the Show Coefficients plot button.
Figure 106: Pressure Plot with Outliers

PROCESSING
Example Tutorial 10
The first two peaks are of opposite sign and correspond to an outlier point.
Specify a Threshold value of 1340.00 (as read from the coefficients plot) and
then click Run & Plot to remove this outlier.
Figure 107: Pressure Plot with Selective Removal of Outliers
Make sure that the Recursive check box is checked. Now specify a lower
threshold of 500 psi and then click Run & Plot.

10 PROCESSING
Example Tutorial
Figure 108: Removal of Outliers with a New Threshold Value (100 psi)
Click Show Coefficients Plot to determine a new Threshold value.
Specify 400 psi as the Threshold and then click Run & Plot.

PROCESSING
Example Tutorial 10
Again check the coefficients plot and enter a Threshold of 100 psi and then
click Run & Plot to remove the remaining outlier.
Click Next to go to Interpolation workflow.
Default coefficient values are suggested based on a preliminary analysis of

data.
Interpolation Interval should not be too small otherwise it will introduce many
points resulting in a huge data set. On the other hand, if the Interpolation
Interval is large then it may end up losing data points. The Interpolation
Interval must be less than the total time range.
The Tolerance Factor should be selected such that it is less than 10% of the
interpolation interval.
Select Type of Interpolation as Linear, Interpolation Interval as 720 seconds,

and Tolerance Factor as 36 seconds. Click Run & Plot to interpolate the data.

10 PROCESSING
Example Tutorial
Figure 111: Data Interpolation
Click Next to go to the Denoising workflow.
Figure 112: Denoising

PROCESSING
Example Tutorial 10
The default coefficient values are suggested based on the preliminary
analysis of data for denoising. You can choose other values and see the effect
on the processing. Select the Decomposition Level such that it satisfies the
equation for Maximum level (LMAX): 2LMAX number of interpolated points.
The level of decomposition represents the frequencies that will be smoothed

out. If Smooth all levels... is on then smoothing will be applied to all the
levels starting from level 1 up to the selected level: that is, all the frequencies
that lie between fmax and fmax/ (2LMAX) will be smoothed out.
Click Next to go to the Event Detection workflow.
Figure 113: Event Detection
Specify the Shortest Transient Interval parameter and then click Show
Coefficients Plot for plotting event detection coefficients.

10 PROCESSING
Example Tutorial
Figure 114: Plotting Event Detection Coefficients
By specifying a Pressure Threshold (read from the Pressure Coefficient Plot)

and the Shortest Transient Interval time, the approximate location of these
events can be determined. Set the threshold such that it is greater than or
equal to two times the interpolation interval and less than the total time
interval, and then click Run & Plot to detect the events.

PROCESSING
Example Tutorial 10
Figure 115: Detecting Event Locations
In some datasets, some transients cannot be detected by entering one single

set of configuration values. The process can be repeated with different sets of
Pressure Threshold and Shortest Transient Interval times by switching ON the
Multiple Step Mode.

10 PROCESSING
Example Tutorial
Figure 116: Process Repetition for Event Detection
Enter new values for the configuration parameters. If more Events are
detected, click Keep to keep these events, or else click Clear to clear the newly
detected events from memory. For this tutorial, click Clear because the new
events are not needed
Click Next to go to the Data Reduction workflow.
The default values are suggested based on the preliminary analysis of data for
data reduction. You can choose other values and see the effect on reduction.
Set the appropriate parameters and then click Run & Plot to see the reduced
data.

PROCESSING
Example Tutorial 10
Figure 117: Plot with Reduced Data
Click OK. The reduced data can be seen in the plot with the denoised data.
Figure 118: Reduced Data with Denoised Data
Zoom in to observe the reduction achieved.

10 PROCESSING
Example Tutorial
Figure 119: Zoom-In on the Plot
Click Finish to close the Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning dialog box and
to return to the Data Edit Plot from where further preparation of the data can
be carried out if desired.
Figure 120: Return to the Data Edit Plot

PROCESSING
Data Reduction and Smoothing Details 10
DATA REDUCTION AND SMOOTHING

DETAILS
Functionality:
Use the Data Reduction and Smoothing facility to reduce the number of points
in the file or in a selected portion of the file, and to smooth out
noise. Oscillations induced by tidal effects can often be more effectively
removed using this facility than by using the Tidal Filter.
Acts on: Three possibilities:
Click and drag to draw a box with the mouse pointer, holding down the
left mouse button, and then reduce/smooth the data contained within the
box.
Select a single test period (i.e. if any have been defined), by selecting the
upper half of the ruler bar above the plot, or several contiguous test
periods by holding down the SHIFT key and sliding the mouse pointer
over the test periods required, then reduce/smooth the data.
Do not select or draw anything, and then reduce/smooth the entire data
set.
When this button option is selected the Enter Reduction/Smoothing Details

dialog is generated. Users may elect to:
Reduce the data.

Smooth the data.
Both, in which case it will Smooth then Reduce.
The Enter Reduction/Smoothing Details dialog is comprised four data

entry/selection areas, with two associated check boxes and three function
buttons, described as follows:
Reduce Data check box: Check/uncheck this check box to activate/de-activate

the Data Reduction areas of the dialog.

10 PROCESSING
Delete every nth point: In the lower selection area, users will need to
specify a value for n (e.g., delete every 5th point).
Resample by delta signal: This requires a Signal Column to be selected

using the drop-down menu in the lower selection area. Enter the
Delta Signal value in the lower selection area (e.g. if users enter 0.1
psi for a Signal Column = Pressure, starting from the first data point
in the selected portion of the plot (if any), the re-sampling filter will
only retain points at a spacing of 0.1 psi, or the next nearest to that if
there is no point at the exact spacing). The first and last points in the
reduction interval are always retained. This filter allows the user to
keep data when the signal is greater than their input value or remove
the data when the signal is greater than their input value.
Resample by delta time: In the lower selection area, enter the Delta
Time that the data will be re-sampled at (e.g. if users enter 0.01 hrs for
Delta Time, starting from the first data point in the plot (or a selected
portion of the plot), the re-sampling filter will only retain points at a
spacing of 0.01 hrs, or the next nearest to that if there is no point at the
exact time). The first and last points in the reduction interval are
always retained.
Resample to n points per log cycle: In the lower selection area, enter the
number of Points per Log Cycle of time that are to be kept. This will
produce logarithmically-spaced data. If users have defined several
flow periods and they do not select any particular one, the
logarithmic filter will sweep through the entire test, but will re-start
the spacing logic at each rate change, thereby giving a useful
logarithmic spacing in each period. Alternatively, individual periods
may be selected for reduction. The first and last points in the
reduction interval are always retained.
Dual logarithmic and nth point reduction: This will apply Resample to n
points per log cycle reduction and Keep every nth point reduction in
parallel, and combine the points remaining from each. The first and
last points in the reduction interval are always retained. In the lower
selection area, enter values for the nth point to keep and Points per log
cycle, as described above.

PROCESSING
Outlier Removal: The data set will be reduced by a statistical averaging
algorithm and any data that falls outside of a normal range on either
side of the mean will be eliminated. This facility should generally be
used at least once to clean up noisy data, as the range becomes
narrower with each pass.
Wavelet Reduction: The data set will be reduced by applying a spline

based wavelet algorithm to remove noisy data points. Select the
desired percentage of data to keep, and select the Signal column from
the drop-down list. Rate data and pressure data can be reduced by
wavelet reduction. A reduced output file name can be maintained to
keep the original data prior to reduction.
Reduced Output File: A new reduced data set will be created, leaving
the original data set intact in case users wish to return to it. A default
prefix RD1, will be added to the file name. When users return to the
Data files/columns list, they will see the new file containing the
reduced data columns.
The action of deleting does not actually remove any data points from memory,
i
it simply flags them so that they are not displayed. This makes it possible to
quickly undo any deletions (by removing the flags). Deletion can be made
permanent with the button (confirm), in which case the data points are
removed from memory.
Users can quickly restore the points deleted by the very last reduction
i
operation by clicking the Undo button on the toolbar. To restore the points
deleted by all the reduction operations performed on the selected file, file
(since the last time was used) select the Restore All Unconfirmed Data
Changes button on the toolbar.
i
Since these deletion algorithms create a parallel reduced dataset prefixed by
RD1, etc, remember that your original data can still be found intact in the Data
Files/Column list of the Workspace.

10 PROCESSING
Smooth Data checkbox: Check/uncheck this checkbox to

activate/de-activate the Data Smoothing areas of the dialog.
Smoothing time increases with the square of the number of points to be

Smoothed (e.g. if it takes (typically) 10 seconds to process 10,000 points, it will
take 40 seconds to do 20,000). If more than 10,000 data points are to be
i
Smoothed, and a Data Reduction has just been performed, the deleted points
can be cleared from memory using the (Confirm) button to speed up the
Smoothing operation. If not, Smoothing time will be the same as for the
pre-reduction data set, as PanSystem will still have to work through all of the
data points held in memory, whether they are to be included in the smoothing
or not.
Smoothing Type area (upper and lower selection area): The purpose of
the smoothing option is to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of one or
several selected time series (e.g. pressure, rate, temperature, etc.). The
smoothing algorithm is a local linear estimator based on nearest
neighbors, (i.e. a smoothed estimate of the data is constructed by local
linear regression about each point in the time series).
Loess - local regression fit: The smoothing algorithm is a local linear

estimator based on nearest neighbors, (i.e. a smoothed estimate of the
data is constructed by local linear regression about each point in the
time series by fitting simple models (polynomials) to localized
subsets of the data).
Window span: This defines the number of points to be used in the

regression and is expressed as a fraction of the total number of
points in the dataset to be smoothed (in the selected test period,
zoom box, or the entire test). It is recommended to start with 0.1
(i.e.: 10%). (Suppose there are N=500 points and the window span
is 0.1. The number of nearest neighbor points to be used in the
filter will be calculated as 500 x 0.1 = 50)
Moving Average: The Loess technique is computationally heavy, and

will be time-consuming when dealing with large data sets. Moving
Average is a simplistic, and therefore faster, smoothing algorithm.
A simple arithmetic average is calculated for every point in the series by

taking the sum of N points on either side and then dividing by (2N+1). N
is the user entry for the number of points.

PROCESSING
Number of points before and after: the number of points to be used is

directly specified
Flow period percentage: the number of points is defined as a

fraction of the total number in each flow period. The actual
number used will therefore vary according to the number in the
flow period being smoothed.
These two smoothing options share some additional control parameters:
Weight Basis: There are two options available:
Linear Time: The weight shape profile (see below) is defined in real
time (ti-tn) about the central point at tn.
Log Time: The weight shape profile (see below) is defined in

logarithmic time (logti-logtn) about the central point at tn.
With high density data acquisition, users will probably not see much
difference between the two methods. The Log Time option is recommended
for a logarithmically (or delta-p) sampled gauge, where the raw data will
appear fairly evenly spaced in log time.
Weighting Shape: For the Loess method, each point in the averaging group of
Mspan is multiplied by a weight (w), for the local least-squares estimate.
Points further from the current data point are assigned less weight than
points nearer to it. The functions used for calculating the weights are:
Peaked: This discriminates strongly against points (ti) not

immediately adjacent to the current point (tn).
Distributed: The weighting is more evenly distributed over the Mspan

group, with a less severe discrimination against the remoter points.
Weight shape is fixed at Distributed for the Moving average option.
Minimize End Effect: This attempts to reduce any artificial end-effects that
result from smoothing. These are most easily seen on the Log-Log Plot
as kicks at the end of the derivative. The end effect minimization
gradually reduces the number of nearest neighbors from Mspan towards
1 as the end of the data set is approached. This is done in reverse at the
start of the data set, where the number of nearest neighbors is increased
from 1 initially.

10 PROCESSING
Show Number of Points
Columns to Smooth: Choose one or more columns from the list of available
data. PanSystem will assign default prefixes to the smoothed output
columns (e.g. if the input column is called Pressure, the default smoothed
output will be SM1 Pressure. A second smoothing operation on Pressure
will create a default output column SM2 Pressure, and so on. Note that a
second smoothing operation on SM1 Pressure will create a default output
column SM1 SM1 Pressure). Users may alter the output names via the
Names button if required.
i
Creating a new data column for the smoothed data means that the unsmoothed
data still exists and can be recovered if necessary. The **** Restore All
Unconfirmed Data Changes and Undo buttons do NOT remove the effects of
smoothing.
Smoothed Output Column Names: This button opens the Smoothed

Column Names sub-dialog, where users can edit the names of the
smoothed data. By default, PanSystem renames the data columns by
prefixing them with SMn as described above in Columns to Smooth,
(where n = the incremental saved smoothing number).
SHOW NUMBER OF POINTS

Functionality:
Use Number to display the number of non-deleted data points in a selection.
The Number of Points information dialog displays the number of non-deleted

points in the currently selected test period/s or the total number of
non-deleted points, if a test period is not selected.
Acts on: The selected flow period or the whole data if no flow period is
selected. Only works with one file plotted.

PROCESSING
Ungroup Flow Periods 10
UNGROUP FLOW PERIODS

Functionality:
Use Ungroup Flow Periods to reverse the grouping of contiguous Flow Periods
made by the Group Flow Periods button.
Acts on: The selected Test Period Classification.
Operational Procedure:
Select the Test Period to be ungrouped by left-clicking it on the upper part

of the Ruler Bar, then select the Ungroup a group of flow periods button.
The Rate Change marker arrows in the lower half of the Ruler Bar define the
Flow Periods, the lines in the upper half of the Ruler Bar define the Test Periods.

10 PROCESSING
Ungroup Flow Periods

Chapter 11
TIDAL FILTERING
Tidal Filtering - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Maritime Tide Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Edit the Tide Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Subsea Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Select Sub-sea Pressure Gauge Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Edit the Tidal Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tidal Filter Mode Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Calculate Tidal Lag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Tidal Filtering - Overview
TIDAL FILTERING - OVERVIEW

General:
The Tidal Filtering facility in PanSystem corrects for the effects of ocean tides
on extended well test data. The filter works as follows:
The local sea tidal waveform (Tide Height or Pressure versus Time) is first
synchronized with the Well Test record so as to correlate with the
tide-induced features in the Gauge Data.
This waveform is then subtracted from the Gauge Data. A suitable scaling
factor is found by trial and error, such that the tidal disturbances are
reduced to a minimum.
Figure 121: Example of Gauge Data Affected by Tidal Effects
The Tidal filtering ribbon on the Data Preparation view provides two different
methods of including tide data for use with the Tidal Filter facility:
Maritime Tide Table: This approach constructs a tidal signal from

published maritime tide tables (i.e. high and low Tide Heights versus Time)
covering the period of the well test.

TIDAL FILTERING
Maritime Tide Table 11
Select Sub-sea Pressure Gauge Dialog: This approach uses data from a
sub-sea pressure gauge directly for the tidal signal.
Before attempting to remove tidal effects in this manner, users should try the
data smoothing facility available on the Processing ribbon. This plot is
generated by double-clicking a data file in the Source Explorer. Once a plot
has been generated, use the Data Reduction and Smoothing option from the
Processing ribbon on the Data Preparation view, to generate the Data
Reduction and Smoothing Details dialog and apply Data Smoothing. This
may be sufficient for reducing small amplitude tidal interference effects to an
acceptable level.
MARITIME TIDE TABLE

General:
This is one of two options available (i.e. Maritime Tide Table or Select
Sub-sea Pressure Gauge Dialog) on the Tidal Filtering ribbon of the Data
Preparation view. It is used to construct a tidal signal from published
maritime tide tables (i.e. high and low Tide Heights versus Time) covering the
period of the well test.
On selection of the Maritime Tide Table sub-menu option, an Edit the Tide
Table dialog is generated, the objectives of which are:
To enter the high and low Tide Heights and Times for the period spanning
the well test (max 100 lines). The data can either be typed in, loaded from
an existing file, or pasted in from an external editor. The table is saved as
part of the (*.PANX) file.
To enter Local Time information to enable approximate synchronization

between the tidal waveform and the gauge clock.
An alternative to using published tide tables is to place a pressure gauge on

the sea-bed (or anywhere below the sea surface) and record the tidal
fluctuations as a change in hydrostatic pressure. If tidal pressure gauge data
is to be used, refer to the Help topic for Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge.

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tide Table
EDIT THE TIDE TABLE

General:
This dialog is accessed by selecting the Maritime Tide Table option from
the Tidal Filtering ribbon. It is used to construct and/or edit a tidal signal from
published maritime tide tables (i.e. high and low Tide Heights versus Time)
covering the period of the well test.
The main objectives of this dialog are:
To enter and/or edit data manually, load in from an existing file, or paste
in from an external editor. The table is saved as part of the (*.PANX) file.

between the tidal waveform and the gauge clock (i.e. using the Parameters
button).
i Note that PanSystem V-1.80 tide tables are not compatible.
Two columns of data are displayed, but within the table field, only 16 rows
can be viewed at a time. Users can scroll through the file using the scroll bar
on the right-hand side of the table field to move cell by cell (i.e. left
mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar
either side of slider).
For Windows 2000 and later users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button
cell).

TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tide Table 11
edit buttons located down the right-hand side of the dialog can also be used
for the following:
: Jumps to a specified row within the table range. Refer to Going to a

Specific Row.




11 TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tide Table
format).
: Change the value in a selected cell. Refer to Editing a Single Cell.
: Change the time format. Refer to Editing the Time Format.
i
Successive entries in the tide table should represent high and low Tide Times
and Heights - over a period slightly longer than the duration of the well test. Do
not enter any intermediate Times and Heights.
: Opens the Edit Tide Table Parameters sub-dialog that allows

users to synchronize regional and Local Times to the gauge clock Time
and mean Tide Height.

TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tide Table 11
: This option allows users to select a data file by generating a

Windows file Open dialog, filtered to accept suitable file types. This is a
standard file Open option, to import a tide table in (*.SEA) format. The
ASCII format of the (*.SEA) file (introduced in V-2.6), is described below.
Earlier binary format files from program versions as far back as
PanSystem V-2.3 (16-bit and 32-bit) can also be imported.
File Structure for ASCII (*.SEA):
[18922 = code word]
[Local time at 12:00 ST] [Test start time (gauge)] [Test start time (local)] [Mean
tide height]
t1 h1
t2 h2
....
....
tn-1 hn-1
tn hn
0 0
tj = time in decimal hours, hj = tide height (i.e. at high and low tide points
only).
All Times are cumulative decimal hours (e.g. 14:30:00 on the first day in the
table is 14.500, 14:30:00 next day is 38.500, and so on). The file may be space-
or tab-delimited. The final row of zeroes defines the end of the file.
Maximum 100 lines.
Example:
18922
12.000000 0.000000 9.500000 3.608920
50.266666 1.968500

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Subsea Pressure Gauge
56.566666 4.921260
62.700001 2.624670
68.683334 4.921260
75.300003 2.296590
81.699997 4.593180
87.933334 2.952760
....
....
193.833328 4.921260
199.833328 1.968504
206.250000 5.249344
212.433334 1.968504
0.000000 0.000000
SUBSEA PRESSURE GAUGE

General:
This is one of two options available (i.e. Maritime Tide Table or Sub-Sea
Pressure Gauge) on the Tidal Filtering ribbon of the Data Preparation view. An
alternative to using published tide tables is to place a pressure gauge on the
sea bed (or anywhere below the sea surface) and record the tidal fluctuations
as a change in hydrostatic pressure.
i
Before using this option, the sub-sea pressure gauge data must be imported
into PanSystem using an option on the Import data ribbon of the Import/Export
Data view.

TIDAL FILTERING
Select Sub-sea Pressure Gauge Dialog 11
On selection of the Sub Sea Pressure Gauge sub-menu option, a Select Sub-sea
Pressure Gauge Dialog is generated. Providing that data has been imported,
the available tidal gauge data will be displayed in a drop-down list.
On selection of the required tidal gauge data, then the OK button, an Edit the
Tidal Pressure Gauge will be generated.
i
Unless tidal gauge data has already been imported into PanSystem it will not
appear in this list - select Cancel and import the data using the Import data
ribbon of the Import/Export Data view.
If sub-sea pressure gauge data is unavailable, published tide tables can be

used. For details of how these are used, refer to the Help topic for Maritime
Tide Table.
SELECT SUB-SEA PRESSURE GAUGE

DIALOG
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Tidal Filtering ribbon of the Data Preparation
view and then selecting Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge. It is used to select the
appropriate Pressure Gauge column from a sub-sea pressure gauge directly for
the tidal signal, as an alternative to using published Maritime Tide Table.
In this case, the pressure gauge is placed on the sea-bed (or anywhere below
the sea surface), where it records the tidal fluctuations as a change in
hydrostatic pressure.
i Before using this option, the sub-sea pressure gauge data must be imported
into PanSystem using the Import Data ribbon on the Import/Export Data view.

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tidal Pressure Gauge
The sub-dialog is described as follows:
Sub-sea pressure gauge: Using the drop-down menu, select a data set from
the available Pressure Gauge columns (i.e. data set/s imported via the
Import Data ribbon on the Import/Export Data view).
Select the required tidal gauge data, then the OK button, to generate an Edit
the Tidal Pressure Gauge sub-dialog.
i
Unless tidal gauge data has already been imported into PanSystem it will not
appear in this list - select Cancel and import the data using the Import Data
ribbon on the Import/Export Data view.
EDIT THE TIDAL PRESSURE GAUGE

General:
This dialog is accessed via the Subsea Pressure Gauge option on the Tidal
filtering ribbon of the Data Preparation view. This sub-menu option generates a
Select Tidal Pressure Gauge dialog, and providing that gauge data has been
imported, the available tidal gauge data will be displayed in a drop-down list.
On selection of the required tidal gauge data, then the OK button, an Edit
Tidal Pressure Gauge sub-dialog will be generated; this is used to construct
and/or edit a table of tidal fluctuations as a change in Hydrostatic Pressure
versus Time, covering the period of the well test.
The main objectives of the dialog are:
To enter and/or edit data manually, load in from an existing file, or paste
in from an external editor. The table is saved as part of the (*.PANX) file.

between the tidal waveform and the gauge clock (i.e. using the Parameters
button).

TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tidal Pressure Gauge 11
Two columns of data are displayed, but within the table field, only 16 rows
can be viewed at a time. Users can scroll through the file using the scroll bar
on the right-hand side of the table field to move cell by cell (i.e. left
mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar
either side of slider).
For Windows 2000 users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button
cell).
edit buttons located down the right-hand side of the dialog can also be used
for the following:

Specific Row.


11 TIDAL FILTERING
Edit the Tidal Pressure Gauge


format).

TIDAL FILTERING
Tidal Filter Mode Facility 11
: Change the time format. Refer to Editing the Time Format.
i
Successive entries in the tide table should represent high and low Tide Times
and Heights - over a period slightly longer than the duration of the well test. Do
not enter any intermediate Times and Heights.
: Opens the Edit Tide Table Parameters sub-dialog that allows

users to synchronize regional and Local Times to the gauge clock Time and
mean Tide Height.
TIDAL FILTER MODE FACILITY

General:
Use Tidal Filter Mode option to enter this specific mode on the Data Edit Plot. If
there is more than one pressure record plotted on the screen, a dialog will
prompt users to select which column the Tidal Filter is to act on. If users
receive this Column to Filter dialog, they need to select the column to be
filtered.
i Before using this facility, users must first have entered a Tide Table using one
of the Tide Data options from the Tidal Filtering ribbon.
If users select the Tidal Filter Mode option, the pressure and tidal data will
be displayed on the Data Edit Plot; all other options are de-activated in
this mode, except for the Calculate Tidal Lag option. In the following
example, the tide signal is derived from maritime tide tables:

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Tidal Filter Mode Facility
Figure 122: Data Edit Plot - Pressure and Tidal Data
Normally, users will need a finer plotting scale in order to be able to

synchronize the two data sets. De-select the Tidal Filter Mode option. On
the Data Edit Plot, click and drag a box with two opposite corners
positioned on the data. One of the diagonals of the box should follow the
trend of the pressure data as illustrated below:
Figure 123: Pressure Zoom-In (Tidal Filter Mode Deselected)
! Do not click the Zoom In button after this procedure, select the Tidal Filter
Mode option again.

TIDAL FILTERING
Calculate Tidal Lag 11
A zoomed display will appear, but the diagonal trend across the zoom
box will have been backed out. If the box was drawn carefully, the test
data will be rotated more or less to the horizontal, making it easier to
compare with the tidal waveform:
Figure 124: Data Test Plot (Easier Test Data to Tidal Waveform Comparison)
The next step is to estimate the time lag between the two curves. This is
achieved with the Calculate Tidal Lag option.
CALCULATE TIDAL LAG

Functionality:
The Calculate Tidal Lag facility is used to estimate the Time Lag between the
two curves (i.e. the peaks on the Gauge Data will be a fraction of an hour later
than the Tide Table peaks).
i
Note that before using this facility, users must first have entered a Tide Table
using one of the Tide Data options on the Tidal filtering ribbon, then
synchronized the pressure and tidal data curves on the Data Edit Plot, using
the Tidal Filter Mode Facility.

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog
On the zoomed plot created with the Tidal Filter Mode Facility , select a
correlatable point on a Tide Table peak or trough, and the corresponding
peak or trough on the test data, as illustrated below:
Figure 125: Correlatable Point
Select the Calculate Tidal Lag option and the time-lag will be reported in a
Tidal Filter dialog.
On selecting OK from this dialog, the tidal waveform is re-drawn shifted

by this amount. It should now be synchronised with the features in the
test data.
This exercise can be repeated until a satisfactory match is obtained. The

cumulative time-lag will be reported each time.
The next step is to shift and re-scale the data using the Tidal Filter option.
SAVE TIDAL FILTERED DATA SUB-DIALOG

General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the Tidal Filter Mode option
after performing a Tidal Filtering operation with the Tidal Filter option. It
allows users to save the filtered tidal data under a new column name, thus
preserving the original data.

TIDAL FILTERING
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog 11
Selecting OK will plot the raw and filtered data for the entire test.
Selecting Cancel will nullify the filtering and just re-plot the original data.

11 TIDAL FILTERING
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog

Chapter 12
TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Test Design Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

12 TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design
EDIT TEST DESIGN

General:
This dialog is accessed from the Test design ribbon on the Data Preparation
view by selecting the Edit Test Design button, and then clicking OK on the
Select a File dialog box. It is provided for setting up Test Design runs for use
with the Advanced Simulation option found on the Simulation View
Overview menu.
i This option will be grayed-out (i.e. disabled) if users do not have a licence for
the Advanced Simulation option (i.e. the Version 2 equivalent of PanSim).
For a Test Design, the surface rate schedule and computational time-steps for
each individual well involved need to be specified by the user.
The Advanced Simulation option will subsequently compute the response of

the reservoir model to these surface rates. The result is a prediction of
flowing pressures and downhole Flow Rates at each time-step.
i The reservoir model must be fully defined by the user in terms of permeability,
skin, etc.
The main features of the dialog and a suggested workflow are described
below:
The Test Design option is used to create a new data file for each well, with the
times and surface rates specified. This dialog box will only appear if the
currently selected well is the principal well.
1. Data Point: This is the identification number for data points, set in
chronological order.
2. Time/Rate: In these first two columns of the table field, enter the time (i.e.
cumulative) of each rate change, and the rate prior to the change. Enter a
negative rate for injection.

TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design 12
The first flow period is assumed to start at time = zero, so the first entry (i.e.
line 1), must have a time value > 0. If users want the test to begin at a later
time, define the first line as a shut-in (i.e. flowrate = 0) up to this time. Use
negative flowrates for injection wells.
3. No. of Steps: In Column 3, enter the number of time-steps required in each

flow period.
4. Format: In Column 4, enter the spacing format of the time-steps. This is done
according to the following convention:
1 = Linear (divide flow period into equally spaced steps)
2 = Logarithmic, first step 0.001 hours
Linear time-stepping is recommended (but not mandatory), if users are

looking particularly at wellbore storage or the pseudo steady-state part of an
extended drawdown in a closed reservoir, both of these flow regimes being
essentially linear with time. Otherwise, users are advised to use logarithmic
spacing.
Logarithmic and linear spacings can be mixed and it is also possible to

subdivide a flow period into different step formats.
Once the Test Design has been edited, select OK to generate a Test Design
Sub-Dialog.
Within the table field, only 16 rows can be viewed at a time. Users can scroll
through the file using the scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to
move cell by cell (i.e. left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left
mouse-click on scroll bar either side of slider).

12 TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design
For Windows 2000 users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button
cell).
Individual cells can be edited by highlighting and entering a new value.
The editing buttons situated at the top of the dialog are used for the
following:

Specific Row.




TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design 12
format).
This button generates the Rate Data Transfer sub-dialog; this is

used for:
Importing Rate Changes Data from an external source. This is

useful if the Test has an extensive History and the Time/Rate data are
already in ASCII file format (e.g. exported from a spreadsheet). This
can also be achieved using the Paste button.

12 TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design
Transferring a Rate Changes Table. A Rate Changes Table already

entered for one dataset (e.g. an Upper Gauge), can be transferred into a
new Rate Changes Table required for a second dataset (e.g. Lower
Gauge).
i
Rate Changes can also be defined graphically by identifying the Points where
the Flow Rate changed on the Data Edit Plot (refer to the Data Edit Plot
Overview for details). Users can still view or edit Rate Changes created
graphically within this dialog.
Test Design for Interfering Wells:
If users have Multiple Wells, they can either enter new Times and Flow Rates for
each Well independently, or use the Time-Steps created for the Principal
Well and just enter the different Flow Rates. Proceed as follows:
Select an Interfering Well (i.e. one that is not the Principal ) in the Workspace
area of the Navigation pane.
Selecting an Interfering Well
Select the Test Design button from the Data File section and the following
prompt will be generated - "Do you wish to use Principal Well Times
No: If users answer No (the default setting and recommended choice), a

dialog will prompt for data names:
Figure 126: Test Design Names dialog for Well 2
The Surface Flow Rate Column Name has been entered as Well 2 Qsurf. The Data
File Name has defaulted to TEST DESIGN, but can be changed if desired.

TEST DESIGN
Edit Test Design 12
The Initial Wellbore Pressure has defaulted to the Layer 1 Pressure, but can also
be changed if desired.
On selecting OK an Edit Test Design dialog will be generated:
Figure 127: Entering the Surface Rates for Well 2
Enter the Surface Rate Schedule for the Well (assumed to start at Time = zero).
In this example, the Well will be producing at 7.5 MMscf/day for 50 hrs (i.e.
the duration of the period to be Simulated at Well 1). Now select OK.
Yes: If users answer Yes to the prompt (only recommended if a Rate is to

be entered at every Time-Step) a dialog will prompt for Data Names and
Initial Wellbore Pressure in the same way as for the No response.
The edit screen that appears next is the same as for the No response, but will
list all the Time-Steps of the Principal Well. Enter the Interfering Well Rates
(where non-zero) at each Time (the Function option can be used for block
entries of the same Rate value):

12 TEST DESIGN
Test Design Sub-Dialog
Figure 128: Entering Well 2 Surface Rates against the Time-Steps
This is obviously the more tedious approach, and would not normally be
used. Both approaches will result in the creation of a Surface Rate Column for
the Well.
The Surface Flow Rate data for Well 2 has the name "Well 2 Qsurf" in this
example, and it is part of the Well 2 data group called TEST DESIGN.
Regardless of which entry mode is used (i.e. Yes or No), the Surface Flow Rate
Schedule for Interfering Wells will only be sampled at the Time-Steps of the
Principal Well for Simulation purposes. The No option is the quickest way of
entering data and can be used in most situations.
If users have already set-up the Well, Layer, Fluid and Boundary parameters,
they are now ready to proceed to the Advanced Simulation option under the
Simulate Menu option (refer also to Advanced Simulation - Overview).
TEST DESIGN SUB-DIALOG

General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Edit Test Design dialog by selecting
the OK button.
The dialog is comprised of two sections as described below:

TEST DESIGN
Test Design Sub-Dialog 12
Test Design Names: Fill in names for the internal Data File that will be
created (default name Test Design), and the Rate Column (default name
Test Rate).
Initial Wellbore Pressure: This field is defaulted to the pressure of

Layer 1, but can be changed if required. This is a wellbore pressure - if
different from the layer pressure/s, Advanced Simulation will compute
production (i.e. if underbalanced) or injection (i.e. if overbalanced) during
the early time-steps.
On selecting OK, a data column is created with times and surface rates filled
in according to the test design schedule specified by the user in the Edit Test
Designdialog.

12 TEST DESIGN
Test Design Sub-Dialog

Chapter 13
MASTER DATA
This chapter contains the following topis:
Master Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

13 MASTER DATA
Master Data File
MASTER DATA FILE

General:
This dialog is accessed from the Master Data ribbon on the Data Preparation
view by selecting the Master data ribbon, and then selecting the Master Data
button.
The Master Data File is selected in this section in conjunction with the selected
Columns of data that will be used to perform analyses. Different Master
Pressure and Rate Columns can be selected if there are several to choose from
with a given Master Data File.
Master data file/columns:
Data file: Select the Master Data File to be analyzed in this data field via the
drop-down menu.
Rate Column: Select the Master Rate Column in this data field via the
drop-down menu.
Pressure Column: Select the Master Pressure Column in this data field via
the drop-down menu.
Points (non-updatable:)
First Point
No. of points
Last Point

Chapter 14
WELL RESERVOIR AND FLUID
DESCRIPTION
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Well Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Add New Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Copy Well/Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Layer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Model Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Water Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure)
Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure)
Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure)
Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Create Composite Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Create Commingled Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
PVT Tuning Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Numerical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
PanMesh Data Preparation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
PanMesh Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
PanMesh Graphic Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

14 WELL RESERVOIR AND FLUID DESCRIPTION
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Overview
WELL, RESERVOIR & FLUID DESCRIPTION

OVERVIEW
General:
This option is accessed by clicking Data Preparation in the navigation pane,

and then clicking the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description tab.
The dialog contains two options, each described below:
Analytical Model - Enter Reservoir and Well Data for the PanSystem
Analytical Simulation method.
Numerical Model - Enter Reservoir and Well Data for the PanMesh 3-D
Numerical Simulation method.
ANALYTICAL MODEL
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog
General:
This option is accessed by double-clicking a data file in the Data Files/Columns

List section of the Workspace, and then selecting Analytical Model on the Well,
reservoir & fluid description ribbon. It is used to enter, view or edit the well and
reservoir parameters for use in PanSystem Analysis and Advanced Simulation
options. For a description of any of the terms used here, refer to the
Appendix A, PanSystem Glossary.
This dialog is comprised of three tabs:
Fluid Control
Well Control
Layer Control

WELL RESERVOIR AND FLUID DESCRIPTION
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog 14
Fluid Control tab: This tab is used to describe the main fluid contents in a
layer. The chosen fluid type will apply to all layers. It is not possible to have
different Fluid Types in each layer, but Fluid Parameters can be varied.
Five options are available for the principal (i.e., main producing fluid type:
Oil (Single-Phase): Is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is oil. Any
water or gas production is ignored. In Analysis options, PanSystem
calculates all reservoir parameters using oil flow rates and properties.
Other phases are ignored in the calculations. (see Oil Fluid Parameters
Sub-Dialog)
Water (Single-Phase): Is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is water. In

Analysis options, PanSystem calculates all reservoir parameters using
water flow rates and properties. Other phases are ignored in the
calculations. (see Water Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog.)
Gas (Single-Phase): Is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is dry gas.
Although a water/gas ratio (i.e. WGR), can be specified, the water phase
is ignored and PanSystem calculates all reservoir parameters using dry
gas flow rates and properties. Corrections for inorganic components can
be made, and a compositional EoS option is available.
Condensate: Is used when the reservoir fluid is a retrograde condensate

or wet gas system. In the conventional analysis approach, the specified
surface separator gas and liquid condensate properties are recombined to
obtain in-situ rich gas single-phase properties. The mobile phase is
therefore assumed to be a vapour phase in the reservoir and the effects of
liquid drop-out on relative permeability are not considered. In Analysis
options, PanSystem calculates all results using the rich gas flow rates and
properties. Although a water/gas ratio can be specified, it is ignored.(see
Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog.)
Multiphase Methods: Two multiphase methods are available in the Fluid

Type section:
1. For oil there is a simplified multiphase approach, Perrine Method, to

handle oil produced with water and/or gas in the reservoir.
2. For condensate systems, the Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure Method

provides a more rigorous treatment of multiphase flow which
includes relative permeability effects.

Perrine Method (oil): This option can be used when the mobile
reservoir fluid is made up of several phases, (e.g. oil+water, oil+gas or
oil+water+gas). The principal phase is, however, oil.
The relevant phase properties must be specified via the Fluid Parameters
i
button situated in the Layer Control section of this dialog. In the generated Oil
Fluid Parameters sub-dialog, the Water-Cut must be greater than zero for
water to be included in the analysis, and the Produced Gas-Oil Ratio must be
greater than the Solution Gas-Oil Ratio for gas to be included in the analysis.
The Oil rate(s) should be specified in the Rate Schedule; the other
phase rates will be calculated from it.
The effective permeability to each phase will be calculated and

reported in Analysis. In the calculation of skin factor, distance to
boundaries, Xf, etc., the single-phase oil mobility (k/o is replaced by
the total mobility (k/)t calculated using the flow rates and properties
of all mobile phases.
Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure Method: This option can be used when

the reservoir fluid is a retrograde condensate or wet gas system, and
it provides a more rigorous treatment of relative permeability effects
and fluid property variations with pressure.
When this option is checked, the Layer Control section of this dialog
allows you to create, edit, or import (paste) a multiphase
Pseudo-Pressure Table (i.e. m(p) table) via the Gas and Condensate
Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog.
A Relative Permeabilities button is also activated in the Layer

Parameters sub-dialog and users are advised to check this data.
i The relevant phase properties must be specified via the Condensate Fluid
Parameters button situated in the Layer Control section of this dialog.

This method can be applied to the simultaneous flow of Condensate
systems with liquid dropout and/or water. It can account for the
effects of any near-wellbore liquid dropout.
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure Method: This is a new

pseudo-pressure approach which uses rock mechanics to alow for the
sensitivity of permeability and porosity to pressure, a sensitivity that
is often encountered in coalbed methane and shale gas environments.
For more information, see the Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters
-Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure.
Well Control tab: This tab is used to describe the wells within a reservoir and
exhibits the following features:
Add Well: In PanSystem, a reservoir can have a minimum of one well and
a maximum of five. Use the Add New Well option to add wells to a
reservoir, up to a maximum of five wells. A newly added well is
automatically active. Users will be prompted to supply a well name.
Delete Well: Use this option to delete the current well. Deleting will erase
the associated well parameters. To remove a well temporarily without
losing associated parameters, make it Inactive. If there is only one well, it
becomes the principal well by default and cannot be deleted. If more
than one well exists it can be deleted. The well immediately above the
deleted well becomes the principal well.
Copy Well: Use this option after a new well has been added, to copy the
well description (e.g. radius, storage model, etc.) from an existing well.
Principal Well Orientation: One well is nominated as the principal well

and this well is designated by having a P character beside it. It is treated
as the main test well, the others being interfering wells. The principal
well only plays a part in Advanced Simulation and Test Design, where
one well can affect another well. In the Analysis and Quick Match
Dialog options, PanSystem only considers one well at a time. The
principal well cannot be made inactive.
Active or Inactive: If more than one well exists, a well can either be active
or inactive.

Well Parameters: Use the Well Parameters button to view, enter or edit
the parameters of the highlighted well, and to select the Wellbore Storage
Model. Use the tab to move between the parameter options. The Well
Parameters to be entered and/or edited include well radius, inter-well
distance and well co-ordinates.
The Active, Inactive and Principal options are only used for Advanced
Simulation analyses and Test Designs. By making a well inactive, it does
i
not form part of the Advanced Simulation or Test Design. However, the well
data is retained in the event that it is made active again at a later stage. If a
well is made the principal well, indicated by having a P character adjacent, it is
considered to be at co-ordinate position (0,0) for image well calculations and
complex simulations, where well offsets have to be considered.
Principal Well Orientation section: In this section users can choose

from:
Vertical (i.e. default) - suitable for 0 to 75 inclination. A wide range

of Reservoir Flow Models will be offered. If an Infinite-Conductivity
Vertical Fracture Model is being used, for the purposes of defining
Boundary Geometries, the Fracture is considered to be parallel to the
X-axis (i.e. east-west).
Horizontal (i.e. parallel to the Layer upper and lower Boundaries). A

limited set of Reservoir Flow Models will be offered. For the
purposes of defining Boundary Geometries, the Well is considered to
be parallel to the X-axis (i.e. east-west).
The choice made here will determine whether Vertical or Horizontal well
models are offered in the Analysis and Simulation menu options.
Layer Control tab: This tab is used to describe the layer configuration of a
reservoir and exhibits the following features:

For the Reservoir:
Add Layer: Use the Add Layer option to add a layer to a reservoir. A
reservoir can have a minimum of one layer and a maximum of five
layers. In the Analysis and Quick Match Dialog options only one
layer is modeled. Added layers only play a part in Advanced
Simulation and Test Design. An added layer affects the whole of the
reservoir and therefore all the wells in the reservoir will have a layer
added to them. If a fault exists in the simulated reservoir or test
design and users do not want a layer to extend to a well sharing this
reservoir, the layer for that well can be temporarily removed by
making it inactive. Users will be prompted for a layer name.
To re-name a layer, highlight the required layer in the list field (i.e.
lower field), change the name in the edit field (i.e. upper field), then
apply a left mouse-click to the highlighted name in the list field to
re-name the layer.
Delete Layer: Use this option to delete the current layer from the
Layer Control section. A reservoir must have at least one layer.
Copy Layer: Use this option after a new layer has been added, to copy
the complete description of an existing layer (i.e. layer and fluid
parameters, boundary parameters, etc.) into the new layer.
Create Composite: The Create Composite Sub-Dialog option allows

users to create a composite layer from two or more specified layers.
In order create a composite, at least two active layer names must
be present in the list field. The program combines the layers to create
a single layer with averaged properties. A dialog is generated to
allow users to select the layer from which to use the pseudo-pressure
tables (i.e. if using gas or condensate Fluid Parameters).
i
The composite layer now has the status of any other layer, can be edited, and
is available for selection on entry to Analysis, etc. It will not however be
included in an Advanced Simulation run. Advanced Simulation will only use
the active constituent layers.

Create Commingled: Use this option to create a commingled system

from any two layers in the reservoir description. This further allows
users to model a two-layered system in the Quick Match and
Automatch options. This is an alternative to using
thickness-averaged values combined in a single composite layer as
described above. In addition, when a closed system boundary model
is used, the simulation will respect differential pressure depletion
between the layers, leading to cross-flow and recharging during
build-up.
Commingled systems can only be constructed from layers whose

flow models are radial homogeneous and only two layers can be
commingled at any one time.
Once created, the commingled layers system is available for selection

on entry to the Analysis menu. However, it will not be included in an
Advanced Simulation run. Advanced Simulation only uses the active
constituent layers.
For each Layer:
Active or Inactive: These options are used to set the current layer to
active or inactive. When a layer is added to a reservoir it covers the
whole of the reservoir and not just the current well. If the reservoir
has complex layer boundaries and another well in the reservoir well
is not to have this layer added to it, make the layer inactive for that
well. This option can also be used to exclude selected layers from the
Create Composite facility, where layers that are not to be included in
the composite can be made Inactive.
Layer Parameters: The Layer Parameters button is used to

view/enter/edit the rock parameters. These include layer thickness,
porosity etc. Users can also set the flow model and enter/edit any
parameters pertaining to the model (e.g. permeability, fracture
half-length).
Layer Boundaries: The Layer Boundaries button enables users to

perform the following for each layer in a reservoir:
Define the boundary model of a layer.

Calculate image wells (max. 16,000 per layer).
Edit image wells table.

Layer Fluid Parameters: This button allows users to view/enter/edit
the Fluid Parameters of a given layer. A Fluid Parameters dialog box
can be brought up for any layer by highlighting this field.
i
Before setting the Layer Fluid Parameters, users must first choose the fluid
type from the range of options available in the Fluid Type section of this dialog
(i.e. Oil, Water, Gas or Condensate), since each generated Fluid Parameters
dialog is fluid-specific.
The fluid parameters describe the fluid in the layer. Fluid properties
can be typed in, or calculated from production or laboratory data.
The selected fluid type applies to all layers, but the fluid properties
themselves can be different in each layer. The parameters that can be
quantified depend on the type of fluid selected.
Not all parameters are required to be quantified for analysis.

Parameters that must be given a specified value are highlighted in
red. However, users have the option to de-select the values for
certain parameters if required (e.g. Bo, Uo, Bw, Uw, Bg, Ug, Co, Cw,
Cg, Cf and/or Ct), by unchecking the check boxes associated with
these parameters. In this situation, only the remaining (i.e. checked)
parameters will be included in the calculations. PanSystem can also
calculate certain parameter values using correlations, provided users
have entered the minimum dataset.
i
The multiphase Perrine Method is available for an oil Fluid Type selection.
Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure Tables can be calculated, edited, or imported
for a condensate Fluid Type selection.
Copy Layer: Use this option after a new layer has been added, to copy
the complete description of an existing layer (i.e. layer and fluid
parameters, boundary parameters, etc.) into the new layer.

Well Parameters
Well Parameters
General:
This option is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog
by clicking the Well Parameters button on the Well Control tab. This option is
used to view, enter, or edit parameters for the current well. Mandatory items
for data input are highlighted in red within the dialog.
i
This sub-dialog can also be accessed from the Well Configuration Tabbed
Dialog tab of the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog. In this application, only
the lower portion of this dialog is enabled, for selecting a Wellbore Storage
Model and entering model parameters.
This sub-dialog is comprised of three main sections, described below:
Input Parameters
Wellbore Storage Model
Well Co-ordinates (for multi-well Advanced Simulation)
Input Parameters section: Contains two data entry fields:
Well diameter: This defines the diameter of the open hole Wellbore (i.e. not
the Casing). This is a compulsory input.
Inter-Well Distance: This defines the Distance between the Tested Well and
an Interfering Well. This parameter is used only for interference
type-curve analysis and can be left at zero if the Gauge Data are not for an
Interference Test.
i Interwell Distances are measured from the mid-point of the horizontal open
interval (i.e. for Horizontal Wells).
Wellbore Storage Model section: Used to describe the storage capacity of the
wellbore (Cs). Four wellbore storage models are available from the
drop-down menu field:
Classic Wellbore Storage: This model assumes a constant storage

coefficient (Cs).

Add New Well 14
Fair Wellbore Storage (Reference 49): This option models a gradual change
of storage coefficient. It includes the effects of wellbore phase
redistribution and assumes that these decay exponentially with time.
Hegeman Wellbore Storage (Reference 50): This is similar in principle to Fair

Wellbore Storage model, except that the exponential decay is now a
function of [t/]2 and is therefore stronger.
Time-Stepped Wellbore Storage: This option models an abrupt change of

storage coefficient at a specified elapsed time.
The Wellbore Storage Model Parameters button generates a

storage-model-specific Wellbore Storage Parameters sub-dialog where
the parameters associated with the current model can be edited.
Normally, a constant storage coefficient and skin factor (i.e. mechanical

and turbulent) are assumed for the entire test. If users suspect that any or
all of these parameters is/are varying from one flow period to the next,
the Allow different skins and storage per flow period checkbox allows a table
of different values to be defined for each period. If this checkbox is
checked, a table can be generated into which the Darcy Skin (S), Wellbore
Storage Coefficient (Cs) and (for gas and condensate well tests only), the
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), can be entered for each Flow Period.
Well Co-ordinates section: This parameter is required only for Test Design and
Advanced Simulation, when more than one Well is involved. These
co-ordinates describe the (X, Y) position of the Well.
i The Principal Well should always be located at co-ordinate position (0, 0).
This is the mid-point of the horizontal open interval (i.e. for Horizontal Wells).
Add New Well

General:
This option is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog
by selecting the Add Well button on the Well Control tab and is used to add
and name a new Well for a Reservoir.
The sub-dialog contains a single data entry field as follows:

Copy Well/Layer
Please enter new well name: Enter the name of the new Well (or accept the
default name) and select the OK button to validate. The new Well name
will now be listed within the Well Control section of the Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog.
Copy Well/Layer
General:
This shared sub-dialog is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description Dialog by either selecting the Copy Well button on the Well
Control tab or the Copy Layer button on the Layer Control tab. It is used for
copying Well/Layer parameters from an existing Well/Layer to a new
Well/Layer.
i
Before using this copy facility it is necessary to have a Well/Layer to copy
parameters into. Use the Add New Well or Add Layer commands as
appropriate.
The sub-dialog contains two fields, described as follows:
For Copy Well: When a new Well has been added, copy existing Well
parameters (i.e. Radius, Wellbore Storage, Model, etc.) from the Well named
in the Copy From field into the Well named in the Copy To field. A
drop-down menu allows users to select from the range of available Wells.
For Copy Layer: When a new Layer has been added, copy existing Layer
parameters (i.e. Layer and Fluid parameters, Boundary parameters, etc.)
from the Layer named in the Copy From field into the Layer named in the
Copy To field. A drop-down menu allows users to select from the range of
available Layers.
Click Copy to copy the Well or Layer.

Layer Parameters 14
Layer Parameters
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog
by selecting the Layer Parameters button on the Layer Control tab. This option
is used to view, enter, or edit the parameters of the currently selected Layer
(i.e. the highlighted Layer within the list of Layers). Parameters required for
analysis are highlighted in red.
The dialog is comprised of two sections, described as follows:
Parameters section: The Layer Parameters are described in this section:
Formation thickness (h): Represents the effective (i.e. net) dip-normal

Thickness of a Layer, and is compulsory for Analysis and Simulation.
Dual-Permeability model: h is the thickness of the producing

Layer, not the Total Thickness of both Layers.
Dual-Porosity model with Two-layer block type selected

(stratified model), h is the thickness of the producing Layer, not
the Total Thickness of both Layers.
For the external models Two- and Three-Layer Homogeneous with

Crossflow, h refers to the thickness of Layer 1. (The thickness of the
other layer(s) is implicit in the model parameter kappa.)
Formation thickness (h): Represents the effective (i.e. net) dip-normal

Thickness of a Layer, and is compulsory for Analysis and Simulation.
For the Dual-Porosity (i.e. two-layer block geometry) and
Dual-Permeability models, (h) is the Thickness of the producing Layer,
not the Total Thickness of both Layers.
Water Saturation ( Sw): The fraction of water in the pore-space of a

Layer. It is used in the calculation of the Total Compressibility.
Porosity (): Describes the connected Porosity of a Layer, and is

compulsory for Analysis and Simulation. It is also required to
calculate Rock Compressibility. For the Radial Composite model it refers
to the inner region. For the Dual-Porosity model used for natural
fractures, it refers to the total system (bulk-averaged) Porosity. For
the Dual-Permeability model, it refers to the producing Layer.

Layer Parameters
Gas Saturation ( Sg): The fraction of gas in the pore space of a Layer. It
is used in the calculation of the Total Compressibility.
Layer Pressure: Describes the initial Pore Pressure of the fluid in a

Layer at the start of the Rate History. This is not compulsory for
Analysis, but will be required for Test Design and Simulation. This is
mandatory for the analysis of Gas and Condensate Fluid Types, and for
all Fluid Types for Advanced Simulation. The Layer Fluid Properties
should be evaluated at Layer Pressure. They will be assumed to
remain constant unless a Closed System Boundary model is used and
the Material Balance Correction is switched on, in which case the effect
of decreasing Layer Pressure on fluid properties with time will be
taken into account.
Rock Compressibility (Cf ): The Pore Volume Compressibility of the rock in

a Layer. The Rock Compressibility is calculated from Porosity in the
Fluid Parameters dialog (i.e. Oil, Gas or Condensate). When a value is
updated in one cell, PanSystem automatically writes it into the other.
Layer Temperature: This is a mandatory input for Gas and Condensate

Fluid Types, and for all Fluid Types if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Method checkbox has been checked.
Total Compressibility (Ct): Describes the Total Compressibility of the

fluids and rock that are present within a Layer (refer to the comments
about Porosity for what to use in the various models).
i
Ct cannot be edited in the Layer Parameters dialog; the value displayed here
is carried through from the relevant Fluid Parameters dialog (i.e. Oil, Gas,
Condensate or Water), where it can either be entered manually or calculated.

Layer Parameters 14
Model section: The Reservoir Model (i.e. Vertical or Horizontal Well)
section is used to specify the Reservoir Flow Model that PanSystem will
apply in the Analysis, Simulation or Test Design parts of the application.
PanSystem provides a wide selection of models that are dependent on the
Well Orientation set within the Principal Well Orientation section of the
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog. A drop-down menu with
associated scroll bar is used to select a suitable Model Type.
i
All Model Types, except the Free Model, are defined by a set of Model
Parameters that constitute the Reservoir Description. The Model Parameters
button (described below), is disabled when the Free Model is selected.
i The Dual-Porosity Block Type button (described below), is only activated when
a Dual Porosity model option is selected.
i
For Analysis and Quick Match, it is not necessary to specify the parameters
now, as these can be derived from the analysis itself. However, they must be
initialized here for Advanced Simulation.
Model Parameters button: Select this button to generate the Model

Parameters dialog.
Dual porosity block type button: Select this button to generate the
Dual-Porosity Block Type sub-dialog. This button is only available
when a Dual-Porosity model option is selected.
Allow Different Skins and Storage per Flow Period: Normally, a constant
Storage Coefficient and Skin Factor (i.e. Mechanical and Turbulent) are
assumed for the entire test. If users suspect that any or all of these
parameters may be varying from one Flow Period to the next, checking
this checkbox allows a table of different values to be defined for each
Flow Period. Each Flow Period can be assigned a Skin Factor (S),
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), and for Gas and Condensate, a
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D). If a Fractured Well Model has been
chosen, (S) is replaced by (Sf ), the Fracture Face Skin. This table can be
populated either by direct entry of values or by values derived from
analysis of each Flow Period.

Model Parameters
Relative Permeabilities button: This button only appears if the

Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option has been selected within the Fluid
Type section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog. The
Relative Permeabilities of individual phases in Multi-Phase Flow have
an obvious impact on fluid movement. The Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure model makes rigorous use of Relative Permeabilities
and the variation of fluid properties with Pressure. This is
particularly important in Condensate systems where liquid dropout
occurs below dew-point, and in Oil systems where gas evolution
occurs below bubble-point. Good Relative Permeability data are
therefore necessary to make effective use of this facility. Selecting the
button generates an IPR Relative Permeabilities sub-dialog for the
selected Layer, where users can choose between Parametric or Tabular
Relative Permeability data and can also edit the data.
Model Parameters
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Layer Parameters dialog by selecting the
Model Parameters button from the Flow Model section; it is used to enter data
relating to Layer Model Parameters. The data entry fields will vary depending
on the selected model (i.e. Vertical Well Models, Horizontal Well or
Customer-Defined Flow Models). Each model type is defined in the following
sections and short-cut links to these sections are also provided below:
Vertical Well Flow Models

Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters
Horizontal Well Flow Models
Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters
Customer-Defined Flow Models:
Slanted Well Model
Multiple Radial Composite Systems
Partially-Sealing Fault
Pinch-Out
Three-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir with Internal Cross-Flow
Two-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir with Internal Cross-Flow

Vertical Well Flow Models 14
General Intersecting Fault
Composite Linear Reservoir
Wireline formation test with packers and probe in a single homogeneous

layer
Wireline formation test with two probes in a single homogeneous layer
Wireline formation test with packers and probes in a Dual Permeability

system
Shale Multiple Vertical Fractures
Conventional Multiple Vertical Fractures

The parameters required for each Vertical Well Flow Model are described
below:
1. Free Model: No Flow Model is stipulated at this stage. This may be because
users have not yet examined the data and identified a Flow Model. As a
consequence, no Results will be calculated from the diagnostic plots other
than a tentative Permeability (k) and Skin (S) for assumed Radial Flow and no
parameters can be entered for Advanced Simulation and Test Design. Refer
below for a definition of Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
2. Radial Homogeneous: The Flow Model for this Homogeneous Reservoir is
Radial. The Finite Wellbore Radius Solution (Reference 2) is used for Simulation.
Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), true or mechanical Skin (S) and true Rate-Dependent

Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Vertical Well
Flow Model Parameters.
3. Vertical Fracture - Infinite Conductivity: This Flow Model (References 72 and

99) has a single symmetrical Vertical Fracture intercepting the Well. There is no
resistance to flow along the Fracture and flow is concentrated at the tips. The
Fracture Height is assumed to be the same as the Layer Height. Associated
parameters include:

Permeability (k), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf) and true
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition
ofVertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
4. Vertical Fracture - Uniform Flux: This Flow Model (Reference 25) has a single
symmetrical Vertical Fracture intercepting the Well. The flow enters the
Fracture at the same Rate over the entire surface. The Fracture Height is
assumed to be the same as the Layer Height. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf) and true
ofVertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
5. Vertical Fracture - Finite Conductivity: This Flow Model (Reference 102) has a
single symmetrical Vertical Fracture intercepting the Well. The Fracture has a
finite Permeability and flow tends to be concentrated more towards the
Wellbore end. The Fracture Height is assumed to be the same as the Layer
Height. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf),

Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (FCD) and true Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Vertical Well Flow
Model Parameters.
6. Vertical Fracture - Limited Height: This Flow Model (References 72 and 99) has
a single symmetrical Vertical Fracture which does not extend to the full Layer
Height. The Fracture also has a finite Permeability. Associated parameters
include:
Permeability (k), Vertical Permeability (kz), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture
Offset (Zwdf ), Fracture Height (hf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf), and true
of Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
7. Dual Porosity (Pseudo-Steady-State): This Flow Model (Reference 27) has a

Dual-Porosity configuration (i.e. Blocks or Slabs), with a Pseudo-Steady-State
Interporosity Flow. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), true or mechanical Skin (S), Interporosity Flow

Coefficient (), Storativity Ratio (), and true Rate-Dependent Skin
Model Parameters.

Vertical Well Flow Models 14
8. Dual Porosity (Transient): This Flow Model (Reference 33) has a Dual-Porosity
configuration (i.e. Blocks or Slabs), with Transient Interporosity Flow.
Associated parameters include:

Coefficient (), Storativity Ratio (), and true Rate-Dependent Skin
Model Parameters.
9. Dual Permeability: This Flow Model (Reference 46) has two distinct Layers,
with Horizontal Radial Flow in both Layers. Only one Layer is open to the
wellbore and the second Layer cross-flows vertically into the Producing Layer.
There may or may not be a thin semi-permeable stratum at the interface.
Advanced Simulation does not require a second Layer to be configured because
the secondary, supporting Layer is implicit in the Model. Associated
parameters include:

Coefficient (), Flow Capacity Ratio (), Storativity Ratio () and true
of Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
This model is based on Reference 46 (Ehlig-Economides and Ayoub). The
i
definition of the Interporosity Flow Coefficient () - Lambda term in Equation 14
of this paper is the same as that used by PanSystem, except that an EPS
modification has been added to allow for reduced Vertical Permeability in the
second Layer also; if this modification is ignored, the equation is identical.
10. Radial Composite: This Flow Model (Reference 101) consists of an inner
cylindrical Homogeneous Region surrounded by an outer region of different
properties. The flow in both regions is Radial and Horizontal. Associated
parameters include:

Permeability (k) for inner Region, true or mechanical Skin (S), Flow
Mobility Ratio (M), Storativity Ratio (), Radial Distance to Discontinuity
(Lrad) and true Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below
for a definition of Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
i Any Boundaries are assumed to be in the outer Region.
11. Partial Penetration: This Flow Model (Reference 100) has a Homogeneous
Reservoir with Horizontal Radial Flow. Only part of the interval is open to flow
at the wellbore, so there is Flow Convergence. Associated parameters include:
True Radial Permeability (k), true or mechanical Skin (S), Vertical

Permeability (kz), Perforated Interval (hp), Distance from Top of Layer to Top of
Perforations (htop), true Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas) and
Radial Permeability at Perforations (kp). Refer below for a definition of
Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters.
12. Gas Cap/Aquifer: Parameters for this Flow Model are the same as for the
Partial Penetration Model (Reference 100), except that this Flow Model adds a
Constant Pressure (upper or lower) Boundary:
The parameter (htop), is now the Distance from Top of Perforations to Base of
Gas-Cap, or the Distance from Bottom of Perforations to Top of Aquifer.
Layer Thickness (h), should not include the Gas-Cap or Aquifer unless a
Thickness-Averaged Permeability is required.
Refer below for a definition of Vertical Well Flow Model

Parameters.

Radial Permeability (k): The (Effective) Horizontal Permeability of the
Reservoir Rock to the mobile phase.
Vertical Permeability (kz): The Permeability to the mobile phase in the

vertical direction.

Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters 14
Skin (S): The true or mechanical Darcy Skin Factor (i.e. the
Non-Turbulent Skin Factor at the wellbore, attributed to damage,
improvement and completion).
i
Do not confuse this with the Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr), which is an apparent
Skin Factor computed when Pseudo-Radial Flow develops in some Flow
Models. For example, a partially-penetrated Reservoir with a true Damage
Skin (S) of +2.0 may have a Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) of +20 or more.
The Skin Factor (S) requested for input to Quick Match and Advanced
i
Simulation is always the true Damage Skin (S), not the Pseudo-Radial Skin.
The (Spr) term will appear as a computed result on some diagnostic plots. The
(Spr) term is also required in the Deliverability IPR section because PanSystem
uses the (Pseudo-) Radial Inflow Equation to compute the Productivity Indices.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): The "true" Turbulent Skin

Coefficient at the wellbore (i.e. for Gas and Condensate Wells). Turbulent
Skin is D x Flow Rate. The above information for Skin (S) relating to
Pseudo-Radial Flow also applies to (D).
Fracture Half-Length (Xf): The Length of one Fracture Wing from the
wellbore axis to the tip.
Fracture Skin (Sf): The Darcy Fracture Face Skin Factor, representing an
additional Pressure Drop across the Fracture Face.
Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (Fcd): This is defined by:
Where (kf) is the Fracture Proppant Permeability and () is the mean

Fracture Width.
Storativity Ratio (): The definition of this parameter depends on what

Flow Model is being used:
Model Definition
Dual-Porosity = ( Ct)f [( Ct)f +( Ct)m]
Dual-Permeability = ( hCt)1 [( hCt)1 + ( hCt)2]

Model Definition
Radial Composite = ( Ct)outer ( Ct)inner
Interporosity Flow Coefficient (): Coefficient describing flow between:
The Matrix and the Fracture System in a Dual-Porosity Reservoir:
Where () is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type, (km) is

the Matrix Permeability and (kf ) is the Fracture System Permeability.
Layer 1 and Layer 2 across a semi-permeable interface in a

Dual-Permeability Reservoir:
Where the subscript "1" refers to the Producing Layer, and "2" to the second
(i.e. Non-Perforated) Layer. The term (Teff ) represents the Effective Vertical
Conductivity given by:
Which includes the Conductivity Tv = kv/ hv of a thin, semi-permeable Layer

(i.e. if present), at the interface, and Conductivity T2 = 3kz2/h2 of "2".
Flow Capacity Ratio (): The ratio of Permeability-Thickness in a

Dual-Permeability system:
Where the subscript "1" refers to the Producing Layer (i.e. perforated), and "2"
to the second (i.e. non-perforated) Layer.

Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters 14
Discontinuity Radial Distance (Lrad): The Distance from the wellbore to
the interface between the inner and outer Regions of a Radial Composite
Reservoir.
Mobility Ratio (M): Ratio of the outer Region Mobility to the inner Region
Mobility in a Radial Composite Reservoir:
Perforation Height (hp): The Length (TVD) of the Open Interval (i.e. the
sandface interval that is actually producing):
(htop + hp h)
Perforation Top Dist (htop): The Distance (TVD) from the top of the Open
Interval to the top of the Layer in the Partial Penetration Model. The
Distance (TVD) from the top of the Open Interval to the base of the
Gas-Cap, or from the bottom of the Open Interval to the top of the Aquifer,
in the Gas-Cap/Aquifer Model:
(htop + hp h)
Fracture Height (hf): The Height of the Fracture in a Limited Height,

Vertically Fractured Well:
(hf <h)
Fracture Offset (Zwdf): A decimal fraction giving the position of the

mid-point of the Fractured Interval relative to the top and bottom of the
Layer. A value of 0.5 means the Fracture is in the middle.
i The term hf cannot be greater than 2h.Zwdf


The parameters required for each Horizontal Well Flow Model are described
below:
1. Free Model: No Flow Model is stipulated at this stage. This may be because
users have not yet examined the data and identified a Model. As a
consequence, no Results will be calculated from the diagnostic plots other
than a tentative Permeability (k) and Skin (S) for assumed Radial Flow and no
parameters can be entered for Advanced Simulation and Test Design. Refer
below for a definition of Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters.
2. Two No-Flow Boundaries - Homogeneous: This Flow Model (References 72
and 99) consists of an Infinite-Acting Homogeneous Layer with impermeable
upper and lower Boundaries. Associated parameters include:
Radial Permeability (k), Vertical Permeability (kz), true or mechanical

Skin Factor (S), true Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (gas), Well Offset
from upper or lower Boundary ( ZWD) and (Effective) Well Length (Lw).
Refer below for a definition of Horizontal Well Flow Model
Parameters.
3. Two No-Flow Boundaries - Dual-Porosity: This Flow Model (References 27, 72

and 99) uses a Dual-Porosity system with impermeable upper and lower
Boundaries. The Inter-Porosity Flow is Pseudo-Steady-State. Associated
parameters include:
Radial Permeability (k), Vertical Permeability (kz), "true" or "mechanical" Skin

Factor (S), true Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (gas), Well Offset from
upper or lower Boundary ( ZWD), (Effective) Well Length (Lw), Storativity
Ratio () and Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (). Refer below for a
definition of Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters.
4. No-Flow / Constant Pressure Boundary - Homogeneous: This Flow Model

(References 72 and 99) uses a Homogeneous Layer, with one impermeable
Boundary and one Constant Pressure Boundary (upper or lower). Associated
parameters include:

Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters 14
from No-Flow Boundary (ZWD) and (Effective) Well Length (Lw). Refer
below for a definition of Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters.
5. No-Flow / Constant Pressure Boundary - Dual-Porosity: This Flow Model

(References 27, 72 and 99) uses a Dual-Porosity system with one impermeable
Boundary and one Constant Pressure Boundary. The Inter-Porosity Flow is
Pseudo-Steady-State. Associated parameters include:

from No-Flow Boundary (ZWD), (Effective) Well Length (Lw), Storativity Ratio
(), and Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (). Refer below for a definition of
Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters.
Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters

Many of the Well Flow Model Parameters defined above for Vertical Wells are
also applicable here (e.g. and ). Those specific to Horizontal Well
applications are defined below:
Radial Permeability (k): The (Effective) Horizontal Permeability of the

Reservoir Rock to the mobile phase at current saturation.
Vertical Permeability (kz): Permeability to the mobile phase in the

vertical direction.
Skin (S): The true or mechanical Darcy Skin Factor (i.e. the
Non-Turbulent Skin Factor at the wellbore, attributed to damage,
improvement and completion).
Do not confuse this with the Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr), which is an apparent
i
Skin Factor computed when Pseudo-Radial Flow develops in some Flow
Models. For example, a long Horizontal Well with a true, mechanica" or
damage Skin (S) of +5.0 may have a Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) of 6.0. The
(Spr) term includes the beneficial effects of the long drain-hole.

The Skin Factor (S) requested for input to Quick Match and Advanced
i
Simulation is always the true, mechanical or damage Skin and not the
Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr). The (Spr) term will appear as a computed result on
some diagnostic plots. The (Spr) term is also required in the Deliverability IPR
section because PanSystem uses the (Pseudo-)Radial Inflow equation to
compute the Productivity Indices.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): The true Turbulent Skin

Coefficient at the wellbore (i.e. for Gas and Condensate Wells). The
Turbulent Skin is D x Flow Rate. The overlying note for Skin (S) relating to
Pseudo-Radial Flow also applies to (D).
Well Offset ( ZWD): The average Dimensionless Vertical Distance (zw/h) of

the Well Axis from the upper or lower Boundary (i.e. No-Flow/No-Flow
Models), or from the No-Flow Boundary (i.e. No-Flow/Constant Pressure
Models).
0 < ZWD < 1.0
Well Length (Lw): The (Effective) Well Length (i.e. the Length actually
open to flow).
Lw Design Length

It is possible for users to define and code their own Reservoir Flow Models and
to implement them in PanSystem via the Dynamic Link Library (DLL) facility.
Any Customer-Defined Flow Models will be listed with the other supplied
Models in the Flow Models list and can be selected for use in Analysis (i.e.
Line-Fitting and Flow Regimes, but not Type-Curve Matching) and Simulation
(i.e. Quick Match, Auto Match, Advanced Simulation and PanFlow).
Several Customer-Defined Flow Models (described below) are supplied with the
current release of PanSystem (i.e. those marked with a *).
For more information about the correct format to link Customer-Defined Flow
Models into PanSystem, please contact Weatherford Product Support.

External Models Supplied with PanSystem 14
External Models Supplied with PanSystem
1. Slanted Well Model:
This is for a Partially-Penetrating Inclined Well in an Anisotropic Radial
Homogeneous Reservoir. The upper and lower Boundaries may be both No-Flow,
both Constant Pressure or a No-Flow/Constant Pressure combination.
In addition to Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Radial Permeability (k), true or

mechanical Skin Factor (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), this
Customer-Defined Flow Model uses the following parameters:
ANG: This is the Deviation Angle from the vertical, averaged across the
interval or the Deviation Angle relative to the dip-normal direction if the
layer is dipping. In the sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters
button this is referred to as the Slanted Well Angle.
ZWDT: This is represented by the Distance From the Top of Pay to Top of
Perfs Layer Thickness.
Measured Length or TVD are used for both dimensions. In the

sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as
the Pay Top to Perforation Top.
ZWDB: This is represented by the Distance From the Top of Pay to Bottom of
Perfs Layer Thickness.
Measured Length or TVD are used for both dimensions. In the sub-dialog
generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Pay Top
to Perforation Bottom.
RKZR: This is represented by Vertical Permeability Horizontal

Permeability.
In the sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to

as the Permeability Ratio.
IBDY: Upper / Lower Boundary Types:
1. upper and lower = No-Flow
2. upper = No-Flow and lower = Constant-Pressure
3. upper and lower = Constant Pressure


as the Boundary Condition.
i Reference: Internal customer-supplied model.
2. Multiple Radial Composite Systems:

Two-Zone, Three-Zone and Four-Zone Radial Composite Models are available.
The Well is vertical and fully-completed.
i Boundaries are not currently allowed with these Models.
In addition to Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Inner Region (Zone 1) Radial

Permeability (k), "true" or "mechanical" Skin Factor (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D), these Customer-Defined Flow Models use the following
parameters:
Second Region (zone 2):
K2: The Radial Permeability of Zone 2. In the sub-dialog generated by the

Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Perm of Zone 2.
RCP2: The Ratio of Zone 2 Storativity to Zone 1 Storativity given by:
( Ct)zone 2 ( Ct)zone 1.
In the sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred

to as:
( POR*CT)2 ( POR*CT)1.
RI2: The Inner Radius of Zone 2.
Third Region (zone 3):



to as:
Fourth Region (zone 4):


to as:
i Reference: Internal customer-supplied model.
3. Partially-Sealing Fault Model:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Homogeneous Reservoir which is cut
by a vertical, Partially-Sealing Fault of infinite extent. The Model is
Infinite-Acting in both Regions. The Transmissibility across the Fault is
described by a "Fault Conductivity", which is defined below. The Layer has the
same Rock and Fluid Properties on either side of the Fault, but can have a
different Thickness (h2) on the far side.
i Based on reference 107.

i No additional Boundaries are allowed with this Model.
Figure 129: Partially-Sealing Fault Model - Plan View
Figure 130: Partially-Sealing Fault - Side View
This Customer-Defined Flow Model uses the following parameters:

h2: The Layer Thickness on the far side of the Fault. In the sub-dialog
generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Secondary
Thickness.
i The Layer/Formation Thickness (h) specified within the Layer Parameters

dialog is the Layer Thickness on the Well side of the Fault.
L1: The Distance from the Well to the Fault. In the sub-dialog generated by
the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Distance to Fault.
Fc: The Conductivity of a Partially-Sealing Fault represented by:
Fc = Permeability of Fault Zone Thickness of Fault Zone.

as the Fault Conductivity.
4. Pinch-Out Model:
This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Homogeneous Reservoir with a
wedge-shaped cross-section (i.e. Pinch-Out). The Reservoir has parallel
No-Flow Boundaries on two sides, and is closed by the Pinch-Out on the third
side.
No additional Boundaries can be added to this Model.
i From reference 108.
This Customer-Defined Flow Models uses the following parameters:
Lp: The Distance from the Well to the Pinch-Out. In the sub-dialog generated
by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Distance to Pinch-Out.
L1: The Distance to parallel Boundary 1 (refer below to Plan View).
L3: The Distance to parallel Boundary 3 (refer below to Plan View).

Figure 131: Pinch-Out Model - Plan View
Figure 132: Pinch-Out Model - Side View
i The Layer/Formation Thickness (h) specified within the Layer Parameters

dialog is the Layer Thickness at the Well (refer above to Side View).

5. Three-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir with Cross-Flow:
This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Reservoir consisting of three
Homogeneous Layers. These Layers can have different Rock and Fluid Properties
and vertical communication is allowed between the Layers lying within the
Reservoir. This is the three-layer equivalent of the Dual-Permeability Model,
except that in this case, all Layers are open to flow.
i Boundaries are not allowed with this Model.
Figure 133: Three-Layer Reservoir - Side View
i
All Rock and Fluid Properties described below for the Layer Parameters
dialog refer to Layer 1; these are suffixed with a 1 in the diagram illustrated
above.

The Permeability (k) and Skin (S) of Layer 1 are specified in the usual way via
the Layer Parameters dialog. (Note that the layer thickness parameter h
refers to Layer 1, not to the total thickness.) The Properties of each Layer are
defined as a fraction of the Total System Properties via the ratio terms Kappa
(), Omega () and Lambda (). Only the Skin Factors are specified explicitly.
k: The Permeability of Layer 1.
S, S2, S3: The Skin Factors of Layers 1, 2 and 3 respectively. A Layer can be
closed-off from the wellbore by specifying a large Skin Factor.
Kap1 (Layer 1 Kappa), Kap2 (Layer 2 Kappa): The Permeability-Thickness of each

Layer as a fraction of the total:
i
Kap3 is not available as an input since it is dependent on Kap1 and Kap2.
The terms (k1) and (h1) correspond to the Permeability and Thickness
respectively, specified within the Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1. The
(kh)total is given by (k1h1 + k2h2 + k3h3).
w1 (Layer 1 Omega), w2 (Layer 2 Omega): The Storativity of each Layer as a

fraction of the Total Storativity:
i
w3 is not available as an input since it is dependent on w1 and w2. The terms
(1), (Ct1) and (h1) from the diagram above are the Properties specified within
the Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1.
Lam12 (Layer 1-2 Lambda), Lam23 (Layer 2-3 Lambda): The Inter-Layer Flow
Coefficient (Lambda) for Internal Cross-Flow between Layers 1-2 and between
Layers 2-3 respectively:

Where the Cross-Flow Coefficients (), are defined by:
The terms (kv1), (kv2) and (kv3) represent the Vertical Permeability in each Layer.
i To prevent Internal Cross-Flow between Layers, enter a very small value for
Lambda.
D: The Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient. The effect of Turbulence in individual

Layers has not been incorporated into this Model. The same value of (D) is
applied to all Layers.
6. Two-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir with Cross-Flow:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Reservoir consisting of two
Homogeneous Layers. These Layers can have different Rock and Fluid Properties
and vertical communication is allowed between the Layers lying within the
Reservoir. This is equivalent to the Dual-Permeability Model, except that in this
case, both Layers are open to flow.
i From Reference 109.
i Boundaries are not allowed with this Model.

Figure 134: Two-Layer Reservoir - Side View
i
All Rock and Fluid Properties described below for the Layer Parameters
dialog refer to Layer 1; these are suffixed with a 1 in the diagram illustrated
above.
The Permeability (k) and Skin (S) of Layer 1 are specified in the usual way via
the Layer Parameters dialog. (Note that the layer thickness parameter h refers
to Layer 1, not to the total thickness.) The Properties of the other Layer are
defined as a fraction of the Total System Properties via the ratio terms Kappa
(), Omega () and Lambda (). Only the Skin Factor is specified explicitly.
k: The Permeability of Layer 1.
S, S2: The Skin Factors of Layers 1 and 2 respectively. A Layer can be

closed-off from the wellbore by specifying a large Skin Factor.
Kap1 (Layer 1 Kappa): The Permeability-Thickness of each Layer as a fraction of

the total:

i
Kap2 is not available as an input since it is dependent on Kap1. The terms
(k1) and (h1) correspond to the Permeability and Thickness respectively,
specified within the Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1. The (kh)total is given
by (k1h1+k2h2).
w1 (Layer 1 Omega): The Storativity of each Layer as a fraction of the Total

Storativity:
i
w2 is not available as an input since it is dependent on w1. The terms (1),
(Ct1) and (h1) from the diagram above are the Properties specified within the
Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1.
Lam12 (Layer 1-2 Lambda): The Inter-Layer Flow Coefficient (Lambda) for Internal
Cross-Flow between Layers 1-2:
Where the Cross-Flow Coefficients (), are defined by:

The terms (kv1) and (kv2) represent the Vertical Permeability in each Layer.
i To prevent Internal Cross-Flow between Layers, enter a very small value for
Lambda.
D: The Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient. The effect of Turbulence in individual

Layers has not been incorporated into this Model. The same value of (D) is
applied to all Layers.
7. General Intersecting Fault Model:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Homogeneous Reservoir which is cut
by two Vertical Faults which Intersect at an Angle (F ang). The Well is situated at
Distance (Lint) from the Intersection, and subtends a Well Location Angle (W ang)
with one of the Faults, expressed as a fraction of the Angle (F ang).
i No other Boundaries can be added to this Model.

Figure 135: General Intersecting Fault Model - Plan View
Lint: The Distance from the Well to the Intersection of the Faults. In the
sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the
Distance to Intersection.
F ang: The Angle between the Faults (degrees). In the sub-dialog generated by
the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Angle Between Faults.
W ang: The Well Location Angle, expressed as a fraction of F ang. In the diagram
illustrated above, this is the Fractional Angle (0 < W ang 1.0) subtended by
Fault BDY1 with the line (formed by Lint) between the Well and the Fault
Intersection.
IBDY1, IBDY2: The Boundary Type Flags for the two Faults BDY1 and BDY2:
1 = No-Flow
0 = Constant Pressure
There are some restrictions on the angles which can be modeled:
Both Boundaries = No-Flow:
Any Intersection Angle (F ang). Any Well Location Angle (W ang).

One Boundary = No-Flow, other Boundary = Constant Pressure:
F ang =360 4N, with N = any integer. Any Well Location Angle (W ang).
Both Boundaries = Constant Pressure:
F ang =360 2N, with N = any integer. Any Well Location Angle (W ang).
8. Composite Linear Reservoir Model:

Both Cells have the same Thickness (h) and Permeability (k). The second Cell
feeds into the main Cell across a Partially-Sealing Fault. It models Transient
Flow through the second Cell before the onset of Total Closed System Boundary
Effects.
This Model assumes Linear Flow across the Partially-Sealing Fault. The Fault
Position is defined by the dimension L2 (refer to the underlying diagram), so
the dimensions for the main Cell should be specified such that L2 > 2(L1 + L3)
or of that order (i.e. the second Cell should be at the END of the channel
rather than at the SIDE).
i
Note that the alternative Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model in
PanSystem assumes Semi-Steady-State Flow in the second Cell, with no
Transient Phase.

Figure 136: Composite Linear Reservoir Model - Plan View
Transmissibility across the Leaky Fault is described by a "Fault Conductivity":
Fc = (kf Lf)
where:
Lf is the Thickness of the Fault Zone and kf is its Permeability.

9. Wireline formation test with packers and probe in a single

homogeneous layer:
The pressure response at the active packer region and at an observation probe
in a homogeneous layer can be analyzed and simulated individually, or in
dual-pressure 'combo mode if both are available.
For dual-pressure mode, the special WFT with Observation Probe Test option
should be enabled in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, and WFT
Packer Test should be selected as the WFT Test type.
If you are not working in dual-pressure mode, simply select the appropriate
model (see below) from the Flow Model list.
Figure 137: Schematic of the WFT Packer Test configuration with optional
observation probe

Figure 138: Geometrical parameters for the WFT Packer Test configuration
Active zone (packers)
The active zone model is the standard PanSystem-supplied model for Partial
Penetration (reference 100) in the Flow Models list.
Line calculations for the active zone model
The radial (horizontal) permeability, k, must be determined first from radial

flow line (log-log or semi-log plot); the spherical flow plot can then be used to
obtain kz.
Quick Match input parameters for the active zone
k: horizontal (radial) permeability
kz: vertical permeability
hp: height of active zone (packer separation)

htop: distance from top of the open interval to top of layer (or bottom of
interval to bottom of layer)
S: (true) skin factor
i
The quantities hp and htop may be specified as fixed in the Auto Match
process, or they may be allowed to be variables provided the appropriate upper
and lower limits are imposed.
Observation Probe
The observation probe model is an external (customer) model which appears

as Packer-Obs in the Flow Models list.
Line calculations for the observation probe model
i *Spherical flow will only be observed when the probe is very close to the packer
( zVp << h).
Quick Match parameters for the observation probe (see diagram)
hp: height of active zone (packer separation)

htop: distance from top of the open interval top of layer (or bottom of interval
to bottom of layer)
zVp: distance from top of the open interval to the observation probe (or
bottom of interval to observation probe if it is below the packers).
i zVp should be set as a fixed value if Auto Match is used.
Combo
No line-fitting results are available in Combo mode.
Quick Match for the dual pressure match will display both input screens
side-by-side.
The combined set of parameters will be available for regression in Auto

Match. For Auto Match:
i
zVp should be set as a fixed value if Auto Match is used. hp and htop may be
fixed, or allowed as variables provided the appropriate upper and lower limits
are imposed.
10. Wireline formation test with two probes in a single homogeneous

layer:
The pressure response at the active packer region and at an observation probe
in a homogeneous layer can be analyzed and simulated individually, or in
dual-pressure 'combo mode if both are available.

Figure 139: Schematic of the WFT Probe Test configuration with optional
observation probe
Figure 140: Active Probe
Active probe
The active probe model is an external (customer) model which appears as

Probe-Active in the Flow Models list.
Line calculations for the active probe model
Ssd is a spherical skin factor associated with formation damage and possible
probe blockage.
The radial (horizontal) permeability, k, must be determined first from the

radial flow line (log-log or semi-log plot); the spherical flow plot can then be
used to obtain kz.
i Hemispherical flow is due to the initial wellbore blocking effect and will only be
observed at very early time. The spherical flow regime will develop rapidly.
In the case of the active probe in drawdown, the steady-state calculation on

the Cartesian plot requires kz to have been already determined. The output is
k. Firstly, the steady-state regime is defined on the log-log diagnostic plot
using the last few data points. A line is fitted to this regime on the Cartesian
graph and the user manually adjusts the slope to zero with the line passing
through the last flowing point.
Quick Match input parameters for the active probe (see diagram)
rp: probe aperture radius

zs: distance from active probe to nearest of top or bottom of layer
Ssd: spherical damage skin factor
i The quantities rp and zs should be specified as fixed if Auto Match is used.
i Note that probe radius is specified in ft or m !.
Observation Probe

as Probe-Obs in the Flow Models list.
i *Spherical flow will only be observed when the probes are very close together:
(z zs) << h.
The radial (horizontal) permeability, k, must be determined first from radial

flow line (log-log or semi-log plot), or from the active probe response. The
spherical flow plot can then be used to obtain kz if spherical flow is observed.

Quick Match parameters for the observation probe
zs: distance from active probe to nearest of top or bottom of layer
z: distance from observation probe to the reference used for zs
i z and zs should be set as fixed values if Auto Match is used.
Combo
side-by-side.

Match.
z, zs and rp should be set as fixed values if Auto Match is used.
11. Wireline formation test with packers and probes in a Dual

Permeability system:
This dual-permeability model consists of two permeable layers (active and
observation) separated by a thin, low permeability barrier. The active layer
is flowing and is fully open and, in this case, the observation layer is not
flowing.
In the context of a wireline formation tester, this would represent a

packer-probe test with the observation probe on the other side of the barrier.
Since no flow convergence effects are modeled, it is assumed that the packer
section covers the full thickness of the active layer. The observation layer is
assumed to have good vertical permeability, such that probe position within
the layer thickness is unimportant.
The pressure responses in the active layer and in the observation layer can be
analyzed and simulated individually, or in dual-pressure 'combo mode if
both measurements are available (as in a vertical interference test).

i
This model could also be used to analyze a conventional vertical interference
test where the two layers are isolated by a packer, with the lower layer open to
the tubing and the upper layer open to the annulus, or to a second tubing.
Figure 141: Schematic of the Dual-permeability configuration with

optional observation probe
Active zone (packers)
The active zone model is the standard PanSystem-supplied model for

Dual-permeability (Reference 46).

Line calculations for the active zone model
The properties of the semi-permeable barrier and the observation layer are
not obtained explicitly, but are implicit in the ratios (kappa), (omega) and
(lambda). These parameters are defined elsewhere in the notes on the
dual-permeability model (see Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters).
Quick Match input parameters for the active zone
S: (true) skin factor
: permeability-thickness ratio (active layer / total system)
: storativity ratio (active layer / total system)
: inter-layer flow coefficient
Observation Probe

as Dual-Permeability Obs in the Flow Models list.
No line calculations are available for the observation pressure. The radial
flow regime here corresponds to the total system kh.
The parameter set for the observation layer is identical to the active layer,
except that the skin factor is absent:

Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
: permeability-thickness ratio (active layer / total system)
: storativity ratio (active layer / total system)
: inter-layer flow coefficient
Combo
side-by-side.

Match.

General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from theWell, Reservoir & Fluid Description

Dialog by checking Oil (Single-Phase or Multiphase Perrine) within the Fluid
Type section, then selecting the Layer Fluid Parameters button on the Layer
Control tab. An Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog is subsequently generated to
view, enter or edit the Oil Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
themselves can be different in each layer. An Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting the appropriate layer on
the Layer Control tab of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description (Analytical)
dialog. Not all parameters displayed in the sub-dialog actually need to be
specified for welltest analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in
red and fluid properties can be typed in, or calculated from production or
laboratory data.
The same Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog box is used for the single-phase and
multi-phase modes. Differences exist only in the minimum datasets required
for analysis and on-screen fluid property calculations for each mode.

Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog 14
For the single-phase option, both of the multi-phase options should be left
unchecked in the Multiphase methods section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description dialog. For the multi-phase option, users need to check the
Multi-Phase Perrine Method (oil) checkbox in the Fluid Type section of the Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description (Analytical) dialog. The sub-dialog is titled
Multi-phase Oil Fluid Parameters in the latter case.
i
A similar sub-dialog is generated when the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Method is selected from the Fluid Type section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description (Analytical) dialog. Users should refer to the Help topic forOil
Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog.
The Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog can also be accessed from the
i
PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation area (i.e. when Multiphase
pseudo-pressure method checkbox is unchecked), by selecting the PVT
Calculator button for an Oil fluid type in the Material Properties Tabbed
Dialog..
This sub-dialog is comprised of five data entry sections and four function
buttons and the following table identifies the fluid parameters required for
each type of analysis, test or calculation:
Purpose Oil Oil (multi-phase)

(single-phase)
Bo, o, Bw, w,
Analysis Bo, o, Cf, Ct
Bg, g, Cf, Ct
P(layer), T(layer),
Oil specific gravity,
On-Screen P(layer), T(layer), Oil specific gravity, Gas
Gas specific
Calculation specific gravity, GOR (prod), Salinity
gravity, GOR
(prod)
The mandatory parameters (colored red), can be manually typed into the
Analysis section (i.e. lower main section), or calculated using the Calculate
button, once the parameters associated with the Calculation sections (i.e.
upper active sections) have been entered.

To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox. Choose
the appropriate correlations for Bo, Pb, Rs; Oil Viscosity, and Gas Viscosity
from the drop-down list boxes. The fluid properties are computed at the
specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to the
layer conditions).
Note that if the Use Correlations option is enabled, any checked parameters in
!
the lower Analysis section will be overwritten by the Calculate process. The
parameters can only be manually edited when they are checked, but users
should remember to uncheck any parameters they wish to retain before using
the Calculate button.
Different correlations can be used to calculate the hydrocarbon fluid

properties. With the exception of Vazquez-Beggs, these correlations assume a
single-stage flash to standard conditions. The published Vazquez-Beggs
correlation assumed the first stage separator to be at a "typical" 100 psig and
60 F, and provided for a pressure (and temperature) correction to gas gravity
if different. To simplify the data input, PanSystem assumes 100 psig and 60 F
and applies no correction).
If comparing with multi-stage flash experimental data, be sure to total up the

GORs from all stages, and to enter a gas gravity which is the GOR-weighted
sum of the gravities from each stage. The screen is not suited to comparison
with differential liberation data.
For Bo, Pb, Rs and Co, the following correlations are available (References 22, 35
and 91 to 94):
Glas.
Lasater.
Standing.
Vazquez & Beggs.
For Oil Viscosity o, the following correlations are available (References 22, 35,
86 and 88):
Beggs et al.
Beal et al.

For Gas Viscosity g, the following correlations are available (References 21, 22,
35, 89 and 90):
Lee et al.
Carr et al.
Z Factor Corr.
Other properties are computed with fixed correlations as described below:
For Water:
Bw is calculated from Numbere, Brigham and Standing (Reference 13b)

w is calculated from Van Wingen's correlation (Reference 13c)
Cw is calculated from Meehan's correlation (Reference 13a)
For Gas:
Tc and Pc are calculated internally from Standing's correlation (Reference 22)
z-factor is calculated from Dranchuk et al (Reference 21)
Cg is calculated from Mattar et al (Reference 21)
The Datum Correction... button is used to correct all pressures computed from
diagnostic plot analysis (p*, etc.), to a reference datum depth, by adding or
subtracting the appropriate hydrostatic pressure difference. Selecting this
button generates the Correction to Datum Input (Oil) sub-dialog.
Calculated Properties: These parameters are conventionally computed at the

layer pressure and temperature for welltest analysis:
Bo: The formation volume factor ( FVF) of the oil. It is a mandatory

parameter for analysis in Oil (single-phase and multi-phase) modes.
Typical values are 1.1 - 2.0 for black oil reservoirs and > 2.0 for volatile oil
reservoirs.

o: The viscosity of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for analysis in

Oil (single-phase multi-phase) modes. Oil viscosity measures the oil's
resistance to flow and this is affected by oil composition (e.g. low API =
high viscosity, high API = low viscosity), temperature, dissolved gas and
pressure. The oil viscosity values should fall slowly in relation to
declining reservoir pressure until the bubble point pressure ( pb) is
reached. Below bubble point pressure, the oil viscosity values should rise
sharply, as gas is liberated from the liquid phase. Typically, oil viscosity
will be around 1cp, for a light API oil gravity between 40 - 50 at reservoir
conditions.
Co: The isothermal compressibility of the oil. Typically, this will be

between 10 - 15 x 10-6/psi.
o: The oil density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature.

Equivalent to the oil specific gravity and not used in calculations.
Bw: The formation volume factor ( FVF) of the water. It is only a

mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the
water/oil ratio (WOR) > 0, and in Water (single-phase) mode. Although
dissolved salts and gases can affect the water FVF these effects are often
ignored. Typically, the water FVF lies within the range 0.99 - 1.07.
w: The viscosity of the water. It is only a mandatory parameter for

analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the water/oil ratio (WOR) > 0, and in
Water (single-phase) mode. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure,
temperature and salinity. In general, brine viscosity increases with
increasing pressure, increasing salinity and decreasing temperature.
Typically, the water viscosity lies within the range 0.2 - 2.5 cp.
Cw: The isothermal compressibility of the water. Above bubble point

pressures this is defined as the change in water volume per unit water
volume per psi change in pressure. A typical value for reservoir brines is
around 3.0 x 10-6/psi. However, dissolved salts and gases can affect
water compressibility.
w: The water density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature. This
term is also a function of dissolved constituents (i.e. Water Salinity term)
and is not used in calculations.

g: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. It is only a mandatory
parameter for analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the Produced gas/oil
ratio (GOR) > Solution (GOR) (i.e. there is free gas in the reservoir).
Typical values range between 0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg)
increasing with decreasing reservoir pressure.
g: The viscosity of the gas. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis

in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there is
free gas in the reservoir). A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir
conditions is 0.025 cp, which is approximately 40 times smaller than light
oils with an API gravity of 40 - 50, which exhibit viscosities of around
1cp. Gas viscosity values should decrease as reservoir pressure
decreases.
Cg: The isothermal compressibility of the gas. Gas compressibility is

almost hyperbolic in relation to pressure, with low values at high
pressure, tending to increasingly higher values as pressure decreases.
Typical values of (Cg) can range between 200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir
pressure of 5,000 psia) to 500 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 2,000 psia),
increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 1,000 psia).
?g: The gas density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature.
Equivalent to the gas specific gravity and not used in calculations.
Solution GOR (Rs): This describes gas dissolved in the reservoir oil at the
specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature. Typical values are less
than 1,500 - 2,000 scf/ stb for a black oil system and between 1,500 - 3,500
scf/stb for a volatile oil system.
If it is less than the produced GOR, there is free gas in the reservoir. In this
case, a Perrine multi-phase analysis can be performed if the Oil (multi-phase)
fluid type has been selected.
Bubble Point (Pb): The bubble point pressure of the oil at the Check
Temperature, computed using the specified Produced GOR. If the
produced GOR is high because of the production of free gas (e.g. from a
gas cap), the bubble point will not correspond to the true value for the oil.
This will not affect the oil properties used in analysis, since they are
computed at the Check Pressure, not the bubble point pressure.

Cf: The rock pore-volume compressibility. This is defined as the

fractional change in pore volume (PV) of the rock with unit change in
pressure. Typically the pore compressibility in consolidated and
unconsolidated reservoirs is 2.5 - 10.0 x 10-6/psi respectively.
In high porosity, over-pressured reservoirs, the pore compressibility exhibits

a low value during early production, but subsequently increases as
production and pressure depletion continues. As fluid pressure in the
reservoir is reduced during production, the subsequent pore volume collapse
creates a higher pore compressibility. Compaction in this instance can create
significant subsidence at surface, particularly if the rock matrix is weak (e.g.
Ekofisk chalk with porosity values of 25 - 48% ). The Norwegian Ekofisk
field, with reservoir fluids initially over-pressured in excess of 2,000 psi,
suffered an abnormal degree of reservoir compaction, with typical pore
compressibilities increasing from 6 x 10-6/psi up to a maximum of ~100 x
10-6/psi. Similarly, in shallow unconsolidated reservoirs, values in excess of
100 x 10-6/psi have been measured (e.g. Bolivar Coast, Venezuela).
PanSystem calculates rock pore volume compressibility using either the Hall
correlation or a calculation based upon Solid Mechanics. The Hall correlation
is an empirical relationship between porosity and rock compressibility
(References 2 and 16).
The Solid Mechanics model requires the input of Youngs Modulus and
Poissons ratio for the reservoir rock. These inputs are utilized in the
equation:
Cf = 3(1-2?)/(E)
(where ? is Poissons ratio, is porosity, and E is Youngs modulus)
The following table provides estimates of the range of these properties for
various rock types.
Material Youngs Modulus Poissons Ratio

(GPa)
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25

Source:
The Applied Seismology Laboratory
Liverpool University Department of Earth Sciences
Jane Herdman Laboratories, 4 Brownlow St., Liverpool L69 3GP
www.liv.ac.uk
Ct: The total compressibility of the layer, calculated as:
Ct = SwCw + SoCo + SgCg + Cf
(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively)
The value entered in the (Ct) data entry field is automatically written to the
Layer Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only.
Input Parameters for Fluid Property Calculation: The following parameters

are required to calculate the fluid parameters (above) using the correlations:
Produced GOR (Rsp): This is the gas/oil ratio produced from the layer.
i Note this is the total GOR (i.e. solution gas plus any free gas).
If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin method
for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the gas phase if Produced Rsp
> Solution Rs.
Water-Cut: This is the (decimal) fraction of water in the fluid produced

from the layer. If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the
Perrine-Martin method for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for
the water phase if Water-Cut > 0.
Check Pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties.

Use this entry to check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to
compare with lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct
pressure (i.e. conventionally the layer pressure) before proceeding to
Analysis or Simulation.

Check Temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid

properties. Use this entry to check fluid properties at different
temperatures (e.g. to compare with lab data), but remember to compute
them at the correct temperature (i.e. conventionally the layer
temperature) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulation.
Oil Specific Gravity: This is the stock tank gravity of the oil produced from
the layer. This parameter is required to calculate fluid parameters for Oil
(single and multi-phase) systems. Specific gravities of oil generally lie
between 0.73 to slightly above 1.0 and in API gravity terms, the usual
range starts with water density at 10 and rises to volatile oils and
condensate liquids at around 60-70.
Gas Specific Gravity: Gas specific gravity (relative to air), is the gravity of
the separator gas at standard conditions, produced from the layer. This is
required to calculate properties for Oil (single and multi-phase) systems.
In a multi-stage separation, it should represent the gas yield from all
stages, suitably weighted. For the Vazquez & Beggs correlation, the first
stage separator is assumed to be at 100 psig. Typical values for
hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65 (dry gas) to 0.95 (wet gas).
Water Salinity: This describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the
produced water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs typically
increases by 6 to 160 g/L (6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth. The causes
of increased salinity are:
Salt dissolution (primary).
Membrane filtration (secondary).
Seawater salinity is about 35 g/L (35,000 ppm). Much higher salinities are
found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for oil and gas reservoirs are 30
g/L (30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.
Concentrations of total dissolved solids (TDS) range from 80 to 300 g/L

(80,000 to 300,000 ppm) in reservoirs deeper than 1 km.

Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog 14
Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This model-specific sub-dialog is primarily accessed from the Boundary Model

dialog by selecting the Boundary Parameters button from the Boundary Model
section, although it can also be accessed from the following dialogs in other
areas of PanSystem (e.g. Analysis and Simulation):
The Boundary Parameters button in the Boundary Model area of the Select
Analysis Model Dialog (i.e. Model option from Analysis view).
The Boundary Parameters button in the Boundary Type Dialog, which is

generated by selecting either the Quick Match Dialog or Automatic
Matching Dialog options from the PanSystem Simulation view, when a
Boundary Model other than Infinitely-Acting has been selected (i.e. either in
the Data Preparation Boundary Parameters sub-dialog or the Analysis Select
Analysis Model Dialog).
The fields in this sub-dialog will vary depending on the model selected
within the Boundary Model dialog (i.e. seven of the eight available models are
applicable to this sub-dialog). Annotated graphical representations of each
model are presented in the relevant sub-dialog.
i This sub-dialog is not available for an Infinitely-Acting Boundary Model

selection.
The Advanced Simulation facility requires Image Wells to model Boundaries for
all Reservoir Models except the following, which use Greens Functions:
Radial Homogeneous
Vertical Fracture Infinite Conductivity
Vertical Fracture Limited Height
Horizontal Well all models
For all the other Reservoir Models in Advanced Simulation, Boundary Effects are
modeled using Image Wells with Radial Homogeneous (Ei-function) responses.
Advanced Simulation requires a table of Image Wells to be generated for the
selected Boundary Model; Quick Match Dialog uses a library of look-up
tables supplied with PanSystem.

Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog
With the Image Well approach, the simulated response will be rigorously valid
provided that the nearest Boundary is far enough away from the Well for
Pseudo-Radial behaviour to have developed before any Boundary Effect is
observed. As a rule-of-thumb:
For a Hydraulically Fractured Well, the nearest Boundary should be a

distance of at least (2Xf ) (i.e. two Fracture Half-Lengths) away from the
Well.
For a Horizontal Well, the nearest Boundary should be a distance of at least

(Lw) (i.e. Effective Well Length) away from the mid-point of the Well.
For Vertical Wells with Reservoir Models like Dual-Porosity, Radial

Homogeneous, etc., the nearest Boundary should be far enough away from
the Well for (total system) Pseudo-Radial behaviour to have developed
before any Boundary Effect is observed.
If a Boundary is positioned closer than these (approximate) limits, the

response will start to deviate from strict validity.
i Since Pseudo-Radial Flow is assumed, the Boundary Orientation relative to a

Horizontal Well or Hydraulic Fracture Trajectory is not considered.
Some models offer a choice of Boundary Types from either:
No-Flow (i.e. impermeable Boundary).

Constant Pressure (i.e. uniform Flow Rate on either side of the Boundary).
After selecting the appropriate Boundary Type, enter the Boundary distances
from the Well (L). Where applicable, the Calculate button is then used to
calculate:
The Volume (V1), of the main cell using (L), and also (h) and ( ) from the
Layer Parameters dialog.
The Drainage Area Size (A), for Closed System, 2-Cell Compartmentalized and
Hexagonal Boundary options.
The Dietz Shape Factor (CA), for Closed System and 2-Cell Compartmentalized
options.

Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog 14
For Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundaries, two additional parameters have to
be defined:
The volume (V2), of the supporting cell, which determines how much
support will be provided.
The effective transmissibility (Teff ), across the Boundary, which determines

how rapidly the support is provided.
The models are described and illustrated in the Boundary Model dialog and
each possible sub-dialog option is described below:
Single Fault: Single length required, select one Boundary Type.
Parallel Fault: Two lengths required to each Boundary, select one Boundary
Type for each.
Intersecting Faults (30): Two lengths required to each Boundary, select one
Boundary Type for each.
Intersecting Faults (120): Single length required, select one Boundary Type.
U-Shaped Faults: Three lengths required to each Boundary, select one

Closed System: Four lengths required to each Boundary, select one

Boundary Type for each and Calculate (A) and (CA).
2-Cell Compartmentalized: Four lengths required to each Boundary, select

one Boundary Type for each and Calculate (V1), (A) and (CA). The
additional terms (V2) and (Teff) must be specified.
Hexagonal Boundary: Enter the single length (L), equivalent to the radius
of a circle (R). The equivalence between radius (R) and length (L) is based
on area. Only the No-Flow Boundary option is available at present.
Calculate (A).

Water Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
Dialog by selecting Water within the Fluid Type section, then selecting the
Layer Fluid Parameters button on the Layer Control tab. A Water Fluid
Parameters sub-dialog is subsequently generated to view, enter or edit the
Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
themselves can be different in each layer. A Water Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it on the Layer Control tab
of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. Not all parameters displayed
in the sub-dialog actually need to be specified for well test analysis purposes.
The mandatory parameters appear in red and fluid properties can be typed
in, or calculated from production or laboratory data.
A similar sub-dialog box is used for the Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
(i.e. Single-Phase and Multi-Phase Perrine Methods). Differences exist only in
the minimum datasets required for analysis and on-screen fluid property
calculations for each mode. This sub-dialog is comprised of five data entry
sections and four function buttons and the following table identifies the fluid
parameters required for each type of analysis, test or calculation:
Purpose Water (single-phase)
Analysis Bw, w, Ct
On-Screen Calculation P(layer), T(layer), Salinity

Water Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog 14
The Use Correlations checkbox is unavailable in this sub-dialog and if no
custom settings have been applied in the other relevant Fluid Parameters
sub-dialogs (e.g. oil, gas, etc.), default settings will be applied. The fluid
properties are computed at the specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature
(i.e. nominally set equal to the layer conditions).
!
Note that any checked parameters in the lower Analysis section will be
overwritten by the Calculate process. The parameters can only be manually
edited when they are checked, but users should remember to uncheck any
parameters they wish to retain before using the Calculate button.
The Datum correction... button is used to correct all pressures computed from
button generates the Correction to Datum Input (Water) sub-dialog.

Bo: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the oil. It is a mandatory

reservoirs.
Bw: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. It is only a

Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. It is only a mandatory


Oil (single and multi-phase) modes. Oil viscosity measures the oil's
declining reservoir pressure until the bubble point pressure (pb) is
conditions.


in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there
is free gas in the reservoir). A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir
decreases.


around 3.0 x 10-6/psi. However, dissolved salts and gases can affect water
compressibility.


g: The gas density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature.

than 1,500 - 2,000 scf/stb for a black oil system and between 1,500 - 3,500
Temperature, computed using the specified Produced GOR. If the produced
GOR is high because of the production of free gas (e.g. from a gas cap),
the bubble point will not correspond to the true value for the oil. This
will not affect the oil properties used in analysis, since they are computed
at the Check Pressure, not the bubble point pressure.


In high porosity, overpressured reservoirs, the pore compressibility

exhibits a low value during early production, but subsequently increases
as production and pressure depletion continues. As fluid pressure in the
reservoir is reduced during production, the subsequent pore volume
collapse creates a higher pore compressibility. Compaction in this
instance can create significant subsidence at surface, particularly if the
rock matrix is weak (e.g. Ekofisk chalk with porosity values of 25 - 48% ).
The Norwegian Ekofisk field, with reservoir fluids initially overpressured
in excess of 2,000 psi, suffered an abnormal degree of reservoir
compaction, with typical pore compressibilities increasing from 6 x
10-6/psi up to a maximum of ~100 x 10-6/psi. Similarly, in shallow
unconsolidated reservoirs, values in excess of 100 x 10-6/psi have been
measured (e.g. Bolivar Coast, Venezuala).
(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively)
The value entered in the (Ct) data entry field is automatically written to the
Layer Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only.

i Note that the Use Correlations option must be activated and suitable
correlations selected.
If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin Method
for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the gas phase if Produced Rsp
> Solution Rs.

Perrine-Martin Method for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for


found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for oil and gas reservoirs are 30 g/L
(30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.

Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog


General:
Dialog by selecting Gas on the Fluid Type tab, then selecting the Layer Fluid
Parameters button on the Layer Control tab. A Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
is subsequently generated to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the
currently selected layer.
themselves can be different in each layer. A Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it on the Layer Control tab
of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description (Analytical) dialog. Not all
parameters displayed in the sub-dialog actually need to be specified for well
test analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in red and fluid
properties can be either be entered directly, or calculated from production or
laboratory data.
For the gas multi-phase option, users need to check the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method (Gas) checkbox in the Fluid Type section of the Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description dialog. The sub-dialog is titled Gas Fluid
Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) in the latter case.
i
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Method is selected from the Fluid Type section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description (Analytical) dialog. Users should refer to the Help topic for Gas
Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
i
This sub-dialog can also be accessed from the PanSystem - PanMesh Data
Preparation area (i.e. when Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox
is unchecked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Gas fluid type in
the Material Properties tabbed dialog.

Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog 14
buttons and the following table identifies the gas parameters required for
Purpose Using Correlations Using EoS
T(layer), Bg, g, Cf, Ct,

Analysis T(layer), Bg, g, Cf, Ct, z, Cg
z, Cg
On-Screen P(layer), T(layer), Gas Gas specific gravity, Gas

Calculation specific gravity composition
upper active sections) have been entered. However, not all parameters
displayed actually need to be quantified for well test analysis purposes; users
have the option to de-select the values for Cg, Cw, Cf and/or Ct, if they
specifically require to do so.
!
During the Calculate process, the individual rock and fluid compressibilities
are normally computed from correlations and combined in the total
compressibility Ct. If users wish to enter their own values for any of these
compressibilities, type in a preferred value, then un-check the checkbox next
to the parameter as outlined above. The Calculate process will then include
this value in the Ct calculation.
i The Calculate button will not overwrite any data whose checkbox has been
switched off.

To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox and choose
the appropriate correlations for gas viscosity from the Gas Viscosity
drop-down list box, or check the Use EoS checkbox and select from a similar
drop-down list. This will either calculate gas properties at the specified
pressure and temperature Using Correlations (i.e. from a specified gas gravity)
or an Equation of State (i.e. from a specified gas composition). Enter the
parameters listed in the appropriate table section above, from the Formation
Compressibility Calculation row.
For the Use Correlations option, the gas properties are computed at the
i
specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to
the layer conditions). For the Use EoS option, the full gas composition from C1
- C7+ will be required and these data are input by selecting the Gas
Composition button to generate the Gas Composition sub-dialog.
35, 89 and 90):
Lee et al.
Carr et al.
Other properties are computed with fixed correlations as described below.
In addition, tables of g, z and g, Ct can be computed (or edited) for the

pseudo-pressure and pseudo-time integrals. A facility is also available to
import an externally-generated table of viscosity and z-factor values against
pressure. There is a conventional real gas pseudo-pressure generation
facility, and it is also possible to generate or import a multi-phase
pseudo-pressure table. These options are accessed via selection of the
Pseudo-Tables button (refer to the Pseudo-Tables Editing and Pseudo-Table Data
sub-dialogs).
button generates the Correction to Datum Input (Gas and Condensate)
sub-dialog.


Water/Gas Ratio (WGR): The water / gas ratio is the ratio of produced
water to produced gas. This is not used in analysis, and is for
information only.
Check Pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties

(Reference 22). Use this entry to check fluid properties at different
pressures (e.g. to compare with lab data), but remember to compute them
at the correct pressure (conventionally the layer pressure) before
proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Check Temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties

them at the correct temperature (conventionally the layer temperature)
before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate. It is also a mandatory entry for
well test analysis, since it appears in the inflow equation.
Gas Specific Gravity: This is the specific gravity (relative to air) of the
separator gas, at standard conditions. It is required to compute the gas
properties using correlations. Typical values for hydrocarbon Gas
mixtures range from 0.65 (Dry Gas) to 0.95 (Wet Gas).
Water Salinity: Water salinity describes the total amount of dissolved

solids in the produced water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs
typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L (6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth.
The causes of increased salinity are:
found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for oil and gas reservoirs are 30 g/L
(30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.

(80,000 to 300,000 ppm)in reservoirs deeper than 1 km.

layer pressure and temperature for well test analysis:
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. Typical values range
between 0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with decreasing
reservoir pressure. It is mandatory for gas well test analysis.

g: The viscosity of the gas. A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir

decreases. It is mandatory for gas well test analysis.
Cg: The isothermal compressibility of the gas (Reference 21). Gas

compressibility is almost hyperbolic in relation to pressure, with low
values at high pressure, tending to increasingly higher values as pressure
decreases. Typical values of (Cg) can range between 200 x 10-6/psi
(reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia) to 500 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of
2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 1,000 psia).
It is mandatory for wellbore storage analysis.

w: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. Although dissolved

salts and gases can affect the water FVF these effects are often ignored.
Typically, the water FVF lies within the range 0.99 - 1.07.
w: The viscosity of the water. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure,




In high porosity, over-pressured reservoirs, the pore compressibility
The Norwegian Ekofisk field, with reservoir fluids initially
over-pressured in excess of 2,000 psi, suffered an abnormal degree of
reservoir compaction, with typical pore compressibilities increasing from
6 x 10-6/psi up to a maximum of ~100 x 10-6/psi. Similarly, in shallow
measured (e.g. Bolivar Coast, Venezuela).
PanSystem calculates rock pore volume compressibility using either the

Hall correlation or a calculation based upon Solid Mechanics. The Hall
correlation is an empirical relationship between porosity and rock
compressibility (References 2 and 16).
equation:
Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
(where is Poissons ratio, is porosity, and E is Youngs modulus)
various rock types.
Material Youngs Modulus (GPa) Poissons Ratio
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:

Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
www.liv.ac.uk
(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively.
Where applicable, the isothermal compressibility of the oil (Co), typically
lies between 10 - 15 x 10-6/psi.)
The value entered in the (Ct) data entry field is automatically written to
the Layer Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only.
It is mandatory for gas welltest analysis.
Z: The gas deviation factor or Z-factor corresponding to each pressure

measurement (Reference 21). This is a dimensionless parameter that
represents the degree of deviation from ideal gas behaviour, with a range
of values lying between 0.3 and 2.0. At high reservoir pressure the
Z-factor is at a maximum, but as pressure decreases, the Z-factor falls to a
minimum value, then rises again in hyperbolic fashion to approach unity.
It is mandatory for analysis.

General:
Dialog by selecting Condensate within the Fluid Type section, then selecting
the Layer Fluid Parameters button in the Layer Control section. A Condensate
Fluid Parameters sub-dialog is subsequently generated to view, enter or edit
the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer. This dialog is similar to
that for gas, but several new parameters must be quantified (refer also to
Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog and Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog).
themselves can be different in each layer. A Condensate Fluid Parameters
sub-dialog box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer
Control section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. Not all
parameters displayed in the sub-dialog actually need to be specified for well
test analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in red and fluid
properties can be typed in, or calculated from production or laboratory data.

Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog 14
For the condensate multi-phase option, users need to check the Multiphase
Pseudo-Pressure Method (Condensate) check box in the Fluid Type section of the
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. The sub-dialog is titled Condensate
Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) in the latter case. With this
option, users can generate or import a multiphase pseudo-pressure table
which will allow a more rigorous treatment of condensate fluid properties
(e.g. liquid drop-out, etc.) and relative permeability effects.
i
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure
Method is selected from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog. Users should refer to the Help topic for Condensate Fluid
Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
i
Preparation area (i.e. when Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox
is unchecked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Condensate fluid
type in the Material Properties Tabbed Dialog.
This sub-dialog is comprised of six data entry sections and four function
buttons and the following table identifies the condensate parameters required
for each type of analysis, test or calculation:
Purpose Using Using Using EoS

Correlations Correlations (Reservoir Fluid)
(Separator Fluid) (Reservoir Fluid)
T(layer), Bg, g, Cf, T(layer), Bg, g, Cf, T(layer), Bg, g, Cf,

Analysis
Ct, z, Vvap Ct, z, Vvap Ct, z, Vvap
P(layer), T(layer), P(layer), T(layer),

P(layer), T(layer),
Separator Gas, Reservoir Fluid,
On-Screen Reservoir Gas,
Specific Gravity, Specific Gravity and
Calculation Specific Gravity, API,
API, CGR, Psep, Composition, API,
CGR, Psep, Tsep
Tsep CGR, Psep, Tsep

specifically require to do so. This is achieved by clicking on the associated
check boxes to clear them, then only the remaining marked boxes will be
updated by Calculate.
compressibilities, type in a preferred value, then switch off the check box next
i The Calculate button will not overwrite any data whose check box has been
switched off.
The Calculate button is already enabled with Use Correlations checkbox as the
default setting. Users can choose an appropriate correlation for gas viscosity
(g) and vaporizing volume ratio (Vvap), from the drop-down list box
provided, or check the Using EoS checkbox and select from a similar
drop-down list box. This will either calculate gas properties at the specified
parameters listed in the appropriate table section above, from the On-Screen
Calculation row.
For the Using Correlations option the gas properties are computed at the
i
the layer conditions). For the Using EoS option the full gas composition from
C1 - C7+ will be required and these data are input by selecting the Gas
Composition button to generate the Gas and Condensate Composition
sub-dialog.
There are two classes of calculations associated with condensate fluid

properties. All calculations are made at the specified Check Pressure and Check
Temperature:

Calculate reservoir fluid properties via correlations (Use Correlations
option) or by equation of state (Use EoS option) in the same manner as for
Gas (single-phase) fluid type. The separator gas gravity is corrected to
the recombined wet stream gas gravity for these calculations.
Calculate the volumetric correction from primary separator gas rates to

recombined wet stream gas rates, allowing for the vaporisation of the
surface condensate fraction at reservoir conditions. The reservoir fluid is
then assumed to be single-phase rich gas. This is made via a selected
correlation for the Vaporizing Volume Ratio (Vvap):
Qres fluid = Qsep gas [1 + CGR Vvap 1e-06] (oil field units)
Two correlations are available:
Leshikar (Reference 21)
Gold, McKain and Jennings (Reference 17)
There are also two ways to describe the produced fluids for the calculation of
fluid properties:
Separator Fluids option:
For Use Correlations: The gas rate and gravity are assumed to
correspond to the high pressure separator gas. Using the
condensate/gas ratio (CGR) and condensate gravity, it is converted to
the equivalent reservoir rich gas gravity and this is used as input to
the correlations to compute the fluid properties.
For Use EOS: This option is not allowed.
Reservoir Fluids option:
For Use Correlations: The gas gravity is taken as the single-phase rich
gas gravity in the reservoir (measured at standard conditions). This
gravity is used directly by the correlations without correction.
For Use EOS: The Gas and Condensate Composition must be supplied
and is taken as the rich gas composition in the reservoir.

In all cases, the calculated volumetric correction is applied to all gas flow rate
data used in Analysis, this normally being specified as a primary separator
gas rate. If users have a direct value of downhole flow rates at standard
conditions, it is possible to disable the correction simply by setting the Vvap
term to zero.

Pseudo-Tables button (refer to the Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table
Editing and Pseudo-Tables Data sub-dialogs).
sub-dialog.

layer pressure and temperature for well test analysis:
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. Typical values range
between 0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with decreasing
reservoir pressure. It is mandatory for gas well test analysis.
w: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. Although dissolved

salts and gases can affect the water FVF these effects are often ignored.
Typically, the water FVF lies within the range 0.99 - 1.07.
g: The viscosity of the gas. A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir

decreases. It is mandatory for gas well test analysis.
w: The viscosity of the water. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure,


values at high pressure, tending to increasingly higher values as pressure
decreases. Typical values of (Cg) can range between 200 x 10-6/psi
(reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia) to 500 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of
2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 1,000 psia).
It is mandatory for wellbore storage analysis.

around 3.0 x 10-6/psi. However, dissolved salts and gases can affect water
compressibility.



rock matrix is weak (e.g. Ekofisk chalk with porosity values of 25 - 48%).


equation:
Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
various rock types.
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:
www.liv.ac.uk
It is mandatory for gas welltest analysis.


Condensate Gas Ratio (CGR): The CGR is the ratio of the condensate liquid
to gas produced at the primary (i.e. high pressure) separator, converted to
standard conditions. This term also defined as (rv), represents the
condensate yield recovered by the surface separators. A gas condensate
system is generally classified as a gas reservoir with a condensate
liquid/gas ratio (CGR) greater than 10-500 stb/MMscf.

proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.

before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate. It is also a mandatory entry for
well test analysis, since it appears in the inflow equation.
Separator Pressure: This refers to the high pressure separator.
Separator Temperature: This refers to the high pressure separator.
Condensate Gravity (o): This is the gravity of the stock tank liquid
expressed at standard conditions. Specific gravities of oil generally lie

Water Salinity: Water salinity describes the total amount of dissolved

solids in the produced water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs
typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L (6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth.
The causes of increased salinity are:

(80,000 to 300,000 ppm)in reservoirs deeper than 1 km.
Gas Specific Gravity (g): For the Separator Fluids option, this is the specific
gravity of the high pressure separator gas, converted to standard
conditions. For the Reservoir Fluids option, it is the gravity of the rich
reservoir gas, at standard conditions. In both cases, it is measured
relative to air (=1). It is entered directly for Use Correlations option, or
computed from the compositional data for Use EoS option. Typical values
for hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65 (dry gas) to 0.95 (wet gas).
Water/Gas Ratio (WGR): The water/gas ratio is the ratio of produced water
to produced gas. This is not used in analysis, and is for information only.
Vap. Volume Ratio (Vvap): This is the volume of vapour (measured at

standard conditions) that a unit stock tank volume of condensate liquid
occupies in the reservoir, assuming the reservoir to be above the dew
point.
Defining Condensate Properties:
Option 1: Manual entry of mandatory parameters:
In this case, the parameters appearing in red in the dialog box are
entered, (i.e. listed in the "Analysis" section of the table displayed above):
Tlayer, Bg, g, z, Ct and Vvap.
Option 2: Calculation of parameters:
Enter the properties listed in the "On-Screen Calculation" section of the

table displayed above. The three available options are also explained
above; these are:

Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog 14
Reservoir Fluid with Use EOS option: Enter the gas composition via the Gas
and Condensate Composition sub-dialog.
Reservoir Fluid with Use Correlations option: Enter rich gas gravity. The gas
Inorganics can be entered in the Gas and Condensate Composition
sub-dialog. Enter the CGR, Condensate Gravity and Psep, Tsep for the Vvap
calculation.
Separator Fluid with Use Correlations option: Enter primary (i.e. high
pressure) separator Gas Gravity, CGR, Psep, Tsep and stock tank
Condensate Gravity for the fluid property and Vvap calculations. The gas
Inorganics can be entered in the Gas and Condensate Composition
sub-dialog.
Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure)

Sub-Dialog
General:
Dialog by selecting Oil and checking the Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure method
checkbox within the Multiphase methods section, then selecting the Layer Fluid
Parameters button on the Layer Control tab. An Oil Fluid Parameters (Multiphase
Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog is subsequently generated to view, enter or edit
the Oil Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
themselves can be different in each layer. An Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting the appropriate layer on
the Layer Control tab of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description (Analytical)
dialog. Not all parameters displayed in the sub-dialog actually need to be
specified for welltest analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in
red and fluid properties can be typed in, or calculated from production or
laboratory data.
i
A similar sub-dialog is generated when the Single-Phase Oil or Multi-Phase
Perrine Method is selected from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir
Description (Analytical) dialog. For either of these selections users should
refer to the Help topic for the Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog.

Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog
The Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog can also be accessed from the
i
PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation area (i.e. when Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox is checked), by selecting the PVT
Calculator button for an Oil fluid type in the Material Properties Tabbed
Dialog..
This sub-dialog is comprised of five data entry sections and five function
buttons and the following table identifies the fluid parameters required for
Purpose Oil (multi-phase)
Analysis Bo, o, Bw, w, Bg, g, Cf, Ct
P(layer), T(layer),
On-Screen Calculation Oil specific gravity, Gas, specific gravity, GOR
(prod), Salinity
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox. Choose
the appropriate correlations for Bo, Pb, Rs; Oil Viscosity, and Gas Viscosity
from the drop-down list boxes. The fluid properties are computed at the
specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to the
layer conditions).
!

Different correlations can be used to calculate the hydrocarbon fluid
properties. With the exception of Vazquez-Beggs, these correlations assume a
single-stage flash to standard conditions. The published Vazquez-Beggs
correlation assumed the first stage separator to be at a "typical" 100 psig and
60 F, and provided for a pressure (and temperature) correction to gas gravity
if different. To simplify the data input, PanSystem assumes 100 psig and 60 F
and applies no correction).
If comparing with multi-stage flash experimental data, be sure to total up the

GORs from all stages, and to enter a gas gravity which is the GOR-weighted
sum of the gravities from each stage. The screen is not suited to comparison
with differential liberation data.
For Bo, Pb, Rs and Co, the following correlations are available (References 22, 35
and 91 to 94):
Glas.
Lasater.
Standing.
Vazquez & Beggs.
For Oil Viscosity o, the following correlations are available (References 22, 35,
86 and 88):
Beggs et al.
Beal et al.
35, 89 and 90):
Lee et al.
Carr et al.
Z Factor Corr.
Other properties are computed with fixed correlations as described below:
For Water:
Bw is calculated from Numbere, Brigham and Standing (Reference 13b)

w is calculated from Van Wingen's correlation (Reference 13c)
Cw is calculated from Meehan's correlation (Reference 13a)
For Gas:

Tc and Pc are calculated internally from Standing's correlation (Reference

22)
z-factor is calculated from Dranchuk et al (Reference 21)
Cg is calculated from Mattar et al (Reference 21)
button generates the Correction to Datum Input (Oil) sub-dialog.

Bo: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the oil. It is a mandatory

reservoirs.

Oil (single-phase multi-phase) modes. Oil viscosity measures the oil's
declining reservoir pressure until the bubble point pressure ( pb) is
conditions.


Bw: The formation volume factor ( FVF) of the water. It is only a



g: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. It is only a mandatory


in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there is
free gas in the reservoir). A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir
decreases.



than 1,500 - 2,000 scf/ stb for a black oil system and between 1,500 - 3,500
Temperature, computed using the specified Produced GOR. If the
produced GOR is high because of the production of free gas (e.g. from a
gas cap), the bubble point will not correspond to the true value for the oil.
This will not affect the oil properties used in analysis, since they are
computed at the Check Pressure, not the bubble point pressure.



equation:

Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
various rock types.
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:
www.liv.ac.uk
(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations
respectively)


If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin
method for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the gas phase if
Produced Rsp > Solution Rs.

Perrine-Martin method for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for




Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog 14
Concentrations of total dissolved solids ( TDS) range from 80 to 300 g/L

Additional Function Button:
Pseudo tables : Select this button to generate the Oil Pseudo-Pressure

Table Editing sub-dialog.
Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure)

Sub-Dialog
General:
Dialog by selecting Gas and checking the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
check box within the Fluid Type section, then selecting the Layer Fluid
Parameters button in the Layer Control section. A Gas Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog is subsequently generated to view,
enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
themselves can be different in each layer. A Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog box can be brought up for any layer by
highlighting it in the Layer Control section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description (Analytical) dialog.
i
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Single-Phase Gas model is
selected from the Fluid Type section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
(Analytical) dialog. For this selection users should refer to the Help topic for
the Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog.
i
This sub-dialog can also be accessed from the PanMesh Data Preparation.
area (i.e. when Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method check box is checked),
by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Gas fluid type in the Material
Properties Tabbed Dialog.

Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog
buttons. It is used to set up and calculate the various gas fluid parameters
values. The adjacent data entry fields colored in blue indicate that they are
interrelated, so changing one parameter (e.g. water salinity) results in the
associated parameter being re-calculated (e.g. water specific gravity). The
data entry fields and button functions are described as follows:
Water/Gas Ratio (WGR): The water / gas ratio is the ratio of produced
water to produced gas. This is not used in analysis, and is for information
only.

proceeding to Analysis or Simulation.

before proceeding to Analysis or Simulation. It is also a mandatory entry
for well test analysis, since it appears in the inflow equation.
specifically require to do so.
i

compressibilities, type in a preferred value, then un-check the checkbox next
i The Calculate button will not overwrite any data whose checkbox has been
switched off.
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox and choose
the appropriate correlations for gas viscosity from the Gas Viscosity
drop-down list box, or check the Use EoS checkbox and select from a similar
drop-down list. This will either calculate gas properties at the specified
parameters listed in the appropriate table section above, from the Formation
Compressibility Calculation row.
For the Use Correlations option, the gas properties are computed at the
i
the layer conditions). For the Use EoS option, the full gas composition from C1
- C7+ will be required and these data are input by selecting the Gas
Composition button to generate the Gas Composition sub-dialog.
For Gas Viscosity g, the following correlations are available (References 21,
22, 35, 89 and 90):
Lee et al.
Carr et al.


Pseudo-Tables button (refer to the Pseudo-Tables Editing and Pseudo-Table
Data sub-dialogs).
sub-dialog.
Gas Specific Gravity: Enter the gas specific gravity (at standard
conditions). Typical values for hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65
(dry gas) to 0.95 (wet gas).
Water Salinity: Enter the water salinity (NaCl equivalent) into this field, or
skip and enter the water specific gravity. If a new value is entered, this
will automatically update the Water Specific Gravity field below. The
salinity of pore waters in reservoirs typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L
(6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth. The causes of increased salinity are:



Calculated Properties: These parameters are conventionally computed at
the layer pressure and temperature for well test analysis:
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. Typical values
range between 0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with
decreasing reservoir pressure. It is mandatory for gas well test
analysis.
g: The viscosity of the gas. A typical value of gas viscosity at

reservoir conditions is 0.025 cp, which is approximately 40 times
smaller than light oils with an API gravity of 40 - 50, which exhibit
viscosities of around 1cp. Gas viscosity values should decrease as
reservoir pressure decreases. It is mandatory for gas well test
analysis.

values at high pressure, tending to increasingly higher values as
pressure decreases. Typical values of (Cg) can range between 200 x
10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia) to 500 x 10-6/psi (reservoir
pressure of 2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir
pressure of 1,000 psia). It is mandatory for wellbore storage analysis.

Bw: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. Although

dissolved salts and gases can affect the water FVF these effects are
often ignored. Typically, the water FVF lies within the range 0.99 -
1.07.
w: The viscosity of the water. Water viscosity is dependent on

pressure, temperature and salinity. In general, brine viscosity
increases with increasing pressure, increasing salinity and decreasing
temperature. Typically, the water viscosity lies within the range 0.2 -
2.5 cp.

volume per psi change in pressure. A typical value for reservoir
brines is around 3.0 x 10-6/psi. However, dissolved salts and gases
can affect water compressibility.

w: The water density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature.

This term is also a function of dissolved constituents (i.e. Water
Salinity term) and is not used in calculations.


exhibits a low value during early production, but subsequently
increases as production and pressure depletion continues. As fluid
pressure in the reservoir is reduced during production, the
subsequent pore volume collapse creates a higher pore
compressibility. Compaction in this instance can create significant
subsidence at surface, particularly if the rock matrix is weak (e.g.
Ekofisk chalk with porosity values of 25 - 48%). The Norwegian
Ekofisk field, with reservoir fluids initially over-pressured in excess
of 2,000 psi, suffered an abnormal degree of reservoir compaction,
with typical pore compressibilities increasing from 6 x 10-6/psi up to a
maximum of ~100 x 10-6/psi. Similarly, in shallow unconsolidated
reservoirs, values in excess of 100 x 10-6/psi have been measured (e.g.
Bolivar Coast, Venezuela).
PanSystem calculates rock pore volume compressibility using either

the Hall correlation or a calculation based upon Solid Mechanics. The
Hall correlation is an empirical relationship between porosity and
rock compressibility (References 2 and 16).
The Solid Mechanics model requires the input of Youngs Modulus

and Poissons ratio for the reservoir rock. These inputs are utilized in
the equation:
Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
The following table provides estimates of the range of these

properties for various rock types.
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38

Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:
www.liv.ac.uk
the Layer Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only. It
is mandatory for gas welltest analysis.


Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog
Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase

Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description dialog
by selecting Condensate and checking the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
check box within the Multiphase methods section, then selecting the Layer
Fluid Parameters button on the Layer Control tab. A Condensate Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog is subsequently generated to view,
enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
themselves can be different in each layer. A Condensate Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog box can be brought up for any layer
by highlighting it in the Layer Control section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description (Analytical) dialog.
i
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Single-Phase Condensate is
selected from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog. For this selection users should refer to the Help topic for the Conden-
sate Fluid Parameters sub-dialog.
For a condensate well test, the multiphase pseudo-pressure function

rigorously models flow above and below the dew point (i.e. liquid drop-out),
with or without water production. This approach accounts not only for the
variation of fluid properties with pressure, but also the variations in relative
permeability as fluid properties and saturations change with pressure. It is
therefore particularly useful for tests where the flowing pressure falls below
the dew point.
i
Preparation area (i.e. when Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox is
checked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Condensate fluid type in
the Material Properties tabbed dialog.

Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog 14
No general correlations are available to model the PVT behaviour of gas
condensates or volatile oils, which are referred to collectively as near-critical
fluids. Traditionally, an Equation of State (EoS) is used to model such fluids,
and this requires a detailed compositional analysis to be performed by a
laboratory on samples of live fluid. Invariably, the equivalent EoS model then
has to be tuned to measured property variations on the fluid samples before
being used in predictive mode.
In PanSystems Condensate Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option, the Gas and Oil

Gravities and the Layer CGR are used as constraints in the determination of the
fluid composition for each layer in terms of four pseudo-components
(Reference 59). The four-component model is a balance between accuracy of
fluid property prediction (i.e. ideally performed using a full and detailed
compositional analysis), and speed of calculation/ease of use (i.e. achieved by
reducing the number of components).
The use of four pseudo-components, with the additional capability of

tuning the computed results, has been found to be highly effective in
modeling a wide range of Condensate Fluid systems. The reduced user input
requirement of two Stock-Tank Gravities and a CGR also makes problem
initialization very easy.
In the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method, the Oil and Gas Gravities should
i
refer to the total Fluid Production, not just the primary Separator. The Gas
Production Rate should also refer to the total Gas Production, expressed at
standard conditions. The method effectively assumes a single-stage flash of
Reservoir Fluid to Stock-Tank conditions.
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry sections and four function
buttons. It is used to set up and calculate the various condensate fluid
parameter values. The adjacent data entry fields colored in blue indicate that
they are interrelated, so changing one parameter (e.g. Oil API Gravity) results
in the associated parameter being re-calculated (e.g. Oil Specific Gravity). The
data entry fields and button functions are described as follows:

Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) Sub-Dialog
Produced Fluid Data section:
Oil API Gravity: Enter the Oil API Gravity here (or skip and enter the
Oil Specific Gravity). If a new value is entered, this will automatically
update the underlying Oil Specific Gravity field.
Oil Specific Gravity: Enter the Oil Specific Gravity here (or skip and
enter Oil API Gravity). If a new value is entered, this will
automatically update the overlying Oil API Gravity field. The Specific
Gravities of Oil generally lie between 0.73 to slightly above 1.0 and in
API Gravity terms, the usual range starts with Water Density at 10
and rises to Volatile Oils and Condensate liquids at around 60-70.
Gas Specific Gravity: Enter the Gas Specific Gravity (at standard
conditions). Typical values for hydrocarbon Gas mixtures range
from 0.65 (Dry Gas) to 0.95 (Wet Gas).
Water Salinity: Enter the Water Salinity (NaCl equivalent) into this
field, or skip and enter the Water Specific Gravity. If a new value is
entered, this will automatically update the underlying Water Specific
Gravity field. The salinity of pore waters in Reservoirs typically
increases by 6 to 160 g/L (6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth. The
causes of increased salinity are:

Seawater salinity is about 35 g/L (35,000 ppm). Much higher salinities

are found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for Oil and Gas
Reservoirs are 30 g/L (30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000
ppm) for carbonates. Concentrations of total dissolved solids (TDS)
range from 80 to 300 g/L (80,000 to 300,000 ppm)in reservoirs deeper
than 1 km.
Water Specific Gravity: Enter the Water Specific Gravity here (or skip
and enter the Water Salinity). If a new value is entered, this will
automatically update the overlying Water Salinity field.

Create Composite Sub-Dialog 14
Layer Data section:
Layer Name: For each producing reservoir layer from the drop-down
list with the Normalized Pseudo-Pressure IPR model, the following
fluid ratios can be entered:
Produced CGR: Enter the Produced Condensate/Gas Ratio (CGR)

into this field.
Water/Gas Ratio: Enter the Produced Water/Gas Ratio (WGR) into

this field.
Correlations section:
Only the Weatherford Internal Equation of State can be used for

Condensates (Reference 59).
Additional Function Buttons:
Check: Select this button to generate the Condensate Properties Check

sub-dialog.
Match: Select this button to generate the Match Condensate Properties

sub-dialog.
Create Composite Sub-Dialog

General:
Dialog by selecting the Create Composite button on the Layer Control tab. This
option is used to create a composite layer from two or more layers.
i
In order to create a composite, at least two Active layer names must be present
in the list box within the Layer Control section of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description dialog.
The Layer Selection sub-dialog allows you to combine several layers to create a
single layers to create a single layer with averaged properties.

Create Composite Sub-Dialog
Once created, the composite layer has the status of any other layer, and can be
edited, and can be selected for Analysis. If the total production rates are being
used in the Rate Schedule, the analysis should be performed on the
Composite layer. It will not, however, be included in an Advanced Simulation
run, since Advanced Simulation only uses the active constituent layers.
Combining Layers section: This display section lists all the layers that will
be combined together after the Combine button is selected. To exclude a
layer from being combined, it must be de-activated by ticking the
Inactive radio button on the Layer Control section of the Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description dialog.
The following composite layer properties are computed automatically as

thickness-averaged values:
All other layer and fluid parameters take their values from the layer
selected in the lower part of the dialog (default = Layer 1).
The boundary model of the composite layer will default to infinite acting,
regardless of any boundaries present in the constituent layers. You are
then free to select a suitable composite boundary model.
If the properties of a constituent layer are modified, the composite layer

should be deleted and recreated.
You may edit the composite layer and fluid parameters if different values
are to be used.
Select Layer for Fluid Parameters section: This section is only of significance
in gas and condensate wells. Only one set of pseudo-tables can be used in
Analysis and Simulation, and the appropriate set of tables must be selected
here.
Combine: Select this button to create the composite layer. Upon return to
the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog, the composite layer will be
listed in the Layer Control section of the dialog.

Create Commingled Sub-Dialog 14
Create Commingled Sub-Dialog
General:
Dialog by selecting the Create Commingled button on the Layer Control tab.
This option is used to create a Commingled Layer group from any two Layers
in the Reservoir Description.
i
In order to create a commingled group, at least two Active layer names must be
present in the list box in the Layer Control section of the Well, Reservoir and
Fluid Description (Analytical) dialog.
This sub-dialog allows you to model a two-layered system in the Quick Match
and Auto Match keeping the Permeability (k) and Skin (S) of the two layers
explicit. This is an alternative to combining them into a single Composite Layer
using thickness-averaged values.
The advantage of this configuration is that, in addition to keeping Permeability

(k) and Skin (S) separate for each layer, the effects of cross-flow between
layers can be included. In particular, when a closed system boundary model
is used, the simulation will respect differential pressure depletion between
the layers, leading to cross-flow and recharging during build-up.
There are guidelines to be followed:
Commingled systems can only be constructed from layers whose flow

models are radial homogeneous.
Only two layers can be commingled at any one time.
If a Boundary Model is assigned (see below), it will apply to both layers.

The two layers are assumed to have the same initial pressures at the start
of the rate history. This initial pressure is nominally the pressure in the
first line of the Rate Changes table. As for the single-layered models, Quick
Match will provide an estimate of the correct Initial Pressure (Pi), should
the specified one be wrong.

Create Commingled Sub-Dialog
It is not necessary to create a commingled layer for Advanced Simulation.

Advanced Simulation offers the flexibility of different boundary models
and initial pressures in each layer, plus the ability to commingle up to
five layers.
i
If a commingled layer is created, it will not be included in any Advanced
Simulation run - Advanced Simulation will ignore commingled (and composite)
layers and will only use the active constituent layers.
The Layer Selection sub-dialog is comprised of a list section with check box
selection options, a selection section with a drop-down menu, and two
functional buttons, described as follows:
Combining Layers: This section lists all the available (i.e. active) layers that
can be commingled. Only two can be selected at any time. Select the two
layers for commingling by checking on/off the checkboxes as required.
Select Layer for Fluid Parameters and Boundary Model: This will assign the
fluid properties of the chosen layer to the commingled system. This
includes the pseudo-table for gas and condensate wells. The Boundary
Model (if any) associated with the selected layer will be applied to both
layers.
Combine: Select this button to create the commingled layer. Upon leaving
the Layer Selection dialog, the commingled layer will be listed in the Layer
Control dialog.
i If the properties of any of the constituent layers are subsequently altered, the
commingled layer should be deleted and recreated.
i
When modeling a commingled system with a closed boundary configuration in
Quick Match, the Material Balance option (Transformation tab on the Analysis
ribbon bar) which is normally enabled for gas and condensate wells, will be
disabled.

PVT Tuning Sub-Dialog 14
PVT Tuning Sub-Dialog
General:
The Tune PVT button is available on the Condensate Fluid Parameters

Sub-Dialog when the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method has been
selected in Fluid Control.
i
Each calculation in this sub-dialog assumes CCE (constant composition or
constant mass) expansion. Do not tune to constant volume depletion (CVD)
measurements.
No general correlations are available to model the PVT behavior of gas

condensates or, for that matter, volatile oils, which are referred to collectively
as near-critical fluids. Traditionally, an Equation of State (EoS) is used to
model such fluids and this requires a detailed compositional analysis to be
performed by a laboratory on samples of live fluid. Invariably, the equivalent
EoS model then has to be tuned to measured property variations on the fluid
samples before being used in predictive mode.
In PanSystem's Condensate Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option, the gas and oil

gravities and the layer CGR are used as constraints in the determination of the
fluid composition for each layer in terms of four pseudo-components. The
four-component model is a balance between:
Accuracy of fluid property prediction (i.e. ideally performed using a full

and detailed compositional analysis).
Speed of calculation and ease of use (i.e. achieved by reducing the

number of components).
The use of four pseudo-Components, with the additional capability of tuning

the computed results, has been found to be highly effective in modeling a
wide range of Condensate fluid systems. The reduced user input
requirement of two Gravities at standard conditions and a CGR also makes
problem initialization very easy.

The Tune PVT sub-dialog allows you to tune the Condensate EoS against
measured data using a minimization routine.
i
Data from PVT reports should correspond to constant mass/constant
composition experiments (i.e. CME/CCE), The EoS does not handle CVD
experiments, where the CGR changes at each step as liquid is removed. (The
API gravity of the condensate liquid will also change).
Any or all of the listed parameters can be tuned. At the very least, the dew
point and liquid dropout should be tuned, as they strongly affect the relative
permeability in the wellbore vicinity. It is equally important to have good
relative permeability data.
To tune a parameter, enter the producing Condensate/gas ratio, the condensate

and separator gas gravities at standard conditions, and a measured value of the
Saturation pressure (dew point) at reservoir temperature.

Figure 142: PVT Tuning dialog before tuning
In the table, enter the pressures, in decreasing order, at which the

experimental data were measured. For each pressure, enter the
corresponding experimental property value. You can insert extra rows as
required to build the table. It is also possible to paste a table in from an
external source. The minimum entry would be a single row.
As a minimum for effective tuning, you will need to provide values for
the liquid dropout from dew point down to the minimum flowing
pressure in your welltest. You may enter the dew point itself with a zero
dropout value.

If only CVD data are available, only the first measurement pressure
below dew point can be used for tuning, as this is the only one at the
original CGR.
The following properties can be tuned:
Saturation Pressure (Dew point)

Liquid Drop-Out
Relative Volume
Gas Z-factor
Oil Viscosity (o)
Gas Viscosity (g)
After clicking the Tune button, a message should appear: Correlations

Tuned successfully. The tuned values will appear in the column to the
right of the experimental values.

Figure 143: PVT Tuning dialog after tuning
Use the Plot button to view a comparison of experimental and tuned

properties. You can plot up to two sets of properties by toggling Y-axis left
and Y-axis right beneath the plot.

The Tuned Derived Fluid Type above the table will confirm (or not) that the
properties do indeed correspond to a retrograde condensate. If Volatile
Oil is displayed, the system is perceived to be oil with a bubble point
rather than a retrograde condensate with a dew point. In this case, you
should re-examine your input data, and if correct, change the fluid type
to Oil in Fluid Control and configure the fluid properties using oil and
gas gravities and a GOR instead of a CGR. In this case, the multiphase
pseudo-pressure option will be disabled, and no PVT tuning will be
available.
Figure 144: Plot of experimental and tuned data
Once a parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that

parameter and any that depend on it (for example, on the Fluid Parameters
dialog), will include the effects of the tuning.
Principles of Tuning:
The EoS Tuning takes particular EoS intrinsic parameters such as Critical
Temperatures, Critical Volumes or Volume Shift Coefficients (depending on the
required property) and adjusts them according to a non-linear least-squares
minimization to obtain a best-fit.

The appropriate intrinsic parameters will be selected automatically,
depending on the property to be tuned and number of experimental values
entered.
The properties available for tuning in the table are treated in categories,
according to a hierarchical approach which requires a three-stage adjustment:
1. Dew-Point and Liquid Drop-Out: The Dew-Point and Liquid Drop-Out are
generally most sensitive to the proportions and characteristics of the heaviest
components and in particular, their Critical Temperatures.
2. Volumetrics: Volumetric properties such as Relative Volume and Z-Factor (of
vapor phase) both depend on the Gas Z-Factor. The Peneloux Volume Correction
used in the three-parameter Peng-Robinson EoS (PR3) (Reference 81 in
PanSystem Technical References), is calculated after Dew-Point Pressure and
Liquid Drop-Out have been evaluated. Therefore, the volume correction
coefficients can safely be adjusted to tune these volumetric quantities without
changing the phase determination.
3. Viscosities: The Viscosities are calculated from the two reference component
Corresponding States method presented by Aasberg-Petersen and Stenby.
The advantage of this method is that the Tuning used at Stage 3 has no effect
on the properties evaluated at Stage 2 and Stage 1, etc.
The Need for Tuning:
As mentioned above, an EoS using 20 or more components (corresponding to

very detailed compositional analysis), rarely predicts measured Fluid
Properties such as Dew-Point Pressure and Liquid Drop-Out accurately without
some degree of Tuning. With a four-component reduced model, Tuning
will be essential, particularly where the Dew-Point and liquid drop-out are
concerned:
Dew-Point: This is the lowest Pressure at which a drop of retrograde

liquid can exist. The calculated Dew-Point Pressure is most sensitive to the
heaviest pseudo-component and associated mole fractions and
properties. Invariably, the four-component EoS will calculate a Dew-Point
Pressure which is too low and therefore Tuning is strongly recommended.

Numerical Model
Liquid Drop-Out: This is defined as the volume of retrograde liquid at a

specified Pressure + the Volume of vapor at Dew-Point and is probably the
most difficult quantity to calculate (and to measure), being a phase
discriminant (i.e. liquid/vapor) fraction. Tuning is almost always required
for Liquid Drop-Out, after Tuning the Dew-Point Pressure (which is used as
an anchor point).
NUMERICAL MODEL
PanMesh Data Preparation Overview
General Overview of PanMesh Workflow:
PanMesh is a single-well, multi-layer, 3-D numerical Well Test simulator; it is

the Numerical Simulation module within PanSystem. Before running a PanMesh
simulation via the Simulation view, the Reservoir data has to be initialized
within PanSystem.
Data for the Reservoir Model are inputted by selecting the Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description ribbon from the Data Preparation view, and then selecting
Numerical Model.
For the Flow Rate data, two options are available:
Use the Test Design ribbon in the Data Preparation view. Here users can
specify a Flow Rate sequence; anything from a single Flowing Period to a
series of Flowing and Shut-In Periods. The objective might be to
investigate the nature of the Transient Response to a certain Reservoir
Geometry, or to perform Well Test Design.
Use the Flow Rates associated with an existing Well Test. Users are simply
required to import the Well Test data in the usual way, perform any
editing that is required, then pick the Rate Change events, as if for an
analysis. If users intend to analyze the data first (e.g. to establish an
approximate model and to estimate some of the parameters), they should
enter the necessary Rock and Fluid Properties in the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description ribbon of the Data Preparation view.

PanMesh Data Preparation Overview 14
When users are ready to run a PanMesh session, the available Rock and Fluid
Properties will be transferred automatically into this Well and Reservoir
Properties (Numerical) section of Data Preparation. It then remains to specify
the Reservoir Structure, Anisotropy, Heterogeneity, etc., through each of the
tabbed sub-dialogs.
The geological model is passed through to PanMesh, which generates the 3-D
mesh. The simulation then produces a Dimensionless, Constant-Rate
Drawdown Response. When users exit PanMesh, it writes a table of
Dimensionless Pressure (Pd) versus Dimensionless Time (Td) to a file with the
extension (*.TCX); this is the reference response for the geological model.
The Dimensionless Response is then picked-up by PanSystem, where it is

convolved with Wellbore Storage and the Rate Schedule, then presented in
terms of Real Time and Pressure. The simulated Pressure Response can be
inspected using the diagnostic plots, just like any other Well Test data. It can
also be overlain with Gauge Data if users are attempting to match a real Well
Test.
i Users should take note of the following points:
PanMesh itself does not deal with Multi-Rate Superposition or Wellbore

Storage. This is handled by PanSystem when it picks up PanMesh's
reference Constant-Rate Drawdown Response. This is done (invisibly most
of the time) using PanSystem's existing Advanced Simulation facility, which
accesses the dimensionless (*.TCX) response file written by PanMesh.
The Darcy Skin Factor is built into the Reservoir Model in the form of a
damaged region; because PanMesh computes a Constant-Rate Response, the
Non-Darcy (or Turbulent) Skin in Gas Wells is handled by PanSystem during
the rate and storage convolution.

The Analytical and Numerical Modeling facilities have two distinct input
sections. It is quite possible (and often useful), to employ Analytical
diagnostics and Simulation, in addition to Numerical Simulation, for
solving a Well Test problem. These two approaches can be configured and
run in the same PanSystem file. However, since the two methods use very
different approaches for configuring multi-layered Reservoirs, if users
wish to define multiple Layers for Analytical Simulation, Weatherford
recommends that one PanSystem file is set-up for Analytical Simulation
and a separate file is set-up for Numerical Simulation to avoid possible
confusion.
The term "Sub-Layer" is used when referring to layering or stratification in

PanMesh models. The term "Layer" is used in the Analytical Simulation
context of PanSystem. The Layers in PanSystem cannot communicate
except in the Wellbore. The Sub-Layers in PanMesh can communicate in the
Wellbore and the Reservoir. Otherwise, a Sub-Layer and a Layer are the
same geologically. There is, of course, far more flexibility in the definition
of a PanMesh Sub-Layer's shape, anisotropy, and heterogeneity than there
is for a PanSystem Layer.
PanMesh Description:
The interface for numerical model building has changed significantly from
PanSystem v3.5. The new interface is built around a drawing pad paradigm,
whereby the user has greater flexibility and control over the model that is
being built.

Figure 145: PanMesh Numerical Data Preparation Dialog Box Example
In order to use this interface efficiently, the you should become familiar with
the PanMesh User Guide (2011). Therein the underlying solid modelling
notions are described in detail. For clarity, we repeat the key concepts herein.
PanMesh Solid Model
For the purposes of numerical modelling with PanMesh, a petroleum

reservoir is considered to be a geological formation defined geometrically by
a connected (or disconnected) network of homogenous (rock/sand properties)
regions that can be described as polygons (in plan view) and layers (in
elevation/front view) as illustrated below. The layers (geological strata) are
defined by the top and bottom planar surfaces.
The drawing pad like interface provided allows the user to draw (free hand)
the outline plan view of the reservoir. This outline can then be cut into two or
more regions (if necessary) to define regions of contrasting material
properties or in order to create a non-convex outer boundary if it exists (see
the PanMesh User Guide.

Figure 146: The conceptual model of a general reservoir used in the

mesh generation process. It is made up of individual interconnected
volumes that share common boundaries
The thickness of the reservoir (generally a vertical depth) can then easily be
defined by entering the sub-layer thickness at any three of the points (nodes)
used to define the reservoir plan geometry. These thicknesses are entered
using the Node/Layer Dialog box as illustrated below.

Figure 147: Example of a Node and Layer Dialog Box
The Node and Layer dialog box allows the user to easily define the number of
sub-layers and the thickness of each sub-layer (thus defining the overall
thickness of the reservoir). The combination of previous two dialog boxes
allows the user to quickly define a 3D geological structure that is the reservoir
to be modelled.
The PanMesh finite element simulator can be used in History Matching mode
to generate Well Test responses to match against measured Well Test data, or
in predictive mode to design a Well Test or investigate the response to a
specified Reservoir configuration:
If users are intending to History Match a Well Test, import and prepare
Gauge Data in the usual way, they should refer to Gauge Data Preparation.
If users are going to design a Well Test or investigate a response, they

should set up their intended Rate Schedule by using the Test Design facility.
In either case, Well and Reservoir data are entered through the Numerical Model
option on the Well, Reservoir & Fluid ribbon of the Data Preparation view. This
will take users into the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog for the entry of Well,
Fluid and Rock Properties, and description of the geometrical and geological
aspects of the Reservoir.

PanMesh Data Preparation
On entering this section for the first time, PanSystem will transfer across any
Well, Layer and Fluid Properties that have already been set-up in the Analytical
Model option of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description ribbon of the Data
Preparation view. For example, users may have previously been working on a
Well Test using the diagnostic plot and Analytical Simulation facilities.
There is no need to enter the same data all over again. Any subsequent
changes made in the Analytical section will not be transferred into the
Numerical section.
i Note however, that there is no data transfer from Numerical to Analytical.
The PanMesh Data Preparation dialog consists of the following tabbed sections:
Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog

Well Configuration Tabbed Dialog
Material Properties Tabbed Dialog
Run Mode Tabbed Dialog (optional)
Model Check Tabbed Dialog
i
Although the Reservoir Geometry dialog appears first, users may enter data on
the first three tabs, in any order. However, the first three tabbed dialogs
must be correctly initialized before users can OK from the main dialog.
PanMesh Data Preparation

General:
This tabbed dialog is accessed from the Numerical Model option on the Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description (Numerical) ribbon of the Data Preparation view.
The following tabbed dialogs are available:
Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog (current tab)


Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog 14
You may enter data on any of the first three tabbed dialogs, in any order.
You may click OK from the main dialog at any stage without fully initializing
them. Any errors or omissions will be trapped later upon trying to invoke
PanMesh from the Simulation view.
In addition, a User Menu button allows users to alter the display in the
Drawing Area and create or edit features within the Reservoir Model.
Screen Dialog Description:
This tab of the dialog is comprised of the following:
a Drawing Area with associated function buttons

a Snap to Grid feature
a co-ordinate display
a Sub-Layer view selection field
a mouse mode toolbar
a 3D view manipulation button
an Aspect Ratio view control

Figure 148: Reservoir Geometry tab with the Drawing Area
Drawing Area: This is represented by a gridded viewing window on first

entering the Reservoir Geometry tabbed dialog. This is a Plan view, centred
on the origin, formed by the intersection of the red-colored x- and y-axes,
which initially lie along the top and left edge of the Drawing Area
respectively. The positive x-direction (scaled along the bottom edge of
the Drawing Area), is to the right (East), the positive y-direction (scaled
along the left edge of the Drawing Area), is towards the top of the screen
(North). The positive z-direction is downwards into the Drawing Area.
To adjust the position of the origin relative to the display, choose Pan
from the Mouse Mode Toolbar on the left hand side of the window, then
left button down and drag.

A Reservoir is designed in the Drawing Area on the principle of Nodes
connected by Boundaries. Each Node contains properties which allow the
vertical nature of the Reservoir to be described in terms of depth and layer
structure. Each Node is assigned (x, y, z) co-ordinates that define the
upper surface of the Reservoir. Users can edit any of the displayed Node
properties by double left-clicking on any Node to generate the Node
Parameters sub-dialog (see Figure 135). Up to twenty Nodes can initially
be used to define the shape of the Reservoir, which must conform to a
convex layout (i.e. all angles of the Reservoir Outline must be greater than
180 degrees). The properties assigned to each interconnecting Boundary
define their condition and users can also edit any of the displayed
Boundary Conditions by double left-clicking on any Boundary Line to
generate the Boundary Conditions Sub-Dialog.
Internal Boundaries can also be drawn to define Regions which can be

assigned Material Properties. These Boundaries are drawn by left-clicking
and dragging a line from outside the Reservoir Outline across the Reservoir
to bisect an existing Region, then clicking again outside the Reservoir
Outline on the opposite side. An Internal Boundary will be displayed with
two new Nodes and each Region is automatically assigned a color scheme
to denote a new region (but any material properties assigned to the
original, un-divided region are maintained until edited in the Material
Properties tab).
In addition to drawing a Reservoir, users can also start from five geometric
Reservoir Shapes, using the , , , , or buttons situated at the
top of the Drawing Area. Select a shape, then left-click in the Drawing Area
to paste it in. The Nodes can be selected and moved to re-shape the
Reservoir Outline as required.
i The five Reservoir Shape button options cannot be used if there is already
something in the Drawing Area.
To account for more complex Reservoir Shapes, there are also button options
to:

Import Template: This generates a standard Windows Open dialog,

where you can browse for and/or select from a list of useful and
geologically significant generic Reservoir Templates (*.ptl files). There are
two types of templates: Standard and User Defined. These can be imported
into the Drawing Area and subsequently modified.
Import Map: This option also generates a standard Windows Open

dialog, where users can browse for and select a pre-existing map file (i.e.
graphic file formats JPEG (*.jpg), GIF (*.gif), DIB (*.bmp) and TIFF (*.tif) are
all supported). Once a file has been selected, this action loads an image
(map) file as a background to the drawing pad. When a map is already
loaded, this button brings up a dialog with the following choices:
Map ON: Display/hide the map in the Drawing Area.

Reset Scale: Re-enter the coordinates of two known points.
Import New Map: Delete the current map and choose another map file.
The scaling has also to be re-done.
Remove Map: Just delete the current map without replacing it.
Additional buttons include:
Radial Region: This button is used to define a circular radial region

around a vertical or inclined well bore. If a Reservoir has a Region around the
Wellbore with different Fluid/Reservoir Properties, this may be modeled by
setting up a Radial Composite Region. Selecting the Radial Regions button,
opens up the Radial Regions Around the Wellbore Sub-Dialog, where
the Radius of the Radial Region can be entered.
User Menu (and associated short-cuts): This button is available on the

full-screen Map Window and on the right-hand side of the Drawing Area.
The tiered menu options allow users to alter the presentation and add
features to the Reservoir.

Figure 149: User Menu
Some of these options also have keyboard and/or mouse-operated

short-cuts (refer to the Help topic for User Menu Button).
Node and Layer Configuration: This button allows users to edit

the parameters of any selected Node in the current Reservoir Model.
For more information about this button, refer to the topic, Configure
Reservoir Node and Layer Sub-Dialog (see Figure 14).
Printer: This button allows users to select and set-up a Printer.

For more information about this button, refer to the topic, Print.
Snap to Grid: The precision of the drawing or moving mode can be

controlled using the Snap to Grid feature. You can define the snap grid in
the text box provided (and the feature can be turned on/off using the Snap
ON checkbox.

Figure 150: Snap To Grid
Co-ordinate Display: An active co-ordinate display is centered above the

Drawing Area. It provides an exact position for the mouse cursor to allow
accurate positioning of drawing elements.
Sub-Layer View Selection: This toggle switch changes the Sub-Layer

currently being viewed in the drawing area. The number of Sub-Layers is
controlled in the Configure Reservoir Node and Layer Table and any increase
or decrease of Sub-Layers will affect the number of associated columns
displayed in that table. A maximum of 31 sub-layers is possible.
Mouse Mode Toolbar: The mouse functionality consists of two major

modes and sub-modes within each.
Drawing Mode
Select: In order to access the property tabs/dialog boxes of a

node, edge, well bore, or region, you must be in the Select
mode. Double-click the object invokes the pertinent interface:
Double-click a Region: The Material Properties Tab opens for the

region.
Double-click a Well bore: The Well Configuration tab is

displayed.

Double-click an Edge: The constant pressure Boundary
Condition dialog is displayed. NB: Edges where this is applied
are displayed in the color orange.
Double-click a Line: The Define Internal NO Flow Boundaries

dialog box is displayed.
Double-click a Node: The Configure Reservoir Node/Layer

dialog box is displayed.
i NB: When an entity is selected it is highlighted. When in this state, the above
dialogs can be involved by pressing Enter.
i The selected entity can also be deleted by pressing Del (NB:

Except external boundaries).
Right-click a Region: Makes the current region active/inactive in

the selected layer.
Move: Any of the following objects can be dragged and

dropped to a new position. When in Move mode, objects that
can be repositioned using drag & drop are highlighted as you
move the mouse cursor over them.
Move Well with mouse: Click the wellbore and drag it to a new
position.
Move Edge: Click an edge to move that edge as a whole (as

opposed to having to move the nodes defining the edge
individually).
Move Line: Click an internal line to move that line as a whole (as
opposed to having to move the nodes defining the line
individually).
Move Reservoir: Press CTRL while clicking on a node, and then

drag and drop to move the entire reservoir.

Movement length when moving: The magnitude (in current

units) of the movement is displayed continuously in the Tooltip.
Rectilinear Mode: Pressing SHIFT during this will get the

movement to snap to X direction or Y direction only (whichever
is the biggest movement).
Draw: The draw mode allows the user to draw a reservoir

outline. There are a few associated features:
Line length when Drawing line: The line length for the line
currently being drawn (in current units) is displayed
continuously in the Tooltip.
Rectilinear Mode: Pressing SHIFT during this will get the line to
snap to X direction or Y direction only (whichever is the biggest
movement).
Pan View while drawing: If the user draws a line and drags it
outside the current drawing space, then the view is panned to
accommodate this.
Scale Model: This option allows the user to scale the current
model geometry around the well bore position. The dialog box
displays the current maximum X and Y dimensions as well as the
thickness at the well bore (combined layer thicknesses for a multi
layer system). The user can enter new desired values for one or
more of these dimensions and the model is scaled around the
current well bore position. In the case of a horizontal well bore,
the top surface is moved up or down according to the scale and
so as to ensure that the well bore remains in the current layer.

Figure 151: Scale Model Dialog
Undo: Undo the last drawing action.
Redo: Redo the last drawing action that was undone.
Colour by material properties/material index: toggle

between these two coloring modes.
View Control Mode
Zoom: In 2D mode (Plan) the user can zoom in one of three

ways:
1. Click the Zoom button in the toolbar, then drag left mouse
button as usual.
2. Use the new slider bar at the bottom of the interface
(illustrated below). Drag to the left to zoom out and to the
right to zoom in. If the left button is lifted then the slider
recalibrates itself to the center and it can be dragged again.
This is a very fast zoom procedure.
The view can be zoomed using the slide.

3. The wheel function of the mouse also controls zooming.
Pan: You can pan the image by clicking on this option. The
viewing window can then be panned by left mouse down and
drag.
Zoom Extents: This button zooms to fit the reservoir to the

screen.
3D View Manipulation Button
When in 3D view (as illustrated in Figure 147), there is a tool bar at the
top of the window. It includes a series of options to precisely alter the 3D
view (as well as access to the main User Menu ). However, the
easiest way to manipulate the 3D view is to use the mouse. It has three
main options:
1. Rotate the View: Left button down and drag.
2. Pan the View: Middle button down and drag OR Left + Right
button down and drag.
3. Zoom: Right button down and drag in Y direction (up/down).
Aspect Ratio View Control
By default the drawing scale between the X & Y axes is 1:1. This means
that reservoirs are displayed in their natural aspect ratio. However, it is
possible to change the aspect ratio. This is useful where a reservoir has an
exaggerated difference in x and y dimension. It can be done by un-ticking
the 1:1 X/Y Scale Ratio option on the bottom right and then using the
Scale Y slider bar on the right as illustrated below:

Figure 152: Aspect Ratio View
The aspect ratio can be changed by un-ticking 1:1 X/Y Scale Ratio and using
the Scale Y slider.
Operational Instructions - Model Building Methods:
Four different model building methods can be employed to create a Reservoir

Model; the Drawing method, Pre-Defined Shapes method, Import Template
method and Import Map method. These are each described as follows:
1. Drawing Method: The red x- or y-axes can be moved by right-clicking and

dragging with the mouse. Once axis scales have been assigned users are
ready to start creating the plan view of the Reservoir Model.
2. Predefined Shapes Method: Along the top of the Drawing Area there are five
buttons which allow users to select a regular polygonal shape from a choice
of: Triangle, Rectangle, Pentagon, Hexagon or Octagon. Select a shape, then
left-click in the Drawing Area to paste it in. The Nodes can be selected and
moved to reshape the Reservoir Outline. The {Backspace} key from the
keyboard can also be used to delete Nodes (in reverse number order), for
editing purposes and extra Nodes can be inserted in the opening thus created,
up to a maximum of 20.

3. Using Templates: The Drawing Area is limited in terms of the complexity of

Reservoir Model that can be constructed. If a Reservoir Model is too complex
to build using the PanMesh drawing facilities or if a model has been built, but
PanMesh is unable to construct a mesh for it, two options remain:
Import a Template: This option generates a sub-dialog that

gives users access to two template libraries offering a selection of
useful and geologically significant generic structures. These models
can be imported into the Drawing Area and modified (if necessary).
The selection will be augmented over time.
The Standard Template Library contains numerical equivalents of the

available analytical models, plus some hybrids. The User Template folder
contains other configurations, and may be added to by the user. The
available selection will be augmented by Weatherford in successive releases.
These models can be imported into the Drawing Area and modified if
necessary.
Contact Weatherford: The company offers expert advice and can build a
custom Reservoir Template if required.
4. Importing a Reservoir Map: This option generates a standard Windows

Open dialog that gives users the option to import their own maps. These maps
can be used to create an outline using method 1 above.

Operational Instructions - Specific Tasks:
Creating Inactive Regions
Regions that are color-filled in (see Figure 143) are regions that are inactive,
essentially empty volumes. This simple concept allows the definition of
stepped geologies with relative ease (as illustrated below). These regions can
be defined in one of two ways:
1. Using right-click when is Select Mode.

2. By un-ticking the Region Active tick box in the Material Properties Tab (see
later).
Figure 153: Stepped Geology - 3D View
A stepped geology can easily be defined3D view.
Drawing a Reservoir Outline
The Drawing Toolbar is new and affords the user more flexibility than older
versions of PanMesh. Some features of note are:
Drawing an edge between existing nodes:

A new edge can be added between existing nodes when in Draw Mode.
Simply float the mouse cursor over the first node and the hint From
Node ... will appear when a node is selected. Then left click and drag
and the drawing line extends from the chosen node.
Next, as you float the mouse cursor over the second node, the mouse hint
becomes Too Node... (see the following illustration).
Insert a Node:
An additional node can be inserted on any external or internal edge by

simply cutting that edge while in Draw Mode.
Delete a Node:
A node can be deleted when in Select Mode. Click on the node and it is
highlighted. Then press the standard keyboard delete button.
Undo & Redo :
Any drawing action can be reversed or redone (also CTRL+Z & CTRL+Y).
Figure 154: New Edges between Existing Nodes
A new edge can be created easily between existing nodes. Hover the mouse
cursor over the desired nodes and the hint indicates if the node will be
picked.

Figure 155: Insertion of New Nodes
A new node (15) is inserted in an edge simply by cutting the edge when in
Draw mode.
Creating a Simple Reservoir
As per the explanation earlier, a reservoir is defined as a set of connected

volumes represented by polygons in plan and layers (that stretch over the full
extent of the reservoir) in elevation (see Figure 146). Consider the basic square
reservoir in illustration (a). It can be created using the Rectangle button from
the Main Toolbar .

Figure 156: Simple Square Reservoir
A simple square reservoir is created (a) and cut into two regions (b).
Cut it into two regions as illustrated in Region (b) above. Note that the cut
parallel to the X axis is achieved by simultaneously pressing SHIFT while
clicking and dragging the line in Draw Mode. Note also that this reservoir is
still an homogenous geological structure, even though the regions are colored
differently. The following illustration shows the 3D view of the reservoir.
Figure 157: 3D view of the simple, single layer reservoir

Using the Node and Layer Configuration Dialog Box
If we wish to add a sub-layer to this model we must open the Node and Layer
Configuration dialog box (see the following illustration). This can be accessed
from the Main Toolbar - .
Figure 158: The Node and Layer Configuration dialog box.
In the above illustration, note the following:
Some z and Sub Layer Thickness cells are grayed out. This is because
these values cannot be changed by editing. They will only change as a
result of changing the non-grayed values.
The non-grayed z and Sub Layer Thickness cells correspond to the

Nodes that have a green tick mark in column 1. These denote the nodes
that are used for calculating the depths and thickness at all other nodes
(NB: 3 nodes required to define a plane).
The layer thickness is a set to a seemingly arbitrary value 98.29m. This is

the default setting of standard shapes, which is 10% of the long diagonal
of the reservoir shape in plan.

To Change a Layer Thickness:
Change the value in one on the non-grayed thickness cells (say to 100m as per
illustration (a)). Note that once you press return, the other thicknesses change
(as per illustration (a)). Now re-click on the cell with 100m depth and then
click the option Apply Thickness to all Nodes. Then all the values for the layer
are changed to 100m (as per illustration (b)).
Figure 159: Changing the layer thickness
(a) (b)
Adding Sub-Layers
We can add a layer to the reservoir model simply by incrementing the

Number of Layers using the numeric up down counter on the top left of the
dialog box (see the following illustration). Note that a column of zeros has
been added. This indicates that a layer has been added, but it has zero
thickness. The values are shown in red because they are invalid.

Figure 160: Adding a Layer to a Model
We can change this layer thickness to a positive value by following the steps
in the last section. The following illustration shows the 3D view of the model
after the second layer thickness has been set to 150m.
Figure 161: A sub-layer 150m deep is added to the model

Inserting a Sub-Layer
It is easy to insert a sub-layer. Do the following:
1. Open the Node and Layer Configuration dialog box once more.
2. Click on any cell in sub-layer 2.
3. Click on the Insert Layer button. NB: This inserts a sub-layer of zero depth
above what was sub-layer 2 (which now becomes sub-layer 3). It keeps the
material properties of the sub-layer below it.
4. Change the sub-layer depth to (for example) 20m as before.
In the following illustration, the 3D view now shows the thinner sub-layer
that we have inserted.
Figure 162: A sub-layer 20m deep has been inserted above the bottom
layer
Removing/Deleting Sub-Layers
There are two possibilities for eliminating layers:
1. Decrement the Number of Layers using the numeric up down counter on the
top left of the dialog box (see Figure 153). This removes the last sub-layer. NB:
If you increment it once more the layer is re-instated, with the thicknesses as
per pre-removal.
2. Click on a cell in the sub-layer you wish to delete and click on the Remove
Layer button.

Apply Z Value to All Nodes
This option works similarly to the Apply Thicknesses option. You can change
the z value (effectively the depth to the top surface of the reservoir at a node)
of any of the active (green tick mark) nodes. This allows you to create a
sloping reservoir or a horizontal top surface reservoir at a desired depth.
Changing the Active Nodes for Depth and Thickness Calculation
The first column of the Node and Layer Configuration dialog box shows the
nodes that are active for layer and thickness calculations with a green tick
mark. Only a maximum of three of these can be active at any time. Therefore,
if you wish to use a different node for depth and thickness calculation you
must:
1. Deactivate one of the current nodes by clicking on the green tick mark (it
turns to a red cross and the associated Z and thickness cells turn gray).
2. Activate the desired new node by clicking on its red cross which will change
to a green tick mark (and the associated cells turn white).
Applying Constant Pressure Boundary Conditions to External Boundaries
It is possible to use the Node and Layer Configuration dialog box to change
the boundary condition on outer boundaries from No Flow to Constant
pressure. Simply double-click on the Boundary Condition Cell of the first
node of the external edge in question (as illustrated below Node 2 double
clicked => Edge 2-3 set to Constant Pressure and shown in orange).

Figure 163: A Constant Pressure boundary is shown in orange

General:
Reservoir & Fluid Description (Numerical) ribbon on the Data Preparation view.
Well Configuration (current tab)
Run Mode Tabbed Dialog (Optional)
Users may enter data on any of the first three tabbed dialogs, in any order.
You may OK from the main dialog at any stage without fully initializing
PanMesh from the Simulation menu.

Well Configuration Tabbed Dialog 14
The dialog allows users to define the Well Configuration using Horizontal or
Vertical Well Models and assign Open Intervals for the Well Completion; the data
entry fields and function buttons are described as follows:
Well Geometry section:
This section has different input parameters, depending on whether a Vertical

(default) or Horizontal Well is being defined:
Co-ordinates for a Vertical well: The X co-ordinate and Y co-ordinate refer

to area where the Well cuts the upper surface of the Reservoir.
There are also rules governing Well/Boundary Distances (L):
If a Damaged Region is not present, L > 12 rw (i.e. 12 x Wellbore Radius).
If a Damaged Region is present, L > 1.2 Rd (i.e. 1.2 x Damaged Zone

Radius). Since a restriction of Rd > 1.5rw already applies, this means
that L cannot be closer than 1.8rw, when the smallest Damaged Zone
Radius is used.
Co-ordinates for a Horizontal Well: The X, Y and Z co-ordinates define the

position of the heel of the Horizontal Well. The Z direction is positive in a
downwards direction. Ensure that the Z co-ordinate in this dialog is
consistent with the Z co-ordinate used to define the upper surface of the
Reservoir in the Reservoir Geometry tab.
MD (Measured Depth): The datum reference for Measured Depths is

completely arbitrary. The Measured Depth to Top of Reservoir (i.e. for a
Vertical Well) or the Measured Depth to Heel of Well (i.e. for a Horizontal
Well), can be Relative to Original Kelly Bushing (i.e. MDRKB), Mean
Sea-Level (i.e. MSL), etc., or can be left at zero.
Deviation from Vertical: An input field for Vertical Slant Wells (i.e. Wells that
deviate between 1 up to 87 from the vertical).
Dip from Horizontal: The Dip From Horizontal data entry field, to allow a
Dipping Well, has not yet been implemented (i.e. the entry field is
de-activated).
Azimuth: This represents the Well Direction (i.e. for Vertical Slant Wells and
Horizontal Wells), from 0 up to 360 and is measured clockwise from
North on the Drawing Area

Wellbore Radius (rw): This dimension is obtained by halving the

Wellbore Diameter (i.e. drilled Openhole Diameter).
Open Intervals (MD) section:
This section is used to enter Measured Depths of the open Completion Interval/s
within the Wellbore (i.e. Measured Depths to the start and end points of each
open Completion Interval). The default setting has data entry fields activated
for one Completion Interval, but a maximum of six open Completion Intervals
are allowed. To activate or de-activate the data input fields for additional
Completion Intervals, use the Completions counter and toggle at the base of the
section.
Orientation section:
Vertical/Slanted: This category includes Slanted Wells, up to a maximum of

87 from the vertical.
i
The line of the Vertical Well Trajectory must cut both the top and bottom
surfaces of the Reservoir. In addition, Slant Wells are not allowed to cut
through Region Boundaries, but they are allowed to cut through Sub-Layers.
Horizontal: This category is for a Well set at 90 from the vertical.
The line of the Horizontal Well Trajectory must not cut the top or bottom
surfaces of the Reservoir, but must pass through the sides of the structure.
i
However, a Horizontal Well Trajectory is allowed to cut through Region
Boundaries, but it must not cut an interface between Sub-Layers if a
Multi-Layered Reservoir is being modeled (i.e. the Well Trajectory must lie in
the same Sub-Layer across the full width of the Reservoir). The relative dip of
the formation containing the Well is therefore limited by these conditions.
Instructions for Well Configuration:
Select whether the Well is Vertical (this includes Slant Wells) or Horizontal, by
activating the appropriate button in the Orientation area, then define the
Position, Deviation, Azimuth, Wellbore Radius and Completion Interval/s of the
Wellbore in the Well Geometry and Open Intervals (MD) sections as appropriate:

Well Configuration Tabbed Dialog 14
Figure 164: Example of Vertical Well Configuration (side elevation)
Figure 165: Example of Horizontal Well Configuration (side elevation)
For a Slanted Vertical Well, enter the Deviation from Vertical (angle) and the
Azimuth (angle of the Well Trajectory, relative to North on the Drawing Area).
Enter the Measured Depth to Top of Reservoir (Vertical Well) or Measured Depth to
Heel (Horizontal Well), then the Start and End Measured Depths of the Open
Interval/s. Use the Completions counter in the Open Intervals section if more
than one Open Interval is required (i.e. up to a maximum of six Open Intervals).
i
As discussed above, the datum reference for Measured Depths is completely
arbitrary, but the Open Interval Depths must be consistent with whatever
reference is used.
When designating the Well Position, it is important to ensure that this lies
within the Boundaries of the Reservoir. Any Vertical Wells must intersect the
top and bottom Layers of the Reservoir, but Horizontal Wells must not. To
visually inspect the Well Positioning, return to the Reservoir Geometry tab.
If users inadvertently specify Open Intervals that extend outside the Reservoir,
they will be issued with a warning message, but the program will
automatically trim the offending Open Intervals to fit, so there is no need to
take corrective action.

As part of the Model Check feature, invalid data on the Well Configuration
tab is highlighted in red as illustrated below:
Figure 166: A Well Configuration with Invalid Data

General:
This tabbed dialog is accessed from the Numerical Model on the Well and
Reservoir Description (Numerical) ribbon on the Data Preparation view. The
following tabbed dialogs are available:

Material Properties (current tab)
Run Mode Tabbed Dialog (Optional)

Material Properties Tabbed Dialog 14
PanMesh from the Simulation view.
Material Properties of Sub-Layers and Regions are defined in this tabbed dialog.
On entering the Well, Reservoir & Description ribbon on the Data Preparation
view for the first time, PanSystem will transfer any data parameters that have
already been set-up using the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description ribbon into
all Regions (e.g. users may have previously been working on a Well Test using
the Diagnostic Plot and Analytical Simulation facilities); any data thus
transferred can then be edited at this stage if changes are required.
The data entry fields, selection areas and button functions are described as
follows:
Current Region/Layer section:
Each Region in each Sub-Layer can be assigned unique Material Properties. The
Region and Sub-Layer selection toggles are situated at the top left corner of this
section; if multiple Sub-Layers and/or Regions have been configured in the
Reservoir Geometry tabbed dialog, these toggles can be used to generate a new
page of data entry fields to enter and/or edit Material Properties for each
Sub-Layer and/or Region as required.
Where a number of Regions are to have the same Material Properties, enter data
for one Region, then use the Copy button. For more information about the
Copy and Paste buttons, refer to the Copy_and_Paste_Button_area topic.
i The Copy facility does not make the Material Properties available on the
Windows ClipBoard for export outside PanSystem.
Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers: This check box is used where
there is a high Permeability contrast between adjacent Layers (e.g. greater
than 10:1). A Localized Grid Refinement (LGR), is applied to Layers of lower
Permeability that lie each side of the selected (i.e. higher Permeability)
Layer. The Localized Grid Refinement is applied to each adjacent Layer of
low Permeability in a vertical direction, using logarithmic spacing (i.e. fine
to coarse) away from each interface.

Figure 167: High Permeability Contrast between adjacent Layers - plan

view
i
Due to the increased number of Mesh elements involved, this feature may slow
down the solution time for any Numerical Simulation performed in PanMesh,
but will produce a better response.
Non-dimensionalisation area:
Reference Layer: This is the layer for which material properties are used
to non-dimensionalise the pressure versus time plot to produce the Pd/td
response curve.
Fluid type selection area:
Three Fluid types are available as selection button options:
Oil
Gas
Condensate
This selection refers to the principal produced Fluid Type and will apply to all
Sub-Layers in the Reservoir. The Gas and Condensate Fluid Types require a Real
Gas Pseudo-Pressure m(p) Table to be generated using the PVT Calculator
button (described below). Selection of a Gas or Condensate option will also
activate the Rate Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) data entry field in the Wellbore
Damage section of the dialog.

Regardless of the selected produced Fluid Type, this dialog and associated
sub-dialogs provide the flexibility to apply Gas, Oil or Water Fluid Properties to
any Region (e.g. to model an Aquifer or Gas-Cap). These different Fluids are
simply variations in Material Properties that affect the propagation of the
Transient Pressure Disturbance.
i
The PanMesh simulator does not model movement of these Fluids; although
an edge or underlying Aquifer can be modeled, there will be no modeling of
Water Encroachment, Coning or Fingering. Similarly, no Gas-Cap expansion
will be modeled. All Region Boundaries are strictly static.
Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure Method selection area:
This option is available for all Fluid Types, when the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method is enabled. It allows users to account for
important variations in Fluid Properties with pressure and multi-phase
phenomena, such as gas break-out below bubble-point or liquid drop-out
below dew-point, and the consequent reduction in the Relative
Permeability to the producing fluid.
Computed saturations have radial symmetry around the Wellbore and

have no vertical gradient; as a result, it is not possible to model Water or
Gas Coning.
The associated sub-dialogs for the calculation of PVT Properties, Relative

Permeabilities and Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures for all Fluid Types are
identical to those used in the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
(Analytical) data preparation area.
The PVT Calculator button (described below) can be used to estimate Fluid
Properties from Production Data. Data entry parameters include:
Formation Volume Factor (Bo, Bg, etc.): Of the mobile Fluid.

Viscosity (o, g, etc.): Of the mobile Fluid.
Total Compressibility (Ct): Of the Rock and Fluids.
Temperature (T): Of the Region.
Pressure (p): Only the Pressure of the Region containing the Well in
Sub-Layer 1 is currently considered.
i All Regions and Sub-Layers are assumed to have this same Initial Pressure.

Formation section:
Porosity (): The connected Porosity of the Region.
Permeability (k): This represents the Effective Permeability of the mobile

Fluid. Directional components can be assigned along the three principal
axes as kx, ky and kz, allowing for Areal and Vertical Anisotropy. The kx-
and ky-axes lie in the plane of the lower surface of the Sub-Layer, and the
kz-axis is perpendicular to it.
Principal X-Axis: This defines the orientation (i.e. clockwise from

North), for the kx-component of Horizontal Permeability. The default
angle is 90 from North (i.e. in the West-East plane of the x-axis from the
Reservoir Geometry tabbed dialog). This allows the kx- and ky-axes of
Permeability to be different from the geometrical x- and y-axes.
i Note that all Regions in a Sub-Layer should be assigned the same value, but
different Sub-Layers may have different values.
Wellbore Damage section:
The Darcy or Mechanical Skin Factor (S), is modelled in PanMesh as a circular

region of finite radius with altered Permeability around the Wellbore; often
referred to as the Damaged Zone. The Skin Factor and Damaged Zone
Radius can be different in each Sub-Layer that the Well penetrates.
i
For a Horizontal Well, only one damaged Region Permeability can be used,
owing to the current restriction that a Horizontal Well must stay within one
Sub-Layer.
To enter data within this section, use the Sub-Layer toggle within the
Sub-Layer and Region section, to select the Sub-Layer required.
Mechanical Skin (S): Enter the Mechanical Skin Factor (i.e. the Darcy or
Non-Turbulent Skin Factor at the Wellbore, attributed to the Completion, and
damage or improvement of the near-wellbore region).

Damage Zone (Rd): For positive values of Mechanical Skin (S), enter the
Radius (Rd) of the Damaged Zone around the Wellbore (default value is 2 ft,
or 0.6096 m). For negative values of Mechanical Skin (S), a high Damaged
Zone Permeability is imposed and the corresponding Radius (Rd) is
calculated. Users have no control over this Radius.
i Note that Radius (Rd) must not be less than 1.5 times the Wellbore Radius
(rw).
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): This Skin Coefficient accounts for

Turbulent Flow resulting from high Gas Flow Rates and is only available for
Gas and Condensate Fluid Types. The Rate-Dependent Pressure Response
attributed to Turbulent Flow is added analytically to the simulated
pressure in PanSystem after the PanMesh run and does not require
representation as a Finite Region in the Finite Element Model.
Unlike the Darcy Skin Factor (S), only one value can be specified for
(D). Therefore:
For Vertical and Slanted Wells in a multi-layered model, (D) should

be considered as an average or composite value for the layered
Reservoir.
For Horizontal Wells, (which in PanMesh can only lie in one

Sub-Layer), (D) should be considered as an average or composite
value for the traverse of the Well.
Damage Zone (Kd): This is calculated automatically from Hawkins'

formula using the specified (Rd) and (S) values and the undamaged
Region Permeability. The calculated (Kd) value is then used as a
near-wellbore Material Property in the numerical model.
With Vertical and Slanted Wells, where a different (S) and (Rd) can be
specified for each Sub-Layer, the undamaged Region Permeability in
each Sub-Layer is used in Hawkins' formula.

For Horizontal Wells (which in PanMesh can only lie in one Sub-Layer),
the undamaged Permeability of the Region containing the heel of the
Well is used in Hawkins' formula, and the computed (Kd) is applied
over the length of the Well. As a result, if the Well traverses regions of
different Permeability, the simulated response will not model a
constant Skin Factor along the Well.
In the case of anisotropic Reservoirs, the Well Deviation and Azimuth

relative to the Dip and Strike of the Sub-Layer are taken into account when
computing the appropriate undamaged Permeability to use in the
Hawkins' formula. The isotropy is respected in the Damaged Region.
Activate section:
Region is Active: This check box should be unchecked if a Region is to be

excluded from the model. When a PanMesh Simulation is run, any Regions
not flagged as active will be excluded from the Mesh. This is a useful
feature when complex Reservoir shapes are being modeled.
Apply to entire layer: Use this to turn on or off an entire layer.
Apply to Sub Layers: Use this to create a hole vertically through the
reservoir.
i Note that these latter two options are only visible when there is more than one
layer.
The Material Properties controls are rendered disabled for a region and layer
that has been deactivated as illustrated below.

Figure 168: Material Properties when a region is deactivated
As part of the Model Check feature, invalid data is highlighted in red on the
Material Properties tab as illustrated below.

Figure 169: Material Properties with invalid data highlighted in red
Copy and Paste Button area:
Copy: Copy this material definition.
Paste: Paste a material definition (previously copied) to the current

region and layer.
Paste to all regions in layer: This can be used to change the material
properties for an entire layer, as follows:
Change the current material properties manually.

Then, copy them.
Finally paste to all regions in layer.
Paste to all layers in region: This can be used to change the material
properties vertically through a reservoir model.

Paste to entire reservoir: This can be used to change the entire reservoir
to a new material definition. Useful for a homogenous reservoir (where
there are multi-layers & regions for reasons other than material
heterogeneity).
Button area:
PVT Calculator button:
The Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs generated by selecting this button are

identical to those used ion the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
(Analytical) ribbon of the Data Preparation view. The sub-dialog allows
users to view, enter or edit Fluid Parameters for the currently selected
Sub-Layer.
i
Different sub-dialogs are generated for each Fluid Type depending on whether
the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox has been checked or left
unchecked in the underlying section.
For single-phase fluid parameter data, refer to the following topics:

Real Gas Pseudo-Pressure m(p), is available for Gas and Condensate Fluids.
For multi-phase pseudo-pressure fluid parameter data, refer to the following

topics:

Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure)
Sub-Dialog
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m'(p), is available for all three Fluid Types.
Relative Permeability button:
This button option is only available if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure

Method checkbox has been checked in the underlying section. It
generates an IPR Relative Permeability - Data Selection sub-dialog for the
selection, entry and editing of Relative Permeability data.

Run Mode Tabbed Dialog
Pseudopressure button:
Again, this button option is only available if the Multi-Phase

Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox has been checked in the underlying
section. It generates a Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog specific to the
selected Fluid Type. Users should refer to the help topics for:
Oil Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog.

Gas and Condensate Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog.

General:
This tabbed dialog is accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
(Numerical) ribbon on the Data Preparation view. The following tabbed
dialogs are available:
1. Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog

2. Well Configuration Tabbed Dialog
3. Material Properties Tabbed Dialog
4. Run Mode (current tab - optional)
5. Model Check Tabbed Dialog
However, the first three tabbed dialogs must be correctly initialized before
users can OK from the main dialog.
The dialog allows users to set-up a Single Run or a Batch Run of PanMesh for a
number of different PanMesh Numerical Models (i.e. once they have been
initialized within PanSystem). Once the Run Mode has been selected, the
PanMesh Numerical Simulation process can be initiated and it will run through
each model in Single Run (default) or Batch Run Mode, without further user
intervention.

Run Mode Tabbed Dialog 14
Figure 170: The Run Mode Tab with a Range of Controls for Model
Definition
The data entry fields and button functions are described as follows:
Mode area: The following Run Modes are available:
Single Run Mode: This is the default setting. If users wish to proceed with
a Single Run, no further input is required. On selecting OK from this Data
Preparation tabbed dialog, PanSystem writes a standard DATA.SET file to
the paging directory, containing all the necessary information. This file
will be read, then deleted by PanMesh once it has processed all the
information.
Batch Run Mode: When this option is checked, the Start New Batch Set-Up
button is activated in the Batch Control Section and users can proceed with
the batch set-up. In Batch Run mode PanSystem writes a (*.SET) file
named DATAj.SET (where j = 1 - n), for each model in the paging
directory. If users check before starting PanMesh they will also find a
DATA.SET file, which is identical to the last DATAj.SET (i.e. j = n) file
written. When PanMesh is started, PanSystem re-writes this DATA.SET
file and inserts a BATCH flag (so PanMesh knows what to expect), the
names of the (*.SET) files, etc.
Hidden: This mode causes the simulation to run in the background

instead of the main PanMesh window. Only a progress bar is visible. The
main PanMesh window will not be opened.
Batch Control section: Input is only required in this section if a Batch Run is
being prepared. This section is used to set-up and assign a name to a Batch
Run and add Numerical Reservoir Models to a Batch Run. The operational
procedure is described as follows:

Start New Batch Set-Up: This button is activated once Batch Run mode has
been selected in the Mode section. When selected, other areas of the
dialog are activated for initiating the Batch Run and two new buttons are
generated:
The Batch Name field is activated (changes to white background).
The End Batch Set-Up button is activated.
A new button, Save As Pan File is generated at the lower left corner of
the dialog.
A new button, Add to Batch is generated at the lower right of the

dialog, replacing the OK button.
i
Both of these new buttons are available on all four of the tabbed dialogs while
they are active. Users do not have to return to the Run Mode tabbed dialog to
operate the Save As Pan File and/or Add to Batch buttons
Batch Name: Enter a name for the current Batch in this field (up to 20
alphanumeric characters are allowed).
Number of Runs in Batch: This field provides information on the number

of runs included in the current Batch (up to 20 runs are allowed in a
Batch).
Extend Existing Batch Set-Up: Once models have been added to a Batch
Run and the End Batch Set-Up button has been selected, this button is
activated to allow additional models to be added at a later stage (if
required). Select this button to reinstate the Add to Batch and Save As Pan
File buttons to the dialog.
End Batch Set-Up: Select this button once all the necessary Numerical
Models have been added to the current Batch Run. The Add to Batch button
will then be replaced by the OK button and the Save As Pan File button
disappears from the lower left corner of the dialog.
Add to Batch: Select this button to add the current Numerical Model to a
Batch Run.

Run Mode Tabbed Dialog 14
Save As Pan File: This button allows users to save each model in turn as a
(*.PANX) file for future recall. As discussed earlier in the Mode section, all
of the (*.SET) files are deleted once PanMesh has finished using them, so
users will never be able to see any of the modified DATA.SET files to view
any changes that were applied during separate runs.
If users wish to keep a running log of changes applied to Numerical Models

during various runs, they should save this data using the Save As Pan File
!
button. Another useful logging feature can be found in the Report menu.
Select the Report Coverpage option from this menu, then select the Edit
Remarks button to open the Edit Remarks sub-dialog. Use this sub-dialog to
keep a record of any changes made to models during each run (e.g. changes
to Permeability, Skin, Fluid Properties, etc.).
Setting-Up a Batch Run:
To set-up a Batch Run:
1. Select the Batch button in the Mode area.

2. Select the New Batch Set-Up button in the Batch Control section.
3. Enter a Batch Name (i.e. up to 20 alphanumeric characters maximum), in the
Batch Control section.
4. Set-up the first model using the other three tabbed dialogs (i.e. if not already
done).
5. Select the Add to Batch button in any of the tabbed dialogs.
6. Optionally, use the Save as Pan File button in any of the tabbed dialogs, to save
as a (*.PANX) file.
7. Set-up the next model in accordance with steps 4 to 6.
8. Continue until all the desired models have been added (i.e. up to 20 models
maximum), then select the End Batch Set-Up button in the Batch Control
section.
9. Select the OK button to exit the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation tabbed
dialog.
10. Proceed to PanMesh and run the Simulation (i.e. open PanMesh using the
Simulation menu and Numerical Simulation/PanMesh: New run... option). It
should continue through all the Batched models without further user
intervention.
11. Additional models can be added via the Extend Existing Batch Set-Up button,
which will open up the current Batch for new models to be added.


General:
Reservoir & Fluid Description (Numerical) ribbon on the Data Preparation view.
1. Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog

2. Well Configuration Tabbed Dialog
3. Material Properties Tabbed Dialog
4. Run Mode Tabbed Dialog (Optional)
5. Model Check (current tab)
PanMesh from the Simulation menu.
The dialog displays a wide range of checks that are run automatically on the
data you enter to ensure that PanMesh will run smoothly. These checks are
run at two times:
1. When the Model Check Tab is opened.

2. When the user chooses to run the numerical simulation.
In case 2 here, if there is invalid data in the model definition, PanMesh is not
run, but rather, the numerical data prep dialog is opened at the Model Check
Tab. The following figure shows the Model Check Tab open for a data set that
contains a range of errors.
The model checks are broken into three main categories (which are displayed
as the main branches of a tree/node diagram):
1. Reservoir Geometry
2. Well Configuration
3. Material Properties
The main categories correspond to the main model definition tabs of the
PanMesh Data Preparation dialog box.

Model Check Tabbed Dialog 14
Figure 171: Example of the Model Check tab with range of data checks
as a tree/node diagram
As illustrated above, data that has an associated error is denoted by a red

cross (and valid data by a green tick). There are two mouse commands
available in this window:
1. Left-click a red cross and a brief explanation of the error will appear in the
right hand pane.
2. Double-click the cross and the pertinent tab (1-3 above) will be opened (or the
Node/Layer dialog box if appropriate). In the case of a material property
error, the Material Property tab will be opened at the layer and region in
question.
Finally, note that there is a third symbol (an orange warning/exclamation

mark) for questionable completion/perforation data.
The example that follows displays the kind of error information that might be
displayed (in this case explaining that a region has been defined with an
inadmissible concave boundary):

Regions and Areal Heterogeneity
Figure 172: Example of a detailed Model Check message for an invalid

region definition
3. Select the OK button to exit the PanMesh Data Preparation tabbed dialog.

Using Regions and Defining Areal Heterogeneity
General:
This feature is available within the PanMesh Data Preparation tabbed dialog, in
the opening tab - Reservoir Geometry. The Reservoir Models are created and
displayed in the Drawing Area section of this dialog and can then be
sub-divided into smaller Regions on the basis of Areal Heterogeneities (i.e.
Regional differences in Rock and/or Fluid Properties - assigned in the Material
Properties tabbed dialog).
Creating Regions
By defining Internal Boundaries the Reservoir can be sub-divided into Regions.

With a maximum of 99 Boundaries available, up to 100 Regions can be created
and each Region can be assigned a unique set of Material Properties (i.e. Rock
and/or Fluid).
When Regions are created, a Legend box will appear at the top left corner of the
Drawing Area, relating colors to Region Numbers. When in Select mode, the
Region Number will also appear at the mouse pointer as it is moved across the
Reservoir Model.
Internal Boundaries are drawn by selecting Draw Mode , left-clicking and

dragging a line from outside the Reservoir area across the Reservoir to bisect
an existing area, then releasing the mouse button outside the Reservoir on the
opposite side. An Internal Boundary will be displayed with two new Nodes and
each Region is automatically assigned a color scheme. The Nodes can be
left-clicked and dragged to new positions if any adjustment is required.

Regions and Areal Heterogeneity 14
i NB.: Lines can be drawn precisely parallel to the X or Y axis by pressing SHFT
when dragging the pen.
Internal Boundaries are vertical (i.e. in plan view), and extend through the full
thickness of the Reservoir. In a multi-layered Reservoir, they cut through all
the Sub-Layers. They are transparent and do not influence the Well Test
Response unless they are converted into No-Flow Boundaries.
An Internal Boundary plane must not traverse the trajectory of a deviated

Vertical Well, otherwise a warning will be issued. No such restriction applies
to a Horizontal Well.
In a similar manner, Regions can also be bisected to create smaller Regions;

internal Nodes will be created at any Internal Boundary crossing points. Up to
20 Nodes are allowed per polygon, with a maximum of 1000 Nodes allowed
per PanMesh session.
To further sub-divide the example illustrated above (e.g. to create four

Regions), it is necessary to break the line drawing process down into two
stages:

In the first stage, left-click and drag a line across the upper Region to create
two new Regions and two new Nodes, then left-click on the lowest of these
new Nodes (ensure that the Node is highlighted and the cursor displays From
NODE# before clicking, otherwise the Node will not be selected).
Drag a new line across the lower Region from the selected Node to an area
outside the Reservoir Model. This will create another Internal Boundary,
contiguous with the upper vertical Internal Boundary and four Regions.

Editing Regions:
To edit the Material Properties of a Region, set the Mouse Mode to Select
and place the cursor over the required Region in the Drawing Area and double
left-click. This will open the Material Properties Tabbed Dialog for that
Region. Alternatively, click on the Material Properties tab at the top of the
screen and select the Region number in the Material Properties tabbed dialog
using the toggle controls. This facility can also be used to model a thin
altered Region or fault zone separating two compartments.
Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary:
For information about deleting a region or internal boundary, see Delete

Areal Region Sub-Dialog.
Control Points and Internal No-Flow Boundaries:
By default, all outer boundaries are No Flow (but can be altered to Constant
Pressure see section on Applying Constant Pressure Boundary Conditions
to External Boundaries and also the Boundary Conditions sub-dialog). It is
also, however, possible to create No-Flow Boundaries of limited finite extent
within the Reservoir Model.
To achieve this, an Internal Boundary must first be created. The Internal

Boundary can then be made entirely No Flow, or it can be sub-divided in one of
two ways and sections of it made No Flow.

Internal Boundary Entirely No Flow
In the example illustrated below, a Boundary has been created diagonally

across the Reservoir Model. Pick Select Mode and hover the mouse cursor over
the Boundary until the Line caption is displayed, then double left-click to
generate the Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries sub-dialog (alternatively,
left-click on the line and press Enter):
Now double-click on the word Flow so that it toggles to No Flow. Now close
the dialog box. The Internal Boundary line will be shown in black, indicating
that it is now a No Flow barrier. In our example, it would result in the entire
green region being cut off from the well as if it were not there at all.

Section of Internal Boundary No Flow Method 1
Lets say we want to make the middle third of the diagonal line No Flow. This
is done by inserting Control Points corresponding to the extremities of this
middle third section. Re-open the dialog box and toggle back the entire
Internal Boundary to Flow. The sub-dialog can be moved to the side of the
Drawing Area and the Slider Control used to position and view the location of
Control Points (indicated by the white and black colored square on the
Boundary Line), before adding them via the Add Control Point button. In our
illustration below we insert two points at the 33.3% and 66.6% positions,
respectively, to create the middle third section we require.
i NB: The slider can be positioned more accurately using the left and right arrow
keys.
i
NB: Regions that contain Internal Boundary lines with Control Points cannot be
cut in two subsequently (nor single Nodes added by cutting the Internal
Boundary lines).

Double click on Flow for the middle section (see above) and then close the
dialog box. The No Flow section is clearly visible as a thick black line.
i No Flow Boundaries are shown as a thick black line in plan view.
i Up to 10 such Control Points can be added to an Internal Boundary and any or

all sections set to No Flow.
To move either of the Control Points once they have been added, users must
return to the Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries Sub-Dialog, delete one or
both with the Delete Last Control Point button, and re-create using the Slider
Control. The sub-dialog can also be accessed via the Internal No-Flow
Boundaries option on the User Menu. Alternatively, use the left mouse-click
method described earlier. Remember that the Line caption needs to be
displayed before the mouse button is clicked.

Section of Internal Boundary No Flow Method 2
The alternative method for making a section of an Internal Boundary No Flow is

simpler. If we consider the starting model in the last example, in Draw Mode,
simply cut the Internal Boundary at the two required extremities (creating two
additional Nodes at these points instead of Control Points as before):
The (in Select Mode) double left-click on the desired line segment and set the
entire segment to No Flow (as done before).

Map Wizard
The differences in method 1 & 2 can be summarized:
Method 1 is more precise in that (a) the Control Point positions are set
as a % of the overall line length (b) the length of the No Flow section can
be set precisely and (c) it ensures that the original Internal Boundary line
remains straight. However, regions that contain Internal Boundary lines
with Control Points cannot be subsequently cut in two (nor individual
Nodes added).
Method 2 is faster (simpler). The generated Nodes can subsequently be

placed precisely (Node & Layer dialog box) but the convexity of the
region cannot then be guaranteed. However, nodes can easily be deleted
and replaced to ensure convexity.
The best method to use will depend on the particular circumstance.
Map Wizard
Import Map Wizard
General:
The Wizard is used to offer instructions on Importing a Map via the Reservoir
Geometry Tabbed Dialog of the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation
dialog.
If an existing Reservoir Map is available in graphic file format (i.e. JPEG (*.jpg),
GIF (*.gif), Dib (*.bmp) and TIFF (*.tif) formats are all supported), it can be
imported and an outline drawn over it for use in PanSystem. The map image
must not be tilted on the page, as no correction for rotation can be made.

Map Wizard 14
The Reservoir Map import is initiated from the Reservoir Geometry Tabbed
Dialog by selecting the Import Map button option, . This generates a

standard Windows Open dialog to browse for and select a suitable Reservoir
Map file in a supported format. Once a Reservoir Map file has been located
and selected, OK from the Open dialog to generate the map in a display
window and open the PanSystem Wizard; detailed instructions will be given
by the Wizard from this point.
The path to the Reservoir Map file will be written in the (*.PANX) file next time it
i
is saved. Ensure that the Reservoir Map file is stored in a suitable folder (such
as the data folder) before it is imported. If the location or name of the Reservoir
Map file is subsequently changed, PanSystem will not be able to find it and will
prompt accordingly and offer a File/Open dialog for an alternative path or
name.
The Wizard help is offered in a number of steps:
1. The Wizard instructs users to define the map scaling for the imported map
image, by providing the co-ordinates of two arbitrary reference points on the
image. Double-click on the first reference point to generate an Enter
Co-ordinates sub-dialog and enter co-ordinates (east and north). The default
metric units can be changed before the import is performed via the Units
option of the Configuration menu (i.e. if required).
2. On selecting OK from the dialog, double-click on a second reference point
and enter the co-ordinates. This is enough for PanSystem to compute the
relationship between map pixels and distance in the x- and y-directions and
to scale the map. If it becomes necessary to repeat this step to correct a
mistake, both reference points must be re-defined.
3. If the reference points happen to lie in an exact east-west or north-south line,
PanSystem will only be able to scale in that one direction. It will assume the
same pixel/distance scaling in the other direction (i.e. that the map grid is
square).
4. Draw the Reservoir outline as described in Reservoir Geometry. Once the
Reservoir shape has been closed, the Nodes can be dragged to new positions,
but new Nodes cannot be added. To add extra Nodes (i.e. up to a total of 20),
use the {Backspace} key to re-open the shape and then draw in the additional
lines.

Map Wizard
5. On closing the map display window, the imported Reservoir Map and
Reservoir outline will be displayed in the Drawing Area with the co-ordinates
of the drawn Nodes listed below in the Node Information Table.
6. Refer to the following topics for specific tabs in the PanSystem - PanMesh Data
Preparation dialog for specific information on other operations that can be
performed with imported Reservoir Maps:
Import Template dialogs

General:
A Template is a predefined numerical reservoir model that contains most or

all of the data required to build a valid numerical model in PanMesh. In
particular, the geometric layout (node positions and region topology) is
already defined. This can often be one of the more challenging aspects of
building a valid model. It is therefore a quick starting point for building a
model.
The range of standard templates currently installed are:
1. Faults:
a. Intersecting
b. Partially Sealing
c. U-Shaped
2. Hydraulic Fractures:
a. Fracture & Vertical Well

b. Non-intersecting
c. Single Layer, Single Frac with Horizontal Well
d. Single Layer, Two Frac with Horizontal Well
3. Multi-layered:
a. 3-Layer
b. Dual Perm
c. Gas Cap-Aquifer

Map Wizard 14
Using Templates:
The Standard Templates supplied with PanMesh can be accessed using the
Import Template button . The user is reminded that importing a template
will delete the current model (but this can be retrieved through UNDO).
If OK - The user is presented with two options:
The second option allows the user to read in a template file (*.ptl see section
on User Menu) that has been saved by the user. The first option yields the
following dialog box:

Map Wizard
The left hand pane shows the list of reservoir model types (as per the list
shown earlier) and the right hand pane shows the template files that fit into
that category. Clicking on the particular template in the right hand pane
displays the plan view of that template. When any template is selected here,
clicking on Help opens a detailed explanation of the parameters of the model
and its intended purpose.

Map Wizard 14
If the model seems suitable, then the user clicks on Import and the full model
is imported.
This is already a full model with a thickness. Well Configuration and material
properties defined.
Note that in this case (Intersecting Faults) the model defined is homogenous
the network of regions is only necessary to allow the model to geometrically
model the two faults.

Map Wizard
Finally, the user can then alter the parameters of the model (see associated
topic). For example, one easy parameter to change is the overall dimension.
Simply open the Scale Model dialog box ( ):

PanMesh Graphic Toolbar Commands 14
And the overall dimensions can be altered:
The material properties can be altered by:
1 Going to the Materials Tab,
2 Changing the material in any region,
3 Clicking on Copy (to the buffer),
4 Clicking on Paste to entire reservoir.
Finally, the position of the faults can be altered by dragging them in Move
Mode.
PanMesh Graphic Toolbar Commands

Radial Regions Around the Wellbore Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed by selecting the Radial Regions button, ,

situated below the Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog of the PanMesh Data
Preparation dialog.

User Menu
If a Reservoir has a Region around the Wellbore with different Fluid/Reservoir

Properties (e.g. Swept Region around a Water-Injector), this sub-dialog allows
users to set-up a Radial Composite Region by entering the Radius for the Region.
Different Material Properties can be assigned to each Sub-Layer, but the Radial
Region must have the same Radius for all Sub-Layers in the Reservoir. The
Material Properties for each Region (i.e. inner and outer) should be entered
separately under the Material Properties Tabbed Dialog.
The Skin Factor (S), will also be modeled as a circular Region around the
Wellbore with a Finite Radius and a Permeability value as follows:
For a positive Skin - Permeability is less than the Reservoir Permeability.

For a negative Skin - Permeability is greater than the Reservoir Permeability.
The Damaged Zone Radius (Rd), is configured separately in the Material

Properties Tabbed Dialog.
Provided the Radial Region has a larger Radius than the Damaged Zone Radius,
the model can contain both.
The units of Length used throughout the PanSystem - PanMesh Data

Preparation dialog are those defined in the Units option of the Configuration
menu item.
User Menu
User Menu Button
General:
This drop-down menu system is available within the PanMesh Data

Preparation tabbed dialog. In the opening tab - Reservoir Geometry, the User
Menu button, , is situated below the tabs. The tiered menu options allow
users to alter the display in the Drawing Area and create or edit features
within the Reservoir Model. Some of these options also have keyboard and/or
mouse-operated short-cuts.
Menu Items:
These are described as follows:

User Menu 14
Sketch Display: Allows users to switch between the default Plan view of
the Reservoir and either of the two 3-D Elevation view options.
i The Reservoir Thickness (i.e. Sub-Layer Thickness) must be defined before

the Elevation view options become available.
(Short-cut: Double left-click in the area outside the Reservoir to toggle

between Plan and Elevation).
Plan View: The default option as described in the Drawing Area above -
essentially a two-dimensional (aerial) view of the Reservoir.
Solid Elevation: The Reservoir structure is displayed as a 3-D block

diagram, with any Regions displayed in the same colors as the Plan view.
Transparent: The Region colors are respected, Internal Boundary lines

and the Well are visible. If the Well is indistinct or not visible, use the
Zoom Well option described below; this accentuates the
representation of the Well (and any Damaged Regions if present).
i This assumes that the Well Properties have already been defined in the Well
Configuration tab.
Opaque: The Region colors are respected, but only the outer surface of
the Reservoir Model is displayed, without internals.

User Menu
Wire Elevation: The Reservoir structure is displayed as a wire frame box.
Hidden lines removed: Only the outer surface Edges are displayed (this
will include the Well outline where it penetrates the surface) - no
Internal Regional Boundary lines or the Well position are visible.
Hidden lines shown: The Internal Regional Boundary lines and the Well
Open Interval/s are displayed.
When an Elevation menu option is activated, additional Viewing controls

become available. These are situated to the right of the Drawing Area and
i
allow users to Zoom relative to the Reservoir or Well, Rotate the Reservoir
image on the x- or y-axis, and Pan the viewing position relative to the Reservoir
in a Side-Ways or Up and Down direction. The Reservoir image can also be
freely rotated (left button), panned (left + right button) and zoomed (right
button) by clicking and dragging the image as required.
Map Display: If a Reservoir map graphic has been imported and the
Reservoir outline has been drawn over it, users can choose from:
Show: Display the map in the Drawing Area.
No Show: Do not display the map in the Drawing Area, but show the
outline.
Full Window: Switch to the full-screen display of map and outline.
Region Colors: This controls the coloration of each Region. This is a useful
option if a Reservoir map is displayed, because Region colors may partially
obscure the map.
Off: No Region colors are displayed.
By Region Index: The Region colors are displayed in terms of bounded

regions (default).
By Material Properties: The Region colors are displayed in terms of

Material Properties (i.e. where these have been defined in the Material
Properties Tabbed Dialog, otherwise a single color will be used for
all Regions).

User Menu 14
Drawing Mode: This affects the appearance of the Reservoir outline when
there is a map in the background.
Blend: The map is still visible behind the Reservoir outline and
Regions. The Reservoir outline and Region colors are blended as
they cross different background colors (default).
Overwrite: The Reservoir Outline is drawn in the selected pen color

(see next item), and the Region colors obliterate the map.
Pen Color: Users have the choice of Red or White (default) for the Reservoir
Outline.
Graph Scales: This option is used to re-scale the Drawing Area.
Zoom Extents: Sets the zoom so that the entire reservoir is visible.
(Short-cut: Press {Ctrl} and right-click in the Drawing Area).
Key Window: Choose to have the Region color Key hidden or displayed
with this option.
(Short-cut: Double left-click on any of the Region colors in the Key to hide
it).
Close Reservoir: When drawing the Reservoir outline, this option will add
a Reservoir Boundary from the last Node created to the first, thereby closing
the Reservoir Outline.
(Short-cut: Right mouse-click).
Clear Reservoir: This option will clear all Reservoir details, including the
map, from the Drawing Area. Any parameters defined under the other
tabs within the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog will also be cleared, but
will be retained in memory and can be retrieved if the appropriate parts
of the Reservoir Geometry are re-created.
(Short-cut: Double right-click in the Drawing Area outside the Reservoir).
Node Dialog: This opens the Node Parameters sub-dialog for entering or
editing Node Co-ordinates. If entering via the menu, select the Node
Number when in the sub-dialog. If entering via a short-cut, the Node
clicked on will already be selected.
(Short-cut 1: Double left-click on the Node in the Drawing Area (ensure

the cursor displays the word "NODE")).

User Menu
(Short-cut 2: Select on the Node and then press Enter.
Boundary Dialog: This opens the Boundary Conditions Sub-Dialog for

specifying the No-Flow (default) or Constant-Pressure condition at each
outer Boundary.
(Short-cut 1: Double left-click on the outer Boundary (ensure the cursor

displays the word "EDGE")).
(Short-cut 2: Select on the Boundary and then press Enter).
Remove Regions: This opens the Delete Areal Region Sub-Dialog to

allow the removal of an Internal Region. By deleting a Region, an Internal
Boundary also has to be deleted.
(Short-cut 1: Double left-click on the (Internal Boundary (ensure the

cursor displays the word EDGE)).
(Short-cut 2: Select on the Internal Boundary and then press Enter).
Internal No-Flow Boundaries: This option will open the Define Internal
No-Flow Boundaries Sub-Dialog which allows the editing of Internal
Boundaries (if any Boundaries have been created) - in particular, the
conversion of a portion of the Internal Boundary into a No-Flow Boundary
of finite extent.
(Short-cut: Double left-click on the Internal Boundary (ensure the cursor

displays the words "LINE")).
Save Template File: This will open a Windows Save as... dialog. The current
model can be saved as a template file with extension .ptl.
Cancel: This option closes the menu.

User Menu 14
Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Geometry tab of the PanSystem -
PanMesh Data Preparation dialog while operating in the Drawing Area. The
sub-dialog can be opened in three different ways:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, choose the
Select Mode for the mouse from the Mouse Mode Toolbar and
select an Internal Boundaryl ine(the mouse cursor should display
"LINE"). Then either:
Double left-click with the mouse,
Or left-click to select it and press Enter on the keyboard.
With any view displayed in the Drawing Window, choose the select the
User Menu button, then the Internal No-Flow Boundaries item

from the list of menu options.
i
Although any view can be used for the User Menu option, it is best to be in
Plan view, since all the Nodes and Node Numbers are displayed while
operating in this mode, to help identify the correct Boundary to be defined.
The sub-dialog allows users to create Control Points (i.e. reference points on
the Boundary line), and define No-Flow Boundaries of limited extent within the
Reservoir Model. As a pre-requisite, an Internal Boundary line must either be
present or it will have to be created (refer to the Help topic for Using
Regions and Defining Areal Heterogeneity for detailed instructions on
creating Regions and Internal Boundaries). The Internal Boundary can be
sub-divided into two or more sections (NB. Up to a maximum of 10), and one
or more of the sections can be designated as No-Flow. Thus, a fault or faults of
finite extent can be modeled, either touching an outer Boundary (Edge) of the
Reservoir, or isolated internally. The sub-dialog is described as follows:
Line Number: Identifies the Internal Boundary, with the pair of Nodes that it
connects. If there is more than one Internal Boundary present, the toggle
can be scrolled to select another Internal Boundary.

User Menu
Joining Node: Identifies the Nodes at each end of the currently selected
Internal Boundary line displayed in the Line Number selection field.
Flow Control/Co-ordinate Table Field: This table is used to display the

current Control Point status and start/end (x, y) co-ordinates between each
Control Point that define a segment on the Internal Boundary. One or more
segments can either be designated as No-Flow or Flow, by clicking on the
text entries contained in the Flow Control column of the table. On
selecting OK from the dialog, any designated No-Flow segments will
appear as thicker lines of a contrasting color on the Reservoir Model (i.e.
operating in Plan view).
i The first Control Point in the table represents the initial start and end points of
the Internal Boundary (i.e. Node positions).
Slider and Current Slider Position: The slider is used to set Control Points at
a set percentage and/or distance along the length of the selected Internal
Boundary. As the slider is moved from left to right, a white square marker
will appear on the selected Internal Boundary of the Reservoir Model
displayed in the Drawing Area (i.e. operating in Plan view). This
represents the Control Point to which Flow or No-Flow attributes will be
attached.
Position the Control Point, either visually on the Reservoir Model, or use the
percentage and/or distance information fields, then select the Add Control
Point button. This locks the Control Point into place, dividing the Internal
Boundary into two segments. The current Control Point status and start/end (x,
y) co-ordinates will be displayed above in the Flow Control/Co-ordinate Table
Field.
i Additional Control Points can be added in the same way providing the new
slider position is moved further to the right.

User Menu 14
Add Control Point button: This button is used to create and lock new
Control Points into place. After adding the first Control Point on the
Internal Boundary, additional Control Points can be created with the slider,
as long as the new slider position is further to the right.
i The slider must be moved from the last Control Point position before selecting
this button or an Information screen prompt will be issued.
Delete Last Control Point button: To move or delete Control Points once they
have been added, it is necessary to return to this sub-dialog and delete
them with this button. They will be deleted in reverse order from the
Flow Control/Co-ordinate Table Field. New Control Points can then be added
using the slider control as described above.
i The first Control Point in the table cannot be deleted since it represents the
initial start and end points of the Internal Boundary (i.e. Node positions).
Boundary Conditions Sub-Dialog

General:
PanMesh Data Preparation dialog. The sub-dialog can be opened in three
different ways:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, and the Mouse
Mode is set to Select , pick any outer Boundary line (the mouse cursor
should display EDGE), then double left-click with the mouse.
Mode is set to Select , pick any outer Boundary line (the mouse cursor
should display EDGE), then press Enter.
With any view displayed in the Drawing Window, select the User
Menu button, then the Boundary Dialog item from the list of menu options.

User Menu
The upper and lower surfaces of the Reservoir structure and each of the outer
Boundary surfaces, can be designated as No-Flow (default) or Constant Pressure
boundaries by checking the required condition:
Reservoir Top.
Reservoir Bottom.
Boundary between each Node->Node pair (select the required Boundary by
toggling through the listed Node->Node pairs). The boundary condition
selected will be listed in the Configure Reservoir Node and Layer dialog
against the first node in the pair: for example, if the outer boundary
between Nodes 2 and 3 is assigned Constant Pressure status, it will be
listed as such in the row for Node 2.
In a multi-layered model, Top and Bottom refer to the upper and lower
surfaces of the whole system, and the outer boundary conditions apply to all
of the sub-layers.
! Also refer to the Help topics for Using Regions and Areal Heterogeneity and
Delete Areal Region.
Delete Areal Region Sub-Dialog

General:
PanMesh Data Preparation dialog while operating in the Drawing Area. The
sub-dialog can be opened in three different ways:
Mode is set to Select pick an Internal Boundary line (the mouse

cursor should display "LINE"), then double right-click with the mouse.
Mode is set to Select , pick ann Internal Boundary line (the mouse
cursor should display LINE), then press Enter.

User Menu 14
Menu button, then the Remove Regions item from the list of menu options.
i
Although any view can be used for the User Menu option, it is best to be in
Plan view, since all the Nodes and Node Numbers are displayed while
operating in this mode, to help identify the correct Region/Line for deletion.
The sub-dialog allows users to delete any Internal Boundaries and Regions in
the current Reservoir Model. The sub-dialog is described as follows:
Delete Line: Scroll the toggles until the required Line for deletion is
displayed in the selection field.
Joining x to y: This information field displays the Node Numbers (i.e. x and
y) that lie at each end of the line currently selected in the Delete Line field.
Use Properties: When a Region/Line is deleted, an adjacent Region must

expand to replace it. If there is a Region on either side of the target Region,
choose which of the two Regional Properties to use with the toggle controls.
Figure 173: Deletion of Internal Boundary and associated Nodes to create

expanded Region
i
Region/Line removal may create a non-convex region. This will trigger an error
if the user tries to run a simulation with such a model. The offending region will
be indicated in the Model Checks tab.

Configure Reservoir Node and Layer Sub-Dialog
On selecting OK from the sub-dialog, the target Region and the associated
Nodes and Internal Boundary will disappear and the selected Regional Properties
will be applied to the new (i.e. larger) Region.
Configure Reservoir Node and Layer Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Geometry tab of the PanMesh
Data Preparation dialog. The sub-dialog can be opened in three different
ways:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, choose the Select
Mode for the mouse from the Mouse Mode Toolbar and select a node
(the node will be highlighted when the cursor is over it). Then either:
Double left-click with the mouse.
Or left-click to select it (the node will remain highlighted when

chosen) and press Enter on the keyboard.
Menu button, then the Node Dialog item from the list of menu options.
The sub-dialog allows users to edit the parameters of any selected Node in
the current Reservoir Model. The sub-dialog is described below:
Number of Sub Layers: Increase this value to add a layer below the lowest
layer or reduce it to delete the last layer.
Insert Layer: If a thickness in a Sub-layer column is selected, insert a layer

with an equal thickness to the selected layer above that layer.
Remove Layer: Delete the selected layer.
Apply thickness to all nodes: If thicknesses have already been entered, and
a change is subsequently made, clicking this button will copy the new
value, entered at one node, to all the nodes (layer of constant thickness).
Apply z value to all nodes: Clicking this button will copy the currently
selected z value, to all the nodes (uniform depth to top of reservoir).

Configure Reservoir Node and Layer Sub-Dialog 14
Used in Calculation of Planes: A green tick mark must be present for at
least three Nodes (not collinear) in order to model a valid surface.
Clicking on these cells toggles the status for that node.
Node: Indicates the node to which the row of data refers.
X: Defines the X-direction co-ordinate (East-West), for the selected Node

in Plan View.
Y: Defines the Y-direction co-ordinate (East-West), for the selected Node

in Plan View.
Z: Defines the Z-direction co-ordinate in terms of Vertical Depth below

an arbitrary datum (+ve downwards), for the selected Node. If the top
surface of the reservoir is horizontal, enter the value for z in one field and
click Apply z value to all nodes to fill the entire column. If the top
surface is not horizontal, enter z values for the three nodes that are
selected in the Used in calculation of planes column. There is no need to
specify any other Z-values. The reference datum for z = 0 is arbitrary, so
having all values set to zero or all set to 10,000 will define a horizontal
surface in both cases.
Boundary Condition: Double click on these cells to toggle the no flow

outer boundary condition for the edge which runs from that node (as
indicated by the node number of that row).
Press OK to exit the dialog and retain the current settings.
i A maximum dip of 45 from horizontal is currently allowed.
Sub-Layer Thickness: Enter a Vertical Thickness for the selected Sub-Layer

(i.e. equal to the Reservoir Thickness if it is to be a single-layered model).
If the Sub-Layer is of uniform Thickness, enter a value at one Node and

select Apply Thickness to all Nodes from the dialog; the Sub- Layer
thicknesses at the other Nodes will be filled-in automatically.

Printer
If the Sub-Layer is not of uniform Thickness, it is only necessary to

enter Thickness values at the three Nodes flagged for the Calculation of
Planes, similar to the procedure described above for the Z co-ordinate.
This defines the plane of the bottom surface of the Sub-Layer. Note
that the thicknesses at the other (non-ticked) nodes are calculated
dynamically and thicknesses of 0 or less are invalid and shown in red.
If the Reservoir Model consists of several Sub-Layers, enter their Vertical

Thicknesses individually editing the Sub-layer Thickness column as indicated
above. Ensure that this step is carried out at the three Nodes flagged for
Calculation of Planes, to define the planar surfaces representing the bases of
each Sub-Layer.
Printer
General:
This option is used to select and set-up a Printer for use with PanSystem.
The option availability are dependent on the selected Printer. The fields are
Any changes made here are local to the PanSystem program.
Printer: Select a printer to use. The PanSystem default Printer is

highlighted.
Name: Displays the name of the currently selected Printer or

alternative Printer or application from the drop-down menu on the
The Preferences button gives the user access to a further Print

sub-dialog where additional Layout and Paper/Quality properties can
be specified:


Printer 14
graphically).

supply to the current Printer. The default is Automatically Select.
Status: Supplies information on the current Printer status (i.e.

Type: Supplies technical specification of the current Printer.
Location: Supplies location of the current Printer.
Comment: Supplies additional system information about the current

Printer.
Paper: Select a Paper Size and Source via the drop-down menu system.
Orientation: Select a Page Orientation from a choice of Portrait or

Landscape (options are displayed graphically).
Network: Opens a Connect to Printer sub-dialog that allows users to

browse the existing system network to select a suitable shared Printer.
i It is very important to set-up the Printer correctly otherwise it may not produce
what is required.

Printer

14
SECTION IV
ANALYSIS
This section provides information about Analysis within PanSystem

application.
CHAPTER 15
Analysis View ............................................................. 473
CHAPTER 16
Workflow .................................................................... 477
CHAPTER 17
Conventional Analysis ................................................ 485
CHAPTER 18
Tools ....................................................................... 5070
CHAPTER 19
Model Selection .......................................................... 543
CHAPTER 20
Skin Analysis ............................................................. 555

CHAPTER 21
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Menu ...................... 563
CHAPTER 22
Shale Oil/Gas ........................................................... 593
CHAPTER 23
Mini-Frac .................................................................. 619
CHAPTER 24
Transformation ......................................................... 639
Chapter 15
ANALYSIS VIEW
Analysis View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

15 ANALYSIS VIEW
ANALYSIS VIEW OVERVIEW

General:
The Analysis view is used in PanSystem to analyze the Gauge Data prepared in
Data Preparation. The maximum data capacity of Analysis is unlimited. There
are two principal methods of Analysis:
Line fitting to specialized diagnostic plots, and curve matching using

Type-Curves supplied with the program.
Curves generated on-screen by manual or automatic parameter selection.
From these two methods, Flow Regimes can be identified and the various Well
and Reservoir parameters can also be derived.
During Analysis, the Results from any particular plot can be transferred to the
set of main Reservoir Description parameters by using the Confirm option. In
this way, the Reservoir Description can be constructed and continually updated
as the Analysis proceeds.
The latest status of every plot invoked (i.e. Lines Fitted, Results, Flow Regimes,
Axis Scales, etc.), is written to the (*.PANX) file by the file Save or Save
Asoptions. Subsequent recall of the file will reinstate all plots so that the
Analysis can be resumed from where it was left off. If users have more than
one Pressure and/or Flow Rate column to choose from (e.g. if two Pressure
gauges were run during the well test), the current selection can be changed at
any time by returning to the Master Data File dialog and selecting a
different Column Name in the Master Data File/Columns section.
Ribbons:
The following ribbons are used to perform a well test Analysis. For more
Workflow: Use this ribbon to display the Test Overview Plot showing
the complete Pressure and Flow Rate records selected for Analysis. Choose
the Test Period/s to analyze before proceeding to the diagnostic plots and
Type-Curves. This ribbon enables you to select automated workflows.
Conventional Analysis: Use this ribbon to select various Analysis

related options.

ANALYSIS VIEW
Analysis View Overview 15
Tools: Use this ribbon to select analysis tools.
Model Selection: Use this ribbon to select and modify models.
Skin Analysis: Use this ribbon to switch Non-Darcy Skin Analysis on/off
and to change and/or apply the Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient.
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Menu: Use this ribbon to generate

the Pressure Decline Analysis plot and to generate Agarwal-Gardner type
curves.
Shale Oil/Gas: Use this ribbon to perform Shale Oil/Gas Analysis.
Mini-Frac: Use this ribbon to perform Mini-frac Analysis
Transformation: Use this ribbon to change the method for calculating

Pseudo-Time and Pseudo-Pressure.
For information about editing and viewing data, refer to the View Ribbon
Overview.

15 ANALYSIS VIEW

Chapter 16
WORKFLOW
Workflow Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Test Overview Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

16 WORKFLOW
Workflow Ribbon Overview
WORKFLOW RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The following two option groups are available on the Workflow ribbon:
Test Overview Plot

Workflows
TEST OVERVIEW PLOT

Functionality:
This option is used to plot the entire record of Pressure and Flow Rate against
Time so users can select the test or tests they wish to analyze. It has no edit
capabilities.
It is generated automatically the first time you click on the Analysis task
button, provided that several checks are satisfied:
All necessary Well, Reservoir and Fluid input parameters are initialized.
Gauge Data is present and there are no time continuity errors.
At least one Test Period has been defined.
The Test Overview Plot can be generated by selecting the Test Overview option
from the following ribbons in the Analysis view:
Workflow
Conventional analysis
PDA
Shale oil/gas
Mini-frac
Also, the Test Overview Plot can be generated by selecting the Test Overview
option from the Deliverability ribbon view.
By default, the Test Overview Plot displays the Master Pressure and Rate
Channel plus the Rate Changes, presented as a step profile, based on the Rate
Changes Table (the same as in the Data Edit Plot).

WORKFLOW
Test Overview Plot 16
By extending the x-axis scale to the left, any Rate Changes that occurred before
the Pressure data were recorded can also be displayed.
The Rate Changes display can be switched on/off by right-clicking a column in

the Data files/columns list in the Workspace and then selecting
Remove from active plot > Rate Changes: Rate Schedule. The status of the
Rate Changes (on or off) is saved to file.
Choose the Test Period/s to be analyzed before proceeding to the diagnostic

plots and Type-Curves. The selection procedure is described below.
i
Plot annotation can be applied by right-clicking on the plot and selecting
Annotation/New from the menu that appears. The annotation will appear
centered on the place where you right-clicked. Refer to Plot Annotation for
more details of this facility.
Operational Instructions:
Test Period Selection: Before selecting a diagnostic plot button, users

must select the Test Period Classification they wish to analyze by
left-clicking (once) in the Ruler Bar above the Test Overview Plot. Left-click
it again to de-select.

16 WORKFLOW
Test Overview Plot
Consecutive Flow Periods can be grouped into a single Test Period by

holding down the Shift key, then holding down the left mouse button and
dragging the cursor over each successive Flow Period (e.g. for a
Flow-After-Flow (FAF) Test). The grouped Flow Periods will then be treated
as a single test in Analysis. The individual markers will be replaced by
start and end markers. To revert back to the individual Flow Periods,
simply hold down the Shift key and apply a mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.
It is possible to group ALL Flow Periods without having to drag the cursor
i
through them, by holding down the Ctrl key and right-clicking in any Flow
Period in the ruler bar. All of the periods will be grouped automatically. Note
that if the last period is a buildup it will not be included in the group. To revert
back to the individual Flow Periods, hold down the Shift key and apply a left
mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.
Discrete (i.e. non-consecutive) Test Periods can be selected by holding

down the Ctrl key, then left-clicking on the required Test Periods. Multiple
Flowing and/or Shut-In Periods can then be analyzed together.
During or after analysis of a selected test or tests, if users need to work on

other tests, they should return to the Test Overview Plot to make a new
selection.
If you try to invoke a diagnostic plot with an invalid test, the error
message: The Test Period selected is not valid for Analysis, will appear on
the Test Overview Plot. The error message also lists five possible things
that may be causing problems. The selected Test Period will not be
considered valid if:
1. It contains only one Pressure Point or no Pressure Points.
2. It is a Build-Up or a Fall-Off Test (i.e. it has a zero Flow Rate), but it

has no Rate History. At least one Flow Period should be defined prior
to the selected Period (see point 3). Check the Rate Changes Table.
3. It is a Build-Up or a Fall-Off Test (i.e. it has a zero Flow Rate), and

there is a Flow Period (or there are Flow Periods) defined before the
Shut-In, but the Flow Period immediately before it has a zero Flow
Rate. A Build-Up or Fall-Off Test must have a Flowing Period with a
non-zero Flow Rate immediately prior to Shut-In (and the Flow Rate
should be negative (Injection) for a Fall-Off Test). Again, check the
Rate Changes Table.

WORKFLOW
4. It is a Build-Up and the Start Pressure (P0 in the Rate Changes Table)
is greater than the last measured Gauge Pressure in that particular
Test Period (e.g. a spuriously low Pressure measurement); PanSystem
compares the Pressure entered in the Rate Changes Table at the start
of the Shut-In Period (P0), with the last Gauge Pressure in the Test
Period.
If the end of the Period has been wrongly identified, or if there is

noisy data, it is possible for the last Pressure to be less than P0. This
is considered to be invalid for a Build-Up Test.
5. It is a Fall-Off Test and the Start Pressure (P0 in the Rate Changes
Table) is less than the last measured Gauge Pressure in that
particular Test Period (e.g. a spuriously high Pressure
measurement).
The comments from point 4 also apply here, except that a final
Gauge Pressure greater than P0 would be considered as invalid for
a Fall-Off Test.
6. It consists of grouped Flow Periods with non-zero Flow Rates, but

the last Flow Rate is zero.
If a Test Period is made up of a group of Flow Periods, some of which

are non-zero, then the final Flow Period must not have a zero Flow
Rate. The Flow Periods should be ungrouped, then regrouped
without the offending final Flow Period.
Marking Events: Users may also wish to take the opportunity to affix
numbered event markers to certain data points whilst operating in this
plot.
Note that data or test periods cannot be edited on this plot; users must
return to Edit Rate Changes in the Data Preparation view.
No analysis can be performed on this plot, but the Simulation view

options Quick Match Dialog and Automatic Matching Dialog can be
used to history match the whole test.

16 WORKFLOW
Test Overview Plot
The Test Overview Plot is the only plot that allows for regression on the
Initial Pressure (pi).
Group the flowing periods by pressing the Ctrl key and right-clicking in
any one of the flow period intervals in the ruler bar. This will produce a
single flowing period for analysis.
Shut-in data (rate = 0) is automatically excluded from the analysis plots
If you wish to exclude flowing periods from the beginning or end of the
data, you can group the desired middle periods by pressing the Shift key
and swiping with the mouse. This might require some zooming. You
may only group contiguous periods.
To ungroup, press the Ctrl key and right-click in the grouped period.
Select the test period and proceed with the analysis.
i For additional details about the plot, refer to the Help topic for Analysis Plot
Overview.

WORKFLOW
Workflows 16
WORKFLOWS
Functionality:
PanSystem includes the following automated workflow options:
Start Derivative Analysis Workflow

Start Type Curve Analysis Workflow
Start Deliverability Analysis Workflow
Start Skin vs Flowrate Analysis Workflow
General:
These options are accessed from the Workflow ribbon on the Analysis view. To
perform a specific workflow, select the applicable workflow, and then follow
the instructions that appear on the screen.
On the Workflow ribbon, click Test Overview. The Test Overview Plot is
displayed.
Select a test period by clicking on the ruler bar above the plot.
Click the applicable [workflow name]. For example, click Start Derivative
Analysis Workflow.
The Help pane is automatically opened on the right side of the window.
The Help pane provides instructions for completing the selected
workflow.
Perform the instructions as outlined in the Help pane. As you complete a

step, new instructions are displayed in the Help pane.

16 WORKFLOW
Workflows
You may cancel the workflow at any time, and then decide whether to
keep the current state of the plot.
To cancel the workflow, click Cancel Workflow, and then click Cancel
on the Cancel Workflow dialog. The current state of the plot remains
unchanged.
To continue the analysis from this stage of the workflow, click Cancel
Workflow, and then click No on the Cancel Workflow dialog. Any
updated plot data is kept on the plot.
To restart the workflow, click the next active workflow button or click
Yes on the Cancel Workflow dialog. You are returned to the
beginning of the Workflow ribbon. Any updated plot data is removed
from the plot.
To end the workflow, click End Workflow. The workflow is finished.
The Quick Match Results are displayed in the Navigation Pane. The next
workflow button is activated in the Workflows area.

Chapter 17
CONVENTIONAL ANALYSIS
Conventional Analysis Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Plot Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Cartesian Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Semi-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Linear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Bilinear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Spherical Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Type-Curves Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

17 CONVENTIONAL ANALYSIS
Conventional Analysis Ribbon Overview
CONVENTIONAL ANALYSIS RIBBON

OVERVIEW
General:
The following options are available on the Plot Types ribbon:
Test Overview Plot: Select the Test Overview Plot.

Cartesian Plot: Select the Cartesian Plot.
Semi-Log Plot: Select the Semi-Log Plot.
Linear Flow Plot,: Select the Linear Plot.
Bilinear Flow Plot: Select the Bilinear Plot.
Spherical Flow Plot: Select the Spherical Plot.
Log-Log Plot: Select the Log-Log Plot.
Type-Curves Plot: Select the Type-Curve Plot.
PLOT TYPES
Test Overview Plot
Functionality:
capabilities.

Workflow
PDA
Shale oil/gas
Mini-frac


i Plot annotation can be applied by selecting Ctrl + right-clicking on the plot, refer
to Plot Annotation for more details of this facility.

must select the Test Period Classification they wish to analyze by
left-clicking (once) in the Ruler Bar above the Test Overview Plot. Left-click
it again to de-select.

Test Overview Plot

i


selection.


Rate Changes Table.
Period.

measurement).
a Fall-Off Test.


plot.

Test Overview Plot

Overview.

Cartesian Plot 17
Cartesian Plot
Functionality:
This option produces a plot of Pressure versus Elapsed Time for the Test
Period/s selected from the Test Overview Plot.
Results Derived from Line Fitting:
Model Line Position Calculated Results
Wellbore storage coefficient

(Cs).
Early storage-dominated data Dimensionless storage

All models
(unit slope on Log-Log Plot) coefficient (Cd).
Wellbore volume (V), for gas

wells.
Drainage area (A).

Late data in Reserves volume (Voil) or
Boundary Model = semi-steady-state flow
(Vgas).
Closed System regime (i.e. flowing period
only). Dietz shape factor (CA),
flowing period only.
Late data in Drainage area (A), inner

semi-steady-state flow compartment.
Boundary Model = regime for first compartment
Dietz shape factor (CA).
Two-Compartment (i.e. flowing period, or
build-up with Slider Connected pore volume* (V1 =
Extrapolation). hA), inner compartment.
Connected pore volume* (V2),

Late data in
outer compartment.
semi-steady-state flow
Boundary Model = regime for second Total connected pore volume*
Two-Compartment compartment (i.e. flowing (V1+V2).
period, or build-up with Slider
Effective transmissibility (Teff),
Extrapolation).
from intersection.

Semi-Log Plot
Late data in Connected pore volume* (V2),

semi-steady-state flow outer compartment.
Boundary Model =
regime for first compartment
Two-Compartment Total connected pore volume*
(i.e. build-up test only,
without Slider Extrapolation). (V1+V2).
Active Probe model

(Wireline Formation End of steady state flow Horizontal radial permeability
Tester)
i *Note that the volumes V1 and V2 are total connected pore volumes at
reservoir conditions, not hydrocarbon volumes.
Semi-Log Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus Log10
of Time. A Rate-Normalised Pressure and a Logarithmic Superposition Function
may also be used, depending on the nature of the test and the time function
previously selected with the Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Radial Flow Portion/s:

Semi-Log Plot 17
For Vertical Wells:
Radial permeability (k), vertical

well.
Radial homogeneous Radial flow portion True Darcy Skin Factor (S).
Initial pressure (Pi), (extrapolated

P* or calculated Pcalc).
Average reservoir pressure

Boundary model =
Radial flow portion (MBH), assumes
closed system
semi-steady-state drawdown.
Radial permeability (k).
True Darcy Skin Factor (S).

Boundary model =
Single or intersecting Distance to boundary (from
single fault or two
fault radial flow intersection).
intersecting at 90
or calculated).
Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr).

Vertical fracture Late pseudo-radial flow
or calculated).
Early fracture system

Dual-porosity No calculation
radial flow
Radial permeability (k), for

fracture system.
Dual-porosity Total system radial flow True Darcy Skin Factor (S).

or calculated).
Storativity ratio (), (from

separation from early fracture
system line).
Dual-porosity Transition period
Interporosity flow coefficient (),
(from intersection with total
system line).

Semi-Log Plot
Radial permeability (k), (Layer 1)

Early radial flow (first True Darcy Skin Factor (S).
Dual permeability
layer)
or calculated).
Interporosity flow coefficient (),

(from intersection with early radial
Total system radial flow flow line).
Dual permeability
(both layers)
Permeability-thickness ratio (),
(from ratio of slopes).
Radial permeability (k), (inner

Radial composite Inner region radial flow region)
Radial permeability (k), (outer

region).
Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr),

(outer region).
Outer/inner mobility ratio (M),

Radial composite Outer region radial flow (from ratio of slopes).

or calculated).
Radial distance to discontinuity

(Lrad), (from intersection of the
two lines).
Partial penetration Radial permeability (k), (from

Radial flow at h(perf))
(including gas
perforations
cap/aquifer) True Darcy Skin Factor (S).
Radial permeability (k), (from h)
Partial penetration Pseudo-radial skin (Spr),

(including gas Full thickness radial flow (includes convergence)
cap/aquifer)
or calculated).

Semi-Log Plot 17
For Horizontal Wells:
Average vertical radial

Radial homogeneous permeability k(bar).
Early vertical radial flow
or dual-porosity
Average vertical radial

Radial homogeneous permeability k(bar).
Hemi-radial flow
or dual-porosity
Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr),

Radial homogeneous
Late horizontal radial flow (includes convergence, etc.).
or dual-porosity
Vertical permeability (kz), from
k(bar).

Boundary model = Distance to boundary (from
Single or intersecting fault
single fault or two intersection with late radial
radial flow
intersecting at 90 flow line).
Initial pressure (P*)

extrapolated or (Pi) calculated.

Linear Flow Plot
With History and Use Horner options enabled (i.e. refer to Time Function
Facility), the line will be extrapolated to (P*), at Infinite Time (i.e. Superposition
Function = 1.0). With the Use Horner option disabled, the Initial Layer
Pressure (Pi), will be calculated by backwards superposition and is displayed
as (Pcalc).
P* and Pcalc both represent the Initial Layer Pressure (Pi), at the start of the
Rate History, assuming an infinite Reservoir. If the Well Test has detected
i
Boundaries or other heterogeneities (i.e. the Reservoir is not Infinitely Radial),
care should be taken in attaching any physical meaning to this Pressure if the
line has been fitted to the early Radial Flow portion of the data.
Where Boundaries are evident, the better estimate of Initial Pressure can be
obtained by fitting a line to the last well-developed Flow Regime, using the
diagnostic plot appropriate for that particular Flow Regime (e.g. for a single
fault (i.e. Hemi-Radial Flow), the Radial Flow Plot (Horner or Agarwal) should
be used; for a channel (i.e. Linear Flow), the Linear Flow Plot should be used,
etc.).
i For the special treatment of Turbulent Flow (i.e. Non-Darcy Skin) effects in Gas
and Condensate Wells, refer to SvQ (Skin versus Flowrate) Plot .
Linear Flow Plot

Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus the
Square-Root of Time. Rate-Normalized Pressure and a Square-Root Superposition
Function may also be used, depending on the nature of the test and the time
function previously selected with the Time Function button.
Plot annotation can be applied by selecting Ctrl + right-clicking on the plot,

refer to Plot Annotation for more details of this facility.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Linear Flow Portion:

Linear Flow Plot 17
For Vertical Wells:
Fracture half-length (Xf).
Initial pressure (P*), extrapolated.
Fracture face skin (Sf # refer to Note 1

Vertical fracture Fracture linear flow below), (infinite conductivity and
uniform flux fractures).
or
Dimensionless fracture conductivity
(Fcd # refer to Note 1 below), (finite
conductivity fracture).
Channel width (W).

Boundary model =
Reservoir linear flow Distance to nearest boundary (L1).
parallel faults
Convergence skin (Sconv).
Boundary model =
Hemi-linear flow Channel width (W).
U-shaped faults
Effective well length (Lw) and

convergence skin (Sconv), (normal
option)
Linear flow through or

All models
layer Horizontal permeability (k) and true
skin factor (S # refer to Note 2 below).
Initial pressure (Pi) (extrapolated P*

or calculated Pcalc).
Channel width (W).

Boundary model =
Reservoir linear flow Distance to nearest boundary (L1).
parallel faults
Convergence skin (Sconv).
Boundary model =
Hemi-linear flow Channel width (W).
U-shaped faults

Linear Flow Plot
#1: When a Linear Flow Plot is used in Analysis, the line fitting and calculation
option can either be used to calculate the Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity
(Fcd) and Fracture Conductivity (Kfw), by setting VertFrac-FinCond = 1
i
(default), or remove the calculations and only display Extrapolated Pressure
(P*), by setting VertFrac-FinCond = 0. Users should change the default setting
in the Pansys31.ini folder by opening the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via
Start/Run/Regedit commands in Windows), then selecting
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Configuration. (for
more details on editing the Pansys31.ini folder, refer to the Windows Registry).
#2: For the True Skin Factor (S) calculation option, if (Lw) and (Kz) are known,
users should change the default setting in the Pansys31.ini folder by opening
i
the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit commands in
Windows), then selecting
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Configuration and
setting HLLC_K_L = 1, (for more details on editing the Pansys31.ini folder,
refer to the Windows Registry).
! Warning: The Registry Editor should always be used with great care and
there are three very important points to remember:
1. There is no undo option available in the Registry - if a key folder is deleted

accidentally it is permanently gone.
2. When the Registry is edited, all changes are saved instantly - there is no
option to "re-load" the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
3. Users will never know if they have done something wrong - there are no
warning pop-up dialogs to inform users of mistakes, errors, etc. The Registry
Editor will allow users to wipe everything clean without supplying a
warning.
Windows 95, 98, 2000, XP and NT all have a simple Registry back-up
mechanism that is quite reliable, but users should never rely on this alone.
Always remember to make a back-up of the Registry. The back-up and
restore methods will vary depending on the version of Windows that is being
used - consult the Registry Editor Help menu for version-specific details of
these methods.
For additional information relating to the Registry and the operations that can
be performed in the Registry Editor, users should also refer to:

Bilinear Flow Plot 17
The Registry Editor Help menu.
The dedicated website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the
following URLs, http:// registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
Bilinear Flow Plot

Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus
Fourth-Root of Time. Rate-Normalised Pressure and a Fourth-Root Superposition
Function may also be used, depending on the nature of the test and the time
function previously selected with the Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Bilinear Flow Portion:
For Vertical Wells:
Fracture conductivity (kfw) and

dimensionless fracture
conductivity (Fcd).
Finite conductivity,
Fracture Bilinear flow
vertical fracture Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr).
Initial pressure (P*),

(extrapolated)
Fracture half-length (Xf).
Fracture conductivity (kfw) and

Finite conductivity, Time to end of
dimensionless fracture
vertical fracture Bilinear flow on line
conductivity (Fcd).
If not already established (e.g. from the Linear Flow Plot), the fracture
half-length (Xf), can be estimated by marking a data point at the end of the
straight line through the Bilinear flow portion (refer to the Help topic for the
Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog for more details).

Spherical Flow Plot
Spherical Flow Plot

Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus
1/Square-Root of Time. Rate-Normalized Pressure and a 1/Square-Root
Superposition Function may also be used, depending on the nature of the test
and the time function previously selected with the Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Spherical Flow Portion:
For Vertical Wells:
Partial penetration
(including gas Spherical Flow Vertical permeability (kz).
cap/aquifer)
Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Log10 Delta-Pressure
(and the derivative) versus Log10 of Elapsed Time. Rate-Normalized Delta-Pressure
and a Logarithmic Superposition Function may also be used, depending on the
nature of the test and the time function previously selected with the Time
Function button.
i The Use Horner option available under the Time Function facility has no effect
on this plot.

Log-Log Plot 17
Line Fitting: On the Log-Log Plot it is possible to fit lines of specified slopes,
corresponding to the theoretical behavior of the derivative in different flow
regimes.
Users can select an existing line at any time (i.e. press the Ctrl key and left
click on the line, or right click on the line to activate the "grab-handles") and:
Delete it (refer to Delete).

Move it (by clicking and dragging the grab-handles).
Change the Line Type (refer to Change Line Type).
The main objective is to identify flow regimes from the derivative. However,
in certain cases, results are calculated from the position of the line (for an
explanation of these line-fitting tools, refer to the Help topic for Analysis Plot
Overview).
For Vertical and Horizontal Wells:
Model Line Position (Unit Calculated Results

Slope)
Wellbore storage
coefficient (Cs).
Early storage-dominated Dimensionless storage

Wellbore storage
data coefficient (Cd).
Wellbore volume (V), (gas

wells).

(Zero Slope)
Radial Average vertical radial permeability

Early vertical radial k(bar).
homogeneous or
flow
dual-porosity True Darcy skin factor (S).
Radial Average vertical radial permeability

homogeneous or Hemi-radial flow k(bar).
dual-porosity True Darcy skin factor (S).
Radial Radial permeability (k).

Late horizontal radial
homogeneous or
flow Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr).
dual-porosity

Log-Log Plot

(Zero Slope)
Boundary model =
Single or Radial permeability (k).
single fault or two
intersecting fault,
faults intersecting Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr).
radial flow
at 90
For Vertical Wells:

(Zero Slope)
Radial Radial permeability (k).

Radial flow portion
homogeneous True Darcy skin factor (S).
Boundary model =
single fault or two Single or intersecting
faults intersecting at fault, radial flow
90
Late pseudo-radial Radial permeability (k).

Vertical fracture
Fracture system
Dual-porosity No calculation
radial flow
Radial permeability (k), (of fracture

system).
Dual-porosity System radial flow True Darcy skin factor (S).

Interporosity flow coefficient ()* (see
note below).
Transition to system
Dual-porosity Storativity ratio ()** (see note below).
radial flow
Radial flow (first Radial permeability (k), of first layer.

Dual-permeability
layer) True Darcy skin factor (S).
Total system radial The kh ratio (K), if radial flow line has
Dual-permeability
flow (both layers) been set.
Inner region radial Radial permeability (k), (inner region).

Radial composite
flow True Darcy skin factor (S).

Log-Log Plot 17

(Zero Slope)
Outer region radial Outer/inner mobility ratio (M), if inner

Radial composite
flow region line has been set.
Partial penetration Radial permeability (kp), (from h(perf)).

Radial flow at
(including gas
perforations True Darcy skin factor (S).
cap/aquifer)
Partial penetration Radial permeability (k), (from h).

Full thickness radial
(including gas
cap/aquifer)
i
*Interporosity Flow Coefficient, (): Position a Zero-Slope line for System
Radial Flow, and define the Transition to System Radial Flow Regime (i.e.
using the Flow Regime button). The value for (), is computed from the time at
the end of the flow regime.
**Storativity Ratio, (): Position a Zero-Slope line for System Radial Flow, and
define the Transition to System Radial Flow Regime (i.e. using the Flow
i
Regime button). A new Zero-Slope line will appear through the minimum of the
data within this Flow Regime. The value for (), is calculated from the relative
positions of the two lines. Move the line if necessary. Alternatively, do not fit
the Flow Regime, but select the Zero-Slope Line button (i.e. for Transition) and
position it at the bottom of the derivative trough.
Types of Derivative: In addition to the conventional log-based derivative,

users can display derivatives based on other functions of time via the
Derivative Selection button. This can be useful in identifying reservoir
flow regimes other than radial. The derivative types available are:
Linear time-base for Pseudo-Steady-State Flow.
Square-Root time-base for Linear Flow.
Fourth-Root time-base for Bilinear Flow.
Derivative Smoothing: (Derivative Smoothing Dialog) This can also be

applied through the Derivative Selection button, which allows users to
smooth each derivative.

Type-Curves Plot
Marking Flow Regimes: Having identified flow regimes, users may

(optionally) mark them with the Flow Regime Definition button facility.
These markers will be carried through from plot to plot to aid in
line-fitting.
For Wireline Formation Tests:

(Zero Slope)
Probe/Probe
Radial flow Radial permeability (k)
active
Packer/probe Obs Radial flow Radial permeability (k)
Packer/probe Obs* Radial flow Radial permeability (k)
Dual-Permeability
Radial flow Radial permeability (k)
Obs**
*The 'Packer/Probe Active' model function is fulfilled by the standard 'Partial

penetration' model.
**The 'Dual-permeability Active' model function is fulfilled by the standard

'Dual permeability' model.
Type-Curves Plot
Functionality:
This option displays one selected Test Period/s as a plot of Log10 Delta-Pressure
(and the derivative) versus Log10 of Elapsed Time. Rate-Normalised Delta-Pressure
and a Logarithmic Superposition Function may also be used, depending on the
nature of the test and the time function previously selected with the Time
Function option on the Analysis Tools ribbon.

Type-Curves Plot 17
Sets of Type-Curves are supplied with PanSystem for all flow models and a
number of boundary configurations. For each model, there is a "Default" set
of curves and for some models there are additional curve sets which may be
accessed via a User-Selected Type-Curve option (the full list of available
Type-Curve files are presented in Type-Curve File Structures).
Model Curve Set Comments
RADHOMOG Medium range Cde2S

Radial
RADHI High range Cde2S
homogeneous
RADLO Low range Cde2S
M(inner) < M(outer) and M(inner) >

M(outer), =1
RADCOMP
Radial composite Inner region gas, outer region
GASDRIVE
liquid: M(inner) >> M(outer), =
0.01
MPARTPEN Perforations in middle

Partial penetration
TPARTPEN Perforations at top (or bottom)
Perforations at bottom (gas cap) or

TGASCAP
Gas cap/aquifer top (aquifer)
MGASCAP
Perforations in middle
SLUG Range of Cde2S

Slug test
+ large selection Individual curves
FAULTS Default set

Boundaries
+ large selection Variety of boundary geometries
The table shows only those models which have a choice of supplied
Type-Curves available through the User-Selected Type-Curve option. The
default curve set name is in bold text. All other models automatically pick up
a default curve set.

Type-Curves Plot
Users may also use their own Type-Curves via the User-Selected Type-Curve
option. These can be generated in PanSystem (refer to Export to Type-Curve
File) or created externally, provided they are correctly formatted Type-Curve
files (refer to Type-Curve File Structures for details).
i For a description of the tools used in Type-Curve analysis, refer to the Help
topic for Analysis Plot Overview).
Once a Type-Curve Plot has been generated, click the Type curve match button
to match the shape of the type curve to the plot by moving the type curve
around. For information about using the Select Type Curve dialog box, refer to
the Select Type-Curve Match topic.

Chapter 18
TOOLS
Tools Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Global Point Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Smoothing Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Change T0/P0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Time Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Zero Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Unit Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Half Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Negative Half Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Quarter Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Negative Unit Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Floating Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Average Line Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Flow Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Confirm Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Change Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Line Details and Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Autofit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Select Type-Curve Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Type-Curve Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Type-Curve Pd Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Filter Type Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Derivative Smoothing Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

18 TOOLS
Tools Overview
Tidal Filter Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Change Extrapolated Pressure Facility/Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
TOOLS OVERVIEW
General:
The following options are available on the Analysis Tools ribbon:
Global Point Selection Dialog: Point selection for Auto Match.
Smoothing Facility/Dialog: Change Derivative Smoothing Constant.
Change T0/P0: Change T0/PO.
Time Function: Change the Time Superposition Function.
Unit Slope Line: Fit Unit Slope line.
Zero Slope Line: Fit Zero Slope line.
Half Slope Line: Fit Half Slope line.
Negative Half Slope Line: Fit Negative Half Slope line.
Quarter Slope Line: Fit Quarter Slope line.
Negative Unit Slope Line: Fit Negative Unit Slope line.
Best Fit Line: Fit line through Marked Points.
Floating Line: Fit Floating Line.
Parallel Lines: Fit Parallel line/s.
Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog: Fit Known Slope line.
Average Line Slopes: Calculate Average of selected lines.
Flow Regime: Define Flow Regimes.
Confirm Results: Confirm Results.
Change Line Type: Change Line Type.

TOOLS
Global Point Selection Dialog 18
Line Details and Results: Display Line Results for selected line.
Autofit Lines: Fit suitable line to data
Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog: Add Time Marks.
Select Type-Curve Match: Perform Type-Curve Matching.
Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog: Go to next stage of

Type-Curve Matching.
Type-Curve Previous: Return to previous stage of Type-Curve Matching.
Type-Curve Pd Facility/Dialog: Show or hide the Pd/Derivative

Type-Curve.
Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog: Force the Type-Curve Parameter.
Filter Type Curves: Show specific Type Curves.
Change Extrapolated Pressure Facility/Dialog: Change the

Extrapolated Pressure.
Derivative Smoothing Dialog: Show or hide Derivatives and Derivative

Smoothing for Log-Log Plot.
GLOBAL POINT SELECTION DIALOG

General:
This dialog is used to select points from the entire dataset and is generated by
selecting the Auto Match Point Selection button without drawing a box.
The dialog is comprised of a selection area, an information/input area and

two function buttons, described as follows:

18 TOOLS
Global Point Selection Dialog
Selection Type area: Users may choose point spacing on a Logarithmic or

Linear basis:
Logarithmic: If the data spans M log cycles of time and users want to
select n points, the selection routine will pick (n/M) points per cycle,
spaced logarithmically in time. This gives a fairly even spacing of
points on a Log-Log Plot or Semi-Log Plot, and is the
recommended choice. The first and last points are always picked.
Linear: If users select n points, and there are N points in the dataset,
the selection routine will pick every (n/N)th point. The first and last
points are always picked. The appearance of the selected points will
depend on how they were sampled during acquisition and
subsequent filtering.
Points information/input area:
Points on Current Plot: This represents the total number of points

displayed on the current plot.
Points Available for Selection: This will be up to 500 (or the number on
the current plot if smaller) minus one point for each entry in the Rate
Changes Table prior to the test being analyzed (this is because Auto
Match must include the rate history). If users have a very detailed
Rate Changes Table, they may not be able to pick enough points for
Auto Match; in this case, the rate history should be simplified.
Maximum Required Number of Points: Enter the number of points

required for the regression in this data entry field. Around 20 to 30
are usually adequate for Auto Match, but the number cannot exceed
500.
Select the OK button to continue. The plot will then be generated with the
selected points highlighted. The points selected by this method are assigned
medium weighting for the auto-regression. Users can change the weighting of
individual points or groups of points as explained under Windowed Point
Selection.

TOOLS
Auto Match Point Selection 18
i
You can de-select a selected point by clicking on it. Should you wish to
de-select all of the selected points, use the Esc key. A warning message will
be displayed, but note that selecting OK from this warning does not delete the
points, it merely de-selects them.
Auto Match Point Selection

Functionality:
This tool allows you to select a number of points automatically on any of the
Analysis Plot types, for use in Auto Match. If you click on the Select points in a
box icon on the plot toolbar and drag to draw a box on a portion of the plot
before clicking the icon, you will enter Windowed Point Selection mode. If you
do not draw a box, you will enter Global Point Selection mode.
You can select points by mixing both methods and can always select
additional or deselect points with the mouse pointer. Generally speaking, the
regression will be more effective if more points are used. It is particularly
important to cover the storage-dominated portion in detail. However, more
points will also entail slower regression. Around 20-30 points are usually
adequate.
Global Point Selection: This option selects points from the entire dataset.
Select the Point Selection button without drawing a box.
Windowed Point Selection: This option allows you to localize the point
selection to an area of the plot by drawing a box before selecting the Point
Selection button. This option can be used to select or de-select points in
the box area, or change their weighting.

18 TOOLS
Windowed Point Selection Dialog
Windowed Point Selection Dialog

General:
This dialog is used to localize the point selection for Auto Match to an area of
the plot by drawing a box and operating on the points within the box. Use
this option to select or de-select points in the box area, or change their
weighting.
Click the Select points in a box tool on the plot toolbar and draw a box. For the
moment, all points within the box will be selected. Now select the Auto Match
point selection button on the Analysis Tools ribbon bar. The Windowed Point
Selection dialog will appear.
Selection area: Three choices are available:
De-select: This option allows you to deselect all points within the box.
Select and Weight: This allows you to select a number of points in the
box and specify their Weighting.
Re-weight: If you have drawn the box around points that have
already been selected (and weighted), their weighting can be altered
with this option by selecting a different Weighting button to be
applied (as described below).
You can select and weight a single point or alter the weighting of a
selected point, by clicking on it while pressing the up (= high) or
down (= low) arrow keys from the keyboard. For medium weighting,
do not use the arrow keys.
Weighting: These buttons determine the importance of the points in the

auto regression (refer to Automatic Matching Dialog for more details).
Selection Type: Choose logarithmic of linear spacing if selecting a subset of

the points in the box.
Maximum Number of Selected Points: You can select up to 500 points.

TOOLS
Smoothing Facility/Dialog 18
Figure 174: Ten points selected with High Weighting
Select the OK button to continue. The points are selected using the linear
method described in the Automatic Matching Dialog and are marked
differently depending on their weight status.
SMOOTHING FACILITY/DIALOG
Functionality:
This option allows users to change the Derivative Smoothing Constant

(References 30 and 34) in the Select Type-Curve Matchfacility. It is only
enabled prior to loading the Type-Curves (i.e. when the pressure and
derivative data are first displayed. When this option is selected a Change
Smoothing Constant dialog is generated, displaying the currently used
smoothing constant.
The dialog is comprised of a data entry/edit field, a checkbox and two

function buttons, described as follows:
Smoothing Constant: Enter a value for the smoothing constant value in

this field. A smaller number = less smoothing. As a guide:
0.0 = no smoothing
0.01 = very light smoothing
0.1 = moderate smoothing
0.5 = heavy smoothing

18 TOOLS
Change T0/P0
For the logarithmic derivative, the default of L = 0.07 represents a smoothing

window spanning a time tj.eL (~7% ) on either side of a data point at time
tj, so for a point at t = 10 hours, the window extends from approximately
9.3 hours to 10.7 hours.
Plot Against Elapsed Time: This is only active for build-up (or fall-off) tests.
It allows users to plot the pressure and derivative against logt instead of
log equivalent time. The derivative will still be calculated using
superposition, but will be plotted against elapsed time. This display has
the effect of eliminating the data compression that sometimes occurs at
late time when plotting with equivalent time, and restores detail.
CHANGE T0/P0
Functionality:
Use this option to change the start time or start pressure of the Test Period
selected for analysis (single period only). Normally, this change should only
be required if the start values declared using the Edit Rate Changes option
on the Rate Changes ribbon in the Data Preparation view, need to be
"fine-tuned" (e.g. to produce a better unit slope on the Log-Log Plot).
The dialog has only two entry fields and two function buttons, described as
follows:
T0: Enter the new initial value for time in this field.
P0: Enter the new initial value for pressure in this field.
On selecting OK, the original start values in the Rate Changes Table are
overwritten by these new ones.

TOOLS
Time Function 18
TIME FUNCTION
Functionality:
The Time Function option is enabled on the diagnostic and Type-Curves

Plot for:
Constant Rate Tests that have a Flow Rate History (i.e. everything except the
first (Constant Rate) Drawdown in a Test sequence).
Varying Rate Tests set-up with a Column of Varying Flow Rate data (i.e. a
Varying Flow Rate Column is currently selected as the "Master" Flow Rate
Column on the Master Data ribbon of the Data Preparation view.
i This option is disabled for the Test Overview Plot.
Use this option to invoke the various Time Functions that can be applied to a
diagnostic plot. These functions account for the effects of the Flow Rate
History of the well test and any Rate Variations during the well test.
On selection of the Time function option, the Select Time Function dialog is
generated. It has a variable number of selection and/or checkbox options
available, depending on the type of Test Period and Rate Column that are
currently selected, as described below:
History options:
No History: This option ignores any History and simply generates plots
using Elapsed Time.
Use Constant Rate History: This option uses an approximation in the case
of Multiple-Rate History. In the case of a Build-Up or Fall-Off Test, the last
Flow Rate before Shut-In is used with an "effective" Producing Time:
Tp(eff) = Total Volume Produced Last Rate Before Shut-In.

18 TOOLS
Time Function
Use Full History: This option uses a theoretically rigorous, generalized

Superposition Function for any Multiple-Rate History.
Time Function options:
i These Time Function options are mutually exclusive.
Use Horner: For Build-Up Tests, the previous options that use History can
be formulated as "Horner" (i.e. checked) or "Not-Horner" (i.e. unchecked).
Although the true Horner Time Function applies to Build-Ups or Fall-Offs
following a single Constant Flow Rate or Injection period, the term is used
here more generally to denote a particular formulation of the
Superposition Function for Multi-Rate Tests (refer also to Semi-Log Plot
(Gas) or Semi-Log Plot (Oil) for more details). The "Not-Horner" mode
corresponds to the Agarwal formulation of an Equivalent Drawdown Time.
In the simple case of a Build-Up Test preceded by a single Constant Flow Rate
period, the "No History" option produces a conventional MDH Plot (Reference
i
2 and 3), the "Use History" option produces a plot of Pressure versus Agarwal
Equivalent Time (Reference 4), and the "Use History + Horner" option
produces a Horner Plot (Reference 2 and 3). The corresponding, more
complex, Superposition Functions are computed for Build-Up Tests with
Multiple-Rate Histories (refer also to Semi-Log Plot (Gas) or Semi-Log Plot
(Oil) for more details).
dP/ dQ With Elapsed Time (RPI Method - (Reference 95)): This option is only
present in PanSystem for a Drawdown Test that either has a Variable Rate
History or a Varying Rate during the Test.
If the first Drawdown (no History) is selected as a Test Period and a Varying
Rate Column is selected as the "Master" Flow Rate Column in the Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation dialog, a simplified dialog will appear with only this
option and the Use Varying Rate During Test (default) option available.
Selecting this option then OK will produce a dP/ dQ versus Elapsed Time
Plot.
i This RPI option remains activated for all plots once enabled (i.e. checked); it
must be unchecked to disable.

TOOLS
Time Function 18
The term "Reciprocal Productivity Index" (RPI) was first coined by J. W. Crafton
i
(Reference 95). It is the Rate Normalized Pressure dP/ dQ (which has the
units of a reciprocal PI), but Crafton recommended plotting versus Elapsed
Time in the case of noisy production data, where the use of the standard
superposition theory might produce an erratic Time Function.
If a Drawdown Test Period with Rate History and (optionally) a Varying Flow
Rate during the Test is selected (e.g. second, third, fourth, etc. Flowing
Periods), the three History button options (described above) are made
available in conjunction with this checkbox option and the Reference Back
to Initial Pressure checkbox option.
With this option, any diagnostic plot that normally uses an Equivalent
Time Function (i.e. Log-Log, Semi-Log, Square-Root, Fourth-Root, Spherical
and Type-Curve), will use Elapsed Time (i.e. as if it were being plotted with
the No History option selected). For example, the Square-Root Plot will be
P/Q versus Square-Root (t) instead of P/Q versus Square-Root
Equivalent Time Function.
Use Varying Rate During Test: This option is only available when the Flow
Rate varies during the Test Period itself, and the Gauge Data includes a
Column of Varying Flow Rate data which has been selected as the "Master"
Flow Rate Column on the Master Data File dialog. A dP/ dQ versus
Equivalent Time Plot will be produced.
i
This option is enabled (i.e. checked) by default if the "Master" Flow Rate
Column is varying. If disabled (i.e. unchecked), it will remain off for all plots
generated for the currently selected Test Period. However, if a different Test
Period is selected, this option is re-enabled.
For the first Drawdown Test Period, where there is no History, a simplified
dialog will appear with only this option (i.e. default) and the RPI Method
option available. For subsequent Drawdowns, it is implicit in the Use
Constant Rate History and Use Full History options described above.
When enabled (i.e. checked), the option modifies the Superposition

Function to include the effect of any Flow Rate Variations during the Test.
Switching this option off (i.e. unchecked), will cause the Superposition
Function to ignore Flow Rate variations during the Test and assume a
constant Surface Rate read from the Rate Changes Table (or if the Test Period
consists of several Rate Changes, it will use the last Flow Rate value entered
in the table for that Test Period).

18 TOOLS
Time Function
For example, in the case of a Build-Up or Drawdown Test with a constant

Surface Rate, (but with Downhole Flowmeter data available and selected as
the "Master" Flow Rate Column), leaving this option enabled (i.e. checked),
would tend to correct out the Wellbore Storage (i.e. Afterflow) effects by
using the Flowmeter data. Switching this option off (i.e. unchecked),
would leave the Wellbore Storage effects in place because the nominal
constant Surface Rate would be used.
Reference Back to Initial Pressure: This option is only available for Flowing
Periods (i.e. Drawdowns) other than the very first one.
i This checkbox option is only enabled when either the Use Constant Rate
History or Use Full History option has been selected, and is off by default.
Normally, the default Use Full History generalized Superposition Function

and the Y-axis plot values are computed relative to the T0, P0, Q0 values
in the Rate Changes Table at the start of the Test Period being analyzed. This
checkbox option will reference the Superposition Function and Y-axis
values back to the very start of the Rate History; the T0, P0, Q0 at the first
entry in the Rate Changes Table (where P0 = pi , Q0 = 0). This requires that
(pi) be known accurately, as this affects the Y-axis plot values.
The disadvantage of this approach is that (pi) is often not known

accurately (e.g. the start of a Drill Stem Test - DST is often messy). The
attraction of not using this option is that the Superposition plots use the
Pressure/s at the start of the selected Test Period/s, not (pi). These are more
likely to be known accurately.
The results from the two approaches should be close (i.e. provided the
(pi) value is good), since both are derived from theory; the plots just look
different.
!
This option is particularly useful for Multi-Rate Gas Well Test Analysis, where
the use of the default generalized Superposition Function in previous versions
of PanSystem caused some confusion regarding Non-Darcy Skin Analysis and
the SvQ Plot.

TOOLS
Zero Slope Line 18
ZERO SLOPE LINE

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a zero-slope (horizontal) line to the derivative curve of
the Log-Log Plot to identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a

radial flow regime. The table contained in the Help topic for Analysis Plot -
Define Line, shows that for certain flow and boundary models, the radial
permeability (k) and skin (S), can be calculated from the line position.
For any other derivative types (refer to the Derivative Smoothing Dialog
option), the horizontal portion of the data corresponds to the following flow
regimes:
Derivative Type Has Zero Slope During...
Wellbore storage
Linear time derivative
Pseudo-steady-state flow
Log time derivative Radial flow
Square-root time derivative Linear flow
Fourth-root time derivative Bilinear flow
1/(square-root time derivative) Spherical flow
i
If users have already selected a reservoir flow model and/or boundary model a
Define Line dialog is generated when this option is selected, if the particular
line slope corresponds to a valid flow regime; otherwise the line is drawn
immediately.

18 TOOLS
Unit Slope Line
UNIT SLOPE LINE

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a unit-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log
Plot to identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to

wellbore storage (i.e. early data), or to pseudo-steady-state flow (i.e. late data,
closed rectangle boundary model).
Derivative Type Has Unit Slope During...
Wellbore storage
Log time derivative
Users can move the line at any time by selecting it (i.e. use the Ctrl key and
left-click on the line or right-click with the mouse button), then dragging the
centre grab-handle (i.e. black square at the center of the line).
i
Define Line dialog is generated when this button is selected, if the particular
immediately.
HALF SLOPE LINE

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a half-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log
Plot to identify flow regimes.

TOOLS
Negative Half Slope Line 18
linear flow regime in a vertical fracture (i.e. in the early part of the data),
parallel faults boundary model (i.e. late data) or linear flow towards the
wellbore (i.e. horizontal well).
Derivative Type Has Half Slope During...
Fracture linear flow

Log time derivative Reservoir linear flow
Linear flow through layer (horizontal well)
center grab-handle (i.e. black square at the center of the line).
If users have already selected a reservoir flow model and/or boundary model
a Define Line dialog is generated when this option is selected, if the particular
immediately.
NEGATIVE HALF SLOPE LINE

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a negative half-slope line to the derivative curve of the
Log-Log Plot to identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to the

spherical flow regime in a partially-penetrated reservoir model (i.e. transition
from near-well radial flow to full-thickness radial flow with a penetration
ratio < 0.1).
Derivative Type Has Negative Half Slope During...
Log time derivative (Hemi-) Spherical flow

18 TOOLS
Quarter Slope Line
i
immediately.
QUARTER SLOPE LINE

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a quarter-slope line to the derivative curve of the

bilinear flow regime in a vertical fracture with finite conductivity.
Derivative Type Has Quarter Slope During...
Log time derivative Fracture bilinear flow
i
immediately.

TOOLS
Negative Unit Slope Line 18
NEGATIVE UNIT SLOPE LINE

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a negative unit-slope line to the derivative curve of the
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to

wellbore storage (i.e. early data), or to pseudo-steady-state flow (i.e. late data,
closed rectangle boundary model).
Derivative Type Has Negative Unit Slope During...
Wellbore storage
Log time derivative
i
Define Line dialog is generated when this button is selected, if the particular
immediately.
BEST FIT LINE

Functionality:
This option will fit a line by a least squares regression through all the data
between two selected points. Choose two points and select the button.
i
immediately.

18 TOOLS
Floating Line
It is important that only two points are selected. A point can be de-selected
by clicking on it again or all points can be de-selected by selecting the Esc key.
FLOATING LINE
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a line of unspecified slope to the derivative curve of the
Log-Log Plot to identify flow regimes or trends. This line can assume any
gradient and any position on the plot.
The line is initially displayed with a gradient = 1. To alter this gradient,

left-click on the end handles (i.e. the black boxes situated at either end of the
line), with the cursor and drag the line up or down to a new angle. To shift
the entire line up or down, grab the center handle.
Users can move the line at any subsequent time by selecting it (i.e. use the
Ctrl key and left-click on the line or right-click with the mouse button), then
dragging the grab-handles as described above.
i No flow regime definition is associated with this line.
PARALLEL LINES
Functionality:
Use this option to draw a line parallel to an existing line.

TOOLS
Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog 18
An existing line must first be selected by holding down the Ctrl key and
left-clicking it or right-clicking it with the mouse. The grab-handles will
appear (i.e. black boxes).
Select this button and the parallel line will be drawn.
i
immediately.
The line can be moved around using the centre handle (i.e. black box).
If users select a (single) point before using this tool, the line will be drawn
exactly through that point.
KNOWN SLOPE LINE FACILITY/DIALOG

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a line of specified slope to the plot.
When this option is selected a Known Line dialog is generated, allowing users
to enter the slope of the line to fit. The default line slope will be that of the
currently selected line (or 1.0 if none is selected).
Enter a value as necessary. On selecting OK, the line appears on the plot.
If users have already selected a reservoir flow model and/or boundary model
a Define Line dialog is generated if the particular line slope corresponds to a
valid flow regime; otherwise the line is drawn immediately.
The line can be moved around using the centre handle (i.e. black box).
exactly through that point.

18 TOOLS
Average Line Slopes
AVERAGE LINE SLOPES

Functionality:
Use this option to display a line whose slope is the average of the existing
lines drawn on the plot.
When this option is selected, the lines will disappear and a single line of
Average Slope will be drawn. Move it to the desired position by left-clicking
and dragging the centre grab-handle (i.e. black box).
exactly through that point. This is a useful facility for the LIT Plot and
C&n Plot extended flowing points.
i
immediately.
FLOW REGIME
Functionality:
This is an optional facility which allows users to identify and mark flow
regimes on a diagnostic plot, based on a visual inspection of the data. This
would normally be done using the Log-Log Plot derivative, but the option
is available on all of the diagnostic plots. The selection of flow regimes
available varies with the reservoir flow and boundary models chosen.

TOOLS
Flow Regime 18
Once assigned, the information is carried through from plot to plot to
facilitate line fitting to the correct portions of data.
The flow regime limits are not attached to data points, but are defined in
terms of time axis values. The algorithm for transforming the marker times
from one time axis function to another (e.g. switching from a logarithmic to a
square-root superposition plot), has been significantly improved from V-2.3
onwards and it should no longer be necessary to re-adjust the marker
positions between different plots.
When this button is selected, a vertical dashed line appears on the screen and
while the cursor is positioned in the plot window, it changes to a
double-ended arrow. Drag this line to the start of an identifiable flow regime
and left-click the mouse; this line is then fixed. A second dashed line now
appears. Position this line at the end of the flow regime and left-click the
mouse.
A Define Flow Regime dialog is now generated to allow users to select the type
of flow regime. A colored bar appears at the top of the plot between the
dotted lines. The color depends on the flow regime selected (e.g. red for
wellbore storage, green for radial flow). Users will now find the same dashed
lines and colored bars in the appropriate positions on all of the other
diagnostic plots.
To Move: The limits of a flow regime can be shifted at any time by

left-clicking on either of the small arrows at each end of the colored bar
and dragging.
To Delete: If users double-click on the colored bar, an Edit Flow Regime

dialog is generated. This displays the flow regime type. If required, the
flow regime marker can be removed with the Delete button.
To Line Fit: If users left-click once on the colored bar, then select the Best
Fit Line option, a line will be fitted automatically through the data
points lying within the selected flow regime.

18 TOOLS
Confirm Results
CONFIRM RESULTS
Functionality:
This option allows the reservoir description to be built-up and continually

revised as the analysis proceeds.
When users Confirm the results derived by fitting lines or matching curves to
the data on a plot, they write these values to a permanent record in the
reservoir description (i.e. permanent until users choose to update them with a
subsequent confirm).
The confirmed parameter set can be accessed at any time via the Model option
from the Analysis view or via the Layer Parameters button on the Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog on the Data Preparation view.
CHANGE LINE TYPE

Functionality:
Use this option to change the definition of an existing line (i.e. to change the
identity of flow regime to which the associated test data belongs). This may
cause an alteration to the results belonging to that line (if any).
Select the line by pressing the Ctrl key and left-clicking on the line or
right-clicking on the line, then select the Change Line Type option.
A Define Line dialog is generated, showing the possible line types for the
current model. Choose the new line definition. A warning will be issued if
another line of this type is present.

TOOLS
Line Details and Results 18
LINE DETAILS AND RESULTS

Functionality:
This option displays a detailed list of the results associated with a line on the
plot. The line must first be selected by holding down the Ctrl key or
right-mouse button, then left-clicking with the mouse, before selecting the
Line Results button.
In addition to slope, intercept at x = 0 and line-fit details, other parameters

may be displayed depending on the plot and flow model (e.g. the y-axis value
at t = 1 hour). No interpretation results are displayed; these all appear in the
Model Results Box on the plot.
If the "free model" option is used when a line is fitted, the generated Line
Results dialog will include some reference results (e.g. k, S, etc.), computed as
if for the infinite-acting radial homogeneous flow model.
When users select this option a Line Results information dialog is generated.
This contains the following results:
Results for a line fitted through the radial flow portion of the data on a
Semi-Log Plot (i.e. line position details only).
Results for a line fitted through the same portion of the data but as a "free
model" line (i.e. line position details plus reference interpretation).

18 TOOLS
Autofit Lines
AUTOFIT LINES
General:
This facility is activated by selecting (i.e. checking) the Autofit Lines option on
the Analysis menu. A tick mark is displayed next to the menu option text
when the facility is enabled. It will automatically fit the most suitable line to
the data lying within a Flow Regime that has been defined (i.e. selected) on a
plot. For details on how to define the Flow Regime Markers, refer to the Help
topic for Flow Regime Definition. Once a Flow Regime has been defined, the
Define Line dialog is displayed after selecting any of the Line Tools on the Plot
types ribbon of the Analysis view, allowing users to choose the appropriate
Line Type for fitting to the plot.
i The selection options available within the Define Line dialog will vary
depending on the Line Types that are allowed for each specific diagnostic plot.
Example Application:
Once a Flow Regime is defined, a line will be fitted automatically through the
data within the Flow Regime/s, and Results appropriate to the selected Model
are also calculated (e.g. on the Log-Log Plot, a Zero-Slope Line will appear in
the Radial Flow Regime (with k and S calculated), a Unit Slope Line will appear
in the Wellbore Storage Regime (with Cs and Cd calculated), a Half-Slope Line
will appear in the Fracture Linear Flow Regime (with Xf calculated), a Half-Slope
Line will appear in the Reservoir Linear Flow Regime (with W calculated), and
so on).
i
Appropriate line-fits will also appear when users switch to any of the other
diagnostic plots (e.g. a Radial Flow Line on a Semi-Log Plot, a Linear Flow
Line on a Square-Root Plot, etc.), provided the relevant Flow Regime has
been identified.

TOOLS
Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog 18
Figure 175: Example of Autofit Lines on Log-Log Plot - four Flow Regimes
defined (pairs of dashed vertical lines)
If users do not want lines to be fitted automatically, switch the facility off
from the Analysis menu, by selecting the Autofit Lines menu option with a
left-click and ensuring there is no tick mark displayed next to the menu
option text.
ADD TIME MARK FACILITY/DIALOG

Functionality:
This option is only enabled if the Reservoir Model is Vertical Fracture: Finite
Conductivity and the Bilinear Flow Plot is displayed.
Use this option to mark the point at which the data leaves the straight line
(i.e. bilinear flow) trend. An estimate of the Fracture Half-Length (xf), will be
computed, and the Fracture Conductivity ( kfw) (and Dimensionless Fracture
Conductivity - Fcd) re-computed accordingly.

18 TOOLS
Select Type-Curve Match
When this button is selected, the cursor changes to a cross-hair. If users click
on a point on the plot, a Define Time Mark dialog is generated to show the type
of Time Marks available (currently the only one available is the End of Bilinear
Flow).
Select the type of Time Mark to be placed on the plot. The Define Time Mark
dialog contains a single-data selection field:
Time Mark Type: Select the type of Time Mark from the list box.
If users then select OK, the data-point nearest the cross-hair is marked with an
asterisk and it is flagged by a T marker directly above it in the Ruler Bar. An
Fcd Range dialog is also generated to allow users to select the Fcd Range.
The ( xf) and (Fcd) terms are re-computed differently for each range. Try each
one and look for an Fcd consistent with the range selected (i.e. if Fcd computes
as 9.2 for the range 1.6 to 3.0, it should be ignored and another range tried).
Only one Time Mark is allowed at a time. It can be deleted by double-clicking

on the T in the ruler bar and selecting the Delete button in the Edit Time Mark
dialog.
SELECT TYPE-CURVE MATCH

Functionality:
Use this option to display dimensionless Type-Curves on the Type-Curve Plot.

In PanSystem, Type-Curves are supplied for each Reservoir Flow Model and a
number of Boundary configurations. In addition, users can display
Type-Curves that may have been generated within earlier versions of
PanSystem, or from some external source (i.e. provided they are correctly
formatted).
When this option is selected, the button stays "depressed" and a Select
Type-Curve dialog is generated.

TOOLS
Select Type-Curve Match 18
The dialog is comprised of an information field, two selection areas, two

selection option fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
Model: This information field displays the currently selected flow model.
Type-Curve Method: Select the method to use. This field usually

contains only one option, although a few reservoir models offer
alternative methods of analysis.
For example, the Homogeneous Reservoir Model can be analyzed by the Td/Cd
Wellbore Storage Type-Curve Method (References 11 and 34), or by the McKinley
Type-Curves (Reference 38).
Type-Curve Starting Stage: Select the first stage to match on. There may
be one or two stages for the main match (depending on the reservoir
model) and a boundary stage.
Each "stage" involves bringing on a different set of curves:
Early/middle time analysis (storage, near reservoir). Users would

normally start with this stage, but it is not mandatory.
Middle/late time analysis.
The Boundary stage is for (optional) late time boundary analysis.

Users may start with this stage if desired.
Default Type-Curves: Check this box to select the default type-curve set
supplied for the current reservoir model. This set will be displayed in the
Choose Zwd for These Curves dialog on selecting OK from the dialog.
User Selected Type Curves: Check this box to select a user-supplied

family of Type-Curves for this matching stage. This option generates the
Type Curve File dialog for importing user-supplied curves. Alternative
curve sets (i.e. covering different ranges or geometries) supplied for some
flow models are listed (refer to Type-Curves Plot). Users may generate
their own Type-Curves for inclusion here, either via the Type-Curve Export
option (refer to Export to Type-Curve File option from the Analysis
ribbon), or from an external source (for details of the Type-Curve file
format, refer to Type-Curve File Structure).
If this latter box is checked and users select OK, the Type Curve File dialog
will be generated. This is a standard Windows File Open dialog.

18 TOOLS
Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog
On selecting OK, the selected or default type-curves are displayed on the

Type-Curves Plot. A typical Matching procedure is outlined below:
1. Click and grab the curves with the mouse and drag them to where a good
match is achieved.
2. If users already have a preferred value for the radial permeability (k), the
pressure match can be fixed using the Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog
button. In this case, the curves can only be moved sideways.
3. If the Match button is selected again, PanSystem attempts to identify the
nearest curve to the data, the Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog is
generated and the curve number is displayed with its associated identifier
(i.e. a number or text label). Depending on the data quality and the nature of
the response, it may or may not be the right curve.
Enter the Nearest Curve number if necessary; they are numbered from bottom
to top (drag the box to one side by grabbing the title bar if it is in the way).
Update the Curve Value by pressing the Tab key (optional).
On selecting OK, the Match Results Box will be displayed, containing the
results for that particular stage.
4. Having completed a matching stage, users can now proceed to the next stage
(i.e. select the Next Stage button), go back to the beginning (i.e. select the
Previous Stage button), or break out of the Type-Curve section and select a
different plot.
TYPE-CURVE NEXT/CONFIRM
FACILITY/DIALOG
Functionality:
This button is enabled when users have completed a Matching stage (refer to
Select Type-Curve Match), provided there is another stage to follow.
PanSystem retains the nearest curve from the previous stage, and loads the
Type-Curve set for the next stage.
Grab the curves with the mouse and drag them to where a good Match is
achieved.

TOOLS
Type-Curve Previous 18
Now select the Match button to close the match. The Verify Selected Nearest
Curve dialog will be generated to allow users to confirm or change the nearest
curve. Edit as required, select OK, and the results obtained from the stage
will be added to the list in the Results Box.
The Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog contains a single data entry/edit field,
an information field and two function buttons described as follows:
PanSystem has attempted to identify the nearest curve to the data, and the
curve number is displayed with its associated identifier (a number or text
label). Depending on the data quality and the nature of the response, it may
or may not be the correct curve. The ordering of the curves is displayed on
the dialog:
Nearest Curve: Enter the number of the correct (i.e. nearest Match)
Type-Curve in this field. The Type-Curve identifier will be updated
automatically.
Curve Value: This represents the value or text string associated with the
Type-Curve (refer to Type-Curve File for more details).
TYPE-CURVE PREVIOUS
Functionality:
This option is enabled when users have completed a Matching stage; it returns
users back to the previous stage of Matching, removing all curves and results
associated with the later stage.
If users are in the first stage of a Match (i.e. first set of curves on-screen), they
will be returned to the initial Type-Curve screen, containing just the Gauge
Pressure and Derivative data. This will enable users to start the Match process
again (e.g. with a different selection of Type-Curves).
Also Refer to:Type-Curves Plot

18 TOOLS
Type-Curve Pd Facility/Dialog
TYPE-CURVE PD FACILITY/DIALOG
Functionality:
Use this option to display/hide the Pd curve or its derivative curve on the
Type-Curves Plot. It is not possible to hide both curves simultaneously.
When this button is selected a Select Pd Curve Display dialog is generated.

Check the selection box or boxes to display, uncheck to hide.
The dialog is comprised of two check fields and two function buttons,
Show Pd Curves: Check this checkbox to have the Pd curves visible.

Show Derivative Curves: Check this checkbox to have the derivative
curves visible.
TYPE-CURVE FORCE FACILITY/DIALOG

Functionality:
This option allows users to impose a fixed value on a parameter (i.e. usually
(k), Radial Permeability) during the first stages of a Type-Curve Match. The
position of the Type-Curves will then be fixed in the vertical and horizontal
direction at the appropriate Pressure-Match position. To move the type curve,
use the spin buttons to change the values of the parameter, and click Apply or
OK.
When users select this option, an Enter Value for Force Parameter dialog is
generated, allowing users to enter a value for the parameter. The default
value will be the current confirmed value in Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) (or zero if not yet initialized).
The dialog is comprised of a single data entry field and two function buttons,

TOOLS
Filter Type Curves 18
Parameter X: This data entry field will vary with the Type-Curves being
used but will carry the name of an appropriate parameter (e.g.
Permeability, Drainage Area, etc.). Either increment the current value
up/down with the toggles, or enter a specific value and select the Apply
button. When a parameter is forced, the type-curves are repositioned in
the X- or Y-axis direction so that the match position corresponds to the
new value. For example, adjusting permeability k will reposition the
curves in the Y-axis direction.
FILTER TYPE CURVES

Functionality:
For each model, a "Default" set of curves is displayed when the Filter type
curves option is initially accessed. The Enter the Range of Type Curves to
Display dialog box enables users to control which type curve or range of type
curves to plot.
The Enter the Range of Type Curves to Display dialog box includes the following
options for controlling type curve display.
To display all types curves for the selected model, click Apply.
To display a specific range of type curves on the plot, perform the

following steps:
In the Skip selection list, select Show Only. This activates the From
and To selection lists.
Using the From and To selection lists, select the values that you want
to plot.
To display every other type curve for the selected model, in the Skip
selection list, select Skip 1. Click Apply to display the results.
To display every third type curve for the selected model, in the Skip
selection list, select Skip 2. Click Apply to display the results.

18 TOOLS
Derivative Smoothing Dialog
To toggle the Match Results box on or off, check or uncheck the Auto
Update Results checkbox.
To save the changes, click OK.
To close the dialog box and return to the Type Curve Plot, click Close.
DERIVATIVE SMOOTHING DIALOG

Functionality:
Use this option to:
Select/de-select derivative types for display on the Log-Log Plot.

Alter the degree of smoothing of a derivative.
When this option is selected, a Derivative Smoothing dialog is generated

allowing users to:
Check the derivatives they wish to display.

Edit the smoothing constants for each derivative.
The dialog is described as follows:
Derivatives: Five derivatives are available:
SSS: Check to display Semi-Steady-State derivative.

Radial: Check to display Radial derivative.
Linear: Check to display Linear derivative.
Bilinear: Check to display Bilinear derivative.
Spherical: Check to display Spherical derivative.

TOOLS
Derivative Smoothing Dialog 18
Smoothing Constants: Enter the derivative Smoothing Constant for each
derivative selected (i.e. checked). A smaller number = less smoothing
applied in these fields. As a guide:
0.0 = no smoothing
0.01 = very light smoothing
0.1 = moderate smoothing
0.5 = heavy smoothing
!
Be careful with the choice of smoothing constant for the Non-Radial
derivatives; normally the value will have to be kept small (i.e. < 0.03), to avoid a
"dog-leg" at late time (also refer to the Help topic for Smoothing (L) button).
The different derivatives are computed as listed below:
Derivative Type Formulation Has Zero Slope During...
SSS (semi-steady-state) Wellbore storage

dp/d(t)
"Primary Derivative" Semi-steady-state flow
Radial dp/d(logt)* Radial flow
Linear dp/d (t) Linear flow
Bilinear dp/d (4t) Bilinear flow
Spherical dp/d (1/t) Spherical flow
i * The actual formulation is dp/d(time function).
i dp is not necessarily dp but really d(pressure function).
In the case of multi-rate tests, the elapsed time (t), is replaced by the
appropriate equivalent time superposition function (refer to the Time
Function button).
Refer to Zero Slope Line button, for information on the behaviour of the
different derivative types.

18 TOOLS
Tidal Filter Facility/Dialog
Plot Against Elapsed Time: This is available for build-up/fall-off and

drawdown/injection tests. It allows you to plot the pressure and
derivative against log(t) instead of log (equivalent time). The derivative is
still calculated using equivalent time, but will be plotted against elapsed
time. This display has the effect of eliminating the data compression that
sometimes occurs at late time when plotting with equivalent time (e.g., a
long shut-in after a short flowing period) and makes it easier to compare
multiple test periods.
Remove End-Effect: This option terminates the smoothing when the

leading edge of the smoothing window reaches the end of the data. This
truncates the derivative and need only be switched on if the end of the
derivative appears noisy. The larger the smoothing constant (refer to the
Help topic for Smoothing button), the more the derivative will be
truncated.
TIDAL FILTER FACILITY/DIALOG

Functionality:
This facility is used to apply Tidal Gain and/or filtering to the plotted Tidal
Data.
When the Tidal Filter button is activated, an Apply Tidal Filter dialog is
generated. This dialog reports the:
Time-Lag: Enter the value for Tidal Time-Lag in this field. This is an
estimate of the Time-Lag between the two curves (i.e. the peaks on the
gauge data will be a fraction of an hour later than the tide table peaks).
Existing values are derived from the time-lag calculation performed with
the Calculate Tidal Lag facility.
Gain: Enter the value for Tidal Gain in this field. This is a first
approximation for the scaling factor needed to match the raw tide heights
or pressures against the tidal oscillations they have caused in the test
data.

TOOLS
Tidal Filter Facility/Dialog 18
These fields can both be edited. The Gain should be adjusted by trial and
error for best results.
The dialog also has four function buttons that allow users to:
Re-Plot Without Filtering: This button is optional; it re-draws the plot

with the tidal waveform shifted by the Time-Lag amount, and re-scaled by
the Gain, but without filtering the data. This enables users to compare
the two curves and decide if any further Time-Lag or Gain adjustments are
required.
i
The Time-Lag and Gain are both cumulative values. If users try the filter with
a Gain of 0.5, then once more with 0.4, the overall effect is that of the 0.4
setting, not 0.5 x 0.4 = 0.2.
Apply Filter to Data: Use this button to perform the filtering operation,
and check the results on the zoomed plot.
Recover Original Data: This button will remove all filtering effects.
Cancel: This button will close the dialog without applying the Tidal Filter.
When the zoomed region looks satisfactory, select the Tidal Filter Mode
button. The filtered pressure will be saved as a new data column with the
default name FILTERED PRESSURE. A Save Tidal Filtered Data
Sub-Dialog allows users to change this name if required.
If the Tidal Signal is still noisy, exit the Tidal Filter Mode, plot the Tidal Data on
the Data Edit Plot and select the Data Reduction and Smoothing Details
button to improve the signal quality.

18 TOOLS
Change Extrapolated Pressure Facility/Dialog
CHANGE EXTRAPOLATED PRESSURE

FACILITY/DIALOG
Functionality:
This option is used to enter a new Extrapolated Pressure (p*) in the McKinley
Type-Curve match (i.e. one of the choices available for the Radial Homogeneous
Model). This Extrapolated Pressure value influences the computation of the
flow efficiency.
When this option is selected, an Enter New Extrapolated Pressure dialog is

generated, allowing users to enter the new Pressure value. The default value
will be the current confirmed value of (p*) in Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description, usually obtained from a Horner Build-Up Plot (or zero if not yet
initialized).
The dialog is comprised of a single data entry field and two function buttons,
Extrapolated Pressure (Pext): Enter the Extrapolated Pressure in this field or

accept the default value as appropriate.

Chapter 19
MODEL SELECTION
Model Selection Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Select Analysis Model Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Input/Model Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Suggest Models Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

19 MODEL SELECTION
Model Selection Ribbon Overview
MODEL SELECTION RIBBON OVERVIEW

The Model Selection ribbon includes the following options:
Select Analysis Model Dialog: This option allows users to perform

multiple interpretations of the same data (tabbed dialog), change the
Wellbore Storage, Reservoir Flow Model and Outer Boundary Model, and
some of the basic Reservoir Parameters, without having to go back to Data
Preparation. If a model has not already been selected in Data Preparation,
the default settings Free Model and Infinite Acting will apply until they are
changed by the user.
Suggest Models Dialog: This option is designed to be used in

conjunction with the Log-Log Plot. It provides users with a short-list of
possible model types. This short-list will respect any Flow Regimes that
have been defined on the Log-Log Plot (e.g. if a Radial Flow Period followed
by Linear Flow has been marked on the plot, the Boundary Model list will
be restricted to those geometries that can include Linear Flow. A Linear
Flow Period preceding Radial Flow will restrict the list of Reservoir Flow
Models to the Vertical Fracture set).
SELECT ANALYSIS MODEL DIALOG

General:
The Select Analysis Model dialog is generated by selecting the Model option on
the Model Selection ribbon of the Analysis view. It allows users to perform
Multiple Interpretations of the same data (tabbed dialog), change the Wellbore
Storage, Reservoir Flow Model, Outer Boundary Model and some of the basic
Reservoir Parameters, without having to go back to the Data Preparation view.
i
If a Model has not already been selected in the Data Preparation view, the
default settings Radial Homogeneous and Infinite Acting will be applied until
they are changed.

MODEL SELECTION
Select Analysis Model Dialog 19
A Model (or Models) must be selected in order to perform a well test
interpretation. The choice would normally be based on preliminary
inspection of the diagnostic plots, geological evidence, inspired guesswork,
etc. Several important aspects of the Analysis are determined by the choice of
Analysis Model:
The Line Details and Results that will be obtained from Line-Fits on the
diagnostic plots.
Which Flow Regimes can be assigned to different portions of the data

(optional).
Which of the supplied (default) Type-Curves will be made available.
The Reservoir Description (including Parameters) to be used for simulated

response generation (i.e. in Simulate Quick Match and Advanced
Simulation).
For example:
For the Free Model option, no Results will be displayed on any plot that has
lines fitted to it.
For the Radial Homogeneous Reservoir Model with the Infinite Acting Boundary
Model, the Results will be computed on the Semi-Log Plot, but none will appear
when a line is fitted to the Square-Root Time Plot, since there can be no Linear
Flow with this combination. The Results will only appear on a Square-Root
Time Plot if a Vertical Fracture Flow Model or a Parallel Faults Boundary Model
has been selected, where the Linear Flow regime is then valid.
i
In terms of information requirements, only a small amount of the Wellbore
Storage, Reservoir Flow and Boundary Model information needs to be
initialized for Analysis, because the answers are as yet unknown.
Screen Display and Operational Instructions:
If a multiple interpretation is involved, the dialog will appear with a series of

tabs, each representing a separate interpretation of the same data. The dialog
is described as follows:

19 MODEL SELECTION
Select Analysis Model Dialog
Multiple Interpretations of the Same Data area: This facility allows

users to perform up to six different Analyses (i.e. sensitivities) with the
same set of data. Different Model Parameters can be applied to each
interpretation.
New: Select this button to generate an Interpretation Name sub-dialog.

After entering a name (or accepting the default name), then selecting
OK, a new tab will be added to the Select Analysis Model dialog for
users to set-up a new interpretation model.
Edit Name: Select this button to generate the Interpretation Name

sub-dialog for the currently selected tab of the Select Analysis Model
dialog. The current name of the interpretation can be changed if
required.
Delete: Select this button to delete the currently selected tab of the
Select Analysis Model dialog. A confirmation prompt is issued, to
ensure that the correct tab is being deleted.
If a dual-pressure analysis is being performed with active and observation

pressure data from a wireline formation tester, three tabs will automatically
be reserved for Flowing, Observation and Combo analysis.
i
If users change any of the Layer or Fluid Parameters in the Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog, the changes only apply to the selected
interpretation.
Wellbore Storage Model area: Select one of the Wellbore Storage Models
from the drop-down list.
Wellbore Storage Parameters: Select this button to generate a Wellbore

Storage Parameters sub-dialog. The generated sub-dialog is
appropriate to the Model initially selected from the drop-down list in
this area and the current set of "confirmed" Wellbore Storage Parameters
is displayed (i.e. the last set of Results that have been Confirmed with
the Confirm Results button). These are not normally edited in
Analysis, because they are Results rather than input.
i
For any Wellbore Storage Model, it is possible to edit certain key Model
Parameters during Analysis, although this is not normally necessary unless
Advanced Simulation is going to be used and the Parameters have not already
been initialized in the Data Preparation view.

MODEL SELECTION
Flow Model (Vertical or Horizontal Well) area: This area will be entitled
Vertical Well or Horizontal Well, depending on the Well Type selection made
in the Data Preparation view. Select one of the Well Flow Models from the
drop-down list. Different types of Flow Model will be available
depending on whether a Vertical or Horizontal Well has been selected (refer
to the Help topic for Model Parameters for details of all the available Flow
Model Types and Flow Model Parameters).
This area is disabled for the Combo tab when dual-pressure analysis with
active and observation data a wireline formation tester is being performed.
Allow Different Skins and Storage per Flow Period: This option allows users
to assign a different value of (S), (D) and/or (Cs) to each Flow Period in the
Analysis by checking the checkbox. When the Wellbore Storage Parameters
button is selected in the Wellbore Storage Model area to generate a Wellbore
Storage Parameters sub-dialog, the edit field for a single Storage Coefficient
(Cs) value, is replaced by the word <TABLE>. Similarly, when the
Input/Model Parameters button is selected in Flow Model area to generate an
Input/Model Parameters Sub-Dialog, the values in the edit fields for
Skin Factor (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), are replaced by the
word <TABLE>.
In each of these sub-dialogs, when users click on the word <TABLE>, an Edit
Skin & Storage Table sub-dialog is generated for the current Well and Layer.
The table is constructed from the same Flow Periods as the Rate Changes Table.
Each Flow Period can be assigned a Skin Factor (S), Wellbore Storage Coefficient
(Cs), and for Gas and Condensate, a Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D). If a
Fractured Well Model has been chosen, Skin Factor (S) is replaced by Fracture
Face Skin (Sf). This table can be populated either by direct entry of values or
by values derived from Analysis of each Flow Period.
Input/Model Parameters: Select this button to generate an Input/Model

Parameters Sub-Dialog. The sub-dialog contains three sections that
display Layer, Fluid and Model Parameters.
The Layer and Fluid areas contain some of the input data from Data
Preparation. They can be changed during Analysis using this option (e.g. to see
the effect of revising Layer Thickness). The Model area contains the current set
of Results from Analysis (i.e. the last set of Results confirmed with the Figure
on page 528 button), constituting the current Reservoir Description. They are
initially zero, but during the normal course of events, they can be updated if
required, by using the Figure on page 528 button, following a Line-Fitting or
Type-Curve Matching procedure.

19 MODEL SELECTION
It is not necessary to initialize the Model Parameters before Analysis. However,

they are required as input for Simulate Quick Match and Advanced Simulation
and must be initialized before a response can be generated.
This button is disabled for the Combo tab when dual-pressure analysis with
active and observation data a wireline formation tester is being performed.
Dual-Porosity Block Type: If the selected Reservoir Flow Model is

Dual-Porosity (Pseudo-Steady-State) or Dual-Porosity Transient
(Inter-Porosity Flow), the Dual-Porosity Block Type button is enabled. Select
this button to generate a Dual-Porosity Block Type sub-dialog and select the
Matrix Block Geometry. This choice affects the relationship between the
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient () and the Matrix Permeability/Block Height
Ratio (km/hb2), derived from the Semi-Log Plot, and this has a minor effect
on both Analysis and Simulation.
Boundary Model area: Select one of the Boundary Models from the drop-down
list. It is not necessary to initialize the Boundary Parameters unless Advanced
Simulation is going to be used and they have not already been initialized in
Data Preparation.
For the Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model, an additional selection is

required via the Two Compartment Analysis Type button, which is only enabled
for this Model (refer to the Help topic for Boundary Model for details of all the
available Boundary Model Types).
Two-Compartment Analysis Type: Select this button if a Two-Cell

Compartmentalized Boundary Model has been selected in the Boundary
Model area above. A Two-Compartment Analysis Type sub-dialog is
generated with two possible selection options. Normally, users
should either select:
The Drawdown Analysis option for Flowing Periods (i.e. Production or

Injection).
The Build-Up Analysis for Shut-In Periods (i.e. Build-Up/Fall-Off).

MODEL SELECTION
With reference to the sub-dialog note, it states that if the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation Correction is applied to a Build-Up/Fall-Off test, the Drawdown
Analysis option should be selected, because the Superposition Effect of the
preceding semi-steady-state flow history has been removed and made into an
equivalent Drawdown/Injection. The choices made here will determine the
type of Results obtained from the Cartesian Plot, and the nature of the
Type-Curves that are made available for a Type-Curve Analysis.
Boundary Parameters: Select this button to generate a Boundary Conditions

Sub-Dialog. The generated sub-dialog is appropriate to the Model initially
selected from the drop-down list in this area and the current set of Results
from Analysis is displayed (i.e. the last set of Results confirmed with the
Confirm Results button), constituting the current Boundary description.
They are initially zero, but during the normal course of events, they can be
updated if required, by using the Confirm Results button, following a
Line-Fitting or Type-Curve Matching procedure.
It is not necessary to initialize the Model Parameters before Analysis. However,

they are required as input for Advanced Simulation and must be initialized
before a response can be generated.
Short Flow area:
When a test period is being analyzed or matched on a specialised plot,

PanSystem uses the surface rate history in the Rate Changes Table to
compute the superposition function for line-fitting analysis and for
simulation. This is usually a step-rate profile, with a constant rate
through each test period.
Generally, when wellbore storage is small, and/or the flowing period is

long, this step-rate profile can be considered a close enough
representation of the sandface rate for superposition purposes. However,
if storage is large and/or a test period is short, the sandface rate may still
be in the afterflow phase when a new test period, such as a shut-in, is
instigated. Consequently, the constant rate profile will not give the
correct superposition function for the ensuing test, and the analysis will
be in error. This is particularly true for an Impulse test, where a flow
period of extremely short duration precedes a buildup test, but it is
generally true for any test where wellbore storage after-flow takes up a
significant part of the preceding flowing period.

19 MODEL SELECTION
The problem will be observed as:
Diagnostic plots: consistent line-fitting results and Quick Match simulation

for that test period, since both use the same (erroneous) superposition
function, but:
Diagnostic plots: results for that test period do not match results for other
test periods;
Diagnostic plots: wrong or dubious Pi computed
Test Overview Plot: results for a test period obtained from a diagnostic plot
do not give a good Quick Match.
Test Overview Plot: the Quick Match trace does not respect the pivot
point at the start of a test period selected in the ruler bar.
The last two points are due to the fact that, on the Test Overview Plot, Quick
Match always starts at the beginning of the rate history and simulates
forward. Afterflow effects are replicated faithfully by the simulation on the
way through, and are therefore built into the superposition function as the
simulation progresses.
On the other hand, when a single test period is selected on, say, the log-log
plot, Quick Match starts at the beginning of that test period, and the history is
approximated from the stepped surface rates specified in the Rate Changes
Table and any preceding afterflow is not taken into account. Where afterflow
is significant, therefore, the Test Overview and diagnostic plots require a
different set of interpretation parameters for a match.
A first step towards addressing this problem has been introduced in v3.4.
After making an initial interpretation by the usual step rate methods on the
diagnostic plots, a special Short Flow logic can be invoked to refine the
analysis ( ie: to include the missing effects of afterflow) on the Test Overview
Plot. This will be extended to include the specialised plots in a future release.
At the bottom of the Analysis Model dialog in v3.4 are two tick-boxes:
The Short Flow Detection box flags whether the test being analyzed might
be a candidate for the short flowing period treatment. This is an
automatic indicator based on the duration of wellbore storage and is
there for information only.
The Short Flow box can be checked to invoke the Short Flow logic -
regardless of the detection flag setting - for the Test Overview Plot.

MODEL SELECTION
Input/Model Parameters Sub-Dialog 19
With Short Flow switched on, Auto Match can be run on the Test Overview to
optimize the initial parameter set, including initial pressure, and a good
match should now be obtained. The model parameters and the initial
pressure may be significantly different from the original estimates.
This new parameter set will, of course, no longer match on the diagnostic
plots. However, the match to the Test Overview should be considered as the
optimum interpretation.
The Short Flow logic will also compute a better estimate of initial pressure Pi
from Quick Match when it is run on the Test Overview for a given set of input
parameters with, say, a buildup period selected in the ruler bar. (The "pivot
point" will be respected.)
i The Short Flow logic is currently only effective on the Test Overview Plot.
i The logic may be invoked, or not, regardless of the Impulse Detection flag
status.
i
The impulse test logic is useful for any test where the wellbore
storage-dominated period has not ended when the preceding rate is changed
such as for a buildup following a short flowing period or for any test exhibiting
the results characteristics described earlier.
INPUT/MODEL PARAMETERS SUB-DIALOG

General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Input/Model Parameters button

within the Flow Model (Vertical or Horizontal Well) area of the Select Analysis
Model Dialog; it can be used to edit and/or input the Layer, Fluid and Model
parameters for the current model if required.

19 MODEL SELECTION
Suggest Models Dialog
The sub-dialog contains three sections that display Layer, Fluid and Model
Parameters:
The Layer and Fluid Parameters tab contain some of the input data from the
Data Preparation view. They can be changed during Analysis using this
option (e.g. to see the effect of revising Layer Thickness). Refer to Layer
Parameters and the individual Fluid Parameters for Oil, Gas and
Condensate for more details.
i The Layer Parameters fields will always be the same but the Model and Fluid
Parameters will vary with the Model selected and the Fluid Type.
The Model Parameters tab contains the current set of Results from
Analysis (i.e. the last set of Results "confirmed" with the Confirm
Results button), constituting the current Reservoir Description. They
are initially zero, but during the normal course of events, they can be
updated if required, by using the Confirm Results button, following a
Line-Fitting or Type-Curve Matching procedure. Refer to Model
Parameters for more details of individual models.
i
It is not necessary to initialize the Model Parameters before Analysis.
However, they are required as input for Simulate Quick Match and Advanced
Simulation and must be initialized before a response can be generated.
SUGGEST MODELS DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Suggest Model option from the
Analysis menu. It can only be used in conjunction with a Log-Log Plot and
provides the user with a short-list of possible Model Types that are available
for performing an Analysis.

MODEL SELECTION
Suggest Models Dialog 19
Possible Model List Based on Marked Flow Regimes area: This short-list
will respect any Flow Regimes that may have been defined on the Log-Log
Plot (e.g. if a Radial Flow Period followed by Linear Flow has been defined,
the Boundary Model list will be restricted to those geometries that can
include Linear Flow. Similarly, a Linear Flow Period preceding Radial Flow
will restrict the list of Reservoir Flow Models to the Vertical Fracture set).
Reservoir Flow Model list: Select a suitable Flow Model from this list.
Boundary Model list: Select a suitable Boundary Model from this list.
Users can browse the available Models from the two lists and display their
Pressure Derivatives as a graphical image, using the More Details button
and/or select Models here, then proceed to Analysis by selecting the Set
Model button.
Questions area: Further selection criteria are provided in this area using
key fundamental questions in conjunction with a Yes/Not Sure versus No
button selection response. Selecting No to any of these questions will
remove any inappropriate Models from the Reservoir Flow Model and
Boundary Model lists.
Function button area:
More Details button: This button generates a More Details sub-dialog

containing graphical images of the typical Derivative Shapes for any
Reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model highlighted in the two Model
lists described above. Where several different Derivative Shapes are
possible (e.g. Models with/without Wellbore Storage), up/down scroll
arrows will appear in a scroll-bar next to the image. The OK button
will return users back to the Suggest Model dialog.
Set Model button: This button serves the same purpose as the Select
Analysis Model Dialog. Users can (optionally) make their Model
selection here by highlighting the desired choices, then clicking the
Set Model button. These will then be applied in PanSystem and users
can proceed with their Analysis of the data.
Close button: Returns users to the Analysis Plot screen.

19 MODEL SELECTION
Suggest Models Dialog

Chapter 20
SKIN ANALYSIS
Skin Analysis Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Correct for Rate Dependency (Change F) Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 559
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

20 SKIN ANALYSIS
Skin Analysis Ribbon Overview
SKIN ANALYSIS RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The Analysis Methods ribbon includes the following options:
Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis: Switch Non-Darcy Skin Analysis on/off.

The Non-Darcy Skin Analysis facility enables users to estimate the
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient for Turbulent or Non-Darcy flow by a
special analysis technique applicable to multi-rate Oil, Gas or Condensate
well tests. Three requirements must be fulfilled in order for this option to
be enabled:
The Reservoir Model must be Radial Homogeneous (i.e. Vertical Well), or

any of the Horizontal Well Models.
The plot on the screen must be a Radial Flow (Semi-Log) Plot.
More than one test period must have been selected for Analysis on the
Test Overview Plot.
If these requirements are not satisfied, a warning message will be issued.
Correct for Rate Dependency (Change F) Dialog: Used to change

and/or apply the Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F). This option is only
available if the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option has been enabled (refer to
Non-Darcy Analysis, the previous item), and is only applicable for Gas and
Condensate well tests.
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot: Used to select the Skin v Flow Rate Plot.

SKIN ANALYSIS
Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis 20
RATE-DEPENDENT SKIN ANALYSIS

General:
This facility is activated by selecting (i.e. checking) the Rate-Dependent Skin

Analysis option on Analysis methods ribbon on the Analysis view. A tick
mark is displayed next to the menu option text when the facility is enabled. It
allows users to estimate the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) for Turbulent or
Non-Darcy Flow by a special analysis technique applicable to multi-rate Oil,
Gas or Condensate well tests.
Three further requirements must be fulfilled in order for the Non-Darcy Skin
Analysis option to be applied:
The Reservoir Model must be Radial Homogeneous and the Boundary Model
Infinite Acting.
The plot on the screen must be a Semi-Log Plot.
More than one Test Period must be selected for Analysis.
i If these requirements are not satisfied, an error message will be displayed.
When the option is enabled, the Semi-Log Analysis will lead to a plot of Total
Skin versus Normalized Flow Rate (i.e. S versus Q Plot), from which the Darcy
Skin (S), Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) and corresponding Non-Darcy
Flow Coefficient (F), will be derived. In addition, the facility to correct the
Semi-Log Plot for Non-Darcy effects will become available.
Application Example:
With the option enabled, plot all the selected Flow Periods together on the
Semi-Log Plot. Fit parallel lines through the Flow Periods. Each line
provides a Total Skin Factor (S + DQj) for each of the Flow Periods (Qj). The
selected Test Periods can either be all Flowing Periods or all Shut-In Periods. The
Analysis must be performed on the Radial Flow portion of the data for a
Vertical Well, or on the Vertical Radial Flow portion for a Horizontal Well, or the
Results will be invalid.

20 SKIN ANALYSIS
Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis
If preferred, independent lines can be fitted through the Flow Periods first,
then their average slope determined with the Average Line Slopes button.
At the next stage, parallel lines can be re-fitted with this slope through each
data set.
Alternatively, include a good Build-Up with the selected Flow Periods, fit a line
through the Build-Up data to establish a reliable slope, then place this line
over one of the Flow Periods. Next, proceed with parallel lines through the
other Flow Periods. Using the Build-Up as a reference in this way is helpful if
the Flow Period data is of poor quality.
Figure 176: Four-Rate Flow After Flow Test
The image above shows a four-rate Flow-After-Flow test with parallel lines
fitted through the Flow Periods. Parallel lines must be fitted (i.e. only one
Permeability can apply to all Flow Periods), in order to be able to proceed to the
S versus Q Plot. For consistency, the Permeability should be confirmed using
the Confirm Results (Cnf) button, before leaving the Radial Flow Plot.

SKIN ANALYSIS
Correct for Rate Dependency (Change F) Dialog 20
CORRECT FOR RATE DEPENDENCY

(CHANGE F) DIALOG
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Correct for Rate Dependency option on
the Analysis methods ribbon on the Analysis view.
i
This option is only enabled if the Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis option has
been enabled from the Analysis menu and is only available for Gas and
Condensate well tests.
When a well test has a non-zero Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient and a

Non-Darcy Skin Analysis has been performed (i.e. Semi-Log Plot (Radial
Flow) and S versus Q Plot analysis), the data sets on the Semi-Log Plot (i.e.
typically several Test Periods from a Flow-After-Flow or Isochronal Test), can be
corrected for the effects of Non-Darcy (Turbulent) Flow, using a specified
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F). This is the principle of the Essis-Thomas Plot.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient: Enter the new value for (F) into this field.
This will default to the current confirmed value (i.e. normally derived
from the S versus Q Plot).
Apply Rate Dependency Correction: Check this checkbox and the data on
the Semi-Log Plot will be corrected accordingly.
If the correct (F) coefficient has been used, the data for the different Flow
Periods should overlay (compare the following image with the corresponding
image from Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis).

20 SKIN ANALYSIS
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot
Figure 177: Flow Period Overlay
SKIN VERSUS FLOW RATE PLOT

Functionality:
This plot is used to calculate the True Darcy Skin Factor (S), and True
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), from estimates of the Total Skin Factor (S +
DQ), at two or more flow rates. The Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), derived
from (D) and the Permeability (k), will also be displayed in the Results Box on
the plot.
This button is enabled for oil, gas or condensate if the following conditions
are respected:

SKIN ANALYSIS
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot 20
A vertical well, radial homogeneous reservoir flow model or any
horizontal well model has been selected (refer to Model Parameters dialog).
The Analysis menu option Rate-Dependent Skin Analysis is switched

on.
A Semi-Log analysis of at least two test periods at different flow rates has
been completed, so that at least two total skins are available to plot.
These test periods can be all flowing or all shut-in. The analysis must
have been performed on the radial flow portion of the data for a vertical
well or on the vertical radial flow portion for a horizontal well.
When users select the Skin Vs Flow Rate button, a plot of Total Skin versus
Normalised Flow Rate is generated. Fit a line through the points and select the
Skin Analysis line definition when the Define Line dialog appears.
The Skin Vs Flow Rate Plot takes on two forms, depending on how the radial
flow plot analysis was performed:
If the Reference Back to Initial Pressure option was enabled under the Time
Function button facility, the plot axes will be:
x-axis: Surface Flow Rate (Qj)

y-axis: Total Skin (S + DQj )
If the Reference Back to Initial Pressure option was disabled under the
Time Function button facility, the plot axes are defined differently,
owing to the nature of the generalized superposition function for the
Semi-Log Plot analysis:
x-axis: Normalized Flow Rate (Qnorm)

y-axis: Normalized Total Skin (S + DQnorm )
The Normalised Flowrate is defined as:
Where (Qj), is the flow rate during the flow period in question, and (Qj-1), is
the flow rate during the preceding flow period.
For a producing well, the (Qnorm) term simplifies to:

20 SKIN ANALYSIS
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot
(Qj-1), if users are analyzing the build-up periods of an isochronal test

(because Qj = 0)
(Qj), if users are analyzing the flowing periods of an isochronal test

(because Qj-1 = 0)
(Qj + Qj-1), if users are analyzing the flowing periods of a flow-after-flow

test (because Qj and Qj-1 are both non-zero).
For build-ups and isochronal flowing periods, there are no surprises. For a
flow-after-flow test, however, the data will not plot at the expected flow rate
value (Qj), but at (Qj + Qj-1). The corresponding Normalised Total Skin = (S +
D(Qj + Qj-1)), rather than (S + DQj).
These are simply two theoretically valid approaches to the same problem.
The (S) and (D) values derived from the intercept and slope of the line will be
correct by either method.
The disadvantage of the Reference Back to Initial Pressure approach for the
i
Semi-Log Plot analysis (i.e. to derive Total Skins), is that the Initial Pressure
(pi), is often not known accurately (e.g. the start of a Drill Stem Test - DST is
often messy). By not enabling the Reference Back to Initial Pressure option,
the Semi-Log Plot only requires the pressure at the start of each flow period,
not (pi). These likely to be known accurately.
Note that for condensate wells, the flow rates plotted are the in-situ
i
"wet-stream" or rich gas rates, not the separator gas rates. If the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method is being used, the rates are "equivalent" rates.
These contain a gas mass fraction correction which is required by the theory
of the method.

Chapter 21
PDA (PRESSURE DECLINE ANALYSIS)
MENU
Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . 564

PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Overview . . . . . . . . . . 565
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog 573
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot . . 584
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . 587

21 PDA (PRESSURE DECLINE ANALYSIS) MENU
Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) Ribbon Overview
PRESSURE DECLINE ANALYSIS (PDA)

RIBBON OVERVIEW
General:
The PDA facility is accessed via the PDA ribbon on the Analysis view.
i
The PDA facility is only available for a Closed System Boundary Model; this
can be selected from either the Boundary Model dialog in Data Preparation
(Analytical) or the Select Analysis Model Dialog in Analysis.
i It is not necessary to select a Test Period (or Periods) to use the ECR facility,
since PanSystem will always process the entire dataset.
For the Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curve options users must select a Test Period
i
(or Periods) for Analysis. To Group Test Periods, hold down the Shift key, then
left-click and scroll through the required Periods within the Ruler Bar above the
Plot and release the mouse button; multiple Test Periods will now appear as a
single Test Period. Ensure that the last selected Test Period is not a
Build-Up, since PDA only deals with Flowing Data.
Options and Functionality:
The following options are available on the PDA ribbon:
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog:

Generate the ECR Parameters dialog (used to enter Reservoir Model
Parameters and calculate the Equivalent Constant Rate (ECR) Pressure, the
response of the Reservoir to an Equivalent Constant Rate Drawdown.
AG-RT TC Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves: Generate

Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curves for Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus
Material Balance Time (Np/Q)

PDA (PRESSURE DECLINE ANALYSIS) MENU
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Overview 21
AG-RC Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot:
Generate a plot of Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus Normalized
Cumulative Production (Np/p).
AG-RC TC Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves: Generate

Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curves for Dimensionless Rate (1/ PWD) versus
Dimensionless Cumulative Production (QDA).
i
The AG-RC TC option is only available after users have Confirmed the
Drainage Area (A) and Permeability (k) using one of the other PDA Type-Curve
tools.
PDA (PRESSURE DECLINE ANALYSIS)

PLOT OVERVIEW
General:
The PDA facility is accessed via the Plot option from the PDA ribbon on the
Analysis view under the PDA main menu item.
The PDA facility is only available for a Closed System Boundary Model; this
i
can be selected from either the Boundary Model dialog using the Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description (Analytical Model) of the Data Preparation view
or the Select Analysis Model Dialog in the Model Selection of the Analysis
view.
i It is not necessary to select a Test Period (or Periods) to use the ECR facility,
since PanSystem will always process the entire dataset.

PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Overview
For the Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curve options users must select a Test Period
(or Periods) for Analysis. To Group Test Periods, hold down the Shift key, then
i
left-click and scroll through the required Periods within the Ruler Bar above the
Plot and release the mouse button; multiple Test Periods will now appear as a
single Test Period. To revert back to the individual Test Periods, simply hold
down the Shift key and apply a mouse-click to the Ruler Bar. Ensure that the
last selected Test Period is not a Build-Up, since PDA only deals with Flowing
Data.
It is possible to group ALL Test Periods without having to drag the cursor
i
through them, by holding down the Ctrl key and right-clicking in any Test Period
in the ruler bar. All of the periods will be grouped automatically. Note that if the
last period is a buildup it will not be included in the group. To revert back to the
individual Test Periods, hold down the Ctrl key and apply a right mouse-click to
the Ruler Bar.
Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA), involves the Analysis of long-term Flowing

Pressure and Production Data to derive estimates for:
Original Hydrocarbons in Place (i.e. OOIP or OGIP)

Reservoir Quality (k, S, Spr, etc.)
Reservoir Area (A)
Dietz Shape Factor (CA)
Fracture Effectiveness (Sf , Xf )
A Boundary Analysis can also be performed using Derivative Matching to get

the Reservoir Geometry if the data are good enough (e.g. channel identification,
etc.).
PanSystem has to deal with large quantities of data with this PDA facility (i.e.
from Permanent Downhole Gauges (PDGs), Wellhead Gauges, etc.). In particular,
masses of Flow Rate data over an extended period, that will need to be
prepared for use with the Pressure data. This Flow Rate data will probably
come from daily reports, but may also come from high sampling rate
Multi-Phase Flowmeters. Data quality may be poor, especially the Flow Rate
data, so manual data editing may be required prior to using this facility.
Special Analysis techniques are required for this type of long-term Production
Data; which can effectively be treated as Extended Drawdowns with Rate
fluctuations and Shut-Ins. The Data Preparation requirements for PDA are
described in the following sections.

Data Preparation Requirements:
The Flow Rate data are usually acquired on a separate clock and must be
synchronized with the Pressure data. Some Rate Averaging may be required to
remove unnecessary detail, but Cumulative Production must be respected. The
input data may in fact be Cumulative Production instead of Flow Rates. There
may also be missing data. Refer to Rate Data Averaging dialog and Edit Rate
Changes dialog for details of how these issues can be resolved.
Long-term Pressure Data may have come from Wellhead/Xmas Tree Pressure
Gauge measurements (with the probability of a low sampling rate
(hourly/daily) and poor quality measurements from low technology gauges).
This Gauge Data can be converted to Bottom Hole Pressure (BHP); refer to
Wellhead to BHP Conversion (THP to BHP) for details of how this conversion
is performed.
Behavioral filtering may be required to check the quality of Flow Rate data by
Simulation (i.e. using PanFlow). After performing a first-pass PDA run, fill-in
any gaps, correct inconsistencies, then repeat the PDA.
! Also refer to the Troubleshooting section below for more hints and tips for using
the PDA facility.
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Features:
Once the long-term production data has been prepared and plotted on the
PDA Plot, the following tools are available for data analysis:
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate): This tool is used to correct the measured
Pressure record (Extended Drawdown) to an Equivalent Constant Rate
Bounded System response, which is then relatively straightforward to
analyze.
Users enter known Reservoir Model Parameters (e.g. Permeability (k), Skin (S),
etc.), then Calculate the ECR Pressure, to generate scaled-down Cartesian
and Log-Log Preview Plots of ECR Pressure versus Equivalent Constant Rate
(ECR) Time. The ECR Pressure can be further analyzed as a Constant Rate
Test on a full-size Cartesian Plot or any of the other PanSystem diagnostic
plots using the conventional options for point selection and line-fitting on
the Plot Types ribbon.

Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curves (AGTC) (Reference 80): These tools use a

combination of transient Type-Curves and Decline Curves to evaluate
transient Reservoir Parameters (i.e. k, S, etc.) and Original Hydrocarbons
in Place (i.e. OOIP or OGIP) from long-term Production Data. Three tools
are available:
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves

Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves
i Type-Curves are currently available for the Radial Homogeneous and Infinite
Conductivity Fracture Models.
The only requirement for using these curves is a Closed System Boundary
Model. Although the actual Boundary Geometry is not an input, these curves
were derived for a Well positioned at the center of a square Reservoir (i.e.
L1=L2=L3=L4 in PanSystem Geometry terms), so they will only Match this type
of Reservoir Geometry exactly in terms of shape. The Drainage Area may still be
computed accurately for more eccentric Reservoir shapes and Well positions,
but at the expense of the Permeability, Skin or Xf estimates.
If users have high quality Transient data from the early stages of the
Production History, a good Match should be obtained on the left-hand side of
i
the data before the effects of Boundaries are realized. In other cases, the
Permeability should be obtained from other methods. High quality Transient
data can also be analyzed by the usual methods in PanSystem to obtain a
reasonable estimate of Permeability which can subsequently be used as a
guide in the AGTC Matching process. The Quick Match option can also be
used to define the dimensions of the Boundary Geometry if required.
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Troubleshooting Section:
1. What happens if the wrong Layer Pressure is used?
The value entered for the Layer Pressure is important.

If the wrong Layer Pressure (Pi) is used, the converted ECR Pressure will still be
correct. The Cartesian Plot will also look okay. However, the Log-Log Plot will
not be okay, because its Y-axis uses p = (PECR - Po), where Po = Player. The Dietz
Shape Factor (CA) value calculated from the Cartesian Plot will also be wrong,
because it too depends on Po = Player. No adjustment of Po is available in the
ECR facility itself, since it does not directly affect the data processing. When
analyzing the ECR data with the Cartesian, Log-Log or other diagnostic plots,
the Change T0/P0, tool from the Plot types ribbon can be used to adjust Po.
2. What happens if the wrong transient parameters (e.g. Permeability, etc.) are
used?
The transient parts of the data will not be smoothed out correctly, but the
corrected data will still be useable, unless the input parameters are well
outside a suitable range of values. The Cartesian Plot should still be capable of
giving a reasonable estimate of the Drainage Area (A).
3. What can be done about glitches in the ECR converted data?
For a bad Flow Rate: Using the small Cartesian Plot overlay, click on the
Pressure data anywhere in the glitch. The corresponding Flow Period will
be highlighted in green on the main PDA Plot.
Next, double left-click in the green-colored Flow Period on the main PDA Plot,
to generate an Enter New Rate dialog; enter a new Flow Rate value, Calculate
and wait for the new Corrected Pressure value. Adjust the Flow Rate until the
Corrected Pressure looks okay. Next, select OK to keep the new Flow Rate, or
select Cancel to return to the original Flow Rate value.
i Note that Cancel requires a few seconds while the ECR Plot for the original
Flow Rate value is restored.
For the wrong Input Parameters: The Transient Input Parameters can be
adjusted and any number of ECR calculations can be performed until a
satisfactory result is obtained. Within reason, Input Parameters that are
outside a suitable range of values will affect the transient portions of the
data (after the Rate Changes) much more than the overall Semi-Steady-State
trend (e.g. the ECR method is not overly sensitive to a wrong Permeability
or Skin value).
Also refer to Point 6 below.

4. What results can be derived from an ECR Analysis of the data?
After an ECR calculation has been performed, users end up with an Equivalent
Constant Rate Drawdown test, which can be analyzed by the conventional
methods that are available within PanSystem:
The Analyse ECR Pressure button takes users straight to a Cartesian Plot,
where a line can be fitted to get Drainage Area (A), OOIP or OGIP and
Dietz Shape Factor (CA). If users then go to Deliverability, they can calculate
and plot the IPR.
The Log-Log Plot (and other diagnostic plots) can be used to analyze
the Boundary Geometry, since the Derivative will show all the classical and
not-so-classical Boundary Responses. Use the line-fitting, Quick Match
Dialog and Automatic Matching Dialog facilities within PanSystem to
achieve this in the usual way.
5. Where is the ECR data stored?
The ECR data is stored as a Pressure and Flow Rate Channel in an internal file
called EPS_ECR. This can be seen in the Data File/Column List section of the
Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog after an ECR Analysis has been
performed. The Flow Rate is the Reference or Average Rate (Qref), defined by:
where:
t0 is the start of the test
tf is the end of the test
The Time base is the Equivalent Constant Rate Time (tECR), defined by:
(i.e. Cumulative Production Reference Rate)

6. Why is the ECR data sometimes spikey and steppy?
This can result from bad Flow Rate data or using the wrong Input Parameters,
as discussed in Point 3 above. In addition, the use of Equivalent Constant Rate
Time, is strictly valid for Semi-Steady-State behaviour. The Transient data does
not line-up correctly.
7. What is done about the Build-Ups?
The Equivalent Constant Rate Time stops dead during a Build-Up; this would
make for messy plots. For this reason, all Build-Up data is automatically
identified and eliminated from the plots used in the ECR method (i.e.
identified by zero rate in the Rate Changes table).
8. What if the Skin Factor changes over a long period of Production?
The ECR method assumes a constant Skin Factor (Radial Homogeneous Model)
or Fracture Half-Length over the entire period under study. If the Skin Factor
varies with Time (e.g. Formation Clean-Up, Gravel Pack degradation, etc.), the
converted ECR data may be erratic, or may contain an additional trend
caused by the Skin variations.
In the case of Gas Wells with Rate-Dependent Skin, the Turbulent Skin term (D)
is an input to the ECR processing and will be accounted for.
9. What about interference from other Wells?
The Change Extrapolated Pressure Facility/Dialog from the Transformation

ribbon which is used to back out interference trends can be applied to the
converted ECR data. The correction is approximate, since it will be using
ECR Time (tECR) rather than Real Time. To set the Pressure Extrapolation
correction, users need to Exit PDA Mode and select the Pressure Extrapolation
(Pext) tool from the Transformation ribbon in the Analysis view. The ECR Plot
headings will be amended automatically to show that the correction has been
applied.
AG TC (Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curve) Troubleshooting Section:
1. What happens if the wrong Layer Pressure is used?

The Y-axis of the AG Type-Curves involves P = Pwf - Po (or m(Po)), where Po is

the Initial Pressure (normally the Layer Pressure). The value entered for Po will
therefore affect the shape of the data when plotted. The Change T0/P0 tool
from the Plot types ribbon can be used on any of the AG Type-Curve Plots to
adjust Po.
2. What if the Reservoir or Drainage Area Geometry is not a Well centred in a

Square?
The original publication (Reference 80) assumed a Well in the middle of a

Circular Area. In PanSystem the AG Type-Curves have been generated for a
Well in the middle of a Square Area, which makes a very small difference in
the associated Dietz Shape Factor (CA). If the actual Reservoir or Drainage Area
Geometry is different from this:
The shape of the data will be affected, as closer Boundaries are seen before
more distant ones, until Semi-Steady-State is finally attained.
It may be possible to get a reasonable estimate of the Drainage Area (A),

depending on the extent to which the shape distortion affects a user's
assessment of the lateral Match Position. Likewise, the Permeability
estimate will depend on how users position the Type-Curves vertically.
The difference in Shape Factors will appear as an error in the Skin Factor
(S), or the Fracture Half-Length (Xf ).
3. What if the Skin Factor changes over a long period of Production?
The Type-Curves assume a constant Skin Factor (Radial Homogeneous Model) or

Fracture Half-Length. If the Skin Factor varies with Time (e.g. Formation
Clean-Up, Gravel Pack degradation, etc.), the Flowing Data will not Match a
single Type-Curve over a long Time Period and may cross several Type-Curves.
A possible approach in this case is to analyze the data in shorter sections (i.e.
to Group only some of the Test Periods).
In the case of Gas Wells, the Type-Curves do not allow for Rate-Dependent
(Turbulent) Skin. In this case, if Flow Rates vary significantly, the data will
trend off-curve. The Skin Factor (S) derived for a Radial Homogeneous Model
will represent the Total Skin (S + DQ) corresponding to the Flowing Period that
best Matches the selected Match Curve.

4. What about interference from other Wells?
No allowance is made for interference effects from other Wells. The Change
Extrapolated Pressure Facility/Dialog from the Transformation ribbon which
is used to back out interference trends has not yet been implemented in the
AG TC facility.
ECR (EQUIVALENT CONSTANT RATE)

FACILITY/ECR PARAMETERS DIALOG
Functionality:
i
It is not necessary to select a Test Period (or Periods) to use the ECR facility,
since PanSystem will always process the entire dataset. The only
requirement for using ECR is the selection of a Closed System Boundary
Model.
This facility is used for the Analysis of long-term Production Data. Selection of
this tool option on the PDA Ribbon generates a Test Overview type of plot
(Production Decline Analysis) displaying Pressure and Rate Changes from the
Rate Changes Table. An ECR Parameters dialog displays the relevant Transient
Model Parameters (minus any Boundary parameters).
The measured Pressure record is corrected to an Equivalent Constant Rate

response.
The method does not require knowledge of the Boundaries, but some
knowledge of the Reservoir Model Parameters is required (i.e. Permeability (k),
Skin (S), etc.); for example, this information might be derived from a Build-Up
Test.
Conventional Constant Rate Analysis is then possible to derive the Connected

Pore Volume, Second Cell Support, etc. The only difference is that an Equivalent
Constant Rate (ECR) Time is used instead of Real Time for the diagnostic plots.
A Boundary Analysis using Derivative Matching can also be performed to
derive the Reservoir Geometry if the data are good enough.

ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog
When the Plot option is selected from the PDA Menu, a Production Decline
Analysis plot is generated (i.e. a Test Overview type plot) with Pressure and
Step Rate Schedule.
Select the ECR button to generate an ECR Parameters dialog; this is similar
to the Quick Match input dialog and displays the transient Model
Parameters that are relevant to the currently selected Reservoir Model, but
no Boundaries, regardless of what is currently selected in PanSystem as a
Boundary Model. Enter the relevant Model Parameters (which would
normally have been derived from a Transient Analysis).
i PanSystem will issue a prompt if no Model Parameters are entered or

insufficient data has been entered.
Select the Calculate ECR Pressure button to:
Compute the ECR Pressure.
Display ECR Pressure versus ECR Time on Cartesian and Log-Log

Preview Plots. Equivalent Constant Rate Time ( tECR) is defined as:
(i.e. at any Time (t), tECR is the Cumulative Production Reference Constant Rate (
Qref)).
Where Qref is defined as:
t0 is the Start of the Test and tf is the End of the Test.

i
With the above definitions of tECR and Qref, tECR = tf at the end of the Test, so
although the Time Scale gets distorted during the Test, the overall Test
Duration is the same.
Cartesian (PDA) and Log-Log (PDA) Preview Plots are generated

automatically in Reduced windows as an overlay on the PDA Plot. These
two plots display ECR Pressure versus Equivalent Constant Rate (ECR) Time;
these plots are for reference only and have no controls. However, they
can be moved, minimized, maximized, etc. Any Smoothing on the Log-Log
Preview Plot is applied in terms of what was previously selected by users
in Analysis when a Log-Log Plot was last generated.
To facilitate the identification of "rogue" Flow Rates causing anomalies in

the ECR Pressure Curve, users can click on a "rogue" Data Point on the
Cartesian Preview Plot, whereupon the offending Flow Period is highlighted
in a green color on the main PDA Plot. If users double-click on a
green-colored Flow Period, the Enter New Rate dialog is generated. Enter a
new Flow Rate if required (i.e. smaller values than the current value will
have the strongest effect) and select the Calculate button to calculate a
new ECR Pressure and a new Cartesian Preview Plot. The green-colored
Flow Rate trace will subsequently appear at its new value. Flow Rates can
be adjusted in this trial and error manner to improve the ECR Pressure
trend.
The Current Rate in the Enter New Rate dialog is retained internally until the
i
OK button is selected, in which case the new Flow Rate value and ECR
Pressure is applied. Select Cancel to reinstate the original Flow Rate value;
this requires PanSystem to perform a further back calculation to restore the
original ECR Pressure, so it may take some time for the Production Decline
Analysis Plot to be refreshed.
i Shut-Ins are eliminated automatically from the ECR process, so users will
not be able to select and highlight these periods.

ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog
Select the Analyze ECR Pressure button to transfer into Analysis Mode and
generate a full-scale Cartesian Plot of the ECR Pressure which can be fitted
with a Closed System, Pseudo-Steady-State line (i.e. for late Flowing Period
data in Semi-Steady-State flow regime), to yield Reservoir Area (A),
Equivalent Circular Radius (R), Original Hydrocarbons in Place and Dietz
Shape Factor (Ca). Some (or all) of these Model Parameters can be Confirmed
(Cnf), where appropriate.
i This ECR data has a Constant Flow Rate ( Qref).
The Log-Log Plot and other diagnostic plots are available from the Plot
types ribbon, with full line-fit capabilities (i.e. to confirm Unit Slope
behaviour, estimate Reservoir Area (A), etc).
A Quick Match simulation can also be run with Boundaries included on

Cartesian, Log-Log and other diagnostic plots. This requires users to
define the dimensions of the Closed System; these should be consistent
with the Reservoir Area (A) that has just been calculated.
i
The ECR Data are written to a new file EPS_ECR, which is listed in the Data
File/Column List section of the Workspace. This file contains the ECR
Pressure, Reference Constant Rate ( Qref), and ECR Time ( tECR).
i
If users attempt to perform subsequent ECR runs, a duplicate Column Name
warning is issued; users are either given the option of overwriting the existing
ECR data or having the duplicate Columns renamed automatically.
Exit from PDA Mode with the Exit PDA button.

Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves 21
AGARWAL-GARDNER RATE-TIME
TYPE-CURVES
Functionality:
i Before selecting this button, users must select a Test Period (or Periods) for
Analysis. A Closed System Boundary Model must also have been selected.
To Group consecutive Periods into a single Period for Analysis, hold down the
Shift key, then left-click and scroll through the required Periods within the
Ruler Bar above the Plot and release the mouse button; multiple Test Periods
will now appear as a single Test Period.
i Ensure that the last selected Test Period is not a Build-Up.
To Ungroup a Grouped Test Period, select the Shift key, then click on the Grouped
Period within the Ruler Bar and the individual Test Periods will be displayed
once more.
After selecting a Test Period (or Grouped Test Periods), select this button to
generate a plot (i.e. Log-Log type) of either:
Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus Material Balance Time (Np/Q), for

an Oil Fluid Type.
Pseudo-Pressure-Normalized Rate (Qg/m(p)) versus Normalized Material

Balance Pseudo-Time (Npa/Qg), for a Gas Fluid Type.
These terms are fully defined below and in References 79 and 80.
For a Gas Well, users will be prompted for an initial estimate of the Reservoir
or Drainage Area (A), if this parameter does not already exist in the file. This
parameter will subsequently be refined by the Type-Curve Analysis.

The only requirement for using these curves is a Closed System Boundary
Model. Although the actual Boundary Geometry is not an input, these curves
were derived for a Well positioned at the center of a square Reservoir (i.e.
L1=L2=L3=L4 in PanSystem Geometry terms), so they will only Match this type
of Reservoir Geometry exactly in terms of shape. The Drainage Area may still be
computed accurately for more eccentric Reservoir shapes and Well positions,
but at the expense of Permeability, Skin or Xf estimates.
If users have high quality Transient data from the early stages of the
Production History, a good Match should be obtained on the left-hand side of
!
the data before the effects of Boundaries are realized. In other cases, the
Permeability should be obtained from other methods. High quality Transient
data can also be analyzed by the usual methods in PanSystem to obtain a
reasonable estimate of Permeability which can subsequently be used as a
guide in the AGTC Matching process. The Quick Match option can also be
used to define the Boundary Geometry if required.
Once a Type-Curve Plot has been generated, some of the Analysis tools are
made available and users should perform the following steps:
Oil Wells:
Select the Select Type-Curve Match tool, to generate the Type-Curves

overlay. The single blue-colored curve is the Derivative.
Click and drag the Type-Curves overlay onto the plotted data and Match
an appropriate curve pair. These Type-Curves are of the form:
1/PD versus tDA with curves for different values of External Boundary
Radius/Effective Wellbore Radius (re/rwa), where:
(with t in hours)
These can be Matched to data plotted as Q/?p versus Material Balance Time
(?tMB), where:

The use of Material Balance Time (tMB) instead of Elapsed Time (t),
generalizes the method to cover varying Production Rates in addition to
Flowing Pressures.
The Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog can be used to fix the

Permeability (k), if a reliable value is already known. The Type-Curves will
then be locked in the appropriate position in the y-direction and only
sideways movement will be possible. Users may change the F par value
at any time. To remove the F par constraint on Permeability (k), select the
Match tool again, select OK from the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog,
then select the Previous Stage (left-pointing arrow) tool and restart the
Type-Curve Matching process.
The Change T0/P0 tool can be used to adjust the Initial Pressure (P0),
which will affect the shape of the data plot.
Once the Match is acceptable, select the Select Type-Curve Match tool
again, to generate the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog. Either accept
(OK) the Type-Curve Number that is displayed or enter the appropriate
Type-Curve Number into the dialog, then OK.
i Remember that these curves are numbered from bottom to top.
A Match Results box is displayed on the plot with calculated values for a
number of Reservoir Parameters (e.g. Permeability (k), OOIP, Drainage Area
(A), etc.).
Pressure Match: The Permeability (k), is derived from the 1/PD Match
(Y-axis direction).
Time Match: The Drainage Area (A), is derived from the tDA Match (X-axis
direction), using the Permeability (k), from the Pressure Match and
subsequently,

Oil Volume (OOIP) = (STB)
Curve Match (Radial Homogeneous Reservoir Model): For the general case of
non-zero Skin, the Match Curve corresponds to re/rwa where:
i Note that rwa= re only when S = 0.
The External Boundary Radius (re), is derived from Drainage Area (A), then Skin
(S), is derived from rwa.
i This assumes that the Dietz Shape Factor (CA) = 30.88, otherwise, the Skin
(S), will be wrong.
Curve Match (Infinite Conductivity Fracture Model): In the case of a

Fractured Well, the same approach can be employed, using curves
generated for different values of Size of Drainage Area/Fracture Half-Length
(Xe/Xf ). The Xe parameter is derived from the Drainage Area (A = 4Xe for a
square 2Xe by 2Xe). The Xf parameter is then computed from the
Type-Curve Match value Xe/Xf .
i Users may select the Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog (right-pointing

arrow), to display the single Match Curve and remove the others.
!
Once the Type-Curve Match process has been completed, use the Confirm
Results tool to save the selected Model Parameter Results, then select the
Test Overview Plot tool, to return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.

Gas Wells:
In order to Match the Gas Well decline data to Type-Curves for liquid, the real
Gas Pseudo-Pressure m(p) has to be used, and allowances have to be made for
the variation in Gas Viscosity and Compressibility as the Reservoir Pressure
declines in Semi-Steady-State.
This requires the use of a Normalized Material Balance Pseudo-Time (taMB),

proposed by Palacio and Blasingame (Reference 79) instead of tMB (as defined
above for Oil Wells), where at Time (t):
gi and Cti are constants evaluated at Initial Reservoir Pressure
g() and Ct() are evaluated at the Reservoir Pressure p() prevailing at each
Time () in the integral.
Select the Select Type-Curve Match tool, to generate the Type-Curves

overlay.
Click and drag the Type-Curves overlay onto the plotted data and Match
an appropriate curve pair. These Type-Curves are of the form:
1/PD versus tDA with curves for different values of External Boundary
Radius/Effective Wellbore Radius (re/rwa), where:
(with t in hours)
1/PD has the form of a Pseudo-Pressure Normalized Rate, and Type-Curves can be
Matched to data plotted as Qg/?m(p) versus Normalized Material Balance
Pseudo-Time (taMB), as defined above.

The Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog can be used to adjust the Drainage

Area (A) and permeability (k) parameters. When A is forced, the data are
transformed in the time domain (X-axis) direction according to the value of
Pore Volume corresponding to the Drainage Area, and the type-curves are
repositioned so that the match position corresponds to the new area. (The
Pore Volume affects the Rate of Pressure Depletion, which in turn affects Gas
Viscosity and Compressibility, both of which appear in taMB. When k is forced,
the type-curves are repositioned in the Y-axis direction so that the match
position corresponds to the new permeability. Either increment the current
value up/down with the toggles, or enter a specific value and select the Apply
button.
The T0 tool can be used to adjust the Initial Pressure (P0), which will affect the
shape of the data plot.
Once the Match is acceptable, select the Select Type-Curve Match tool
again, to generate the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog. Either accept (OK)
the Type-Curve Number that is displayed or enter the appropriate Type-Curve
Number into the dialog, then OK.
A Match Results box is displayed on the plot with calculated values for a
number of Reservoir Parameters (e.g. Permeability (k), OGIP, Drainage Area (A),
etc.).
Pressure Match: The Permeability (k), is derived from the 1/PD Match (Y-axis
direction).
Time Match: The Drainage Area (A), is derived from the tDA Match (X-axis
direction), using the Permeability (k), from the Pressure Match and
subsequently,
Gas Volume (OGIP) = (bscf)
Curve Match (Radial Homogeneous Reservoir Model): For the general case of
non-zero Skin, the Match Curve corresponds to re/rwa where:

i Note that rwa= re only when S = 0.
The External Boundary Radius (re), is derived from Drainage Area (A), then Skin
(S), is derived from rwa.
i This assumes that the Dietz Shape Factor (CA) = 30.88, otherwise, the Skin
(S), will be wrong.
Curve Match (Infinite Conductivity Fracture Model): In the case of a Fractured

Well, the same approach can be employed, using curves generated for
different values of Size of Drainage Area/Fracture Half-Length (Xe/Xf). The Xe
parameter is derived from the Drainage Area (A = 4Xe2 for a square 2Xe by
2Xe). The Xf parameter is then computed from the Type-Curve Match value
Xe/Xf .
i Users may select the Next Stage (right-pointing arrow) tool, to display the
single Match Curve and remove the others.
!
tool to save the selected Model Parameter Results, then select the Test
Overview tool, to return to the Pressure Decline Analysis Plot.

Quick Match:
After completing a Type-Curve Match, users may run a Quick Match simulation
on the Rate-Time Type-Curve Plot.
i
Users will have to enter actual Boundary Dimensions. Estimates should be
consistent with the Area (A) that has just been derived during the Type-Curve
Match.
Since the Quick Match trace is essentially a Type-Curve, users may find that
this option offers a more satisfactory method for completing their Analysis, as
it removes the limitations inherent in the supplied Type-Curve set.
AGARWAL-GARDNER RATE-CUMULATIVE
PRESSURE DECLINE PLOT
Functionality:
i Before selecting this option, users must select a Test Period (or Periods) for
Analysis. A Closed System Boundary Model must also have been selected.
To Ungroup a Grouped Test Period, select the Shift key, then click on the
Grouped Period within the Ruler Bar and the individual Test Periods will be
displayed once more.

Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot 21
After selecting a Test Period (or Grouped Test Periods), select this button to
generate a plot (i.e. Cartesian type) of either:
Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus Normalized Cumulative Production

(Np/p), for an Oil Fluid Type.
Pseudo-Pressure-Normalized Rate (Qg/m(p)) versus Normalized Cumulative

Production (Npa/m(p)), for a Gas Fluid Type.
These terms are fully defined below and in Reference 80.
For a Gas Well, users will be prompted for an initial estimate of the Reservoir
or Drainage Area (A), if this parameter does not already exist in the file. This
parameter will subsequently be refined by the Type-Curve Analysis.
Once a plot has been generated, some of the PDA options are made available
and users should perform the following steps:
Oil Wells:
Select two points on the Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot, then use the
Best Fit Line option to perform a line-fit on the Cartesian Plot of Q/p versus
Np/p. Any of the other line-fitting tools from the ribbon may be used.
! It may be necessary to change the Axis Scaling or to Zoom-In on the data to

perform this line fit more effectively.
Select the Closed System PSS Flow option on the Define Line dialog and OK.
The Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot should be a straight line with
slope:
and Y-axis intercept = Productivity Index (J).

The Model Results displayed on the plot are Productivity Index (J), Drainage
Area (A) and OOIP (from the Pore Volume).
i The Permeability (k) cannot be derived from this plot, only the Productivity
Index (J).
Once the Line Fitting process has been completed, use the Confirm Results
tool to save the selected Model Parameter Results, then select the Test
Overview Plot option, to return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.
Gas Wells:
Select two points on the Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot, then use the
Best Fit Line option to perform a line-fit on the Cartesian Plot of
Qg/m(p) versus Npa/m(p), where the Pseudo-Cumulative Production (Npa)
term is defined as:
( MMscf)
Select the Closed System PSS Flow option on the Define Line dialog and OK.
The Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot should be a straight line with

slope:
and Y-axis intercept = Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index ( Jg).
The term Cta is a Pseudo-Total Compressibility, given as:

Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves 21
The Model Results displayed on the plot are Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity
Index ( Jg), Drainage Area (A) and OGIP (from the Pore Volume).
Once the Line Fitting process has been completed, use the Confirm Results
i
tool to save the selected Model Parameter Results (the Y-axis values of the
data points will be recalculated to account for the new Area (i.e. Pore Volume),
so users may notice a small shift in the positions of the points after
Confirming), then select the Test Overview Plot option, to return to the
Production Decline Analysis Plot.
AGARWAL-GARDNER RATE-CUMULATIVE
TYPE-CURVES
Functionality:
i This tool is only available after users have Confirmed the Drainage Area (A)
and Permeability (k) using one of the other PDA Type-Curve options.
i Before selecting this option, users must also select a Test Period (or Grouped
Test Periods) for Analysis.
To Ungroup a Grouped Test Period, select the Shift key, then click on the
Grouped Period within the Ruler Bar and the individual Test Periods will be
displayed once more.

After selecting a Test Period (or Grouped Test Periods), select this option to
generate a plot (i.e. Log-Log type) of either:
Oil Fluid Type: Dimensionless (Pressure-Normalized) Rate (1/PD) versus

Dimensionless Cumulative Production ( QDA), defined as:
where:
Pore Volume ( PV) = hA ft3
Gas Fluid Type: Dimensionless Rate (1/PD) versus Dimensionless Cumulative

Production ( QDA), defined as:
where:
Pore Volume ( PV) = hA ft3
If an estimate of Permeability (k) does not yet exist in the Model Parameters,
users will be prompted for a value upon entering the plot (this is required for the
!
Y-axis). If users enter a bad value at this point, the Y-axis values of the data
will be wrong, and this will lead to a poor estimate of Skin Factor (S), or
Fracture Half-Length (Xf). However, the data should still lead towards QDA =
0.159 on the X-axis, so a good estimate of Area (A) and Hydrocarbon Volume
will be possible.
Once a Dimensionless Type-Curve Plot has been generated, some of the PDA
ribbon options are made available and users should perform the following
steps:

Oil Wells:
Since this Type-Curve Plot has the data plotted in dimensionless form, it
will be overlaid in the same place as the Type-Curves, hence no Type-Curve
movement is allowed. Simply accept or enter the appropriate Type-Curve
Number into the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog, then OK.
The data should fit in with the trend lines for different values of External
Boundary Radius/Wellbore Radius (re/ rw), or more correctly, (re/ rwa), where:
These lines all converge to QDA = 1/2 = 0.159. If the data points do not
conform to a trend-line, the Drainage Area (A) should be adjusted (refer to
the Force Parameter (Fpar) tool for details).
From the Curve Match, the Skin (S) term can be extracted from the Wellbore
Radius (rwa) term, since the Drainage Area (A) and consequently, the
External Boundary Radius (re) are already known. The Permeability (k), can
now be calculated from the Productivity Index (J) and Skin (S) terms (i.e.
assuming that CA = 30.88), where:
(STB/day)

In the case of a Fractured Well, each Type-Curve corresponds to a different

value of Size of Drainage Area/Fracture Half-Length (Xe/Xf). The Xe
parameter is derived from the Drainage Area (A = 4Xe2 for a square 2Xe
by 2Xe). The Xf parameter is then computed from the Type-Curve Match
value Xe/Xf . By converting Xf to an equivalent Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr),
the Permeability (k) can be obtained from the Productivity Index (J).
i The Skin (S) term is replaced by Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) in the above
equation.
Fine tuning of the Drainage Area (A), can be performed with the Type-Curve
Force Facility/Dialog. The data are transformed in the X-axis direction
according to the value of Pore Volume ( PV) corresponding to the current
Drainage Area (A). The measured data should conform to a trend line
converging on QDA = 0.159 if the Drainage Area (A) is correct.
!
Test Overview Plot option, to return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.
Gas Wells:
Since this Type-Curve Plot has the data plotted in dimensionless form, it
will be overlaid in the same place as the Type-Curves, hence no Type-Curve
movement is allowed. Simply accept or enter the appropriate Type-Curve
Number into the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog, then OK.
The data should fit in with the trend lines for different values of External
Boundary Radius/Wellbore Radius (re/ rw), or more correctly, (re/ rwa), where:

These lines all converge to QDA = 1/2 = 0.159. If the data points do not
conform to a trend-line, the Drainage Area (A) should be adjusted (refer to
the Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog for details).
From the Curve Match, the Skin (S) term can be extracted from the Wellbore
Radius (rwa) term, since the Drainage Area (A) and consequently, the
External Boundary Radius (re) are already known. The Permeability (k), can
now be calculated from the Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index (J) and
Skin (S) terms (i.e. assuming that CA = 30.88), where:
( MMscf/day/psi2/cP(*1E-6))
In the case of a Fractured Well, each Type-Curve corresponds to a different

value of Size of Drainage Area/Fracture Half-Length (Xe/Xf). The Xe
parameter is derived from the Drainage Area (A = 4Xe2 for a square 2Xe
by 2Xe). The Xf parameter is then computed from the Type-Curve Match
value Xe/Xf . By converting Xf to an equivalent Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr),
the Permeability (k) can be obtained from the Productivity Index (J).The
Skin (S) term is replaced by Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) in the above equation.
Fine tuning of the Drainage Area (A), can be performed with the
Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog. The data are transformed in the
X-axis direction according to the value of Pore Volume ( PV) corresponding
to the current Drainage Area (A). The measured data should conform to a
trend line converging on QDA = 0.159 if the Drainage Area (A) is correct.
!
Test Overview Plot option, to return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.

Functionality:
If users are currently in PDA Mode with a Production Decline Analysis Plot and
the PDA ribbon displayed, this option can be used to Exit from PDA Mode
directly and return to the Analysis Mode Test Overview Plot.

Chapter 22
SHALE OIL/GAS
Shale Oil/Gas Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Shale Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Square Root Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Material Balance 1 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Material Balance 2 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Shale Type-Curve Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
History Match Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
Shale Oil/Gas Ribbon Overview
SHALE OIL/GAS RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The following options are available on the Shale oil/gas ribbon:

Shale Log-Log Plot: Select the Log-Log Plot.
Square Root Plot: Select the Square Root Plot.
Material Balance 1 Plot: Select the Material Balance 1 Plot.
Material Balance 2 Plot: Select the Material Balance 2 Plot.
History Match Plot: Select the Type-Curve Plot.
History Match Plot: Select the History Match Plot.
These options can be performed in any order except for the History Match
option, which must be performed last.
TEST OVERVIEW PLOT

Functionality:
capabilities.

SHALE OIL/GAS
Workflow
PDA
Shale oil/gas
Mini-frac



must select the Test Period they wish to analyze by left-clicking (once) in
the Ruler Bar above the Test Overview Plot. Left-click it again to de-select.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
Test Overview Plot

i


selection.


SHALE OIL/GAS
Rate Changes Table.
Period.

measurement).
a Fall-Off Test.


plot.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
Test Overview Plot

Overview.

SHALE OIL/GAS
Shale Log-Log Plot 22
SHALE LOG-LOG PLOT

Select the Log-Log plot. If this is a new file and a gas reservoir, you will be
prompted to enter a drainage area. Enter an approximate value:
This is simply to allow PanSystem to compute the gas Normalized Material

Balance Pseudo-time, which forms the x-axis of some of the Shale plots. Even
if the initial estimate is wildly wrong, it can be refined during Analysis.
The Shale log-log plot opens with rate-normalized pressure (DP/Q or Dm(p)/Q )
and two derivatives Square-root (fracture linear flow) and SSS Square-root
(quasi-semi-steady state flow) plotted versus (Normalized) Material Balance
Pseudo-time.
The square-root derivative will have a zero-slope if fracture linear flow is

observed. The SSS derivative will have a negative -slope during linear
flow, which will become a zero slope during SSS flow.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
Shale Log-Log Plot
Figure 178: Log-Log plot with fracture linear and quasi-SSS lines fitted to
the derivatives
Select a Zero-Slope line for Closed system SSS flow and place it on the SSS
derivative. The area (A) and OGIP or OOIP will appear as results.
Confirm the Area:
For gas or condensate fluid type, the x-axis time function and the SSS
derivative will be recomputed using the new area.
Refit the line if necessary and Confirm again. Continue until

convergence.
Select a Zero-Slope line for Fracture linear flow and place it on the
Square-root derivative. Click the Flow Regime button and mark the
beginning and end of the Fracture linear flow regime:
Be careful to mark the end of linear flow accurately the time at

which this occurs is used to compute permeability k.

SHALE OIL/GAS
Square Root Plot 22
The computation of k requires the (average) fracture spacing
(Wfrac). You will be prompted for this if it has not been initialized
already.
The intercept of the linear flow line gives Xfk, from which Xf can be
extracted once k is known.
Optionally, fit the SSS flow regime markers.
Confirm all results
SQUARE ROOT PLOT

General:
This is an optional plot of rate-normalized pressure (P/Q or m(p)/Q) versus

square-root of (real) time.
The fracture linear flow regime will be transferred from the log-log plot and a
linear flow line auto-fitted. The log-log plot is preferred for flow regime
identification.
Alternatively, fit a line to the fracture linear flow data using the Best fit line or
Floating line options, and mark the flow regime:
Permeability k is computed from the time-to-end of linear flow.
The computation of k requires the (average) fracture spacing (Wfrac). You will
be prompted for this if it has not been initialized already.
The slope of the linear flow line gives Xfk, from which Xf can be extracted
once k is known.
You have the option to Confirm or ignore the results.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
Material Balance 1 Plot
Figure 179: Square-root plot with fracture linear flow line
MATERIAL BALANCE 1 PLOT

General:
The first Material Balance plot opens with rate-normalized pressure (P/Q or
m(p)/Q ) plotted versus (Normalized) Material Balance Pseudo-time.
If the SSS flow regime was fitted on the Log-Log plot, it will be
transferred here and a line auto-fitted. Adjust the line if you wish.
Alternatively, fit a line to the late SSS data using the Best fit line or
Floating line options.
The slope of the SSS line is used to compute the area (A) from which the
reserves volume (OGIP or OOIP) is derived.

SHALE OIL/GAS
Material Balance 2 Plot 22
If you Confirm the Area:
For gas or condensate fluid type, the x-axis time function will be
recomputed using the new area.

convergence.
Figure 180: Material Balance-1 Plot with SSS line
MATERIAL BALANCE 2 PLOT

General:
The second Material Balance plot opens with pressure-normalized rate (Q/P
or Q/m(p)) plotted versus Normalized cumulative production Np/P or
Np/m(p). No flow regime transfer to this plot is possible.
Fit a line to the late SSS data using the Best fit line or Floating line options.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
Material Balance 2 Plot
The intercept of the SSS line on the x-axis is used to compute the area (A)
from which the reserves volume (OGIP or OOIP) is derived.
The intercept of the SSS line on the y-axis is used to compute the
Productivity Index Jo or Jg.

convergence.

SHALE OIL/GAS
Shale Type-Curve Plot 22
SHALE TYPE-CURVE PLOT

General:
The Type-Curve plot opens with pressure-normalized rate (Q/P or Q/m(p))

plotted versus (Normalized) Material Balance Pseudo-time.
Select the Type curve match tool button and load the Spanning fracture
type-curves.
There are five curves with values of [Wfrac/Xf ] of 5, 2, 1, 0.5 and 0.3 from
bottom to top. (Wfrac = avg fracture spacing, Xf = avg fracture half-length.)
Move the type-curves using the mouse or the arrow keys. (If you press
the Ctrl key when using the arrow keys you can get smaller steps.)
To aid with the matching process, in the results pane you will see [W/Xf ]c
and [W/Xf ]m. The best match corresponds to these two values being as
close as possible.
Figure 182: Type-Curve Match

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot
The match results are:
Area (and thence OGIP or OOIP) from the x-axis match

Permeability from the y-axis match
Fracture half-length Xf from the value of the match curve.
Refit the line if necessary and Confirm again. Continue until convergence.
HISTORY MATCH PLOT

General:
The Production Forecasting dialog is generated when you select the History
Match option from the Shale oil/gas ribbon on the Analysis view. The
Forecasting Plot dialog is displayed in conjunction with this dialog.
This facility is used to set-up and provide forecasts of well production rate
versus time once the deliverability characteristics of the well have been
determined. In infinite or partially-bounded reservoirs or drainage areas, the
forecast shows the effect of changing reservoir flow regimes and the response
to boundaries. For closed systems, pressure depletion and changing gas
compressibility are modeled for long-term forecasting, through transient,
transitional and semi-steady or steady-state flow regimes. An option is also
provided to perform the forecast with constant fluid compressibility if
required. The forecasting facility is available for oil, gas, and condensate
systems.
The History Match option will generate a production rate curve for a specified
constant bottom-hole flowing pressure over a specified time period. It is based on
the Production Forecasting facility that has been a feature of PanSystem for
some time. It can be used to validate your shale analysis by comparing with
measured production rates, and to forecast future production based on the
current model.

SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot 22
Figure 183: Production Forecasting
In the dialog that opens, enter the following:
the start and end times for the simulation (select the time units at top
right)
the number of steps (500 1000 is usually adequate)
the bottom hole flowing pressure
Optionally:
the Contract Rate (imposes an upper limit to the production rate

useful to replicate the early clean-up period where production is
impeded). If left at zero, no limit will be applied.
the Minimum Production Rate (the simulation will stop)

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot
Click OK to proceed.
The dialog is comprised of two data entry/edit sections, two selection areas
and four function buttons, described as follows:
Time/Step section: The first section of this dialog is used to define the
time period of the forecast, calculation steps involved and the
time-stepping regime that will be employed.
Start/End: For Logarithmic Stepping, enter a Start time for the first time
step. Since flow rates are high initially, this should be a small value
(e.g. in the order of a few hours), to avoid material balance errors in
closed systems. Also enter the desired End time for the forecast.
No. of Steps: The calculations will be more accurate the more time
steps that are used. PanSystem defaults to a value of 50 steps. For
closed boundary configurations, greater precision will be obtained in
the material balance calculation if a larger number of steps is used.
! Between 50-100 steps are recommended for trial runs, then 200-500 steps or
more for final runs (up to a maximum of 1050 steps).
Time Units: Select from the options of hours, days, months and years.
This will automatically adjust the entered End figure to the
corresponding quantity of the respective Time Unit.
i A month is defined as 30.437 days (i.e. 365.25 days/12 months).
Linear/Logarithmic Stepping: There are two time-stepping regimes to

choose from:
Linear Stepping uses equally spaced time-steps.
Logarithmic Stepping uses logarithmically spaced steps starting

from a specified Start time (i.e. the time of the first step). This is
the default setting and is usually better, owing to the high and
rapidly changing production rates at the beginning.

SHALE OIL/GAS
Rate/Pressure/VFP section: This section deals with the production rates
and pressures.
Contract Rate: This represents the contracted maximum production

rate. If the rate is left at zero, then the forecasting calculations ignore
this field.
Minimum Production Rate: This is the rate at which the production

should terminate during the forecast.
! Simulate a constant rate production by setting the Contract Rate and the
Minimum Rate to the same value.
Two options are available for entering flowing pressure:
Constant Bottom Hole Pressure: If this option is selected, enter a

Constant Bottom Hole Pressure in the data entry field.
Constant Top Hole Pressure: This option is used for Tubing-Controlled

production. This option requires the import of a VFP Format Flowing
Pressure File, and the selection of a Top Hole Pressure value from this
source. When this option is checked, the three following dialog items
are enabled:
VFP File Import button: To select a VFP Table, first select the
Constant THP option, then select this button. This will generate a
standard Windows File Open dialog where a valid (*.VFP) file can
be selected. After the table has been imported, select a Top Hole
Pressure value to base the forecast on (i.e. if more than one value
is present in the file).

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot
WellFlo creates VFP Tables in its VFP File for Eclipse sub-menu option via the
Analysis - Export to Simulator menu options. Forecasting will respect single
well tables created in this way, or Eclipse VFP Tables generated by other
products, provided that the selected sensitivities for creating the VFP Table are
restricted to the values for 1) Flow Rates, 2) Surface Pressures (Tubing-Head
or Separator).
i
The table must be generated using the single value of Water-Cut and GOR
specified in PanSystem Fluid Parameters. Since PanSystem only operates
with a single fixed WCT and GOR, if multiple Water-Cut and/or GOR values
are used, the VFP Table will be read incorrectly. For example, if users specify
ten THP values in the VFP File, PanSystem will read the first ten lines of BHP
values and ignore the rest. If there is only one Water-Cut and one GOR value,
these ten lines will correspond to the ten THP values. However, if users specify
several Water-Cut and GOR values, the first ten lines will all correspond to the
first THP with the various combinations of Water-Cut and GOR. An example is
given below:
--PRODUCTION WELL VFP TABLE 1
VFPPROD
1 5000.0 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' 'THP' ' ' 'FIELD' 'BHP' /
i 'LIQ' must be entered for Oil Wells, 'OIL' is not accepted. Do not enter
comment or blank lines before the first line or after the VFPPROD line.
Current File: The first time a VFP Table is imported, PanSystem will try
to determine the nature of the Units (i.e. Metric Units or Oilfield Units).
The information is then displayed in this information field and
PanSystem assumes that this will be the default VFP Unit System for
subsequent PanSystem sessions.

SHALE OIL/GAS
You may change the default setting in the Pansys31.ini folder by opening the
Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit commands in Windows),
i
then selecting
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Configuration and
editing the line, vfp-units = 0 for Oilfield Units or vfp-units = 1 for Metric Units,
(for more details on editing the Pansys31.ini folder, refer to the Windows
Registry).
i
The vfp-units entry will only appear in the Windows Registry after a VFP Table
has been imported for the first time. Consequently, this particular Registry
entry can only be used to set the default VFP Unit System for subsequent
VFP Table imports into PanSystem.
Top Hole Pressure Units: Enter a Top Hole Pressure value to base the
forecast on. The current units system setting is displayed next to the
data entry field (e.g. psia).

option to re-load the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
warning.
Windows 95, 98, 2000, NT and XP all have a simple Registry back-up
mechanism that is quite reliable, but users should never rely on this alone.
Always remember to make a back-up of the Registry. The back-up and restore
methods will vary depending on the version of Windows that is being used -
consult the Registry Editor Help menu for version-specific details of these
methods.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot
The dedicated website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from
the following URLs, http:// registry.winguides.com/ or
http://www.regedit.com/.
Analysis/Data selection area: This section is used to specify the source of

the deliverability data. There are three options for gas and condensate
systems, and one for oil, as described below:
i
The Full Analysis and LIT options use pseudo-pressure and require a valid p
versus m(p) table and p//Ct table to be present in the relevant Fluid
Parameters sub-dialog of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog..
Full Analysis: This option uses the theoretical radial inflow equation
to compute the inflow characteristics of the well and drainage area.
All phases of transient flow, through semi-infinite acting (i.e. if
boundaries are present), to semi-steady or steady- state (i.e. where a
closed system is involved), are modeled analytically.
For gas and condensate wells this requires valid p versus m(p) and
p//Ct tables (refer to the relevant Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs from
the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog for Oil, Gas and
Condensate). The analytical form of the deliverability equation is used,
and this requires the entry of a valid set of model parameters. These
parameters will depend on the selected Boundary Model. This is the
only option available for oil wells.
! Please ensure that the mandatory parameters in the relevant Fluid

Parameters dialog (especially Ct), are consistent with these tables.
On selecting OK from this dialog, if users have selected any Boundary

Model except Infinitely Acting they will be presented with options
relating to the selected boundary model. All options allow no-flow
boundaries and some geometries can include constant pressure
boundaries (i.e. where specifically stated, or where a Boundary
Parameters button appears as part of the dialog.

SHALE OIL/GAS
On selecting OK from the boundary dialog/s, or if the well is Infinitely
Acting, a Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for
Permeability (K), Darcy Skin (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D),
will default to the currently confirmed values. However, these values
can be edited if required. The Start and End times are provided for
information only and cannot be edited on this sub-dialog.
i Note, as in Quick Match, the skin terms (S) and (D), relate to the true or
mechanical skin factors at the wellbore.
Selecting the Calculate button will generate the forecast which can be
previewed behind the Forecasting sub-dialog. When completed, users
can either select the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the
Cancel button to ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model
parameters and select Calculate again.
Four plots are available for the forecast.
LIT data Analysis: This option (for gas and condensate only), uses
the (B) and (F) coefficients derived from an LIT Analysis. This
again requires valid p versus m(p) and p//Ct tables.

LIT forecasting is applicable to wells which have attained

semi-steady, or steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following
deliverability equation:
m(p) = BQ + FQ2
Where (B) is the Darcy Flow Coefficient and (F) is the Non-Darcy or
Turbulent Flow Coefficient.
Because the (B) and (F) coefficients relate to semi-steady-state

flow, transient behavior is not modeled in the production
forecast. Flow is assumed to be semi-steady-state from the
beginning.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot
On selecting OK from this Production Forecasting dialog, an LIT

Analysis Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Layer
Pressure (P_lay), Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), Non-Darcy Flow
Coefficient (F), are all defaulted to values which exist if a previous
LIT Analysis has been performed. These values can be edited if
required. The Start and End times are displayed for information
only and cannot be edited on this sub-dialog.
Selecting the Calculate button will generate the forecast which can
be previewed behind this dialog. When completed, users can
either select the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the
parameters and select Calculate again. Forecasting then displays
the same plot and data export options as for the Full Analysis
option described above.
C&n data Analysis: This option (for gas and condensate only),
uses the coefficients of the simplified C&n method, and no
transient behavior is modeled.
Although the C&n method does not require an m(p) table it does
require a p//Ct table to model the change in compressibility with
pressure.

C&n forecasting is applicable to wells which have attained

semi-steady, or steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following
deliverability equation:
Q = C(p2)n
Where C and n are the coefficient and exponent derived from a

C&n Analysis

SHALE OIL/GAS
On selecting OK from this Production Forecasting dialog, a C&n
Analysis Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Layer
Pressure (P_lay), C-coefficient (C), n-exponent (n), are all defaulted
to values which exist if a previous C&n Analysis has been
performed. These values can be edited if required. The Start and
End times are provided for information only and cannot be
edited on this sub-dialog.
Selecting the Calculate button will generate the forecast which can
be previewed behind this dialog. When completed, users can
either select the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the
parameters and select Calculate again. Forecasting then displays
the same plot and data export options as for the Full Analysis
option described above.
Field Wide Trend selection area: This facility is used to apply an

adjustment to the material balance of the field. Select this button
to generate the Fieldwide Trend sub-dialog.
The sub-dialog has single data entry field. Enter a positive value
to superpose a declining field-wide pressure trend (depletion), or
a negative value for an increasing trend (pressure maintenance).
Select OK to apply the adjustment and return to the main

Production Forecasting dialog.
i This correction is only activated for the Closed System Boundary Models.
The History Match option will generate a production rate curve for
a specified constant bottom-hole flowing pressure over a specified
time period. It is based on the Production Forecasting facility that
has been a feature of PanSystem for some time. It can be used to
validate your shale analysis by comparing with measured
production rates, and to forecast future production based on the
current model.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot
Figure 184: History Match Plot with match and forecast
The parameter input dialog for the simulation will appear. The Multiple
Hydraulic Fracture model is described in a separate section. k and Xf are the
most recently confirmed values from analysis.
Since a large part of the data is likely to be in quasi-SSS, the drainage area
dimensions will probably be the key parameters here. It will be necessary to
enter or adjust the dimensions Wfar and Lfar so as to match the area (A) found
from analysis this is not yet done automatically. This should result in a
good match to the measured rate data.
Referring to the description of the MHF model, the general expression for the
area is:
A = 2Lfar(2Wfar+(Nfrac-1)Wfrac)
For the spanning fracture, which is considered to be the case for shale
reservoirs, the area represents the stimulated reservoir volume, with Lfar Xf
and Wfar Wfrac/2, so that:

SHALE OIL/GAS
A = 2XfNfracWfrac = 4LfarNfracWfar
One approach would be to set Lfar equal, or slightly larger than, Xf, and to
adjust Wfar to give the correct area as a starting point. (This assumes, of
course, that the true Nfrac and Wfrac are known)
The parameter L appearing in the input dialog should not be there and can be
ignored.

22 SHALE OIL/GAS
History Match Plot

Chapter 23
MINI-FRAC
Mini-Frac Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Pre-Closure Plot Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
G-Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Square Root Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Mini_Frac Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Post-Closure Plot Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Semi-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Linear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
KGD/PKN Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Mini-Frac Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Auto Fit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Change T0/PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Confirm Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Derivative Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Fit Line of Known Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Fit Parallel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Floating Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Flow Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Half Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Line Details and Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Negative Half Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Negative Unit Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Pick Closure Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Pick Fracture Init Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Zero Slope Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

23 MINI-FRAC
Mini-Frac Ribbon Overview
MINI-FRAC RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The following options are available on the Mini-frac ribbon:
G-Function: Select the Mini-Frac G-Function Plot.
Square Root Plot: Select the Mini-Frac Square Root Plot.
Mini_Frac Log-Log Plot: Select the Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot.
Derivative: Select the Mini-Frac Derivation Plot.
Semi-Log Plot: Select the Mini-Frac Semi-Log Plot.
Linear Flow Plot: Select the Mini-Frac Linear Flow Plot.
KGD/PKN Calculations: Display the Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations

dialog.
Pick Fracture Init Time: Select fracture initiation point.
Pick Closure Time: Select a pressure point.
Change T0/PO: Change T0/PO.
Zero Slope Line: Fit Zero Slope line.
Negative Unit Slope Line: Fit Negative Unit Slope line.
Half Slope Line: Fit Half Slope line.
Line Details and Results: Display Line Results for selected line.
Best Fit Line: Fit line through Marked Points.
Confirm Results: Confirm Results.

MINI-FRAC
TEST OVERVIEW PLOT

Functionality:
capabilities.
Workflow
PDA
Shale oil/gas
Mini-frac


23 MINI-FRAC
Test Overview Plot

i Plot annotation can be applied by selecting Ctrl + right-clicking on the plot,


Figure 185: Test Period Selection

i


MINI-FRAC
selection.


Rate Changes Table.
Period.

measurement).

23 MINI-FRAC
Test Overview Plot
a Fall-Off Test.


plot.


MINI-FRAC
Figure 186: Test Overview Plot
Overview.

23 MINI-FRAC
Pre-Closure Plot Types
PRE-CLOSURE PLOT TYPES

G-Function
General:
The G-function plot opens with pressure and two derivatives dP/dG and
GdP/dG plotted. A solid line passing through (0, 0) on the G-function and
Derivatives axes is auto-fitted to be approximately tangential to the early
GdP/dG data.
Figure 187: Mini-Frac G-Function Plot
Rotate the line with the upper tab until it conforms to the upward linear
trend of the early GdP/dG data, keeping the bottom anchored through (0,
0)
Note that in the case of pressure-dependent leak-off, the early GdP/dG

derivative will plot to the left of the line before conforming to a linear
trend, followed by roll-over.

MINI-FRAC
G-Function 23
In the case of fracture tip extension, the GdP/dG derivative will not
develop any straight line trend, or will do so very late (ref.1).
The Change T0/P0 button allows adjustment to the ISIP if desired.
Select the Pick closure time button - a vertical dashed line appears
Move the dashed line with the mouse to cut the GdP/dG derivative where
it departs from the rotated line. This defines Gc at fracture closure.
The Pick button will disable when the mouse button is

released. Clicking on the Pick button again re-enables dashed line
movement.
According to the position of the dashed line, the value of G at closure (Gc)
will be reported in the line results box. The corresponding closure time
(tc) and closure pressure (Pc) are also listed. (Closure time is the time
elapsed since the end of pumping.)
Fluid efficiency (h) and Leak-off coefficient (CT, from the Nolte
-method) are also computed.
If a value of infinity is displayed for CT, go to the Calculate dialog, select

Presets and enter a value for Youngs Modulus (E).
Figure 188: Mini-Frac G-Function Plo7 with Fluid efficiency (h) and Leak-off
coefficient

23 MINI-FRAC
Square Root Plot
Fit a zero-slope line on the short dP/dG plateau that should appear
around closure time. This appears as mGc in the results box and will be
used to compute a second estimate of CT at a later stage.
Confirm all results.
Figure 189: Mini-Frac G-Function Plo7 with mGc
Square Root Plot

General:
The Square-Root plot opens with pressure and two derivatives - dP/d(t) and
(t) dP/d(t) - plotted. This is an optional alternative to the G-function
plot. It gives the same set of results. You have the option to skip it or to do it
and confirm or ignore the results.

MINI-FRAC
Square Root Plot 23
Figure 190: Mini-Frac Square Root Plot
Select the Pick closure time button - a vertical dashed line appears, placed
through the maximum of the primary derivative to identify the inflection

point on the pressure fall-off which occurs at closure.
Move the dashed line with the mouse if desired. The Pick button will be
disabled when the mouse button is released. Clicking on the Pick button
again re-enables dashed line movement.
According to the position of the dashed line, the value of time at closure (tc)
will be reported in the line results box. (Closure time is the time elapsed since
the end of pumping.) The corresponding closure pressure (Pc) is also listed
along with the calculated value of G at closure for comparison with Gc from
the G-plot.
Fluid efficiency () is also computed.
Confirm the results if you consider them to be better than those from the
G-function plot.

23 MINI-FRAC
Mini_Frac Log-Log Plot
Mini_Frac Log-Log Plot

General:
This plot is optional and is purely for qualitative purposes identification of

flow regimes, validation of closure time, validation of closure time, and
adjustment of the ISIP. It is P = (ISIP P) vs t = (t t0) on log-log axes. t0 is
the time at the start of the fall-off test period. The derivative is t.dP/dt
(which is equivalent to dP/d(ln(t)).
The vertical dashed line corresponds to the last confirmed value of fracture
closure time (from the G-function or t plot). No adjustment is possible, it is
for reference only.
Figure 191: Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot
Fit a line to the pre-closure derivative using the -Slope or Floating Line
options. A slope of indicates linear flow. Bigger slopes might indicate
linear flow with wellbore and/or fracture storage effects. The derivative
should roll away from the line just after the closure point, confirming the
correct closure time pick.

MINI-FRAC
Post-Closure Plot Types 23
Fit a parallel line to the pre-closure pressure data. If the data do not conform
to this slope, an adjustment to the ISIP is required. This will not affect the
derivative, but will increase or decrease the P values and bring their trend
parallel to the derivative. Adjust ISIP by clicking on the Change T0/P0 tool and
changing P0.
For the post-closure derivative, a negative half-slope indicates linear flow,

and a negative unit slope radial flow (ref.1). This is because the derivative, as
defined, does not include superposition for the rate history.
Figure 192: Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot with Negative Slope
POST-CLOSURE PLOT TYPES

Derivative
General:
This is a plot of post-closure pressure with a derivative computed using a

special radial flow time function FR (ref 2), plotted on log-log scales against
time elapsed since closure.

23 MINI-FRAC
Derivative
Figure 193: Mini-Frac Derivative Plot
If radial flow is observed, fit a 0-slope pseudo-radial flow line to the

derivative data. kh and k will appear in the Line Results panel.
Enter the reservoir fluid viscosity and total compressibility at the prompts
if they are not already specified in the Presets dialog (see later
section). (The Fluid Parameters dialog was set up for the injection
fluid.)
Fit the pseudo-radial flow regime to obtain an estimate of the pseudo-radial

skin factor (Spr).
If linear flow is observed, fit a -slope fracture linear flow line to the
derivative data. Then place the fracture linear flow regime markers so that
fracture half-length (Xf ) can be calculated. (This uses the Gulrajani
equation and a special linear flow time function FL (ref 2) computed
internally.) Both line and flow regime are required for this calculation.
The Fluid loss coefficient (CT) is also computed.
Confirm the results (optional).

MINI-FRAC
Semi-Log Plot 23
Semi-Log Plot
General:
This is a plot of post-closure pressure versus a radial flow time function FR

(ref 2). Any flow regimes fitted on the Derivative plot will be transferred.
Figure 194: Mini-Frac Semi-Log Plot
If radial flow is observed, fit a pseudo-radial flow line to the data. kh, k and
the pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr) will be calculated.
A value of Fracture half-length (Xf), derived from Spr, is also listed in the
results, along with the extrapolated pressure (p*).
Linear Flow Plot

Functionality:
This is a plot of post-closure pressure versus a linear flow time function FL


23 MINI-FRAC
KGD/PKN Calculations
If linear flow is observed, fit a fracture linear flow line to the data. Fracture
half-length (Xf) and the extrapolated pressure (p*) will be displayed in the
Line results.
KGD/PKN Calculations
General:
Following analysis of the data, a supplementary Calculation dialog is

available. This provides additional results, such as permeability from
pre-closure data, fracture dimensions from the KGD and PKN models, based
on the confirmed analysis results. It is also possible to alter some of the
diagnostic results to see the effect on the other computations.
Figure 195: Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations

MINI-FRAC
Mini-Frac Analysis Tools 23
Click Calculate to update the panel results. Some of these computed

results are extra to those derived directly from the diagnostic plots
line-fits.
Click the Presets button to access the Presets dialog, where you can
change the default values of a number of computational parameters (For
more information, see Mini-Frac Diagnostic Presets). Upon returning to
the Calculate dialog, click Calculate to update the results.
Note that in order to update the diagnostic plots for any changes made in
Presets, it will be necessary to remake the line-fits.
MINI-FRAC ANALYSIS TOOLS

PanSystem includes the following Mini-Frac Analysis Tools:
Auto Fit Lines

For information about this tool, refer to Autofit Lines on page 530.
Best Fit Line

For information about this tool, refer to Best Fit Line on page 523.
Change T0/PO
Functionality:
Use this option to change the Time at Closure (TC) or Pressure at Closure
(PC) manually. This allows adjustment to the ISIP if desired.
The dialog has only two entry fields and two function buttons, described as
follows:
T0: Enter the new initial value for time in this field.
P0: Enter the new initial value for pressure in this field.

23 MINI-FRAC
Confirm Results
On selecting OK, the original start values in the Rate Changes Table are
overwritten by these new ones.
Confirm Results
For information about this tool, refer to Confirm Results on page 528.
Derivative Smoothing
For information about this tool, refer to Derivative Smoothing Dialog on
page 538.
Fit Line of Known Shape

For information about this tool, refer to Fit Line of Known Shape on
page 636.
Fit Parallel Lines

For information about this tool, refer to Parallel Lines on page 524.
Floating Line
For information about this tool, refer to Floating Line on page 524.
Flow Regime
For information about this tool, refer to Flow Regime on page 526.
Half Slope Line

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a half-slope line to the derivative curve of the Mini-Frac
Log-Log Plot for the pre-closure pressure data. This slope line indicate linear
flow from the fracture.
Line Details and Results

For information about this tool, refer to Line Details and Results on
page 529.

MINI-FRAC
Negative Half Slope 23
Negative Half Slope
For information about this tool, refer to Negative Half Slope Line on
page 521.
Negative Unit Slope Line

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a negative unit-slope line to the derivative curve of the
Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot. This line indicates freely developed reservoir pseudo
radial flow for After Closure Analysis (ACA). This line only has a qualitative
purpose on this plot.
Pick Closure Time

Functionality:
Use this option to pick a pressure point on the GdP/dG curve.
When this button is selected, a vertical dashed line (X- Line annotation)
appears on the screen. Click and drag the line to cut the GdP/dG data where it
departs from the linear trend. This defines Gcat fracture closure. The Time of
Closure (tc) is computed and displayed in the Line Results area of the
Navigation Pane.
Pick Fracture Init Time

Functionality:
Use this option to pick the fracture initiation point.
When this button is selected, a vertical dashed line (X- Line annotation)
appears on the screen. Click and drag the line to cut pressure where the
fracture initiates (change of slope). This defines Tfi. The Time of Fracture
Initiation (Tfi) is computed. Fracture initiation pressure (Pfi) is automatically
created by linear interpolation between pressure data points. Both Tfi and Tfi
are displayed in the Line Results area of the Navigation Pane.

23 MINI-FRAC
Zero Slope Line
Zero Slope Line

Functionality:
Use this option to fit a zero-slope (horizontal) line to the dP/do short plateau
of the G-Function plot. This provides an estimate of the leak-off coefficient
(CT).
In case of the Mini-Frac Deviation Plot, use this option to fit a zero-slope line
to the pseudo-radial flow in order to calculate Permeability (k).
References
1. Holistic Fracture Diagnostics: Consistent Interpretation of Prefrac Injection Tests
Using Multiple Analysis Methods by R.D. Barree et al, SPE P&O (Aug 2009) and
SPE 107877 (Denver, April 2007).
2. Field Application of After-Closure Analysis of Fracture Calibration Tests, by G.R.
Talley et al, SPE 52220 (Oklahoma City, (March 1999).

Chapter 24
TRANSFORMATION
Transformation Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Pressure Transformation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Time Transformation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

24 TRANSFORMATION
Transformation Ribbon Overview
TRANSFORMATION RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The Transformation ribbon includes the following options:
Pressure Transformation Dialog: Used to change the method for

calculating Pseudo-Pressure, when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas, Condensate or
Multi-Phase Oil (refer to Fluid Parameters Help topics for Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressures - Gas, Condensate and Oil).
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog: This is used to change Extrapolated

Pressure or back-out a Pressure Trend from well test data. For example:
When a global Pressure Trend induced by interference from Injection or

Production Wells needs to be removed from the Gauge Data so that a
Transient Analysis can be performed.
To correct the Gauge Pressure for the effects of the flowing history of
the Well rather than to use Superposition Theory to function the Time
(i.e. this is the principle of the Slider " Desuperposition" Method -
Reference 19).
Time Transformation Dialog: Used to change the method for

calculating Pseudo-Time, when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas or Condensate.
Provided a valid table of Viscosity () and Total Compressibility ( Ct) data
versus Pressure (p) is available (refer to Fluid Parameters Help topics for
Gas and Condensate), Pseudo-Time can be used instead of Real Time in the
Analysis plots. Note that Pseudo-Time should be used in conjunction with
Pseudo-Pressure (refer to Pressure Transformation, the next item).
PRESSURE TRANSFORMATION DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Pressure Transformation option from

the Transformation ribbon on the Analysis view; it deals with:

TRANSFORMATION
Pressure Transformation Dialog 24
Pressure Formulations - a choice is available when the Layer Fluid Type is
Gas, Condensate or Oil (Multi-Phase).
Material Balance Correction -a choice is available when the Layer Fluid Type
is Gas, Condensate, or Oil
1. Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option not selected in the Well, Reservoir &

Fluid Description Dialog:
Pressure: Available for Gas, Condensate and Oil (Multi-Phase) - (also refer
below for applicability).
Pressure Squared (Reference 21): Available for Gas and Condensate (also
refer below for applicability).
Pseudo-Pressure (Reference 21 and Reference 98): Available for Gas and

Condensate. This option requires a valid table of Pseudo-Pressure Data.
The Single-Phase Real Gas Pseudo-Pressure Table can be generated in the
Analytical Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, or
imported from an external source.
Applicability:
The first two transforms are approximations which are more or less valid
depending on test conditions:
Pressure (p), for Pressures above approximately 3000 psia or tests where
the Drawdown is small.
Pressure-Squared (p2), for Pressures below about 3000 psia, or tests where
the Drawdown is small.
The Real Gas Pseudo-Pressure transform is theoretically rigorous and is valid

under all conditions.
2. Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option selected in Well and Reservoir Description

(Analytical) dialog:

24 TRANSFORMATION
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog
Pseudo-Pressure: The only available option, enabled for Gas, Condensate or Oil.
This option requires a valid table of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Data, which
can be generated in either the Analytical Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure
Table Editing or the Analytical Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, or
imported from an external source.
3. Material Balance Correction:
This checkbox option can be checked to enable the Material Balance Correction
for Gas, Condensate or Oil wells. It will only have an effect for Closed System
Boundary Model, where it will correct Fluid Properties particularly the
compressibility - as the Reservoir Pressure declines. This provides improved
modeling of extended production periods in Quick Match, Advanced
Simulation and Deliverability Forecasting by re-evaluating Fluid Properties as the
Reservoir Pressure declines. If this option is not used (i.e. unchecked), the
initial Fluid Properties will be used (i.e. constant Compressibility).
The material balance correction is not currently available when the

multiphase pseudo-pressure is in use.
PRESSURE EXTRAPOLATION DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Pressure Extrapolation option from the
Transformation ribbon on the Analysis view. It can be used to compensate for a
Pressure Variation in the Reservoir and to back-out a Pressure Trend from well
test data:
When a global Pressure Trend induced by interference from Injection or

Producing Wells needs to be removed from the Gauge Data so that a
Transient Analysis can be performed
When the Gauge Pressure has to be corrected for the effects of the Flowing
History of the Well rather than use Superposition Theory to function the
Time (i.e. the principle of the Slider Method - Reference 19).

TRANSFORMATION
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog 24
s
Type area: Select the Type of Extrapolation trend to be applied, from the five
choices. Each selection requires a different set of Parameters to be defined in
the underlying section. The table below illustrates the specific Parameters
required for each Flow Type selection
Type area: Select the Type of Extrapolation trend to be applied, from the
five choices. Each selection requires a different set of Parameters to be
defined in the underlying section. The table below illustrates the specific
Parameters required for each Flow Type selection:
Type selection Parameters required
None Not used
Semi-Steady-State Flow Linear Rate of Pressure Change
Logarithmic Pressure Trend

Radial Flow
Elapsed Time to Start of Test
Square-Root Pressure Trend

Linear Flow
Fourth-Root Pressure Trend

Bilinear Flow

24 TRANSFORMATION
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog
Parameters section: With reference to the Flow Type area and the table
above, enter the appropriate Parameters in the data entry fields, when
they are enabled:
Rate of Pressure Change: This Trend can be estimated from a plot (i.e.
with an appropriate Time axis) of the data at the tail end of the
preceding Test Period if available. To generate this for a Gas well test,
remember to change the Pressure Transformation option to Pressure,
otherwise the Trend will be measured in m(p)/day and not pressure/day.
Elapsed Time to Start of Test: The Logarithmic, Square-Root and

Fourth-Root Pressure Trend options require this additional input. The
preceding Trend is attributed to an assumed Single Constant Rate
Period (use the Effective (Tp) for a Build-Up, where Tp(eff) = Total
Volume Produced last Flow Rate before Shut-In). Unlike the Linear
Extrapolation, the size of the correction applied to the Test data
depends on how long these Trends existed before the Test Period
under Analysis.
i Note that a positive data entry indicates a Pressure Trend declining with Time,
and a negative data entry indicates a Pressure Trend increasing with Time.
Use (Extrapolation) area: Choose the Type of Extrapolation to be used

from the two available choices, to either represent Rate History Effects for
the same Well or Interference Effects from other Wells.
Extrapolation to Model Rate History: This replicates the Slider Method

(Reference 19) to account for the effects of Rate History by
Desuperposition. The selected Trend (i.e. identified from the preceding
Test Period data), is added to the Gauge Data when plotted. Since this
correction accounts for Rate History, the "No History" option should be
selected under the Time Function tool. The correction is also
applied to any Quick Match or Advanced Simulation data which are
plotted.

TRANSFORMATION
Time Transformation Dialog 24
Extrapolation to Model Interference Effects: In this case, only the Gauge
Data are corrected with the Extrapolation Trend, to Plot the pure
response cleaned of any Interference Effects. Any Well Rate History
pertaining to the Test should be respected by retaining the default
Time Function setting of "Use History". There is no Pressure
Correction applied to any Quick Match or Advanced Simulation data
which are plotted, since these already represent the pure response.
i If a different Test Period is subsequently analyzed, remember to switch the

Pressure Extrapolation facility off or change the Parameter/s as appropriate.
TIME TRANSFORMATION DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Time Transformation option from the
Transformation ribbon on the Analysis view.
This option can only be used when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas or Condensate
and provided that a valid table of () and (Ct) data versus Pressure is available
i
(refer to Fluid Parameters for Gas and Condensate), Pseudo-Time will be used
instead of Real Time in the Analysis Plots. Pseudo-Time (t'), is the normalized
form of the Pseudo-Time ta(p) defined in Agarwal's paper (Reference 41 and
Reference 66) - also refer to PanSystem Equations Gas Analysis Overview for
more details).
There are two choices available, but Pseudo-Time should always be used in
conjunction with Pseudo-Pressure:
Normal Time: Normal Time Transformation is applied.
Pseudo-Time: Pseudo-Time Transformation is applied.

24 TRANSFORMATION
Time Transformation Dialog

SECTION V
SIMULATION
This section provides information about Simulations within the PanSystem

application.
CHAPTER 25
Simulation View ......................................................... 649
CHAPTER 26
Analytical Simulation ................................................. 651
CHAPTER 27
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) ............................... 717

Chapter 25
SIMULATION VIEW
Simulation View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

25 SIMULATION VIEW
SIMULATION VIEW OVERVIEW

The following ribbons can be used to perform Simulation calculations on the
complete Analysis:
Analytical Simulation: This option allows you to enter Reservoir and

Well Data for the PanSystem Analytical Simulation method.
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh): This option opens the PanMesh 3-D

Well Test Simulator (i.e. if licensed), providing a Numerical Pressure and
Rate Simulation capability. This is a 3-D Numerical Simulation based on
Finite Element Mesh technology, comprised of individual, twenty-noded
iso-parametric bricks. The Simulated Data are written to file.
!
The Simulation option is available on almost all diagnostic plots from Analysis,
including the Test Overview Plot. A Quick Match response generated on one
plot can be viewed on any other plot without regenerating it, simply by
switching plots.
Overview.

Chapter 26
ANALYTICAL SIMULATION
Analytical Simulation Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Quick Match Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Copy Layer Pressure Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Boundary Type Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Automatic Matching Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
About Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Advanced Simulation - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Advanced Simulation - History Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . 696
Advanced Automatic Matching Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Matching Progress Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog . . . . 702
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Advanced Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog . . . . . . 708
PanFlow Rate Simulation - Progress Sub-Dialog (Calculating
Advanced Simulation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
PanFlow Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

26 ANALYTICAL SIMULATION
Analytical Simulation Ribbon Overview
ANALYTICAL SIMULATION RIBBON

OVERVIEW
The Analytical Simulation ribbon includes the following options:
Quick Match Dialog: Used to perform a Quick Pressure Simulation; an

on-screen Single Well/Single Layer Pressure Response generation to validate
the Model and Parameters derived from Analysis (i.e. equivalent to the
V1.80 Gen Internal facility). The Simulated Data are temporary.
Automatic Matching Dialog: Used to perform Automatic Parameter

Matching. The Parameters are optimized with non-linear regression to
obtain the Parameter Set that best matches the plotted test data (i.e.
equivalent to the V1.80 Auto facility).
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog: Used to perform Advanced

Analytical Pressure and Rate Simulation. The Pressure Response generation
uses more advanced features than are available in Quick Match (i.e.
Multiple Wells, Multiple Layers, etc.). The Simulated Data are written to file.
PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog: Used to derive Flow Rate from

Wellbore Pressure Simulation. This determines the Sandface Flow Rate from
the Wellbore Pressure for a specified Reservoir Model and Boundary Model.
Wellbore Pressure is therefore an input, Sandface Flow Rate is the output.
This facility has the same Multi-Layer capabilities as Advanced Simulation,
but is a Single Well Model. The Simulated Data are written to file.
QUICK MATCH DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Quick Match option from the
Analytical Simulation ribbon on the Simulation view. It is used for setting-up
the parameters to Simulate the Pressure Response for currently displayed data.
The Quick Match facility serves to test the correctness of the selected Reservoir
and Boundary Models and derived parameters, by generating the theoretical
Single-Well/Single-Layer Pressure Response for comparison with plotted data.

Quick Match Dialog 26
Users would normally start by using the Results from the current Analysis
Plot, and input parameters can be modified by trial and error (i.e. if required)
to improve the Match. The Reservoir and Boundary Models can also be changed
via the Analysis Model option.
This dialog can either be accessed directly or via an additional dialog stage
depending on the Boundary Model selected:
If the Boundary Model is Infinitely Acting, the Quick Match dialog is

generated directly.
If a Boundary Model other than Infinitely Acting has been selected, users
will first be directed to the Boundary Type dialog and presented with
options relating to the Boundary Geometry. After entering the required
parameters, then selecting OK, the Quick Match dialog is generated.
The Quick Match dialog is comprised of two data entry sections, a checkbox
option and three function buttons, described as follows:
The values in the data entry sections are read from the current Reservoir
Description. These will correspond to the Model Results from the current plot
if the Confirm Results button was selected after performing a Line Fit. The
value of any parameter can be changed by either entering a new value (or
values) in the relevant data entry field/s or by scrolling the up/down toggles
to select a new option (or options) where applicable.
For the Test Overview Plot, when the Allow Different Skins and Storage per Test
Period option has been enabled in the Layer Parameters dialog, additional
options become available, to identify individual Skins and Storage Coefficients
for the different Test Periods selected. To edit these parameters, select
<TABLE> in the Skin or Wellbore Storage fields of the dialog. This will open up
the Edit Skin & Storage Table sub-dialog for the Well and Layer in question.
Start and End: These are the Start and End values on the plot X-axis (rather
than actual times). The values default to the plot scaling but can be
altered.
!
Some models require a lot of computing time. The Test Period can be covered
more rapidly if a very large value is entered for End, (or Start in the case of
Horner-Type Superposition) and stop the calculation around the half-way
point.

Quick Match Dialog
Replace Previous: To retain the previous Quick Match trace for comparison
with a new one, uncheck the Replace Previous checkbox before running
the next one. If you want to have more than two traces on the plot, you
must OK/Cnf from your last Quick Match and re-enter Simulate Quick
Match before generating each new trace. By performing Quick Match in
this manner, up to 5 traces can be accumulated as described below. If the
previous trace is not to be kept, check the Replace Previous checkbox and it
will be overwritten by the new trace.
Calculate button: To generate the response, select the Calculate button. A

Quick Match Progress status box is displayed while the response is being
calculated. If the calculation is stopped in mid-stream, the Part-Response
will be displayed. The Response is then drawn on the plot, and the plot
Results Box will be updated with the Quick Match Results. Up to five
calculations can be performed, with five plots displayed simultaneously.
The parameter values can be edited and the Response regenerated until a
i
satisfactory Match is achieved. Click and drag the Quick Match input data box
(by the title bar) to a different location if it is in the way. If users attempt to
perform more than five calculations and display plots simultaneously, a warning
will be issued to Delete a History Plot Before Saving Another.
OK/Confirm button: The OK/Confirm button exits the Quick Match facility
and writes the parameter values to the Reservoir Description (i.e.
analogous to the Confirm Results button for plot analysis).
Cancel: The Cancel button exits the Quick Match facility and clears all
traces of the Response generation. If users decide they need to change the
Reservoir or Boundary Model, click Cancel and use the Model option from
the Analysis menu.
If the Flow Rate data being used is a varying Flow Rate, corresponding to a
i
Downhole Sandface Flow Rate measurement, remember to set the Wellbore
Storage Coefficient (Cs) to zero in the data entry field. The Downhole Flow
Rate already accounts for Wellbore Storage effects, so it will be applied twice if
a non-zero value for Cs is used.

Quick Match Traces
The Quick Match facility allows users to review up to five traces on a plot.
With multiple traces, the Results box exhibits a tabbed appearance and the
active tab is identified with a blue highlight (example illustrated below for the
maximum five traces). Numbered tabs represent the first and subsequent
passes. The left-most, highlighted, tab with no number assigned always
represents the last pass made.
To hide the simulated data and results box for the current plot, right-click the
appropriate tab, and then select Hide QM matches: this plot.
To hide the simulated data and results for the all of the analysis plots,
right-click a tab, and then select Hide Match: all plots.
To redisplay the trace and results box again, simply right-click the Quick
Match Results area in the Navigation pane, and then select Hide QM matches:
this plot.
Delete Quick Match Traces area: Up to five Quick Match traces and associated
Results can be displayed on the current plot by switching off Replace Previous
in the Quick Match Dialog. Individual results are indicated by small tabs
situated along the top of the Quick Match Results box.
i You are not allowed to delete the only trace for a plot.

Quick Match Dialog
Quick Match Results Box:
The Quick Match Results box contains the Results computed for a Line Fit (i.e.
Model Results) or Curve Match (i.e. Quick Match Results).
In addition to the values corresponding to the Model Results from the current
plot (e.g. values for Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Permeability (k), Skin (S),
etc.), the Quick Match Results box includes the following:
Skin pressure drop (dpS): This is the pressure drop corresponding to the
skin factor S or, for gas and condensate wells, the total skin (S+DQ). Note
that this is the pressure drop for the true or damage skin, not the
pseudo-radial skin.
Initial Pressure (Pi): This is the theoretical Pressure at the start of the Rate
History for the current Model and it is calculated by backwards
superposition from the start of the selected Test Period when Quick Match
is run on any of the diagnostic plots. This provides the estimate of Initial
Layer Pressure (e.g. a gauge may not have been in place when the Rate
History started, or the initial gauge reading may be unreliable).
i Note that this (Pi) includes the effect of any Boundaries.
i For any boundary model which is not closed, Pi is also the current reservoir
pressure, since there will have been no depletion.
In addition, when using Quick Match on the Test Overview Plot, if a Test
Period is selected in the ruler bar, Quick Match will still simulate the entire test
sequence, but the generated Pressure record will be shifted as necessary to
pass through the measured Pressure at the start of that Test Period, rather than
at the start of the history, and an estimate of the corresponding (Pi) will
appear in the Results box.
If no Test Period, or the first Test Period, is selected in the Ruler Bar, the initial
pressure becomes a user input, P_lay, in the Quick Match dialog. This is
initially equal to the first pressure entered in the Rate Change Table, but can be
changed by trail and error until a good overall Match is obtained.

Average Layer Pressure (Pavg): For the Closed System Boundary Model, an
estimate of (Pavg) will appear in the Results box when a buildup (or
fall-off) test is being analyzed. This estimate is valid for:
Any Reservoir Flow Model.
Any Closed Boundary Model and Well Position, including Constant

Pressure Boundaries.
Any duration of Production Period.
and is preferable to the MBH Calculation (PMBH), from the Line Fit on the
Semi-Log Plot.
It is computed by projecting the Build-Up Response forward in time far

enough to reach a stable shut-in Pressure.
Permeability- Thickness Product (kh): This is displayed for all Reservoir

Models.
Fracture Conductivity (kfw): This is only displayed for Vertical Fracture

Models. Refer to Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (FCD) in Model
Parameters, for a definition of kfw.
Drainage Area Size (A): This is only displayed for Closed System, 2-Cell
Compartmentalized and Hexagonal Boundary options.
Hydrocarbons-in-place (OOIP, OGIP) / Water-in-place (OWIP): This is only

displayed for Closed System, 2-Cell Compartmentalized and Hexagonal
Boundary options.
Material Balance Correction:
This option can be found in the Pressure Transformation Dialog in the

Analysis view. It can be checked to enable the Material Balance Correction for
Gas, Condensate or Oil wells. It will only have an effect for the Closed System
and Hexagonal Boundary models, where it will correct Fluid Properties for
declining Reservoir Pressure. This provides improved simulation of extended
production periods by re-evaluating Fluid Properties particularly the
compressibility - as the Reservoir Pressure declines. If this option is not used
(i.e. unchecked), the initial Fluid Properties will be used (i.e. constant
Compressibility).

Quick Match Dialog
For infinite and semi-infinite systems, switching the correction on will have
no effect, because there will be no depletion.
i The material balance correction will not be applied when the two-cell
Compartmentalized boundary model has been selected.
i The material balance correction is not currently available when the multiphase
pseudo-pressure is in use.
Quick Match Combo dialog and results for wireline formation tests
Dual pressures: If formation tester active and observation pressures have

been imported and the WFT with Observation Probe Test checkbox has been
ticked in the top right corner of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, a
special dual pressure mode (Combo) will be enabled for Quick Match
simulation and Auto Match parameter optimization.
In Combo mode, both pressures will be displayed on each analysis plot, and
Quick Match can be run for both datasets simultaneously. In addition, Auto
Match will regress on both datasets simultaneously to find a unique set of
parameters that best matches them.
The Select Analysis Model dialog will contain three tabs one each for the
active and observation pressures, and a Combo tab for dual-pressure
presentation and analysis. Select Flowing or Observe to work on an individual
pressure; select Combo to work on both pressures.

Figure 196: Analysis Model dialog for a WFT Test in dual pressure mode
It is recommended as part of the work flow to find a set of parameters that

match independently for each model before choosing the Combo tab.
Normally, you would start by analyzing and matching the active (flowing)
pressures by line-fitting and Quick Match / Auto Match, and then the
observation data. No line-fitting results are available in Combo mode.

Quick Match Dialog
Figure 197: Quick Match inputs for a packer-probe test: Active (flowing)
zone selected
Figure 198: Quick Match inputs for a packer-probe test: Observation

probe selected
Finally, refine the analysis in Combo mode, matching both data sets
simultaneously using Quick Match and/or Auto Match to arrive at a single,
consistent interpretation.

Figure 199: Combo Mode Quick Match inputs for the same Packer-Probe
Test
Note that at this stage it is possible to have an inconsistent set of parameters

for the active and observation models. Obviously, the final interpretation
should use the same values for both.
When running Auto Match, a single, combined, set of model parameters is

presented. This ensures a single consistent interpretation.

Copy Layer Pressure Dialog
Figure 200: Combo mode Auto Match inputs
COPY LAYER PRESSURE DIALOG

General:
This dialog is only generated when the Quick Match option is selected from
the Analytical Simulation ribbon on the Simulation view under the following
circumstances:
The Test Overview Plot is currently displayed with the first Test Period
selected, so that the Quick Match calculation is being initiated from the
start of the test sequence (i.e. at Reservoir Pressure).
In Quick Match, the Start Pressure is taken from the Pressure in the first row
of the Rate Changes Table. If the Layer Pressure (derived from the Layer
Parameters dialog), is different from this Start Pressure/Reservoir
Pressure, this dialog warns users of the difference and allows the Layer
Pressure to be copied over to the first Rate Change Pressure.
i Users are also able to edit the Start Pressure in the Quick Match Dialog.

Boundary Type Dialog 26
The dialog contains textual instruction and is self-explanatory. Basically,

there are two potential outcomes:
Selecting the Yes button will replace the Start Pressure/Reservoir Pressure
with the Layer Pressure for the Quick Match calculation.
Selecting the No button will use the Start Pressure/Reservoir Pressure from
the Rate Changes Table for the Quick Match calculation.
In either case, the Pressure value can be checked (and edited if required), in
the Quick Match Dialog.
BOUNDARY TYPE DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting either the Quick Match or Auto Match
options from the Analytical Simulation ribbon on the Simulation view, when a
Boundary Model other than Infinitely Acting has been selected (i.e. either in the
Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog or the Analysis Select Analysis Model
dialog). Users are first directed to this dialog and presented with options
relating to the Boundary Geometry. After entering the required Boundary
Parameters for Simulation, then selecting OK, the Quick Match Dialog or
Automatic Matching Dialog is generated.
i
The dialog title, data entry fields and function button availability will vary
depending on the Boundary Type selected in Data Preparation or Analysis (e.g.
Parallel Faults, U-Shaped Faults, etc.). Annotated illustrations of these Models
are available in the Boundary Model dialog.

Boundary Type Dialog
Boundaries in Quick Match and Auto Match:
The Quick Match and Auto Match facilities use the Image Well principle in most
cases, but unlike Advanced Simulation, apply it through look-up tables rather
than requiring Image Wells to be computed. Some Boundary Models use
Green's Functions (described below), in which case look-up tables are not
required.
i
Note that all Boundaries are of the No-Flow type unless otherwise stated,
regardless of any selection that may have been made in the Oil Fluid
Parameters Sub-Dialog.
These Boundary Responses computed with Image Well look-up tables are valid
only when the well test has reached Pseudo-Radial Flow, which means the
Boundaries should not be positioned too close to the Well. Errors may be
introduced if the onset of a Boundary effect occurs before Pseudo-Radial Flow is
attained:
For Fractured Well Models, too close means less than about two Fracture
Half-Lengths (<~2xf) from the Well.
For Horizontal Well Models, it means less than about one Well Length
(<~Lw) from the mid-point of the Well.
i
Note that the Fracture or Horizontal Wellbore is considered to be oriented
parallel to the X-axis (i.e. east-west on the viewing screen) for specification of
distances L1, L2, L3, L4.
The following models use Green's Functions instead of tables:

For the Radial Homogeneous Model, all the orthogonal geometries (i.e.
Parallel, U-Shaped, Closed System and 2-Cell Compartmentalized), offer the
choice of variable Well Position and the special case of central Well Position
(i.e. equidistant). These are modeled using Green's Functions instead of
Image Well look-ups. This offers more flexibility (variable distances) and
accuracy. The Boundary Parameters button generates the appropriate
Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog, where users can select the No-Flow
and Constant Boundary types and specify the Boundary Distances. Once the
Boundary Types have been selected there is no need to re-enter this dialog
(unless they need to be changed), because the Boundary Distances can be
entered in either the Quick Match Dialog or Automatic Matching
Dialog which follows.
For the Vertical Fracture (Infinite Conductivity and Limited Height) Models, all
the orthogonal geometries are modeled using Green's Functions, which
permits Boundaries to be placed at any desired Distance from the Well.
There is no minimum Distance, providing no Boundary crosses the
Fracture. The Fracture Orientation relative to the Boundaries can therefore
be taken into account.
For the Horizontal Well Models, all the orthogonal geometries are modeled
using Green's Functions, and this allows Boundaries to be placed at any
desired Distance from the Well. There is no minimum Distance, providing
no Boundary crosses the Wellbore. The Well Orientation relative to the
Boundaries can therefore be taken into account.
i
Note that the Fracture or Horizontal Wellbore is considered to be oriented
parallel to the X-axis (i.e. east-west on the viewing screen) for specification of
distances L1, L2, L3, L4.
All other Reservoir and Boundary Models offer a limited selection of

geometries based on look-up tables derived from Image Wells.
Models Available in the Closed System Dialog:
Additional Boundary Models are available in this dialog; as with Models

depicted in the Boundary Model dialog, the Distances L1 to L4 are allocated on a
plan view basis, starting from the south with L1 and working anti-clockwise,
to L4. These Distances are also measured from the Well to each Fault/Boundary
on the basis of being perpendicular to each Fault/Boundary:

Boundary Type Dialog
Variable Well Position: Available for the three Model types described above
that use Green's Functions. Users can either specify the Boundary Geometry
in terms of L1, L2, L3 and L4, or if the Well is in the center, users specify L1
and the other three Distances are allocated automatically.
Square Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well in one Corner: In this case, L = L1

= L2 and L3 = L4 = 9 x L.
Square Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at one End: In this case, L = L1,
L2 = L4 = 5 x L and L3 = 9 x L.
Square Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at the Center: In this case, L1 = L2

= L3 = L4.
Square Reservoir (Constant-Pressure Boundary), Well at the Center: In this

case, L1 = L2 = L3 = L4.

5:1 Rectangular Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at the Center: In this

case, L = L1 = L3 and L2 = L4 = 5 x L.
5:1 Rectangular Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at one End: In this case,
L = L1= L2 = L3 and L4 = 9 x L.
Equilateral Triangle (No-Flow Boundary), Well in one Corner: In this case, L =

L1= L2 and L3 = 13 x L.

Automatic Matching Dialog
i This Model is only available in Quick Match and Auto Match. It is not available
through the Data Preparation or Analysis Boundary Model dialogs.
No Boundary: No Boundary specification required. This is a useful

sensitivity to run for comparison against a Model with a Boundary.
AUTOMATIC MATCHING DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Auto Match option from the
Analytical Simulation ribbon, after selecting Data Points. These Data Points can
either be selected manually or automatically, using the Auto Match Point
Selection Tool from the Analysis Tools ribbon. If users select the Auto Match
option without first choosing any Data Points, PanSystem will generate the
Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog, which supplies users with a range of
options for manual, semi-automatic or fully-automatic Data Point selection.
i
This option is available on almost every plot on condition that a single Test
Period has been selected for Analysis. Only the Test Overview Plot allows an
entire sequence of tests to be Matched.

Automatic Matching Dialog 26
If the Auto Match option is selected with 5 or fewer points selected, a warning
message will appear alerting the user to this fact. This is to prevent
regression being performed on a few points that may have been accidentally
selected.
Use the Auto Match facility for parameter optimization by non-linear

regression to obtain the Parameter Set that best Matches the plotted test data.
This is the automated equivalent of manual adjustment of Quick Match input
parameters by trial and error.
The process is kicked off at specified starting values (i.e. tentative Analysis
Results, guesses, etc.), and each parameter is made to vary between specified
limits during the search for an optimum solution. Any parameter can be held
constant at a fixed value if it is not to be optimized (i.e. the answer is already
known).
The regression seeks to Match the test data to within a specified tolerance or
Match Quality (based on a least-squares criterion), within a specified
number of iterations.
The theoretical Pressure Response is then generated using the optimized

parameters for comparison with the plotted data.
Auto Match Combo dialog and results for wireline formation tests
Dual pressures: If formation tester active and observation pressures have

been imported and the WFT with Observation Probe Test checkbox has been
ticked in the top right corner of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, a
special dual pressure mode (Combo) will be enabled for Quick Match
simulation and Auto Match parameter optimization.
In Combo mode, both pressures will be displayed on each analysis plot, and
Quick Match can be run for both datasets simultaneously. In addition, Auto
Match will regress on both datasets simultaneously to find a unique set of
parameters that best matches them.
The Analysis / Model dialog will contain three tabs one each for the active
and observation pressures, and a Combo tab for dual-pressure presentation
and analysis. Select Flowing or Observe to work on an individual pressure;
select Combo to work on both pressures.

It is recommended as part of the work flow to find a set of parameters that

match independently for each model before choosing the Combo tab.
Normally, you would start by analyzing and matching the active (flowing)
pressures by line-fitting and Quick Match / Auto Match, and then the
observation data. Note that at this stage it is possible to have an inconsistent
set of parameters for the active and observation models. Obviously, the final
interpretation should use the same values for both.
When running Auto Match, a single, combined, set of model parameters is

presented. This ensures a single consistent interpretation.
After Data Point selection (described above), the Automatic Matching dialog is
generated as described below:
i Only the Parameters relevant to the currently selected Reservoir and

Boundary Model are listed.
Max Number of Iterations section: Users should leave this at the

default setting unless they want to restrict or increase the number (i.e.
maximum number is 999).
Solution Method area: Two methods are available for the Auto Match
calculations:
Adaptive (Reference 55 and 56).
Levenberg-Marquardt (Reference 57).
Adaptive should achieve the higher quality Match of the two methods.
!
However, the accuracy of this method can be compromised by spurious data
such as noise. If the Adaptive option gives a result which is not satisfactory
due to poor data quality, then the Levenberg-Marquardt method should be
used as this method has better noise handling characteristics.
Advanced button: This generates the Advanced Automatic Matching

Sub-Dialog, that is used to switch on/off Parameter Transform and
Parameter Re-Scaling. Edit the dialog box if necessary, then select OK
to proceed to Auto Match.

Automatic Matching Dialog 26
Pressure/Derivative Weighting area: This slider control allows users to
select how much weighting (i.e. 0 to 100%), to assign to Pressure and
Derivative. The default setting is 100% Pressure.
Match Quality area: These are qualitative definitions of the tightness of

the Match tolerance to be met, Excellent being the closest Match criterion.
The Auto Match stops when the current iteration produces a Match within
the tolerance. If the full run of iterations fails to achieve this, the set of
parameters giving the closest Match will be adopted.
Table Data Entry/Edit section: This section is used to enter/edit

parameter values, select variables and set limits for the optimization
process:
Start Values: These values are read from the current (i.e. confirmed)
Reservoir Description. These will correspond to the Model Results from
the current diagnostic plot if the Confirm Results button was selected
from the PanSystem Toolbar after performing a Line Fit. Edit if
necessary.
Variable: Check this checkbox if the associated parameter is to be

optimized. Uncheck the checkbox if the parameter is to be held
constant at the Start Value.
!
When using Auto Match on the Test Overview Plot, if any particular Test
Period is not selected, the Initial Pressure will be included as a parameter to be
optimized.
Lower and Upper Limits: These are set to reasonable values if the
default start values are non-zero. Edit as necessary - do not impose
too tight a constraint on any parameter as this may impede the search
process.
Selection of Points for the Regression:
Before selecting Auto Match, select the Data Points for the regression by
clicking them with the mouse or using the Auto Match Point Selection Tool
from the Analysis Tools ribbon. The regression will be more effective if more
points are used. It is particularly important to cover the Storage-Dominated
portion in detail. However, too many Data Points selected will entail slower
regression. Usually, 20-30 Data Points are adequate.

If users select the Auto Match option without first choosing any Data Points,
PanSystem will generate the Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog, which
supplies users with a range of options for manual, semi-automatic or
fully-automatic Data Point selection.
When manually choosing Data Points, users can assign Confidence Weighting
Factors based on perceived data quality. These will subsequently influence
the relative Weighting of the data in the regression.
A Confidence Weighting Factor can be assigned by pressing the UP (= high) or

DOWN (= low) arrow key from the keyboard first, then selecting the Data
Point. To apply a medium Weighting, it is not necessary to use any of the
arrow keys. This Weighting can be based on the quality of the data in different
portions of the test (e.g. a noisy Wellbore Storage period gets low Weighting), or
whether users want a particular portion of the data to have a stronger
influence on the Results (i.e. high Weighting). If there is nothing special about
the data, the arrow keys do not have to be used. The Weighting Factors are
illustrated in the table below:
Confidence Level Arrow Key
"High": 0.10 psia UP
"Medium": 1.0 psia None
"Low": 10 psia DOWN
The selected Data Points will be highlighted with different symbols

depending on their Weighting:
Figure 201: Low, Medium and High Weighting Symbols

Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog 26
After this Weighting process has been completed, select Auto Match again; the
Points Selection dialog will be skipped and the regression can be started.
i Select the Esc key to cancel all Data Point selections and Weighting.
AUTO MATCH - POINTS SELECTION

DIALOG
General:
This warning dialog is generated when the Auto Match option is selected from
the Simulation view and no data points have been selected. Three Point
Selection Options are suggested for users:
Automatic (i.e. the program selects Data Points).
Advanced (i.e. semi-automatic program selection of Data Points, with

manual override).
Manual (i.e. user selects Data Points with mouse).
For Manual Point Selection, users are also provided with instructions on how
this is performed.
Automatic Method:
Select the OK button on the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog. The program
will use all the Data Points in the test up to the maximum of 50. If there are
more than 50 Data Points, the Data Points will be re-sampled - logarithmically
in time for the diagnostic plots, linearly for Test Overview.
Advanced Method:

Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog
Select the Advanced button on the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog. This
generates a Global Point Selection Dialog. This dialog can also be
generated by selecting the Auto Match Point Selection Tool from the Analysis
Tools ribbon.
Enter the Maximum Required Number of Points, choose Linear or Logarithmic

(recommended for most purposes) selection, then select OK to proceed with
the regression process.
Manual Method:
Select the Cancel button on the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog. This takes
users out of Auto Match mode, so Data Points can be selected manually with
the mouse cursor (i.e. up to a maximum of 499). If users are on the Log-Log
Plot, select Derivative Points (the Auto Match Point Selection Tool described
above can also be used).
While picking a point, a Confidence Weighting Factor can be assigned by

pressing the UP (= high) or DOWN (= low) arrow key from the keyboard first,
then selecting the Data Point. To apply a medium Weighting, it is not
necessary to use any of the arrow keys. This Weighting can be based on the
quality of the data in different portions of the test (e.g. a noisy Wellbore Storage
period gets low Weighting), or whether a particular portion of the data is to be
given a stronger influence on the Results (i.e. high Weighting). If there is
nothing special about the data, the arrow keys do not have to be used.
Weighting Factors are illustrated in the table below:
Confidence Level Arrow Key
"High": 0.10 psia UP
"Medium": 1.0 psia None
"Low": 10 psia DOWN
The selected Data Points will be highlighted with different symbols

depending on their Weighting:

About Advanced Simulation 26
Figure 202: Low, Medium and High Weighting Symbols
Once this selection and optional Weighting process has been completed, select
the Auto Match option from the Simulate menu again - the Auto Match - Points
Selection dialog will be skipped and the regression can be started.
Select the Esc key to cancel all Data Point selections and Weighting.
ABOUT ADVANCED SIMULATION

Advanced Simulation - Overview
General:
This facility is available by selecting the Advanced Simulation option from the
Analytical Simulation ribbon on the Simulation view. Basic program
functionality is described in the Advanced Simulation Help topic.
PanSystem Advanced Simulation is used to generate the Wellbore Pressure

Response to a specified Surface Flow Rate Schedule, for a specified Reservoir and
Boundary description. Like Quick Match, Advanced Simulation produces a
Pressure Response that can be displayed on screen and compared with Gauge
Data, but it is more flexible and provides a number of additional features as
outlined below. If these are not required, use Quick Match.
The reservoir model is not restricted to a single-well or single-layer, so

multi-layer effects (i.e. up to 5 layers) and interference from other wells (i.e.
up to 5 wells) can be included. Different boundary geometries can be
modeled in each layer (i.e. using up to 16,000 image wells per layer).

Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation
The characteristics of the pressure gauge (i.e. resolution, noise and drift) can
be included in the simulated pressure response using the Gauge Details button
from the Advanced Simulation dialog (this facility is also available via the
Configuration view).
Unlike the Quick Match option, where the simulated data are for display only,
Advanced Simulation data are written to new data channels and can be saved
to disk for future use just like any other gauge data. They can also be
converted to dimensionless form as Type-Curves.
The Advanced Simulation facility can be used for:
Advanced Simulation - History Matching: Matching the simulated

data to gauge data in an existing (*.PANX) file. The Flow Rate would be
the same as the rate sequence used for the well test being analyzed. The
objective would be to verify that the current reservoir model is capable of
replicating the measured gauge response.
Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design: The Flow Rate would be an

intended or tentative rate sequence for a well test that has not yet been
performed. The objective would be to examine the computed response
with a view to optimizing the test design (i.e. Flow Rates, duration of flow
periods, sensitivity to different variables, etc.).
The output from Advanced Simulation includes:
Flowing pressure in each well.

Total downhole Flow Rate in each well.
Downhole Flow Rates from each layer in each well.
Layer pressures at selected Observation Points in the reservoir.

General:
To run Advanced Simulation, the following input data are required:
Well Parameters, per Well.
Layer Parameters, including the Reservoir Flow Model and associated Model
Parameters (i.e. k, S, etc.), per Layer.
Image Wells for any Boundaries, per Layer.
Fluid Parameters, per Layer.

Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation 26
Surface Flow Rate Schedule to drive the Simulation, per Well.
Initial Wellbore and Layer Pressures, per Well and per Layer.
These are all normally entered in the Data Preparation area of the program via
the Gauge Data ribbon, but some are accessible outside of Data Preparation by
direct edit of the model parameters using the Model option on the Model
selection ribbon of the Analysis view (refer to the Select Analysis Model
Dialog).
Also required are:
Simulation control parameters.

Positions of Observation Points (optional).
These are specified in the Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.
Well Data:
For initialization of the well data, refer to the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description Dialog. If more than one well is to be configured, they must all
be vertical (including slant) or all horizontal. The choice of this orientation is
reflected in the reservoir flow models available (via the Flow Model section of
the Layer Parameters dialog).
The Principal Well is the well of main interest - normally the well in which
the test has been, or will be, run. The Principal Well co-ordinates are (0, 0). All
other wells are considered to be interfering wells, and their coordinate
locations are referenced to (0, 0). The time-steps used for response
computation are defined for the Principal Well, and the rate schedules for any
other wells are sampled against these time-steps.
Layer Data:
For initialization of the Layer Data, refer to the Layer Control section of the
Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog. If more than one Layer is to be
configured, each Layer can have its own characteristics.
A flow model must be selected for each layer (i.e. Free Model is not allowed),
and the relevant model parameters entered.
The current set of flow models assumes no vertical communication within the
reservoir between the defined layers. However, cross-flow in the wellbore
will be faithfully reproduced by Advanced Simulation where it occurs.

Vertical communication between layers is implicit within the dual-porosity

(i.e. two layer block model) and dual-permeability models - refer to the
Select Analysis Model Dialog. In both cases, a second layer is implicit in
the model parameters , and and does not have to be defined as a
separate layer. Thus, if Layer 3 in Data Preparation is assigned the
dual-permeability flow model, it will behave as if it were two layers with
internal cross-flow.
i
For horizontal well models and others that develop pseudo-radial flow at late
time, note that the skin factor entered should be the true (i.e. mechanical) skin
(S), not the pseudo-radial skin. The term (S) always refers to the true skin at
the wellbore.
Layer Boundaries:
For initialization of the Layer Boundaries, refer to the Boundary Model dialog
and Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog (accessed via the Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog). Also refer to the Boundary Type Dialog
(accessed via the Simulation view). If more than one layer has been
configured, each layer can either have its own boundaries or be infinite
acting.
For reservoir models other than radial homogeneous, the computation of

boundary effects in Advanced Simulation is strictly valid only if the boundaries
are far enough from the well for pseudo-radial flow to have developed by the
time the first boundary is encountered. This is because the signals from the
image wells are modeled as radial homogeneous (exponential integral
function).
For example, when modeling boundaries with one of the vertical fracture
models, the response should have reached pseudo-radial flow (i.e. it should
be out of linear flow) before the effect of any boundary appears. This
requires that the nearest boundary be approximately two fracture
half-lengths (~2Xf) away from the well. If the boundary is positioned too
close, so that boundary effects appear during linear fracture flow, the
computed boundary response will not be valid.
This applies equally to horizontal well models. Any boundaries should be

approximately one well length (~ Lw) away from any point in the wellbore.

Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation 26
The Estimated Test Duration (entered in the sub-dialog of the same name),
should include the entire test sequence (e.g. do not exclude the flowing
period just because the primary interest is directed towards the build-up; a 24
hour shut-in following a 1,000 hour drawdown constitutes a 1,024 hours test
duration. The test duration controls the number of image wells generated. If
the duration is underestimated, the late-time simulated response will be
wrong).
!
Do not forget to re-calculate the Image Wells if a Boundary Geometry is
altered, the Test Duration is extended (or reduced), or the Reservoir Properties
are altered.
Fluid Parameters:
For initialization of the Fluid Parameters refer to the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description Dialog and the relevant Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs for Oil, Gas
and Condensate. Only one type of fluid is allowed for all layers configured in
the reservoir. However, within the selected fluid type, each layer can have
different fluid parameters.
The only restriction is in the use of pseudo-pressure tables - only one table
can be used for all layers in the simulation. If an m(p) table has been
computed for each layer, users will be able to select which one to use, via the
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.
Flow Rates:
The Simulation is driven by the surface Flow Rate schedule of the Principal
Well. This may consist of a single flowing period or a sequence of Flow Rates
including shut-ins.
The rate sequence is divided into a number of time-steps, and a computation

is performed at each step. More time-steps will produce a more detailed
pressure response, but will entail a longer total computation time.
If interfering wells are configured (i.e. more than one well is present), they
may each be assigned their own independent surface rate schedule. These
rate sequences will be digitized at the Principal Well time-steps, so that all
computations can be performed at these times.

Advanced Simulation - History Matching
All simulated well pressure responses will therefore be output at a common

set of times. The Principal Well surface rate data and time-steps can be input
in two ways:
For Test Design, users type in the desired rate sequence and specify the
computation time steps (refer to Edit Test Design).
For History Matching, where users have already loaded and set-up well
test data for analysis, they can use the surface rate schedule already
specified in the Rate Changes Table. There is no need to type in any more
data.
In this case, the time-steps for computation will correspond to the gauge clock
times. Computations are not made during flow periods that do not have
Gauge Data readings (e.g. any rate history prior to positioning the gauge), but
superposition effects from these periods will be correctly modeled provided
they have been specified in the Rate Changes Table.
If gauge data readings are erratically spaced (e.g. gaps, too many points, etc.),
users may prefer to generate a better looking response with regular spacings,
by using the Test Design facility in the Data Preparation view. It is still possible
to import the Rate Schedule from the Rate Changes Table, but users will be able
to specify their own time-steps with regular logarithmic or linear spacing
instead of using the gauge clock times.

Flow Rates for History Matching:
For history matching to an existing well test data set, the Test Design option
from the Data Preparation view can be used, but since the surface rate
sequence has already been specified in the Rate Changes Table, users can let
Advanced Simulation pick this up, and use the gauge clock times for the
computation time-steps (i.e. assuming users have already set-up the Gauge
Data File for analysis - if not, refer to Data Preparation).
In this case, no pressure computations can be made during flow periods that
do not have gauge data points (e.g. any rate history prior to positioning the
gauge), but superposition effects from these periods will be correctly
modeled provided they have been specified in the Rate Changes Table.

Advanced Simulation - History Matching 26
Principal Well:
The well tested is by definition, the Principal Well. The Principal Well surface
rate data appears in the Rate Changes Table (i.e. initialized when the test
periods are defined prior to performing the analysis of the data). There are
three ways to approach the question of Flow Rates for the Principal Well. The
first option is the most likely:
1. If the Test Design facility (refer to Edit Test Design dialog) in the Data
Preparation view is not going to be used to create the surface rate column to
drive Advanced Simulation, no further action is required for the Principal Well.
A temporary rate column to drive Advanced Simulation will be created
automatically from the Rate Changes Table. This happens (invisibly) on
entering Analysis, and this temporary rate is used by Advanced Simulation
subsequently.
! Users should always go into Analysis first when they leave Data Preparation,
then into Advanced Simulation.
2. Alternatively, a rate column can be created via the Create Rate option on the
Rate Changes ribbon of the Data Preparation view, then used to drive Advanced
Simulation, but this is not generally necessary. Use the Step Rate Option from
the Create Rate Column Dialog, if this option is utilized.
3. If the Test Design facility is used, the Transfer button in the Edit Test Design,
can be used to copy over the Rate Changes Table times and rates - all users have
to do then is specify the time-stepping.
This facility is useful if Advanced Simulation is to be used for history matching

against gauge data, but instead of letting PanSystem use the gauge clock
times for response generation, users can specify the time-steps. This might be
the preferred option if the gauge clock times are irregularly spaced (i.e. using
Test Design will provide a regular spacing), or there may be too many points
(i.e. users can control the number of steps using Test Design).

However, the pressure column generated via Test Design is assigned to a

different file name and cannot be overlaid directly with the gauge data on
any of the diagnostic plots. Users can compare data on the Data Edit Plot, but
to do this on a diagnostic plot, the simulated pressures must first be copied
and re-sampled into the Gauge Data file using the Copy and Resample to a
New Column button from the Gauge Data ribbon of the Data Preparation
view.
Other Wells (if any):
If users wish to include the interfering effects of other wells, initialize these
wells and their parameters if this has not already been done (refer to Well
Data section in Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation).
In the Explorer Pane, select an interfering well (i.e. if there is more than one)
from the Data files/Columns list in the Workspace area. Either enter new times
and Flow Rates for each well independently, or use the time-steps created for
the principal well and just enter the different Flow Rates.
Select the Test Design button, to generate a Confirm sub-dialog, with the
message - Do you wish to use the Principal Well Times?. It is faster to select
the No option at the prompt and type in the rate schedule without using the
principal well times.
Implementation Example:
Data Input:
The Advanced Simulation Control Dialog as it would appear for a

single-well/single-layer history match is illustrated below:

Figure 203: Advanced Simulation Control Dialog
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The pressure response in each well is

computed according to the surface rates specified by the user. The
surface rate column names are displayed here for each well in the
reservoir. In the above example, the Flow Rate column is the
temporary one automatically created from the Rate Changes Table on
entry into Analysis (refer to Flow Rates for History Matching above).
If there is a choice of rate data names available for any well, users can
select the appropriate one from the pull-down menu. Normally there
would be no choice.
Output Datafile Name: The names indicate the data file names under
which the simulated data columns will be grouped for each well.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this button and enter
names (max 15 characters) for the simulated flowing pressure, total
downhole Flow Rate and individual layer Flow Rates, or leave the
default names.

Layer area:
Solution Model area: Ignore this area unless an alternative response

function to one or more layers is to be supplied. The supplied
dimensionless response function for the selected flow model is
displayed - FINWBR is the finite wellbore radius solution for radial
flow in a homogeneous medium.
The response functions available for the particular reservoir flow

model assigned to each layer can be listed via the drop-down menu,
and can be re-assigned if a choice exists. If users want to change the
flow model (for history matching to gauge data), they need to select
the Model option on the Analysis view and use the Select Analysis
Model Dialog.
These response functions are dimensionless tables supplied with

PanSystem, with the extension (*.TCX). They have the same format as
the Type-Curve files (refer to Type-Curve File for details) and are
stored in the Type-Curve Directory. This enables alternative
user-supplied solutions to be used in Advanced Simulation (refer to
Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves).
Speed Option area: The speed option determines the speed of the
computation. Speed is traded off against the detail with which rate
variations are treated by superposition.
Additional Information area:
m(p) Layer: Ignore this if there is only one layer and/or an oil or water
fluid type. For gas and condensate fluid types, if there are several
layers with different fluid properties, users must select which
pseudo-pressure table to use in the simulation (no mixing of
pseudo-properties is possible).
Gauge Details: If required, the effects of pressure gauge characteristics

(e.g. resolution, noise and/or drift), can be included in the simulated
response.
Observation Points button: An Observation Point is a remote point defined

in the reservoir at coordinates (x, y), at which pressure will be calculated.
Up to 5 points can be specified. Where there are several layers, a
pressure is calculated at each point in each layer.

Start Pressures button: This allows users to alter Start Pressures without
leaving Simulation Mode. These pressures are assumed to be referenced to
a common datum (i.e. there is no hydrostatic difference between layers).
The initial condition of the system (i.e. at time zero) influences the
computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer Pressure of each layer
(i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
ribbon of the Data Preparation view) and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in
each well (i.e. set-up via Rate Changes in Data Preparation) are therefore
important.
Simulated Response:
After the calculation run, the simulated pressures and Flow Rates exist as data
channels which are accessible for edit, analysis, etc., just like any real gauge
data.
The following data columns will have been created, using the names specified
in the Advanced Simulation Control dialog:
Wellbore pressure and total downhole Flow Rate (i.e. at standard

conditions) in each well.
Sandface Flow Rate (i.e. at standard conditions) for each layer in each
well.
Layer pressure in each layer at each Observation Point (if any).
The simplest (and quickest) application of the simulated data is the Pressure
Overlay for History Matching, created via the Overlay Pressure dialog (refer
also to the comments on the manipulation of data under Figure on page 686;
these apply equally to data generated for History Matching, if users wish to go
further than the Pressure Overlay).
Once the pressure response has been generated, the most straightforward use
to which it can be put is to overlay it with available gauge data for
comparison. This is the History Matching aspect of Advanced Simulation, and
assumes, that users have well test data already set-up for Analysis.
Since the simulated pressure exists as a data column, it could be plotted along
with field data in Data Preparation. However, to avoid leaving the
Analysis/Simulation environment, it is preferable to select Test Overview on the
Plot types ribbon of the Analysis view. Select a test period and go to a suitable
diagnostic plot, or stay in Test Overview Plot.

Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design

Flow Rates for Test Design:
For well test design, users specify the rate sequence to be used for each well
via the Edit Test Design button on the Test Design ribbon of the Data
Preparation view. Firstly, select a well (i.e. if there is more than one) from the
Workspace.
The subsequent procedure depends on whether the selected well is the

Principal Well or not.
Principal Well:
Select a well to be Principal Well, then select the Test Design button to generate
the Edit Test Design dialog and enter Flow Rate data for the Principal Well.
Figure 204: Edit Test Design Dialog
Once the Test Design has been edited, select OK to generate a Test Design
Sub-Dialog.

Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design 26
Figure 205: Test Design Sub-Dialog
Fill in a name for the internal Data File that will be created (i.e. default name
TEST DESIGN) and for the Rate Column (i.e. default name Test Rate).
The Initial Wellbore Pressure is defaulted to the pressure of Layer 1, specified in

the Layer Parameters dialog, but can be changed if desired.
i
This is a Wellbore Pressure - if different from the Layer Pressure/s, Advanced
Simulation will compute production (if under-balanced) or injection (if
over-balanced) during the early time-steps.
On selecting OK from the Test Design sub-dialog, this will create a surface rate
channel with rate values at each of the time-steps chosen (e.g., 50
logarithmically spaced). This is what will drive Advanced Simulation. If this
surface rate data is subsequently plotted, the time-steps will be visible. These
time-steps can be viewed or edited via the Edit Test Design button in the Test
Design view, in the same way as any other data columns.
Other Wells:
If multiple wells are present, users can either enter new times and Flow Rates
for each well independently, or use the time-steps created for the Principal
Well and just enter different Flow Rates. Proceed as follows:
Select an interfering well (i.e. one that is not the Principal Well) from the
drop-down list in the Well to Edit section, then select the Test Design button, to
generate a Confirm sub-dialog, with the message - Do you wish to use the
Principal Well Times?. By selecting the No option (i.e. recommended and
default option), a Test Design Sub-Dialog is generated for user input of Test
Design Data Names.

Figure 206: Test Design Sub-Dialog II
The surface rate data for Well 2 has been given the name Well 2 Qsurf in the
Rate Column for this example. The Data File name has defaulted to TEST
DESIGN and the Initial Wellbore Pressure has also defaulted to the pressure of
Layer 1, but both can be changed if desired (e.g. TEST DESIGN2). On
selecting OK, an Edit Test Design sub-dialog is generated.
Figure 207: Edit Test Design Sub-Dialog

Enter the surface rate schedule for Well 2 (assumed to start at time = zero). In
this example, the well will be producing at 7.5 m3/day for 50 hours (i.e., the
duration of the period to be simulated at Well 1). Select OK.
After selecting the Test Design button, if users answer Yes in the confirmation
dialog (i.e. only recommended if a rate is to be entered at every time-step), a
i
sub-dialog will prompt for data names and initial wellbore pressure in the same
way as for answering No. The Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog
that appears next is also the same as for answering No, except that all the
time-steps of the Principal Well are listed. Type in the interfering well rates (i.e.
where non-zero) at each time (the Function button option can be used for block
entries of the same rate value).
This is obviously the more tedious approach and would not normally be
used. Both approaches will result in the creation of a surface rate column for
the well called TEST DESIGN2:Well2 Qsurf, in the Data Files/Columns List
section of the Workspace.
Regardless of which entry mode used (i.e., Yes or No), the surface rate
schedule for interfering wells will be sampled only at the time-steps of the
Principal Well for simulation purposes. The No option is the quickest way of
entering data and can be used in most situations.
If the well, layer, fluid and boundary parameters have already been set-up,
proceed to the Advanced Simulation option under the Simulation view.
Implementation Example:
Data Input:
The Advanced Simulation Control Dialog as it would appear for a

two-well/three-layer reservoir Test Design is illustrated below:

Figure 208: Advanced Simulation Control Dialog
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The pressure response in each well is

computed according to the surface rates specified by the user. The
surface rate column names are displayed here for each well in the
reservoir. In the above example, the surface rate for Well-1 is Test
Rate, and for Well-2 is Well2 Qsurf, set-up using the Test Design
option as described earlier.
If there is a choice of rate data names available for any well, users can
select the appropriate one from the pull-down menu. Normally there
would be no choice.
Output Datafile Name: The names indicate the data file names under
which the simulated data columns will be grouped for each well. For
example, in illustration above, the simulated response for Well 1 will
appear as extra columns under the TEST DESIGN file name. This
name cannot be edited. The simulated response for Well 2 will
appear as columns of data under the new file name SIMULATED that
will be created for Well 2. This name can be edited.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this button and enter
names (max 15 characters) for the simulated flowing pressure, total
downhole Flow Rate and individual layer Flow Rates, or leave the
default names.

Layer area:
Solution Model area: Ignore this area unless an alternative response

function to one or more layers is to be supplied. The supplied
dimensionless response function for the selected flow model is
displayed - FINWBR is the finite wellbore radius solution for radial
flow in a homogeneous medium applied to Layers 1 and 3, and
INFCON is infinite conductivity, vertical fracture solution applied to
Layer 2.
The response functions available for the particular reservoir flow

model assigned to each layer can be listed via the drop-down menu,
and can be re-assigned if a choice exists. If users want to change the
flow model (for history matching to gauge data), they need to select
the Model option on Model Selection ribbon of the Analysis menu and
use the Select Analysis Model Dialog.
These response functions are dimensionless tables supplied with

PanSystem, with the extension (*.TCX). They have the same format as
the Type-Curve files (refer to Type-Curve File for details) and are
stored in the Type-Curve Directory. This enables alternative
user-supplied solutions to be used in Advanced Simulation (refer to
Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves).
Speed Option area: The speed option determines the speed of the
computation. Speed is traded off against the detail with which rate
variations are treated by superposition.
m(p) Layer: Ignore this if there is only one layer and/or an oil or water
fluid type. For gas and condensate fluid types, if there are several
layers with different fluid properties, users must select which
pseudo-pressure table to use in the simulation (no mixing of
pseudo-properties is possible).
Gauge Details: If required, the effects of pressure gauge characteristics

(e.g. resolution, noise and/or drift), can be included in the simulated
response.
Observation Points button: An Observation Point is a remote point defined

in the reservoir at coordinates (x, y), at which pressure will be calculated.
Up to 5 points can be specified. Where there are several layers, a pressure
is calculated at each point in each layer.

Start Pressures button: This allows users to alter Start Pressures without
leaving Simulation Mode. These pressures are assumed to be referenced to
a common datum (i.e. there is no hydrostatic difference between layers).
The initial condition of the system (i.e. at time zero) influences the
computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer Pressure of each layer
(i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description)
and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in each well (i.e. set-up via Rate Changes in
Data Preparation) are therefore important.
Simulated Response:
After the calculation run, the simulated pressures and Flow Rates exist as data
channels which are accessible for edit, analysis, etc., just like any real gauge
data.
The following data columns will have been created, using the names specified
in the Advanced Simulation Control dialog:
Wellbore pressure and total downhole Flow Rate (i.e. at standard

conditions) in each well.
Sandface Flow Rate (i.e. at standard conditions) for each layer in each
well.
Layer pressure in each layer at each Observation Point (if any).

Figure 209: Pressure and Rate Data Preparation Dialog
In this example illustrated for Well 1:
The file Test Rate is the name given to the input surface rate schedule that
drove the simulation. Well pressure and associated Flow Rate columns
are all grouped under the file name TEST DESIGN.
The file Sim P, is the simulated flowing pressure response, default name.
Similarly, the file Sim Q Total, is the simulated total downhole Flow Rate
for the well (i.e. as would be observed above the top perforations). The
consecutive files Sim Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc., are the sandface Flow Rates from
each layer. All Flow Rates are at standard conditions and grouped under
the file name SIMULATED.
The consecutive files Obs 1 Layer 1, Obs 1 Layer 2, etc., are the pressures
calculated in each layer at the co-ordinates of the Observation Point #1
(refer to Advanced Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog). They
are grouped under the file name Observation.
The Well 2 data follows a similar format, except:
The file Well 2 Qsurf is the name given to the input surface rate schedule
that drove the simulation. Well pressure and associated Flow Rate
columns are all grouped under the file name TEST DESIGN2.

All the simulation data (e.g. Sim P, etc.), for Well 2 are distinct from the
analogous data for Well 1.
There is no observation data for Well 2.
Inspection of Simulated Data:
Once the simulated data channels have been created in Advanced Simulation,
they have the same status as real gauge data and can be treated in the same
way. All aspects of the Gauge Data ribbon are applicable. To examine the
overall test response versus time, select the appropriate well, highlight the
data to be plotted and include it in the List to Plot (e.g. Well 1, Sim P), then
select the Test Overview button. Data can be inspected and edited using the
Data Edit Plot option.
Analysis of Simulated Data:
Data can also be analyzed on the diagnostic plots.
Single- Well, Single-Layer: If new data has been generated using Test
Design, the Rate Changes Table will be set up automatically and users can
proceed directly with Analysis. Select the Test Overview option from Plot
types ribbon on the Analysis view and proceed as usual. This greatly
speeds-up the process of generation and inspection.
Multi-Well, Multi-Layer: In more complex situations with several wells

and/or layers, some selections may have to be made before going into
Analysis:
If more than one well is present, first select the one to be analyzed.
Using the Workspace pane, select the well for analysis.
Select the Data File (group name), Pressure and Rate columns to be
analyzed in the Data Files/Columns List section (i.e., there will be a
choice if users have kept more than one run of simulated data).

Figure 210: Pressure and Rate Data Selection
In this example, the total downhole rate Sim Q Total, could have been chosen
instead of the surface rate Test Rate. The selection of downhole rate enables
users to correct for wellbore storage effects and other sources of rate
variation.
If the pressure data for a particular layer in a multi-layer reservoir is to be

analyzed, rather than the whole system, select the corresponding downhole
rate column name (e.g. Sim Q#1 for Layer 1).
If users wish to analyze the response of a multi-layer system as a single

composite unit, it is necessary to create a composite layer with average
properties using the Create Composite Sub-Dialog from the Well, Reservoir
& Fluid Description ribbon, then return to the Workspace and select the surface
rate Test Rate or total downhole rate Sim Q Total, for use in the analysis of the
simulated flowing pressure response Sim P.
Now select OK and select the Plot option from the Analysis menu.
For a multi-well or multi-layer configuration, the Analysis Selection dialog is

generated.
Ensure that the appropriate well and layer are selected for analysis. They
should be consistent with the response data selected (e.g. the pressures and
rates for Layer 3, at stage 2 above). If the wrong well/layer are selected, the
wrong set of layer and fluid parameters will be used in the analysis of the
selected pressure data.
i Remember that if one layer is being analyzed, the Flow Rate for that layer
should be used, not the total well rate (refer to stage 2 instructions).

Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves
Refer to Analysis Plot Overview to proceed.
ADVANCED SIMULATION - GENERATING

TYPE-CURVES
General:
The data displayed on a Log-Log Plot can be exported in dimensionless

Type-Curve format This process is described in the Help topic for Export to
Type-Curve File dialog.
If a pressure response is generated with Advanced Simulation, it can be saved

in dimensionless form by first preparing it for Analysis (refer to Analysis of
Simulated Data in Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design), then
displaying it on the Log-Log Plot.
The TypeCurve option from Export Data ribbon of the Import/Export Data
view, lists the available Type-Curve file extensions for the particular flow
model concerned (refer to the PanSystem File Structures - Type-Curve File for
details of the file format).
Creating Type-Curves:
With this facility users can create their own Type-Curves from Advanced
Simulation (e.g. for bounded or multi-layered reservoirs). Once created, they
are available in the Type-Curve directory (typcurv) for use in Type-Curve
Analysis via the User-Selected Type-Curve option in the Select Type-Curve
Match. When this option is selected and users OK from the Select Type Curve
dialog, a File Open sub-dialog is generated to select suitable curves from the
Type-Curve directory (typcurv).

Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves 26
Creating a Solution Model:
The (*.TCX) export format is only available for the radial homogeneous flow
model and is represented by a table of dimensionless time (Td) and
dimensionless pressure (Pd) values in Type-Curve format (refer to Type-Curve
File for details of the file structure) that can be picked up from the Type-Curve
directory (typcurv) by Advanced Simulation and used as an alternative flow
model within the Solution Model area of the Advanced Simulation Control
Dialog. The (*.TCX) files are all constant rate drawdown responses;
build-ups, etc. are handled by superposition.
Example:
A constant-rate drawdown, bounded reservoir response is generated with

Advanced Simulation (e.g. a closed reservoir needing a large number of image
wells), then saved as a (*.TCX) file called BOUND1.
An alphanumeric curve label is inserted at the prompt (i.e. maximum of 15

characters).
The response function is saved to the Type-Curve directory (typcurv). For any
subsequent runs, the image wells can be eliminated and this alternative
model can be used by selecting the new (*.TCX) file name within the Solution
Model area of the Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.
The image wells are no longer needed because the boundaries are now
implicit in the flow model, so they must be cancelled in the Boundary
Parameters Sub-Dialog (accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description Dialog), by setting the boundary model to Infinitely Acting.
Computation time is then reduced dramatically.
In this particular example, the substitution will be valid provided the

permeability is not changed, since this would alter the dimensionless time at
which the boundary response would be observed.
Hints for Generating (*.TCX) Files:
For those who wish to use this facility for generating a custom response
function with Advanced Simulation, some guidelines are provided below to
ensure good results:

Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves
Using the Test Design facility (i.e. described in Advanced Simulation - Well
Test Design), set-up an Advanced Simulation for a constant-rate drawdown
and follow these steps:
1. The duration of this drawdown period should greatly exceed the total
duration of the test that will subsequently be simulated (e.g. 106 hours). The
50 logarithmically-spaced steps (default setting) are usually adequate. The
Flow Rate is irrelevant because the pressure response will be saved in
dimensionless form - use a typical value.
2. Use the correct permeability, porosity, etc. It is advisable to set the wellbore
storage coefficient (Cs) and skin factors (S and D), to zero so that the (*.TCX)
file represents the clean base response. Any desired (Cs), (S) and (D), can
be imposed during the subsequent simulation runs with the (*.TCX) file.
3. The (*.TCX) export facility is currently only available for the radial
homogeneous flow model. To save a (*.TCX) file from a different flow model,
generate the response using the desired model, then switch to radial
homogeneous before selecting the TypeCurve option from the Export Data
ribbon of the Import/Export Data view.
4. When using the (*.TCX) response file for subsequent Advanced Simulation
runs, remember that the image wells are no longer required for the
boundaries, so cancel them in the Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog
(accessed from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog), by setting
the boundary model to Infinitely Acting.
5. Although the (*.TCX) file has been generated for a constant-rate drawdown, it
can be used for any subsequent flow sequence and superposition will be
correctly modeled.
6. If boundaries have been included in the (*.TCX) response, do not change
parameters (k), ( ), () or (Ct) when the response is used, as this will
invalidate the characteristic length (L) of the boundary geometry.
7. Since the (*.TCX) file has to be saved as a radial homogeneous model (refer to
step 3), it follows that in order to be able to pick it up within the Solution
Model area of the Advanced Simulation Control Dialog, the layer must be
configured as radial homogeneous.
8. A (*.TCX) file can be generated for each layer in a multi-layered reservoir by
making a base run of Advanced Simulation for each layer separately (i.e. one at
a time). The multi-layered system can then be modeled by configuring all
layers and specifying the appropriate (*.TCX) file for each one in the Solution
Model area of the Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.

Advanced Automatic Matching Sub-Dialog 26
ADVANCED AUTOMATIC MATCHING

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Advanced button in the Solution

Method area of the Figure on page 668. It is used to apply different settings to
the regression calculations performed in Auto Match. Users would not
normally need to alter these settings, but the facility is included or flexibility.
Parameter Transform: This uses the logarithm of each variable in the

regression. This generally produces better results and is ON by default
(i.e. checked).
Parameter Re-Scaling: Normalizes the variables with respect to their upper

and lower limits so they lie in the range 0 to 1.0. This also produces better
results and is ON by default (i.e. checked).
MATCHING PROGRESS SUB-DIALOG

General:
This sub-dialog is generated from the Automatic Matching Dialog by

selecting the OK button, and indicates the progress of the current Auto Match
process. After the process is complete, selecting OK in the Match Progress
sub-dialog returns users back to the Quick Match Dialog.
i A "ticker" (<>) will appear in the Current Iteration area during slow iterations to
indicate that the system is working.

Matching Progress Sub-Dialog
Screen Dialogs and Operational Instructions:
Current Iteration area: This shows the number of iterations required to

reach a solution for the current settings. As indicated above, a moving
ticker (<>) indicates that the system is working.
Goodness of Match area: This is the root mean square deviation of the
Pressure for the current iteration. The regression will stop if this drops
below the Match Quality tolerance set in the Automatic Matching
Dialog.
Current Estimate area: This displays the current estimates of parameter

values based on the regression settings and Quick Match simulation.
Stop button: Select this button to terminate the regression before it has
finished normally. It is necessary to wait until the end of the current
iteration before anything happens.
Confidence button: This button generates the Enter Model Parameter dialog,
where users are prompted to confirm the Pressure Gauge Resolution, then
OK. This is followed by two information dialogs in succession providing
statistical information on the Match:
Confidence Interval: This sub-dialog presents the optimized estimates

for the variable Parameters. The true value of each Parameter has a
95% probability of lying within the Confidence Intervals.
Figure 211: 95% Confidence Intervals for each optimized Parameter
Parameter Correlations: This sub-dialog presents the correlation

between Parameters. A coefficient above 0.95 indicates a strong
degree of correlation between a pair of Parameters.

Matching Progress Sub-Dialog 26
Figure 212: Correlation between Parameters
OK button: Select this button to trigger the response generation and

return to the Quick Match Dialog. The resulting plot is redrawn with
the test and simulated data displayed in conjunction with a Quick Match
dialog. This enables users to further refine the Match if required (i.e. edit
the parameters, then select the Calculate button in the Quick Match dialog):
Figure 213: Example of an Optimized Parameter Match on a Horner

Build-Up Plot
From this point users can either:
OK/Confirm to exit the Quick Match facility and write the Parameter Values to
the Reservoir Description.

Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog
Cancel to return to the Plot and clear all traces of the Response Generation.
Initial Pressure: When using Auto Match on the Test Overview Plot, if users do
not click on any particular Test Period, the Initial Pressure will also be included
as a Parameter to be optimized.
ADVANCED SIMULATION/PANFLOW RATE

SIMULATION DIALOG
General:
This generic dialog is generated by selecting either the Advanced Simulation or

PanFlow Rate Simulation options from the Simulation view. Select one of the
options below to access the specific Help topic for these menu options:
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog

Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog
ADVANCED SIMULATION CONTROL

DIALOG
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Advanced Simulation option from the
Analytical Simulation ribbon on the Simulation view. This option performs the
same function as Quick Match as far as the validation of an interpretation is
concerned, but there are three important differences:
The model is not restricted to a Single-Well/Single-Layer, so Multi-Layer

effects and interference from other Wells can be included.
The characteristics of the Pressure Gauge (i.e. Resolution, Noise and Drift),
can be included in the Simulated Pressure Response (refer to Gauge
Details).

Advanced Simulation Control Dialog 26
The Simulated Data are not temporary, but are written to new Data
Columns and can be saved to disk in Real and Dimensionless form for
future use. The Flowing Pressure, Total Downhole Flow Rate and individual
Layer Downhole Flow Rates are computed.
To introduce the basic mechanics of Advanced Simulation, this Help topic will
deal with the same Single-Well/Single-Layer case (as was used to explain the
Quick Match and Auto Match facilities).
The full capabilities of this facility are covered in detail in Figure on page 675.
The Reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model (if included), must be fully
initialized. This can be built up in three ways:
During the Data Preparation (i.e. Data Preparation) stage (with particular
reference to Layer Parameters).
During Analysis of diagnostic plots (refer to Confirm Results).
During Analysis by direct edit of the model parameters (refer to Select

Analysis Model Dialog).
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The Pressure Response in each Well is

computed according to user-defined Surface Rates. The Surface Rate
Column Names are displayed here for each Well in the Reservoir.
Normally, there will be no choice, but in some cases, the nominal
Surface Rates (i.e. Test Rate) and a measured Downhole (i.e. Spinner)
Rate may be available for a particular well test. Select the appropriate
Column Name for each Well from the drop-down list.
Output Datafile Name: Enter the Output Data file name in this field.
This is picked up automatically when the Rate Column is selected.
The Simulated Data will be written to this file.

Output Column Names (Names button): Select this option to generate

the Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog. The Advanced
Simulation facility will generate the Wellbore Pressure with a default
name Sim P. It will also generate the Sandface Rate from each Layer
(i.e. in or out) and the Total Rate (i.e. the sum of the Sandface Rates
from all Layers). The default Names will be Sim Q Total, Sim Q#1, Sim
Q#2, etc. If users wish to change these, select the button and enter
new Names.
The Sim Q Total rate will be identical to the Surface Rate, except
during the Wellbore Storage dominated period. For a Single-Layered
Model, Sim Q Total will be identical to Sim Q#1.
Layer area:
Solution Model: Some models are supplied as ascii lookup tables

(*.TCX) stored in the ..\typecurv folder, others are internal
computations. Users can ignore this area unless they wish to supply
an alternative response function (where defined by a lookup table) to
one or more Layers. In this case, select the required Solution Model
(*.TCX) file/s from the drop-down list.
Speed Option area:
This section is largely obsolete for todays fast computers. The selection
determines the speed and precision of the computation. Speed is
traded-off against the detail with which Rate Variations are treated
(economy of superposition). Selecting "1" is slowest but most accurate,
"4" is fastest but may introduce errors, particularly during the
Storage-Dominated period. Higher speeds are recommended for trial runs
and may prove quite adequate. Gas Wells with Storage and Non-Darcy
Skin often need the slowest speed, "1" to obtain good Results.
m(p) and B Layer: Select the Layer m(p) table to use from the
drop-down list. Ignore this if there is only one Layer or if the Fluid
Type is Water or Oil (i.e. Single-Phase or Multi-Phase (Perrine) Method).
For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types or Oil (Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure), if there are several Layers with different Fluid
Properties, users must select which set of Pseudo-Pressure tables and
other Fluid Properties to use in the Simulation (i.e. no mixing of
Pseudo-Properties is possible).

Gauge Details button: This generates the Gauge Details Dialog. This
allows users to specify the technical characteristics of the Pressure
Gauge. This is optional and Real Gauge Characteristics may be ignored
if required.
i
If working in Test Design, users are recommended to use a large number of
linearly spaced time-steps to create the appearance of Real Gauge Data in the
Simulation.
Observation Points button: This button generates the Advanced

Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog. An Observation Point is a
remote point (x, y), defined in the Reservoir, at which Pressure is also
calculated. Where there are several Layers, the Pressure is calculated in
each Layer.
i In order for Pseudo-Radial flow to occur, the Observation Points must be far
enough away from the active Well/s.
Start Pressures button: This button generates the PanFlow Start

Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog. The sub-dialog allows users to alter Start
Pressures without leaving Simulation Mode. These Pressures are assumed
to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is no hydrostatic
difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system (i.e. at time
zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer
Pressure of each Layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Data
Preparation) and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in each Well (i.e. set-up via
Rate Changes in Data Preparation) are therefore important.
Implementation:
When this dialog is initialized, select OK to start the Simulation. The

Advanced Simulation) will be displayed. Let the Simulation run to the end,
then select OK in the sub-dialog. To terminate the Simulation before the end,
select Stop in the sub-dialog; the Response generated to that point will be
retained and the remaining time-steps will be assigned zero pressures.

Once the Simulation has finished users will be returned to the plot. To display
the Simulated Pressure select the Overlay Pressure option from the View menu.
In the Overlay Pressure dialog, select the Pressure Column Name to display,
check the Show checkbox, then select OK. The Simulated Data will
subsequently appear on the plot. It is possible to overlay on any other
diagnostic plot types.
i
If an overlay is undertaken on any plot whose Y-axis involves pressure (p),
(e.g. the Log-Log Plot), the Simulated Data will only plot correctly if (T0, P0)
at the start of the Test Period are identical for the field and Simulated Data.
Remember that the Rate Changes Table has been set up for real Gauge Data.
Message Dialogs:
If users are issued with the following error message:
it means that data Columns already exist with the Names that have been
selected. This will most likely arise when users make a second Advanced
Simulation run using the default output Names; these will obviously conflict
with the Columns generated from the first run.
If users want to keep the first run output, select Cancel and specify new
Names for the data to be computed in the dialog that appears.
If users do not wish to keep the output from the previous run, select OK and
it will be overwritten by computed data from the current run.
The calculations will now proceed.
For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types with a Turbulent Skin (i.e. Rate-Dependent
Skin Coefficient D > 0), users will receive the following prompt:

The iteration option improves the Response calculation during periods of

varying Flow Rate (i.e. particularly Wellbore Storage, or immediately following
a Step-Rate Change). The computations will take slightly longer.
Once users initiate the calculations, a status box/counter is generated to

provide progress information:
When the computations have terminated, select the OK button to proceed to

the next stage. Users can abort the calculations at any time by selecting the
Stop button and they will be terminated at the end of the current time-step.
The Simulated data will be given zero values for any steps that were not
computed.
Material Balance Correction:
This option can be found in the Pressure Transformation Dialog in the

Analysis menu. It can be checked to enable the Material Balance Correction for
Gas, Condensate or Oil wells. It will only have an effect for the Closed System
and Hexagonal Boundary models, where it will correct Fluid Properties for
declining Reservoir Pressure. This provides improved simulation of extended
production periods by re-evaluating Fluid Properties particularly the
compressibility - as the Reservoir Pressure declines. If this option is not used
(i.e. unchecked), the initial Fluid Properties will be used (i.e. constant
Compressibility).
For infinite and semi-infinite systems, switching the correction on will have
no effect, because there will be no depletion.

Advanced Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog
The material balance correction will not be applied when the 2-cell
Compartmentalized boundary model has been selected.
The material balance correction is not currently available when the

multiphase pseudo-pressure is in use.
ADVANCED SIMULATION OBSERVATION

POINTS SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Observation Points button on the

Advanced Simulation Control Dialog. Use this option to enter Observation
Point data for the Advanced Simulation option.
An Observation Point is a remote point defined in the Reservoir at co-ordinates

(x, y), at which Pressure will be calculated. Up to 5 points can be specified.
Where there are several Layers, a Pressure is calculated at each point in each
Layer. In order for Pseudo-Radial Flow to occur the Observation Points must be
far enough away from the active Well/s.
It is physically equivalent to a newly-drilled Well lined with mud-cake, or an

unperforated cased Well. The Pressures can be compared with formation
tester measurements.
An Observation Point differs from a Well in the following ways:
A Well can be assigned Surface Flow Rates, a Storage Coefficient and Skin
Factor; an Observation Point is passive.
Even with no Surface Production, a Well allows cross-flow between Layers

via the wellbore when Pressure Differences occur. Cross-flow cannot occur
at an Observation Point.
Users may see differences between the Pressures computed at a Shut-In Well,
and at an Observation Point with the same co-ordinates.

PanFlow Rate Simulation - Progress Sub-Dialog (Calculating Advanced Simulation) 26
Example Application:
Computed Observation Point Pressure Data will be named automatically

according to the Point Number and Layer in a data file group called Observation
(e.g. Obs 1 Layer 2).
This shows the Data Files/Columns List area from the Workspace after an
Advanced Simulation run to Match the Gauge Data from a test being modeled as
a Two-Layer Reservoir:
Pressure #1, is measured Gauge Data.
Sim P, is simulated Well Pressure.
Sim Q Total, is the simulated Total Sandface Flow Rate.
Sim Q#1 and Sim Q#2, are simulated Sandface Flow Rates for each of the
two Layers.
The Observation group consists of the computed Layer Pressures at two

remote Observation Points.
PANFLOW RATE SIMULATION -

PROGRESS SUB-DIALOG (CALCULATING
ADVANCED SIMULATION)
General:
This sub-dialog shows the progress of the Advanced Simulation or PanFlow

Rate Simulation calculation process. There are only two function buttons:
OK: Select this button to return to the current plot.
Stop: Select this button to terminate the Simulation; the Response

generated to the termination point will be retained.

PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog
PANFLOW RATE SIMULATION DIALOG

General:
PanFlow determines the Sandface Flow Rate from the Wellbore Pressure for a
specified Reservoir and Boundary Model. The Wellbore Pressure is therefore an
input, while Sandface Flow Rate is the output.
This Simulation of Flow Rate from Flowing Pressure can be used to:
Generate missing Production Rates where Pressure Data are available.
Corroborate or enhance Flow Rate Data provided for the Rate History of a
Build-Up. This will allow an improved re-analysis of the Build-Up data,
and a consistent Analysis of the Flowing Periods (Reference 68).
Estimate Flow Rate from/into Layers as part of the Analysis of a

Multi-Layered Test (MLT), using Pressure Gauge and Spinner Flow Meter
(Reference 67).
PanFlow is effectively the inverse of Advanced Simulation, which derives the

Wellbore Pressure from the Surface Production Rate. PanFlow has the same
Multi-Layer, mixed Reservoir Model and Boundary Model capabilities as
Advanced Simulation, but for a Single-Well only.
i
Note that PanFlow computes the Sandface Flow Rates (i.e. converted to
standard conditions), which will differ from Surface Rates during the
Storage-Dominated period.
The full capabilities of PanFlow Rate Simulation are covered in greater detail
within Advanced Simulation - Overview.

PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog 26
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The Pressure Response in each Well is

computed according to user-defined Surface Rates. The Surface Rate
Column Names are displayed here for each Well in the Reservoir.
Normally, there will be no choice, but in some cases, the nominal
Surface Rates (i.e. Test Rate) and a measured Downhole (i.e. Spinner)
Rate may be available for a particular well test. Select the appropriate
Column Name for each Well from the drop-down list.
Output Datafile Name: Enter the Output Data file name in this field.
This is picked up automatically when the Rate Column is selected.
The Simulated Data will be written to this file.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this option to generate

the Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog. PanFlow will generate
the Wellbore Pressure with a default name Sim P. It will also generate
the Sandface Rate from each Layer (i.e. in or out) and the Total Rate (i.e.
the sum of the Sandface Rates from all Layers). The default Names will
be Sim Q Total, Sim Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc. If users wish to change these,
select the button and enter new Names.
The Sim Q Total Rate will be identical to the Surface Rate, except during the
Storage-Dominated period. For a Single-Layer Model, Sim Q Total will be
identical to Sim Q#1.
Layer area:
Solution Model: Users can ignore this area unless they wish to supply
an alternative Response function to one or more Layers. Select the
required Solution Model (*.TCX) file/s from the drop-down list.

PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog
Speed Option area:
This selection determines the speed and precision of the computation.

Speed is traded-off against the detail with which Rate Variations are
treated (economy of superposition). Selecting "1" is slowest but most
accurate, 4 is fastest but may introduce errors, particularly during the
Storage-Dominated period. Higher speeds are recommended for trial runs
and may prove quite adequate. Gas Wells with Storage and Non-Darcy
Skin often need the slowest speed, "1" to obtain good Results.
m(p) and B Layer: Select the Layer m(p) table to use from the
drop-down list. Ignore this if there is only one Layer or if the Fluid
Type is Water or Oil (i.e. Single-Phase or Multi-Phase (Perrine) Method).
For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types or Oil (Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure), if there are several Layers with different Fluid
Properties, users must select which set of Pseudo-Pressure tables and
other Fluid Properties to use in the Simulation (i.e. no mixing of
Pseudo-Properties is possible).
Gauge Details button: This button is not enabled for PanFlow Rate
Simulation.
Start Pressures button: This button generates the PanFlow Start

Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog. The sub-dialog allows users to alter Start
Pressures without leaving Simulation Mode. These Pressures are assumed
to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is no hydrostatic
difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system (i.e. at time
zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer
Pressure of each Layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Data
Preparation) is therefore important.
i Since PanFlow is driven by the Wellbore Pressure Column, there is no option

to specify Initial Wellbore Pressure.
Observation Points button: This button is not enabled for PanFlow Rate
Simulation.

Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog 26
Implementation:
When this dialog is initialized, select OK to start the Simulation. The

Advanced Simulation) will be displayed. Let the Simulation run to the end,
then select OK in the sub-dialog. To terminate the Simulation before the end,
select Stop in the sub-dialog; the Response generated to that point will be
retained and the remaining time-steps will be assigned zero rates.
Once the Simulation has finished, users will be returned to the plot screen.
Since Flow Rates cannot be plotted in the Analysis section, to view the
calculated Flow Rate/s, select the Gauge Data option from the Data Preparation
view, to generate the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog and select/plot them
(refer also to Data Edit Plot Overview).
SIMULATED COLUMN NAMES

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Names button from the Well area
in either the Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation dialogs. Use this
option to check and/or edit the Names applied to the Simulated Pressure and/or
Flow Rate data.
For Advanced Simulation:
This will generate:
The Wellbore Pressure with a default name Sim P.
The Total Rate (i.e., the sum of the Sandface Flow Rates from all Layers), with
a default Name of Sim Q Total.
The Sandface Flow Rate from each Layer (i.e. in or out), with default Names
of Sim Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc.

PanFlow Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog
If users wish to change these Names, highlight the relevant field/s and enter
new Name/s.
i
Sim Q Total will be identical to the Surface Rate except during the
Storage-Dominated period. For a Single-Layer Model, Sim Q Total will be
identical to Sim Q#1.
For PanFlow Rate Simulation:
This will generate:
The Total Rate (i.e. the sum of the Sandface Flow Rates from all Layers), with
a default Name of PanFlow Q Total.
The Sandface Flow Rate from each Layers (i.e. in or out), with default Names
of PanFlow Q#1, PanFlow Q#2, etc.
If users wish to change these Names, highlight the relevant field/s and enter
new Name/s.
i
PanFlow Q Total will be identical to the Surface Rate except during the
Storage-Dominated period. For a Single-Layer Model, PanFlow Q Total will be
identical to PanFlow Q#1.
!
In either case (i.e. Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation), if
Names are entered that are already in use, a warning will be issued when the
computation is about to be started.
PANFLOW START PRESSURES/RATES

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Start Pressures button from either
the Advanced Simulation Controls or PanFlow Rate Simulation dialogs. Use this
option to alter Start Pressures without leaving Simulation Mode.

PanFlow Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog 26
For Advanced Simulation:
These Pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is

no hydrostatic difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system
(i.e. at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The
Layer Pressure of each Layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Data
Preparation) and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in each Well (i.e. set-up via Rate
Changes in Data Preparation) are therefore important.
Users are allowed to have an independent Start Pressure for each Well and
Layer and alterations may be made to the existing values if required.
For PanFlow Rate Simulation:
These Pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is

no hydrostatic difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system
(i.e. at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The
Layer Pressure of each layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters on page 291 in
Data Preparation) is therefore important.
i Since PanFlow is driven by the Wellbore Pressure Column, there is no option

to specify Initial Wellbore Pressure.
Users are allowed to have an independent Start Pressure for each Layer and
alterations may be made to the existing values if required. The Initial Wellbore
and Layer Pressure/s and Rate/s will be updated elsewhere in the program with
any changes made here.
!
In either case (i.e. Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation), note that
if a Wellbore Pressure is set lower than a Layer Pressure, the computations
will kick-off under-balanced, and there will be an initial Wellbore Fill-Up period.

PanFlow Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog

Chapter 27
NUMERICAL SIMULATION (PANMESH)
PanMesh Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

PanMesh New Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
PanMesh Control Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
PanMesh Graphical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
View Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Toolbar Button Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Graphing Window (Numerical Simulation only): . . . . . . . . 745
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
PanMesh View Layer Volumes and Production Rates Dialog 755
PanMesh View Flow into Completions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
PanMesh Data View Controls Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
PanMesh Flow Plane Settings Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
PanMesh Saved Views Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
PanMesh Edit the View Title Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
PanMesh Enter the New View/Graph Title Sub-Dialog . . . . . 769
PanMesh Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
PanMesh Edit Mesh Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
PanMesh Change Graph Area Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
PanMesh Edit Number of Points Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
PanMesh Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 777
PanMesh Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
PanMesh From TCX File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

27 NUMERICAL SIMULATION (PANMESH)
PanMesh Ribbon Overview
PANMESH RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The Numerical Simulation option from the PanSystem Simulation view gives
access to three additional options that utilize PanMesh. This is a companion
program to PanSystem which generates a Finite-Element Mesh to describe the
Well and Reservoir, then calculates the Pressure Response. The Simulation can
be played in sequence to display the Pressure Transient as a series of color
maps within the Reservoir. The Pressure Transient is then transferred to
PanSystem to be compared with measured Pressure data or saved as a Type
Curve.
The PanMesh Graphical Interface and program functionality are fully described
in Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
Sub-Menu Options:
The three options and their functionality are described below:
PanMesh New Run: This option generates the Numerical Simulation

Control dialog where users enter the required Simulation Time for a new
run. On OK from this dialog, PanMesh is invoked to run a new Simulation
based on the Geological Model configured in PanSystem Well and Reservoir
(Numerical). PanMesh generates a dimensionless Pressure Response for a
Constant-Rate Drawdown. This is written to a file with extension (*.TCX)
and passed back to PanSystem, where it is convolved with Wellbore Storage
and the actual Test Rate Schedule to produce the Real-Time and Pressure
Response for a Welltest.
PanMesh Replay This option first generates a File Open dialog, where
users select and import an existing PanMesh Simulation in (*.HST) History
File format. On selecting Open from this dialog, PanMesh is invoked to
import results from the selected (i.e. existing) Simulation (provided it has
been saved and stored in (*.HST) History File format). Users can review
the dimensionless Pressure Response, replay the Pressure Visualisation and
generate the Pressure Response versus Time at any (x, y, z) co-ordinate point
in the Reservoir for Interference Testing.

PanMesh New Run 27
PanMesh From TCX File: This option first generates the Advanced
Simulation Control Dialog, where users can pick-up any existing
dimensionless, Constant-Rate Drawdown response generated by PanMesh.
This is stored in the form of a file with extension (*.TCX) and can be
convolved with Wellbore Storage and a user-defined Flow Rate Schedule to
produce the Real-Time and Pressure Response for a Welltest. This process is
performed automatically during the final stages of PanMesh: New Run,
but there may be occasions where it is necessary to re-generate the
Welltest Response for a model without re-running the Numerical Simulation
in PanMesh (e.g. Pressure Responses for different Rate Schedules and
Wellbore Storage values, can be produced using the same base (*.TCX)
response file as a starting point).
PANMESH NEW RUN

General:
This is the first of three sub-menu options from the Simulation view, situated
under the Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh: New Run

PanMesh Replay
PanMesh From TCX File
i These three options give access to the PanMesh graphical interface which is
fully described in Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
The PanMesh: New Run option first generates the PanMesh Control Dialog
where users enter the required simulation time for a new run. On OK from
this dialog, PanMesh is invoked to run a new Simulation based on the
geological model configured in PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical).
PanMesh generates a Dimensionless Pressure Response for a Constant-Rate
Drawdown. This is written to a file with extension (*.TCX) and passed back to
PanSystem, where it is convolved with Wellbore Storage and the actual Test Rate
Schedule to produce the Real-Time and Pressure Response for a Well Test.

PanMesh New Run
A typical workflow for Numerical Simulation using the PanMesh: New Run
option is presented as follows:
Duration of Simulation: The PanMesh Control Dialog will request the

Duration of the Numerical Simulation. This will default to the Total Duration
of the selected Well Test to be Simulated, including all Rate History (e.g. a
24-hour build-up which follows a 240-hour flowing period, will require a
Simulation spanning 264 hours). The default time may be increased if
required, although this is usually unnecessary. If the time is reduced,
there is a risk of generating a Dimensionless Response that does not cover
enough time. Selecting OK will then invoke the PanMesh 3-D Numerical
Simulator (refer to PanMesh Graphical Interface).
Reservoir Image and Mesh: A few seconds will elapse while PanMesh
constructs the Finite Element Mesh for the selected Reservoir Model. A 3-D
display of the Reservoir will then appear in the Reservoir Viewing Window,
with the Reservoir Image initially displayed in Plan View. To view the
Mesh, switch off the Solid Model View button on the PanMesh Toolbar and
switch on the Wire Frame View button.
Starting the Numerical Simulation: To start the Numerical Simulation,

select the Go button on the PanMesh Toolbar. This initiates the Numerical
Simulation and generates the Graphing Window. The Graphing Window will
show the Dimensionless (Pd) versus (td) Response with derivative at the
Sandface, computed for a Constant-Rate Drawdown. The response includes
the Darcy Skin Factor (S), if this is present.
i Wellbore Storage (Cs), Turbulent Skin Factor (D) and the true Flow Rate
Schedule, will be convolved into the response on returning to PanSystem.

PanMesh New Run 27
There will be a period of several seconds (or tens of seconds for a complex
Mesh) before any data will appear on the Graph. The traces will jump
forward over successive time segments as the calculations progress. Simple
models will take a few tens of seconds to compute, complex models (or
models where users have refined the Meshing) will take minutes or hours,
depending on their complexity and the configuration of the computer. The
Status Bar will provide an estimate of End Time (this is based on the Time
taken for each of the key numerical steps performed during the Numerical
Simulation and is revised as the Numerical Simulation progresses).
During a Numerical Simulation it is possible to switch the focus between the

Graphing Window and the 3-D Reservoir Viewing Window and use any of the
facilities which are enabled (e.g. the 3-D Pressure Visualisation facility can be
switched-on during the Simulation to show the progress of the Pressure
Disturbance through the Reservoir, by selecting the Color Contour option on the
PanMesh Toolbar or the Pressure/Show Color Contours option from the Data View
Controls menu item.
After the Numerical Simulation: When the Numerical Simulation has

finished, users have a range of options:
1. Close PanMesh and return to PanSystem to generate the Real Time/Pressure Well
Test Response.
! This is the normal course of action.
2. Save a History File in (*.HST) format. This is a step-by-step record of the

Simulation, including Pressures at all Nodes in the Reservoir for future replay of
the Dimensionless Wellbore Response, the Color Pressure Visualization, and
generation of Interference Test Responses, without having to re-compute the
Simulation.

PanMesh New Run
3. Compute the Pressure at any Point in the Reservoir, display it in dimensionless

form and, optionally, save it to file. Use a variety of Data View Controls to
analyze Flow in the Reservoir and in the vicinity of Completion Zones.
Capture and manage a number of different Perspective Views (and
associated settings), for subsequent recall.
4. Close the Graphing Window, leaving just the Reservoir Viewing Window. From
here, the Mesh can be edited and the Simulation re-launched.
5. Right-click in the Graphing Window to access the Graphing Window Pop-Up
Menu. From this menu, users can change the Graph and derivative
presentations and/or save their Dimensionless Well Response as a Type-Curve
file in (*.TCX) format.
6. Invoke the Pressure Visualization and Replay the propagation of the Pressure
Disturbance out into the Reservoir.
Generating the Real Pressure versus Time Response: If users do not want
to use any of the options mentioned above, close PanMesh directly by
clicking on Close Window (i.e. X symbol) in the top right corner of the
PanMesh Graphical Interface.
There will be a prompt to Save the Simulation as a History File with

extension (*.HST), in the program Data folder. This is an optional step,
but worthwhile if the Simulation took a long time to run, as it allows
subsequent access to certain replay facilities without having to re-run the
Simulation from scratch.
i Note that these (*.HST) files are large, and should be routinely zipped or
cleared out if they start to accumulate.
Users will now be returned to PanSystem. The Constant-Rate Response from

PanMesh is convolved with Wellbore Storage (Cs) and Rate History (and for Gas
or Condensate, Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D)), to produce the Well Test Response.
If users were in the Analysis section with a diagnostic plot on the screen when
PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will find themselves back on the same
plot, with the PanMesh-generated response overlaid on the Well Test data.
The simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that is viewed. To
remove it, select the Overlay Pressure option from the View ribbon and
uncheck the Show Overlaid Pressure checkbox or select an alternative overlay if
there is a choice.

PanMesh Control Dialog 27
If users were not in the Analysis section (e.g. designing a Well Test), they will
be taken to theTest Overview Plot, with their simulated test displayed. If a
Master Pressure Column is also present (e.g. an existing Well Test), this will also
be plotted.
The simulated pressure channel will be called FEM P and two Sandface Flow
Rate Columns - FEM Q total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.
To make additional PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a history match), without

overwriting the current FEM P data, either:
Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data ribbon on the Data Preparation view.
Select the Edit button to generate a Select Data File to Edit dialog,
highlight FEM P, then select the New button to generate a Define New Data
File dialog. Select a Column and re-name the file, before re-running
PanMesh.
Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names
prompt after running PanMesh. For more information, see PanMesh
Graphical Interface.
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Rates - FEM Q total and
FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete facility
(i.e. accessed via the Delete Data button on the Gauge Data ribbon), or just let
them be overwritten each time.
PANMESH CONTROL DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated when thePanMesh New Run sub-menu option is

selected via the Numerical Simulation option on the PanSystem Simulation
menu. For more information, see Numerical Simulation (PanMesh).

PanMesh Graphical Interface
Simulation Time: The program requests the number of Hours duration the
simulation is intended to replicate. This time can extend to a maximum
of 99,999,999 hours. If users are running the simulation from a diagnostic
plot, PanMesh will use the Total Test Duration in the Rate Changes Table
from the Rate Changes ribbon of the Data Preparation view.
If users are running the Test Design facility, it will use the Total Test Duration
from the Test Design Table. The default value can be edited if required, but it
should always be at least as long as the Duration of the Test Sequence being
Simulated.
The dialog will default to the Total Duration of the Well Test being Simulated,
including all Rate History, thus a 24-hour Build-Up which follows a 240-hour
Flowing Period will require a Simulation spanning 264 hours. The default Time
can be increased if required, though there is normally no need to do this.
However, if the Time is reduced, users risk generating a Dimensionless
Response that does not cover enough Time.
Selecting OK will then take users into the PanMesh 3-D Numerical Simulation
Interface.
PANMESH GRAPHICAL INTERFACE

General:
The PanMesh Graphical Interface is used to perform and display the Numerical
Simulation, using data initialized in PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical).
It can be accessed by selecting one of the three sub-menu options from the
Simulation menu that are situated under the Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh New Run

PanMesh Replay

3-D Reservoir Visualization Window: 27
Screen Description and Operational Instructions:
The PanMesh Graphical Interface has seven salient features, described in the
following section. For information on a specific part of the PanMesh Graphical
Interface, short-cut links to these sections are provided below:
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window:(main graphical window within

interface)
View Control Panels (right-hand side of interface)
Toolbar Button Options (along top of interface)
Main Menu Bar (along top of interface)
Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu (right mouse-click in 3-D Reservoir

Visualization Window)
Graphing Window (Numerical Simulation only):
Status Bar (along bottom of interface)
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window:

This is the main 3-D Visualization Window for the Reservoir and the image is
initially in Top View with a Solid Model when PanMesh is entered. Free Axis
Rotation of the Reservoir image can be accomplished by left-clicking on the
image, holding the mouse button down (the cursor will change to a globe
symbol), then moving the mouse in the direction of required rotation. An
Axis Triad, showing the current orientation of the Reservoir Mesh X-, Y- and
Z-axes is also displayed at the bottom right corner of the Visualization Window.

3-D Reservoir Visualization Window:
Figure 214: 3-D View with Free Axis Rotation mode indicated by globe
cursor symbol and Axis Triad at bottom right

View Control Panels 27
View Control Panels
These elements of the interface are used to adjust the positioning, scale and
rotation of the 3-D Reservoir Image. They are situated down the right-hand
side of the dialog in four groups and are described from top to bottom:
View Controls: These buttons are used to switch static view points for the
Reservoir Image between Top View (plan view from overhead, normal to
Z-axis), Front View (elevation view from the south, normal to Y-axis) or
Side View (elevation viewed from the east, normal to X-axis).

View Control Panels
View Centering (C+) Control: This button is used to center a selected

point of the Reservoir Image in the Visualization Window and set this point
as the new focal point for other viewing operations; users must first select
the C+ button, then select a point on the Reservoir Image (left-click) for the
following actions to occur:
Center the Reservoir Image around the selected point by Panning the
image.
Set the selected point as the new focal point for the Visualization Window,
relative to which the Zoom speed is controlled and about which the view
can be rotated.
Master Zoom/Pan/Rotate Controls: These buttons control the movement

function of the Reservoir Image and operate in conjunction with the left
mouse button (also the middle mouse button and/or wheel mouse where
available):
Zoom: Click and drag the left mouse button upwards over the
Visualization Window to Zoom-In and downwards to Zoom-Out to/from the
current focal point. If users have a wheel mouse, the wheel rotation can
also be used to invoke a similar Zoom response in all modes (i.e. even if
the Pan or Rotate buttons are currently selected). The cursor changes from
an arrow symbol into a magnifying glass symbol whilst Zooming.
Pan: Click and drag the left mouse button across the Visualization Window
to pan the Reservoir image in any direction. If users have a three button
mouse (or wheel mouse), the middle button can also be used to invoke a
similar Pan response in all modes (i.e. even if Zoom or Rotate are currently
selected). The cursor changes from an arrow symbol into a crossed
arrow symbol whilst Panning.
Rotate: Click and drag the left mouse button around within the
Visualization Window for Free Axis Rotation of the Reservoir Image in any
direction. The cursor changes from an arrow symbol into a globe symbol
during Rotation.
In all cases, the Reset button will return the Reservoir Image to the position and
orientation it occupied before any of these three button settings were applied.

Special Views: These buttons can be used to select specific views for the
Reservoir Image:
View Completions Only: Select this button to display the

Completion Zone/s in elevation. This may involve a combination of
Zoom-In, Pan and Rotation operations, depending on the current
status of the Visualization Window. Use the Reset button and/or the
View buttons to restore the previous view. Also refer to the Flow %
button (described below).
Zoom to Flow Plane: This button is only enabled after a Numerical

Simulation has been run. When activated, it Zooms the current view
into the Reservoir Image to view the Flow Plane, regardless of where it
is positioned. For information on other Flow Plane Controls, refer to
the PanMesh Data View Controls Dialog..
Plan View of Isosurface: This button is only enabled after a

Numerical Simulation has been run and the Isosurface option has either
been selected on the PanMesh Toolbar or from the Data View Menu on
the Main Menu Bar. When activated, it Zooms the current view into
the Reservoir Image to view the Isosurface in Plan View.
Plan of Flow in Reservoir: This button positions the Flow Plane

such that it is horizontal and centered at the mid-point of the
completions and covering the entire extent of the reservoir in plan.
This gives the user a good idea of the overall flow pattern in the
reservoir.
View Saver: The central Camera button is used to take a snapshot of

the current View displayed in the Visualization Window; everything
required to recreate the captured View is Saved (e.g. Cut Plane and Flow
Plane settings - both described below) and stored in the History File
(described below), allowing any captured Views to be recalled. In
addition, even in Review Mode (i.e. reviewing a History File - described
below), new Views can be Saved and Added to the existing History File.

View Control Panels
Saved Views can be assigned appropriate names via the PanMesh Edit the
View Title Sub-Dialog and can either be recalled to the View Window (or
deleted) from the PanMesh Saved Views Dialog; these can be accessed
via the View Menu (i.e. View Management/Edit Title and View
Management/View List sub-menu options respectively). The Saved Views
dialog can also be generated with the Manage Views button (described
below). The four buttons surrounding the Camera button are initially
grayed-out (i.e. no Views have been saved), but when Saved Views are
present, these buttons contain arrow icons and can also be used to recall
Saved Views to the View Window:
Previous View (upper left): Provided the current View is one of

those from the Saved View list, this button is used to recall the
previous View in the list - once the first View from the list is displayed,
this button is grayed-out.
Next View (upper right): Provided the current View is one of

those from the Saved View list, this is used to recall the next View from
the Saved View list - once the last View from the list is displayed, this
button is grayed-out.
First View (lower left): Provided the current View is one of those
from the Saved View list, this is used to recall the first View from the
Saved View list - once the first View from the list is displayed, this
Last View (lower right): Provided the current View is one of those
from the Saved View list, this is used to recall the last View from the
Saved View list - once the last View from the list is displayed, this
Manage Views: Select this button to generate the PanMesh Saved

Views Dialog; this can be used to select (Apply) previously Saved
Views for display in the Visualization Window, Delete any selected or all
Saved Views that are no longer required and/or to Edit the selected
View Title text.

Flow %: This button is only enabled after a Numerical Simulation has been
performed. When activated, it can be used to view/hide the Flow into any
of the Completion Zones, by switching the Flow Field on/off. A similar
functionality is also available via the Show Flow Field option on the
PanMesh Toolbar or from the Data View Control Menu on the Main Menu
Bar. In addition, this button also generates a View Flow into Completions
dialog, where users can select different parts of the Completion Zone,
and/or individual Completion Zones to view.
The purpose of this dialog box is twofold:
1. To give the user information in regard the relative flows into completions,
2. To allow the user to easily view the flow patterns into the completions.
In the main window of this dialog box the completions are listed in order
from the top down. The basic information given is the length of the
completion, along with the position of the completion from the entry point of
the well bore (or the heel in the horizontal case). Then the overall area of the
completion as a % of the full open area and the % of the overall flow that is
flowing into that completion. NB: Sometimes the two values in each column
may not sum to exactly 100%. This discrepancy is due to rounding and can be
ignored.
Error %
The value that appears under the Error % reflects the difference between the
flow applied to the model and the total flow through the completions as
determined from the pressure gradients. This information is displayed to
help the user decide if the mesh resolution needs to be increased (and another
analysis performed see notes on the Flow Analysis option) in the case where
the user is looking closely at flow patterns around the completions. In the
case shown the default mesh pattern results in pretty accurate flows, but this
is not always the case. NB: It is noteworthy that a relatively high Error % (in
flow) e.g. 30% - does not necessarily reflect a high % error in the pressure
calculations (particularly at the well face, as per the type curve).
Layer Volumes: This is a simple dialog box that displays the following
information relating to each layer:
1. The porous volume of that layer (displayed in ft3 or m3 depending on the

units chosen),
2. The % of the total reservoir porous volume that it represents,

View Control Panels
3. The cumulative % production from each layer, during the last time-step and
over the simulation so far.
4. The total bulk volume of the reservoir,
5. The total porous volume of the reservoir,
6. The average porosity.
It is noteworthy that these values can be awkward to calculate by other

means, but that the very nature of the finite element modeling approach
makes it considerably easier.
Data View Controls: Select this button to generate the PanMesh Data
View Controls Dialog; this is used to select settings and set controls for
the following Data Views:
Cut Plane: This tool is available before and after a Numerical

Simulation has been performed. When the Cut Plane tool is selected
on the PanMesh Toolbar an additional Plane Orientation button is made
available below the Data View Controls button.
If this button is selected, a blue colored positioning tool is

introduced into the Visualization Window. This tool can then be used
in conjunction with the Pan and Rotate controls (described above), to
position the Cut Plane using the left mouse button (the captured tool
axis will change color to red when clicked and dragged to a new
position):

A more precise positioning facility is available in the PanMesh Data View
Controls Dialog (Cut Plane tab); this uses the keyboard arrow keys for
Rotation and Translation.
Flow Plane: This tool is only available after a Numerical Simulation has
been performed. When the Flow Plane tool is selected an additional Plane
Orientation button is made available below the Data View Controls button.
If this button is selected, a green colored positioning tool is

introduced into the Visualization Window. This tool can then be used in
conjunction with the Pan and Rotate controls (described above), to
position the Flow Plane using the left mouse button (the captured tool axis
will change color to red when clicked and dragged to a new position):
The Flow Plane can also be resized manually by left-clicking and dragging one
of the spheres displayed at each corner of the Flow Plane (indicated by the red
colored sphere at bottom right corner in the example illustrated below):

Toolbar Button Options
A more precise positioning/resizing facility is available in the PanMesh Data

View Controls Dialog (Flow Plane tab); this uses the keyboard arrow keys for
Rotation, Translation, Panning and Resizing in smaller increments.

The PanMesh Toolbar contains the most commonly used functions of PanMesh
and it appears in three different modes in relation to functions that can be
performed before, during and after Numerical Simulation. Most of these
button functions are also available as menu options on the Main Menu Bar and
the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu (both described below). The three different
toolbar modes are illustrated below and the button functions are described
thereafter:
Before Numerical Simulation
During Numerical Simulation
After Numerical Simulation (Color Contour and Point Selection)
Button Functionality
Reset Clipping Range Automatically: This option is selected by default. This means that
the Reservoir will not disappear when users Zoom-Out. However, details in a close up
view may disappear when Zooming-In (in this case, users can select the Reset Near Plane
option to correct this. Note that this action will also de-select the Reset Clipping Range
Automatically option).
Select this text to view/hide additional information on Clipping Planes.
Items that are rendered/drawn within the Perspective View Window, such as the Reservoir
Image and associated features (e.g. Wellbore, Flow Planes, Stream Tubes, etc.), will only
be displayed if they lie within the Near and Far Clipping Planes (which are a set distance
from the viewer). The default distance to the Near Clipping Plane is automatically set at a
minimum 10% of the distance to the Far Clipping Plane. This means that for a Reservoir
Image 1000 meters wide, the viewer cannot get closer than 100 meters to the features
lying within the Reservoir Image; if users attempt to Zoom-In closer, all features lying
between the Near Clipping Plane and the viewer will be Clipped-Out of the image (i.e.
ignored). This situation applies when the Reset Clipping Range Automatically option is
selected (i.e. default setting).

Toolbar Button Options 27
Reset Near Plane: If users wish to examine features lying within the Reservoir Image in
extreme close-up, they must select the Reset Near Plane option (the Reset Clipping
Range Automatically option is de-selected automatically as described above); this Resets
the Near Clipping Plane distance to a fixed distance from the viewer (i.e. the Far Clipping
Plane setting remains on automatic). The Near Clipping Plane Distance is a function of the
Wellbore Radius (i.e. equal by default).
Tip: The Reset Near Plane feature is best used for Zooming-In to examine internal features
of the Reservoir Image. If users try to Zoom-Out further than one of the default image
positions (i.e. Top View, Front View or Side View), the Reservoir Image will disappear from
the Perspective View Window.
Show/Hide Outline: Select this option to display the Reservoir Mesh Outline (i.e. the
peripheral Wire Frame lines) for the Reservoir Image.
Wire Frame View: Select this option to display the Reservoir Mesh as Wire Frame
components. The Solid Model View (described below) can also be de-selected to improve
the Mesh clarity. Additional options are available in the Main Menu Bar (described below),
to change the background color.
Solid Model View: Select this option to display the Reservoir Image and any component
Layers as solid colors (default viewing option). Any Regions with different Material
Properties will be assigned different colors.
This option can be used separately or in conjunction with the Wire Frame View option
(described above). However, the Wire Frame View may be difficult to distinguish against
the Solid Model View at certain viewing angles or with low-contrast color schemes.
Toggle Cut Plane On/Off: Select this option to display the last position and orientation of
the Cut Plane. Then adjust the Orientation, Rotation or Translation (i.e. in incremental
steps) and the Relative Position of a Cut Plane within the Reservoir Image.
Note: To return to the default Vertical Cut orientation, click the top button on the Cut Plane
Control View tab.
Users can select and set Orientations using the controls within the PanMesh Data View
Controls Dialog (Cut Plane tab), activated via the Data View Controls button.
Go: This option is used to start the Numerical Simulation and launch the Graphing Window
(described below). Once the Numerical Simulation is started, additional buttons appear on
the PanMesh Toolbar (as illustrated above), but only the Color Contour button (described
below), can be used during the Numerical Simulation. After Numerical Simulation is
completed, the Go tool is disabled.
Playback: This button appears after the simulation has been run, and is enabled when the
Perspective View window has the focus. Clicking this will bring up a Playback panel which
will enable the user to play back the color contour propagation in an auto-run mode, as an
alternative to dragging the vertical time-line on the Graphing Window
Color Contour: This option is only available during and after Numerical Simulation and is
used to visualize the progression of the Pressure Disturbance out from the Well in the
Visualization Window. A Color Contour display is superimposed on the Reservoir Image.
This button also enables the Color Scale Key and upper and lower Scale Marker Bars (i.e.
blue and red horizontal lines) on the Graphing Window (described below), which define the
span of the Color Contouring for the Dimensionless Pressure Response (Pd).

Isosurface: This option is only available after Numerical Simulation and allows users to
display surfaces of uniform Pressure within the Reservoir Image as a 3-D visualization.
The Pressure value corresponds to the minimum Pressure (i.e. red line) on the Graphing
Window. The Time and Pressure value of the Isosurface (i.e. as displayed in the
Perspective View Window), is controlled by the Graphing Window in a similar manner to
the Color Contour facility (described above).
This Data View Control is a qualitative aid to the user to get a rough idea of the radius of
investigation of the pressure transient. By default it corresponds to a surface of uniform
dimensionless pressure (Pd) of 0.1. This value can be changed by the user using the
Graph window. It corresponds to the lower pressure represented in the color legend (red).
Flow Arrows: This option is only available after Numerical Simulation and activates the
Flow Plane Controls on the View Control Panels (described above); these are used to
display, then adjust the Orientation, Rotation or Translation (i.e. in incremental steps),
Relative Position and Size of a Flow Plane within the Reservoir Image. Users can also
select and set other Orientations using the controls within the PanMesh Data View
Controls Dialog (Flow Plane tab), activated via the Data View Controls button.
Select a Point: This option is only available after Numerical Simulation. The Numerical
Simulation has created a Pressure v Time record for every Mesh Node in the model. The
response at the Well is displayed in the main Graphing Window (i.e. at co-ordinates as per
user co-ordinates). However, with this option, users can also define the Co-ordinates of
another selected Point in the Reservoir (although not necessarily at a Mesh Node), and
generate a (Pd) versus (td) response for it. This can subsequently be converted into a real
Pressure versus Time record, for an Interference Test in PanSystem.
The point to be selected can be chosen in one of two ways:
1. With the Graphing Window in focus, click on the Pressure at a Point (P+) button. A
dialog box appears in which the coordinates of the desired point can be entered accurately.
2. If the exact coordinates of the point to be selected are not known, then put the
Visualization Window in focus and chose the Pressure at a Point (P+) option from the
toolbar. This time the point can be selected by simply clicking in the Visualization Window
in the approximate area of interest; this will generate a Selected Point Graphing Window
(the current X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the Selected Point will be displayed in the Window Title
Bar). If you wish to then enter more accurate coordinates for this selected point, either
make the Graphing Window in focus and use method 1, or double-click on the Selected
Point (i.e. green-colored sphere) in the Visualization Window to generate the PanMesh
Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog directly. Specific X, Y, Z co-ordinates (i.e. derived from the
Reservoir Model defined earlier in PanMesh Data Preparation Reservoir Geometry), must
be input in the Enter the Co-ordinates dialog for a Selected Point lying within the
Reservoir. Pay particular attention to the Z-axis co-ordinate to ensure the Selected Point is
within the Mesh and not outside or on the surface; a warning may be issued otherwise.
Note: By holding CTRL and clicking the P+ button (when the Visualization Window is in
focus), the user can continually click different points for which the second graph is
generated. This feature is turned off by re-clicking P+ button.
A point within the reservoir (not on one of the exterior solid surfaces) can be selected by
employing this option in along the surface of a cut plane.

Toolbar Button Options 27
Tip: Users may have forgotten the co-ordinate system they defined in PanSystem Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description (Numerical). It is not possible to use the Data Preparation
menu options in PanSystem to review these co-ordinates unless PanMesh is shut-down.
To work around this, start a second PanSystem session, open the same (*.PANX) file
using the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description (Numerical) option and view it there.
Remember to shut-down this second session of PanSystem before continuing.
After entering the required X, Y, Z co-ordinates and selecting OK, a new Graphing Window
will appear showing the dimensionless, Constant-Rate Drawdown Pressure Response
and derivative at the specified point. The Point for which this second (Pd) versus (td)
graph has been created is also represented on the Perspective View Window as a
green-colored sphere with a radius equal to the Wellbore Radius (Rw).
Note: If users click on Close Window (i.e. X symbol) in the top right corner of the new
graph, a Save As (*TCX) File? prompt is generated for the point data. If users want to
convert this into a real pressure versus time response in PanSystem, they should answer
Yes at the prompt, to save the dimensionless response to a (*.TCX) file. Enter a name for
the file in the File Save As dialog that appears next. This data will be saved to the current
Type-Curve folder (typcurv) by default. Users will then be returned to the original
Graphing Window containing the response at the Well.
Pick source point: This button appears after the simulation has finished. A stream tube
can be generated by selecting this button, then clicking at the desired source point in the
Perspective View. By pressing Ctrl while selecting the button, it is possible to click on any
number of source points in succession, without having select the button again. (Only one
stream tube appears at a time.) Click the button again to exit this multiple pick mode.
The (x, y, z) coordinates of the mouse pointer are displayed at bottom right to assist in
locating the source point.
Show/Hide Stream Tube: This button appears after the simulation has finished. It allows a
stream tube (if generated) to be hidden or displayed. It is enabled in Show mode when a
new stream tube source point is picked.
Show Color Bar: This option is only enabled (and made available) during and after
Numerical Simulation by selecting the Color Contour option (described above). It is used
to add a Color Contour display (i.e. Dimensionless Pressure Response (Pd) Legend) to the
Reservoir Image displayed in the Perspective View. This can be used to enhance the
interpretation of any Perspective Views that are Printed or Saved to file.
Note: The values indicated in the Legend are the minimum (i.e. red line) and maximum
(i.e. blue line) Dimensionless Pressure Values from the Graphing Window Color Scale;
thus gray, which represents Pressures below the lower Pressure Display Value and white,
which represents Pressures above the upper Pressure Display Value, are not included in
the Color Bar for the Perspective View.
Tip: The minimum Dimensionless Pressure Value (i.e. red line) can be controlled in the
Graphing Window by either using the Up/Down arrow keys or by left-clicking and dragging
on the line. Similarly, the maximum Dimensionless Pressure Value (i.e. blue line) can be
controlled by either using the Shift + Up/Down arrow keys or by left-clicking and dragging
on the line. This also adjusts the scaling in the Perspective View.
Show Title: This option is used to display/hide the Title of the Perspective View (i.e. as
displayed in the Visualization Window Title Bar). The Title is added below the Reservoir
Image and can be Printed with the View or Copied for Pasting into another application (e.g.
Word).
Tip: The Title text can also be edited via the PanMesh Enter the New View/Graph Title
Sub-Dialog (i.e. generated by the View/View Management/Edit Title sub-menu option).

Axes/Triad Control: This option can be used to enhance control and interpretation of the
Visualization Window. This control is displayed by default in the bottom right corner of the
Visualization Window (it can be switched-off by de-selecting this option on the PanMesh
Toolbar). This feature allows users to interpret the orientation of the view that is currently
being displayed. In addition, users can control the view orientation by clicking on the Axes
of the Triad (e.g. left-clicking on the X-axis will cause the Perspective View to reorient itself
parallel to that axis without Zooming-Out. Holding CTRL and left-clicking on an axis will
cause the reorientation followed by a Zoom-Out, until the extents of the Reservoir Image
are visible).
Where am I?: By default, a small window is created in the bottom left hand corner of the
main Perspective View which shows the current view (by means of a red rectangle) in the
context of the overall reservoir geometry. This is useful when zooming to show the position
of the zoom within the reservoir. The button will switch off/on this View-in-View. In
addition:
Dragging the red rectangle will pan the Perspective View.
Holding down Ctrl and left-clicking on a point in the View-in-View.
Double-clicking on the View in View will maximize/minimize it.
Window Scaling 1 and 2: These buttons appear as soon as the simulation is started and
can be used during and after the simulation. They offer a quick way of reproportioning the
relative size of the Perspective View and Graphing Window. Scaling 1 is the default, with
the Graphing Window smaller. Either window may, of course, be resized manually by
dragging the corners or edges.
Print: This option allows users to Print the contents of the currently selected window (e.g.
current Reservoir Image from the Perspective View Window, graph of Dimensionless
Pressure (Pd) versus Dimensionless Time (td) from the Graphing Window after Numerical
Simulation, etc.). The button generates a standard Windows File Print dialog.
Tip: The same functionality is available from the keyboard with the Ctrl + P keys.
Note: The Print facility is available for both the Sandface Plot of (Pd) vs (Td) and the
Selected Co-ordinates Plot of (Pd) vs (Td) generated with the Select a Point (P+) option.
Ensure the required window is selected before Printing.
Copy View: This option allows users to Copy the current Reservoir Image from the
Perspective View Window for Pasting into another application (e.g. Word).
Tip: The same functionality is available from the keyboard with the Ctrl + C keys.
Save Image: The current Perspective View image can now be saved directly to a file. Four
standard formats are available:
jpg joint photographic experts group
bmp bitmap
png portable networks graphics
tif tagged image file
About: This option is available at all times and provides users with PanMesh version and
copyright information.
For help on data input to the Numerical Simulation facility, refer to the Help topic for
PanMesh Data Preparation Overview.
For help on Numerical Simulation Options, refer to the Help topic for PanMesh Ribbon
Overview..

Main Menu Bar 27
Main Menu Bar
This provides optional menu access to PanMesh user-defined functions which
are arranged into three menu items - View, Data View Controls and Help.
The most commonly used menu functions are also available as Toolbar Button
Options or can be activated from the View Control Panels (described earlier).
Some additional options are also available:
View: This menu item provides a number of options and sub-menu

options relating to the overall view in the 3-D Reservoir Visualization
Window:
Perspective: Provides an alternative method of activating the Top,

Front and Side View controls, and Reset options for Zoom, Pan and
Rotate, previously described in View Control Panels.
Reservoir: Provides an alternative method of activating three PanMesh

Toolbar options and one of the View Control Panel options (i.e. Outline,
Wire Frame, Solid Model and View Completions - all relating to the
Perspective View).
View Management: Provides the Save View , First View, Previous

View, Next View and Last View options previously described in the View
Saver section of View Control Panels for capturing Reservoir Images
from and/or recalling saved Reservoir Images to the Perspective View
Window. The Edit Title option generates an PanMesh Enter the New
View/Graph Title Sub-Dialog, where users can enter a new
Description or Title for the current Perspective View Window. Any Saved
Views can either be recalled to the Perspective View Window and edited
or deleted from the PanMesh Saved Views Dialog, which is
generated by selecting the View List sub-menu option.
The Output to File option generates a standard Windows Save As dialog

where users can Save any Views that have been set-up in a Views (*.vws) file
format. These Views (*.vws) files can subsequently be Read In to any other
PanMesh session (i.e. with same Camera Angles, etc. used). This is a useful
feature for comparing a set of Analyses from a Batch Run (e.g. users can
closely examine the first Analysis in the series, then set-up all the Views
and Controls required. If this set of Views is then Saved As (*.vws), users
can subsequently Read In these saved settings to any other Data View
Control session and examine the other Analyses in the series using the
same set-up).

Main Menu Bar
Similarly, the Read In Views from File option generates a standard Windows
File Open dialog where users can Read In any Views that have been set-up
and Saved As a Views (*.vws) file format using the Output Views to File
option (described above).
Toggle Background Colour: Allows users to switch the background

colour from Black to Light Blue and vice-versa. This is useful when
operating in Wire Frame View, which is easier to discern against a light
blue background.
Show Title: This option is used to display/hide the Title of the

Perspective View (i.e. as displayed in the Perspective View Window Title
Bar). The Title is added below the Reservoir Image and can be Printed
with the View or Copied for Pasting into another application (e.g. Word
document, etc.).
i The Title text can be edited via the Enter the New View Title sub-dialog (i.e.
generated from the View/View Management/Edit Title sub-menu option).
Show Color Bar: This option is only enabled (and made available)
during and after Numerical Simulation by selecting the Color Contour
option (described above in PanMesh Toolbar Options). It is used to add
a Color Contour display (i.e. Dimensionless Pressure Response (Pd)
Legend) to the Reservoir Image displayed in the Perspective View. This
can be used to enhance the interpretation of any Perspective Views that
are Printed or Saved to file (refer to the Show Color Bar option in
PanMesh Toolbar Options for more details).
Show Axes: Provides an alternative method of

activating/de-activating the Axes Triad in the Perspective View (refer to
the Axes/Triad Control option in PanMesh Toolbar Options for more
details).
Set Transparency: Generates a Slider Control that allows users to set the
degree of Transparency or Opacity for the Reservoir Image; the Slider
Control can also be generated from the right mouse-click Visualization
Window Pop-Up Menu (described below). Move the Slider to the right
(Opacity), to increase the color density of the Reservoir Image, or move
to the left (Transparency), to decrease the color density of the Reservoir
Image.

Main Menu Bar 27
i The appearance of the Wire Frame is not affected by this tool.
Clipping Planes: Provides an alternative method of

activating/de-activating the Reset Clipping Range Automatically and
Reset Near Plane toolbar options. Items that are rendered/drawn
within the Perspective View Window, such as the Reservoir Image and
associated features (e.g. Wellbore, Flow Planes, Stream Tubes, etc.), will
only be displayed if they lie within the Near and Far Clipping Planes
(which are a set distance from the viewer). The default distance to
the Near Clipping Plane is automatically set at a minimum 10% of the
distance to the Far Clipping Plane. This means that for a Reservoir
Image 1000 meters wide, the viewer cannot get closer than 100
meters to the features lying within the Reservoir Image; if users
attempt to Zoom-In closer, all features lying between the Near Clipping
Plane and the viewer will be Clipped-Out of the image (i.e. ignored).
This situation applies when the sub-menu option Reset Clipping
Range Automatically is checked (i.e. default setting).
If users wish to examine features lying within the Reservoir Image in extreme
close-up, they must uncheck the Reset Clipping Range Automatically sub-menu
option, then check the Reset Near Plane sub-menu option; this Resets the Near
Clipping Plane distance to a fixed distance from the viewer (i.e. the Far
Clipping Plane setting remains on automatic). The Near Clipping Plane Distance
is a function of the Wellbore Radius (i.e. equal by default).
!
The Reset Near Plane feature is best used for Zooming-In to examine internal
features. If users try to Zoom-Out further than one of the default image
positions (i.e. Top View, Front View or Side View), the Reservoir Image will
disappear from the Perspective View Window.
Print: Provides an alternative method of activating the Print option,

previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.
Copy: Provides an alternative method of activating the Copy View

option, previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.

Main Menu Bar
Toolbars checkbox: If this option is checked, the Perspective View

Window and Graphing Window toolbars will be displayed. If this
option is unchecked, both of these toolbars will be hidden.
Data View Controls: Select this option to generate the PanMesh Data
View Controls Dialog; this is used to select settings and set controls
for the Cut Plane, Flow Plane and the Stream Tube.
Status Bar checkbox: If this option is checked, the Status Bar will be
displayed at the base of the PanMesh Window. If this option is
unchecked, the Status Bar will be hidden.
Data View Controls: This menu item provides access to the Data View
Controls used in the Visualization Window. Most of the following menu
options are not available until during or after the Numerical Simulation (i.e.
those marked with an asterisk*):
Cut Plane: Provides an alternative method of activating the Vertical Cut

View option, previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.
The Cut Plane can be adjusted via the PanMesh Data View Controls
Dialog; this is used to select settings and set controls for the Cut Plane,
Flow Plane and the Stream Tube. This dialog can be generated via the Data
View Controls button or the View/ Data View Controls menu option.
Pressure*: This has two sub-menu options:
Show Color Contours*: This provides an alternative method of

activating the Color Contour option, previously described in PanMesh
Toolbar Button Options.
Select a Point*: This provides an alternative method of

activating/de-activating the Select a Point option, previously described
in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.
Isosurface*: This provides an alternative method of

activating/de-activating the Isosurface option, previously described in
PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.

Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu 27
Flow*: These sub-menu options allow Flow Vectors to be superimposed on
the Reservoir Image. Currently the Flow Vectors are only shown for those
elements in the immediate vicinity of the Wellbore.
Show Flow Field*: This provides an optional method of activating the

Flow Arrows option from the PanMesh Toolbar and previously
described in Toolbar Button Options.
Show Flow Direction Only*: This is an additional feature that only

displays the Flow Direction and ignores the Flow Amplitude when this
option is checked.
Show Flows in Reservoir*: This option positions the Flow Plane such
that it is horizontal and centred at the mid-point of the completions
and covering the entire extent of the reservoir in plan. This gives the
user a good idea of the overall flow pattern in the reservoir.
Show Flow %*: This option opens the Flow % dialog box.
Reduce Flow Roundoff Error*: This In addition to the lower order of

accuracy, the flow patterns in the reservoir are not calculated for all
time steps by default. This is because the calculation is a complex,
CPU intensive process and would significantly increase the
simulation time if it was done during the simulation. Instead, by
default, it is done only for the time steps that are being viewed.
However, this approach means that there can be significant round off
error in their calculation. Whereas this is generally not significant in
terms of the flow plane visualization (except at late times) it can
result in erratic stream tube patterns. To eliminate this behavior use
Data View Controls -> Flow -> Reduce Flow Round off Error.
Stream Tube*: Provides an alternative method of activating/de-activating

the Stream Tube option, previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Options.
Help: The About option provides the PanMesh version number and
copyright details. The PanMesh Graphical Interface option generates this
specific Help topic.
Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu

By clicking the right-hand mouse button anywhere in the 3-D Reservoir
Visualization Window, a pop-up menu is generated with the following
options:

Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu
Edit Mesh: This option gives users access to the PanMesh Edit Mesh
Dialog, which can be used to alter the density of the Mesh used for the
Numerical Simulation. This option is only available before Numerical
Simulation has been performed.
Mesh Details: This option generates an information sub-dialog that

displays the number of Nodes and Elements in the current Mesh, in
addition to the Reservoir Volume and the Pore Volume of the Reservoir Image.
Edit View Title: This option generates the PanMesh Edit the View Title
Sub-Dialog (alternatively, select the View/View Management/Edit Title
option from the Main Menu Bar described earlier). This dialog can be
used to enter a new Description or Title for the current Perspective View
Window.
!
To show/hide the Title, either use the Title tool (previously described in
PanMesh Toolbar Options), or select the View/Show Title option from the Main
Menu Bar (also described earlier)
Manage Views: This option generates the PanMesh Saved Views Dialog
(alternatively, select the View/View Management/View List option from the
Main Menu Bar (described earlier)). This dialog is used to recall
previously Saved Views to the Perspective View Window, Edit the View Title of
a previously Saved Perspective View or delete Perspective Views that are no
longer required.
Toggle Background Color: This provides an alternative method of

activating the View/Toggle Background Color option under the Main Menu
Bar (described earlier). This feature allows users to switch the
background colour from Black to White and vice-versa.
Set Transparency: Generates a Slider Control that allows users to set the
degree of Transparency or Opacity for the Reservoir Image; the Slider Control
can also be generated from the View/Set Transparency option under the
Main Menu Bar (described earlier). Move the Slider to the right (Opacity),
to increase the color density of the Reservoir Image, or move to the left
(Transparency), to decrease the color density of the Reservoir Image.
i The appearance of the Wire Frame is not affected by this tool.

Graphing Window (Numerical Simulation only): 27
Show Axes checkbox: Provides an alternative method of
activating/de-activating the Axes Triad in the Perspective View (refer to the
Axes/Triad Control option in PanMesh Toolbar Options for more details).
Metric Co-ordinates checkbox: If this checkbox is checked, the current X, Y,

Z co-ordinates of the Selected Point will be displayed in the Selected Point
Graphing Window Title Bar in Meters. If this checkbox is unchecked, these
X, Y, Z co-ordinates will be displayed in Feet. The same criteria applies in
the PanMesh Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog, where there is also an
option to toggle between the two units systems.
Data View Controls: Select this option to generate the PanMesh Data
View Controls Dialog; this is used to select settings and set controls for
the Cut Plane, Flow Plane and the Stream Tube.

The Go button on the PanMesh Toolbar, starts the Numerical Simulation and
generates the Graphing Window. This window shows a Dimensionless (Pd)
versus (td) response with derivative at the Sandface. This is computed for a
Constant-Rate Drawdown without Wellbore Storage (Cs) or Turbulent, Non-Darcy
Skin Factor (D). The response does include the Darcy Skin Factor (S), if
present. Results will subsequently be convolved with Wellbore Storage and the
actual Test Rate Schedule after returning to PanSystem to produce the Real-Time
and Pressure Response for the Well Test under consideration.
i
There will be a period of several seconds (or tens of seconds for a complex
Mesh), before any data appears on the graph. The computing time is
displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen at the
end of the Numerical Simulation.
The Graphing Window shows the progression of the Numerical Simulation as

the calculations are performed. The scale is automatically adjusted on the
graph to accommodate the calculated plot lines. By default the (Pd) and
(dPd/dlogtd - spline fit) plot lines are shown on the graphing area. Users may
change this setting by calling up the Graph Pop-Up menu (described below),
with a right mouse-click anywhere in the Graphing Window:

Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu:
Stop: This menu option is only enabled during Numerical Simulation

and can be used to terminate the Numerical Simulation.
Pause: This menu option is only enabled during Numerical

Simulation can be used to temporarily Pause the Numerical Simulation.
Selecting the button again will re-start the Numerical Simulation.
Properties: Control of the graphical presentation (i.e. plotted lines) is

provided by the following sub-menu options. The raw (Pd/td) data
are spaced according to PanMesh's internal time-stepping regime,
which is not optimal for use in PanSystem. The Output Spline option
(checked by default), optimizes the spacing of the output data when
it is saved to a (*.TCX) file. Lines currently plotted on the graph are
indicated by a Tick Mark next to each plot option:
Edit Graph Area: This generates the PanMesh Change Graph Area
Sub-Dialog for applying axis re-scaling (if required).
i
The PanMesh Change Graph Area Sub-Dialog can also be generated by
double left-clicking outside the Graphing Window. If users double left-click
anywhere inside the Graphing Window, the PanMesh Edit Number of Points
Sub-Dialog will be generated instead.
Edit Graph Title: This generates the PanMesh Enter the New
View/Graph Title Sub-Dialog where users can apply a new Title for
the Graphing Window (if required).
Show (Pd) checkbox: This is checked by default.
Show (dPd/dlogtd) checkbox: This will plot the raw derivative when
checked.
Show spline (dPd/dlogtd) checkbox: This is the default presentation for

the smoothed derivative.

Output Spline checkbox: This option automatically converts the output
data that would be saved to a (*.TCX) file, to provide an optimum
spacing of data points when viewed in a Log Time Plot. PanMesh
calculates the optimum spacing by determining the Spline Curve
generated by the original data, then resolving this to the X-axis for the
equidistant number of data points requested in the PanMesh Edit
Number of Points Sub-Dialog.
Print Orientation Landscape checkbox: If this option is checked, the

Graphing Window will be printed in Landscape Orientation. If this
option is unchecked, the Graphing Window will be printed in Portrait
Orientation.
Timer: This displays the elapsed time since the start of the Numerical
Simulation, or the total calculation time after the Numerical Simulation has
ended. This information is also displayed in the Status Bar after the
Numerical Simulation has ended.
Save As TCX File: The Save As TCX File option generates a standard
Windows Save As dialog and is used to make a copy of the (*.TCX) file
under a different name for future use. When the Graphing Window is
closed, the dimensionless PanMesh response is automatically written to a
file called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will be
used by PanSystem to generate the Real-Time and Pressure Well Test
response on exiting PanMesh. This PANMESH.TCX file will be
overwritten by the next PanMesh Numerical Simulation that is performed.
i
The same Save As facility is available in PanSystem on the File menu under
Save PanMesh Calc, or alternatively, use the My Computer or Windows
Explorer facilities to copy and rename the PANMESH.TCX file.
Overlay - Import TCX: This feature facilitates overlaying another TCX

file on top of the file generated by the current run. Only TCX files
generated by PanMesh version 3.3 or higher can be imported using this
feature. This feature can be useful for comparing the results of different
PanMesh runs.

After the Numerical Simulation calculations are completed, users may exit
PanMesh and return to PanSystem by clicking on Close Window (i.e. X
symbol) in the top right corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface. However,
before exiting, users may wish to Review the Pressure or Flow Distribution at
different times of the Numerical Simulation. In this case, select the
Pressure/Show Color Contours option from the Data View Control Menu, or select
the Color Contour option from the PanMesh Toolbar, to display the Graphing
Window in Review Mode:
Graphing Window in Review Mode: The Graphing Window now includes

a Color Scale Key on the right, and upper and lower Scale Marker Bars (i.e.
blue and red lines), which define the span of the color contouring for (Pd).
The color scale can be adjusted in a number of ways:
Left-click on either the lower (red) or upper (blue) limit, then drag
and release. This will result in non-rounded (arbitrary) limits (if the
Color Bar is turned on in the Visualisation Window, the displayed
values will reflect this).
Left-click on the top or bottom of the color bar itself in the Graphing
window, then drag and release and the limits can be changed to any
arbitrary value.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to change the lower value (red) to
the next rounded (in logarithmic scale) value.
Use SHIFT + UP or DOWN to change the upper value (blue) to the

next rounded (in logarithmic scale) value.
i For the latter two options, ensure the Graphing Window has the focus.
The edge of the red area in the Reservoir Image is the outer limit of the
Pressure Disturbance. The value of (Pd) at the edge is determined by the
position of the red marker bar on the graph. If users set the red marker
bar at (Pd = 0.1), the edge corresponds to the classical Radius of
Investigation for a Homogeneous Reservoir.
The blue marker bar affects the coloration closer to the Well, where the
Dimensionless Pressure Drop is bigger.

Users should experiment with the color scaling to achieve the best results.
Remember that the first half-dozen log cycles of (td) correspond to a very
small Depth of Investigation, and no coloration will be visible unless users
Zoom-In on the Wellbore region. A good way to achieve this is to use the
View Completions option from the View Control Panels; this will apply a
good Zoom-In on the Wellbore region. Use the Zoom feature from the View
Control Panels area of the Graphic Interface to adjust the viewing distance.
Review Simulation: When the Numerical Simulation is complete, a third

Marker Bar (vertical and green), appears on the right-hand side of the
graph area. By selecting and dragging this bar to the left/right (or using
the left/right arrow keys), users can Replay the Pressure propagation
against Dimensionless Time.
Controlling the Replay
The Playback dialog box is opened with the toolbar button . The dialog
box looks like this:
Figure 215: The Playback dialog box.
It is an alternative to dragging the vertical time-line in the Graphing Window

manually with the mouse in order to view the Color Contouring, and is
positioned at the bottom center of the Perspective View window. It can be
closed by clicking on the toolbar option once more. The various buttons are
standard form:
Go to first time step.
Stop playback.

Start playback from current time step. This will cause the simulation to be
displayed by stepping automatically through the simulation history.
Go to last time step.
Horizontal Scroll Bar: This allows the user to control the simulation history
in exactly the same way as the green time line in the Graph Window.
Playback Speed: This opens a simple dialog box to set the playback speed
that is the time for which each time step result is displayed during Playback
mode.
Figure 216: The Playback Speed dialog box
i It estimates the time that the playback will take from the current time step to
the end of the simulation period.
i The Playback Speed dialog box also displays the time at the current time
station.

Status Bar 27
Figure 217: The Playback dialog box appears at the bottom center of the
perspective view window
Status Bar
This is situated at the base of the PanMesh Graphical Interface and provides
users with summary information relating to the preparation, execution and
completion of the current Numerical Simulation (e.g. Current Status, Estimated
End Time for Simulation, Total Elapsed Simulation Time, etc.).
Saving Numerical Simulation Data:
When the Numerical Simulation has finished, users have a number of options
for saving results:
History File:
On exiting PanMesh (or on closing the Graphing Window) users will be issued
with the following prompt:
Do you wish to save the Simulation History File?. This is optional.

Status Bar
The History File (*.HST), contains a step-by-step record of the Numerical

Simulation, including Pressures at all Nodes in the Reservoir. This can be used
for future replay of the Dimensionless Wellbore Response, the Color Pressure
Visualisation, and generation of Interference Test Responses, without having to
re-compute the Numerical Simulation itself.
i
These files are large (i.e. several to many megabytes) and should only be
saved if they will be needed later (e.g. for the final, best match to a Well Test).
A regular clear-out, compression or transfer to CD of (*.HST) files is advisable
if they are being saved frequently and/or in large numbers.
Selecting No will close PanMesh and return users to PanSystem.
Selecting Yes will open a standard Windows File Save As dialog for the
History File, with extension (*.HST). The default directory will be the
PanSystem Data folder. After entering a suitable filename and saving,
PanMesh will close and users will be returned to PanSystem.
Real-Time and Pressure Response:
When PanMesh is closed, the Dimensionless Response is automatically written

to a file called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will be
used by PanSystem to generate the Real-Time and Pressure Well Test Response.
This PANMESH.TCX file will be overwritten by the next PanMesh Numerical
Simulation that is run.
Before closing PanMesh, the Save As TCX File option on the Graphing
i
Window Pop-Up Menu (described earlier), can be used to make a copy of the
file under a different name. There is also an option to make a back-up of the
file in PanSystem on the File menu using the Save PanMesh Calc option, or
alternatively, use My Computer or the Windows Explorer facilities to copy and
re-name the file.
The Saved (*.TCX) file can be re-used to generate a Real-Time and Pressure
Response for a specific case without going back into PanMesh.
PanSystem will convolve the Dimensionless Response from PanMesh with the
selected Wellbore Storage Model (Cs), the Rate Schedule (and for Gas or
Condensate, the Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D)). This is achieved with the Advanced
Simulation facility, using analytically-derived, Dimensionless Response
Functions. PanSystem will rapidly progress through the time-steps of the Rate
Schedule to produce a full Well Test Response:

Status Bar 27
If users were in the Analysis section of PanSystem with a diagnostic plot
displayed on-screen when PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will find
themselves situated back in the same plot, with the PanMesh-generated
response overlaid on the Well Test data. The Simulated curve will be
present on any diagnostic plot that is subsequently selected. To remove
it, select the Overlay Pressure option from the Edit menu and switch-off
the Show Overlaid Pressure option in the generated dialog (or select an
alternative overlay, if there is a choice).
If users were not in the Analysis section of PanSystem (e.g. designing a

Well Test), they will be taken to the Test Overview Plot, with their
Simulated Test displayed. If a Master Pressure Column is present (e.g. an
existing Well Test), this will also be plotted.
The Simulated Pressure Channel will be called FEM P and two Sandface Flow
Rate columns - FEM Q Total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.
To make additional PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a History Match), without

Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog from the
Data Preparation menu. Select a data file, then the Edit button to
generate a Gauge Data Edit Gauge Data dialog, highlight FEM P,
then select the New button to generate a Define New Data File dialog.
Select a column and re-name the file, before re-running PanMesh.
prompt after running PanMesh (as described below).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Flow Rates - FEM Q
Total and FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to
Delete facility (i.e. accessed via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog), or just let them be overwritten each time.
PanSystem Prompts/Dialogs Encountered After Leaving PanMesh 3-D

Numerical Simulation:
These will vary according to the way users exit from PanMesh, but the
following will generally apply:

Status Bar
Duplicate Column Names: This warning will be issued when users close
PanMesh directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. X symbol) in the top
right corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface and select No to the prompt
Do you wish to Save the Simulation History file?. Selecting OK in this
warning dialog will overwrite these columns of data with duplicate
filenames. Selecting Cancel will generate the Simulated Column Names
Sub-Dialog, where alternative column filenames can be specified.
Advanced Simulation Control dialog: Selecting OK in the Simulated

Column Names Sub-Dialog, will let users proceed with the Advanced
Simulation Calculations. Refer to the Help topic on theAdvanced
Simulation Control Dialog, for further details of the options and controls
available within this dialog.
Calculating Advanced Simulation: Selecting OK in the Advanced

Simulation Control Dialog will generate this information dialog, telling
the user about the number of calculation steps involved and the current
calculation status. When all the steps have been completed, select OK to
close the dialog. The Advanced Simulation will convolve the Rate data and
Wellbore Storage with the Constant Rate Dimensionless Solution generated
by PanMesh.
If the Numerical Simulation was commenced from a diagnostic plot in

Analysis, users will be returned to the same plot with the Simulated
Pressure data overlaid.
If the Numerical Simulation was commenced from the Data Preparation

Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, users will find the new FEM P
Pressure data (or an alternative name if it was changed) listed in the
Data File /Column List section of the dialog. Users may Save, Plot,
Analyze or use this data as an Overlay in a similar manner to other
Pressure data.

PanMesh View Layer Volumes and Production Rates Dialog 27
PANMESH VIEW LAYER VOLUMES AND

PRODUCTION RATES DIALOG
General:
This dialog can be generated after a Numerical Simulation has been performed,
by selecting the Layer Volumes button beneath the View Controls panel to the
right of the PanMesh Graphical Interface.
This dialog box displays the following information relating to each layer:
1. The porous volume of each layer (displayed in ft3 or m3 depending on the

units chosen),
2. The % of the total reservoir porous volume that each represents,
3. The cumulative % production from each layer, during the last time-step
(Current %) and over the simulation so far (Overall %).
4. The total bulk volume of the reservoir,
5. The total porous volume of the reservoir,
6. The average porosity.
i
Note that the Production figures correspond to the time-step at which the time
slider (vertical green line) in the Graphing Window is set. In a multi-layered
model, therefore, the results might change with the position of the slider.
Layer Production Rates
The methods and algorithms necessary have been implemented to calculate

the % production from each layer in a multi-layer reservoir. The results are
displayed in the Layer Volumes & Production Rates dialog box:

PanMesh View Layer Volumes and Production Rates Dialog
Figure 218: The Layer Volumes & Production Rates dialog box
Layer Production and Material Balance Calculation
The change in volume of oil/gas in any element (within the finite element
mesh) can be calculated by considering the drop in pressure combined with
the porous volume and compressibility of the fluid in the element. Therefore,
for any time step we can estimate the overall change in volume of fluid in any
layer and compare it to the volume being produced at the open completions
(as defined in the applied flow regime). This is a simple check on material
balance.
The dialog box shows two columns of % production one showing the value
over the last time step and the other showing the cumulative value since time
zero. At late times the material balance under both columns invariably shows
100% but it is worth noting that at early times the cumulative (overall)
balance may be less than 100% (even though the current time step balance
might be 100%). This is because the numerical techniques used in simulating
the flow history implicitly have a slight error over the first time step that very
quickly becomes insignificant as the simulation progresses (i.e. an error over
the first time step usually the initial time step is of the order of 0.01 td
which is often only milliseconds depending on the rock and fluid properties).

PanMesh View Flow into Completions Dialog 27
PANMESH VIEW FLOW INTO

COMPLETIONS DIALOG
General:
This dialog can be generated after a Numerical Simulation has been performed,
by first selecting the Flow % button beneath the View Controls panel to the
right of the PanMesh Graphical Interface..
In addition to viewing some tabulated data, users can choose to:
View the Flow into any selected Completion Zone as flow arrows in the
Perspective View window;
Select different viewing positions for the selected Completion Zone.
i
Note that the data refer to completions (open intervals) and not to layers, and
that the flowrate % displayed correspond to the time-step at which the time
slider (vertical green line) in the Graphing Window is set. In a multi-layered
model, therefore, the results might change with the position of the slider.
In the View Flow into Completions dialog, the following parameters are
displayed for each Completion Zone:
Completion: Completion Zones (open intervals) are numbered in order

from the top of the reservoir (vertical or slanted well) or from the heel
(horizontal well).
Length: The Length of each Completion Zone.
Distance: The Distance from the top of the reservoir (vertical or slanted
well) or from the heel (horizontal well) to the top of each Completion Zone.
i For Length and Position, the display units are the same as those selected for
the Master View (i.e. Feet or Meters).

PanMesh View Flow into Completions Dialog
Area: The Percentage of the total open Completion Area (or length)
attributed to each individual Completion Zone.
Flow: The Percentage of the total Flowrate attributed to each individual

Completion Zone at the current timestep.
Users can choose to view a graphical presentation of the flow into any
Completion Zone by selecting the desired Completion from the displayed list (by
double-clicking on an appropriate row or by highlighting a row then selecting
the Apply button). Three different views can be set-up for the selected
Completion Zone using the radio buttons at the top right corner of the dialog:
Top: The view is centered on the Top of the selected Completion Zone (i.e.
nearest to the Heel).
Centred: The view is centered on the Middle of the selected Completion

Zone.
Bottom: The view is centered on the Bottom of the selected Completion

Zone (i.e. farthest from the Heel).
i
In each case, when the Apply button is selected, the Flow Plane is
automatically moved, Sized and Oriented for the selected Completion Zone. A
Zoom-In is also performed automatically to the selected Completion Zone.
The Error % given is an indication of the accuracy of the Flowrates into the
Completions compared to the Applied Flow. The Applied Flow is the total
flowrate used in PanMesh to generate the simulation. Obviously, the accuracy
is greater when the Error % value is smaller, since the value is calculated as:
Error % = 100 x (Calculated Flow - Applied Flow)/Applied Flow
i
Note that an Error in this estimation does not reflect an equivalent Error in the
Pressure Calculation. It is rather related to the size of the elements around the
open Completion Zones and their ability (given the linear interpolation used for
Flow over each element) to mimic the Flow Field.
!
If users want to try and get a qualitative feel for the Flow in the Reservoir, an
extra Flow Analysis checkbox option is available in the Edit Mesh dialog; if this
option is selected, PanMesh adds elements into the Mesh. This Flow Analysis
option should be used in conjunction with the Superfine Mesh options.

PanMesh Data View Controls Dialog 27
PANMESH DATA VIEW CONTROLS

DIALOG
General:
This tabbed dialog can be generated from the PanMesh Graphical Interface
after Numerical Simulation has been performed, by selecting the Data View
Controls button from the View Control Panels; it can be used to adjust the
settings that affect the appearance of any Cut Plane, Flow Plane and Stream
Tube displayed in the Perspective View.
The dialog is comprised of three tabs, described as follows:
Cut Plane tab:
A Cut Plane is a vertical, horizontal or angled slice through the Reservoir

Image. These control elements of the interface are only enabled when the Cut
Plane toolbar or menu option is selected in the PanMesh Graphical Interface; the
controls are used to adjust the Orientation, Rotation or Translation (i.e. in
incremental steps) and the Relative Position of a Cut Plane within the Reservoir
Image. When the Cut Plane option is selected, the Solid Model View option is
also selected automatically (if not already selected); this enables users to
visualize the Cut Plane more easily.
A Cut Plane can potentially be placed at any Position/Orientation within the

Reservoir Image, but as a starting point, three Cut Plane options are provided;
these can be orientated parallel to the Wellbore Axis or the Cartesian Axes (X, Y
or Z), depending on whether the Around Well or Lock Point checkbox has been
checked (as described below). The Cut Plane controls are situated down the
left-hand side of the tab and are described from top to bottom:
(From left to right, Cut Plane tools for X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis respectively)

PanMesh Data View Controls Dialog
If the Reservoir Image is in Top View (default setting), the X-axis cut is made
vertically from left to right, the Y-axis cut is made vertically from top to
bottom. For a Slant or Horizontal Well, the cut is oriented along the azimuth of
the Well Trajectory. For a truly Vertical Well, the cut is made vertically through
the Wellbore Axis.
The Vertical Cuts are useful for inspecting the Meshing in the plane of a Vertical
or Slant Well. If Color Visualization is also used, it permits users to see the early
part of the propagation of the Pressure Disturbance out from the Well during
the Numerical Simulation, by removing the portion of the Reservoir Image
between the viewer and the Well.
The Z-axis cut is made in a horizontal plane and is best viewed when the
Reservoir Image is in Front View or Side View. For Horizontal Wells a cut is made
through the Reservoir Image in the plane of the Well (for a Vertical Well it
simply cuts across the bottom Layer of Mesh elements, which is not usually of
much use).
The Horizontal Cut is useful for inspecting the Meshing in the plane of a
Horizontal Well. If Color Visualization is also used, it permits users to see the
early part of the propagation of the Pressure Disturbance out from the Well
during the Numerical Simulation, by removing that part of the Reservoir Image
which overlies the Well.
Rotate radio button and Degree Slider: When the Rotate radio button is
selected, the upper Slider Control is used to set the increment for Rotation
of the Cut Plane (i.e. in 1 increments from 1 up to 15) around a Fixed
Point. The Rotation function is controlled by the keyboard arrow keys (i.e.
Left, Right, Up and Down as required). Movement is free-form, so users
can Rotate the Cut Plane to any 3-D aspect within the Perspective View
Window.
Translate radio button and Distance Slider: When the Translate radio button
is selected, the lower Slider Control is used to set the increment for
Translation movement of the Cut Plane (i.e. in logarithmic increments
from 1cm up to 1000m). The Translation function (i.e. movement of the
Cut Plane upwards/downwards or backwards/forwards), is controlled by
the Up/Down keyboard arrow keys only (i.e. Up to move the Cut Plane
upwards/forwards and Down to move the Cut Plane
downwards/backwards as required).

Around Well: This checkbox is used to set whether the Rotation of the Cut
Plane is relative to the Wellbore Axis or the Cartesian Co-ordinate System (i.e.
X, Y, Z). This option also forces the Cut Plane Orientation buttons to orient
the Cut Plane relative to the Wellbore Axis. The position of a Cut Plane is
defined by a Known Point (i.e. the Cut Plane center), and its outward
Normal.
Lock Centre: When this checkbox is checked, use of the Cut Plane
Orientation buttons sets the Cut Plane Orientation to the default settings
(i.e. orientated parallel to the Cartesian Axes (X, Y or Z)). However, the
Known Point (i.e. the Cut Plane center), is left unaltered.
The settings of this control can be Saved using the View Saver facility, and
stored in the History File. Perspective Views can also be Added to existing
History Files.
In the PanMesh Graphical Interface, a mouse-operated Cut Plane adjustment

tool is situated next to a similar Flow Plane adjustment tool (i.e. beneath the
Data View Controls button on the View Control Panels. If both of these Data
View tools are currently selected, both tools will be visible. Users can toggle
between the Cut Plane and Flow Plane adjustment tools by left-clicking on the
appropriate control on the View Control Panels.
Flow Plane tab:
These control elements of the interface are only enabled after Numerical
Simulation has been performed and when the Flow Arrows/Flow Plane option
has been selected in the PanMesh Graphical Interface; they are used to adjust
the Orientation, Rotation or Translation (i.e. in incremental steps), Relative
Position and Size of a Flow Plane within the Reservoir Image. A Flow Plane is a
rectangular/planar surface that can be positioned at any Position/Orientation
within the Reservoir Image; it is used to display Fluid Flow Vectors that are
calculated at the Node Points of the Mesh and interpolated on a Regular Grid.
A Flow Plane can potentially be placed at any Position/Orientation within the

Reservoir Image, but as a starting point, three Flow Plane options are provided;
these can be orientated parallel to the Wellbore Axis or Cartesian Axes (X, Y or
Z), depending on whether the Around Well or Lock Point checkbox has been
checked (as described below). The Flow Plane controls are situated down the
left-hand side of the tab and are described from top to bottom:

(From left to right, Flow Plane tools for X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis respectively)
If the Reservoir Image is in Top View (default setting), the X-axis Flow Plane runs
vertically from left to right on the Reservoir Image, the Y-axis Flow Plane runs
vertically from top to bottom on the Reservoir Image. The Z-axis Flow Plane is
disposed horizontally and is best viewed when the Reservoir Image is in Front
View or Side View.
In a large Reservoir Image, it may be difficult to see the Flow Plane initially and
users are recommended to either Zoom-In on the Wellbore area or use the View
Completions button to focus in on the Flow Plane. Users can then Resize the
Flow Plane to suit their Reservoir Model and viewing requirements.
Rotate radio button and Degree Slider: When the Rotate radio button is
selected, the upper Slider control is used to set the increment for rotation
of the Flow Plane (i.e. in 1 increments from 1 up to 15) around a fixed
point. The Rotation function is controlled by the keyboard arrow keys (i.e.
Left, Right, Up and Down as required). Movement is free-form, so users
can Rotate the Flow Plane to any 3-D aspect within the Perspective View
Window.
Translate, Pan and Resize radio buttons and Distance Slider: When any of
these three radio buttons are selected, the lower Slider control is used to
set the increment for movement of the Flow Plane (i.e. in logarithmic
increments from 1cm up to 1000m).
The Translation function allows the Flow Plane to be moved

backwards/forwards when the X-axis or Y-axis tool is selected or
upwards/downwards when the Z-axis tool is selected). Movement is
controlled by the up/down keyboard arrow keys only (i.e. Up to move the
Flow Plane up/forwards and Down to move the Flow Plane
down/backwards as required).
The Pan function allows the Flow Plane to be moved along its own Axes
(i.e. Flow Plane can slide along the 3-D plane of which it is formed). When
the X-axis or Y-axis tools are selected, the Flow Plane can be moved
vertically upwards/downwards with the Up/Down keyboard arrow keys
and backwards/forwards with the Left/Right keyboard arrow keys. When
the Z-axis tool is selected, the Flow Plane can be moved horizontally
backwards/forwards in the X- and Y-directions with the Left/Right and
Up/Down keyboard keys respectively.

The Resize function allows the Flow Plane to be increased/reduced in area.
Irrespective of whether the X-axis, Y-axis or Z-axis tools are selected, the
Flow Plane can be increased in Width/Length/Height about its center with
the Up/Right keyboard arrow keys and reduced in Width/Length/Height
about its center with the Down/Left keyboard arrow keys.
i A mouse click and drag Resize method is also available via the Flow Plane
adjustment tool in the View Control Panels of the PanMesh Graphical Interface.
Around Well: This checkbox is used to set whether the rotation of the Flow
Plane is relative to the Wellbore Axis or the Cartesian Co-ordinate System (X,
Y, Z). This option also forces the Flow Plane Orientation tools to orient the
Flow Plane relative to the Wellbore Axis. The position of a Flow Plane is
defined by a Known Point (i.e. the Flow Plane center), and its outward
Normal.
Lock Settings: When this checkbox is checked, use of the Flow Plane
Orientation tools will set the Flow Plane Orientation to the default settings
(i.e. orientated parallel to the Cartesian Axes (X, Y or Z)). However, the
Known Point (i.e. the Flow Plane center), is left unaltered.
i Flow Plane Settings can be saved using the View Saver facility, and will be
stored in the History File.
In the PanMesh Graphical Interface, a mouse-operated Flow Plane adjustment
i
tool is situated next to a similar Cut Plane adjustment tool (i.e. beneath the
Data View Controls button on the View Control Panels. If both of these Data
View tools are currently selected, both tools will be visible. Users can toggle
between the Cut Plane and Flow Plane adjustment tools by left-clicking on the
appropriate control on the View Control Panels.

Settings: This button generates the PanMesh Flow Plane Settings

Sub-Dialog; this contains a number of Slider adjusters and checkboxes
that are used to:
Select the Flow Arrow Resolution in the direction of the two Planar Axes
(i.e. the Number of Flow Arrows that will be displayed within the area
of the Flow Plane in each direction). If the Lock Resolution checkbox is
also checked and the Flow Plane is subsequently Resized, the Number
of Flow Arrows in each direction will remain unchanged following the
Resize process.
Select the Relative Scaling of the Flow Arrows. This facility allows
users to make a qualitative assessment of Fluid Flux in the Reservoir
surrounding the Wellbore. This is disabled when in Direction Only
mode.
The Average Flux is the Flow Rate divided by the Areas of open section on the
Wellbore (i.e. 2 x Rw x (completion lengths)). At a Scaling of 1.0, Fluid Flux of
average magnitude has an Arrow Length of Wellbore Radius (Rw) and can be
considered as being to scale. The Length of the Flow Arrows (L), is given by:
L = (q/qAv) x Rw x Scale
Where:
L = Flow Arrow Length

q = Flux at a given point
qAv = Average Flux
Rw = Wellbore Radius
Examples of use are provided below:
If the Scaling is initially set to 1.0, a Flow Arrow of Length equal to the Wellbore
Diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point of magnitude (2 x
qAv)/1.0.
If the Scaling is altered to 0.2, a Fluid Flux equal to qAv is now represented by
an Arrow of magnitude 0.2 x Rw.
At the same Scaling (i.e. 0.2), a Flow Arrow of Length equal to the Wellbore
Diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point of magnitude (2 x
qAv)/0.2 = 10 x qAv (i.e. ten times the Average Flux).

PanMesh Flow Plane Settings Sub-Dialog 27
In situations where extremely high Fluxes occur, this Scaling facility can be
used to reduce the Flow Arrow Length on a relative basis, to visualize areas of
Influx more effectively.
Select the Number of Sides that will be displayed on the Flow Arrowheads (e.g.
fewer Sides provides a flatter, 2-D appearance, but is faster to process/render,
whereas more Sides provides a greater 3-D appearance, but is slower to
process/render).
PANMESH FLOW PLANE SETTINGS

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated from the Flow Plane tab of the PanMesh Data
View Controls Dialog after Numerical Simulation has been performed, by
selecting the Settings button; it is used to adjust the settings that affect the
appearance of any Cut Plane, Flow Plane and Stream Tube displayed in the
Perspective View.
Select this button to generate the Flow Plane Settings sub-dialog; this is used
to:
Resolution Axes 1 and 2: The Flow Plane is a grid of points at which Flow
Arrows are interpolated from the Flow Field (i.e. calculated using the
Pressure Field and Material Properties). PanMesh allows a grid of up to 50 x
50 points and these two Slider Controls are used to select how many Flow
Arrows will be displayed in the direction of the two perpendicular
(planar) axes of the Flow Plane.
Scaling: This Slider Control is used to select the relative Scaling of the Flow
Arrows, enabling users to make a qualitative assessment of Fluid Flux in
the Reservoir surrounding the Wellbore.
The Average Flux is the Flow Rate divided by the Areas of open section on the
Wellbore (i.e. 2 x Rw x (completion lengths)). At a Scaling of 1.0, Fluid Flux of
average magnitude has an Arrow Length of Wellbore Radius (Rw) and can be
considered as being to scale. The Length (L) of the Flow Arrows is given by:

PanMesh Flow Plane Settings Sub-Dialog
L = (q/qAv) x Rw x Scale
Where:
L = Flow Arrows Length
q = Flux at a given point
qAv = Average Flux
Rw = Wellbore Radius
Examples of use are provided below:
If the Scaling is initially set to 1.0, a Flow Arrow Length equal to the
Wellbore diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point of
magnitude (2 x qAv)/1.0.
If the Scaling is altered to 0.2, a Fluid Flux equal to qAv is now

represented by an Flow Arrow of magnitude 0.2 x Rw.
At the same Scaling (i.e. 0.2), a Flow Arrow Length equal to the Wellbore
diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point of
magnitude (2 x qAv)/0.2 = 10 x qAv (i.e. ten times the Average Flux).
In situations where extremely high Fluxes occur, this Scaling facility can be
used to reduce the Flow Arrow Length on a relative basis, to visualize areas of
influx more effectively.
Arrow Heads: This Slider Control is used to select the number of Sides that
will be displayed on the Flow Arrow Heads (e.g. fewer Sides provides a
flatter, 2-D appearance, but is faster to process/render, whereas more
Sides provides a greater 3-D appearance, but is slower to process/render).
Lock Resolution checkbox: If the Lock Resolution checkbox is checked and

the Flow Plane is subsequently Resized, the number of Flow Arrows in each
direction will remain unchanged following the Resize process.

PanMesh Saved Views Dialog 27
Show Direction Only checkbox: This checkbox is used to override any
Arrow Scaling settings in that Flow Arrows are all displayed at the same
Scale and merely indicate the Flow Direction rather than the Flux
Magnitude.
i This facility can also be toggled on/off by using the Ctrl + D keyboard keys.
Reset button: This button is used to Reset the current Flow Plane Settings to
the default values and the Flow Plane orientation to the default setting (i.e.
X-axis button).
Cancel button: Closes the sub-dialog without accepting any edits and
returns users to the Perspective View Window.
OK button: Closes the sub-dialog accepting any edits and returns users to
PANMESH SAVED VIEWS DIALOG

General:
This dialog is generated when the View List sub-menu option is selected from
the View Management option on the PanMesh View menu or the Manage Views
button is selected on the View Control Panels; it can be used to:
Select and Apply one of the Saved Views listed in this dialog for display in
Edit any of the Titles (i.e. names) currently applied to Saved Views.
Delete any of the Saved Views listed in this dialog.
i
These Saved Views represent everything required to recreate a Reservoir
Image as recorded in the Perspective View Window using the Camera button
from the View Saver section of PanMesh View Controls.

PanMesh Saved Views Dialog
Saved View List/Selection Field: This field lists all the Reservoir Image Views
from the Perspective View Window that have been Saved to the History File.
To load any of these Views into the Perspective View Window, either
double-click on the required View Title or select/highlight the required
View Title, then select the Apply button. In either case, the selected View
will be displayed in the Perspective View Window.
Edit: Select this button to generate the PanMesh Edit the View Title
Sub-Dialog; it can be used to Edit any of the selected Titles (i.e. names)
assigned to saved Perspective Views. Up to 200 alphanumeric characters
can be used.
Delete: Select one of the Perspective Views listed in the Saved View
List/Selection Field, then select this button to permanently delete the
selected Perspective View.
Delete All: Select this button to permanently delete all of the listed
Perspective Views in the dialog.
Apply button: Select one of the Perspective Views listed in the Saved View
List/Selection Field, then select this button to display it in the 3-D Reservoir
Perspective View Window (which is running in the background). The same
functionality is available by double left-clicking on the selected
Perspective View in the list.
Up/Down: Use these buttons to move any selected Perspective View either
Up or Down the displayed list as required.
Close button: Select this button to Close the Saved Views dialog.
Save Views Relative To...: This option allows the user to anchor a view (that is,
the camera position, the view control positions such as the flow plane, etc.) to a
point other than the origin. This may be useful in situations where the user is
doing a series of analyses. For example, if the user is considering the effect of
varying the well bore position (or the completion position/pattern) and has a view
showing a particular pattern around one of the tips, it may be useful to save the
views relative to the first tip and export them so that they can be read in and
applied to the second analysis. The use of heel in this dialog box refers to the point
of entry of the well bore into the reservoir for the vertical/inclined type scenarios
and the heal for horizontal cases.

PanMesh Edit the View Title Sub-Dialog 27
PANMESH EDIT THE VIEW TITLE

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when the Edit button is selected in the PanMesh
Saved Views Dialog; it can be used to Edit any of the selected Titles (i.e.
names) assigned to saved Perspective Views.
A similar sub-dialog is displayed when users select the Edit View Title option
from the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu or the Edit Title sub-menu option from View
Management under the View Menu, but in these cases the sub-dialog is entitled
Enter the New View Title and any Title edits are only applied to the current
Perspective View.
Entry/Editing Field (alphanumeric): Either select and highlight the entire

entry or part of the alphanumeric entry as appropriate, then edit or enter
text/numerals to describe the currently selected Saved View. The default
entry is Perspective View #(number). Each View is numbered consecutively
as it is Saved.
OK button: Select this button to apply any changes and/or exit from the
sub-dialog.
Cancel button: Select this button to exit from the sub-dialog without
applying any changes.
PANMESH ENTER THE NEW VIEW/GRAPH

TITLE SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users either select:

PanMesh Enter the New View/Graph Title Sub-Dialog
The Edit View Title option from the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu or the
View/View Management/Edit Title sub-menu option from the PanMesh Main
Menu.
The Properties/Edit Graph Title option from the Graphing Window Pop-Up
Menu.
it can be used to Enter a new Title/Name for the current Perspective View or
Graphing Window (i.e. assign a Title other than the default one), or Edit the
existing Title/Name assigned to the current Perspective View or Graphing
Window.
i
A similar sub-dialog is displayed when the Edit button is selected in the Saved
Views dialog, but in this case the sub-dialog is entitled Edit the View Title and
any Title edits are only applied to the selected Perspective View Title within
the Saved View.
Entry/Editing Field (alphanumeric): Either select and highlight the entire

entry or part of the alphanumeric entry as appropriate, then edit or enter
text/numerals to describe the current Perspective View Title. The default
entry is Perspective View #(number). For the Graphing Window, the default
entry is textual.
OK button: Select this button to apply any changes and/or exit from the
sub-dialog.
Cancel button: Select this button to exit from the sub-dialog without
applying any changes.

PanMesh Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog 27
PANMESH ENTER THE CO-ORDINATES

DIALOG
General:
This dialog can be generated in a number of ways, after a Numerical

Simulation has been performed:
Click in the Graphing Window to activate the Graphing Window Menu and
either select the Select a Point (P+) toolbar option or Data View Controls/P+
Select a Point menu option to generate this dialog.
Choose the Select a Point (P+) option, then click in the Visualization Window
in the approximate area of interest; this will generate a Selected Point
Graphing Window (the current X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the Selected Point will
be displayed in the Window Title Bar). Next, click in the Selected Point
Graphing Window to activate the Graphing Window Menu and either select
the P+ (Select a Point) toolbar option or Data View Controls/P+ Select a Point
menu option to generate this dialog.
Alternatively, after generating a Selected Point (as described above),

double-click on the Selected Point (i.e. green-colored sphere) in the
Visualization Window to generate this dialog directly.
The Simulation has created a Pressure versus Time record for every Mesh Node
in the Model. The response at the Well is displayed on the initial Graphing
Window. With the Select a Point facility, users can define the Co-ordinates of
any other Point in the Reservoir (i.e. not necessarily at a Mesh Node) and
generate a (Pd) versus (td) response for it. This can subsequently be converted
into a real Pressure versus Time record for an Interference Test in PanSystem.
The dialog is comprised of an information field, three data entry fields, a unit
selection section and two function buttons, described as follows:
Information Field: This is to remind users that the Z-Co-ordinate is positive

downwards.

PanMesh Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog
X-, Y- and Z-Co-ordinate: Enter the X-, Y- and Z-Co-ordinates for the point of
interest. Remember that Z is positive downwards. PanMesh issues a
warning if the point does not lie within the Reservoir.
i The exact Well Position is not recognized as a valid Point.
Units section: Select the required co-ordinate unit system from either Feet
or Metres.
Users may not remember the co-ordinate system they defined in the
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical) section of the program. It is not
!
possible to open this section of the program (i.e. via the Data Preparation
menu in PanSystem), to review the co-ordinates unless PanMesh is first
shut-down. To avoid this situation, start a second PanSystem session, then
open the same (*.PANX) file and view it there. Remember to shut-down this
session of PanSystem before continuing.
After selecting OK, a new Graphing Window will appear showing the
Dimensionless, Constant-Rate Drawdown Pressure Response and Derivative at the
specified Point.
If users click on Close Window (i.e. X symbol) in the top right corner of the
new Graphing Window, a Save As (*TCX) File? prompt is generated for the
point data. If users want to convert this into a real Pressure versus Time
Response in PanSystem, they should answer Yes at the prompt, to save the
Dimensionless Response to a (*.TCX) file. Enter a name for the file in the File
Save As dialog that appears next. This data will be saved to the current
Type-Curve folder (typcurv) by default. Users will then be returned to the
original Graphing Window containing the response at the Well.

PanMesh Edit Mesh Dialog 27
PANMESH EDIT MESH DIALOG

General:
This dialog can only be generated in PanMesh before Numerical Simulation is

performed, by right-clicking anywhere in the 3-D Reservoir Visualization
Window to activate the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu, then selecting the Edit Mesh
menu option. The dialog can be used to alter the density of the Mesh used for
the Numerical Simulation and can (optionally) be used to activate Flow Analysis
for the View Completions option (also refer to PanMesh View Flow into
Completions Dialog for more details).
The dialog is comprised of three or four selection sections (i.e. depending on

the number of regions present) and two function buttons, described as
follows:
Wellbore section: This increases the number of Elements along the

Wellbore, but only if the Well is partially-completed. The Mesh Refinement
occurs over the non-open sections, with increased fining as the open
sections are approached. The degree of Mesh Refinement is at a maximum
close to the Well and decreases with radial distance away from the Well.
This improves the modeling of Flow Convergence and produces a better
Early-Time Response.
Radial section: This boosts the number of Elements in the Radial direction
in the Region containing the Well by increasing the density of the Mesh
rings. This might improve the response to a Boundary or Internal Fault
close to the Well.

PanMesh Edit Mesh Dialog
Polygons section: This section only appears for a model with more than
one Region (refer to the Help topic for Using Regions and Defining Areal
Heterogeneity for more details). It boosts the number of Elements in the
Regions (i.e. Polygons) not containing the Well. A Region closer to the Well
will be given more Mesh Refinement than a Region farther from the Well.
This might improve the Mid- or Late-Time Response in a heterogeneous
Reservoir.
i
For the three sections listed above, the progression from Coarse, through
Medium and Fine, to Superfine, increases the number of Elements in the
Mesh.
Anisotropy: For a Vertical Well, this extends some of the Wellbore Vertical
Refinement (described above), out through the Reservoir instead of
dissipating it away from the Well. This may improve Early-Time Response
in a partially-completed Well in an anisotropic Reservoir.
i This section has no effect with Horizontal Wells.
Flow Analysis: Although the primary aim is accurate calculation of the

Pressure Transient (specifically at the open Completion Zones), the Pressure
field can also be used (in conjunction with the Material Properties) to
estimate the Flow at any Point in the Reservoir (via the Flow Plane and
Stream Tube options). Additionally, with the View Flow into Completions
option, the Flow into each Completion can be estimated (and the sum of all
the Flows compared to the applied Flow). For users who wish to get a
qualitative feel for the Flow in the Reservoir, this option can be used to add
Elements. To get the best feel for the Flow Regime, use this option in
conjunction with the Superfine options from the Wellbore and Radial
sections (described above).

PanMesh Change Graph Area Sub-Dialog 27
The default settings can be accepted for most purposes. If users suspect that
a response could be improved by Mesh Refinement, try increasing the
appropriate default by one step. A finer Mesh will incur an increased
computation time, and may or may not produce a more accurate response. If
the response is significantly different, it would suggest that an improvement
has been achieved and it might even be worth investigating the possibilities
of going one step further in refinement, but this should not normally be
necessary.
PANMESH CHANGE GRAPH AREA

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by right-clicking anywhere within the PanMesh

Graphing Window and selecting the Properties/Graph Area option from the
pop-up menu; it is used for applying Axis Re-scaling (if required).
i This sub-dialog can also be generated by double left-clicking on the Plot

Axes within the Graphing Window.
Minimum td: On (horizontal) X-axis next to origin. Enter a suitable

number or accept the default setting.
Minimum Pd: On (vertical) Y-axis next to origin. Enter a suitable number

or accept the default setting.
Maximum td: On right-hand end of (horizontal) X-axis. Enter a suitable

Maximum Pd: On upper-most end of (vertical) Y-axis. Enter a suitable


PanMesh Edit Number of Points Sub-Dialog
Graph scales are adjusted by setting the minimum and maximum limits for
Dimensionless Pressure (Pd) and Dimensionless Time (td).
The raw (Pd/td) data are spaced according to the internal time-stepping
regime within PanMesh, which is not optimal for use in PanSystem. The
Output Spline option from the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu (which is on by
default), is used to optimize the spacing of the output data when it is saved to
a (*.TCX) file.
PANMESH EDIT NUMBER OF POINTS

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by double left-clicking anywhere inside the

Graph within the PanMesh Graphing Window. This option automatically
converts the output data that would be saved to a (*.TCX) file, to provide an
optimum spacing of data points when viewed on a Log Time Axis. PanMesh
calculates the optimum spacing by determining the Spline Curve generated by
the original data, then resolving this to the X-axis for the equidistant number
of data points requested by the user in this sub-dialog.
The Output Spline option from the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu (which is
on by default), is used to optimize the spacing of the output data when it is
saved to a (*.TCX) file. When selected it is used to define the number of
points calculated in the (*.TCX) file.
i
As mentioned above, this sub-dialog can be generated by double left-clicking
anywhere within the Graphing Window, except on the Plot Axes. If users
double left-click on the Plot Axes, the PanMesh Change Graph Area
Sub-Dialog will be generated instead.

PanMesh Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog 27
The sub-dialog is comprised of a single data entry field and two function
buttons. Normally, the default setting for the Number of Points will provide a
smooth output result for the (Pd) versus (td) plot.
i
The default Number of Points interpolated from the Spline is equal to five times
the Number of Time Stations in the analysis; this is implemented once the
Numerical Simulation has ended.
If the results are unacceptable (e.g. too noisy), try increasing the number (i.e.
up to 5001), until a smoother plot is obtained.
PANMESH SIMULATED COLUMN NAMES

SUB-DIALOG
General:
If users already have a Column called FEM P (or Flow Rate Columns with the
default names) in the file from a previous PanMesh Simulation, a data
overwrite warning will be issued after closing PanMesh and before the
PanSystem calculations begin. If users want to perform more PanMesh runs
(e.g. to refine a History Match), and do not want to overwrite the current FEM
P data, they can either:
Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog from the Data
Preparation menu. Select a data file, then the Edit button to generate a
Edit Gauge Data dialog, highlight FEM P, then select the New button to
generate a Define New Data File dialog. Select a Column and re-name the
file, before re-running PanMesh.
Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names prompt
after running PanMesh (described below).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Rates - FEM Q total and
FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete facility
(i.e. accessed via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog),
or just let them be overwritten each time.

PanMesh Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog
In the latter case from above, the Duplicate Column Names warning will be
issued when users close PanMesh directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e.
X symbol) in the top right corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface and
select No to the prompt Do you wish to save the Simulation History File?.
Selecting OK in this warning dialog will overwrite these columns of data

with duplicate filenames.
Selecting Cancel will generate the Simulated Column Names sub-dialog,

where alternative column filenames can be specified.
Pressure/Total Rate section: Change the name of the Pressure Column and
the Total Rate (i.e. if required).
Layer Rate Columns section: Change the name of the Layer Rate Column/s
(i.e. if required).
Select OK to accept any changes and generate the Advanced Simulation

Control Dialog (no further changes are required). The PanSystem Advanced
Simulation calculations will now take place - Pressure and Sandface Rate
Columns will be created with these new names.
Select Cancel to ignore any changes (i.e. overwrite existing Columns) and
generate theAdvanced Simulation Control Dialog (no further changes are
required). The PanSystem Advanced Simulation calculations will now take
place - Pressure and Sandface Rate Columns with the same names will be
created, overwriting the existing ones.

PanMesh Replay 27
PANMESH REPLAY
General:
This is the second of three sub-menu options from the PanSystem Simulation
view, situated under the Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh New Run

PanMesh Replay
These three options give access to the PanMesh Graphical Interface which is
fully described in PanMesh Graphical Interface..
The PanMesh Replay option first generates a File Open dialog, where users
select and import an existing PanMesh simulation in (*.HST) History File
format. On selecting Open from this dialog, PanMesh is invoked to import
results from the selected (i.e. existing) Simulation (provided it has been Saved
and stored in (*.HST) History File format).
! Users should have the appropriate (*.PANX) file open in PanSystem before
selecting PanMesh Replay.
In Replay Mode it is possible to:
Re-display the Dimensionless Pressure Response at the Well.
Save the Dimensionless Pressure Response at the Well as a (*.TCX) file (users
may have lost or overwritten the one from the original Simulation).
Replay the Pressure Visualization.
Generate the Dimensionless Pressure Response versus Time at any (X, Y, Z)

co-ordinate in the Reservoir for Interference Testing Purposes.
Generate the Real-Time/Pressure Well Test Response for the Well and/or
Selected Points in the Reservoir on returning to PanSystem.

PanMesh Replay
A typical workflow for Numerical Simulation using the PanMesh Replay option
is presented as follows:
Opening the History File: Users should have the appropriate (*.PANX)
file open in PanSystem before selecting PanMesh Replay.
Select PanMesh Replay and select the required History File stored in (*.HST)
format from the standard Windows File Open dialog that appears. This dialog
defaults to the PanSystem Data directory.
i If users forget to open the associated (*.PANX) file in PanSystem, a warning is

issued that no Flow Rate data is available.
The Replay Mode: Once the History File has been loaded, PanMesh is
invoked, with the 3-D Reservoir Viewing Window and Graphing Window
open. The (Pd) versus (td) response at the Well will be displayed.
i
PanMesh is now in the same status as if a Simulation has just been run.
However, in Replay Mode users cannot re-launch the Numerical Simulation;
this must be done using the PanMesh: New Run option from the PanSystem
Simulation view.
Saving the Dimensionless Pressure Response for a Well as a TCX File

(with User-Specified Name): When PanMesh is closed, users will be
prompted to make a named save. To do this without closing PanMesh,
right-click on the graph to generate the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu.
When the Graphing Window is closed, the Dimensionless PanMesh Response
is automatically written to a file called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve
folder (typcurv). This will subsequently be used by PanSystem to generate
the Real-Time and Pressure Well Test Response when users exit PanMesh.
This PANMESH.TCX file will be overwritten by the next PanMesh
Simulation that is made. Use the Save As TCX File option on the Graphing
Window Pop-Up Menu to make a copy of the file under a different name,
for future use. The same facility is also available in PanSystem from the
File menu under Save PanMesh Calc, or alternatively, use either the My
Computer or Windows Explorer facilities to copy and re-name the file.

PanMesh Replay 27
Replaying the Pressure Visualisation: Either activate the Color Contour
button from the PanMesh Toolbar or the Pressure/Show Color Contour option
from the Data View Control menu item, to apply Color Contouring within
the 3-D Reservoir Viewing Window and Graphing Window.
Generating and Saving the Dimensionless Pressure Response Versus Time

at any Point (X, Y, Z) in the Reservoir: Either activate the Select a Point
button from the PanMesh Toolbar or the Pressure/Select a Point option from
the Data View Control menu item, then left-click on an appropriate part of
the Reservoir Image to generate the Selected Point (i.e. green-colored
sphere). Double left-click on the Selected Point to generate the Enter the
Co-ordinates dialog. Edit the (X, Y, Z) co-ordinates if required, then select
OK, to generate a new Graphing Window showing the Dimensionless,
Constant-Rate Drawdown Pressure Response and Derivative at the Selected
Point.
Generating the Real Time/Pressure Response for the Well: Close PanMesh
directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. X symbol) in the top right
corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface. There will be a prompt to
Save the Simulation as a History File with extension (*.HST), in the program
Data folder. This is an optional step, but worthwhile if the Simulation
took a long time to run, as it allows subsequent access to certain Replay
facilities without having to re-run the Simulation from scratch.
i Note that these (*.HST) files are large, and should be routinely zipped or
cleared out if they start to accumulate.
As described above, the Dimensionless Response is automatically written to a

file called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will be
used by PanSystem to generate the Real Time and Pressure Well Test Response.
Users will now be returned to PanSystem. The Dimensionless Response from

PanMesh is convolved with Wellbore Storage (Cs) and Rate History (and for Gas
or Condensate, Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D)), to produce the Well Test Response.
The Advanced Simulation facility is used for this purpose.
If users were in the Analysis section with a diagnostic plot on the screen
when PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will find themselves back on
the same plot, with the PanMesh-generated response overlaid on the Well
Test data.

PanMesh Replay
The simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that is viewed.
To remove it, select the Overlay Pressure option from the Edit menu and
uncheck the Show Overlaid Pressure checkbox or select an alternative
overlay if there is a choice.
If users were not in the Analysis section (e.g. designing a test), they will be
taken to the Test Overview Plot, with their Simulated Test displayed. If
a Master Pressure Column is also present (e.g. an existing Well Test), this
will also be plotted.
The Simulated Pressure Channel will be called FEM P and two Sandface Flow
Rate Columns - FEM Q total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.
To make additional PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a History Match), without

Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog from the
Data Preparation menu. Select the Edit button to generate a Select Data
File to Edit dialog, highlight FEM P, then select the New button to
generate a Define New Data File dialog. Select a Column and re-name
the file, before re-running PanMesh.
prompt after running PanMesh (refer to the Help topic for PanMesh
Graphical Interface for more information about this prompt).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Rates - FEM Q total
and FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete
facility (i.e. accessed via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog), or just let them be overwritten each time.
Generating the Real Time/Pressure Response for a Point or Points in the

Reservoir on Returning to PanSystem: Generate and Save the
Dimensionless Response at the Point/s as described above using the Select a
Point facility.
Options are available in PanMesh to Save the Wellbore Response as a (*.TCX)

file with a user selected name, and to Save the Response at any Point in the
Reservoir.
These (*.TCX) files can be used to generate Real-Time/Pressure Responses at

the Wellbore and at the Selected Point/s, using the PanMesh From TCX
File option on the Simulation menu. This option may be used for a
number of reasons:

PanMesh Replay 27
To re-generate the Wellbore Response because the FEM P data (created
when the original PanMesh Numerical Simulation was run), has been
accidentally deleted.
To re-generate the Wellbore Response using a different Wellbore Storage

Model, Rate Schedule (or for Gas and Condensate, a different Rate-Dependent
Skin Coefficient (D)). The original (*.TCX) file is still valid, provided users
do not alter the Layer or Fluid parameters.
Users have saved (*.TCX) files representing pressures at points in the

reservoir for an interference test.
Close PanMesh directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. X symbol) in the

top right corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface. On exiting PanMesh, users
are returned to PanSystem where the Real Time/Pressure Response for the Well is
generated as described above.
If Dimensionless Pressure Responses have been created at Points in the Reservoir

and saved as (*.TCX) files, these Real-Time/Pressure Responses can be generated
by using the PanMesh From TCX File option on the Simulate menu. This
generates an Figure on page 702. Select the (*.TCX) file for Pressure at a Point
in the Solution Model area of the dialog. The Names button should also be used
to give the Pressure Channel a useful name such as PPoint#1, to avoid
confusion later. The selected Pressure data can subsequently be viewed and
compared with others on the Data Edit Plot, or Overlaid on a diagnostic plot of
the Wellbore Response.

PANMESH FROM TCX FILE

General:
This is the third of three sub-menu options from the Simulation Menu, situated
under the Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh New Run

PanMesh Replay
i These three options give access to the PanMesh graphical interface which is
fully described in Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
The From Existing TCX File option first generates an Advanced Simulation
Control Dialog, where users can select the required (*.TCX) file from the
Solution Model area of the dialog. The Names button should also be used to
assign the selected channel a useful name, to avoid confusion later. The
selected data can subsequently be viewed and compared with others on the
Data Edit Plot, or overlaid on a diagnostic plot of the wellbore response.
Generating TCX Files:
When PanMesh is closed, the dimensionless response is automatically written

to a file called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This is
immediately convolved with wellbore storage (Cs) and the actual test rate
schedule by PanSystem to produce the real-time and pressure response for the
welltest. For gas and condensate fluid types, the rate-dependent, Non-Darcy
Skin (D) is also added at this stage. This PANMESH.TCX file will be
overwritten by the next PanMesh simulation that is run.
Before closing PanMesh, the Save As TCX File option on the Graphing
i
Window Pop-Up Menu, can be used to make a copy of the file under a different
name. There is also an option to make a back-up of the file in PanSystem on
the File Menu using the Save PanMesh Calc option, or alternatively, use My
Computer or the Windows Explorer facilities to copy and re-name the file.
The saved (*.TCX) file can be re-used to generate a real-time and pressure
response for a specific case without going back into PanMesh.

PanMesh From TCX File 27
These options are available in PanMesh to save the wellbore response as a
(*.TCX) file with a user selected name, and to save the response at any point
in the reservoir.
These (*.TCX) files can be used to generate real-time/pressure responses at the

wellbore and at the selected observation point/s, using the From TCX File
option on the Simulation view. This option may be used for a number of
reasons:
To re-generate the wellbore response because the FEM P data (created

when the original PanMesh simulation was run), has been accidentally
deleted.
To re-generate the wellbore response using a different wellbore storage

model, a different rate schedule (or for gas and condensate, a different
rate-dependent skin coefficient (D)). The original (*.TCX) file is still valid,
provided users do not alter the layer or fluid parameters.
Users have saved (*.TCX) files representing pressures at points in the

reservoir for an interference test.
Layer, Well and Fluid Parameters:
Ensure the appropriate (*.PANX) file is open; the Material Properties specified
in the PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical) section will be used to convert
the dimensionless times and pressures into real values, and these should be
the same ones used when PanMesh was originally run to generate this (*.TCX)
file.
Generating the Well Test Response at the Well:
The generation of a pressure response from dimensionless (*.TCX) files uses

the existing Advanced Simulation facility. When users select the From Existing
TCX File option from the Simulation view, they are directed to what is
essentially the Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.
Normally, all users need to do here is select the appropriate (*.TCX) file (and
optionally, specify a name for the output channel using the Names button).
If users do not have a back-up (*.TCX) of the dimensionless wellbore response

and the existing PANMESH.TCX is not the file for the current reservoir
model, the dimensionless response will have to be re-generated using
PanMesh: New Run or PanMesh: Replay, provided a saved History File (*.HST)
is available.

Select the appropriate (*.TCX) file to use, then select OK. The pressure
response will be created as a channel called Sim P, along with two rate
channels Sim Q Total and Sim Q#1. The Names button from the Advanced
Simulation Control Dialog can be used to change the channel names if
desired, or they can be changed later in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation
dialog (accessed from the Data Preparation view), using the Edit button to
generate a Select Data File to Edit dialog.
Generating the Welltest Response at a Remote Point:
This can only be achieved if the Select a Point facility has been used in
PanMesh and the dimensionless response has been saved as a (*.TCX) file.
Follow exactly the same procedure outlined above for Generating the Welltest
Response at the Well, but select the (*.TCX) file for pressure at a point in the
Solution Model area of the dialog. The Names button should also be used to
give the pressure channel a useful name such as PPoint#1, to avoid confusion
later. The selected pressure data can subsequently be viewed and compared
with others on the Data Edit Plot, or overlaid on a diagnostic plot of the
wellbore response:
Figure 219: Overlay of Pressure at a Point (solid) on Semi-Log Plot of

Wellbore Pressure

SECTION VI
DELIVERABILITY
This section provides information about Deliverability and Forecasting in

PanSystemapplication.
CHAPTER 28
Deliverability View ..................................................... 789
CHAPTER 29
Gas Deliverability ...................................................... 793
CHAPTER 30
IPR ............................................................................ 813
CHAPTER 31
Forecasting ................................................................ 837

Chapter 28
DELIVERABILITY VIEW
Deliverability View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790

28 DELIVERABILITY VIEW
DELIVERABILITY VIEW OVERVIEW

The following ribbons can be used to enter the Deliverability section of the
program where IPR calculations and plots can be performed for producers
and injectors:
Gas Deliverability: This option is used to select the Gas Deliverability

tools.
IPR: A number of different IPR dialogs and plots can be generated,

depending on:
The fluid model type selected (i.e. oil, water, gas or condensate).
The analysis data that is available for the currently loaded model (i.e.
LIT Analysis, C&n Analysis, etc.).
Whether the well is an injector (i.e. Injectivity IPR curve plotted) or a

producer (i.e. Deliverability IPR curve plotted).
PanSystem also provides two methods for calculating the IPR of a

reservoir:
Fitting to Measured Test Point Data.

Semi-Theoretical Derivation using results from transient welltest
analysis (i.e. k and S) and extended drawdown analysis
Forecasting: This facility is used to set-up and provide forecasts of well

production rate versus time once the deliverability characteristics of the
well have been determined. All reservoir and boundary models which
may be defined in PanSystem are available in the forecasting model, with
the exception of:
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary.

Commingled Layers.
i The Forecasting option is not available for Injection Wells.

DELIVERABILITY VIEW
Deliverability View Overview 28
Overview.

28 DELIVERABILITY VIEW

Chapter 29
GAS DELIVERABILITY
Gas Deliverability Ribbon Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Select Test Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
LIT Flow-After-Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
LIT Isochronal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
LIT Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
C&n Analysis Flow-After-Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
C&n Analysis Isochronal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
C&n Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

29 GAS DELIVERABILITY
Gas Deliverability Ribbon Overview
GAS DELIVERABILITY RIBBON OVERVIEW

General:
The following options are available on the Gas Deliverability ribbon:
Test Overview Plot

LIT Plot
C&n Plot
TEST OVERVIEW PLOT

Functionality:
capabilities.
Workflow
PDA
Shale oil/gas
Mini-frac

GAS DELIVERABILITY




Test Overview Plot

i


selection.


Rate Changes Table.

GAS DELIVERABILITY
Period.

measurement).
a Fall-Off Test.


plot.


Test Overview Plot
Overview.

GAS DELIVERABILITY
Select Test Type 29
SELECT TEST TYPE

General:
This dialog is accessed using the LIT option on the Gas Deliverability ribbon in
the Deliverability view. It is used to select the type of analysis to be performed
for an LIT Plot or C&n Plot. The fields are described as follows:
Test Type: Two types of test type are available:
Flow-after-Flow: This type of test involves a series of extended

flowing periods, each of which should be flowed to stabilization.
i
Note that for LIT theory to be valid, the flowing periods of a Flow-after-Flow
Test should all have been flowed to stabilization (i.e. steady or semi-steady
state).
Isochronal: A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of

transient flowing periods of equal duration separated by build-ups,
with an extended flowing period to stabilization, usually at the end.
The shut-in periods should all have been allowed to "stabilize" (i.e.
isochronal test), or should all be of the same duration as the flowing
periods (i.e. modified isochronal test).
LIT FLOW-AFTER-FLOW TEST

General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the LIT option on the Gas
Deliverability ribbon and the Flow-after-Flow option in the Select Test Type
dialog. Use this option to perform a Flow-after-Flow (FAF) analysis. A
Flow-after-Flow test is a series of extended flowing periods, each flowed to
stabilization.

LIT Flow-After-Flow Test
The dialog is comprised of an information/input field, selection area, a table

field and two function buttons, described as follows:
Layer Pressure: Read from Figure on page 291 in reservoir description. It

can only be altered temporarily in this dialog.
Pressure Type selection area: Choose from two options:
Sandface Pressures: Pressures measured at the sandface. This option

determines the plot header and has no influence on the calculations.
Wellhead Pressures: Pressures measured at the wellhead. This option

Test Data Table field: The Duration, Start Pressure and Rate values are read
in from the Rate Change Table within the Rate Changes ribbon of the Data
Preparation view. The End Pressures are the final flowing pressures read
from the "Master" Gauge Data pressure column initialized within the Data
Preparation view.
Any changes made on this screen will therefore be temporary, and will be
overwritten by the original data (which is read in each time users return to
the plotting screen).
i
"wet-stream" or rich gas rates, not the separator gas rates. If the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method is being used, the rates are "equivalent" rates.
These contain a gas mass fraction correction which is required by the theory of
the method.
Select OK and the LIT Plot is generated (with just the final flowing
pressures plotted).

GAS DELIVERABILITY
LIT Isochronal Test 29
LIT ISOCHRONAL TEST

General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the LIT option on the Gas
Deliverability ribbon and the Isochronal option in the Select Test Type dialog.
Use this option to perform an LIT Isochronal analysis. A conventional
isochronal test consists of a series of transient flowing periods of equal
duration separated by build-ups, with an extended flowing period to
stabilization, usually at the end. The shut-in periods should all have been
allowed to "stabilize" (i.e. isochronal test), or should all be of the same
duration as the flowing periods (i.e. modified isochronal test).
The dialog is comprised of a checkbox, an information/input field, selection

area, two table fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
Extended Drawdown Available: Check this box if there is an extended

drawdown in the analysis. If this box is checked, the program will search
for the presence of an Extended flowing period. If this box is not checked
the program will not search.
Layer Pressure: Read from Layer Parameters in reservoir description. It




LIT Plot
Test Data Table field: Enter the values for test period Duration, Start
Pressure, End Pressure, Flow Rate and Test Period Type in the relevant fields.
The selected periods should be identified as Drawdown, Build-up or Extended
i
drawdown. Ensure that these have been correctly assigned and edit if
necessary. The extended flowing pressure is treated differently from the others
(as described below). Users can make temporary changes on this screen. It is
not mandatory to include build-up periods in the test selection on the Test
Overview Plot.
Time into Drawdown Table field: This can be left blank, or times can be
entered:
If blank, the LIT Plot will only display the End Pressures.
If users enter time values it will also display the Flowing Pressure read
from the Gauge Data at that elapsed time in each drawdown (times
entered here should therefore lie between zero and the shortest of the
Durations). This would ideally produce a series of roughly parallel
trends on the plot, the idea being that the radius of investigation is
the same for all drawdowns at a particular time value.
Note that for condensate wells, the flow rates plotted are the in situ
i
wet-stream or rich gas rates, not the separator gas rates. If the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method is being used, the rates are equivalent rates.
the method.
Select OK and the LIT Plot is generated (with just the end pressures
plotted).
LIT PLOT
Functionality:
This option performs the "Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent" analysis of multi-rate

test data to derive the Darcy (laminar) and Non-Darcy (turbulent) flow
coefficients (B) and (F), respectively (referred to in some references as (a) and
(b)) in the Deliverability relationship represented by:

GAS DELIVERABILITY
LIT Plot 29
(References 1, 20 and 32)
The pressure-squared (p2) or pressure (p) approximations can be used instead

of pseudo-pressure m(p); the equation is modified accordingly.
The LIT option is only enabled if:
The fluid type selected is Gas or Condensate (refer to Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog).
Users have selected at least two flowing periods from the Test Overview
Plot.
Select the LIT option and a Select Test Type dialog will be generated to choose
between an LIT Isochronal test or an LIT Flow-after-Flow test.
! The LIT facility treats the data differently for each of these options, so ensure
that the correct type of test is selected. A brief description is given below.
Flow-after-Flow Test: This is a series of extended flowing periods, each

flowed to stabilization.
After selecting this type of test in the Select Test Type dialog, then
entering data in the LIT Flow-After-Flow Test dialog. On selecting
OK in this second dialog, the LIT Plot is generated (i.e. plotting just
the final flowing pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis:
Fit a line through the data points, then select Extended Flow in the
Define Line dialog that is generated.

LIT Plot
The Results Box will display the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), (from the
intercept at Q = 0) and Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), (from the slope)
and the AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow).
i
Note that for LIT theory to be valid, the flowing periods of a Flow-after-Flow
Test should all have been flowed to stabilization (i.e. steady or semi-steady
state).
Isochronal Test: A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of

transient flowing periods of equal duration separated by build-ups, with
an extended flowing period to stabilization, usually at the end.
entering data in the LIT Isochronal Test dialog. On selecting OK in
this second dialog, the LIT Plot is generated. (i.e. plotting just the end
pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis:
The m(p) for all Transient Flowing Points is calculated relative to the
preceding final shut-in pressure (i.e. "Start Pressure"). The m(p) for
the Extended Flow Point is calculated relative to the "Layer Pressure"
and should plot above the transient data.
Fit a line through the transient data points first, then select Free Model
Line in the Define Line dialog that is generated.
Now fit a parallel line through the extended flow point, this time
choosing the Extended Flow option in the Define Line dialog that is
generated. To fit a parallel line exactly through the extended point,
select the extended point, then select the Parallel Lines button.

GAS DELIVERABILITY
LIT Plot 29
The Results Box will display the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), (from the
intercept at Q = 0) and Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), (from the slope)
and the AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow).
If users have entered times in the Times into Drawdown area of the
LIT Isochronal Test dialog, a set of transient data will be plotted for
each time value. Each set should be in a linear trend, with all trends
roughly parallel. Fit a line through each dataset (i.e. all defined as
Free Model Line). Use the Average Line button to produce a single line
whose slope is the average of the lines that have been fitted. Position
this line through the extended flow point.
To fit the Average Line exactly through the extended point, select the
extended point, then select the Average Line Slopes button.
i In both cases, use the Plot option from the Deliverability menu to produce the
Deliverability and logarithmic AOF plots for the test.
Dealing with Single-Point and Four-Point Tests:
The preceding description of LIT analysis assumes that users have loaded a
complete gauge recording of the entire test sequence. If only the final
flowing pressures have been used, proceed as follows:
1. In the Edit Gauge Data dialog, type in the end-point flowing pressures and
flow rates via the Edit Data option. Include the initial pressure if available.
2. Plot the data on the Data Edit Plot, and pick the rate change events using the
Pick Nearest Data Point button from the Rate changes ribbon on the Data
Preparation view. This creates the Rate Change Table and is quicker than typing
it.
3. Edit the Rate Changes Table, and insert the time of the start of the first flowing
period, and initial pressure (if not already entered as Gauge Data). Use the
Layer Pressure if no initial gauge pressure reading is available.
4. Initialise the necessary layer, well and fluid parameters in Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog, including the Layer Pressure. A Pseudo-Pressure
Table may be required for LIT analysis.
5. Perform the LIT analysis as described above.

C&n Analysis Flow-After-Flow Test
Figure 220: LIT Plot for a Flow-After-Flow (four-point) test
Plot annotation can be applied by selecting Ctrl + right-clicking on the plot,

C&N ANALYSIS FLOW-AFTER-FLOW TEST

General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the C+n option and the
Flow-after-Flow option in the Select Test Type dialog. Use this option to
perform a Flow-after-Flow (FAF) analysis. A Flow-after-Flow test is a series of
extended flowing periods, each flowed to stabilization.
The dialog is comprised of an information/input field, selection area, a table

field and two function buttons, described as follows:


GAS DELIVERABILITY
C&n Analysis Isochronal Test 29


Test Data Table field: The Duration, Start Pressure and Rate values are read
in from the Rate Change Table within Data Preparation. The End Pressures
are the final flowing pressures read from the Master Gauge Data
pressure column initialized within the Data Preparation view.
Any changes made on this screen will therefore be temporary, and will be
overwritten by the original data (which is read in each time users return to
the plotting screen).
i
the method.
Select OK and the C&n Plot is generated (with just the final flowing
pressures plotted).
C&N ANALYSIS ISOCHRONAL TEST

General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the C&n Plot option and
the Isochronal option in the Select Test Type dialog. Use this option to
perform an C&n Isochronal analysis. A conventional isochronal test consists
of a series of transient flowing periods of equal duration separated by
build-ups, with an extended flowing period to stabilization, usually at the
end. The shut-in periods should all have been allowed to "stabilize" (i.e.
isochronal test), or should all be of the same duration as the flowing periods
(i.e. modified isochronal test).

C&n Analysis Isochronal Test
The dialog is comprised of a checkbox, an information/input field, selection

area, two table fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
Extended Drawdown Available: Check this box if there is an extended

drawdown in the analysis. If this box is checked, the program will search
for the presence of an Extended flowing period. If this box is not checked
the program will not search.



Test Data Table field: Enter the values for test period Duration, Start
Pressure, End Pressure, Flow Rate and Test Period Type in the relevant fields.
The selected periods should be identified as Drawdown, Build-up or Extended
i
drawdown. Ensure that these have been correctly assigned and edit if
necessary. The extended flowing pressure is treated differently from the others
(as described below). Users can make temporary changes on this screen. It is
not mandatory to include build-up periods in the test selection on the Test
Overview Plot.
Note that for condensate wells, the flow rates plotted are the in situ
i
the method.
Select OK and the C&n Plot is generated (with just the end pressures
plotted).

GAS DELIVERABILITY
C&n Plot 29
C&N PLOT
Functionality:
This option applies the empirical C&n method to the analysis of multiple rate
test data, to derive a C-coefficient and an n-exponent describing laminar and
turbulent flow through the empirical deliverability equation:
Where,
The value of (p) should be the current (i.e. average) layer pressure. There is
no pseudo-pressure version of this relationship; it is only formulated in terms
of pressure-squared (p2).
The option is only enabled if:
The fluid type selected is Gas or Condensate (refer to Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog).
Users have selected at least two flowing periods from the Test Overview
Plot.
Select the C&n button and a Select Test Type dialog will be generated to
choose between a C&n Analysis Isochronal Test or a C&n Analysis
Flow-After-Flow Test.
!
As with the LIT Plot option, the data are treated differently for each of these
options, so ensure that the correct type of test is selected. A brief description
is given below:

C&n Plot
Flow-after-Flow Test: This is a series of extended flowing periods, each

flowed to stabilization.
entering data in the C&n Analysis Flow-After-Flow Test dialog.
On selecting OK in this second dialog, the C&n Plot is generated (i.e.
plotting just the final flowing pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis: p2
(on logarithmic scales)
Fit a line through the data points, then select Extended Flow in the Define
Line dialog that is generated.
The Results Box will display the C-coefficient (from the intercept at Q = 1),
the n-exponent (from the slope) and the AOF.
If users want to impose a line corresponding to a pre-determined value of

n and make it pass exactly through a selected point, click on the point,
then select the Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog button. This would
be mandatory for a single-point test.
Isochronal Test: A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of

transient flowing periods of equal duration separated by build-ups, with
an extended flowing period to stabilization, usually at the end.
i The C&n Analysis Isochronal Test dialog is similar to the LIT Isochronal Test
dialog, except that there is no Times into Drawdown area present.
entering data in the C&n Analysis Isochronal Test dialog. On
selecting OK in this second dialog, the Figure on page 809 is
generated. (i.e. plotting just the end pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis: p2

GAS DELIVERABILITY
C&n Plot 29
(on logarithmic scales)
The (p2) term for all transient flowing points is calculated relative to
the preceding final shut-in pressure (i.e. start pressure). The (p2)
term for the extended flow point is calculated relative to the layer
pressure, and should plot above the transient data.
Fit a line through the transient data points first, then select Free Model
Line in the Define Line dialog that is generated.
Now fit a parallel line through the extended flow point, this time
choosing the Extended Flow option in the Define Line dialog that is
generated. To fit a parallel line exactly through the extended point,
select the extended point, then select the Parallel Lines button.
The Results Box will display the C-coefficient (from the intercept at Q =
1), the n-exponent (from the slope) and the AOF.
i In both cases, use the Plot option from the Deliverability menu to produce the
Deliverability and logarithmic AOF plots for the test.
Dealing with Single-Point and Four-Point Tests:
The preceding description of C&n analysis assumes that users have loaded a
complete gauge recording of the entire test sequence. If only the final
flowing pressures have been used, proceed as follows:
1. In the Edit Gauge Data dialog, enter the end-point flowing pressures and
flow rates via the Edit option. Include the initial pressure if available.
2. Plot the data on the Data Edit Plot, and pick the rate change events using the
Pick Nearest Data Point button from the Rate changes ribbon on the Data
Preparation view. This creates the Rate Change Table and is quicker than typing
it.

C&n Plot
Figure 221: Rate Change Events for a Four-Point Test
3. Edit the Rate Changes Table, and insert the time of the start of the first flowing
period, and initial pressure (if not already entered as Gauge Data). Use the
Layer Pressure if no initial gauge pressure reading is available.
4. Initialize the necessary layer, well and fluid parameters in Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description Dialog, including the Layer Pressure. A Pseudo-Pressure
Table is not required for C&n analysis.
5. Perform the C&n analysis as described above.


Chapter 30
IPR
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water)
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog 825
C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Model Parameters Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

30 IPR
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview
DELIVERABILITY/INJECTIVITY PLOT
OVERVIEW
General:
A number of different IPR dialogs and plots can be generated when users
select the IPR option from the Deliverability view, depending on:
The fluid model type selected (i.e. oil, water, gas or condensate).
The analysis data that is available for the currently loaded model (i.e. LIT
Analysis, C&n Analysis, etc.).
Whether the well is an injector (i.e. Injectivity IPR curve plotted) or a

producer (i.e. Deliverability IPR curve plotted).
PanSystem also provides two methods for calculating the IPR of a reservoir:
Fitting to Measured Test Point Data:
For oil and water fluid types, the program fits the Vgel IPR relation to
measured flowing pressures and rates (i.e. up to three Test Point
measurements are allowed).
For gas and condensate fluid types, the IPR curve is computed either:
Using the Darcy (B) and Non-Darcy (F) flow coefficients estimated
by an LIT Analysis of measured flowing pressures and rates,
or
Using the C-coefficient and n-exponent obtained from a simplified

C&n Analysis of measured data.
Semi-Theoretical Derivation:
This is performed using results from transient well test analysis (i.e. k and
S) and extended drawdown analysis (i.e. A and CA):
For oil and water fluid types, the Productivity Index (J), is calculated
from the semi-steady-state inflow equation and the Vgel IPR relation
applied.

IPR
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview 30
For gas and condensate fluid types:
LIT: The Darcy flow coefficient (B), is calculated from the

semi-steady state inflow equation, the Non-Darcy flow coefficient
(F), is derived from a rate versus skin analysis of transient well
test data. The IPR curve is then calculated,
or
C&n: The Stabilized Deliverability, is estimated from a theoretical

stabilized flow rate.
i
For more specific details about plot types and analysis functions available
within the Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Screen, refer to the topic about
Deliverability.
Fluid-Specific Screen Dialogs:
The following dialogs are generated to perform oil, water, gas and
condensate deliverability or injectivity calculations. At the top of each dialog
there is an Injection Well checkbox that allows users to plot an injectivity curve
(i.e. pressure increasing with rate), for all fluid types. This checkbox should
be checked for injection well calculations and unchecked for production
well calculations.
i
Note that if the Injection Well checkbox is checked in any of the IPR dialogs,
Production Forecasting is disallowed (i.e. the Production Forecasting option is
disabled in the Deliverability view).
Deliverability/Injectivity - Oil or Water: When users select the IPR

menu option and the fluid type is oil or water, the Deliverability/Injectivity
Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with the Transient Well Test and
LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog. This is where the necessary data
are assembled and the Deliverability/Injectivity calculations are performed.
The IPR can either be calculated from the results of transient and
extended drawdown analysis, or from production test data.
The dialog is comprised of three main data input/editing sections,


30 IPR
Layer Parameters section: This information is derived from the

Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog section and will also
contain any diagnostic plot results confirmed by users with the
Confirm, , button during Analysis. The Dietz Shape Factor (CA) and
Drainage Area (A) may have been confirmed from the Cartesian Plot
analysis of an extended drawdown. Edit this data as required.
i For an injection well, the Bubble Point (Pb) data input field should be disabled
(i.e. oil will be treated with a straight-line IPR).
Transient Well Test Data section: The Permeability (k) and Darcy Skin
(S) are also supplied from the reservoir description (and confirmed
from Semi-Log Plot or Type-Curves Plot analysis). Edit this data
as required. The Productivity Index (J), can be computed from the
pseudo-steady-state inflow equation and the AOF from the Vgel
relationship.
The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7 psia.
i
Note that the AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the Injection Well
checkbox is checked and an Injectivity Index (J), is computed instead of a
Productivity Index (J). For Transient Well Test Data, the IPR line is plotted up
to P = 2 x P(layer) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater.
Production/Injection Test Data section: This is an optional section that

allows entry of up to three Test Points (i.e. either measured flowing
pressure/rate pairs for production or measured injection pressure/rate
pairs for injection). A Vgel Curve may be fitted through the point/s, and
the Productivity Index (J) and AOF computed (i.e. for Deliverability). If
only one Test Point is entered, the IPR curve will be fitted through that
point and the prevailing Layer Pressure. If two or three Test Points are
specified, a best-fit will be created through them and the prevailing Layer
Pressure is not included in the fit. Instead, an extrapolation is made to
zero rate and an Estimated Shut-in Pressure is calculated. This value can
then be used to revise the Layer Pressure if appropriate.

IPR
i
Productivity Index (J), from a straight-line fit of J = Qinj/{Pwf - P(layer)}. Each
Injection IPR is a straight-line plotted upwards from (0, P(layer)), using Qinj =
J.(Pwf - P(layer)). For Test Point Data, the IPR line is plotted up to P = 2 x
(estimated shut-in pressure) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater.
Deliverability/Injectivity - Gas or Condensate: When users select the

IPR menu option and the fluid type is gas or condensate, the
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with the
Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog. This is
where the necessary data are assembled and the Deliverability/Injectivity
calculations are performed. The Deliverability can either be calculated
from the results of transient and extended drawdown analysis, or from
production test data, using the LIT or simplified C&n methods.
i No attempt is made to model the effects of liquid dropout in the case of a

retrograde condensate - flow is assumed to be single-phase gas.
The dialog is comprised of three main data sections, but will vary in
appearance and functionality depending on the calculation method that is
adopted. These dialogs are described as follows:
Transient Well Test and LIT Calculations: If a C&n Analysis has not been
performed, the dialog is entitled Transient Well Test and LIT Results and
contains the following data sections:
Layer Parameters section: This information is supplied from the

reservoir description, which will contain any diagnostic plot results
confirmed by users with the Confirm, , button during Analysis.

The Dietz Shape Factor (CA) and Drainage Area (A) may have been
confirmed from the Cartesian Plot analysis of an extended
drawdown. Edit this data as required.

30 IPR
Transient Well Test Data section: The Permeability (k), Darcy Skin (S)
and Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), are also supplied from the
reservoir description (and perhaps confirmed from a Semi-Log Plot
and Multi-Rate S versus Q Analysis). Edit this data as required. The
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), may be computed from the
pseudo-steady-state inflow equation, the Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D), from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and (B).
i
checkbox is checked.
LIT Analysis Data section: The Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) and Non-Darcy
Flow Coefficient (F), can be confirmed values from the LIT Analysis of a
multi-rate test. Edit this data if required.
If an LIT Analysis has not been performed in PanSystem, but users have values
for the (B) and (F) coefficients, check the Include LIT Analysis Data checkbox
and type in the values.
If an LIT Analysis has been performed in PanSystem, the Rate-Dependent Skin

Coefficient (D), can be computed from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and
(B).
i This final part of this section is only active if users have performed an LIT
Analysis.
i
checkbox is checked. The Injection IPR is a curved-line plotted upwards from
(0, P(layer)), using the deliverability equation m(p) = BQinj + F(Qinj)2. The IPR
line is plotted up to P = 2 x P(layer) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater. The
final flowing pressures from the three selected injection periods should also be
displayed on the Injectivity LIT Plot options.
C&n Method: If a C&n Analysis has been performed, the dialog is entitled
C&n Results and contains the following data sections:

IPR
Layer Parameters section: This information is supplied from the
reservoir description, which will contain any diagnostic plot results
confirmed by users with the Confirm, , button during Analysis

(e.g. of a build-up test). The Dietz Shape Factor (CA) will default to a
value of 31.62 and the Drainage Area (A) will default to 640 acres (i.e.
equal to 259 ha or 1 section spacing), if they are not initialized. Edit
this data as required.
Extended Data section: The C&n coefficients are derived from the
C&n Analysis (i.e. if confirmed). Edit this data as required. Users can
also compute the AOF.
i
Stabilized Data section: The Stabilized Flowing Pressure is the pressure

recorded at the end of the extended flow period (or the last extended flow
period in the case of a flow-after-flow test). Edit this data if required.
Users can compute the theoretical Stabilized Flow Rate corresponding to
this flowing pressure, from the pseudo-steady-state inflow equation
using (k), (S), (A) and (CA). The Stabilized C-coefficient is then calculated
from this flowrate using the n-coefficient, and the Stabilized AOF.
i
The C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog is generated by

selecting the More Results button. The Radius of Investigation may be
computed for the extended flowing point. The Time to Stabilization is the
theoretical time at which the Stabilized Flow Rate will be attained.

30 IPR
The Injection IPR is a curved-line plotted upwards from (0, P(layer)), using the
deliverability equation Qinj = C.(p2)n. The IPR line is plotted up to P = 2 x
i
P(layer) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater. The final flowing pressures from
the three selected injection periods should be displayed on the IPR curve in the
Injectivity Extended Lin and Extended Log Plot options. The stabilized flowing
pressure/rate point should be displayed on the IPR curve in the Injectivity
Stabilized Lin and Stabilized Log Plot options.
Plotting Multiple IPR Calculations:
PanSystem allows up to five IPR calculations to be overlaid on the same plot.

This is useful when users wish to compare a number of possible scenarios
(e.g. different skin factors).
At the bottom right of each dialog there is a checkbox with a number and two
arrow buttons. This allows users to navigate between the various IPR
calculations to be defined and used. The default dialog page is page 0, with
the additional IPR dialog pages numbered 1 to 4.
To include a page of calculated IPR data in a Deliverability/Injectivity Plot,

select the relevant page number and check the checkbox.
i When users select OK from any of these main dialogs, the Deliverability/
Injectivity Plot Screen is displayed in conjunction with the Deliverability view.

IPR
Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water) Dialog 30
TRANSIENT WELL TEST DELIVERABILITY/

INJECTIVITY RESULTS (OIL/WATER)
DIALOG
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the IPR option from the
Deliverability menu and the current fluid type is oil or water. The
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with this
dialog, which is used to perform the IPR calculations for oil deliverability or
water injectivity, using results derived from transient welltest and extended
drawdown analysis, or from production test data. Where both sets of data
are available, this allows users to check for consistency of the reservoir
parameters.
PanSystem allows up to five IPR calculations to be overlaid on a single plot.

This allows a range of possible scenarios to be compared (e.g. different skin
factors).
The dialog is comprised of three data entry/edit sections with associated

checkboxes, four function buttons and a page scrolling/selection facility to
allow multiple IPR calculations to be performed and/or included on the IPR
plot (i.e. up to a maximum of five). The generic dialog for production or
injection wells is described as follows:
Injection Well checkbox: This should only be checked if an injection well

is under consideration.
i
disabled in the Deliverability menu). This selection also enables textual and
computational changes within some of the sections described below:

30 IPR
Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water) Dialog
Layer Parameters section: This information is derived from the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) section and will also contain any
diagnostic plot results confirmed by users with the Confirm, ,button

during Analysis. If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will
always be re-set to the current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog
box is re-entered or the Calculate button is selected. To preserve a
different value during sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox to
prevent the value being re-set.
Layer Pressure P(layer): Accept, enter or edit as required.

Bubble Point Pressure (Pb): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Drainage Area (A): Accept, enter or edit as required.
i For an injection well, the Bubble Point (Pb) data input field should be disabled
(i.e. oil will be treated with a straight-line IPR).
Transient Well Test Data section: This section requires the Horizontal
Permeability (k) and the Skin Factor (S), derived from the Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical) section (and confirmed from Semi-Log Plot or
Type-Curves Plot analysis). The Productivity Index (J), can be
computed from the pseudo-steady-state inflow equation and the AOF
from the Vgel relationship. The inflow equation used for the IPR
assumes semi-steady-state radial flow. For some reservoir models (e.g.
radial homogeneous and dual-porosity), the skin factor and permeability
can be transferred directly from the confirmed values in the Model
Parameters section (i.e. derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.), since
they already correspond to radial flow.
For other models with a pseudo-radial component (e.g. partial

penetration, horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor
(Spr), must be calculated from the mechanical Skin Factor (S), stored in
Model Parameters. The Model Parameters button (described below), is used
for this purpose and is only enabled when a pseudo-radial component is
present.

IPR
Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water) Dialog 30
If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to
the current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or
the Calculate button is selected. To preserve a different value during
sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox to prevent the value being
re-set.
Permeability (k): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Skin (S): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Productivity/Injectivity Index (J): This is a dialog-specific calculation

performed for producer (Productivity Index) or injector (Injectivity
Index), using the Calculate button (described below).
AOF: This information is only available for producers and not

enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked.
Productivity Index (J).
Production/Injection Test Data section: This is an optional section that

allows entry of up to three Test Points (i.e. either measured flowing
pressure/rate pairs for production or measured injection pressure/rate
pairs for injection). A Vgel Curve may be fitted through the point/s, and
the Productivity Index (J) and AOF computed (i.e. for Deliverability). If
only one Test Point is entered, the IPR curve will be fitted through that
point and the prevailing Layer Pressure. If two or three Test Points are
specified, a best-fit will be created through them and the prevailing Layer
Pressure is not included in the fit. Instead, an extrapolation is made to
zero rate and an Estimated Shut-in Pressure is calculated. This value can
then be used to revise the Layer Pressure if appropriate.
Test Point 1 Flowing/Injection Pressure: Enter the pressure for the first
test point.
Test Point 1 Flow/Injection Rate: Enter the rate for the first test point.
Test Point 2 Flowing/Injection Pressure: Enter the pressure for the

second test point.

30 IPR
Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water) Dialog
Test Point 2 Flow/Injection Rate: Enter the rate for the second test
point.
Test Point 3 Flowing/Injection Pressure: Enter the pressure for the third
test point.
Test Point 3 Flow/Injection Rate: Enter the rate for the third test point.
Estimated Shut-In Pressure: Calculated as described above.
Productivity/Injectivity Index (J): Calculated as described below.

enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked. Calculated as
described below.
Calculate button: Select this button to calculate the Productivity/

Injectivity Index and the AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) from the Vgel
relationship using the Transient Welltest Data.
i
For reservoirs below bubble point, (J) is the slope of the IPR at lim|Q ->0|.
Productivity Index (J).
Page Scrolling/Selection Facility: This is situated at the bottom right

corner of the dialog and is comprised of a checkbox with a number and
two arrow buttons. This allows users to scroll between each IPR
calculation that is to be defined and used. The default dialog page is page
0 and the additional IPR dialog pages are numbered 1 to 4. To include a
page of calculated data on the IPR plot, select the required page number
and check the associated checkbox.

IPR
Model Parameters button: For other models with a pseudo-radial
component (e.g. partial penetration, horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), must be calculated from the mechanical
Skin Factor (S), stored in the Model Parameters section, using other relevant
parameters (e.g. penetration ratio, well length, etc.), as appropriate for the
current model. Additionally, for the dual-permeability and radial
composite models, the permeability is converted to full thickness or outer
region permeability respectively. Select the Model Parameters button to
generate a Deliverability/Injectivity Model Parameters Sub-Dialog for
viewing or editing the Layer Parameters involved in these conversions.
TRANSIENT WELL TEST AND LIT RESULTS

(GAS/CONDENSATE) DIALOG
General:
Deliverability menu and the current fluid type is gas or condensate. An LIT
Analysis may also have been performed. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot
screen is displayed in conjunction with this dialog, which is used to perform
the IPR calculations for gas/condensate deliverability or injectivity, using
results derived from transient well test and extended drawdown analysis,
production test data, using the LIT (i.e. if an LIT Analysis has been
performed).

factors).
For retrograde condensate fluid types, all surface production figures refer to
i
separator gas. However, the fluid will be modeled as a single-phase rich or
wet gas in the reservoir, unless the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option has
been selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. The
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option will model liquid dropout below dew-point
and the associated multi-phase relative permeability effects.

30 IPR
Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog

checkboxes, four function buttons and a page scrolling/selection facility to
plot (i.e. up to a maximum of five).
i If an LIT Analysis has not been performed, the bottom section of the dialog will
be disabled.
The generic dialog for production or injection wells is described as follows:

i
Reservoir Description (Analytical) section and will also contain any
diagnostic plot results confirmed by users with the Cnf button during
Analysis. If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always
be re-set to the current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is
re-entered or the Calculate button is selected. To preserve a different
value during sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox to prevent the
value being re-set.

Dietz Shape Factor (CA): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Drainage Area (A): Accept, enter or edit as required.

IPR
Transient Well Test Data section: This section requires the Horizontal
Permeability (k), the Skin Factor (S) and the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient
(D), derived from the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) section
(and confirmed from Semi-Log Plot or Type-Curves Plot analysis).
The Productivity Index (J), can be computed from the
pseudo-steady-state inflow equation and the AOF from the Vgel
relationship. The inflow equation used for the IPR assumes
semi-steady-state radial flow. For some reservoir models (e.g. radial
homogeneous and dual-porosity), the skin factor and permeability can be
transferred directly from the confirmed values in the Model Parameters
section (i.e. derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.), since they already
correspond to radial flow.
For other models with a pseudo-radial component (e.g. partial

penetration, horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent pseudo-radial skin terms
(Spr) and (Dpr), must be calculated from the mechanical skin (S), and the
rate-dependent skin coefficient (D), stored in Model Parameters. The Model
Parameters button (described below), is used for this purpose and is only
enabled when a pseudo-radial component is present.
If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to

the current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or
the Calculate button is selected. To preserve a different value during
sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox to prevent the value being
re-set.

Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B): Calculated as described below.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): Calculated as described below.
described below.
i

30 IPR
Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog
Include LIT Analysis Data: To include LIT data, check the checkbox.
LIT Analysis Data section: This is an optional section, activated by

checking the checkbox described above. If the checkbox is already
activated, the Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F) and Darcy Flow Coefficient (B),
will be confirmed values from the LIT Analysis of a multi-rate test (i.e. if
this type of analysis has been performed). If an LIT Analysis has not been
performed in PanSystem, but users have values for the (B) and (F)
coefficients, check the checkbox and type in the values.
i
Note that the pseudo-radial nomenclatures (Bpr) and (Fpr) replace (B) and (F)
for consistency with the transient section for those models where this is
relevant.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): Calculated as described below.
AOF: This information is only available for producers and not enabled if
the Injection Well checkbox is checked. Calculated as described below.
Calculate button: Select this button to compute the Darcy Flow Coefficient
(B) from the pseudo-steady state inflow equation, the Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D) from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and (B), using the
values obtained from the transient well test data.
The Calculate facility will also compute the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient
(D) from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and (B), using the values
obtained from the LIT Analysis.
As each dialog page produces an independent set of data, the Calculate

button must be selected for each page once users are satisfied with the
entered data. Always select Calculate if any data has been changed.
i

IPR
C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog 30
two arrow buttons. This allows users to scroll between each IPR

pseudo-radial skin terms (Spr) and (Dpr), must be calculated from the
mechanical skin (S), and the rate-dependent skin coefficient (D), stored
in the Model Parameters section, using other relevant parameters (e.g.
penetration ratio, well length, etc.), as appropriate for the current model.
Additionally, for the dual-permeability and radial composite models, the
permeability is converted to full thickness or outer region permeability
respectively. Select the Model Parameters button to generate a
Deliverability/Injectivity Model Parameters Sub-Dialog for viewing or
editing the Layer Parameters involved in these conversions.
C&N RESULTS (GAS/CONDENSATE)

DIALOG
General:
Deliverability view and the current fluid type is gas or condensate and a C&n
Analysis has been performed. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is
displayed in conjunction with this dialog, which is used to perform the IPR
calculations for gas/condensate deliverability or injectivity, using results
derived from transient well test and C&n Analysis data.

30 IPR
C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog

factors).
i
been selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. The

checkboxes, five function buttons and a page scrolling/selection facility to
plot (i.e. up to a maximum of five).
The generic dialog for production or injection wells is described as follows:

i
Reservoir Description (Analytical) section and will also contain any diagnostic
plot results confirmed by users with the Confirm button during Analysis. If a
checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to the
current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or the
Calculate button is selected. To preserve a different value during sensitivity
calculations, uncheck the checkbox to prevent the value being re-set.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): Accept, enter or edit as required (i.e. defaults
to 31.62 if not initialized).
Drainage Area (A): Accept, enter or edit as required (i.e. defaults to

640 acres (= 259 ha or 1 section spacing) if not initialized).

IPR
30
Extended Data section: The C&n coefficients are derived from the C&n
Analysis (i.e. if confirmed by users with the Cnf button during Analysis).
C-coefficient: Derived from a simplified C&n Analysis of measured

data.
n-coefficient: Derived from a simplified C&n Analysis of measured

data.

described below.
i
Stabilized Data section:
Stabilized Flowing/Injection Pressure: This is the pressure recorded at

the end of the extended flow/injection period (or the last extended
flow/injection period in the case of a flow-after-flow test).
Stabilized Flow/Injection Rate: This is computed from the Stabilised

Flowing/Injection Pressure, from the pseudo-steady-state inflow
equation using (k), (S), (A) and (CA).
Stabilized C-coefficient: This is computed from the Stabilised Flow/

Injection Rate.
Stabilized AOF: This information is only available for producers and

not enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked. Calculated as
described below.

30 IPR
Calculate button: Selecting Calculate will compute the theoretical

Stabilised Flow/Injection Rate corresponding to this Flowing/Injection
Pressure, from the pseudo-steady state inflow equation using (k), (S), (A)
and (CA). The Stabilised C-coefficient is then calculated from this flow/
injection rate using the n-coefficient, then the Stabilised AOF (i.e. for
producers only).
As each dialog page produces an independent set of data, the Calculate

button must be selected for each page once users are satisfied with the
entered data. Always select Calculate if any data has been changed.
i

two green arrows. This allows users to scroll between each IPR

More Results button: The C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog is

generated by selecting the More Results button. In the sub-dialog, each
overlying Calculation section has a corresponding individual additional
results screen. The Radius of Investigation may be computed for the
extended flowing point. The Time to Stabilisation is the theoretical time at
which the Stabilised Flow Rate will be attained.

IPR
C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog 30
C&N RESULTS - ADDITIONAL DATA

SUB-DIALOG
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the More Results button from
the C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog. The Deliverability/Injectivity
Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with this dialog, which is used to
perform the IPR calculations for gas/condensate deliverability or injectivity,
using results derived from transient well test and C&n Analysis data.
The dialog is comprised of three data entry/edit sections with one associated
checkbox for Skin (S), four function buttons. The generic dialog for
production or injection wells is described as follows:
Layer Parameters section:
Flow Capacity (kh): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Permeability (k): Accept, enter or edit as required. This value is

derived from the C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog.
Skin (S): Accept, enter or edit as required. This value is derived from
the C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog. If the checkbox is
checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to the current
confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or the
Calculate button is selected. To preserve a different value during
sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox to prevent the value
being re-set.
Skin Pressure Loss: This represents the pressure loss due to skin
effects. Accept, enter or edit as required.
Extended Data section:
Flow Efficiency: Accept, enter or edit as required.
Damage Ratio: Accept, enter or edit as required.

30 IPR
C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog
Stabilized Data section:
Radius of Investigation: This is computed for the extended flowing

point. Accept, enter or edit as required.
Time to Stabilization: This is the theoretical time at which the Stabilized

Flow Rate will be attained. Accept, enter or edit as required.
Stabilized Flow Rate: Accept, enter or edit as required. This value is

derived from the C&n Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog..
Calculate button: This button will re-calculate all other items in response
to a change in the entries for Permeability (k) and Skin (S) in this
sub-dialog.
i Users would not normally edit this screen as it should remain consistent with
the previous one.


Model Parameters Sub-Dialog
IPR
30
MODEL PARAMETERS SUB-DIALOG

General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Model Parameters button from

any of the IPR Results dialogs.
i This button is only enabled when a pseudo-radial component is present.
The inflow equation used for the IPR in Deliverability assumes

semi-steady-state radial flow. For some reservoir models (i.e. radial
homogeneous and dual-porosity):
Oil IPR: The skin factor (S), and permeability (k), are required
Gas and Condensate IPR: The permeability (k), skin factor (S), and the
rate-dependent skin coefficient (D), are required.
These can be transferred directly from the confirmed values in the Model
Parameters (i.e. derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.), since they
already correspond to radial flow.
For other models (e.g. partial penetration, horizontal well, etc.):
Oil IPR: The equivalent pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr), must be

calculated from the mechanical skin (S), stored in Model Parameters.
Gas and Condensate IPR: The equivalent pseudo-radial skin terms (Spr)
and (Dpr), must be calculated from the mechanical skin (S), and the
rate-dependent skin coefficient (D), stored in Model Parameters.
These calculations use other relevant parameters (e.g. perforation top

distance (htop), well length (Lw), etc.), as appropriate for the current model
(refer to the Model Parameters dialog for a full definition of these parameters in
relation to the different well models).

respectively.

30 IPR
Model Parameters Sub-Dialog
This sub-dialog facilitates quick access for viewing, entering and/or editing
the parameters involved in these conversions. After entering and/or editing
data in this sub-dialog, select OK to calculate the pseudo-radial components,
which will subsequently appear in the Transient Well Test Data section of the
current IPR Results dialog.
i
Users should uncheck the checkboxes in the Transient Well Test Data area of
the current IPR Results dialog to preserve pseudo-radial component values
different from the calculated ones.

Chapter 31
FORECASTING
Forecasting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Flow Rate v Time Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Flow Rate and Cumulative Production v Time Plot . . . . . . . . 845
Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP v Time Plot . . . . . . . . 846
Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Production
v Time Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

31 FORECASTING
Forecasting Overview
FORECASTING OVERVIEW
General:
The following options are available on the Forecasting ribbon:
New Forecasting
Q v Time
Q&V v Time Plot
V&P v Time Plot
P&P v Time Plot
Export to File
PRODUCTION FORECASTING
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the New Forecast option from the
Forecasting ribbon on the Deliverability view. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot
screen is displayed in conjunction with this dialog. For details of the
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen button functions refer to the Help topic for
the Deliverability Toolbar.
i
If the Injection Well checkbox is checked in any of the IPR dialogs, Production
Forecasting is disallowed (i.e. the Production Forecasting option is disabled
in the Deliverability menu).

FORECASTING
Production Forecasting 31
This facility is used to set-up and provide forecasts of well production rate
versus time once the deliverability characteristics of the well have been
determined. In infinite or partially-bounded reservoirs or drainage areas, the
forecast shows the effect of changing reservoir flow regimes and the response
to boundaries. For closed systems, pressure depletion and changing gas
compressibility are modeled for long-term forecasting, through transient,
transitional and semi-steady or steady-state flow regimes. An option is also
provided to perform the forecast with constant fluid compressibility if
required. The forecasting facility is available for oil, gas and condensate
systems.
i
been selected in the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog. The
All reservoir and boundary models which may be defined in PanSystem are
available in the forecasting model, with the exception of:
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary

Commingled Layers
The dialog is comprised of two data entry/edit sections, two selection areas
Time/Step section: The first section of this dialog is used to define the
time period of the forecast, calculation steps involved and the
time-stepping regime that will be employed.
Start/End: For Logarithmic Stepping, enter a Start time for the first
time step. Since flow rates are high initially, this should be a small
value (e.g. in the order of a few hours), to avoid material balance
errors in closed systems. Also enter the desired End time for the
forecast.
No. of Steps: The calculations will be more accurate the more time
steps that are used. PanSystem defaults to a value of 50 steps. For
closed boundary configurations, greater precision will be obtained in
the material balance calculation if a larger number of steps is used.

31 FORECASTING
Production Forecasting
! Between 50-100 steps are recommended for trial runs, then 200-500 steps or
more for final runs (up to a maximum of 1050 steps).
Time Units: Select from the options of hours, days, months and years. This
will automatically adjust the entered End figure to the corresponding
quantity of the respective Time Unit.
i A month is defined as 30.437 days (i.e. 365.25 days/12 months).
Linear/Logarithmic Stepping: There are two time-stepping regimes to

choose from:
Linear Stepping uses equally spaced time-steps.

Logarithmic Stepping uses logarithmically spaced steps starting
from a specified Start time (i.e. the time of the first step). This is
the default setting and is usually better, owing to the high and
rapidly changing production rates at the beginning.
Rate/Pressure/VFP section: This section deals with the production rates

and pressures.
Contract Rate: This represents the contracted maximum production

rate. If the rate is left at zero, then the forecasting calculations ignore
this field.
Minimum Production Rate: This is the rate at which the production

should terminate during the forecast.
! Simulate a constant rate production by setting the Contract Rate and the
Minimum Rate to the same value.
Two options are available for entering flowing pressure:
Constant Bottom Hole Pressure: If this option is selected, enter a Constant

Bottom Hole Pressure in the data entry field next to the check field.

FORECASTING
Constant Top Hole Pressure: This option is used for Tubing-Controlled
production. It requires the import of a VFP Format Flowing Pressure File,
and the selection of a Top Hole Pressure value from this source. When this
option is checked, the three following dialog items are enabled:
VFP File Import button: To select a VFP Table, first select the Constant
THP option, then select this button. This will generate a standard
Windows File Open dialog where a valid (*.VFP) file can be selected.
After the table has been imported, select a Top Hole Pressure value to
base the forecast on (i.e. if more than one value is present in the file).
i Production Forecasting will respect single well VFP tables generated by

WellFlo or other products.
Current File: When a VFP file is read in, PanSystem will display the unit
system in which the file has been written (oilfield or metric), next to the
file name. The VFP units will be correctly handled regardless of the
working unit system being used by PanSystem.
Top Hole Pressure: Select a Top Hole Pressure value to base the forecast on.
i
Note that Forecasting only offers a choice of THP. If multiple values of, for
example, water-cut or gas/oil ratio, are included in the VFP file, only the
flowrates corresponding to the first value of each will be used.
Analysis/Data selection area: This section is used to specify the source of

the deliverability data. There are three options for gas and condensate
systems, and one for oil, as described below:
i
The Full Analysis and LIT options use pseudo-pressure and require a valid p
versus m(p) table and p//Ct table to be present in the relevant Fluid
Parameters sub-dialog of the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description dialog.
Full Analysis: This option uses the theoretical radial inflow equation
to compute the inflow characteristics of the well and drainage area.
All phases of transient flow, through semi-infinite acting (i.e. if
boundaries are present), to semi-steady or steady- state (i.e. where a
closed system is involved), are modeled analytically.

31 FORECASTING
For gas and condensate wells this requires valid p versus m(p) and
p//Ct tables (refer to the relevant Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs from
the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description dialog for Oil, Gas and
Condensate). The analytical form of the deliverability equation is
used, and this requires the entry of a valid set of model parameters.
These parameters will depend on the selected Boundary Model. This is
the only option available for oil wells.

On selecting OK from this dialog, if users have selected any Boundary Model
except Infinitely Acting they will be presented with options relating to the
selected boundary model. All options allow no-flow boundaries and some
geometries can include constant pressure boundaries (i.e. where specifically
stated, or where a Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog button appears as part
of the dialog.
On selecting OK from the boundary dialog/s, or if the well is Infinitely Acting,

a Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Permeability (K), Darcy
Skin (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), will default to the currently
confirmed values. However, these values can be edited if required. The Start
and End times are provided for information only and cannot be edited on this
sub-dialog.
i Note, as in Quick Match Dialog, the skin terms (S) and (D), relate to the true
or mechanical skin factors at the wellbore.
previewed behind the Forecasting sub-dialog. When completed, users can
either select the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the Cancel button
to ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select
Calculate again.
Four plots are available for the forecast.

FORECASTING
LIT data Analysis: This option (for gas and condensate only), uses the (B)
and (F) coefficients derived from an LIT Analysis. This again requires
valid p versus m(p) and p//Ct tables.

LIT forecasting is applicable to wells which have attained semi-steady, or

steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following deliverability equation:
m(p) = BQ + FQ2
where (B) is the Darcy Flow Coefficient and (F) is the Non-Darcy or
Turbulent Flow Coefficient.
Because the (B) and (F) coefficients relate to semi-steady-state flow,

transient behavior is not modeled in the production forecast. Flow is
assumed to be semi-steady-state from the beginning.
On selecting OK from this Production Forecasting dialog, an LIT Analysis

Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Layer Pressure (P_lay),
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), are all defaulted
to values which exist if a previous LIT Analysis has been performed.
These values can be edited if required. The Start and End times are
displayed for information only and cannot be edited on this sub-dialog.
previewed behind this dialog. When completed, users can either select
the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the Cancel button to
ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select
Calculate again. Forecasting then displays the same plot and data export
options as for the Full Analysis option described above.
C&n data Analysis: This option (for gas and condensate only), uses
the coefficients of the simplified C&n method, and no transient
behavior is modeled.

31 FORECASTING
Although the C&n method does not require an m(p) table it does require
a p//Ct table to model the change in compressibility with pressure.

C&n forecasting is applicable to wells which have attained semi-steady, or

steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following deliverability equation:
Q = C(p2)n
where C and n are the coefficient and exponent derived from a C&n
Analysis
On selecting OK from this Production Forecasting dialog, a C&n Analysis

Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Layer Pressure (P_lay),
C-coefficient (C), n-exponent (n), are all defaulted to values which exist if a
previous C&n Analysis has been performed. These values can be edited if
required. The Start and End times are provided for information only and
cannot be edited on this sub-dialog.
previewed behind this dialog. When completed, users can either select
the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the Cancel button to
ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select
Calculate again. Forecasting then displays the same plot and data export
options as for the Full Analysis option described above.
Field Wide Trend selection area: This facility is used to apply an

adjustment to the material balance of the field. Select this button to
generate the Fieldwide Trend sub-dialog.
The sub-dialog has single data entry field. Enter a positive value to
superpose a declining field-wide pressure trend (depletion), or a negative
value for an increasing trend (pressure maintenance).

FORECASTING
Flow Rate v Time Plot 31
Select OK to apply the adjustment and return to the main Production
Forecasting dialog.
i This correction is only activated for the Closed System Boundary Models.
FLOW RATE V TIME PLOT

Functionality:
This option is only enabled when users are operating in Forecasting mode
within Deliverability. The plot shows the Production Forecast plotted as Flow
Rate versus Time.

FLOW RATE AND CUMULATIVE

PRODUCTION V TIME PLOT
Functionality:
within Deliverability. This plots the Flow Rate and the Cumulative Production
versus Time.


31 FORECASTING
Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP v Time Plot
AVERAGE RESERVOIR PRESSURE AND

BHFP V TIME PLOT
Functionality:
within Deliverability. This plot shows the values for Average Reservoir Pressure
and Bottom Hole Flowing Pressure plotted against Time.

AVERAGE RESERVOIR PRESSURE AND

CUMULATIVE PRODUCTION V TIME PLOT
Functionality:
within Deliverability. This plots the Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative
Production versus Time.

i
Note that the Reservoir Pressure will only decline if a Closed System Boundary
Model, with no Constant Pressure Boundaries is being used. It will remain
constant for any other Boundary Configuration.

FORECASTING
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR 31
EXPORT AND SAVE FORECAST RESULTS

AS TPR
Functionality:
within Deliverability. This option allows users to Export and Save Forecast
Results as a (*.TPR) file. The data will be written in Columns as displayed in
the table below:
Time Flowing Producti Average Cumulative

Bottom on Rate Reservoir Production
Hole Pressure
Pressure
Users can Import any, or all, of the Production Forecast results into Data
Preparation for further plotting or analysis.
Selecting the Export to File option will generate a standard Windows Save As
dialog where users can assign a filename and path to the Production Forecast
results file. The file is saved as a default (*.TPR) Gauge File (i.e. Time, Pressure
and Rate).

31 FORECASTING
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR

SECTION VII
REPORTS
This section provides information about Reports in the PanSystem

application.
CHAPTER 32
Reports View .............................................................. 851

Chapter 32
REPORTS VIEW
Reports Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Report Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Configure Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Editing File Header and Report Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Numerical Reporting Options Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Edit Report Data File Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Edit Report Analysis Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Edit Report Deliverability Section Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Page Setup Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Save As Word Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

32 REPORTS VIEW
Reports Overview
REPORTS OVERVIEW
General:
PanSystem has an extensive reporting facility enabling users to create clear,

comprehensive and finished reports quickly and easily.
From PanSystem 2014 SP2 (v5.0.0) onwards, the option to export a

key-worded report file (including gauge data) using the Pressure ASCII
Standard (PAS) format specified by the Alberta Energy Regulator (AER), can be
found under the AER option on the Import ribbon bar.
PanSystem Reports:
A PanSystem Report can contain the input data, plots and results for multiple
test periods and multiple models. A configuration menu will allow you to
select what you want to include. You will be able to output your report to a
printer, or to a Microsoft Word (DOCX) file, an Excel (XLSX) file, or to a PDF.
The current report format settings are saved to the (*.PANX) file and can be
recovered when the file is loaded. Alternatively, you may save your report
configuration to a template file.
PanSystem Reports are comprised of the following items, described in relation

to the Reports ribbon bar options:
Cover Page: This can be used to give introductory information about the
report, such as analyst's name, company, well name, field name, test date,
etc. Any relevant remarks can be added and/or edited via an Edit
Remarks facility (refer to the Help topic for Report Cover Page for more
details).

REPORTS VIEW
Reports Overview 32
Configure: Users can create report templates with this facility, similar to
pre-defined report formats in database programs. To print a report, all
users need to do is select the appropriate template, then Print. PanSystem
provides default system templates that can be used for printing reports
and as a basis for creating custom templates (refer to the Help topic for
Configure Report for more details). In a report template, the following
items are defined:
The sections the report will contain (Input Data, Analysis Results,
Deliverability Results).
The fields to be included within each section:
Input Data: This includes the Data Preparation Gauge Data and
Well and Reservoir Description parameters (e.g. gauge data, rate
history, fluid parameters, layer parameters, layer boundary
parameters, layer model data, pseudo-pressure and gas property
tables, etc.).
Analysis Results: The diagnostic plots and results calculated

from well data Analysis.
Deliverability Results: The plots and results calculated using the

Deliverability and Forecasting menu options.
Page layout settings (header, logo, footer, etc.).
Print: This will take you to a Print Preview from which you can print
the report or export it to a Microsoft Word (DOCX) file, an Excel (XLSX)
file, or to a PDF.
Templates: The quickest way to print a report is to select one of the eight
supplied report templates.
ANALYSIS: This reports the data relevant to the analysis of a particular

test period (i.e. plot/s, results, time functions, etc.), for all plots
analyzed so far.
br: customer template, supplied as part of the installation.
COMPLETE: This reports full results for Data Input, Analysis and
Deliverability (i.e. if present). Output = INPUT + ANALYSIS + DELIVER.
DELIVER: This reports the results of Deliverability analysis

32 REPORTS VIEW
Report Cover Page
INPUT: This reports the Data Edit Plot and the complete set of Input
Data for the Well and Layer.
QUICK: This reports a reduced set of results for Data Input, Analysis
and Deliverability (i.e. if present). Output = QUICKINP + QUICKANL +
DELIVER.
QUICKANL: This reports a reduced set of data relevant to the analysis

of a particular test period, for all plots analyzed so far.
QUICKINP: This reports a reduced set of Input Data for the Well and
Layer.
i Custom templates can be created, saved and added as required
REPORT COVER PAGE

General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Cover Page option on the Reports
ribbon, or by selecting the Configure option and the Edit layout button. It is
used to enter well and test details that users wish to appear on the first page
of their report, plus any additional remarks to be added. The Report Cover
Page can also be configured to transfer data into an AER (TRG PAS) Report as
described below.
Normally, this dialog is used to enter introductory information about the

report (e.g. field name, well name, test date, gauge number, etc.). The dialog
is comprised of an editable list field (on left), containing default subject
settings, a corresponding information entry list field (on right) and three
function buttons, as described below:

REPORTS VIEW
Report Cover Page 32
Details: The right-hand side of the Cover Page is for related information
corresponding to the subjects listed on the left-hand side of the dialog
and to the test data being analyzed. Information can be entered/edited
here. Users can type up to about 60 characters per line for a 10-pitch font
like Arial (refer to the Fonts option from the PanSystem toolbar for more
information). This information is saved with the test data and results to
the (*.PANX) file.
Description: The left-hand side of the Cover Page can be edited, and the
changes will be saved to the *.PANX file, but the original default settings
will appear for any new file being set-up. To change the Description
permanently, click the Save Description button. The new Description will
be saved to the registry and will apply to all subsequent new files.
Currently, you may change these default settings permanently for new files by
editing the contents of the PanSystem folder contained in the Windows
!
Registry. Open the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit
commands in Windows), then select
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Weatherford/PanSystem/Description. The
editing process is described below under Customizing the Cover Page for AER
(TRG PAS) File Export. When a (*.PANX) file is subsequently recalled, these
new settings will take precedence over the defaults.
Edit Remarks: Select this button to generate the Edit Remarks sub-dialog
that allows users to enter a further summary and/or remarks section
about the test (e.g. interesting features, problems, type of analysis
applied, etc.), which can be printed at the beginning of the report.
i
To include these two blocks of information in the final report, ensure that the
Include cover page and Include remarks check boxes in the Edit Report
Layout Sub-Dialog are checked.
Customizing the Cover Page for AER (TRG PAS) File Export:
These extra instructions are intended for use with the TRG.PAS option,
accessed via the AER icon on the Import Data ribbon.

32 REPORTS VIEW
Report Cover Page
To transfer some or all of the information on the report Cover Page to the
(PAS) file, users need to enter the appropriate data mnemonic, enclosed in
square brackets, anywhere on the left-hand (Description) side of the cover
page. The Transfer Values from PanSystem to PAS button in the AER Report
Editor dialog, will check for the presence of a mnemonic and transfer the data
entered on the right-hand side of the cover page to the appropriate field in the
(PAS) file.
These Description changes will be saved to the *.PANX file, but the original
default settings will appear for any new file being set up. To modify the
left-hand side permanently for all new (*.PANX) files, make the changes
outlined below and click the Save Description button. The new Description will
be saved to the registry and will apply to all subsequent new files.
Company [COMP]
Well ID [UWI]
License Number [WLIC]
Formation [FORM]
Test Start Date/Time [STRT]
Test Type [TTNC]
Depth Reference - MSL
Gauge Type [GTYP]
Gauge Number [GSER]
Gauge Depth (Measured)
Gauge Depth (TVD) [SDGA]
Formation Top (log) [TTOPL]
Formation Bottom (log) [TBASL]
Perforated interval top (log)
Perforated interval bottom (log)
Other mnemonics that can be used are:
Formation Top (TVD) [TTOPT]

REPORTS VIEW
Configure 32
Formation Bottom (TVD) [TBAST]
(e.g. these could replace [TTOPL] and [TBASL], or be used instead of the
perforated intervals).
The text can be modified in any of the above lines, or their order re-arranged.
i
Users can place the mnemonic anywhere in the line - it does not have to be at
the end, but it MUST be enclosed in square brackets [ ] to be recognized
during the Transfer Values from PanSystem to PAS process. The mnemonics
cited above are currently the only ones that can be transferred from the cover
page into an AER (TRG PAS) report.
Changes saved to the registry in this way are only effective for new files. To
modify the cover page in an existing (*.PANX) file, re-type the left-hand side
of the cover page and save the file.
CONFIGURE
Configure Report
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Configure option on the Reports

ribbon. Use this option to customize a report starting from the default
settings, or from one of the existing templates, which can be selected via the
Load button in the top right of the dialog. You can include (or exclude)
sections and their contents as described below. Once the report has been
configured you can save the configuration as a template, or go directly to
Print Preview. When you click OK from the dialog, the settings will be kept
for the current session until a new .PANX file is opened, or a new template is
loaded.

32 REPORTS VIEW
Configure Report
Figure 222: Report Configuration
Sections area: Check the appropriate checkboxes to specify the sections

to be included in the report. Choose from the following sections:
Input Section (Includes the Well and Reservoir Properties, Tables of Fluid
Properties, Numerical Data, Data Edit Plots, PVT Plots, etc.).
Analysis Section (Includes the Test Overview Plot, Type Curve Details,
Quick Match Results, Model Results, etc.).
Deliverability Section (Includes a range of Plots, such as the IPR,

Forecast Production Rate, Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP, etc.).

REPORTS VIEW
Configure Report 32
Click the corresponding Expand buttons to generate a drop-down list for each
section and choose the required items for inclusion in the report, using the
checkboxes.
i A different sub-dialog is generated for each section (refer to Edit Input, Edit
Analysis and Edit Deliverability for more information).
Edit Layout button: Select this button to generate the Edit Report
Layout Sub-Dialog. This sub-dialog is used to activate/de-activate items
connected with the report layout (e.g. Cover Page, Remarks, Header and
Footer).
Load button: Select this button to generate a standard Windows File

Open dialog. The eight supplied template files (and any template files
previously created by users), will be displayed as icons in the viewing
field and are designated as Report Template Files (*.TPL). The selected
template will be loaded and can be used to print reports using the Preview
button option described below.
Save button: Select this button to save a modified/edited Report Template

File under another name. A standard Windows File Save As dialog is
generated. Enter a new name for the template in the File Name field,
ensuring it has the extension (.TPL), then select Save. By default it will be
saved to the Reports folder.
Print Preview button: Select this button to preview the current report.
You may print the report or save it to file (DOCX, XLSX or PDF) from
there.
Customizing a Template:
To customize a template and print with it:
Use the Load button to load an existing template, or start from the default
settings.

32 REPORTS VIEW
Editing File Header and Report Remarks
Specify the sections to be included by checking the appropriate

checkboxes in the Sections area.
Generate the sub-dialogs for each chosen section by selecting the

appropriate Edit button:
Input Edit
Analysis Edit
Deliverability Edit
Within the selected sub-dialogs, choose the Plots, Tables, Description

Boxes, Headers, etc., that are to be included or excluded in each
section.
Save the template to an appropriate (or the default) folder with the Save
button.
Editing File Header and Report Remarks

General:
This Remarks sub-dialog is generated by clicking the Edit Remarks button on

the Report Cover Page dialog.
The Remarks field is free format text and can be any relevant data associated
with the current file that you want to print on the second page of the report.
When importing Gauge Data, you may import the Header of the file as well
as the measured data (see Number of Lines in Header). The Header (if any)
can be viewed at any time via the File Header button in the gauge data editor.

REPORTS VIEW
Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog 32
Figure 223: Example of gauge file Header information
You may edit the Header or copy it (i.e. click and drag to block select, then
copy (Ctrl+C) and paste it (Ctrl+V) into the Remarks section.
Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog

General:
This list is generated when you expand the Input Section entry on the Report
Configuration dialog. Each check box can be checked to include (or
unchecked to exclude) items from the current report template.

32 REPORTS VIEW
Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog
Figure 224: Expanded Input section
Items to include:
Analytical Input: Check the input data items from the Well, Reservoir &
Fluid Description, Gauge Data, and Rate Schedule sections of PanSystem to be
included in the report. Most of these items are self-explanatory, but the
less-obvious ones are described below:
Master TPR Data: This will be a listing of the gauge data that is being
used for the analysis. This can make for a very long report if you have
a large dataset!
PVT Plots: These are the (p-U-z, p-U-Ct and p-m(p) plots.
Numerical Input: This will only appear if a numerical model is present in

the file. It will expand into a drop-down list of the various input
components of the model.
Master TPR button: Select this button to generate an Edit Report Data
File Section Sub-Dialog. This will include a listing (versus clock time), of
selected Columns from the Gauge Data file, and a summary of the rate
changes.

REPORTS VIEW
Numerical Reporting Options Sub-Dialog 32
Numerical Reporting Options Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Edit Numerical button option

within the Numerical Input area of the Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog
on page 861. It is used to edit the Numerical Input data topics to be included
or excluded from the report.
The sub-dialog is comprised of a list of annotated checkboxes and two

function buttons. Check the relevant checkbox to include (or uncheck to
exclude) Numerical Input data topics from the Well, Reservoir & Fluid
Description section of PanSystem in the report (i.e. PanMesh data preparation
within PanSystem).
i If a checkbox is grayed-out, the associated topic is unavailable.
Edit Report Data File Section Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Master TPR button in the Edit
Input Report Section Sub-Dialog. The sub-dialog includes a listing (versus
clock time), of selected Columns from the Gauge Data File/s. It is used to select
the Well, associated Gauge Data File/s and Columns from the Gauge Data File/s,
to be included as part of the Input Data for reporting purposes.
The dialog is comprised of two selection areas and a text input section,

32 REPORTS VIEW
Edit Report Analysis Section Sub-Dialog
Select Well and TPR: Using the drop-down menu, select the required Well
(i.e. if several are listed) and Gauge Data File (i.e. if there are several files
available for the selected well).
i Normally, users will leave the default well and master file name selected in
this sub-dialog, as this is the data set used in Analysis.
Select Column/s to be Printed: Users should select and highlight each of the
Columns (i.e. data channels) required for the report. To de-select, apply a
left mouse-click.
i Time is always listed in the report.
Comments: This is a text input section where users can include any notes
or comments they may find useful.
i
If users try to OK from the sub-dialog with no Columns (i.e. data channels)
selected, they will be presented with a Rate Changes Table listing. A reminder
will appear in this case.
Edit Report Analysis Section Sub-Dialog

General:
This list is generated when you expand the Analysis Section entry on the
Reports Configure Report dialog. Each check box can be checked to
include (or unchecked to exclude) items from the current report template.

REPORTS VIEW
Edit Report Analysis Section Sub-Dialog 32
Figure 225: Expanded Analysis section
The sub-dialog is comprised of two selection areas and two function buttons,
Select Plot: All of the plots that have been analyzed so far will be listed
here. Select or deselect plots from the list.
i Each plot is individually configurable in terms of what information is assigned to

it in the report:

32 REPORTS VIEW
Edit Report Deliverability Section Sub-Dialog
Items to include: Check the data items to be included in the report for
each selected plot in turn. Most of these items are self-explanatory, but
the less-obvious ones are described below:
Transformed Data: This will include a listing of the x- and y-axis

values of the plotted Gauge Data (e.g. time and pressure,
superposition function versus rate normalized pseudo-pressure, etc.,
depending on the plot. The derivative is also listed for a Log-Log
Plot).
Simulated Data: This will include a listing of the x- and y-axis values
of the plotted simulated data (if any) generated by Quick Match
Dialog.
Auto-Match Statistics: This option is only enabled if you have

performed an Auto Match on the selected plot. If this item is checked,
the report will include the table of confidence intervals for each
parameter, and the correlation parameters.
Edit Report Deliverability Section Sub-Dialog

General:
This list is generated when you expand the Deliverability Section entry on the
Reports Configuration dialog. Each check box can be checked to include (or
unchecked to exclude) items from the current report template.
Figure 226: Expanded Deliverability section

REPORTS VIEW
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog 32
The sub-dialog is comprised of two selection areas and two function buttons,
Select Plot: This area lists all of the IPR and/or Forecasting plots that have
been generated so far. Select or deselect plots from the list.
i Each plot is individually configurable in terms of what information is assigned to

it in the report:
Items to Include area: Check the data items to be included in the report
for each selected plot in turn.
Deliverability Data: Check this check box to include tabulated input

data (i.e. data previously entered via the Deliverability ribbon
options), constraints and results (e.g. Deliverability/Injectivity data
from the IPR ribbon options and/or Production Constraints, Forecasting
Parameters and Forecasting Results from the Forecasting menu option).
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is generated when you select the Edit Layout button in the
Sections area of the Configure Report dialog. Use this sub-dialog to alter
the Report Layout configuration. Each item can be checked to include (or
unchecked to exclude) items from the current report format.

32 REPORTS VIEW
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog
Figure 227: Report Layout Editor
The sub-dialog is comprised of three selection areas and four function

Cover Page area: Check these check boxes to include Cover Page and
Remarks sections in the Report. The contents of these pages can be viewed
and/or edited by selecting the Edit Cover Page and Edit Remarks buttons
respectively. The dialogs generated by the Edit buttons in this dialog can
also be accessed via the Cover Page option on the Report menu.
Report Header area: You can insert your own Report Header in these data
entry fields just modify as required. The modified Header can be saved
to the Report Template for use with other files in the future, and you just
need to load the relevant template next time. The Header is saved to the
(*.PANX) file, and will appear next time that file is loaded, regardless of
current program settings. To modify it in future, either edit within this
dialog or load a different template.

REPORTS VIEW
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog 32
Include header: If you check the Include Header check box, the Header will
appear across the top of every page:
Show logo: The Weatherford logo is stored as LOGO.PNG in the

Reports folder created under the
...\AppData\Roaming\Weatherford\PanSystem folder during
installation, and will be displayed to the left of the header if Show logo
is checked.
Using your company logo: You can substitute your own company
logo. Copy the logo as a (*.PNG) portable network graphic file
(LOGO.PNG), into the Reports folder created under the
...\AppData\Roaming\Weatherford\PanSystem folder during
installation. Ensure that the Show Logo checkbox is checked.
The aspect ratio of the logo will be respected provided it does not
exceed 2:1, otherwise it will be re-scaled to fit. Ensure that an
empty border area is not present around the logo, as this will be
included, making the actual logo smaller.
Show Date: Check the Show Date check box to display the current
date at the top right corner of each page in the report. The date will
appear once, in the report title on the first page, whether this box is
checked or not.
Report Footer area: Check the check boxes for any of the Footer
components required for the Report:
Show page numbers: These will appear at bottom right of every page.
Show footer text: This will appear at bottom left of every page. Edit if
required.
i Refer also to Page Setup Codes for details of how the Footer section of
Report pages can be set up to have the current Date and Time embedded

32 REPORTS VIEW
Page Setup Codes
!
To save any new layout as a Report Template, OK from this sub-dialog to
return to the Configure Report dialog, then use the Save Template button to
save the newly-defined template to the Reports folder.
PAGE SETUP CODES

General:
The footer section of report pages can be set-up to have the current date and
time embedded (i.e. derived from Windows Control Panel International
settings), by typing the following codes into the report layout.
Procedure:
Select the Configure option of the Reports ribbon to open a Configure Report
dialog.
Select the Edit Layout button to open an Edit Layout dialog.
The following codes may then be typed into the appropriate text fields within
the Report Footer section:
&d: Enters the current date in the format set-up on the Windows Control
Panel International settings (e.g., 04-27-2015).
&t: Enters the current time in the format set-up on the Windows Control
Panel International settings (e.g., 17:34:21).

REPORTS VIEW
Save As Word Document 32
SAVE AS WORD DOCUMENT

General:
This dialog is generated when users select the Output option from the Reports
ribbon. It allows users to save the report to an MS Word (*.DOC) file with
graphics embedded.
! If users do not have MS Word, this facility cannot be used. It is not possible to
specify an alternative program.
This is a standard Windows Save As dialog, described as follows:
Save In: Select a suitable folder using the drop-down menu system to
browse for a folder, or accept the default setting (i.e. PanSystem/Reports)
File Name: Enter a suitable report filename in this data entry field with
the extension (*.DOC).
Save As Type: Accept the default document file setting (*.DOC).
After naming the document and saving it to the required folder with the Save
button, users are supplied with a prompt to view the document. After
selecting Yes to the prompt, MS Word is opened and the Report contents can
be viewed, edited, printed, saved and re-formatted (i.e. plot re-sizing, page
number insertion, application of headers/footers, etc.).
This option writes the same items to file as are normally printed directly via
the alternative Print Preview. To ensure that the generated Word report
will have the required content check the settings in Configure Report.
Typically, a report may contain:
Table of contents (i.e. created by Word, not by PanSystem).
Cover Page with remarks, header and footer options (i.e. text, date, page
numbers).

32 REPORTS VIEW
Print Preview
Input Data and plots, including:
Gauge Data (TPR),

Well and Reservoir (Analytical)
Well and Reservoir (Numerical)
Analysis Data and plots.
Deliverability Data and plots.
If users select No to the prompt, the Report file is saved automatically to the
specified folder.
PRINT PREVIEW
General:
This Print Preview is generated when you select the Print option from the
Reports ribbon, or via the Print Preview button on the Report Configuration
dialog.
i
If you are uncertain about the current report configuration, refer to the
Configure Report option to check, then either use the current configuration or
change it as required.
Figure 228: Print Preview with header and log included

REPORTS VIEW
Print Preview 32
Browse: The report can be browsed using the arrows at

top left of the screen.
Print: This brings up a standard Windows Print dialog.
Page Setup: Use this dialog to adjust page margins, orientation, and
paper size (default A4).
Export to PDF: Exports file as PDF.
Export to Word: Exports file as DOCX.
Export to Excel: Exports file as XLSX.
Zoom: This offers a range of zoom sizes. The default Whole

Page will size the page to occupy the full height of the screen. The Page
Width option will zoom such that the page will occupy the full width of
the screen.
Close: Close preview and return to PanSystem.

32 REPORTS VIEW
Templates
TEMPLATES
General:
The quickest way to print a report is to select one of the eight supplied report
templates listed under the lower half of the Report menu. These
Weatherford-supplied templates appear in alphabetical order with Windows
NT and 2000, but not with Windows 95 or 98.
This assumes that users are familiar with what each of the templates will
produce:
ANALYSIS: This reports the data relevant to the analysis of a particular test
period (i.e. plot/s, results, time functions, etc.), for all plots analyzed so
far.
br: customer template, supplied as part of the installation.
COMPLETE: This reports full results for Data Input, Analysis and
Deliverability (i.e. if present). Output = INPUT + ANALYSIS + DELIVER.
DELIVER: This reports the results of Deliverability analysis
INPUT: This reports the Data Edit Plot and the complete set of Input Data
for the Well and Layer.
QUICK: This reports a reduced set of results for Data Input, Analysis and
Deliverability (i.e. if present). Output = QUICKINP + QUICKANL + DELIVER.
QUICKANL: This reports a reduced set of data relevant to the analysis of a

particular test period, for all plots analyzed so far.
QUICKINP: This reports a reduced set of Input Data for the Well and Layer.
Other custom templates can be created, saved and added as required via the
AER Report Editor Dialog option on the Import data ribbon.

SECTION VIII
CONFIGURATION
This section provides information about configuration in the PanSystem

application.
CHAPTER 33
Configuration View .................................................... 877
CHAPTER 34
Windows System Commands ..................................... 899
32

Chapter 33
CONFIGURATION VIEW
Configuration View Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
General Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Units Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
New Unit System Based On/Edit Unit System Sub-Dialog 886
Unit Classes Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Create New Unit Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Units Detail Sub-Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Gauge Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Gauge Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Graphing Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

33 CONFIGURATION VIEW
CONFIGURATION VIEW OVERVIEW

General:
This menu allows users to carry out the following tasks:
Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files.
Specify whether the last file used is to be opened automatically when

PanSystem is loaded.
Specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they
leave PanSystem.
Select, create and edit the units system PanSystem uses.
Define how a gauge behaves within PanSystem.
Define how the plots are to be displayed on the screen.
Specify the fonts PanSystem uses to display information on the screen and
in reports.
Menu Options:
The menu options available under the Configuration view include the
following:
General: Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for
files, specify if PanSystem will automatically load the last file used,
specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they
exit the program, enable the regular auto-save option and specify the
default Page Set-Up for printing individual plots.
Units: Select the units system PanSystem will use. Create and edit
custom units systems.
Gauge Details: Use this section to specify the technical characteristics

of the pressure gauge, and where to use them in PanSystem. This is
optional - real gauge characteristics may be ignored if required.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
General 33
Graphs: Use this option to specify how plots appear on the screen.
Many of the selected settings are written to the Graphing folder in the
Pansys31.ini file in the Windows Registry, and become the standard
defaults used by PanSystem.
Fonts: Use this option to set the fonts PanSystem uses to display
information on the screen and to print reports. PanSystem already has
default fonts specified. Users can select their own fonts and save these as
the new defaults.
GENERAL
General Configuration Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the General option from the Configuration
view and is used to do the following:
Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files.
Specify if PanSystem will automatically load the last file used.
Specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they
exit the program.
Define the default fluid type for new files.
Enable the regular Auto-Save option
Specify the default Page Set-Up for printing individual plots.
The dialog is comprised of five selection areas (one containing six browse
buttons) and two function buttons, described as follows:

Directories area: This area lists the main directories used within
PanSystem:
Data: Location of main data files (e.g. *.PANX, *. PTL, *.TPR, *.DAT,
*.SEA, etc.).
Type Curve: Location of type-curve files used in Analysis (e.g. *.TCB,

*.TCL, etc.), and of flow model response curves (*.TCX) used by
Advanced Simulation.
Report: Location of report-related and report template files used in

Reports (e.g. *.EUB, *.PAS, *.TPL and *.BMP for reporting logos).
Paging: This is important for large file handling if the data cannot be
stored in high memory; PanSystem stores the data on disk in a
quick-access paging directory and subsequently moves chunks (i.e.
pages) of the data into memory as they are required. It is also the
destination of the Auto-save file.
Customer Model: This is where customer-supplied reservoir models

can be stored in the form of DLL files. There is a facility in PanSystem
for users to implement their own reservoir models and these can be
fully integrated into the Analysis and Simulation (i.e. Quick Match,
Auto and Advanced Simulation) functions of the program by means of
a DLL link. This enables the code defining a model to remain
external to PanSystem and to be modified, or new models added at
any time. Several new models using the DLL link are supplied with
PanSystem. For details of the format required to integrate custom
flow models, please contact your Weatherford representative.
The path names are set-up when PanSystem is installed. These will be the
default directories that appear during File Open and Save As operations.
Users can change the path name temporarily when opening or saving a file.
To make a permanent change, enter the new path name/s here, or select the
browse button situated to the right of the text entry field; this generates a
Browse for Folder dialog where users can graphically select a new directory
path.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
General Configuration Dialog 33
Page Set-Up Definition: This area defines the configuration of
hard-copy plots (i.e. size, contents, etc.), output as single pages via
Print option under File Management. This area is split into two
sub-areas:
Print Contents: This selection area is used to configure the contents of

printed output. Select the required output by checking the required
checkboxes:
Plot: This will print the screen plot, with line/s, legend and
results box (i.e. if present). If only this box is ticked, nothing else
will appear on the page.
Model Results: Lists the results obtained from line-fitting (which

appear in the results box in the plot area), in a framed area
beneath the plot, using a full textual description of parameters
(e.g. Permeability instead of k).
Quick Match: Lists the parameters used for Quick Match response
generation. These may not necessarily be the same as the Model
Results from line-fitting.
Header/Footer: Allows users to include text that will be printed at

the top and bottom of the page, outside the plot frame. The
contents of the header and footer are configured via the Reports
view under Configure Report using the Edit Report Layout
Sub-Dialog and can include a company logo.
Line Results: Lists the statistical parameters (e.g. slope, intercept,

etc.), associated with any lines drawn on the plot (refer to the
Line Details and Results button option in Analysis).
Size: This selection area is used to select how the plot is printed on
the page. The following alternatives exist:
Screen Size: This prints the plot at the current screen size and
aspect ratio, subject to margin constraints. Results and
description boxes, if enabled, are printed beneath the plot.
Fit to Page: This sizes the plot to be as large as possible within the
margins, while retaining the same aspect ratio as the screen plot
(default setting). Results and description boxes, if enabled, are
printed beneath the plot.

Full Page: The aspect ratio is adjusted to fill the page out to the
margins. Results and description boxes, if enabled, are printed
on a separate page.
i
With the exception of the margins and plot sizing, these settings are global,
and will apply to all plots and all files. The margins and plot size settings apply
to all plots, but are file-specific (i.e. they are saved to file).
Reporting: This area is used to define the default report destination (i.e.
printer or text file). This can be altered at the time of outputting the report
if desired (also refer to the Output option on the Reports view).
Window: The area is used to control the default size and position of
opened data files that are displayed in the application.
Maximize: Select to expand open data files to the full size of the screen
in the application window.
Tile Horizontal: Select to display open data files in windows that are
stacked side by side.
Tile Vertical: Select to display open data files in windows that are
stacked one above the other.
Tile Cascade: Select to display open data files in windows that are
stacked descending from the upper-left to the lower-right of the
screen.
Miscellaneous area: This area offers three options for file loading and
saving:
Check the Automatically load last file used option to open the last file
that was worked on (i.e. during the previous session) each time
PanSystem is started-up again.
Check the Prompt for file save on exit option to receive a reminder to
save data (i.e. if it has not been done already) before closing the
current PanSystem session (default setting).

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Units 33
Check the Auto save data for every option to write the current data to a
back-up file on disk at the specified time interval (i.e. enter a suitable
time interval in the Every...mins field). The back-up file has the
extension (*.BAK) and the same name as the (*.PANX) file that is
being working on. If a file name has not yet been assigned by the
user (i.e. Untitled), the back-up file will be called PANSYS.BAK.
Select the Default Reservoir Fluid Type. The default setting is Oil.
Change this if you wish PanSystem to start new files with an
alternative fluid type.
ODBC:
ODBC IT Setup: Click this button to set up new data mapping files.
ODBC Real-Time: Click this button to setup a real time feed.
UNITS
Units Editor
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Units option from the Configuration
view. It is used to do the following:
Select the Unit Systems that PanSystem will use.

Create and edit a customized Unit Systems.
PanSystem provides the following standard Unit Systems:
Oilfield with psi absolute (OILFABS): STP = 14.7 psia, 60F

Oilfield with psi gauge (OILFGAG): STP = 0 psig, 60F
SI for Canada (CANSI): STP = 101.325 kPa, 15C
SI for Norway (NORSI): STP = 1.01325 barsa, 15C
SI for Germany (GERMSI): STP = 1.01325 barsa, 0C
SI for Hungary (HUNGSI): STP = 0.101325 MPa, 15C
SI for Brazil (PETROSI): STP = 1.0332 kgf/cm2, 20C
SI for Austria (abs) (OMVABS): STP = 1.01325 bar, 0C
SI for Austria (gauge) (OMVGAU): STP = 0 bar-g, 0C
SI for Shell (LIBRA[SI]): STP = 101325 Pa, 273.16K

Units Editor
Field SI for Shell (LIBRA[FIELD SI]): STP = 1.01325 bar, 273.16K

Imperial for Shell (LIBRA[IMPERIAL]): STP = 14.696 psi, 519.67R
SI for Canada (CANSI) [PAS Export]: STP = 101.325 kPa, 15C
These Weatherford-supplied Unit Systems can be used as a basis for creating

customized Units Systems.
WFT CANSI, etc: The units systems prefixed by WFT are the units
systems listed above modified for conventional wireline formation tester
(WFT) use with flowrates in cm3/ sec.
Configuring Units
Standard sets of Oilfield Units and SI Units are supplied with PanSystem.
These supplied sets cannot be altered, but copies can be made and edited to
create a customized unit System; these customized copies can be
subsequently edited and deleted.
TO CONFIGURE UNITS:
1. On the Configuration ribbon, select Units.
The Units Editor is displayed.
The System highlighted is the one currently active.
2. Select another system and click OK.
The units of measurement assigned within the newly-selected system will be

used throughout PanSystem.
3. To delete a previously created system, select a customized System and click

Delete System.
You cannot delete supplied Systems.
4. To create a custom system, perform the following actions:
4a Click New System.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Units Editor 33
The Create New Unit System dialog box is displayed.
4b In the New System Name field, type a name for the new system.
4c From the Based On System drop-down list, select a system on which to

base the new system.
This selection provides a source Unit System for customization.
PanSystem is supplied with a standard set of default values for each

supplied unit system, and any user-defined unit system is automatically
associated with the standard set of defaults derived from the source unit
system used to create it.
4d Click OK.
The new system is added to the list of available Systems in the Units
Editor.
5. To customize your new system, perform the following actions:
4a Select your system in the Units Editor.
4b Select a unit type and set the default value by selecting it from the
Default Unit drop-down list.
4c Click Apply to save your settings.
6. To delete a custom unit system, select the system in the Units Editor, and click
Delete System.
7. To load the default settings, click Use Default Settings.
This returns the Systems available in the Units Editor to their original default
state by removing any custom Systems and adding any deleted supplied
Systems.
8. To close the Units Editor, click OK.
Conversions
These supplied sets cannot be altered, but copies can be made and edited to
create a customized unit system; these customized copies can be
subsequently edited and deleted.

New Unit System Based On/Edit Unit System Sub-Dialog
TO CONFIGURE CONVERSIONS:
1. On the Configuration ribbon, select Units.

2. Open the Conversions tab.
3. The Conversions configuration screen is displayed.
4. Select a unit type and conversion from the menus to open a conversion
configuration screen.
5. Click OK.
6. Edit the new conversion through its conversion configuration screen, and
click Apply to save your changes.
7. To delete a conversion, select it from the menu and click Delete Conversion.
New Unit System Based On/Edit Unit System

Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the New System button (i.e. for new
Unit System) or Edit button (i.e. for existing user-generated Unit System)
within the Configure Unit Editor dialog. Use this dialog to create a new Unit
System based on an existing one or to edit the details for an existing
user-generated Unit System. Users can either change the units for a whole
class of parameters (e.g. all pressures), or change the units for individual
parameters (e.g. some pressures). These units can be selected from the
supplied alternatives, or users can define new ones.
This sub-dialog has a single entry/editing section and two function buttons.
The entry/edit fields are described as follows:
New System Name: Enter or edit the name of the new Units System to be
created.
Based on System: Enter the name of the existing Unit System on which to
create the new Unit System.
On OK from this sub-dialog, the Unit Classes sub-dialog is generated, where

users can edit the existing Unit Systems for a range of different parameters
(e.g. pressure, rate, temperature, etc.).

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Unit Classes Sub-Dialog 33
Unit Classes Sub-Dialog
General:
This editing sub-dialog is generated by selecting the New System button

within the Unit Systems dialog to generate the New Unit System Based On
sub-dialog, then selecting OK. This editing sub-dialog lists the various
classes of units.
This sub-dialog is comprised of a selection area and four function buttons,

Selection area: This area allows users to make a global change to an entire
unit class (e.g. all parameters with the units of pressure). The various
classes of units are listed. To change the units for an entire class, select
the drop-down menu for the appropriate class and select a new unit from
the list. This will save users from having to switch the units of every
parameter in that class individually on a subsequent screen.
For example, to select meters for all depths, select the drop-down menu to
the right-hand side of the Length box and highlight/select m from the
list. The selected unit will be applied to all the parameters in that class
(i.e. for this example of Length, it will be applied to layer thickness,
distance to boundary, well length, etc.).
New Unit: This button generates the Create New Unit sub-dialog. Use this
option to create a user-defined unit and apply it to a unit class.
Units Detail: This button generates the Units Detail sub-dialog. Use this
option to change the units for individual parameters (rather than an
entire class). For instance, continuing with the Length example above,
users may only want some of the parameters with the units of length to
be in m. In this additional sub-dialog, users can set the parameters they
want to ft or some other suitable system.
Create New Unit Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the New Unit button within the Unit
Classes sub-dialog and allows users to:

Create New Unit Sub-Dialog
Create a user-defined unit and apply it to a unit class.

Enter/edit the shift and multiply values of an existing unit type.
The sub-dialog is comprised of two data entry/edit sections and two function
Unit Name section: This is a descriptive name for the new unit type which
will be displayed next to relevant data entry fields within PanSystem (e.g.
F, psia).
Conversion Factors section: The two data entry fields within this section
instruct PanSystem how to change between an internal unit type and a
user-defined type. All parameters are converted internally by PanSystem
into Oilfield Absolute Units. Units conversions are defined by means of the
Shifts and Multipliers required to correct and/or convert the number in
internal units to the correct number in user units. The conversion
relationship is described by the following equation:
User Unit = (Internal Unit + Shift) x Multiplier
Shift: This item is required when a correction factor needs to be

applied (e.g. gauge pressure to absolute pressure).
Multiply: This item represents the actual conversion factor.
Enter the new name, and the required shift and multiplier values to correct
and/or convert the PanSystem internal unit to a new, user-defined unit.
For example, if a user wants the Length class unit meters to appear as mtl
instead of the supplied form m. The new Unit Name can be typed in as mt.
If the shift is set at 0, and the multiplier is set at 0.3048 the following
conversion will apply:
mt = ft x 0.3048 (where ft represents the current internal unit).
The new user-defined unit is applied to all parameters that are in that class
(in this case, layer thickness, distance to boundary, well length, etc., are all in
the Length class).

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Units Detail Sub-Dialog 33
Units Detail Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is either generated by selecting the Units Detail button within
the Unit Classes sub-dialog or the View button in the Unit Systems dialog (i.e.
viewing option), and allows users to change or view respectively, the units
for individual parameters (i.e. rather than an entire class).
For example, users may only want some of the parameters with the Units of
Length to be in Meters (m). With this facility, users can set any other
parameters they require to be in Feet (ft), Centimeters (cm), or any other unit.
The sub-dialog is comprised of a selection area, an editing/information area

Unit Title/User Unit area: Select individual parameters within this list
field by highlighting with a left mouse-click. When a parameter is
selected, the current User Unit will also be displayed in the editing field
within the Current User Unit area.
Current User Unit area: This editing field is used to choose an alternative
Unit System for the currently-selected User Unit. Use the drop-down
menu and highlight an appropriate system.
i
If this sub-dialog is generated with the View button in the Unit Systems dialog,
this area can only be viewed - it cannot be edited unless it has been
generated by selecting the Units Detail button within the Unit Classes
sub-dialog (i.e. during the course of defining a new Unit System).
New Unit button: Use this button to create a new user-defined unit for a
selected parameter. Highlight the parameter with a left mouse-click, then
select the New Unit button to generate a Create New Unit sub-dialog.
i The button is disabled if this sub-dialog is generated with the View button in the
Unit Systems dialog.

Gauge Details
Edit Unit button: Use this button to edit an existing user-defined unit.
Highlight the parameter with a left mouse-click, then select the Edit Unit
button to generate a Create New Unit sub-dialog.
i The EPS-supplied units cannot be edited - only user-defined units can be

edited.
i The button is also disabled if this sub-dialog is generated with the View button
in the Unit Systems dialog.
GAUGE DETAILS
Gauge Details Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Gauge Details option from the
Configuration view or from the Advanced Simulation Control Dialog box. It
is used to specify the technical characteristics of the Pressure Gauge, and
where to use them in PanSystem.
i This is an optional step - real Gauge Characteristics may be ignored if

desired.
Use this dialog to:
Specify the Radius of Investigation.
Superpose Gauge Characteristics on simulated data in Advanced Simulation

to generate more realistic pressure responses.
The settings are saved with the (*.PANX) file.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Gauge Details Dialog 33
The dialog is comprised of two selection/data input areas and two function
Radius of Investigation area: Users may choose how the Radius of

Investigation (Rinv) should be calculated. The (Rinv) parameter is
displayed in the status bar beneath the diagnostic plots for any position of
the mouse pointer. Maximum (Rinv) for the test is an output from the
Semi-Log Plot in the Analysis view and appears in the results box after
a line-fit to the Radial Flow portion of the data.
Use Classical Calculation: This option determines the Radius of

Investigation (Rinv) using the classical equation (refer to PanSystem
Equations for details), and assumes a Gauge with perfect resolution
and no Drift or Noise.
Use Gauge Resolution and Noise: This option allows users to take the
Gauge Resolution and Noise characteristics into account (refer to
PanSystem Equations for details). If this option is selected, the Base
Rinv on 'n' Times (resolution+noise) input field is activated (described
below), and users should enter a value for the Gauge Resolution and/or
Noise in the Advanced Simulation Effects area of the dialog (described
below).
Base Rinv on 'n' Times (resolution+noise): The decision that an anomaly

in the pressure trend on a diagnostic plot does or does not represent a
heterogeneity is subjective. One user might want to see a deviation
from the Radial Flow line by, say, two times the Gauge Resolution at a
certain time on a Semi-Log Plot, to be certain it represents an
anomaly at a certain distance, another might feel happier with four
times the Gauge Resolution. The calculation of Radius of Investigation
(Rinv) must take this criterion into account. Values of n from 2 to 4
appear to be quite reasonable. If users include Noise in the Gauge
details, this too is incorporated in the computation.
i
Note that this refers to the detection of an anomaly at a distance Rinv, not
characterization of the anomaly as a fault, change of kh, etc. This would
require about another log cycle of testing time.

Gauge Details Dialog
Maximum Rinv in buildups to be limited by Tp: To limit the Build-Up by

the preceding flowing period of duration (Tp), check this checkbox to
impose the popular, (but not universally held opinion) that the Radius
of Investigation (Rinv) of a Build-Up cannot exceed that attained by
(Tp).
i This feature is switched-off by default.
Advanced Simulation Effects area: This is where users can specify the
Pressure Gauge characteristics:
To use options in this area for the calculation of Radius of Investigation

(Rinv), enter values for Resolution and/or Noise. There is no need to
check the checkboxes in this case.
To use options in this area for simulating the Pressure Response with
Advanced Simulation, check the checkboxes for the effects to be
included, and enter values.
Include Gauge Drift: Enter the expected Gauge Drift (i.e. positive for
downward drift) and check the checkbox to include it in Advanced
Simulation.
Include Gauge Resolution: Enter the Gauge Resolution and check the
checkbox to include it in Advanced Simulation, or leave the checkbox
unchecked if it is only required for calculating Radius of Investigation
(Rinv).
i Note that the data transmission system may have poorer resolution than the
Gauge itself.
Include Noise Amplitude: Enter the maximum Noise Amplitude and check the
checkbox to include it in Advanced Simulation, or leave the checkbox
unchecked if it is only required for calculating Radius of Investigation (Rinv).
Any Noise is considered to have a uniform probability distribution between
plus/minus the amplitude value specified.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Graphs 33
Add Noise BEFORE Resolution: If the Include Gauge Resolution and Include
Noise Amplitude checkboxes have both been checked, users have the
additional option of Adding Noise BEFORE Resolution in the Advanced
Simulation calculations. This feature is disabled by default and noise is
assumed to originate after the sensor (e.g. in the data transmission
system). The appearance of the simulated pressure is radically different
if the Noise is introduced before resolution.
Gauge Type: This field is linked to a data file containing a list of Gauge
Types and their characteristics.
The file is called GAUGES.TXT and resides in the main PanSystem directory.
It is in ASCII format and can be edited (i.e. externally), so users can add their
own Gauge Types and data as required. The basic file comes with the generic
Gauge Types (e.g. quartz crystal, quartz capacitance, etc.) and typical values
for resolution.
i
If particular Gauge Types are used more frequently, it is worth entering them in
this file. However, remember to update the number at the top of the file to
reflect the increased number of Gauges.
If a Gauge Type is selected from the list, the associated parameters for that
Gauge will appear in the Drift, Resolution and Noise fields. These parameters
may be overtyped if required. Alternatively, leave the entry as Not Specified
and type in values.
GRAPHS
Graphing Configuration Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Graphing Configuration option from

the Configuration menu item and is used to specify how graphs/plots appear
on the screen.

The Graphing settings selected by users are written to the Windows Registry
under HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Graphing. When a
new (*.PANX) file is subsequently created, these new settings will take
precedence over the defaults. These settings can be applied in two different
ways:
Using the main Edit menu while displaying a particular plot, to select
the X-Axis, Y-Axis, Legend and Results menu options. Users can then alter
some of these settings in the dialogs that are generated with these
options. The corresponding settings are updated automatically in the
Configuration section of PanSystem.
Similarly, by selecting a plot to be configured in this Graphing

Configuration dialog and altering settings. The corresponding settings are
updated automatically in the Edit section of PanSystem, related to plot
display.
Users should experiment with the Graphing settings using this dialog or the
Edit menu (while displaying a particular plot), to create an interface that best
suits their requirements
! If users wish to apply changes to the Registry settings, they should exercise
great care - please refer to the warning note at the end of this Help topic.
The dialog is comprised of three selection areas (one containing four

sub-sections) and two function buttons, described as follows:
Plot Specific area: This area is used to configure items specifically

related to the selected plot. Each plot can be configured on an individual
basis:
Plot: Select the plot to be configured using the Plot drop-down menu.
Title Color: Select the color for the selected plot title using the
drop-down menu.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Graphing Configuration Dialog 33
Axis Data: Show or hide the grid, scales, labels, date and/or divisions
on the X-axis (i.e. when these checkboxes are enabled), by checking or
unchecking the appropriate checkboxes (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific).
The Show Date option is only available for the Data Edit and Test Overview
plots.
Rounding Scale Axis: Invoke X-axis scale rounding. This partially

overrides the Min and Max values specified earlier, since the Round
option selects Min and Max values so the tick values will be round
numbers, taking into account the range covered by the data (i.e. global
setting, plot type specific).
Logarithmic Axis Display: This option is only available for plots with
logarithmic axes (e.g. Log-Log Plot).
Divisions: Choose the spacing between the X-axis grid lines (i.e. Ticks) by
setting the number of ticks. For guidance, the number of divisions on the
plot equals the number of ticks minus one. This automatically sets the
axis numbering (i.e. global setting, plot type specific).
i The Divisions option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.
Time Format: Select a suitable Time Format for the X-axis label (e.g.
hours, dd.mm.hh.ss, etc.), where appropriate. If date information has
been imported with gauge data, this option permits the date to be
plotted on the time axis of the Data Edit Plot and Test Overview (e.g.
(DATE) hh:mm: ss time format).
Color: Change the X-axis display Color (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific), using the drop-down menu.
i This option is only available for the Data Edit and Test Overview plots.

Y-Axis Data: Show or hide the grid, scales, labels and/or ticks on the
Y-axis (i.e. when these checkboxes are enabled), by checking or
unchecking the appropriate checkboxes (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific).
Rounding Scale Axis: Invoke Y-axis scale rounding. This partially

overrides the Min and Max values specified earlier, since the
Round option selects Min and Max values so the tick values will
be round numbers, taking into account the range covered by the
data (i.e. global setting, plot type specific).
Logarithmic Axis Display: This option is only available for plots

with logarithmic axes (e.g. Log-Log Plot).
Divisions: Choose the spacing between the Y-axis grid lines (i.e.
Ticks) by setting the number of ticks. For guidance, the number of
divisions on the plot equals the number of ticks minus one. This
automatically sets the axis numbering (i.e. global setting, plot
type specific).
i The Divisions option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.
Color: Change the Y-axis display Color (i.e. global setting, plot
type specific), using the drop-down menu.
Legend/Results area: Use this area to:
Choose the position that the plot Legend box will occupy on the
selected plot (check one of the four options).
Choose the box frame and text Color from the drop-down menu and
menu scroll bar.

CONFIGURATION VIEW
Graphing Configuration Dialog 33
option to re-load the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
warning.
Windows 95, 98, 2000, XP and NT all have a simple Registry back-up
mechanism that is quite reliable, but users should never rely on this alone;
always remember to make a back-up of the Registry. The back-up and restore
methods will vary depending on the version of Windows that is being used -
consult the Registry Editor Help menu for version-specific details of these
methods.
The dedicated Web site guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the
URLs http://registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.


Chapter 34
WINDOWS SYSTEM COMMANDS
Windows System Commands Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

System Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
System Maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
System Minimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
System Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
System Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

34 WINDOWS SYSTEM COMMANDS
Windows System Commands Overview

OVERVIEW
The following commands are used to perform Windows system management
tasks. Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu:
System Close: Closes the current application.

System Maximize: Maximizes the current application window.
System Minimize: Minimizes the current application window.
System Move: Moves the current application window.
System Restore: Restores the current application window.
System Size: Re-sizes the current application window.
SYSTEM CLOSE
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then select Close
to shut-down the current window. This is equivalent to selecting the Exit
option from the File menu.
SYSTEM MAXIMIZE
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then select
Maximize to expand the application window to the full size of the screen.

System Minimize 34
SYSTEM MINIMIZE
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then Minimize, to
shrink the application window to an icon. Select the icon to restore.
SYSTEM MOVE
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu. This displays a
four-headed arrow that can be used with the arrow keys to re-position an
application window.
i This command is unavailable if the window is enlarged to maximum size.
SYSTEM RESTORE
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then Restore to
return a fully-enlarged application window to the previous size, or enlarge a
window to full screen.

34 WINDOWS SYSTEM COMMANDS
System Size
SYSTEM SIZE
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu. This displays a
four-headed arrow that can be used with the arrow keys to change the size of
an application window.
i This command is unavailable if the window is enlarged to maximum size.

SECTION IX
SCREEN REGIONS
This section provides information on Screen Regions and Graphs.
CHAPTER 35
PanSystem and Windows Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
CHAPTER 36
PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
CHAPTER 37
Graphing Specific Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Chapter 35
PANSYSTEM AND WINDOWS SCREEN
REGIONS
PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Overview . . . 906

Application/Window Exit Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Maximize Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Minimize Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Restore Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Window Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909

35 PANSYSTEM AND WINDOWS SCREEN REGIONS
PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Overview
PANSYSTEM GENERAL WINDOWS

SCREEN REGIONS OVERVIEW
General:
The standard Windows screen region commands used within PanSystem are
listed below. Select one of the links for more specific information:
Application/Window Exit Box

Maximize Box
Minimize Box
Restore Box
Menu Bar
Scroll Bars
Title Bar
Window Border
APPLICATION/WINDOW EXIT BOX

Functionality:
This box is situated in the top right corner of most windows and dialogs. It
has the same effect as selecting System Close.

PANSYSTEM AND WINDOWS SCREEN REGIONS
Maximize Box 35
MAXIMIZE BOX
Functionality:
This is the box situated in the top right corner of most windows that are not
currently displayed full-screen. When selected, by clicking it with the mouse,
it has the same effect as selecting System Maximize.
MINIMIZE BOX
Functionality:
This box is situated in the top right of most windows, immediately to the left
of the Maximize Box or Restore Box, depending on the current screen
status. When selected, by clicking it with the mouse, it has the same effect as
selecting System Minimize and the current window will be reduced to a small
icon on the status bar.
RESTORE BOX
Functionality:
This box is situated in the top right corner of all windows that are displayed
full-screen. When selected, by clicking it with the mouse, it has the same
effect as selecting System Restore.

Menu Bar
MENU BAR
Functionality:
This is where the top level menu options are displayed for the program. For
more details on these options, refer to PanSystem Views and Ribbon
Options.
SCROLL BARS
Functionality:
The various editors within PanSystem have scroll bars. A vertical scroll bar is
made up as follows:
Line Up icon. Clicking on this icon moves the image up by a small

amount.
Page Up icon. Clicking on this space moves the image up by one page.
Position Marker. Clicking/dragging this icon moves the image to the

position that it is released at.
Page Down icon. Clicking here moves the image down by one page - a
screenful.
Line Down icon. Clicking here moves the image down by a small
amount.
i A horizontal scroll bar operates in the same way, just replace Up with Left, and
Down with Right in the above explanation.

PANSYSTEM AND WINDOWS SCREEN REGIONS
Title Bar 35
TITLE BAR
Functionality:
The Title Bar situated along the top of the main window and all sub-windows,
tells users the name/version of the PanSystem program that they are running
(i.e. main window) and the name of the currently loaded file (i.e. when a file
is loaded).
WINDOW BORDER
Functionality:
The Window Border appears on PanSystem programs when they are not
maximized. When the Window Border is active, the window can also be
moved around by clicking and dragging the Title Bar. The window can
also be re-sized by clicking and dragging at the lower right corner of the
window (the cursor will change to a double-headed diagonal arrow - expand
or reduce the window in the direction of the arrow).
Also refer to:
Sizing a Window.

Window Border

Chapter 36
PANSYSTEM-SPECIFIC SCREEN
REGIONS
PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 913

PanSystem Navigation Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Help Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
General Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Keyboard Procedures Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Commands Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Procedures Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Screen Regions Help Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
About PanSystem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Printing to Hard Copy or File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Help Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
PanSystem Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
PanSystem Plot Toolbar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Print Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Copy to Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Export to Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Edit Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Edit Hardcopy Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Data Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Select Points in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

36 PANSYSTEM-SPECIFIC SCREEN REGIONS
Zoom a box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Zoom Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Zoom Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Zoom Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Axes Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Resume Original View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Delete n Selected Points (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Undo (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Restore All Unconfirmed Data Changes (Data Edit Plot only) 941
Confirm (Data Edit Plot only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Ruler Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Status Bar Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

PANSYSTEM-SPECIFIC SCREEN REGIONS
PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions Overview 36

OVERVIEW
General:
Select one of the following links to open up a Help topic related to each item:
PanSystem Navigation Pane

Help Menu
Plot Window
PanSystem Toolbar
Ruler Bar
Status Bar Window
PANSYSTEM NAVIGATION PANE

Functionality:
The PanSystem application uses a Windows-like navigation interface. The
upper half of the Navigation pane is divided into three primary areas:
Source Explorer
Workspace
Quick Match Results

PanSystem Navigation Pane
The bottom half of the Navigation pane displays the PanSystem view
buttons. Use these buttons to switch views. Click the Configure buttons
and to configure the Navigation pane.

Select Language 36
SELECT LANGUAGE
General:
This menu allows you to display the content of the screen in the selected
language.
HELP MENU
Help Menu Overview
General:
These menu options generate the following Help information:
General Index: Displays the main Help index for PanSystem menu
options.
About PanSystem Dialog: Displays the Weatherford Copyright and

PanSystem Version information.
General Index
General:
There are several ways to access the on-line HTML Help in PanSystem:
Pressing the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or when a screen

dialog is selected (i.e. context-sensitive help).
Selecting the SHIFT and F1keys simultaneously, gives users the option to
access Help on graphic screen regions (e.g. menu bar, toolbar, plot
legend, axes, etc.). A large question mark appears beside the mouse
pointer when this is active. Place the cursor with question mark over the
item of interest then select the F1 key again; a Help topic relating to the
selected item will then be generated.

General Index
Using one of the Help options on the main PanSystem menu bar to access:
Short indexes (i.e. hyperlinks) to Help topics that relate to specific

functions within PanSystem.
Information on Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help.
Help Indexes for PanSystem Menu Items:
Select any of these links below to access an index of options and explanation
of each PanSystem menu item (view) with hyperlinks to individual Help
topics:
File Management Overview

Import/Export Data View Overview
Reports Overview
Help Indexes for PanSystem Commands:
Windows System Commands

PanSystem Toolbar
Help Indexes for Screen Regions:
PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Overview

PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions Overview
PanSystem Graphing Overview
Help Indexes for Procedures:
Printing
Windows
Managing Graphs Overview
Keyboard Procedures Overview

Keyboard Procedures Overview 36
General:
PanSystem and Windows Keys

Graphing Keys
Switching to Another Application
Commands Index
To get Help on the Commands available in the application, select one of the
following links:
PanSystem Views and Ribbon Options

PanSystem Plot Toolbar Overview
Procedures Index
To get Help on the Procedural aspects of the application, select one of the
following links:
Printing Procedures
Windows Procedures
Graphing Procedures
Screen Regions Help Index

To get Help on the Screen Regions within the application, select one of the
following links:
PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Overviews

PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions Overview

Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help

General:
The PanSystem online HTML Help system is designed to open in Microsoft's

HTML Help Viewer and is best viewed with the Window's Verdana Font (which
is included with Internet Explorer 4.x or later and is also available as a free
download from Microsoft's Web site).
The Help Viewer features a split pane window and functional menu bar
comprising:
Tabbed dialogs for search and navigation situated along the top of the
left-hand pane of the viewer; certain areas of these tabs have left and right
mouse-click operated features. This pane may be partially compressed
on opening the viewer and can be viewed fully by clicking and dragging
the pane edge to the right-hand side to uncover the remaining tabs.
Help topic dialogs contained in the right-hand pane of the viewer, with
additional left and right mouse-click operated features.
Upper menu bar containing functional buttons, left and right mouse-click
operated features.
Accessing and Using Help:
To access the context-sensitive online HTML Help within any of the

PanSystem dialog windows, either select the Help button (where available) or
the F1 key and the Help viewer will be activated.
If the Shift key is held down and F1 is pressed, the mouse cursor turns into a
query pointer:
This pointer can now be placed over the screen region on which users wish to
receive Help information, then the left mouse button can be clicked; this will
present users with a description of the screen region.

Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help 36
Where the topic text refers to dialog windows, data input parameters,
selection buttons and menu items within PanSystem, the text appears in
italics. Important notes are outlined in blue with blue text and tips are
outlined in orange with blue text for increased visibility.
Individual Help features are explained below:
Help Viewer: This can be maximized or re-sized to suit the individual

user by using the buttons situated at the top right-hand corner as
described below:
Effect: Action:
Minimize viewer
Left mouse-click on Minimize icon
Maximize viewer
Left mouse-click on Maximize icon
Restore viewer to default size

Left mouse-click on Restore icon
Close viewer
Left mouse-click on Close icon
Place the mouse pointer over the edge of any

viewer pane so it turns into a line with arrows
on each end:
to resize viewer horizontally
Manually re-size viewer
to resize vertically
Click and drag with the left mouse button

depressed - up, down, left or right. On
release, the window will be re-sized.

Left-Hand Pane and Tabs: This pane can be activated or de-activated by

selecting the Show/Hide icons respectively from the top left corner of the
upper menu bar. This pane may be partially compressed when the Help
is opened and can be widened by clicking and dragging the pane edge to
the right-hand side to uncover the remaining tabs. The following
left-hand tabs are available:
Contents: This tab displays the Help file table of contents as a list of
book icons (i.e. broad Help subject areas) and topic icons (i.e. specific
Help files).
A closed book has an adjacent (+) sign and is opened by clicking on a

book icon or the (+) sign. Conversely, an open book has an adjacent (-)
sign and is closed by either clicking on the book icon or the (-) sign.
Books contain individual topics that are opened by selecting and clicking
on the topic icon to display the textual contents in the right-hand pane of
the viewer.
Index: This tab displays a multi-level list of keywords and keyword

phrases. These terms are associated with Help topics and are
intended to direct the user to specific topics. Keywords are
cross-referenced with synonyms to provide different ways of finding
the desired information.
To locate, open and view a topic in the right-hand pane of the viewer,
type in a search word or phrase into the Index data field; the list will be
searched alphabetically and a related keyword entry will be highlighted.
If the highlighted keyword is appropriate to the search, select the Display
button at the base of the Index tab to display a range of available Help
topics for the selected keyword. A Topics Found dialog window will be
opened and an appropriate topic item can then be selected from the
displayed list.
Search: This tab allows the user to search for words and locate topics
containing these words. A full-text search scans the text in all topics
to find matches; searches are not case-sensitive. There are also
options to search previous results, match against similar words and
only search topic titles by checking one of the selection fields at the
base of this tab. When the search is completed, a list of topics is
displayed and the user can select specific topics to view.

To perform a search, type a word or phrase into the data entry
field. Phrases can be partitioned using Boolean operators (i.e. AND, OR,
NEAR, NOT) accessed from the right arrow drop-down menu. Examples
of Boolean searches are given in the table below:
Search For: Example: Results:
Both terms in the same Topics containing both the

well AND permeability
topic words well and permeability.
Topics containing either the

Either term in a topic Corey OR permeability word Corey or the word
permeability or both.
Topics containing the words

First term without the fractional flow NOT
fractional flow, but not the
second term Corey
word Corey.
Topics containing the word

Both terms in the same migration NEAR
migration within eight words of
topic, close together fractional flow
the words fractional flow.
Previous searches can also be viewed or re-selected from the down arrow
drop-down menu. Check any of the additional search parameters
required (i.e. use previous results, match similar words and/or search
titles only), then select the List Topics button to initiate search and display.
Topics are listed by Title, Location and Rank. Select and highlight the
desired title from the list and select the Display button to view a topic in
the right-hand pane of the viewer. Search keywords will be highlighted
in the text.
To find a specific word or phrase within a Help topic, the Microsoft

Internet Explorer Find on Page facility can also be used; this is invoked by
pressing the Ctrl + F keys on the keyboard, whilst the mouse cursor is
located in the topic concerned:

Favorites: This tab allows the user to store a list of favorite or most
frequently used Help topics, providing a faster method of access to these
topics. The list can be updated by adding or subtracting topics as follows:
Locate a topic using one of the methods described above and display
it in the right-hand pane of the viewer. The topic title will also be
displayed in the Current Topic data field within the left-hand pane.
Once the desired topic is displayed in the right-hand pane, add the
topic by either selecting the Add button or right-clicking in the Topics
frame of the left-hand pane, then selecting Add from the pop-up
menu; the selected topic will then appear in the favorite Topics list.
Continue this process to build up a list of favorites.
To remove any of these topics, select/highlight the topic for removal

in the Topics frame of the left-hand pane, then either select the Remove
button or right-click on the selected/highlighted topic, then select
Remove from the pop-up menu.
Additional Right Mouse-Click Functionality for this tab is described in

more detail below.
Right-Hand Pane: This pane displays the contents of a selected topic,

including text, tables and images. The user can navigate within a topic
by:
Selecting internal textual hyperlinks to a sub-topic within a main

topic (e.g. bookmarks, pop-ups).
Scrolling, where the complete contents of a topic cannot be fitted into

the viewer.

Users can also navigate between topics by:
Selecting external textual hyperlinks to other related or non-related

topics (e.g. MS PowerPoint HTML presentations, external URLs).
Utilizing left-hand pane navigational features described above to

select, locate and view other topics.
Using the upper menu bar Back and Forward buttons to move between
successive topics in a navigation sequence.
Using a browse sequence within the upper menu bar to jump

between topics in a fixed navigation sequence.
i
Topic text links are identified by italics and underlining. On a color monitor the
text link color is blue for a first-time selection; once a text-link has been used
during a Help session, the text link color will change to purple to identify
previously visited links to the user.
Upper Menu Bar Items: These encompass viewer pane, navigation and
printing functions; each are operated by left mouse-click and are
described from left to right as follows:
Show/Hide: This Show menu item is used to de-compress the left

viewer pane. Once the pane appears, the Show menu item changes to
Hide and the pane edge can be clicked and dragged to the right, to
reveal the tabbed dialog within. The pane can be re-compressed by
selecting (e.g. to maximize the area available for viewing topics).
Locate: When this button is activated, the left-hand pane of the viewer
window is refreshed as a Contents tab and the structural location of
the current topic (contained in the right-hand pane of the viewer
window) is indicated by being highlighted in dark blue. If the user is
already operating in the Contents tab, but the books are closed,
selecting the Locate button will open the book containing the current
topic and indicate the structural position as already described.

Back/Forward: Similar to a web browser, the HTML Help Viewer

includes Back and Forward buttons that allow the user to either return
to the previously viewed topic or go to the topic that was displayed
prior to going back.
Refresh: Use this button to refresh the current Help Topic pane in the
same manner as a web browser.
Print: Selection of this button opens a standard Windows Print dialog

window, where the user can define printer options and printing
formats before printing a selected Help Topic.
Weatherford Web site: Select this button to hyperlink to the

Weatherford Web site home page. It will be generated within the
Help Topic pane.
Product Support: Select this button to hyperlink to the Weatherford

Web site e-Support Center page. It will be generated within the Help
Topic pane. In addition to general support, this area contains:
Latest updates and downloads for all Weatherford products.
Knowledge Base articles (i.e. FAQ's and product-specific

information).
Latest news about Weatherford products.
This is an access-controlled area, but customers with a valid maintenance
i
contract should already have or will be issued with a Username and Password
to access the e-Support Center when they contact:
http://weatherford.com/Products/Production/ProductionOptimization/ClientSup
port/

Right Mouse-Click Functionality: Different mouse functions are available
depending on whether the user is operating in the upper menu bar and
left-hand viewer pane or the right-hand viewer pane as described below:
Upper Menu Bar and Left-Hand Viewer Pane: The following

drop-down menu items are available when right-clicking in these
two window areas:
Print: Select to open a Print Topics dialog window. The user can
choose to print the current topic or print all topics and sub-topics
contained under the currently selected heading.
Jump to URL: Select to open a Jump to URL dialog window. This

indicates the user's current website address or URL (Uniform
Resource Locator) for information currently displayed in the
right-hand viewer pane. An additional data field is available for
entering a URL address to which users may wish to navigate (e.g.
http://www.weatherford.com). Either type the URL information
in manually or paste in previously copied information by
right-clicking in the data entry field and selecting the Paste
pop-up menu option. Select OK in the sub-dialog and the
selected URL is displayed in the right-hand viewer pane.
Index, Search and Favorites tabs: The following drop-down menu items are
available under certain conditions when right-clicking in a data entry
field:
Undo: Used to revert text in a data entry field to its last state before
any editing was applied. This item is only enabled once text has been
entered during a Help session.
Cut: Used to Cut any selected text from a data entry field to the
ClipBoard. This item is only enabled if a text selection is made.
Copy: Used to Copy any selected text from a data entry field to the
ClipBoard. This item is only enabled if a text selection is made.
Paste: Used to Paste any previously copied text from the ClipBoard
into a data entry field. This item is only enabled if previously copied
text is available for Pasting.

Delete: Used to Delete any selected text from a data entry field. This
item is only enabled if a text selection is made.
Select All: Used to select/highlight all text within a data entry field
(e.g. to subsequently Copy). This item is only enabled once text has
been entered during a Help session.
Favorites tab: The following drop-down menu items are only enabled
once a list of Favorites has been created and a right-click selection is made
on one of the list entries:
Display: Select/highlight one of the entries, then select this menu item
or the Display button to display the selected Help topic in the
right-hand pane.
Add: If users navigate to a Help topic they wish to store as a Favorite

(e.g. using the Contents, Index or Search tabs), then select the Favorite
tab, this topic name will be displayed in the Current Topic field and
can be added to the Favorites list, by either right-clicking in the Topics
field and selecting this menu item or selecting the Add button.
Remove: Select/highlight one of the entries displayed in the Topics

field, then select this menu item or the Remove button to delete the
selected Help topic from the Favorites list.
Rename: Select/highlight one of the entries displayed in the Topics

field, then select this menu item to highlight the topic name and enter
a new Favorites list name for the topic.
Right-Hand Viewer Pane: The following drop-down menu items are

available when right-clicking in this window area:
Back/Forward: These items have the same functionality as the upper

menu bar items allowing the user to either return to the previously
viewed topic or go to the topic that was displayed prior to going
back.
Select All: Selects everything contained within the current Help topic.
The keyboard controls Ctrl-C can then be used to copy the selected
contents of the topic and Ctrl-V to paste them into another
application. Once a selection has been made, there is also a
right-click Copy option available as a pop-up menu option.

About PanSystem Dialog 36
View Source: Opens a Windows Notepad file containing the HTML
source code for the current Help topic.
Print: This item has the same functionality as the upper menu bar
item and selection of this button opens a standard Print dialog
window, where the user can define printer options and printing
formats before printing the current Help topic.
Refresh: Refreshes the current Help topic in the viewer window.
Properties: Opens a properties dialog window that displays the file

properties for the current Help topic.
About PanSystem Dialog

This dialog tells users about the current version of PanSystem they are
running. This information is required by Weatherford s Product Support in the
event of any problems being encountered by users of the software.
The copyright information about the current PanSystem program is displayed

here.
Printing to Hard Copy or File

General:
PanSystem has a number of options available to print the currently displayed

plot to hard copy or file, along with any additional information selected
under Page Setup from the File Management menu or under Configure
from the Reports view.
To capture the plot for use in a word processor or graphics package, use the
Copy to clipboard option from the PanSystem Toolbar (or the Windows Alt +
Print Screen keyboard command), to transfer the plot window to the
Clipboard. From here it is available for pasting into other applications.
To print a full report of results and other data, use the Print Report option
from the Reports Overview.
Users have the choice of:
Printing the plot and text to a selected printer. With this option, a printer
status dialog appears on the screen while the plot is being printed.

Context-Sensitive Help
Saving just the results content (if enabled) to an ASCII text file. A
standard Windows File Save As dialog is generated to save a file with
default extension (*.RPT).
Saving to an MS Word (*.DOC) file with graphics embedded. A standard

Windows File Save As dialog is generated to save a file with default
extension (*.DOC).
Also refer to:
File Management Menu - Print

File Management Menu - Page Setup
Reports - Print Preview
Reports - Save As Word Document
Configuration - General Configuration Dialog
General Help - Printing Overview
Context-Sensitive Help
Context-sensitive on-line Help can be accessed in PanSystem by the following
methods:
Hitting the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or when a particular

screen dialog is selected (i.e. is highlighted or has the focus).
Selecting the SHIFT and F1 keys simultaneously, gives users the option to
access Help on graphic screen regions (e.g. menu bar, toolbar, plot
legend, axes, etc.). A large question mark appears beside the mouse
pointer when this is active. Place the cursor with question mark over the
item of interest then select the F1 key again - a Help topic relating to the
selected item will then be generated.
Captions or Tool Tips are generated when users move the cursor over a
button in the Toolbar used within PanSystem. These captions help to
identify the button's function.

Help Pane 36
HELP PANE
General:
Use the Help Pane area to activate quick help. The quick help options provides
guidelines for completing a selected workflow.
Instructions:
1. Open the Analysis view, select a workflow on the Workflow ribbon, and then
hover over the Help Pane button.
Guidelines for working with the selected workflow are displayed in a pane
on the right side of the screen.
2. To close the Help Pane, click Auto Hide or click Cancel Workflow.

PanSystem Toolbar
PANSYSTEM TOOLBAR
PanSystem Plot Toolbar Overview
General:
The following tools are available on all PanSystem ribbons:
Print Graph
Copy to Clipboard
Export to Image File
Edit Display Properties
Edit Hardcopy Properties
Edit Image Copy Properties
Fonts
Data Cursor
Select Points in a Box
Zoom a box
Zoom Back
Zoom Forward

Print Graph 36
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom Axes
Axes Scroll
Resume Original View
Data Grid
Delete n Selected Points (Data Edit Plot only)
Undo (Data Edit Plot only)
Restore All Unconfirmed Data Changes (Data Edit Plot only)
Confirm (Data Edit Plot only)
Print Graph
General:
This option is used to print the currently displayed plot as a hard copy. Users
can also optionally print out model and line results if these have been selected
in the General Configuration Dialog option.
The Print option brings up a standard Windows Print dialog. Select the target
printer, set the printer Preferences, and proceed. As an alternative to direct
paper output, plots can be saved as Graphics Files - for example, in PDF
format by installing the Adobe PDF Converter in the printer list.

Print Graph
If Page Set-up Definition in the General Configuration option has been

configured to include textual output, the Print option will bring up an
intermediate dialog with a choice of sending the graphic and text to the
printer, or of saving the textual content to a text file (extension .RPT).
As an alternative, to capture the plot for use in a word processor or graphics

package, use the Copy to Clipboard option or the Windows Alt + Print Screen
command, to transfer the plot window to the ClipBoard, where it then
becomes available for pasting into other applications.
Use this dialog to print the currently displayed plot to hard copy or file, along
with any additional information selected under the Page Setup option.
The form of the Print dialog will depend on the printer selected. The main
characteristics are as follows:
Printer: Select a printer to use. The PanSystem default printer is

highlighted.
Name: Displays the name of the currently selected printer or

alternative printer or application from the drop-down menu on the
The Properties button gives the user access to a further print sub-dialog
where additional Layout and Paper/Quality properties can be specified.
For example:

graphically).

Print Graph 36
supply to the current printer. The default is Automatically Select.
An Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog

Status: Supplies information on the current printer status (i.e.

Type: Supplies technical specification of the current printer.
Where: Supplies location of the current printer.
Comment: Supplies additional system information about the current

printer.
Print Range:
All: By default, all pages will be printed.
Copies:
Number of copies: Select the number of copies required via the

drop-down menu.
If the file is sent directly to a printer, a box showing the status of the printer
appears on the screen while the plot and/or hard copy is being printed.
If the text file option is selected, a Save As dialog will be displayed with the
option to save a Report file with the default extension (*.RPT).
To print a fuller Report consisting of an input data summary, the results of

several selected plots, and other data, the Print Preview option from the
Reports Overview menu should be used.

Copy to Clipboard
Copy to Clipboard
Functionality:
This tool copies an image of the selected plot to the clipboard. The properties
of the image can be edited independently of the screen plot using the Edit
image properties tool . This is useful, for example, when the text in the
results box is too small when the image is pasted into, for example,
PowerPoint. The font size can be increased without affecting the screen image
Export to Image File

Functionality:
This is a standard Windows Save As dialog and users should refer to the
This option allows users to save any viewed image as a Bitmap (*.bmp),
Enhanced Metafile(*.emf), JPEG (*.jpg), and PNG (*.png) file format.
Edit Display Properties

Functionality:
This icon brings up the run-time property editor for the screen plots. Here
you can make changes to the screen display attributes (colors, fonts,
trace/marker, titles, etc.). These changes have no effect on the attributes for
the image copy or hardcopy plots, which are defined independently.
The properties thus defined will be applied to all screen plots, and will be
permanent until changed again.

Edit Hardcopy Properties 36
The attributes are stored in a file PanDisplayProp.dat in
c:\ProgramData\Weatherford\PanSystem. If you have access to this folder, it
is a good idea to make a copy of this file, and the two others for image and
hard copy attributes, as they will be overwritten when a new version of
PanSystem is installed.
Edit Hardcopy Properties

Functionality:
This icon brings up the run-time property editor for the hardcopy sent to the
printer with the Print Graph tool . Here you can make changes to the
attributes (colors, fonts, trace/marker, titles, etc) of the printed plot. These
changes have no effect on the screen plot.
The hardcopy properties thus defined will be applied to all plots, and will be
Edit Image Copy Properties

Functionality:
This icon brings up the run-time property editor for the image that is copied
to the Clipboard with the Copy to Clipboard tool . Here you can make
changes to the attributes (colors, fonts, trace/marker, titles, etc) of the plot
images. These changes have no effect on the screen plot.
The image properties thus defined will be applied to all plot images, and will
be permanent until changed again.

Fonts
Fonts
This icon brings up a dialog which gives you access to the font settings (size,
type, style) for all aspects of the screen plot plot title, axis titles and labels,
results, legend, etc. To change the color of a font, use the Edit Display
Properties tool .
The properties thus defined will be applied to all screen plots, and will be
These settings have no effect on the font attributes for the image copy or
hardcopy plots, which are defined independently.
Data Cursor
Functionality:
The Data Cursor button provides a cross-hair on the selected plot, and
displays the x- and (left hand axis) y- coordinates of the cross's position. Drag
the cross-hair with the mouse to read the (x, y) coordinates on any part of the
plot.
Select Points in a Box

Functionality:
This button on the plot toolbar allows you to select points in a particular
region of a selected plot by drawing a box with the cursor.
Click the Select points in a box icon and draw a box with the cursor. All the data
points within the box will be selected.

Zoom a box 36
The tool is disabled automatically after the zoom. If you press the Ctrl key
when you click on the icon, it will remain enabled for multiple selections.
Then click on the icon again (or on a different icon) to disable it.
To deselect points, press the Esc key. All of the selected points will be
deselected.
Zoom a box
Functionality:
This button allows you to zoom into a particular region of a selected plot by
drawing a box with the cursor.
Click the Zoom a box icon and draw a box with the cursor.
The tool is disabled automatically after the zoom. If you press the Ctrl key
when you click on the icon, it will remain enabled for multiple selections.
Then click on the icon again (or on a different icon) to disable it.
To unzoom completely, use the Resume original view tool, .
After multiple zooms, to step back one zoom at a time, use the Zoom back tool,
.
You can step forward again with the Zoom forward tool, .
Zoom Back
Functionality:
Use this tool to unzoom one step at a time through a sequence of zooms that
you have just made.

Zoom Forward
Zoom Forward
Functionality:
Use this tool to zoom in again, one step at a time, through a sequence of
zooms that you have just (partially) unzoomed with the Zoom Back tool , .
Zoom In
Functionality:
The Zoom in tool on the plot toolbar will zoom the plot by a small step (about
10%) with each click in the plot area. Use the Axis scroll tool to keep the
plot region of interest centered.
You can zoom out in small steps using the Zoom out tool, .
To unzoom completely, use the Resume original view tool. .
Zoom Out
Functionality:
The Zoom out tool on the plot toolbar will zoom the plot out by a small step
(about 10%) with each click in the plot area.
You can zoom in small steps using the Zoom in tool, .

Zoom Axes 36
Zoom Axes
Functionality:
The x- or y-axis of the selected plot can be expanded or compressed

independently by clicking this icon and swiping the mouse along the outside
of the axis.
Axes Scroll
Functionality:
When the Axes Scroll button is active, the user can drag the plot view around
by swiping with the with the mouse outside the axes. This is useful if you
have zoomed in and wish to get to another part of the plot while still zoomed.
You can reset the scales using the Resume Original View button, .
Resume Original View

Functionality:
The Resume Original View button will unzoom the plot, back to its original axis
scaling prior to zooming. If you have reset the scaling by applying fixed
minimum and maximum values, then it will unzoom to those settings.

Data Grid
Data Grid
Functionality:
Displays numerical values of plotted data as a table, with an option to copy

some or all to the Clipboard.
Delete n Selected Points (Data Edit Plot only)

Functionality:
This icon is only available on the toolbar of the Data Edit Plot. Use Delete to
remove points selected with the mouse and/or the Select Points in a Box tool,
. This function can also be performed using the Del key.
The Delete function erases all measured data associated with a deleted point
(e.g., if you delete a Pressure point, the Flow Rate, Temperature and any other
Gauge reading at the same Clock Time will also be deleted).
Use the Confirm tool to confirm your deletions and remove the data
permanently.
You can restore deleted data using the Undo or Restore all unconfirmed data
changes tools, as long as you have not just used Confirm. Undo, , will
restore the previous deletion, then the one before that, and so on if you have
made several deletions in sequence, back as far as the last time you used
Confirm. Restore all, , will restore, in one attempt, all deletions made
since the last time you used Confirm.

Undo (Data Edit Plot only) 36
Undo (Data Edit Plot only)
Functionality:
Undo will restore the previous deletion, then the one before that, and so on if
you have made several deletions in sequence, one step at a time back as far as
the last time you used Confirm.
It can also be used to restore data removed by any the Data Reduction options
(Processing tab), except for Outlier Removal and Wavelet reduction.
The last data Shift (Processing tab) also will be undone. You can lock in a Shift
with the Confirm button if you do not wish it to be undone when the Undo
button is used subsequently to restore reduced or deleted data.
To recover data removed in all Deletions or Data Reductions back as far as the
last Confirm, use the Restore All Unconfirmed Data Changes button option.
Restore All Unconfirmed Data Changes does not operate on shifted data.
Restore All Unconfirmed Data Changes (Data Edit

Plot only)
Functionality:
Use Restore all unconfirmed data changes to restore, in one step, all Data
Deletions and Reductions, back as far as the last time you used Confirm.
Confirm (Data Edit Plot only)

Functionality:

Ruler Bar
The Confirm icon on the Data Edit Plot toolbar will lock in all deletions and
data reductions that you have made since the last time you used Confirm. The
Undo and Restore all unconfirmed data changes tools will then be unable to
retrieve the deleted data. Likewise, any data Shift will no longer be Undo-able
and will become permanent.
Note that in the case of Data Reduction, the reduced data is written to a new
dataset with prefix RDx, thereby preserving a copy of the unreduced dataset
should it be necessary to return to the original data.
Confirming deletions and reductions will clear the selected data points from
program memory, resulting in a noticeable speed-up of subsequent
operations with large datasets.
An automatic Confirm will be performed on going into the Analysis section of

the program, if the user has not confirmed the deletions, reductions or shift
while on the Data Edit plot.
RULER BAR
Functionality:
The Ruler Bar is situated between the Toolbar and above the Plot Window.
It has a slightly different appearance depending on whether users are in the
Data Preparation or Analysis plotting mode:
Data Preparation Plots:
In this mode, the Ruler Bar is used to select Rate Changes and Test Period
Classification and to edit Rate Changes. The Flow Periods are also displayed.
These are briefly described below:
Rate Changes: Where a Flow Rate Change occurs (lower part of Ruler Bar).
Flow Periods: The Periods between Flow Rate Changes (lower part of Ruler
Bar).
Test Periods: The Periods to be analyzed. These are the same as the Flow
Periods, unless any contiguous Flow Periods have been grouped into a
single Test Period (upper part of Ruler Bar).

Ruler Bar 36
Users can perform the following actions on the Ruler Bar:
Select a Rate Change for editing, by clicking the right mouse button or
holding down the Ctrl key whilst clicking with the left mouse button on
the Rate Change Marker arrow. This generates the Rate Change dialog and
users can then edit the co-ordinates of the Rate Change, or delete it.
Move a Rate Change time by clicking on the marker and dragging it along
the Ruler Bar. If users keep the cursor on the Ruler Bar it will only change
the time.
Change the pressure associated with a Rate Change by clicking the marker
and whilst keeping the left button depressed, dragging the cursor down
the vertical dashed line to the desired (Pressure) position. Users can also
change the time by moving sideways.
Select a single Test Period for Data Reduction, Smoothing or Number Count.
Click in the top half of the bar to highlight it.
Select several contiguous Test Periods for Grouping. Hold down the Shift
key whilst dragging the cursor across the Periods to be grouped, in the
upper half of the Ruler Bar. On releasing the mouse button, the selected
periods will be grouped into a single Test Period. To revert back to the
individual Test Periods, simply hold down the Shift key and apply a left
mouse-click (left or right) to the upper part of the Ruler Bar.
Select all the Test Periods for Grouping. Hold down the Ctrl key and
right-click in the upper part of the ruler bar. This will group all of the Test
Periods into a single period. (Note that if the very last period is a buildup,
it will be excluded from the grouping.) To revert back to the individual
Test Periods, hold down the Ctrl key and right-click again in the upper part
of the Ruler Bar.
Select a Test Period for Test Type Classification. Double-click on the Test
Period to generate a Test Period Classification dialog, which allows the
Test Period to be classified. The default classification is Normal, but users
can also select Interference or Slug Test types.

Ruler Bar
Analysis Plots:
The Ruler Bar does not have a lower part in this mode.
Test Overview Plot: Test Period Classification can still be selected for
analysis by left-clicking in the ruler bar. Multiple test periods can be selected
by holding down the Ctrl key and left-clicking. They do not have to be
contiguous. Test periods can be grouped into single periods, and ungrouped,
as described in the previous section for the Data Edit plot. Once Test Periods
have been selected, the various diagnostic plots can be accessed.
Diagnostic plots: In Analysis, the Ruler Bar is also used to display Flow Regimes
and Time Markers.
The Flow Regime button from the Tools Overview ribbon is an optional
facility which allows users to identify and Mark the Flow Regimes on a
diagnostic plot, based on an inspection of the data. This would normally be
performed using the Log-Log Plot derivatives, but the facility is available
on all of the diagnostic plots. The types of Flow Regimes available will vary in
accordance with the Reservoir Flow and Boundary Models that have been
selected.
Users can perform the following actions on the Ruler Bar:
Move a Flow Regime by clicking on either end of the Flow Regime and
dragging.
i Note that the program will stop users from overlapping Flow Regimes.
Select a Flow Regime by clicking once between the two ends of the Flow
Regime (i.e. colored bar). The Flow Regime will become cross-hatched on
the Ruler Bar once it is selected. If the Best Fit Line button is used from
the Tools Overview and the selected Flow Regime has a valid line
associated with it, a line will be drawn through all the data bounded by
the selected Flow Regime.
Edit the Flow Regime by double-clicking between the two ends of the Flow
Regime. An Flow Regime dialog is generated that will allow users to
delete the Flow Regime.

Plot Window 36
If the Reservoir Model is Vertical Fracture:Finite Conductivity and the
Bilinear Flow Plot is displayed, the Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog
button from the Analysis Tools ribbon can be used to Mark the point at
which the data leaves the straight line (i.e. Bilinear Flow) trend. This Time
Marker can be subsequently edited on the Ruler Bar by double-clicking on
the T mark. An Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog dialog is generated that
will allow users to delete the Time Marker.
i
Note that it is not possible to Edit Data or Test Periods on the Test Overview
Plot. Users must return to the Data Preparation view to do this as described
above.
PLOT WINDOW
Functionality:
This main screen provides a graphical display of the data for editing or
analyzing.
The example below was generated by opening an existing (*.PAN) file, then
selecting the plot option from the Analysis view. The data can be viewed on
different types of Time axis to distinguish different Flow Regimes (e.g.
Logarithmic Time axis for Radial Flow, or a Square Root Time axis for Linear
Flow).
Users can also choose from a selection of Time Functions to allow for
Superposition effects. The range of the axes can also be modified to adjust the
horizontal and vertical scaling of the plot.

Plot Window
For more information on specific plots, refer to:
Data Edit Plot Overview - (Data Preparation view, Gauge Data (TPR) ribbon)
PVT Match Plot - (Data Preparation view, Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description
(Analytical) ribbon)
PanMesh Data Preparation Overview - (Data Preparation view, Well,

Reservoir & Fluid Description (Numerical) ribbon)
Test Overview Plot - (Analysis view)
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview - (Deliverability view)
Also refer to Plot Annotation

Status Bar Window 36
STATUS BAR WINDOW

Functionality:
This window is situated at the base of the Plot Window and displays:
The currently selected Unit System.
The name of the current Workflow, if one has been selected.
The co-ordinates of the current cursor position in terms of the plot axes.
The radius of investigation corresponding to the cursor position on an

Analysis plot if the permeability has been confirmed.

Status Bar Window

Chapter 37
GRAPHING SPECIFIC SCREEN
REGIONS
PanSystem Graphing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Graphs/Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Graphing Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Graphing Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Graphing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Graphing X-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Graphing Y-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Graphing R-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Graphing T-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

37 GRAPHING SPECIFIC SCREEN REGIONS
PANSYSTEM GRAPHING OVERVIEW

General:
Graphs/Plots
Graphing Title
Graphing Legend
Graphing Results
Graphing X-Axis
Graphing Y-Axis
Graphing R-Axis
Graphing T-Axis
GRAPHS/PLOTS
General:
This refers to the part of the Graph/Plot showing the data (also refer to Plot
Window). There are various options available for users to specify how
Graphs/Plots appear on the screen for both screen viewing and printing:
Datasets option from the Edit menu.

Graphs option from the Configure menu.
GRAPHING TITLE
General:
This part of the graph displays the Title of the graph or plot (i.e. situated at the
top of the graph or plot). Double left-click on the Title text to generate the
Title Change dialog. In this dialog users can alter the Title text.

GRAPHING SPECIFIC SCREEN REGIONS
Graphing Legend 37
GRAPHING LEGEND
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the Legend. This lists the symbols used
for plotting each Dataset so users can identify them more easily. This is
particularly useful in the Data Preparation Data Edit Plot and in many of the
Analysis Plots when displaying more than one Test Period Classification.
Double-click on the Legend to generate the Edit Legend dialog. In this dialog
users can:
Edit the color of the Legend box.
Switch-off the Legend box.
Click and drag the Legend box with the mouse cursor to move it to another
location.
GRAPHING RESULTS
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the Results of any interpretation. This
is only used on the Analysis Plots. It will also display any line Results relating
to the plot. If Quick Match Dialog data is displayed, the Results box will
display the Quick Match Results.

Graphing X-Axis
On the Type-Curves Plot the Results box will always display the Type-Curve
Results plus any model parameters not already calculated by the Select
Type-Curve Match facility. Double-click on the Results box to generate the
Edit Results dialog. In this dialog users can:
Edit the color of the Results box.
Switch-off the Results box.
Show/hide Match traces.
Delete/keep Quick Match traces.
Click and drag the Results box with the mouse cursor to move it to another
location.
GRAPHING X-AXIS
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the X-axis of the graph (i.e. bottom
axis). Double-click on this area to edit the axis or use the Edit/Axes menu.
An Edit X-Axis dialog is generated where users can alter:
Minimum and maximum values of the axis scale.
Label text and color.
Time format (Data Edit Plot and Test Overview only).
Optional date display (Data Edit Plot and Test Overview only).

GRAPHING SPECIFIC SCREEN REGIONS
Graphing Y-Axis 37
Number of divisions (i.e. spacing between grid lines); not enabled for Log
scaling.
Scale setting (locked or unlocked).
Whether the grid, scales, label and ticks are displayed or not.
If the axis is logarithmic, whether the values are displayed in logarithmic

or linear space.
GRAPHING Y-AXIS
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the Y-axis of the graph (i.e. left-hand
side of graph/plot). Double-click on this area to edit the axis, or use the
Edit/Axes menu. An Edit Y-Axis dialog is generated where users can alter:
Number of divisions (i.e. spacing between grid lines); not enabled for Log
scaling.
If the axis is logarithmic, whether the values are displayed in logarithmic

or linear space.

Graphing R-Axis
GRAPHING R-AXIS
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the R-axis of the graph (i.e. right-hand
side of graph/plot). Double-click on this area to edit the axis. An Edit R-Axis
dialog is generated where users can alter:

Number of divisions (i.e. spacing between grid lines or tick marks).
Whether the scales, label or ticks are displayed or not.
GRAPHING T-AXIS
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the T-axis of the graph (i.e. top of
graph/plot). Double-click on this area to edit the axis. An Edit T-Axis dialog
is generated where users can alter:


SECTION X
PRINTING, WINDOWS, AND GRAPH

MANAGEMENT
This section provides information about how to Manage Printing, Windows,

and Graphs in the PanSystem application.
CHAPTER 38
Managing Print and Windows ..................................... 957
CHAPTER 39
Managing Graphs ...................................................... 963
Chapter 38
MANAGING PRINT AND WINDOWS
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Printing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Printing the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Setting Up The Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Manipulating Windows Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Closing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Maximizing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Minimizing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Moving a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Restoring a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Sizing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

38 MANAGING PRINT AND WINDOWS
Printing
PRINTING
Printing Overview
General:
Printing the Screen

Setting Up The Page Layout
Printing the Screen

Instructions:
To print the currently displayed screen (i.e. graph, plot, etc.):
1. Choose the Print option from the File Management menu.

2. Select the number of copies required.
3. Choose OK.
4. If line or model results have been selected for printing in Setting Up The
Page Layout, a further Print Preview dialog is generated where users can
choose whether to print to a Printer or to a File.
Setting Up The Page Layout

Instructions:
To set up the page layout:
1. From the File Management menu choose Page Setup, and then click OK.
2. From the Configuration view, select General Configuration, and then select
the contents of the print-out from the Page Setup Definition area. This may
include the Plot, Quick Match, Model Results, Line Results and
Header/Footer.
3. Click OK.
4. To enter the text for the header and footer, select the Configure Report option
from the Reports view, and then select the Edit Layout button in the Sections
area of the Configure Report dialog.
5. Click OK.

Windows 38
WINDOWS
Manipulating Windows Overview
General:
Closing a Window
Maximizing a Window
Minimizing a Window
Moving a Window
Restoring a Window
Sizing a Window
Closing a Window
Instructions:
Four different methods can be employed to close a PanSystem window:
1. Select the Application/Window Exit Box at the top right of the window.
2. Select Close from the application control menu.
3. Select File Exit PanSystem from the PanSystem menu bar.
4. Select Alt+F4 on the keyboard.
If any data has been altered within PanSystem, when users try to close the
program, they will be prompted to save the data.
Maximizing a Window
Instructions:
To maximize a PanSystem window use one of two methods:
1. Choose Maximize from the application control menu.

2. Click the Maximize Box with the mouse.

Minimizing a Window
Minimizing a Window
Instructions:
To minimize a PanSystem window use one of two methods:
1. Choose Minimize from the application control menu.

2. Click the Minimize Box with the mouse.
Moving a Window
Instructions:
To move a PanSystem window use one of these methods described below:
Choose Move from the application control menu.
Use the arrow keys to move the window to the desired location.
Select the Enter key when the window is positioned in the required
position. To abort the move, select the Esc key instead of the Enter
key.
Click and drag the Title Bar with the mouse. To abort the move, press
Esc before you release the mouse button. Note that this method will not
work on windows that are full-screen.
Restoring a Window
Instructions:
To restore a PanSystem window use one of these two methods:
1. Choose Restore from the application control menu.

2. Click the Restore Box with the mouse.
Sizing a Window
Instructions:
To size a PanSystem window use one of these two methods:
1. Choose Size from the application control menu.
Select an arrow key to select the window side to be sized.

Sizing a Window 38
Use the arrow keys to size the window to what is required.
Select Enter when the window is at the size required. To abort the sizing
operation, select the Esc key instead of the Enter key.
2. Click and drag the Window Border with the mouse. To abort the sizing
operation, select the Esc key before releasing the mouse button.

Sizing a Window

Chapter 39
MANAGING GRAPHS
Managing Graphs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Removing the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Altering the Appearance of the Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Altering the Appearance of the Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Altering the Appearance of the Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Plot Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Zooming In and Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

39 MANAGING GRAPHS
Managing Graphs Overview
MANAGING GRAPHS OVERVIEW

General:
Adding and Removing the Legend

Removing the Title
Altering the Appearance of the Axes
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset
Altering the Appearance of the Legend
Altering the Appearance of the Title
Plot Annotation
Zooming In and Out
Adding and Removing the Legend

Instructions:
To add the Legend to a graph or plot:
1. Select the Legend option from the Edit menu.

2. Check the Show Legend check box.
3. Select a specific color if required.
4. Select OK.
To remove the Legend from a graph or plot:
1. Select the Legend option from the Edit menu or, double-click on the Legend
itself.
2. Uncheck the Show Legend check box.
3. Select OK.
Removing the Title

Instructions:
To remove the Title from a graph or plot:
1. Double-click the Title.

2. Highlight the text, and then press Delete.
3. Click OK.

MANAGING GRAPHS
Altering the Appearance of the Axes 39
Altering the Appearance of the Axes
Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Axes:
1. 1. To change the font color for an axis, click , Edit Display Properties.
2. To change the values for an axis, double-click the X-Axis, Y-Axis, R-Axis or
T-Axis.
The Axis Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. To hide/show an axis label, right-click the plot, select Hide/Show axis labels.
and select the appropriate label.
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset

Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Dataset:
1. To change the appearance of the dataset, click , Edit Display Properties.

2. Select the specific dataset to be altered in the Dataset Style drop-down menu.
3. Select whether the dataset will be displayed as Lines, Points or Hidden (e.g. to
temporarily hide the dataset).
4. If Points are selected, select the Point Style, Symbol Weight and Color.
5. If Lines are selected, select the Line Thickness, Style, Symbol Weight and Color.
Altering the Appearance of the Legend

Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Legend:
1. To alter the color used for the Legend, in the toolbar click , Edit Display
Properties.
2. To alter the font used for the Legend, click , Fonts.

39 MANAGING GRAPHS

Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Title:
1. Right-click on the Title, and then choose Properties or click , Edit display
Properties.
2. Select a color for the Title from the Color pop-up dialog.
3. Select OK.
See also:
Removing the Title
Changing the Title
Changing the Title

General:
The title appears at the top of the plot screen.
Use the Title Change dialog to alter the title text.
1. Double-click the Title.

2. Highlight the text, and then type a new title in the Title text box.
3. Click OK.
See also:
Removing the Title
Plot Annotation
Instructions:
The annotation is unique to the plot in which it is inserted (e.g. plot

annotation applied to the Semi-Log Plot will not appear on the Log-Log Plot -
use the View > Mark Points option for this. For more information, see View
Ribbon Overview.).

MANAGING GRAPHS
Plot Annotation 39
Right-click the mouse button on the plot, and then select Annotation > New.
The annotation dialog has several entry fields. Hover the mouse over each
for details.
The default settings will place black text, as typed into the Text box, centered
on the point where you right-clicked. The coordinates of the central point are
shown at upper right in terms of the axis values.
You can reposition the text on the plot by dragging it with the mouse.
To edit or remove an existing annotation, double-click on the text to re-open

the dialog, and change or delete the text in the Text box. On OK, the changes
will be enacted.
Options are available on the dialog to:
Annotation type:
Text: Text in a box (box size specified as a % of the axis width and height)
Reference to:
Channel (default): Text position is tied to the specified axis values of the
data selected in Channel name.
Data view: Text position is defined as a percentage of the axis width and
height. Thus X1=50% and Y1=50% will place the text in the middle of the
plot, regardless of the actual scale values (e.g., zoom, etc).
Channel name: the data whose axis values will be used to specify the
position of the annotation if referenced to Channel.
Edit:
Change the color, font style and size, etc.
Text:
Type in your annotation.

39 MANAGING GRAPHS
Zooming In and Out
Zooming In and Out

Instructions:
To Zoom In on a region of the graph or plot:
1. Select the region to Zoom In on by clicking and dragging a box around the
area of interest with the mouse cursor. On releasing the mouse a rectangular
box is displayed to delineate the selected area.
2. Select the , Zoom In button from the toolbar.
To Zoom Out and return to the normal (i.e. default) size on the graph or plot:
1. Select the , Zoom Out button from the toolbar.

SECTION XI
KEYBOARD PROCEDURES
This section provides information on Keyboard Shortcuts and alternatives to

Mouse-Operated Commands in the PanSystem application.
CHAPTER 40
Keyboard Procedures ................................................. 971
Chapter 40
KEYBOARD PROCEDURES
Keyboard Procedures Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

PanSystem and Windows Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Graphing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Switching to Another Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

40 KEYBOARD PROCEDURES
KEYBOARD PROCEDURES OVERVIEW

General:

Graphing Keys

The following keyboard commands can be used instead of (or in addition to)
mouse operated commands:
The Alt key is used to activate the main PanSystem Views and Ribbon
Options menu. Each menu item is assigned an underlined first letter
that is used to select that particular menu item. When the Alt key is
initially selected, the File Management menu item has the focus (i.e. the
menu item is "active").
The Alt+F4 keys are used to close PanSystem in a similar manner to the
Exit PanSystem command from the File menu or Close command from
the System menu. A Confirm prompt is issued to users asking if they wish
to save their current data. On accepting the prompt, PanSystem will be
closed down.
The Alt+Space keys are used to activate the Windows System Menu which
can be used to perform simple windows-related tasks (e.g. minimize,
maximize, size, etc.).
The Ctrl+Escape keys are used to switch to another application. A

Windows task bar is generated to allow users to select another program
or file to switch to (e.g. Excel, Word document, etc.). Refer also to
Windows system Switch To.
The F1 key can be used in any screen dialog to display the

Context-Sensitive Help for that dialog.

KEYBOARD PROCEDURES
Graphing Keys 40
Graphing Keys
The following keyboard commands can be used instead of (or in addi-
tion to) mouse operated commands for the Ruler Bar and Graphing
area:
Ruler Bar (Data Preparation):
Select the Ctrl key and click on the arrow to edit the values associated
with the Rate Change.
Click and drag the arrow icon along the Ruler Bar to graphically edit
the time.
Click and drag the arrow icon along the Ruler Bar to graphically edit
the time of the Rate Change.
Click and drag the arrow icon across the graph area to graphically edit
the time and pressure of the Rate Change.
Select the Shift key and drag across the top half of the Ruler Bar to
select one or more Test Periods together. Upon releasing the mouse button,
they will be grouped into a single test period. To ungroup, either click in
the grouped period and select the Ungroup Flow Periods button, or
Shift+left-click.
Double click on the top half of the Ruler Bar to edit the Test Period.
Ruler Bar (Analysis):
Using the Ruler Bar on the Test Overview Plot, consecutive Flow
Periods can be grouped into a single Test Period by holding down the Shift
key, then holding down the left mouse button and dragging the cursor
over each successive Test Period (e.g. for a Flow-After-Flow (FAF) Test). The
grouped Flow Periods will then be treated as a single test in Analysis. The
individual markers will be replaced by start and end markers. To revert
back to the individual Test Periods, simply hold down the Shift key and
apply a mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.

Flowing and/or Shut-In Periods can then be analyzed together as
individual tests overlain.

Graphing Keys
Click and drag the ends of Flow Regime to move them.
Click in the Flow Regime area to select a Flow Regime. This will allow
users to fit a line through the data bounded by the Flow Regime using the
Best Fit Line button.
Double click in the Flow Regime area to edit the Flow Regime.
Double click on the Add Time Mark Facility/Dialog, to edit the Time
Mark.
Graph area:
Click on or near a point to select it.
Click and drag to draw a zoom box (refer also to Zooming In and Out).
Select the Ctrl key and click on or near a line to select it.
If users are in Match mode in Select Type-Curve Match, click and drag
to move the Type-Curves. Alternatively, use the arrow keys to move the
Type-Curves. If users select the Ctrl key while using the arrow keys this
will allow smaller movements for fine-tuning the fit.
If users are in Select Shift Stream Dialog mode in Data Preparation then
click and drag to apply the shift. If a zoom box has been marked then
click and drag within the zoom box area.
Click and drag over the Graphing Legend or Graphing Results area
to move them.
Double-click over the Graphing Legend or Graphing Results area to

edit them.
Double-click on the Graphing X-Axis, Graphing Y-Axis, Graphing

R-Axis, Graphing T-Axis, or Graphing Title areas to edit them.

KEYBOARD PROCEDURES
Switching to Another Application 40
Instructions:
To switch to another application, you can use one of five methods:
1. Select a new application with the Start command in Windows (i.e. situated in
the bottom left-hand corner of the screen).
2. Choose another active application, by clicking on the application icon within
the status bar (i.e. situated along the lower part of the screen).
3. Press Ctrl+Esc on the keyboard to activate the Windows Start menu.
4. Press Alt+Tab on the keyboard to switch to the previous application used.
5. Press Alt+Esc on the keyboard to switch to the previous application used.
i
Methods 1, 2 and 3 take users through the Windows interface where they can
select the application to switch to directly or indirectly. Methods 4 and 5 take
users directly to the previous application used.


SECTION XII
APPENDIXES
This section provides additional information about the PanSystem

application.
APPENDIX A
PanSystem Glossary .................................................. 979
APPENDIX B
PanSystem Technical Information .............................. 987
APPENDIX C
PanSystem Technical References ............................. 1205
APPENDIX D
Supplementary Documentation ................................ 1215
Appendix A
PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
This appendix contains the following topic:
Definition of PanSystem Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Definition of PanSystem Terms A
DEFINITION OF PANSYSTEM TERMS

Data Preparation: Gauge Data Preparation consists of several steps:
Importing columns of data from raw Gauge Data file/s into PanSystem.
Quality-control of the raw data (e.g. visual inspection, comparison of

Gauges, differencing, etc.).
Selecting the Gauge Data file/s or data column/s to be analyzed.
Editing of Gauge Data (e.g. with shifts, copy and paste, data
reduction/smoothing, etc.).
Exporting of edited columns of Gauge Data to a new Gauge Data file.
Identifying and entering flow Rate Changes within the test.
Averaging long-term Production Rate or Cumulative Data.
Applying Tidal Corrections.
Converting THP to BHP.
The raw Gauge Data files are ASCII files which contain the Time (T), Pressure
(P) and optionally Rate (R) data used in Analysis. The files may contain other
data, but only the T/P/R data are used in Analysis. Users can import other
columns of data for editing, plotting and inclusion in Reports. The Time and
Rate Data can be Imported for incorporation into the Test Rate Schedule.
The Well and Reservoir Description can either be initialized via the Well,
Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog for Analysis, Simulation, etc. in
PanSystem or the PanMesh Data Preparation Overview for PanMesh
Ribbon Overview.

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Analysis: There are two principal methods of Analysis:
Line Fitting to specialised diagnostic plots.

Curve Matching using Type-Curves supplied with the program or
curves generated on-screen, or by simulation using Quick Match
Dialog.
From these two methods Flow Regimes can be identified and the various Well
and Reservoir parameters derived. During Analysis, results from any
particular plot can, if desired, be transferred to the Reservoir Description (i.e.
Model Parameters) set using the Confirm (Data Edit Plot only) option. In
this way, the Reservoir Description can be built up and continually updated as
the Analysis proceeds. Up to six different Interpretation Models can be stored
in a single (*.PAN) file. The latest status of every plot invoked (i.e. lines fitted,
results, Flow Regimes, etc.) is written to the (*.PAN) file by the Save or Save
As options. Subsequent recall of the file will reinstate all plots so that the
Analysis can be resumed from where it was left off. If users have more than
one Pressure and/or Flow Rate channel to choose from (e.g. two Pressure Gauges
were run), they can change their selection at any time by returning to Master
Data File ribbon and selecting a different Column Name in the Master
File/Columns section.
Quick Match Simulation: This is an on-screen, Single-Well, Single-Layer

Pressure Response generation to validate the Model and Parameters derived
from Analysis View Overview. When users select OK/Confirm, the
generated data for Quick Match Dialog are written to Model
Parameters.
Auto Match Simulation: This is Parameter Optimization by non-linear

regression to obtain the Parameter Set that best Matches the plotted test
data (i.e. Pressure or Derivative).
Advanced Simulation: This is Pressure Response Generation with more

advanced features than are available in Quick Match Dialog (e.g.
Multiple Wells, Multiple Layers, etc.). The Advanced simulated data are
written to file.

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Numerical Simulation: The Well and Reservoir Description is initialized
via the PanMesh Data Preparation Overview option from the
PanSystem Data Preparation View Overview view. The actual Numerical
Simulation is performed within PanMesh Ribbon Overview; this is
accessed via the Numerical sub-menu option from the PanSystem
Simulation View Overview view. The PanSystem Well and Reservoir
Description (Numerical) Mode introduces:
3-D Reservoir Geometry, Internal Boundaries (up to 100 Nodes).
Material and Fluid Properties per Region/Layer (up to 99 Regions per

Layer).
No limit to the number of Layers.
Description of Well Completion (Deviation, Azimuth, up to six Open

Intervals), for a single Well.
Deliverability: PanSystem provides the following two methods for

calculating the Deliverability/Injectivity of a Reservoir:
Fitting to measured Test Point Data.
Semi-theoretical derivation using the Semi-Steady-State inflow

equation.
Using the fitting to measured Test Point Data method for Oil and Water Fluid
Types involves the program fitting the Vgel IPR relation to up to three
measured flowing/injection Pressures and Rates. For Gas and Condensate Fluid
Types, the Deliverability curve is computed either using the Darcy (B) and
Non-Darcy (F) Flow Coefficients estimated by an LIT Plot of measured
flowing/injection Pressures and Rates, or using the C-coefficient and n-exponent
obtained from a simplified C&n Plotof measured data.
For semi-theoretical derivation using results from Transient Well Test Analysis
(k, S) and Extended Drawdown Analysis (A, CA), for Oil and Water Fluid Types,
the Productivity Index (J) is calculated from the semi-steady-state inflow
equation, and the Vgel IPR relation applied. For Gas and Condensate Fluid
Types using the LIT Method, the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), is calculated from
the semi-steady-state inflow equation and the Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F),
is derived from a Rate versus Skin analysis of Transient Well Test Data to allow
the Deliverability curve to be calculated. For the C&n Method the stabilized
deliverability is estimated from a theoretical stabilized Flow Rate, derived
from the C-coefficient and n-exponent.

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Production Forecasting: For Oil, a semi-theoretical approach is used.
For Gas, a theoretical approach is used (e.g. LIT and C&n). This predicts
Flow Rate versus Time for the current Reservoir Model (i.e. Infinite,
Semi-Infinite or Closed System), assuming constant Bottom-Hole Flowing
Pressure (BHFP), or constant Wellhead Pressure (in which case, an
Eclipse-compatible VFP File must be Imported to model the Tubing
Performance).
File: The data used by the program is stored in a number of files. Every
file must have a name which will allow the operating system to refer to it.
There are different types of file, each storing different types of
information.
PanSystem uses the following types of files (default extensions in

brackets):
Gauge Data files (*.TPR)

System files (*.PAN or *.PAX for pre-PanSystem V-2.4)
Tide Table files (*.SEA)
Report files (*.RPT)
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure files (*. PSP)
Pressure-Z-Viscosity file (*.PIC)
i The file extensions (*.TPR, *.PAN, etc.), are default file extensions used in
PanSystem. Users may assign their own extensions if desired.
Well: Up to five Wells can be defined in PanSystem (Analytical). Select

and define in the Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog dialog.
Each Well can have up to 20 independent data files stored with it (e.g. 20
separate tests, or 20 sets of Gauge Data on the same test), and each can be
plotted, edited and Analyzed.
A single Well can be defined in PanSystem (Numerical), with a description

of the Well Completion (i.e. Deviation, Azimuth and up to six Open Intervals).
This can be defined via the PanMesh Data Preparation Overview
dialog.

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Data Files: The Time, Pressure, Rate (i.e. TPR) and any other Gauge Data
held internally by PanSystem under a file name. Up to 20 files can be held
at any time for each Well. There can be up to 100 Columns (= channels) in
each file, and there may be more than one Pressure and Rate Column. All
data files are saved for all Wells to the PanSystem data file. The Gauge Data
can be edited via the Gauge Data option on the Data Preparation View
Overview ribbon.
Master Data File: The data file selected for Analysis. The selected Master
File is also used as the Time base for certain data editing functions where
other Gauges are involved (if present).
System Data File: The data file which PanSystem writes to disk (*.PAN),
which contains all input Gauge Data, Fluid and Reservoir Description, etc.,
plus Analysis Results. The System File may contain Gauge Data from
several different raw data files if more than one was Imported. If
several Wells have been configured, the data files for all Wells are saved
to the one System File.
Column: The term used for a Channel (sequence, stream) of data in a data
file (e.g. the time column is the Gauge clock record for the well test and
the "Pressure Column" is comprised of the associated Pressure readings).
They appear as Columns when listed on-screen.
Master Pressure and Rate Columns: The selected Columns of data in the
Master Data File, with which Analysis will be performed. The selected
Master Pressure also has a special status on the Data Edit Plot in certain
data editing functions involving other Gauges.
Users can select different Master Pressure and Rate Columns if there are
several to choose from in a given Master Data File. PanSystem Analysis
View Overview requires a Rate value to accompany each Time-Pressure
pair. Generally, the Gauge record will not include simultaneously
recorded Rates (i.e. unless a Flow Meter was run), so there will not be a
Rate Column as such. In this case, PanSystem will create a Rate Column
automatically, by digitizing the manually entered Rate Change data.
Select on the Gauge Data Overview ribbon.
Users can also create a Rate Column from the Data Edit Plot, but this is not
usually necessary except for special applications.

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Rate Changes: These are events where the surface Flow Rate changes.
This includes Rate History (i.e. prior to a test, perhaps before the Gauge
started recording), and major Rate variations during a test or sequence of
tests. Users may have up to 2000 lines in the table. Associated with a Rate
Change event are:
The Time.
The Flow Rate leading up to the Rate Change.
The Pressure (not always required).
Edit from the Edit Rate Changes dialog, or on the plot. The Rate
Changes will be marked as arrows along the lower half of the Ruler Bar
on the Data Edit Plot.
When a particular Test Period is being analyzed, PanSystem computes

superposition for the period up to the start of that Test Period by referring
to the Rate Changes Table. Superposition during the test being analyzed is
computed from the rates in the Master Rate column.
Flow Periods: Are the time intervals between Rate Changes. They are the
spaces between the Rate Change arrows along the lower half of the Ruler
Bar.
Test Periods: Are time intervals, spanning one or several Flow Periods, on
which analysis will be performed. The Test Periods are marked as tick
marks along the upper half of the Ruler Bar on the Data Edit Plot.
These can be edited on the plot. Each Flow Period defined in Data
Preparation automatically becomes a Test Period in Analysis. Users may
group several Flow Periods into a single Test Period (refer to the Ruler
Bar Help topic for more details).
The Test Period Classification are classified as Normal, Slug or

Interference. Select a Test Period by clicking in the Ruler Bar over the
plot. Edit the Test Type by double-clicking on the Test Period in the Ruler
Bar.
Rate Column: Values of Flow Rate sampled at the Gauge clock times.
PanSystem Analysis View Overview requires a Rate value to
accompany each Time-Pressure pair. Generally, the Gauge record will not
include simultaneously recorded Rates (i.e. unless a Flow Meter was run),
so there will not be a Rate Column as such. In this case, PanSystem will
create a Rate Column automatically, by digitizing the manually entered
Rate Change data. Select on the Gauge Data Overview ribbon.

PANSYSTEM GLOSSARY
Users can also create a Rate Column from the Data Edit Plot, but this is not
usually necessary except for special applications.

Appendix B
PANSYSTEM TECHNICAL INFORMATION
This appendix contains the following topics:
Mini-Frac Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

Data Edit Plot Mini-Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Mini-Frac . . . . . . . 990
Pre-Closure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Mini-Frac G-Function Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Mini-Frac Square-Root Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Post-Closure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Presets Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Multiple Hydraulic Fracture Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Multiple Vertical Fracture Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Multiple Hydraulic
Fracture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Shale Oil/Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Shale Oil/Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Data Edit Plot Shale Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Shale Oil . . . . . . . . 1011
Analysis Shale Oil/Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Shale Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Square-Root Plot Shale Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Material Balance-1 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Material Balance2 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
History Match Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Stress-Dependent

B PANSYSTEM TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Pseudo-Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Analysis and Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Dietz Shape Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
PanSystem Derivative Diagnostic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Closed Reservoir Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Constant Pressure Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems . . . . . . . . . 1035
Horizontal Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems . . . . . . . . . . 1040
Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear
Composite Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Vertical Fractured Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Wellbore Storage Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
PanSystem Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Oil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
PanSystem File Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
PanSystem File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Type-Curve File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
*.PAN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
*.PIC (Pressure/ z-Factor/Viscosity) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
PanSystem Test Period Analysis Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
Slug Test Analysis Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
Gas Analysis (Linear Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202

Mini-Frac Analysis B
MINI-FRAC ANALYSIS
Data Edit Plot Mini-Frac
As for any test, pick the start of injection (tstart), end of injection (t0), and the
end of the fall-off period (tend).
The pumping period can be single or multiple rates. In the case of

multiple rates, pick intermediate rate changes during the pumping
period (see figure below).
Pressure P0 at t0 will be taken as the initial shut-in pressure

ISIP. Adjust the value of P0 to remove any frictional effect if necessary,
to get the correct ISIP.
Use the rt-click menu on the time axis to select the time units (hrs, mins,
etc).
Alternative pump rate units lpm and bpm are available in the mini-frac
unit systems

Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Mini-Frac
Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Mini-Frac

Enter the Well, Reservoir and Fluid parameters in the normal manner. There
are a few special points to note for mini-frac analysis:
The well orientation should be set to Vertical/Slant
The reservoir model should be Vertical fracture - infinite conductivity
These are mandatory settings for access to the Mini-frac module, regardless of
the actual well orientation or the nature of the fracture. They have no direct
influence on the analysis, but are required by PanSystem.
The Fluid Parameters correspond to the injection fluid, not to the reservoir
fluid. If they are to be calculated, use the injection temperature for Check
Temperature, not the reservoir temperature.
Some of the mini-frac analysis calculations require Youngs Modulus. This can
be entered now in the Fluid Parameters dialog, or later during analysis via the
Presets dialog. Leaving it at zero will result in the Fluid Loss Coefficient being
displayed as infinity on some plots.

Pre-Closure Analysis B
Pre-Closure Analysis
Test Overview Plot
Select the Pick fracture init time button in the Mini-frac ribbon bar.
A vertical dashed line appears to the right of the pumping period. Move the
line with the mouse to cut the pressure where you see the initiation of the
fracture (change of slope). This defines tfi. You might need to zoom the
injection period in order to grab the line.
When the mouse button is released, the Pick option is disabled. Click on the
button again to re-enable it so that the line can be moved again.
Fracture initiation pressure Pfi is obtained automatically by linear

interpolation between pressure data points
tfi and Pfi are displayed as line results. Confirm the fracture initiation time
before proceeding.
Select the fall-off period for analysis and go to the G-function plot.

Mini-Frac G-Function Plot
Mini-Frac G-Function Plot

The G-function plot opens with pressure and two derivatives dP/dG and
GdP/dG plotted. A solid line passing through (0, 0) on the G-function and
Derivatives axes is auto-fitted to be approximately tangential to the early
GdP/dG data.
Rotate the line with the upper tab until it conforms to the upward linear
trend of the early GdP/dG data, keeping the bottom anchored through (0,
0)
Note that in the case of pressure-dependent leak-off, the early GdP/dG

derivative will plot to the left of the line before conforming to a linear
trend, followed by roll-over.
In the case of fracture tip extension, the GdP/dG derivative will not
develop any straight line trend, or will do so very late (ref.1).
The Change T0/P0 button allows adjustment to the ISIP if desired.
Select the Pick closure time button - a vertical dashed line appears

Mini-Frac G-Function Plot B
Move the dashed line with the mouse to cut the GdP/dG derivative where
it departs from the rotated line. This defines Gc at fracture closure.
The Pick button will disable when the mouse button is

released. Clicking on the Pick button again re-enables dashed line
movement.
According to the position of the dashed line, the value of G at closure (Gc)
will be reported in the line results box. The corresponding closure time
(tc) and closure pressure (Pc) are also listed. (Closure time is the time
elapsed since the end of pumping.)
Fluid efficiency (h) and Leak-off coefficient (CT, from the Nolte -method)
are also computed.
If a value of infinity is displayed for CT, go to the Calculate dialog, select

Presets and enter a value for Youngs Modulus (E).
Fit a zero-slope line on the short dP/dG plateau that should appear
around closure time. This appears as mGc in the results box and will be
used to compute a second estimate of CT at a later stage.

Mini-Frac Square-Root Plot
Mini-Frac Square-Root Plot

The Square-Root plot opens with pressure and two derivatives - dP/d(t) and
(t) dP/d(t) - plotted. This is an optional alternative to the G-function
plot. It gives the same set of results. You have the option to skip it or to do it
and confirm or ignore the results.

Mini-Frac Square-Root Plot B
Select the Pick closure time button - a vertical dashed line appears, placed
through the maximum of the primary derivative to identify the
inflection point on the pressure fall-off which occurs at closure.
Move the dashed line with the mouse if desired. The Pick button will
be disabled when the mouse button is released. Clicking on the Pick
button again re-enables dashed line movement.
According to the position of the dashed line, the value of time at closure
(tc) will be reported in the line results box. (Closure time is the time
elapsed since the end of pumping.) The corresponding closure pressure
(Pc) is also listed along with the calculated value of G at closure for
comparison with Gc from the G-plot.
Fluid efficiency (h) is also computed.
Confirm the results if you consider them to be better than those from the
G-function plot.

Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot
Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot

This plot is optional and is purely for qualitative purposes identification

of flow regimes, validation of closure time, and adjustment of the ISIP. It
is P = (ISIP P) vs t = (t t0) on log-log axes. t0 is the time at the start
of the fall-off test period. The derivative is t.dP/dt (which is equivalent
to dP/d((ln(t)).
The vertical dashed line corresponds to the last confirmed value of

fracture closure time (from the G-function or t plot). No adjustment is
possible, it is for reference only.
Fit a line to the pre-closure derivative using the -Slope or Floating Line
options. A slope of indicates linear flow. Bigger slopes might indicate
linear flow with wellbore and/or fracture storage effects. The derivative
should roll away from the line just after the closure point, confirming the
correct closure time pick.
Fit a parallel line to the pre-closure pressure data. If the data do not
conform to this slope, an adjustment to the ISIP is required. This will not
affect the derivative, but will increase or decrease the P values and bring
their trend parallel to the derivative. Adjust ISIP by clicking on the Change
T0/P0 tool and changing P0.

Mini-Frac Log-Log Plot B
For the post-closure derivative, a negative half-slope indicates linear flow,

and a negative unit slope radial flow (ref.1). This is because the derivative, as
defined, does not include superposition for the rate history.

Post-Closure Analysis
Post-Closure Analysis
Derivative Plot
This is a plot of post-closure pressure with a derivative computed using a

special radial flow time function FR (ref 2), plotted on log-log scales against
time elapsed since closure.
If radial flow is observed, fit a 0-slope pseudo-radial flow line to the

derivative data. kh and k will appear in the Line Results panel.
Enter the reservoir fluid viscosity and total compressibility at the

prompts if they are not already specified in the Presets dialog (see
later section).(The Fluid Parameters dialog was set up for the
injection fluid.)
Fit the pseudo-radial flow regime to obtain an estimate of the pseudo-radial skin
factor (Spr).

Post-Closure Analysis B
If linear flow is observed, fit a -slope fracture linear flow line to the derivative
data. Then place the fracture linear flow regime markers so that fracture
half-length (Xf) can be calculated. (This uses the Gulrajani equation and a
special linear flow time function FL (ref 2) computed internally.) Both line
and flow regime are required for this calculation.
Semi-log Plot
This is a plot of post-closure pressure versus a radial flow time function FR

If radial flow is observed, fit a pseudo-radial flow line to the data. kh, k and
the pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr) will be calculated.
A value of Fracture half-length (Xf), derived from Spr, is also listed in the
results, along with the extrapolated pressure (p*).

Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations
Linear Flow Plot
This is a plot of post-closure pressure versus a linear flow time function FL

If linear flow is observed, fit a fracture linear flow line to the data. Fracture
half-length (Xf) and the extrapolated pressure (p*) will be displayed in the
Line results.
Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations


Mini-Frac Diagnostic Calculations B
Following analysis of the data, a supplementary Calculation dialog is
available. This provides additional results, such as permeability from
pre-closure data, fracture dimensions from the KGD and PKN models, based
on the confirmed analysis results. It is also possible to alter some of the
diagnostic results to see the effect on the other computations.
Click Calculate to update the panel results. Some of these computed

results are extra to those derived directly from the diagnostic plots
line-fits.
Click the Presets button to access the Presets dialog, where you can change
the default values of a number of computational parameters (see next
section). Upon returning to the Calculate dialog, click Calculate to update
the results.

Presets Dialog
If you wish to see what effect a change to any of the values in the Minifrac
Parameters section would have, switch off the Use defaults tick box, type in
a new value and click on Calculate. To restore a default value (ie: the
value confirmed from the diagnostic plots), switch Use defaults back on,
and recalculate. Note that any changes made on this screen are
temporary. Once you leave the dialog (via OK or Cancel), the default
values will automatically reset.
The same applies to the permeability and skin factor in the After-Closure
Analysis section of the dialog
Note that in order to update the diagnostic plots for any changes made in
Presets, it will be necessary to remake the line-fits.
Presets Dialog
Behind the calculations is a set of parameters which can be viewed on the

Presets dialog. Default values are provided for items such as Spurt loss
coefficient (Sp), Net pressure ratio (), etc. to permit initial calculations on the
plots and on the Calculation dialog.

Presets Dialog B
If any of these are modified, all calculations depending on them will be

updated.
Since the Fluid Parameters dialog in the Data Preparation / Well, Reservoir
and Fluid Description has been set up for the injection fluid, the reservoir
fluid parameters (viscosity and total compressibility) which influence the
post-closure behavior, are entered in this Presets dialog.
The values of Youngs Modulus (E) and Poissons Ratio () will be

transferred from the Fluid Parameters dialog if they were entered there.
The default Gross fracture height (hfg) is set equal to the formation
thickness (h) that was specified in the Layer Parameters dialog in the Data
Preparation / Well, Reservoir and Fluid Description.

References
References
1. Holistic Fracture Diagnostics: Consistent Interpretation of Prefrac Injection Tests
Using Multiple Analysis Methods by R.D. Barree et al, SPE P&O (Aug 2009) and
SPE 107877 (Denver, April 2007).
2. Field Application of After-Closure Analysis of Fracture Calibration Tests, by G.R.
Talley et al, SPE 52220 (Oklahoma City, (March 1999).
MULTIPLE HYDRAULIC FRACTURE MODEL

Multiple Vertical Fracture Model
General:
The new multiple vertical fracture analytical model describes a horizontal

well with vertical fractures along its length. It is intended for use in tight and
shale reservoirs.
The model is implemented under two names: Shale Multiple Vertical

Fractures - for use in Shale Oil/Gas Analysis; and Conventional Multiple
Vertical Fractures for use in Conventional analysis. The two models are
mathematically identical but have been assigned a different name for each
category of analysis, since different methods apply. Conventional analysis
cannot be performed with the Shale version, and vice versa.

Multiple Vertical Fracture Model B
Figure 229: MVF model for transverse fractures, for the case where
Nfrac=5
A system of multiple, transverse fractures is shown above, where virtual

no-flow boundaries have been located at the mid-points between fractures.
For simplicity all the fractures have identical half-lengths and the formation
permeability is isotropic and the same everywhere. The drainage area shapes
for the fractures are assumed to be rectangular and the exterior fractures have
a different drainage geometry from the interior ones. A Greens function
solution for a plane source in a closed reservoir is used to model the behavior
of each fracture compartment.
The fractures have the following characteristics:
any number from 1 upwards [Nfrac]

transverse [Ftyp=2] or longitudinal [Ftyp=1]
evenly spaced [Wfrac] and of equal length [Xf ]
infinitely conductive, with fracture face skin [Sf]
full or partial height [hf ]
the wellbore itself is cased, so flow only occurs via the fractures
The effects of partial fracture height (hf < h) are included, bringing in the
vertical permeability (kz).
The overall drainage area is defined as a rectangle of any size, with the
fracture cluster centrally located. A = 2Lfar*{2Wfar+(Nfrac-1)*Wfrac}.

Multiple Vertical Fracture Model
The model will simulate fracture linear flow, followed by pseudo-radial flow
into each fracture (if wide spacing Wfrac >> Xf), or by a quasi-semi-steady state
flow (if small spacing Wfrac << Xf) caused by interference between the fractures
which creates virtual no-flow boundaries.
For an overall drainage area where Lfar >> Xf, a second linear channel flow
regime will develop, representing linear flow in the reservoir-at-large
towards the fracture cluster (and perpendicular to the wellbore).
Semi-steady state flow will then be observed as the transient reaches the
limits of the total drainage area.
The model does not consider late pseudo-radial flow (from the
reservoir-at-large towards the fracture cluster), which would occur after the
channel linear flow in a very large drainage area.
In the context of shale oil and gas reservoirs, there is evidence to suggest that,
following MHF stimulation, the productive region does not extend much
beyond the tips of the fractures, nor very far on either side of each fracture,
and consists of a network of natural fissures that have been opened up by the
fracking operation. This stimulated reservoir volume (SRV) represents the
permeable productive volume. Assuming the shale between each fracture
pair has been thus stimulated, the drainage area A should be approximately a
rectangle measuring 2Xf*Nfrac*Wfrac.
In this situation, the fracture linear flow regime will usually pass directly to
semi-steady state, with no evidence of channel linear.
In the limiting case where Nfrac=1, the model is equivalent to the single Infinite
conductivity fracture model (assuming full height), or the Limited height fracture
model (assuming partial height).

Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Multiple Hydraulic Fracture B
Figure 230: MVF model for longitudinal fractures, for the case where
Nfrac=3
Well, Reservoir, and Fluid Parameters Multiple

Hydraulic Fracture
are a few special points to note for this model:
The Well Orientation should be set to Vertical/Slant. (Although the well

trajectory might be horizontal, flow is only via the vertical fractures, and
this model is treated as an extension of the single vertical fracture model.)
The Reservoir Model should be Shale Multiple Vertical Fractures.
The Boundary Model should be set to Closed System. (Although the model
itself contains the parameters necessary to define a rectangular drainage
area, PanSystem must be set to Closed System in order to perform certain
calculations associated with a closed system. If it is felt that the drainage
area is not an issue, the defining parameters Lfar and Wfar can be set to
large values.)

Shale Oil/Gas Analysis
SHALE OIL/GAS ANALYSIS

Shale Oil/Gas Analysis
General:
The shale oil/gas module is built around a new analytical model for a
horizontal well with multiple vertical fractures (MVF). This is described in a
separate section.
Shale Multiple Vertical Fractures: This model is used in the Shale Oil/Gas
Analysis module with long-term production data where the bottom-hole
flowing pressure is approximately constant. Although the diagnostic
plots are pressure-normalized, the transient part of the analysis is less
accurate when the flowing pressure varies significantly.
Conventional Multiple Vertical Fractures: This is provided for the

analysis of conventional buildup tests in the shale environment using the
Conventional Analysis module.
The models are in mathematically identical, but have to be provided as

distinct options because the specialized shale analysis plots are different from
those for conventional analysis. The Shale MVF model cannot be used in
Conventional analysis, and vice versa
Analysis will provide estimates of average fracture half-length and,

importantly, of permeability - even though radial flow has not been attained -
provided the end of fracture linear flow can be observed. With an MVF well
in the shale environment, linear flow generally gives way to a
quasi-semi-steady state as flow is confined to the stimulated reservoir lying
between and around the fractures, and analysis of the late flowing data will
yield an estimate of stimulated reservoir volume. Permeability will be that of
the stimulated region.
Owing to the slow propagation of the pressure transient in such low

permeabilities, flow regimes beyond linear flow are usually only observed in
long term production data covering at least several months. This is handled
by the Shale Oil/Gas Analysis module.

Data Edit Plot Shale Oil B
The analysis of long-term production data using the Shale Oil/Gas Analysis
module is described in the following sections:
Well, Reservoir and Fluid parameters

Data Edit Plot
Analysis
Shale log-log plot
Square-root plot
Material balance-1 plot
Material balance-2 plot
Type-curve plot
History Match plot
For buildup analysis, it is unlikely that much will be observed beyond

fracture linear flow, even for very long shut-ins. Buildups can be analyzed
using the Conventional Analysis methods. Please refer to the Well, Reservoir
and Fluid parameters section for information about setting up the file for
analysis.
Data Edit Plot Shale Oil

The production rates will probably be in a different file from the pressures.
Import the pressure and rate data in the normal manner in a single file or
as two separate files, as the case may be.
Perform any editing that might be required to the pressure and/or rate
data.
In Data Preparation, click on the Rate Schedule tab, then on the Rate Schedule
tool icon.
Select the Transfer option in the Edit Rate Changes dialog and transfer the
flowrate data.
This will generate one rate change marker per flowrate data point

Data Edit Plot Shale Oil
Before leaving the Edit Rate Changes dialog:
Enter the initial reservoir pressure in the first row. If the first row
does not correspond to the start of production, insert a new row,
assign a time, and enter the pressure. This is essential!
The initial rate can be left at zero. The first time can be negative, 0, or
positive.
Figure 231: Entering the initial reservoir pressure in the Rate Changes
dialog
Figure 232: Data Edit plot with BHFP, rate schedule and rate change
markers

Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Shale Oil B
This is simulated data using logarithmic time-steps, hence the density of
markers at the beginning!
Now {Ctrl}+right-click} in the upper ruler bar to join all of the flow periods
into a single test period. This is essential for the Analysis section, but it also
improves the plot presentation! To ungroup, press the {Ctrl} key and
right-click in the grouped period.
You can also do this on the Test Overview plot.
Figure 233: Test Overview plot
Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Shale Oil

are a few special points to note for Shale welltest analysis:
The Well Orientation should be set to Vertical/Slant (not Horizontal).

The Reservoir Model should be Shale Multiple Vertical Fractures
The Boundary Model should be set to Closed System

Analysis Shale Oil/Gas
These are mandatory settings for access to the Shale analysis module,
regardless of the actual well orientation. They can be set via the Analysis /
Model Selection / Model dialog, or via Data Preparation / Well, reservoir and fluid
description / Analytical Model (You will be prompted to set the models if
you have not done so, as soon as you try to access any of the Shale diagnostic
plots.)
In the following diagnostic plots, it is assumed that the fracture height is the
same as the formation thickness. In a shale environment, if, from fracture
modeling, you believe that the frac height is less, the formation thickness (h)
in Layer Parameters, should be reduced to this value so that the correct
stimulated reservoir volume (displayed as OGIP or OOIP) is computed.
Analysis Shale Oil/Gas

Figure 234: The Shale Oil/Gas analysis ribbon bar

Analysis and Simulation MVF B
Test Overview Plot
Figure 235: Test Overview plot with flow periods grouped into a single
period
If you have not already done so on the Data Edit plot, group the flowing
periods by pressing the {Ctrl} key and right-clicking in any one of the
flow period intervals in the ruler bar. This will produce a single test
period for analysis.
data, you can group the desired middle periods by pressing the {Shft} key
To ungroup, press the {Ctrl} key and right-click in the grouped period.
Analysis and Simulation MVF

The model provides line-fitting options for wellbore storage, fracture linear
flow, radial flow and semi-steady state. The calculation of Xf (1/2-slope line)
and k (0-slope line) requires a value for Nfrac. Enter a value at the
prompt. You will also be prompted for the fracture spacing Wfrac. These can
be modified later during Quick Match simulation.

Analysis and Simulation MVF
Note that the fracture linear flow behavior depends on the product Nfrac*Xf,
so if the number of productive fractures is considered to be less than the
design value, entering a smaller value will result in an increase in the
computed average fracture half-length Xf. The radial flow behavior is also
affected by Nfrac.
In Shale Analysis, Quick Match simulation and Auto Match are only available
on the Test Overview plot. The parameters needed for the input dialog for
Quick Match simulation are described in Multiple Vertical Fracture Model.
Fracture height hf is clipped at layer thickness h (i.e: entering a value larger

than h will have no effect). If there is no evidence of semi-steady state
behavior, simply set the dimensions Wfar and Lfar to large numbers.
The drainage area A = 2Lfar*{2Wfar+(Nfrac-1)*Wfrac}.

Shale Log-Log Plot B
The theory behind the Shale oil/gas analysis module assumes the special case
of spanning fractures, wherein the drainage area does not extend beyond
the fracture tips, and is limited along the well trajectory to a distance beyond
the external fractures equal to one half of the fracture spacing. This defines a
stimulated reservoir volume where Lfar Xf and Wfar Wfrac.
For regression analysis using Auto Match, the design parameters Nfrac,
Wfrac and Ftyp will be treated as constants. Set the upper limit to fracture
height hf equal to h.
Please refer to the Automatic Matching Dialog for more details about Auto
Match.
Shale Log-Log Plot

Select the Log-Log plot. If this is a new file and a gas reservoir, you will be
prompted to enter a drainage area. Enter an approximate value:
This is simply to allow PanSystem to compute the gas Normalized Material

Balance Pseudo-time, which forms the x-axis of some of the Shale plots. Even
if the initial estimate is wildly wrong, it can be refined during Analysis.

Shale Log-Log Plot
The Shale log-log plot opens with rate-normalized pressure (P/Q or m(p)/Q )
and two derivatives Square-root (fracture linear flow) and SSS Square-root
(quasi-semi-steady state flow) plotted versus (Normalized) Material Balance
Pseudo-time.
The square-root derivative will have a zero-slope if fracture linear flow is

observed. The SSS derivative will have a negative -slope during linear
flow, which will become a zero slope during SSS flow.
Figure 236: Log-Log plot with fracture linear and quasi-SSS lines fitted to
the derivatives
Select a Zero-Slope line for Closed system SSS flow and place it on the SSS
derivative. The area (A) and OGIP or OOIP will appear as results.
Confirm the Area:
For gas or condensate fluid type, the x-axis time function and the SSS
derivative will be recomputed using the new area.

convergence.

Square-Root Plot Shale Oil B
Select a Zero-Slope line for Fracture linear flow and place it on the
Square-root derivative. Click the Flow Regime button and mark the
beginning and end of the Fracture linear flow regime:
Be careful to mark the end of linear flow accurately the time at

which this occurs is used to compute permeability k.
The computation of k requires the (average) fracture spacing

(Wfrac). You will be prompted for this if it has not been initialized
already.
The intercept of the linear flow line gives Xfk, from which Xf can be
extracted once k is known.
Optionally, fit the SSS flow regime markers.
Square-Root Plot Shale Oil

This is an optional plot of rate-normalized pressure (P/Q or m(p)/Q ) versus

square-root of (real) time.
The fracture linear flow regime will be transferred from the log-log plot
and a linear flow line auto-fitted. The log-log plot is preferred for flow
regime identification.
Alternatively, fit a line to the fracture linear flow data using the Best fit line
or Floating line options, and mark the flow regime:
Permeability k is computed from the time-to-end of linear flow.
The computation of k requires the (average) fracture spacing (Wfrac). You will
be prompted for this if it has not been initialized already.

Material Balance-1 Plot
The slope of the linear flow line gives Xfk, from which Xf can be extracted
once k is known.
Figure 237: Square-root plot with fracture linear flow line
Material Balance-1 Plot

The first Material Balance plot opens with rate-normalized pressure (P/Q
or m(p)/Q ) plotted versus (Normalized) Material Balance Pseudo-time.
If the SSS flow regime was fitted on the Log-Log plot, it will be
transferred here and a line auto-fitted. Adjust the line if you wish.
Alternatively, fit a line to the late SSS data using the Best fit line or Floating
line options.

Material Balance2 Plot B
The slope of the SSS line is used to compute the area (A) from which the
reserves volume (OGIP or OOIP) is derived.

convergence.
Material Balance2 Plot

The second Material Balance plot opens with pressure-normalized rate (Q/P or
Q/m(p))plotted versus Normalized cumulative production Np/P or
Np/m(p). No flow regime transfer to this plot is possible.

Material Balance2 Plot
Fit a line to the late SSS data using the Best fit line or Floating line options.
The intercept of the SSS line on the x-axis is used to compute the area (A)
from which the reserves volume (OGIP or OOIP) is derived.
The intercept of the SSS line on the y-axis is used to compute the
Productivity Index Jo or Jg.

convergence.

Type-Curves B
Type-Curves
The Type-Curve plot opens with pressure-normalized rate (Q/P or Q/m(p))

plotted versus (Normalized) Material Balance Pseudo-time.
Select the Type curve match tool button and load the Spanning fracture
type-curves.
There are 5 curves with values of [Wfrac/Xf ] of 5, 2, 1, 0.5 and 0.3 from
bottom to top. (Wfrac = avg fracture spacing, Xf = avg fracture half-length.)
Move the type-curves using the mouse or the arrow keys. (If you press
the {Ctrl} key when using the arrow keys you can get smaller steps.)
To aid with the matching process, in the results pane you will see [W/Xf ]c
and [W/Xf ]m. The best match corresponds to these two values being as
close as possible.
Figure 240: Type-Curve Match

History Match Plot
The match results are:
Area (and thence OGIP or OOIP) from the x-axis match
Permeability from the y-axis match
Fracture half-length Xf from the value of the match curve.

convergence.
History Match Plot

The History Match option will generate a production rate curve for a specified
constant bottom-hole flowing pressure over a specified time period. It is based
on the Production Forecasting facility that has been a feature of PanSystem for
some time. It can be used to validate your shale analysis by comparing with
measured production rates, and to forecast future production based on the
current model.

History Match Plot B
In the dialog that opens, enter the following:
the start and end times for the simulation (select the time units at top
right)
the number of steps (500 1000 is usually adequate)
the bottom hole flowing pressure
Optionally:
the Contract Rate (imposes an upper limit to the production rate

useful to replicate the early clean-up period where production is
impeded). If left at zero, no limit will be applied.
the Minimum Production Rate (the simulation will stop)

History Match Plot
Click OK to proceed.
Figure 241: History Match Plot with match and forecast
The parameter input dialog for the simulation will appear. The Multiple
Hydraulic Fracture model is described in a separate section. k and Xf are the
most recently confirmed values from analysis.
Since a large part of the data is likely to be in quasi-SSS, the drainage area
dimensions will probably be the key parameters here. It will be necessary to
enter or adjust the dimensions Wfar and Lfar so as to match the area (A) found
from analysis this is not yet done automatically. This should result in a
good match to the measured rate data.
Referring to the description of the MHF model, the general expression for the
area is:
A = 2Lfar(2Wfar*+(Nfrac-1)*Wfrac)
For the spanning fracture, which is considered to be the case for shale
reservoirs, the area represents the stimulated reservoir volume, with Lfar Xf
and Wfar Wfrac/2, so that:
A = 2Xf*Nfrac*Wfrac = 4Lfar*Nfrac*Wfar

Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure B
One approach would be to set Lfar equal, or slightly larger than, Xf, and to
adjust Wfar to give the correct area as a starting point. (This assumes, of
course, that the true Nfrac and Wfrac are known)
STRESS-DEPENDENT PSEUDO-PRESSURE
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure
General:
This is a new pseudo-pressure approach which uses rock mechanics to allow

for the sensitivity of permeability and porosity to pressure, a sensitivity often
encountered in low porosity coal-bed methane and shale oil/gas
environments.
It can be used in conjunction with any of the analytical reservoir models

available in PanSystem. It is applied to Quick Match and Advanced
Simulation to replicate the effects of changing pressure on permeability and
porosity, which can be significant in very small porosity formations. It is
combined with the conventional real gas pseudo-pressure in gas and
condensate environments.
Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters

Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure
The stress-dependent, or dynamic, pseudo-pressure is prepared prior to

analysis in the Fluid Parameters section of Well, Reservoir and Fluid parameters:
Under the Fluid Control tab, switch on Stress-dependent Pseudo-pressure.
Set up the Layer and Fluid parameters in the normal manner.
On the Fluid Parameters dialog, click on the Pseudo tables button to open
the Dynamic Pseudo Pressure input dialog.
The stress-dependence is modeled using a rock mechanics model proposed

by Palmer and Mansoori (How Permeability Depends on Stress and Pore Pressure
in Coalbeds: A New Model; SPE 52607, SPE RE&E Dec 1998)

Well Reservoir and Fluid Parameters Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure
Figure 242: Preparation of the stress-dependent pseudo-pressure,

showing input parameters
Initially, default values will be carried through from other dialogs where
available:
Initial pressure = layer pressure
Effective stress porosity = formation porosity. In CBM and shale

environments the porosity is often not known with any certainty, and this
can be adjusted as a calibration parameter during simulation matching.
The smaller the value, the stronger the stress-dependence.
Base Pressure: This is computed internally and is not an edit. It defines the
pressure at which the formation will collapse, or choke.
Youngs Modulus is carried through from the Fluid Parameters dialog if it

was entered there. For CBM, a value in the range 1E+05<E<5E+05 psi is
considered reasonable.
Poissons Ratio is carried through from the Fluid Parameters dialog if it

was entered there. For CBM, a value in the range 0.3<n<0.4 is considered
reasonable. At n=0.5, the pseudo-pressure becomes a straight line,
meaning no stress effect.

Analysis and Simulation B
K-Por-Exponent: Palmer and Mansoori recommend setting this to 3 (the
default).
Upper Pres Limit (Inj): Defaults to the layer pressure, but should be
increased if injection pressures will be encountered. This defines the top
end of the pseudo-pressure range.
Click on the Plot button to compute and display the Dynamic

Pseudo-pressure versus Pressure.
These values can be modified subsequently during analysis and simulation.
Analysis and Simulation

After an initial analysis by conventional methods to obtain a first estimate of

permeability and skin factor, the analysis is optimized by Quick Match
simulation using an additional set of parameters describing the
stress-dependence.

Analysis and Simulation
Figure 243: Simulated example (points) of a buildup showing relaxation of

the stress-dependence as pressure returns towards initial reservoir
pressure.
In the above screen-shot, the horizontal line represents the derivative plateau
for the stress-free permeability (15 md).
The solid Quick Match trace is matched to the data by adjusting the four rock
mechanics parameters shown at top left. The conventional parameters
related to the chosen reservoir model in this case radial homogeneous are
of course also inputs to the matching process.

Dietz Shape Factors B
DIETZ SHAPE FACTORS

General:
Each Well within a Reservoir operating under Pseudo-Steady-State conditions

will assume a fixed Drainage Boundary or Area denoted by (A). However, the
fundamental Radial Diffusivity Equation for Semi-Steady-State inflow can only
be applied to Wells producing from the center of a circular Drainage Area.
Dietz Shape Factors (Reference 76), denoted by (CA), were introduced into the
inflow equation to account for:
Drainage Area Shape (i.e. Pseudo-Steady-State inflow performance of Wells

with an irregularly-shaped Drainage Area).
Well Position (i.e. relative Well Positioning within an irregularly-shaped

Drainage Area in regard to Boundary Effects).
Derivation of Dietz Shape Factor (CA):
For a Well operating under Pseudo-Steady-State conditions, the Volume drained

by each Well is directly proportional to the Well's Production Rate (Reference 1).
In this case, it is possible to make a reasonable estimate for the Shape of a
Reservoir by:
Estimating the Volume being drained by each Well.
Using this Volume and average Reservoir Thickness around the Well to
derive the Drainage Area (A).
Using structural maps of the Reservoir (if available), to model potential

Reservoir Geometry and obtain an estimate of the Drainage Area Shape.

Dietz Shape Factors
Consulting the Dietz Shape Factor Chart (Reference 1 and Reference 77) to
determine the Shape Factor (CA), for a given Drainage Area Aspect Ratio,
Drainage Area Shape and Well Position.
For irregular shapes that cannot be matched exactly, interpolation

between shapes may be necessary to derive a value of (CA). Common
Shape Factors for a range of Reservoir Geometries are illustrated below
with their respective values for (ln CA) and (CA). The third column of
numbers represents the Dimensionless Time Group (tDA) = kt/c, where
(t) is the time during which the Well has been producing at a
reasonably Steady-State of production. Unless the calculated value of
(tDA) for a given geometry exceeds the corresponding value presented
below, the Well is not producing under Semi-Steady-State conditions
and the Dietz Shape Factors cannot be used:
i The three numbers that appear after each model are:
1. ln CA
2. CA
3. Stabilized conditions for kt > c

Dietz Shape Factors B
Figure 244: PanSystem Dietz Shape Factor Reservoir Models

PanSystem Derivative Diagnostic Library
PANSYSTEM DERIVATIVE DIAGNOSTIC

LIBRARY
Closed Reservoir Compartments
Nomenclature:
p Logarithmic Derivative
t Elapsed Time in a Drawdown
t Elapsed (Shut-In) Time in a Build-Up
te Agarwal Equivalent Drawdown Time for a Build-Up
ETR Early Time Region
MTR Middle Time Region
LTR Late Time Region
0s Derivative Plateau
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
-1/2s Negative Half Slope
-1s Negative Unit Slope
CRD Constant Rate Drawdown
InfCon Infinite Conductivity
FinCon Finite Conductivity
W Channel Width
L Distance to Nearest Boundary
Lw Horizontal Well Length
BUD Build-Up using Desuperposition (Slider Method)
BU-MDH Build-Up functioned with Agarwal Equivalent Time
BUF Build-Up functioned with Agarwal Equivalent Time
CPUB Constant Pressure Upper Boundary
CPLB Constant Pressure Lower Boundary
PRF Pseudo-Radial Flow

Constant Pressure Boundaries B
IWS Ideal Wellbore Storage
NWS Non-Ideal Wellbore Storage
Diagnostic/Model Diagrams:
Figure 245: Closed Reservoir Compartments Diagnostic/Model
Constant Pressure Boundaries

Nomenclature:

Constant Pressure Boundaries
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems B
Figure 246: Constant Pressure Boundaries Diagram/Model
Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems

Nomenclature:
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope

Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Horizontal Wells B
Figure 247: Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems Diagram/Model
Horizontal Wells
Nomenclature:
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope

Horizontal Wells

W Channel Width

Horizontal Wells B
Figure 248: Horizontal Wells Diagram/Model

Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems
Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems

Nomenclature:
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite Systems B
Figure 249: Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems

Diagram/Model
Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear

Composite Systems
Nomenclature:

Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite Systems

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite Systems B
Figure 250: Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite

Systems Diagram/Model

Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System
Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System

Nomenclature:
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System B
Figure 251: Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System Diagram/Model

Vertical Fractured Well
Vertical Fractured Well

Nomenclature:
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Vertical Fractured Well B
Figure 252: Vertical Fractured Well Diagram/Model

Wellbore Storage Overlay
Wellbore Storage Overlay

Nomenclature:
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width

Wellbore Storage Overlay B
Figure 253: Wellbore Storage Overlay Diagram/Model

PanSystem Calculations
PANSYSTEM CALCULATIONS
Oil Analysis
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow)
Log-Log Plot
General:
All equations are written in Oilfield Units.
Variable Rate equations assume a step-rate approximation.
For Injection/Fall-Off Tests, enter negative values for Flow Rate (qs).
The pressure derivative p' is calculated in the following manner:
Drawdown Test (Constant Rate, No History),
Build-Up Test, (No History)
Build-Up Test (Constant Rate History)
where te is the Agarwal equivalent time
All test types (Full History)
where te is the Agarwal equivalent time function defined

under 'Generalized Superposition Plot' in the section on the Semi-Log Plot.

Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) B
Log-Log Plot:
Storage Constant (Cs):
where Pint is the value of P at 1 hour on the Unit Slope Line.
qs = Flow Rate at surface (or last Rate before Shut-In).
CD, the dimensionless Wellbore Storage Constant, is computed as:
Log-Log Plot Radial Permeability (k), is determined from a Zero-Slope Line by:
where p is the Y-axis position of the line.
For Plots with Rate-Normalized Pressure on the Y-axis, set qs = 1.0.
Skin Factor (S), is determined from the Zero-Slope Line using the general form
of the Skin Factor equations defined in the next topic for the Semi-Log Plot-
general meaning before setting the Time, or Time Function, to 1.0 to define
an intercept.
For a Constant Rate Drawdown (compare against the Semi-Log Plot Skin Factor
equation):

The Average Delta-Pressure:
in the Radial Flow Regime portion of the data (i.e. defined by the Flow Regime
Markers) is used with the corresponding Average Time:
The term (m), is derived from the Y-axis position:
of the Zero-Slope Line:
Pseudo-radial Skin Factor (Spr): The skin factor S always refers to the true or
mechanical skin (damage skin) at the sandface. Models which develop
pseudo-radial flow at late time (vertically fractured well, partial penetration,
horizontal well, etc) will display a pseudo-radial skin Spr computed in a
similar way to S, from the late radial flow data.
Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot:
Dual-Porosity Model:
Storativity Ratio (), from the positions of the System Radial Flow and
Transition to System Radial Flow Zero-Slope lines. This is derived from a
curve-fit relating the value of () to the depth of the Derivative Trough (i.e.
value of the Derivative at the bottom of the Trough divided by the value of
the Derivative in System Radial Flow).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (), from the time tx at the end of the
Transition to System Radial Flow Regime:

For Semi-Steady-State Inter-Porosity Flow:
for all Matrix Geometries, where:
and (k) is the Permeability determined from the System Radial Flow Zero-Slope
Line.
For Transient Inter-Porosity Flow:
where:
C=1.67 for Cubic/Spherical Matrix Geometry,
C=2.0 for Cylindrical Geometry,
C=3.0 for Slab Geometry,
C=12.0 for Two Strata.
Vertical fracture models:
Fracture half-length:
where m = 2*(y-axis intercept of the half-slope line)

Fracture conductivity (kfw) (finite conductivity fracture):
where m = 4*(y-axis intercept of the quarter-slope line)
Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (FCD) (finite conductivity

fracture):
Wireline formation tester probe models (active and observation):
Vertical permeability(kz):
where k is the horizontal permeability
m = 2* y-axis intercept of the negative half-slope line if spherical flow, or
1* y-axis intercept of the negative half-slope line if hemi-spherical flow.
Note that a negative half-slope will be observed at an observation probe only

if it is very close to the active probe - say, <1 ft (0.3 m).
Parallel fault boundary model:
Reservoir width:
where m = 2*(y-axis intercept of half-slope line)

Closed system boundary model:
Drainage Area (A) (of total Connected Pore Volume):
(Acres)
where m*= y-axis intercept of the unit-slope line
Partial Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer models:
Vertical permeability (kz):
where k is the horizontal permeability
m = 2* y-axis intercept of the negative half-slope line (spherical flow).
Semi-Log Plot
General:
Semi-Log Plot:
Permeability and Skin:
Semi-Log Drawdown Plot (Constant Rate, No History)
This is a constant rate Drawdown Plot:

X-axis: log t
Radial Permeability (k):
Skin Factor (S):
where:
Pint= intercept of line at t = 1 hr.
m = slope of line (i.e. negative for a Producer) per log10 cycle.
MDH (Miller, Dyes and Hutchinson) Plot (Build-Up Test, Constant

Rate, No History)
This is a constant rate Build-Up Plot without any Superposition:
X-axis: log t
Skin Factor (S):
where:
Pint= intercept of line at t = 1 hr.
m = slope of line (i.e. positive for a Producer) per log10 cycle.
Horner Plot (Build-Up Test, Constant Rate History plus Horner)

This is a constant rate Build-Up Plot with Horner Time Function
X-axis:
Horner Function
Skin Factor (S):
where:
p* = intercept of line at t = ,
m = slope of line (i.e. negative for a Producer) per log10 cycle.
If the Rate History consists of several flowing/shut-in periods, an Effective

tp is used:
where:
Qsj is the Flow Rate during the jth Flow Period of duration Tj, and Qn is the
last rate before shut-in.
Semi-Log Plot (Build-Up Test, Constant Rate History not Horner)
This is a constant rate Build-Up Plot with the Agarwal Equivalent Time
Function:
X-axis:
Log (Equivalent Time, te)

(reference 4)

Skin Factor (S):
where:
Pint= intercept of line at te = 1 hrs.
If the Rate History consists of several flowing/shut-in periods, an Effective

tp is used (i.e. X-axis Superposition Function equation in table below).
Semi-Log Plot (Build-Up Test, Full History plus Horner)
This is for a Build-Up with a Multi-Rate History, using a full Superposition

Function:
where:
X-axis:
Superposition Function
tj, qj [j = 1 to N] pertain to the Rate Change History prior to shut-in
(Rate Change Table).
qN = last rate before shut-in (at t = 0) (Rate Change Table).
Skin Factor (S):

where:
m = slope of line (negative for a Producer) per log cycle,
p* = intercept of line at t = ,
fr(t=0) = Drawdown Superposition Time Function value at: t = 0
Generalized Superposition Plot (Full History not Horner)
This is for a Build-Up or Drawdown Test with a Multi-Rate History, using an

Equivalent Time Function based on work by Agarwal (Reference 4).
The Test Period to be analyzed starts at [TJ, p(TJ), q(TJ)].
What is plotted:
Y-axis:
Rate-Normalized
Pressure

where:
X-axis:
Log (Equivalent Time, Ti(i = 1, 2, .... M) are the Times of the Rate Changes prior to the
te)
Data Point at t. (TM, qM) is the last Rate Change before the Data
Point at t. These are read from the Rate Change Table up to the
start of the Test at TJ, then from the Rate Column.
is a constant; the value of logte up to start of the Test at t = TJ.
Radial Permeability
(k):
Skin Factor (S):
where:
m = slope of line (positive for a Producer) per log cycle,
int = intercept of line at te = 1 hr. (log function = 0).
Reference Back to Initial Pressure:
For a Variable Rate Drawdown Test starting at the beginning of the Rate
Change Table (e.g. a group of Flowing Periods which includes the very first
one), or for any Flowing Period with a Rate History where the Reference Back
to Initial Pressure option has been switched on (i.e. Tf tool), the Equivalent
Time Function simplifies with:

TJ = Ti, p(TJ) = pi, q(TJ) = 0), where pi is the Initial Pressure at Ti, the start of
the Rate History (i.e. first entry in the Rate Changes Table).
Other Calculations from the Semi-Log Plot:
Permeability and Skin Factor from a Single Fault Radial Flow Line:
Skin Factor (S):
where:
m = the slope of the line,
L = the distance to the boundary.
Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc:
The Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc appearing in the Results Box after a
Semi-Log Line-Fit is the theoretical Initial Pressure at the very start of the
Rate History, assuming an Infinite-Acting Reservoir.
For the Semi-Log Build-Up Plot using the Horner Time Function, it is replaced
by an Extrapolated Pressure p*, which has the same significance.
For the MDH Build-Up Plot (No History):
For the Build-Up Plot using (Agarwal) Equivalent Time (Constant Rate
History with Horner off):

For Full History Superposition Plots using Equivalent Time (Horner off for
a Build-Up, X-axis Log (Equivalent Time) equation):
Skin Pressure Drop:
For a Constant Rate History:
For a Variable Rate:
In this case, the Skin Pressure Drop is displayed as the Pressure Drop per unit
of Flow Rate (e.g. psi/STB/day).
Radius of Investigation:
Classical Equation (based on Distance from the Well at which Pd = 0.1

(reference2)):

Drawdowns:
where:
T is the Duration of the Flowing Period (i.e. for Rinv in the Results Box), or the
position of the mouse pointer (i.e. for Rinv displayed in the Status Bar beneath
the Plot).
For the Radial Composite model, the outer region permeability (equal to M*k)
and outer region porosity-compressibility product (equal to *(Ct), are used
in the above equations.
Build-Ups:
where:
ts is the Duration of the Build-Up Period (i.e. for Rinv in the Results Box), or the
position of the mouse pointer (i.e. for Rinv displayed in the Status Bar beneath
the Plot). The actual Duration of the Build-Up Period is used (i.e. even if longer
than the Flowing Period) unless the Maximum Rinv in Build-Ups to be Limited by
Tp facility is switched-on in Configure Gauge Details (refer to Gauge Details),
in which case, Rinv is not allowed to exceed Rinv(ts = Tp).
Equation Incorporating Gauge Resolution and Noise:

To be able to say with confidence on a Semi-Log Plot that an anomaly exists at

a certain distance from the Well, users would need to see a change of slope
that is sufficiently well developed to convince them that it is real. In other
words, the Pressure would have to deviate from the Radial Flow Line by a
certain amount before the test ended. If the Gauge Resolution is pg, users
might like to see a Deviation of at least twice pg to be sure that there really is
a new trend starting in the data. This is a subjective criterion, so EPS provide
the option in Configure Gauge Details (refer to Gauge Details), to specify
how many multiples of pg users want to employ (i.e. default n=2).
The Radius of Investigation is estimated by solving the equation:
where:
TD is the Dimensionless Time (i.e. defined in Wellbore Storage Type-Curves)

at which Rinv is to be calculated,
RD is the Dimensionless Radius of Investigation (Rinv/Rw),
pgD is the Dimensionless Gauge Resolution (i.e. using PD calculation in

Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations), with (pi-pwf) replaced by pg.
If users specify a value for Gauge Noise as well as Resolution in the Gauge
Details dialog, pg becomes the sum of these two amplitudes).
n is the multiple of pg required to ensure there is a change of trend.
Flow Efficiency:
For a Drawdown, pi is the Initial Pressure and pwf is the last Flowing Pressure.

For a Build-Up, pi is the calculated Initial Pressure, or the extrapolated Initial
Pressure p* and pwf = pws (t = 0), the last Flowing Pressure before shut-in.
Average Reservoir Pressure (Radial Flow Plot, Build-Ups only):
i
For the calculation of average Reservoir Pressure from p* by the MBH
(Matthews, Brons and Hazebroeck) Method, the Flow Period is assumed to have
reached Semi-Steady-State before shut-in. Use Quick Match for a more
generally valid calculation.
MBH Method:
where:
p* is the extrapolated or calculated Initial Pressure from the Build-Up Plot.
qs is the Flow-Rate at surface before shut-in and:
assuming tpDA > (tDA)sss (i.e. the straight line portion of the MBH curves).
(tDA)sss the Dimensionless Time to Semi-Steady-State Production, can be

obtained from most books on well test analysis (e.g. References 1, 2, 22,
etc.).
tpDA the Dimensionless Producing Time, is defined as:

where:
CA = Dietz Shape Factor,
A = Drainage Area (acres).
The Multi-Phase Flow Correction, replacing the Oil Mobility term,
by the Total Mobility term,
is applied in the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options.
Distance to a Linear Discontinuity (L):
For Horner and Build-Up Superposition Plots, PanSystem calculates:
where:
with x being the Horner or Superposition Time at the intersection.
It then finds tp / Rp2, the root of pp from the Ei-function, and

For all other plots (Time and Equivalent Time):
where:
the Intersection Time Tint = 10x
(where x is the value of the Logarithmic Time-Axis Function at intersection).
For the Radial Composite Model, the Outer Region Properties are used to
compute the distance.
The Multi-Phase Flow Correction, replacing the Oil Mobility term:
by the Total Mobility term:
(as defined by the Perrine Method equation), is applied in the Multi-Phase Oil
Fluid Type options.
Distance to a Radial Discontinuity (Lrad) (References 53, 54):

For the Radial Composite Model, the distance Lrad to the interface between the
Inner and Outer Regions is:
where Tint is the Time (or Equivalent Time) at the intersection of the Radial Flow
Lines for the Inner and Outer Regions.
M is the Outer/Inner Mobility Ratio:
and is the Outer/Inner Storativity Ratio:
Dual-Porosity Calculations:
Storativity Ratio:
From the early and late Radial Flow lines:

where:
Y is the Vertical Separation between the early/late parallel lines (for

Superposition Plots with p/q on the Y-axis, qs= 1 in this equation).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient:
For Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix Flow:
where:
Tint = middle/late line intersection time.
For Transient Matrix Flow:
The Multi-Phase Flow Correction, replacing the Oil Mobility term:
by the Total Mobility term:
(as defined by the Perrine Method equation), is applied in the Multi-Phase Oil
Fluid Type options.

Matrix Block Permeability/Height2:
For both models:
Where:
(km) = Matrix Permeability
(hb) = Block (i.e. full) Height
() is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type
The terms hb2 and AFD2 have the following values:
Block Model hb2 AFD2
Cubes/Spheres 60 36
Rectangular Prisms/Cylinders 32 16
Slabs 12 4
Two-Layers (Vertical Crossflow) 12 1
Semi-Log Plot (Multi-Phase Flow)

General:
i
In case of the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options, all specified Flow Rates (i.e.
Gauge Data, Rate Changes) refer to the Oil Phase. Other phase Flow Rates are
Water-Cut and GORs.
Multi-Phase Flow:
Perrine Method (Reference 39):

When the Two-Phase or Three-Phase Flow logic is invoked, by switching-on the
Perrine Method, the Oil Mobility term:
is replaced by the Total Mobility term,
in the equations for S, p*, Rinv, etc. containing the Diffusivity Term.
where:
m = the slope of the line on the Semi-Log Plot and
qosc = Flow Rate of Oil at surface (STB),
qwsc = Flow Rate of Water at surface (= qosc * WOR) (STB),
qgsc = Flow Rate of Free Gas at surface (= qosc [Rsp - Rs]) (scf)
(i.e. that part of the Produced Gas which was Free Gas in the Reservoir).
The effective Permeability to each Phase is computed from the slope m of the
Radial Flow Line using the appropriate Phase Flow Rate and Fluid Properties.
Effective Permeability to Oil:

Effective Permeability to Water:
Effective Permeability to Gas:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient:
In the Log-Log Plot Storage equation for Cs from the Log-Log Plot Unit Slope, the
In-Situ Oil Flow Rate term qsBo is replaced by the total In-Situ Flow Rate:
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures (Reference 18):
When the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option is switched-on, Multi-Phase

Pseudo-Pressure Tables can be generated in PanSystem for rigorous modeling of
Multi-Phase effects and Fluid Property behavior.
Tables can also be imported as a file from an external source. The *.PSP file
structure is described in Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File. The Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure is defined by the equation in Definition of Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure. The imported tables are converted for compatibility with the
Analysis logic existing in PanSystem.
Internally, PanSystem computes the End-Point Permeability to Oil (k=keffo(Swi))

from the slope m of the Radial Flow Line. The Effective Permeabilities keffo, keffw
and keffg at the current saturation Sw are computed from this using the Relative
Permeabilities:

The Total Mobility:
is computed from the sum of the Phase Mobilities:
and replaces the Oil Mobility term:
in all equations (S, Rinv, etc.), containing the Diffusivity Term.
Semi-Log Plot (Pressure Extrapolation)

General:
Pressure Extrapolation Option:
All Recorded Pressures are corrected as follows before Plotting:
If the Extrapolation to Model Rate History option is switched-on in the

Pressure Extrapolation dialog, the correction will also be applied to the
response generated by Quick Match.

If Extrapolation to Model Interference Trend is switched-on, no correction is

applied to the response generated by Quick Match.
Linear Extrapolation:
where:
t is the Elapsed Time since the start of the test (hrs.),
m* is the Pressure Trend (psi/day) to be included (i.e. positive = declining).
Logarithmic Extrapolation:
where:
m** is the Logarithmic Pressure Trend (psi/log cycle) (i.e. positive = declining
pressure trend),
T is the Duration of the Pressure Trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
Square-Root Extrapolation:
where:
mrt is the Square Root Pressure Trend (psi/hr1/2) to be included (i.e. positive =
declining trend),
T is the Duration of the Square Root Trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).

Fourth-Root Extrapolation:
where:
m4rt is the Fourth Root Pressure Trend (psi/hr1/4) to be included (i.e. positive =
declining trend),
T is the Duration of the Fourth Root Trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
Cartesian Plot
General:
Cartesian Plot:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs):
where:
m' is the slope of the line fitted to the early data (psi/hr).
Dimensionless Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cd):
Computed using the same equation as for the Log-Log Plot.
Closed System Boundary Model:

Drainage Area (A) (of total Connected Pore Volume):
(Acres)
where:
m* is the slope of the line (negative for Producers).
In the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options, qsBo is replaced by the total Downhole
Rate:
(qoscBo + qwscBw + qgscBg)
Radius of Drainage (R):
Dietz Shape Factor (CA):
where:
is the slope of the Semi-Log Plot line,
int* = intercept of the Cartesian Plot line at t = 0.
Volume of Oil Reserves:

i This Volume is reported at Standard Conditions.
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model:
Drawdown Analysis option for Flowing Tests, and Build-Up Tests plotted using
the Slider Pressure Extrapolation Correction:
Drainage Area (A) (First Cell): The same as for Closed System Model
described above.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): The same as for Closed System Model described
above.
First Cell Volume (V1) (total Connected Pore Volume):
Total Volume (Vtot) (total Connected Pore Volume of the Two Cells):
where:
m2* is the slope of the second (i.e. Total System) line.
Inter-Cell Transmissibility (Teff ):

where:
tint is the Time (or Equivalent Time) of the intersection of the first cell and Total
System Lines,
V2 is the Volume of the second cell = Vtot-V1.
Build-Up Analysis option, for Build-Up Tests plotted without the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation Correction:
Second Cell Volume (V2) (Connected Pore Volume):
where:
V' is computed from the slope of the line m* using the same equations as
those for the Closed System Boundary Model described earlier (i.e. for A and R).
V' is an intermediate term, and does not correspond to any physical volume.
V1 is a user input unless derived from Drawdown Analysis.
Active probe (wireline formation tester):
A zero-slope line fitted to the late steady-state data (if observed) will yield the
horizontal radial permeability k, provided that an estimate of the vertical
permeability kz has already been made:
where:
, and rp is the probe radius.
, and pss is the steady state flowing pressure.

CFE is an internally-computed flow shape factor dependent on anisotropy
and the probe/wellbore radius ratio .
Deliverability
General:
The following IPR calculations are in terms of Oil Production Rate.
Calculation of J from Transient Test Data:
Productivity Index J (Semi-Steady-State Radial Flow):
where:
A is the Drainage Area (acres),
Spr is the Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor.
The Radial Flow Equation (illustrated above) requires a Pseudo-Radial Skin

Factor (Spr) for those models which do not exhibit radial flow at early time.
This is calculated from the True or Mechanical Skin Factor (S), that has been
derived from well test analysis and is displayed on the IPR input screen. The
following conversions are used:
Radial Homogeneous: Spr = S

Dual Porosity: Spr = S
Vertical Fracture:

where:
(infinite conductivity)
(uniform flux)
rweff = function of Xf and FCD, (finite conductivity) (Figure 18, Reference 60).
Dual-Permeability:
where:
Sb is a Flow Convergence Skin due to the Vertical Permeability defined in reference

48.
is defined in Model Parameters - Flow Capacity Ratio.
For this model the Full Thickness Permeability is computed as:
and this is used in the Radial Flow equation (described earlier), instead of the k
of the Open Layer, since this is what is seen at Late Time.
Partial Penetration:

where:
is the Penetration Ratio,
Sconv is the Convergence or Limited Entry Skin (defined in Reference 61).
Radial Composite:
where:
M is the Outer/Inner Region Mobility Ratio defined in Model Parameters -

Mobility Ratio.
For this model, the Outer Region Permeability is computed as kpr = Mk, where k
is the Inner Region Permeability. The kpr term is used instead of k for the
Productivity Index (i.e. in the Radial Flow equation described earlier).
Horizontal Well Models:
The Radial Flow Deliverability equation can be used for Horizontal Wells if the
appropriate Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor is used:
where:
The first term on the right in the upper equation accounts for the Horizontal
Drainhole of Length Lw (Reference 62, Equation 8, for a single Open Interval).

A is the Anisotropy Coefficient:
The Permeability k is the Horizontal Permeability pertaining to late Pseudo-Radial

Flow.
St contains the Mechanical Skin Factor (S) and a term for Convergence towards
the Wellbore from Full Thickness Flow, and Anisotropy (References 62, 72).
The term rw is defined as:
and
i The summation is defined in the references. It can be ignored if hD < 5.
Maximum Flow Potential [pres pb]:

where:
pb is the Bubble-Point Pressure (from Fluid Parameters),
qb = J[pres - pb] = Flow Rate at pwf = pb and
pres = current Layer Pressure.
Maximum Flow Potential [pres < pb]:
Calculation of J from Production Test Point Data:
1. Single Test Point [q1, p1] with pres > pb
If p1 pb:
If p1 < pb:
For Maximum Flow Potential (refer to the equation above for pres< pb).
2. Single Test Point [q1, p1] with pres pb
For Maximum Flow Potential (refer to the equation above for pres pb).

3. Two or Three Test Points with pres > pb
PanSystem performs a least-squares fit, taking into account the Vgel Curvature
of the IPR below the Bubble-Point (using the Productivity Equations from Step 1
above), for Points 1, 2 and 3.
Then:
Estimated Shut-In Pressure = intercept of line at qs = 0.
The Maximum Flow Potential is calculated with the equation above for prespb,
using the Estimated Shut-In Pressure instead of pres.
4. Two or Three Test Points with pres pb
PanSystem calculates the best-fit value of J, keeping pres fixed, using the Vgel
equation (the Productivity Equation from Step 2 above) for Points 1, 2 and 3.
For Maximum Flow Potential (refer to the equation above for pres< pb).
Calculation of IPR Curve:
Flow Rates are calculated for values of pwf between 14.7 psia and pres, using the
Vgel relationship.
i pres is replaced by the Estimated Shut-In Pressure for Case 3 in the previous
section.
1. pres > pb:
If pwf pb:

If pwf < pb:
where:
= Flow Rate at Bubble-Point pb
and qmax is defined in equation above for pres pb.
2. pres < pb:
and qmax is defined in equation above for pres< pb.
General:
The Flow Rate is determined at each Time-Step tj by an Inflow/Outflow Analysis.
The Inflow Curve is computed at Time tj using the Pd(Td) function appropriate
for the selected Reservoir and Boundary Models.
The Outflow Curve is either the specified constant BHFP, or the BHFP versus
Flow Rate curve read from the VFP Flowing Pressure file. The actual Flow Rate
and Flowing Pressure at Time tj are determined by the intersection of the two
curves. This is repeated for each Time-Step, resulting in a declining
Production Profile.
For Closed Systems with No-Flow Boundaries, the Layer Pressure p(tj) computed
at each Time-Step tj from the Cumulative Volume of Oil Np(tj) produced up to
that point (i.e. no Layer Pressure computation is made for Non-Closed Systems,
nor for Closed Systems with constant Pressure Boundaries, since there is no
depletion).

To do this, the Material Balance Equation (Reference 1), for a Solution Gas Drive
Reservoir with no Water Influx and no Gas Cap, is solved for p(tj) by iteration:
where:
ptj = pi - p(tj) is the Total Depletion at Time tj,
Np(tj) is the Cumulative Volume of Oil Produced up to Time tj (at standard

conditions),
the Initial Volume of Oil in Place (at standard conditions) is given by:
Rsi is the Initial Solution Gas/Oil Ratio,
Rs is the Solution Gas/Oil Ratio at current Layer Pressure,
Rsp is the Cumulative Produced Gas/Oil Ratio (= constant Producing Gas/Oil Ratio
in PanSystem),
Boi is the Initial Oil Volume Factor at Initial Pressure pi and Layer Temperature Ti.
Bo and Bg are the Oil and Gas Volume Factors at current Layer Pressure p(tj).
The Fluid Properties are re-evaluated at this new Average Layer Pressure p(tj)
and used in the inflow calculation for the next Time-Step tj+1. This yields the
new Production Rate at Time tj+1. The new Cumulative Production Np(tj+1) is then
estimated, and the new Average Layer Pressure p(tj+1) is recomputed, and so
on...

Oil Analysis (Linear Flow) B
Oil Analysis (Linear Flow)
Fracture Linear Flow
Square-Root Time Plot:
Fracture Half-Length:
where:
m is the slope of line.
qsBo is replaced by the total Downhole Rate.
Fracture Face Skin Factor Sf:
Constant Rate Drawdown:

where:
pint = [pi - pint (t=0)] and pint (t=0) is the intercept of the Linear Flow line
at t=0.
Equivalent Square Root Time Plots:
where:
pint is the intercept of the line at Equivalent Time = 0. When the Y-axis is
plotted as p rather than p, the square bracket in the equation becomes
just pint. In addition, where the Y-axis is plotted as p/q, the qs term is
set to 1.0.
Tandem Square-Root Plot:
where:
Sf is calculated from the Equivalent Square Root Time Plots equation

(illustrated above), with pint = p*, the intercept of the line at t = .
Computed Initial Pressure pcalc:
Constant Rate Build-Up, Square Root Time Plot:
where:
m is the slope of the line,
pint is the intercept of the line at t=0.

Finite Conductivity Fracture Model:
The dimensionless intercept is calculated:
i intD must be > 0.
This is the same equation as for Sf (i.e. the Equivalent Square Root Time Plots
equation illustrated above), and the same definitions of pint exist for the
different plots.
A look-up table (Reference 24) is then used to find FCD and m1D for this
particular value of intD (m1D is the theoretical slope for the Linear Flow).
Fracture Half-Length is then re-computed from:
and
where:
m is the slope from the Square-Root Plot.

Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor Spr is calculated using the Pseudo-Radial Skin equation
for a Vertical Fracture from Deliverability.
Reservoir Linear Flow

Reservoir Width:
where:
m is the slope of the line on the Linear Flow Plot.

Flow Convergence Skin Factor Sconv:
where:
S is the True (Mechanical) Skin, and the Total Skin St is calculated from the line
fitted to the Square-Root Plot using either the Constant Rate Drawdown,
Equivalent Square Root Time or Tandem Square Root calculations for Fracture
Face Skin, depending on the Test Type.
In these equations, Sf is replaced by St, and Xf by:
Distance to Nearest Boundary (L) (Reference 42):
where:
Sconv is the Flow Convergence Skin Factor (from previous section).
If the condition:

Oil Analysis (Bilinear Flow)
is not met,
is set to zero.
Computed Initial Pressure pcalc:
Constant Rate Build-Up, Square-Root Time Plot:
where:
pint is the intercept at t = 0,
m is the slope of the line.

Reservoir Bilinear Flow
Fourth-Root Time Plot:
Fracture Conductivity (kfw):
where:

Oil Analysis (Bilinear Flow) B
Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity FCD:
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor Spr:
where:
rweff is obtained from a curve-fit of:
(Reference 23, Figure 14 or Reference 60, Figure 18)
Xf from Time-to-End-of-Bilinear-Flow (tebf):
For FCD > 3:

For FCD 1.6:
where:
For 1.6 < FCD < 3, the equation
is solved by iteration on Xf as both
and
are functions of Xf.

Oil Analysis (Spherical Flow) B
Oil Analysis (Spherical Flow)

Reservoir Spherical Flow
1/Square Root Time Plot:
Partial Penetration Model:
Assuming Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations at or near the middle of the

Layer):
Vertical Permeability (kz), is given by:
where:
m is the slope of the line
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability
Gas-Cap/Aquifer Model:
Assuming Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations at or near the middle of the

Layer. kz is computed from the above equation.
Observation probe (Wireline Formation Tester)
Assuming that the observation probe is close enough to the active probe
to see spherical flow, a spherical permeability (ksph) can be computed
from:

Oil Analysis (Spherical Flow)
where:
The vertical permeability (kz) is derived from the relationship:
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability.
Active probe (Wireline Formation Tester)
The spherical permeability is computed from:
where:
m is the slope of the spherical flow line.
For hemispherical flow, the term 4m in the above equation becomes 2m',
where m is now the slope of the hemispherical flow line.
The vertical permeability (kz) is then derived from the relationship:
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability.
The spherical flow damage skin factor Ssd is calculated from the intercept of
the spherical flow line as:

Oil Analysis (Horizontal Wells) B
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability
rp is the Probe radius
pint is the intercept of the spherical flow line
Ssphc and Ssphp are internally computed geometrical skin factors.
Oil Analysis (Horizontal Wells)

Semi-Log Plot
(References 47 and 52)
Semi-Log Plot:
The Average Vertical Radial Permeability (kbar) or (k), is calculated from:
where:
m is the slope of the early Vertical Radial Flow line,
Lw is the Effective Well Length.
i For the Hemi-Radial Flow line, the 162.6 coefficient is doubled in the above
equation.

The Skin Factor (S), is calculated using the equation from Permeability and
Skin (refer to Semi-Log Plot), appropriate to the Test Type, replacing k by
k. A small Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution around the
wellbore) is applied to this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a
late Pseudo-Radial Flow Line has been fitted on the plot to obtain the
Horizontal Permeability (k), (or failing that, if a non-zero value for k exists
in the Model Parameters), the Vertical Permeability (kz) is calculated from:
and the Skin Estimate (Se) is corrected for Anisotropy by adding:
(Warren and Root - Reference 27)
where the Anisotropy (A) is given by:
It follows that the True (Mechanical) Skin (S) displayed in the Results Box is
not strictly correct until k and kz have been determined, although the
error is small.
The Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated as:
where:
m is the slope of the late (Pseudo-) Radial Flow line.
If there is areal anisotropy, then assume:

The Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is calculated from the late (Pseudo-)
Radial Flow line using the equation from Permeability and Skin (refer to
Semi-Log Plot), appropriate to the Test Type.
Log-Log Plot
Log-Log Plot:
Wellbore Storage Constants CS and CD are calculated from the equations

described in Log-Log Plot for the Unit Slope line.
Average Vertical Radial Permeability (kbar) or (k), is calculated from the

Zero-Slope line (i.e. early data) by:
where:
px is the Y-position of the line,
i For the Hemi-Radial Flow case, the 0.5 on the right-hand side of the above
equation is replaced by 1.0.
Skin Factor (S), is determined from the Zero Slope line using the Skin Factor
equations defined in the Semi-Log Plot topic (refer to Semi-Log Plot),
with k replaced by k. In these equations, the intercep term is read from
the delta-pressure at the start of the Vertical Radial Flow Regime as defined
by the Flow Regime Marker. The slope term m, is derived from the
Vertical Radial Permeability (k), using for instance, the Radial Permeability
equation from Radial Flow - Semi-Log Plot. A small Anisotropy Correction
(elliptical flow distribution around the wellbore) is applied to this to
obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a late Pseudo-Radial Flow Line has
been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal Permeability (k), (or failing
that, if a non-zero value for k exists in the Model Parameters), the Vertical
Permeability (kz) is calculated from:

It follows that the True (Mechanical) Skin (S) displayed in the Results Box is
not strictly correct until k and kz have been determined, although the error
is small.
Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated from the Zero-Slope line (i.e.
late Pseudo-Radial data) by:
where:
px is the Y-position of the line.
i For the Radial Flow at Single Fault case, the 0.5 on the right-hand side of the
above equation is replaced by 1.0.
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is determined from the Zero Slope line (i.e.
late Pseudo-Radial data), using the Skin Factor equations defined in the
Semi-Log Plot topic (refer to Semi-Log Plot). In these equations, the
intercept term is read from the delta-pressure at the start of the late
Radial Flow Regime as defined by the Flow Regime Marker. The slope
term is derived from the Radial Permeability (k), using for instance, the
Radial Permeability equation from Semi-Log Plot.

Square Root Plot
Square Root Plot:
This plot may be used in either of two ways:
1. Estimation of Effective Well Length and Convergence Skin:
This is the default computation, invoked if the command line HLLC_K_L = 0

has been added to the Configuration sub-folder of the Pansys31.ini folder (refer
to The Registry), or if the command line is absent (default).
The Effective Well Length (Lw), is calculated from:
where:
m is the slope of the line through the Linear Flow portion of the data.
The Convergence Skin (Sconv), is calculated from:
where:
S is the Mechanical Skin,
the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
and St is obtained from the intercept of the line:

where:
pint = [pi - pint(t=0)] for a Drawdown with no History, or pint = [pint(te=0) ?

p(t=0)] for an Equivalent Time Plot.
For a Build-Up using the tandem Square-Root function:
where:
S't is calculated using the earlier equation for St (above), with pint =
[p*-p(t=0)].
2. Estimation of Radial Permeability and Mechanical Skin Factor:
If the command HLLC_K_L = 1 has been added to the Configuration sub-folder

of the Pansys31.ini folder (refer to The Registry), the slope m and intercept pint
are used to calculate the Radial Permeability (k) and Mechanical Skin (S),
assuming a knowledge of Lw, kz and zwd. This option is useful when the early
Vertical Radial Flow portion of the data is obscured or is of poor quality.
A Total Skin (St), is calculated from the intercept pint (i.e. the same way as in
Option 1, using the first equation for St (above), with pint = [p*-p(t=0)]). A
Mechanical Skin (S), is derived from this by:
where:

Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) B
is a Skin Factor accounting for Flow Convergence and Anisotropy (Reference 62),
and the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis)

Plot Axes for Data
General:
The Type-Curve Plots are scaled in Real Terms, not Dimensionless Terms:
X-axis:
Constant Rate Drawdown and all Tests with No History option

switched-on:
X-axis = logt
Build-Up Tests with Constant Rate option switched-on:
X-axis = log[p/q]
All Tests with Full History option switched-on:
X-axis = Equivalent Time, as defined in Semi-Log Plot - Superposition

Function.
Y-axis:
Constant Rate Drawdown and all Tests with No History option

switched-on:
Y-axis = logp
All Tests with Full History option switched-on:
Y-axis = log[p/q]
i Refer to Slug Test Type-Curves, for the Wellbore Fill-Up or Leak-Off Test,
which has a special Y-axis definition.

i
For Pressure Extrapolation options, the Pressure Data are modified, as
described in Semi-Log Plot (Pressure Extrapolation), before any Y-axis
functioning is performed.
Pressure Derivative:
Y-axis = log p'
The Pressure Derivative (p'), is calculated according to the Time Function as

follows:
No History:
Constant Rate History:
Full History:
i Equivalent Time is as defined in Semi-Log Plot - Superposition Function.

i Corresponding derivatives can be selected for Linear Time, Square-Root Time

and Fourth-Root Time dependence.
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations
Permeability:
For data plotted as p on the Y-axis:
where:
For data plotted as (p/q) on the Y-axis:
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves

General:
[TD/CD] on X-axis (References 5 and 34):
where:
and

Storage Coefficient:
Each curve corresponds to a different value of CDe2S:
Varying Wellbore Storage Models:
Fair's Model (Reference 49):

where:
C is the Storage Amplitude (Phase Redistribution Parameter) in psi,
is the Storage Time Constant in hours,

qs is the Surface Flow Rate, and
qsf is the Instantaneous Sandface Flow Rate (at standard conditions).
The Storage Coefficient (Capp), observed at early Time (Unit Slope line), is
equivalent to:
Hegeman et al's Model (Reference 50):
Skin Pressure Drop:
For Constant Rate Tests:
For Varying Rate Tests:

where:
T is the Shut-In Time (Build-Up Analysis), or the Duration of the Flowing Period
(Drawdown Analysis).
Bounded System Type-Curves

General:
[TD/LD2] on X-axis:
where:
and TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
k is calculated by one of the two methods described in the topic for

Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations.
Characteristic Length (L), is calculated from the Time Match:

where:
L is the basic dimension that describes the Geometrical Configuration of the

Boundaries (e.g. L:2L for Parallel Faults). It is the Distance to the nearest
Boundary.
Slug Test Type-Curves

General:
[TD/CD] on X-axis for Wells open to atmospheric pressure on surface

(References 40):
i TD and CD are defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
Y-axis:
where:
pi is the Layer Pressure, and
po is the Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure.

Permeability (k), is calculated from the Time Match:
Each curve corresponds to a different value of CDe2S.
S is calculated from the matched curve CDe2S parameter, (see the Oil Analysis
(Slug Test Analysis) topic for details), using CD (as also described in the Oil
Analysis (Slug Test Analysis) topic). The Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs),
must be specified in the Well Model Parameters as an input. For Fill-Up or
Leak-Off with the Well open to the atmosphere:
where:
d = Pipe ID (inches),
= Wellbore Fluid Density (g/cm3), and

= Average Well Deviation (degrees) over the Fill-Up/Leak-Off interval.
Fractured Well Type-Curves

General:
[TDxf] on X-axis (References 23, 24 and 25),
where:

Infinite Conductivity and Uniform Flux:
Fracture Half-Length (Xf):
Each curve represents a different value of CDxf:
CD is derived from the Match-Curve value:
and

Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr):
where:
for an Infinite Conductivity Fracture, or:
for a Uniform Flux Fracture.
Finite Conductivity - Cinco-Ley [TDxf] Type-Curves:
(Reference 23)
Permeability (k), is calculated by one of the methods described in the topic

for Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations.
Fracture Half-Length (Xf), is calculated as described in the previous section

above.
Each Type-Curve corresponds to a different value of FCD:
where:
[FCD] match is the value of the Match Curve.

Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr):
Spr is calculated as described in the previous section above, with rweff from a
curve-fit of the relationship rweff/rw and FCD (presented in Reference 23).
Finite Conductivity - Wong, Harrington and Cinco-Ley Type-Curves:
i Please see Reference 44 for a description of the Wellbore Storage and Fracture
Analysis.
Dual-Porosity Type-Curves
Pressure Match Method:
[TD/CD] on X-axis (References 28, 29), where TD and CD are defined in the
topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
k, CD, CS and S are calculated as for the Homogeneous Model, using the
value of CDe2S on the late time (Total System) Match Curve (i.e. the
Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and
the first four equations from the General section of Wellbore Storage
Type-Curves).
Storativity Ratio ():
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient ():
In the transition period Type-Curve set each curve represents a different

value of e2S:

Derivative Match Method:
on X-axis, where TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage

Type-Curves.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient and Fracture System Permeability are determined

from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin (TD/CD)
Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous
Reservoir Calculations and the first four equations from the General
section of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient ():
is calculated from the Dual-Porosity Derivative Type-Curve,
Time-Axis Match:
where:
() is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type.

Storativity Ratio (), is the value on the Match Curve.
Ei Type-Curve
General:
[TD/RD2] on X-axis, where:
TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
R is the Inter-Well Distance for a Constant Rate Drawdown (qs), at the

pulsing Well.
Permeability (k), is calculated from the Pressure-Axis Match:
where PD is defined in the topic for Homogeneous Reservoir

Calculations.
Porosity-Compressibility Product comes from the Time-Axis Match:
where R is the Inter-Well Distance (ft).

Dual-Permeability Type-Curves
General:
i Only Layer 1 is assumed to be Producing.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient and Layer 1 (Producing) Permeability and Skin

are calculated from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and
Skin (TD/CD) Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and the first four equations from
the General section of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves). This assumes
that Layer 1 Properties (h1, etc.) have been specified in the Layer Parameters.
Derivative Type-Curves:
on X-axis, where TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore

Storage Type-Curves.

Inter-Layer Flow Coefficient:
is calculated from the Dual-Permeability Derivative Type-Curve,
Time-Axis Match:
In the definition of , the term kv/hv, represents the Vertical Conductivity

(refer to Interporosity Flow Coefficient in Model Parameters).
Each curve represents a different value of the Flow Capacity Ratio (),
where:
The value is read from the late-time (Total System) Match Curve.
The Storativity Ratio (), given by:
must be obtained by iteration using the Simulate Quick Match or Auto

Match options.

Radial-Composite Type-Curves
General:
The Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Inner Region Permeability and Skin are
calculated from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin
(TD/CD) Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculationsand the first four equations from
the General section of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).
[TD/RD2] on X-axis where:
and TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
Two Type-Curve sets are available:
1. Lower and Higher Mobility in Inner Region (default): RADCOMP.TCD

2. Gas Drive (Gas in Inner Region): GASDRIVE.TCD

Distance to Radial Discontinuity (Lrad):
This is determined from the Radial Composite Derivative Type-Curve

[TD/RD2] Time-Match:
Ratio of Outer to Inner Mobilities:
M is read from the late time (Outer Region Radial Flow) Match-Curve. Each
curve corresponds to a different value of M.
Outer/Inner Storativity Ratio:
must be obtained by iteration using the Simulate Quick Match or Auto

Match options.

Partial-Penetration and Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves

General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Inner Region Permeability (kp) and True Skin (S) are
calculated from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin
(TD/CD) Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous
Reservoir Calculations and the first four equations from the General section
of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves), with a user-supplied value for the
Perforated Interval Height (hp).
TDZ on the X-axis, where:
where:
h is the full Layer Thickness, and
kz is the Vertical Permeability.
Two sets of Partial Penetration Type-Curves are available:
1. Perforations in Middle (default set): MPARTPEN.TCD

2. Perforations at Top/Bottom: TPARTPEN.TCD

Two sets of Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves are available:
1. Perforations at Top (Aquifer), or Perforations at Bottom (Gas-Cap) (default set):

TGASCAP.TCG
2. Perforations in Middle: MGASCAP.TCG
i These two models are identical as far as Match calculations are concerned.
i The Match for late time data uses a set of Derivative Type-Curves with TDZ on
the Time-axis.
Vertical Permeability (kz), is determined from the Time-Match (i.e. TDZ equation
from above).
Full-Thickness Radial Permeability (k), is calculated from the Y-axis Match (i.e.
with one of the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir
Calculations), using the full Layer Thickness (h).
Each Type-Curve corresponds to a different value of the Penetration Ratio:
The Penetration Ratio is obtained from the Match Curve, and the Effective
Perforated Length (hp) is computed from this.
The Inner Region Permeability (kp), is then re-calculated using this new hp value
(i.e. with one of the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir
Calculations).
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Type-Curves

Drawdown Method for Flowing Periods, and Build-Ups using the Slider
Pressure Extrapolation:

Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the Y-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from this and the X-axis Match:
Second Cell Connected Pore Volume (V2), is then derived from the
Match-Curve value:
Build-Up Analysis Method for Build-Ups not using the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the X-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from the Y-axis Match:
Match-Curve value:

Horizontal Well Type-Curves
General:
The Horizontal Well Stage 1 Type-Curves are defined in terms of a

Dimensionless Pressure (PDL) (and its Derivative), and a Dimensionless Time
(TDH), given by:
where:
LW is the Effective Length of the Well,
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability, and
kz is the Vertical Permeability.
This differs slightly from the term TD(L/2) commonly used in published
references (References 47 and 48):
The Dimensionless Well Length (LWD), is defined as:

The Dimensionless Well Position (ZWD), is defined as:
where:
Z is the vertical distance from the Well to the Upper or Lower Boundary in a
No-Flow/No-Flow system, or to the No-Flow Boundary in a
No-Flow/Constant Pressure system.
Vertical Permeability (kz), is calculated from the Time-Match:
Radial Permeability (k), can then be obtained from the Y-axis Match:
In the Known Well Length option, the Effective Well Length (Lw), is
specified by the user, so the kr equation can be solved directly. The Well
Position (Z), is computed from the Match-Curve value (ZwD).
In the Unknown Well Length option, ZwD is specified by the user, and the
Match-Curve value of LWD has to be solved simultaneously with the kr
equation to determine kr and Lw:

Oil Analysis (Slug Test Analysis) B
i For the Dual-Porosity Model, the parameters and are determined by

iteration using Simulate Quick Match or Auto Match.
In Stage 2, the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and True Skin Factor (S), are
i
calculated from the Match by using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin
(TD/CD) Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous
Reservoir Calculations and the first four equations from the General section of
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).
Oil Analysis (Slug Test Analysis)

Pressure Integral Method
General:
This is a Slug Test Type with the Use Pressure Integral Method check box
enabled in the Test Period Classification dialog.
This uses the method proposed by Peres, Onur and Reynolds.
A Pressure Integral Function at Time (t) is defined as:
Eq. 1
where:
Eq. 2
pi = Initial (Layer) Pressure

pwf = Instantaneous Wellbore Pressure at Time (t)
I(p) has units of psi.hrs
Constant Rate Option:
This corresponds to the Type-Curve Matching part of the Analytical Procedures

section of the technical paper by Peres, Onur and Reynolds. It converts the Test
Data to an Equivalent Constant Surface Rate Test. The Wellbore Storage effects
mask the Reservoir Signal so the functioned data are really only amenable to
Type-Curve Analysis.
The Time Function dialog settings required for this are:
Use Varying Rate - disabled
dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time - disabled
The Integral Function I(p) can then be plotted versus Elapsed Time on all
diagnostic plots.
A virtual Flow Rate is computed internally as:
Eq. 3
where:
Po = Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure
This is an internal computation which overrides any value users may have
entered in the Edit Rate Changes.
The standard Analysis equations, described in the other topics for PanSystem
Equations (Oil Analysis), are then used to derive results from Line-Fits (i.e.
slope and intercept) and Type-Curve Matching.

Varying Rate Option:
This is the default option for Analysis, and corresponds to the Convolution
part of the Analytical Procedures section of the technical paper by Peres, Onur
and Reynolds. It is the optimum use of the Pressure Integral Method, because it
corrects for Wellbore Storage effects to reveal the Reservoir Signal. The
functioned data are therefore amenable to Line-Fitting on Diagnostic Plots, in
addition to Type-Curve Analysis.
The Time Function dialog settings are enabled as if for a Drawdown with a
Varying Rate. The default settings are:
Use Varying Rate - enabled

dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time - disabled
A virtual Flow Rate function is computed internally as:
Eq. 4
where:
Pwfj = Flowing Pressure at Time tj
qj = corresponding Instantaneous Flow Rate
Po = Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure
PanSystem treats the Pressure Integral Function (Eq.1) as if it were the Pressure,
and the Rate Function (Eq.4) as the Flow Rate. The Superposition, etc. logic will
process these to produce the equivalent of the standard Rate-Normalized
Pressure versus Equivalent Time Diagnostic Plots.
The Y-axis will therefore appear as:
I(dP)/(Pwf Po) instead of delta-P/delta-Q.
i The units are (psi.hrs)/psi = hrs.

The X-axis is Equivalent Time, formulated from the standard equations, but
using the virtual Flow Rates computed with Eq. 4. This applies to
Square-Root, Fourth-Root, etc. Superposition in addition to Logarithmic.
The standard Analysis equations, described in the other topics for PanSystem
Equations (Oil Analysis), are then used to derive results from Line-Fits (i.e.
slope and intercept) and Type-Curve Matching.
Deconvolution Option:
Deconvolution is the third option described in the technical paper by Peres,

Onur and Reynolds.
This simply involves disabling the Superposition Function and using Elapsed
Time, while retaining Rate Normalization on the Y-axis. The Time Function
dialog settings required for this are:
Use Varying Rate - disabled

dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time - enabled
The Y-axis will therefore appear as:
I(dP)/(Pwf Po)
The X-axis will be Elapsed Time instead of Equivalent Time.
Ramey et al Type-Curves
General:
This is a Slug Test Type with the Use Pressure Integral Method check box
disabled in the Test Period Classification dialog.
With this setting, the data should only be Analyzed using the Ramey, Agarwal
and Martin Type-Curves for a Radial Homogeneous Reservoir.
The X-axis uses Elapsed Time (log t).
The Y-axis function is:

where:
po = Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure
where:
pwf is the Instantaneous Wellbore Pressure at Time (t).
Permeability (k) is derived from the X-axis (Time) Match:
Skin factor (S) is derived from the Match Curve Identifier (CDe2S):
where:
For a Slug Test, the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) is given by:
where:
d = Pipe Inside Diameter or ID (inches)

Oil Analysis (PanWizard Equations)
= Wellbore Fluid Density (gm/cm3)

= Average Angle of Pipe Deviation (degrees) over the Fill-Up (or Leak-Off)
Interval (i.e. over the Length of Tubing along which the liquid movement
occurs).
i These parameters are all assumed to be constant for the duration of the Slug
Test.
i Refer also to Slug Test Type-Curves.
Oil Analysis (PanWizard Equations)

Testing Time Advisor
General:
Several useful calculations are made for Oil Well Tests in the PanWizard for
Test Design, in the Testing Time Advisor section:
Fluid Compression/Expansion:
(bbls/psi)
where:
Vwb is the Wellbore Volume (bbls), and
cwbf is the Average Compressibility of the Fluid in the Wellbore (psi-1).
Moving Liquid Column:
(bbls/psi)

Oil Analysis (PanWizard Equations) B
where:
Awb is the Cross-Sectional Area of the Wellbore (ft2),
wbf is the Density of the moving Wellbore Fluid, and
is the Average Angle of Deviation of the Well over the interval covered by the
Fluid Movement.
Time to End of Wellbore Storage:
This is twice the value in the classical equation (Reference 2), and is more
consistent with the behavior of the Pressure Derivative. It gives a Time which
is about 60% longer than the 1% Afterflow criterion.
Cs is the Wellbore Storage Coefficient, and
St is the Total Skin (i.e. S + DQ) - (for a Gas or Condensate Well).
The equation tends to underestimate the Time when D > 0.
Time to Detect Closest Boundary:
This is the minimum Test Duration required in order to be able to discern with
some confidence a Change of Slope on the Semi-Log Plot, indicative of a
heterogeneity at a Distance (R) from the Well.
This is simply the Time required to be sure that there is a Change of Slope; it
does not allow time for the new trend to develop fully. In terms of the
Log-Log Plot, the Derivative will just start to leave the Zero-Slope Radial Flow
line. In order to characterize the heterogeneity (e.g. Single Fault, Change of kh,
etc), at least another Log Cycle of Test Time will be required.
The same equations as for Radius of Investigation are used (i.e. the equations
from the Radius of Investigation section of the Semi-Log Plot topic), but in this
case, the input is Distance, and the output is Time.

Gas Analysis
Time to Reach Semi-Steady-State:
This is the Time required to detect the Boundary farthest from the Well in a
Closed system. The same equations are used as for the Time to Detect Closest
Boundary (see above).
Gas Analysis
Overview
General:
The Gas Well Test Analysis equations are very similar to those used for Oil,
with Pressure optionally replaced by Pseudo-Pressure (m(p)) or
Pressure-Squared (p2) (References 20 and 21), and Time optionally replaced by
Pseudo-Time (t') (Reference 41). There is the following correspondence
between Plot Axes terms:
Oil Gas
p
p m (p)*1E-06
or p2* 1E-06
p
p m(p)* 1E-06
or p2 * 1E-06
t t or t'
t t or t'
i
The Pseudo-Pressure and Pressure-Squared Axes Units are divided by 1E06
for display purposes (e.g. psi2/cP (*1E-06)). The slopes and intercepts
reported on these plots will also contain this factor, and therefore take the
numerical values as they appear on the plot.
The Pseudo-Time t', is the normalized form of the Pseudo-Time ta(p) defined in
Agarwal's paper (Reference 41):

Overview B
where the constants gi and Cti are at reservoir conditions (i.e. in the Fluid
Parameters dialog; Check Pressure = Player and Check Temperature = Tlayer). This
gives it the units of hours rather than psi.hrs/cp.
Agarwal defined the un-normalized Pseudo-Time at Pressure Point ta(pn) as:
where:
In PanSystem, the integral and summation are performed at plotting time,

from a table of Pressure versus g(p) and Ct(p) prepared in the Fluid Parameters
section of Data Preparation.
Only equations for the m(p) option will be cited in most instances in this
section; m(p) is defined by the integral (Reference 1):
For the p2 approximation, replace the Surface Gas Flow Rate (qsg) by:
and m(p) by p2 in all equations, unless otherwise stated.

Gas Analysis (Radial Flow)
For the p approximation, replace the Surface Gas Flow Rate (qsg) by:
and m(p) by p in all equations, unless otherwise stated.
Condensate Fluid Type:
For the analysis of Condensate Well Tests with the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
option switched-off, the Condensate is modeled in the Reservoir as a
Single-Phase Wet Gas, representing a recombination of the Separator Gas and
associated Liquid Condensate, assumed to be above the Dew-Point.
To this end, all input Separator Gas Flow Rates are converted internally to Wet
Gas Rates by multiplying by (1 + CGR x Vvap x 1E-6).
i The term qsg in the Gas Analysis equations refers to this Wet Stream Rate for
Condensate Well Tests.

Log-Log Plot
Log-Log Plot:
Apparent Wellbore Volume (V):
where:
m(p)int is the value of m(p) at 1 hour (psi2/cP),
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day), and
T' is the Reservoir Temperature ( R).

Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) B
Dimensionless Storage Coefficient (CD):
where:
Twb is the Average Wellbore Temperature, and is assumed to be equal to the

Reservoir Temperature T' ( R), so the two Temperatures cancel.
Storage Coefficient (Cs):
where:
Cgi is the Isothermal Gas Compressibility at Reservoir Conditions (Fluid Parameters

dialog).
Log-Log Plot Radial Permeability (k):
This is determined from a Zero-Slope line by (for the m(p) option):
where:
m(p) is the Y-axis position of the line,

T' is the Reservoir Temperature ( R), and
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day).
i For plots with rate-normalized Pseudo-Pressure on the Y-axis, set qsg = 1.0 in
the equation.

Skin Factor (S):
This is determined from the Zero-Slope line using the general form of the
Skin Factor equations defined in Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot.
i
The term general means before setting the Time, or Time Function, to 1.0 to
define an intercept (refer to the Skin Factor equation for the Log-Log Plot for an
example).
Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot:
Dual-Porosity Model:
Storativity Ratio (), from the positions of the System Radial Flow and
Transition to System Radial Flow Zero-Slope lines. This is derived from a
curve-fit relating the value of () to the depth of the Derivative Trough (i.e.
value of the Derivative at the bottom of the Trough divided by the value of
the Derivative in System Radial Flow).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (), from the time tx at the end of the
Transition to System Radial Flow Regime; this is described in Other
Calculations from the Log-Log Plot for an Oil Fluid Type.
Semi-Log Plot
General:
Permeability and Skin:
Please refer to Semi-Log Plot for details on the calculations performed for
Semi-Log (Radial Flow) Plots. The following differences should be noted:
1. Permeability (k), for the m(p) option:
where:
m is the slope of the line (per log10 cycle),
T' is the Reservoir Temperature ( R),

qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day).
2. Permeability (k), for the p2 approximation option:
3. Permeability (k), for the Pressure (p) approximation option:
i In each of the above three cases, for Superposition Plots where the Y-axis is
normalized with respect to Flow Rate, qsg is omitted from the equation.
4. Skin Factor (S):
In the equations for S (i.e. refer to Semi-Log Plot for details), replace the
Pressure terms (p) by Pseudo-Pressure (m(p)) or Pressure-Squared (p2), o by
gi and Ct by Cti.
For example, in the case of a generalized Superposition ("Full History"):
where:
int is the intercept of the line of slope m at fr = 0 (Equivalent Time = 1.0 hrs.), and

Other Calculations from the Semi-Log Plot:
Permeability and Skin Factor from Single Fault Radial Flow Line:
where:
m' is the slope of the line, and
L is the Distance to the Boundary.
Radius of Investigation (Rinv):
Refer to Semi-Log Plot.
Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc:
For the MDH Build-Up Plot ("No History"):
The corresponding Pressure pcalc is read from the Pseudo-Pressure Table.
For the p2 approximation:
and:

For the Build-Up Plot using (Agarwal) Equivalent Time (Constant Rate
History, not Horner):
For Superposition Plots using Equivalent Time (Full History, not

Horner):
(also refer to Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot)
The corresponding Pressure pcalc is then read from the Pseudo-Pressure

Table.
Skin Pressure Drop:
First compute:
and:
where p0 is the last Flowing Pressure (i.e. for a Drawdown) or Pressure at the
instant of shut-in (i.e. for a Build-Up), so that m(p)corr is the flowing
Pseudo-Pressure corrected for Skin (i.e. the value if Skin were zero).
pcorr, the Zero-Skin Flowing Pressure, is obtained from m(p)corr via the
look-up table. The Skin Pressure Drop is then:

A similar logic is applied in the p2 option, where:
and
pcorr is then:
and
i A check is made that m(p)corr or (p2)corr are not negative.
Flow Efficiency FE:

where:
pwf is the flowing pressure at the end of the flowing period, and
m(p)skin is calculated with the equation in the Skin Pressure Drop section.
i A similar definition applies to the p2 option - refer to the Note in the General
section of Gas AnalysisOverview).
Average Reservoir Pressure PMBH:
For Build-Up Tests, when the Boundary Configuration is Closed System, an

Average Reservoir Pressure is calculated by the MBH (Matthew, Brons and
Hazebroek) Method described inSemi-Log Plot, with appropriate
modifications for Gas.
This is only valid if the preceding Drawdown has reached Semi-Steady-State.
For example, the MBH equation for p for a Gas Well becomes:
where:
m(p*) is the extrapolated or calculated Initial Pseudo-Pressure from the

Semi-Log line.
pDMBH is also defined in Log-Log Plot.
p is then read from the p versus m(p) look-up table.

Multi-Phase Flow:
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures (Reference 18):
i
In case of the Multi-Phase Gas and Condensate Fluid Type options, all specified
Flow Rates (i.e. Gauge Data, Rate Changes) refer to the Separator Gas Phase.
Other Phase Flow Rates are computed from the Gas Flow Rate using WGR and
CGR.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Tables can be generated in PanSystem for rigorous

modeling of multi-phase effects and fluid property behavior.
Tables can also be imported as a file from an external source. The *.PSP file
structure is described in Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File. The Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure is also defined in Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure. On
import, the Pseudo-Pressures are converted for compatibility with the m(p)
analysis logic existing in PanSystem.
Internally, PanSystem computes the End-Point Permeability to Gas (k=keffg(Swi)),

from the slope m of the Radial Flow Line. The Effective Permeabilities keffg, keffw
and keffo at the current saturation Sw are computed from this using the Relative
Permeabilities:
keffg = k.krg = keffg(Swi) x krg(Sw), etc.
The Total Mobility:
is computed from the sum of the Phase Mobilities:
and replaces the Gas Mobility term:

in all equations (i.e. Skin Factor, Rinv, etc.) containing the Diffusivity term.
Intersection Time Calculations:
Distance to Linear and Radial Discontinuities:
Refer to Semi-Log Plot, and the definitions in the equations for PD and
L (Time and Equivalent Time).
Dual-Porosity Calculations:
Storativity:
where Y is the Vertical Separation (i.e. m(p)) between early and late
Parallel lines.
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient:
Refer to Semi-Log Plot and the related equations.
Matrix Block Permeability/Height2:
Refer to Semi-Log Plot and the related equations.
Pressure Extrapolation Option:
Pressures are corrected as explained (refer to Semi-Log Plot (Pressure

Extrapolation), before converting to m(p) or p2 for the plots.
Cartesian Plot
Closed System Model:
Apparent Wellbore Volume V (bbls):

where:
m is the slope of the line fitted to the early data (psi2/cp/hr),
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day),
T' is the Reservoir Temperature ( R).
Dimensionless Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cd):
This is computed using the equation from the Log-Log Plot topic.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs):
This is also computed using the equation from the Log-Log Plot topic.
Drainage Area (A) - (acres):
where m* is the slope of the line (negative).
Radius of Drainage [rA]:
This is computed using the equation from the Cartesian Plot.
where:
St = S + Dqsg [1E+03],
m(p)int = intercept of the line at t = 0, and

Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model:
Drawdown Analysis Option:
For Flowing Tests, and Build-Up Tests plotted using the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation Correction:
Drainage area (A) - (First Cell):
Calculated in the same way as for Closed System Model above.
Calculated in the same way as for Closed System Model above.
Volume of Gas Reserves:
Bg is the Gas Volume Factor at initial conditions, and the Volume is

reported at standard conditions.
For the Condensate Fluid Type, Vgas is the Dry Gas Volume, obtained by
dividing the above equation by:
First Cell Volume (V1) (Total Connected Pore Volume (ft3)):

Total Volume (Vtot) (Total Connected Pore Volume of the Two Cells (ft3)):
where m2* is the slope of the second (Total System) line.
Inter-Cell Transmissibility (Teff):
where:
tint is the Time (or Equivalent Time) of the intersection of the First Cell
and Total System lines, and
V2 is the Volume of the Second Cell = Vtot -V1.
Build-up Analysis Option:
For Build-Up Tests plotted without the Slider Pressure Extrapolation

Correction:
Second Cell Volume (V2) (Connected Pore Volume (ft3)):
where:
V' is computed from the slope of the line m* using the Drainage Area
(A) equation from the Closed System Model section (above), and the
First Cell Volume (V1) equation from the Drawdown Analysis Option in
this section. V' is an intermediate term, and does not correspond to
any physical Volume.
V1 is a user input unless derived from Drawdown Analysis.

Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin
Flow-After-Flow Tests:
Radial Flow Plot:
Y-axis:
where:
m(p) and qn refer to the nth data point.
qn = qn - qt=0 where qn is the Flow Rate at the nth data point, and
qt=0 is the Flow Rate at the start of the Flow Period.
X-axis:
Superposition Function (Full History) fr defined in Semi-Log Plot.
For each line, the Permeability is calculated from the slope (Semi-Log Plot
m(p) Permeability option with qsg = 1), and the Total Skin Factor (St), from
the Semi-Log Plot option.
S versus Q Plot:
X-axis:
Normalized Flow Rate (MMscf/day):
Y-axis:
Normalized Total Skin St = S + DQjnorm
where:
qj is the Surface Flow Rate during Flow Period j,

qj-1 is the Flow Rate during the preceding Flow Period.
For the Flowing Periods of an Isochronal Test (where qj-1= 0), Qjnorm = qj.
For the Shut-In Periods of an Isochronal Test (where qj = 0), Qjnorm = qj-1.
For Flow-After-Flow Production Tests, where q is always positive (as

opposed to Injection Tests), Qnorm simplifies to:
This functioning of q is necessary because of the nature of the

Superposition Function used, and the fact that the Y-axis of the Semi-Log
Plot is normalized with respect to q, not q.
The alternative presentation provided when the Reference Back to Pi

option is switched-on under the Tf icon, plots True Total Skin St = S + DQj
versus True Flow Rate Qj in all cases.
i
Both methods are theoretically rigorous and should give the same answers for S
and D (i.e. provided the correct Initial Pressure (Pi) is used in the second
method).
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D):
D = m(1E+03) in (Mscf/day)-1
where m is the slope of the line.
Darcy Skin Factor (S):
S = intercept of line at Q or Qnorm = 0.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F):
in psi2/cp/(Mscf/day)2.

where:
T' is in R
Radial Flow Plot corrected for Rate-Dependence:
The Y-axis is now:
or, for the p2 analysis option:
or, for the Pressure (p) analysis option:
If a new line is fitted, k and S are calculated as for the first Radial Flow
Plot. The F and D Coefficients are retained from the second plot. If users
change F, the D term is re-computed from:
in (Mscf/day)-1.
Other Calculations:
Please refer to the sections following Other Calculations for Semi-Log Plots
for calculation of Skin Pressure Drop, etc.

Isochronal Tests:
The Drawdowns and Build-Ups are analyzed in the same way, using the
same theory as for the Flow-After-Flow Test described in the previous
section.
Other Calculations:
Please refer to the sections following Other Calculations for Semi-Log Plots
for calculation of Skin Pressure Drop, etc.
Deliverability
General:
If users do not select the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method (refer to Well,

Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog), Condensate Well Tests are analyzed
assuming a Single-Phase Wet Stream in the Reservoir. Therefore, for
Condensate Fluid Type, all Flow Rates in the following equations are Wet
Stream Rates, related to Separator Gas by:
qsg(wet) = qsg(sep)(1 + CGR x Vvap x (1E-6)) in MMcsf/day
i
PanSystem uses Wet Stream Rates internally. All computed Flow Rates
(AOF, Stabilized Rates, IPR) are declared as Separator Gas Rates; no such
corrections are necessary for Dry Gas Fluid Type.
C-and-n Plot:
Y-axis:
X-axis:

where:
psi is the Shut-In Pressure prior to each Flowing Period (Isochronal Test),
or the Initial Shut-In Pressure (Flow-After-Flow Test). For the final
Extended Flow Period, psi is the Layer Pressure. It is usually taken as p*
from the final Build-Up, or some other estimate of Reservoir Pressure.
n-exponent:
C-coefficient:
where:
int = value of p2 at qs= 1.0 MMscf/day.
Absolute Open Flow Potential:
where:
pres is the Layer Pressure.
C-and-n Deliverability Calculations:
The Extended Data C-coefficient, n-exponent and AOF are carried through
from the C-and-n Plot (Extended Flow Point) described in the preceding
section.
The Stabilized Flow Rate is the theoretical Rate which would be attained if
the Well were to be flowed to stabilization (i.e. Semi-Steady-State) at the
Stabilized Flowing Pressure pwf(stab) (taken to be the last Flowing Pressure of
the Extended Period):

where:
and A is the Drainage Area (acres).
Stabilized C-coefficient:
where:
n is the Extended Exponent.
Stabilized AOF:
This is obtained from the AOF equation in the previous section, using Cstab.
Total Skin Factor (St):
This is the current value from a previous Test Analysis (i.e. normally the
Build-Up following the Extended Flowing Period).
Skin Pressure Loss:
Firstly, compute:

where:
This corresponds to the slope (per log10 cycle) of the Build-Up Semi-Log
Plot following the Extended Flowing Period. Permeability (k), is carried
through from the Deliverability dialog.
The theoretical Flowing Pressure at zero Skin is then calculated:
where:
pwf(ext) is the Extended Flowing Pressure.
Then:
and:
Flow Efficiency:
where:
p2(S=0) is defined above, in the previous section.

Damage Ratio:
where:
text is the duration of the Extended Flowing Period.
Time to Stabilization:
i The default value for A is 640 acres (259 ha), the area of 1 section.
Stabilized Flow Rate:
This is carried through from the Deliverability dialog (i.e. n-exponent from
previous section).
Deliverability Plots:
Flow Rates are calculated for values of Flowing Pressure between 14.7 psia
and Layer Pressure (pres):
using the current stabilized n-exponent, and the selected extended or

stabilized C-coefficient.

LIT Plot:
Y-axis:
, or
depending on the selected analysis method.
X-axis:
where:
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate for each Flowing Period,
m(p) = m(psi) - m(pwf),
p2 = p2si - p2wf ,
p = psi - pwf and
psi is the Shut-In Pressure prior to each Flowing Period (Isochronal Test),
or the Initial Shut-In Pressure (Flow-After-Flow Test). For the final
Extended Flow Period, psi is the Layer Pressure. It is usually taken as p*
from the final Build-Up, or some other estimate of Reservoir Pressure.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F):
For the p2 option, the slope is divided by gizi
For the p option, the slope is divided by gizi/2pi

Darcy Flow Coefficient (B):
(in psi2/cp/Mscf/day)
For the p2 option, the intercept is first multiplied by 1/gizi in the above
equation
For the p option, the intercept in the above equation is first multiplied by
(2E-06)pi/gizi
Absolute Open Flow Potential:
The AOF is calculated as the root qsg of the Deliverability equation:
at pwf = 14.7 psia, multiplied by (1E?03) for MMscf/day.
In p2 form:
In p form:
LIT Deliverability Calculations:
From Transient Test Results (Radial Flow Plot, etc.):
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B):
The Semi-Steady-State Radial Inflow equation is used:
(in psi2/cp/Mscf/day)

where:
A is the Drainage Area (acres),
k, Spr, A and CA are read from the Deliverability dialog.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D):
The D and F coefficients are related by the equation presented in

Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin.
AOF:
The AOF is calculated from the AOF equation described in the previous
section at pwf = 14.7 psia.
The Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) equation (presented above) requires a

Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr) for those models which do not exhibit
Radial Flow at early time. This is calculated from the True or Mechanical
Skin Factor (S), that has been derived from welltest analysis, and is
displayed on the IPR dialog.
The conversions between S and Spr are listed after the Productivity Index (J)
equation in the Oil Deliverability section. For the Radial Homogeneous
Model, Spr = S.
Similar conversions are necessary for the Non-Darcy Skin Coefficients.

Pseudo-Radial Dpr is calculated from the True D derived from the welltest
analysis as follows. Dpr (and Fpr) are displayed on the IPR dialog. For the
Radial Homogeneous Model, Dpr = D.
For models where the late time Radial Flow corresponds to a Permeability
or Permeability Thickness which is different from the Layer Parameter k (i.e.
Radial-Composite, Dual-Permeability), a Pseudo-Radial kpr is also computed.
For the Radial-Homogeneous Model, kpr = k.
The following conversions are used for the Non-Darcy Skin Coefficients:
Radial-Homogeneous: D pr = D
Dual-Porosity: D pr = D
Vertical Fracture: D pr = D
Dual-Permeability:

where the Flow Capacity Ratio () is defined in Model Parameters - Flow

Capacity Ratio.
For this model, the Full Thickness Permeability is computed as:
and this is used instead of k in the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) equation
(presented above).
Partial-Penetration:
where:
Radial-Composite:
where M is the Outer/Inner Region Mobility Ratio defined in Model

Parameters - Mobility Ratio.
For this model, the Outer Region Permeability is computed as kpr = Mk,
where k is the Inner Region Permeability; kpr is used instead of k for the
Productivity Index in the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) equation (presented
above).
Horizontal Well Models:

where the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
From Test Data (LIT Plot):
D is calculated from the value of F carried through from the LIT Plot, using
the equation presented in Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin
(i.e. provided a value has been entered for k in the Transient Welltest Data
area).
AOF is calculated from AOF equation described in the previous section at pwf =
14.7 psia.
Deliverability Plots:
Flow Rates are calculated for values of pwf between 14.7 psia and the Layer
Pressure (as specified at the top of the Deliverability dialog). This is done by
solving for the root qj of the Deliverability AOF equation described in the
previous section, for each Flowing Pressure pj.
These are then plotted as pwf versus qsg on linear scales, or as:
Gas and Condensate Systems:
The Flow Rate is determined at each time-step tj by an inflow/outflow

analysis. The Inflow Curve is computed at time tj using the Pd(Td) function
appropriate for the selected Reservoir and Boundary Models. The Outflow
Curve is either the specified constant BHFP, or the BHFP versus Flow Rate
Curve read from the VFP Flowing Pressure file. The actual Flow Rate and
Flowing Pressure at time tj are determined by the intersection of the two
curves. This is repeated for each time-step, resulting in a declining
Production Profile.

For Closed Systems with No-Flow Boundaries, the Layer Pressure p(tj), is
re-computed at each time-step tj from the Cumulative Volume of Produced Fluid
Gp(tj) up to that point (no Layer Pressure computation is made for Non-Closed
Systems, nor for Closed Systems with Constant Pressure Boundaries, since there is
no depletion).
To do this, the material balance equation (assuming no Water Influx) is solved

for p(tj) by iteration.
where:
is the Total Depletion at time tj,
Gp(tj) is the Cumulative Volume of Gas Produced up to the time tj (at standard
conditions),
is the Initial Volume of Gas in Place (at standard conditions),
zi is the Initial z-factor, and
is the Initial Gas Volume Factor, both at Initial Pressure pi and Layer
Temperature Ti.

Gas Analysis (Bilinear Flow) B
Gas Properties are re-evaluated at this new Average Layer Pressure p(tj) and
used in the inflow calculation for the next time-step. This yields the
Production Rate at time tj+1. The new Cumulative Production Gp(tj+1) is then
estimated, and the Average Layer Pressure p(tj+1) recomputed, and so on...
i
For Condensate Systems, all calculations are performed with the Wet Stream
Flow Rates referred to in the opening paragraph of Deliverability. However, the
displayed Production Rates and Cumulative Production figures are for the
Separator Gas.
Gas Analysis (Bilinear Flow)

Reservoir Bilinear Flow
Fourth-Root Time Plot:
where:
m is the slope of the line on the Fourth-Root Plot.
Calculations for FCD, S, and Xf from tebf are described in Reservoir

Bilinear Flow.
Gas Analysis (Spherical Flow)

Reservoir Spherical Flow
1/Square-Root Time Plot:
Partial Penetration Model:
Assuming Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations in the middle of the Layer):
Vertical Permeability (kz):

Gas Analysis (Horizontal Wells)
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability, and
Gas-Cap/Aquifer Model:
Assuming Hemi-Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations at the top or bottom of the

Layer), and replace the 24.7 by (24.7 x 4) in the above equation.

Semi-Log Plot
General:
For the p2 option, replace qsg by qsggizi.
For the p option, replace qsg by qsggizi/ 2pi.
Semi-Log Plot:
The Average Vertical Radial Permeability (kbar) or (k), is calculated from:
where:
m is the slope of the early Radial Flow line, and
i For the Hemi-Radial Flow case, the 1637 coefficient is doubled in the above
equation.

Gas Analysis (Horizontal Wells) B
The Skin Factor (S), is calculated using the appropriate equation from
Semi-Log Plot, according to the Test Type, replacing k by k. A small
Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution around the wellbore) is
applied to this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a late Pseudo-Radial
Flow Line has been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal Permeability (k),
(or failing that, if a non-zero value for k exists in the Model Parameters), the
Vertical Permeability (kz) is calculated from:
It follows that the True (Mechanical) Skin (S) displayed in the Results Box is not
strictly correct until k and kz have been determined, although the error is
small.
The Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated as:
where:
m is the slope of the late (Pseudo-) Radial Flow line,
h is the Layer Thickness, and
qsg is in MMscf/day.

If there is Areal Anisotropy, then:
The Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is calculated from the late

Pseudo-Radial Flow line using the appropriate equation from Semi-Log
Plot, according to the Test Type.
Log-Log Plot
General:
Log-Log Plot:
Apparent Wellbore Volume (V) and Wellbore Storage Constants (CS) and (CD)
are calculated by the first three equations from Gas Analysis (Radial Flow)
Log-Log Plot for the Unit Slope line.
The Average Vertical Radial Permeability kbar or (k), is calculated from the
Zero-Slope line (early data) by:
where:
px is the Y-position of the line, and
i For the Hemi-Radial Flow case, the 1637 coefficient is doubled in the above
equation.

The Skin Factor (S), is calculated using the appropriate equation from
Semi-Log Plot, according to the Test Type, replacing k by k. A small
Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution around the wellbore) is
applied to this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a late Pseudo-Radial
Flow Line has been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal Permeability (k),
(or failing that, if a non-zero value for k exists in the Model Parameters), the
Vertical Permeability (kz) is calculated from:
It follows that the True (Mechanical) Skin (S) displayed in the Results Box is not
strictly correct until k and kz have been determined, although the error is
small.
Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated from the Zero-Slope line

(late Pseudo-Radial data) by:
where:
px is the Y-position of the line.
i For the Radial Flow at Single Fault case, the 0.5 on the right is replaced by 1.0
in the above equation.

The Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is determined from the Zero-Slope line
(late Pseudo-Radial data) using the Skin Factor equations defined in
Semi-Log Plot. In these equations, the intercept term is read from the
Delta-Pressure at the start of the late Radial Flow Regime as defined by the
Flow Regime Marker. The slope term is derived from the Radial
Permeability (k), using for example, the Permeability for m(p) equation in
Semi-Log Plot.
Square-Root Plot
General:
Square-Root Plot:
This plot may be used in either of two ways:
1. Estimation of Effective Well Length and Convergence Skin:
This is the default computation, invoked if the command line HLLC_K_L = 0

has been added to the Configuration sub-folder of the Pansys31.ini folder (refer
to Windows Registry), or if the command line is absent (default).
The Effective Well Length (Lw), is given by:
where:
m is the slope of the line through the Linear Flow portion of the data.
The Convergence Skin (Sconv), is calculated from:

where:
S is the Mechanical Skin.
St is obtained from the intercept of the line:
where:
m(p)int = [m(pi)-m(p)int(t=0) ] for a Drawdown with no History, or
m(p)int = [m(p)int(te=0) - m(p)(t=0)] for an Equivalent Time Plot.
For a Build-Up using the Tandem Square-Root Function:
where:
St is calculated using the earlier equation for St (above) with:
m(p)int = [m(p*) - m(p)(t=0)]
2. Estimation of Radial Permeability and Mechanical Skin Factor:
If the command HLLC_K_L = 1 has been added to the Configuration sub-folder

of the Pansys31.ini file (refer to The Registry), the slope m and intercept
m(p)int are used to calculate the Radial Permeability (k) and Mechanical Skin
(S), assuming a knowledge of Lw, kz and zwd. This option is useful when the
early Vertical Radial Flow portion of the data is obscured or is of poor quality.
A Total Skin (St), is calculated from the intercept m(p)int in the same way as in
Option 1 described above.

Gas Analysis (Type Curve Analysis)
Mechanical Skin (S), is derived from this by:
where:
is a Skin Factor accounting for Flow Convergence and Anisotropy (Reference 62),
where the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:

Plot Axes for Data
General:
Refer to Plot Axes for Data. The p and p terms are replaced by m(p) or
m(p), or their p2 equivalents, where appropriate.
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations

General:
Permeability:
For Constant Rate Drawdowns and Build-Ups:

Gas Analysis (Type Curve Analysis) B
where:
qsg is the Flow Rate at Surface (Constant Rate Drawdown) or the last Rate
before Shut-In (Build-Up) in MMscf/day.
For Variable Rate Superposition Plots with a Rate Normalized Y-axis, set qsg = 1
in the above equation, and for m(p)match read {m(p)/q}match.
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves

General:
X-axis:
[TD/CD], where:
TD and CD are defined in Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
Apparent Wellbore Volume:
From the Time-Match (i.e. Real, Pseudo or Equivalent Superposition Time):
where T'wb, the Average Wellbore Temperature, is assumed equal to the

Reservoir Temperature (T'), so the two Temperatures cancel.
Storage Coefficients:
CD: Refer to Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
CS: Refer to Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.

Skin Factor:
Skin Pressure Drop:
Refer to the equations in the Skin Pressure Drop section of Gas Analysis
(Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot.
Refer to the Radius of Investigation section of Oil Analysis (Radial Flow)

Semi-Log Plot.
Bounded System Type-Curves

General:
X-axis:
[TD/LD2], where:
and TD is defined in Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
Permeability:
This is computed from the equation for (k) in Homogeneous Reservoir

Calculations.
Characteristic Length (L):
Refer to Bounded System Type-Curves.

Fractured Well Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TDxf] (References 23, 24, 25).
TDxf is defined in Fractured Well Type-Curves.
Permeability:

Calculations.
Fracture Half-Length Xf:
Refer to Fractured Well Type-Curves.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor:
Refer to Fractured Well Type-Curves.
Fracture conductivity kfw and FCD:
Refer to Fractured Well Type-Curves for the Time-Axis Match.
Dual-Porosity Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TD/CD] or [TD/4]
Permeability:

Calculations.
Refer to Dual-Porosity Type-Curves for the Time-Axis Match.

Ei Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TD/RD2]
Permeability:

Calculations.
Refer to Ei Type-Curvefor the Time-Axis Match.
Dual Permeability Type-Curves

General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Permeability and Skin Factor:
These are calculated with the [TD/CD] Type-Curves using the equation for
(k) from Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and the relevant
equations from Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
Inter-Layer Flow Coefficient (), Flow Capacity Ratio () and

Storativity Ratio ():
These are calculated as described in Dual-Permeability Type-Curves.
Radial Composite Type-Curves

General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Inner Region Permeability and Skin

Factor:
Distance to Discontinuity, Outer/Inner Region Mobility and Storativity

Ratios:
Refer to Radial-Composite Type-Curves.

Partial-Penetration and Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves
General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Near Wellbore Permeability and Skin

Factor:
Vertical Permeability and Perforation Length (Penetration Ratio):
Refer toPartial-Penetration and Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves.
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Type-Curves

Drawdown Method for Flowing Periods, and Build-Ups using the Slider
Pressure Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the Y-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from this and the X-axis Match:
Match-Curve value:
Build-Up Analysis Method for Build-Ups not using the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the X-axis Match:

First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from the Y-axis Match:
Match-Curve value:
Horizontal Well Type-Curves

General:
Horizontal Well Type-Curve Analysis for Gas Wells is similar to that for
Horizontal Well Type-Curves, with a few modifications:
The Dimensionless Y-axis (pDL) function is now defined as (for

Pseudo-Pressure):
with qsg in MMscf/day.
The Dimensionless Time Function (TDH) is, as for Oil:
where t represents Real, Pseudo or Equivalent Superposition Time.
The Vertical Permeability (kz) is obtained from the Time Match:

Gas Analysis (PanWizard Equations) B
Horizontal Permeability (k) is calculated from the Pressure Match:
For the p2 approximation option, replace qsg by qsggizi.
For the p approximation option, replace qsg by qsggizi/ 2pi.
i For other aspects of the Matching process, refer to Horizontal Well

Type-Curves.
Gas Analysis (PanWizard Equations)

Testing Time Advisor
General:
Several useful calculations are made for Gas and Condensate Well Tests in the
PanWizard for Test Design, in the Testing Time Advisor and Flow Rate
Advisor sections.
Testing Time Advisor:
Fluid Compression/Expansion:
(bbls/psi)
where:
Vwb is the Wellbore Volume (bbls), and

cwbf is the Average Compressibility of the Fluid in the Wellbore (psi-1).
Time to End of Wellbore Storage:
This is twice the value in the classical equation (Reference 2), and is more
consistent with the behavior of the Pressure Derivative. It gives a time which is
about 60% longer than the 1% Afterflow criterion. The Wellbore Storage
Coefficient (Cs) and the Gas Viscosity () are at initial conditions, and the Total
Skin (St) is given by (S + DQ). When the Turbulent Skin Effect is strong, the
computed time may be an underestimate.
Time to Detect Closest Boundary:
This is the minimum Test Duration required in order to be able to discern with
some confidence a change of slope on the Semi-Log Plot, indicative of a
heterogeneity at a Distance (R) from the Well.
This is simply the time required to be certain that there is a change of slope; it
does not allow time for the new trend to develop fully. In terms of the
Log-Log Plot, the Derivative will just start to leave the Zero-Slope Radial Flow
line.
i In order to characterize the heterogeneity (e.g. Single Fault, Change of kh, etc.),
at least another Log Cycle of Test Time will be required.
The same equations as those used for Radius of Investigation are applied (i.e.
Semi-Log Plot), but in this case, the input is Distance, and the output is
Time.
Time to Reach Semi-Steady-State:
This is the Time required to detect the Boundary farthest from the Well in a
Closed System. The same equations as those used for the Time to Detect Closest
Boundary are applied (refer to previous section above).

Gas Analysis (PanWizard Equations) B
Flow Rate Advisor
General:
Several useful calculations are made for Gas and Condensate Well Tests in the
PanWizard for Test Design, in the Flow Rate Advisor and Testing Time
Advisor sections.
For Gas and Condensate Welltest Design, to assist in the appropriate choice of
Flow Rate, estimates can be obtained of the maximum safe Production Rate to
avoid erosion of the Tubing, and the minimum Production Rate to prevent the
Well loading-up with liquid (e.g. Condensed Water, Formation Water, Oil).
Maximum Recommended Flow Rate (Erosional Limit):
(MMscf/day)
where:
(ft/sec)
is the Threshold Erosional Velocity (Reference 69), and:
d is the ID of Tubing (inches),
Bg is the Gas Volume Factor (ft3/scf) calculated at the Layer Pressure and
Temperature specified in the PanWizard Flow Rate Limit dialog,
Ce is the Erosional Coefficient (default = 100),
g is the Gas or Condensate Density (lbs/ft3) at the Layer Pressure and

Temperature specified in the PanWizard Flow Rate Limit dialog.
Minimum Recommended Flow Rate (Liquid Load-Up Limit):
(MMscf/day)

where:
is the Turner Critical Unloading Velocity (ft/sec) (Reference 70),
d is the ID of Tubing (inches),
Bg is the Gas Volume Factor (ft3/scf),
CTurner is the Turner Coefficient (default = 1.593 (Reference 71)),
L is the Water Density (lbs/ft3),
g is the Gas Density (lbs/ft3),
is the Gas/Liquid Interfacial Tension (dynes/cm).
i All Fluid Properties are calculated at the Layer Pressure and Temperature
specified in the PanWizard Flow Rate Limit dialog.

PanSystem File Structures B
PANSYSTEM FILE STRUCTURES

PanSystem File Types
General:
With the introduction of 32-bit operating systems (Windows 95 and Windows

NT) there were cross-platform compatibility problems with *.PAN files. This
problem was rectified in PanSystem V-2.4, therefore the following rules for
reading files will apply:
1. The 16- or 32-bit versions of V-2.4 or later will read any earlier 16-bit *.PAN
files.
2. The 32-bit version of V-2.4 or later will read any earlier 32-bit *.PAN files.
3. The 16-bit version of V-2.4 or later will only read 16-bit versions of earlier
*.PAN files.
4. The *.PAX files of any version will be readable on either operating system
(Windows 3 or Windows 95/98/2000/NT/XP), irrespective of which operating
system the file was created on.
5. The Save As Previous option will generate a *.PAN ASCII file that can be read
by any previous version of PanSystem from V-3.0 onwards. Only data that
was available in V-3.0 will be saved, so data related to newer features will be
lost.
6. Files from the DOS-based V-1.80 can be read into any version of PanSystem on
any platform.
While operating PanSystem users will work with different types of file.
PanSystem uses the following types of files (default extensions in brackets):
Gauge Data Files (*.TPR)

System Files (*.PAN or *.PAX pre-PanSystem V-2.4)
Tide Table Files (*.SEA).
Report Files (text only) (*.RPT)
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Files (*. PSP)
Pressure-z-Viscosity File (*.PIC).
Pressure ASCII Standard File (*.PAS) - (Canadian Energy and Utilities Board
(EUB) Keyword Standard).

i The file extensions (*.TPR, *.PAN, etc.) are default file extensions used in
PanSystem. Users may, if they wish, assign their own extensions.
Gauge Data Files:
A Gauge Data File (*.TPR) contains the recorded Gauge Test Data. This will
normally be supplied on disk by the company that carried out the Welltest.
Up to 20 Columns of data can be read in via the Spreadsheet method, and 9

columns by the Non-Spreadsheet method (refer to Open Data Files and Import
from Excel (Spreadsheet) for details). Two of these must contain the Time
and Pressure values, which are mandatory for Analysis.
It is also possible to import Flow Rate data versus Time independently of the
Pressure data, if it exists as a separate record. Cumulative Production data can
be used as an alternative to Flow Rate data. An optional Flow Rate data
Column may also be read in for use in Analysis.
Other Columns of data (e.g. Temperature) will not be used in Analysis but users
may still want to import them into PanSystem for Editing, Reporting, Plotting,
etc. Users may also have another set of Pressure data in the same file, in
which case they will be able to compare two (or more) Gauge records, and
analyze each in turn.
Users must tell PanSystem which type of Data is in which Column before
importing the file for Analysis.
Once the Data has been Imported, additional Columns can be created through
Editing, Smoothing, Copy/Pasting, up to a maximum of 100 Columns per file.

PanSystem File Types B
Figure 254: Sample Gauge Data File
Section from a sample Gauge Data File containing Dates and missing entries
(an ideal candidate for the Fixed Column Widths Import mode)
To prepare the Gauge Data for Analysis, PanSystem's extensive Data Preparation
facilities in the Data Preparation View Overview can be used; users might
wish to:
Reduce the Number of Data Points

Remove unwanted Data
Clean-Up noisy Data
Smooth noisy Data
Patch, Splice and Merge Data from more than one Gauge or File
Mark the beginning and end of different Flow Periods
Mark and annotate significant Events
By Reducing the Number of Data Points, the amount of memory required to

store and work with the file is also reduced, thus speeding-up plotting and
calculation facilities.

Gauge Data File Requirements:
The data in the Gauge Data File must be arranged in Columns separated by
spaces or other valid de-limiters (refer to Open Data Files and Import from
Excel (Spreadsheet) for details of valid delimiters). Various Import modes
are available depending on the layout of the data.
A special Fixed Column Width mode can be used to Import Date information
and/or Columns containing missing data (as illustrated in the example above).
PanSystem can Import File Header information intact for display in the
program. Both import modes will respect the Header content and spurious
data will only occur if a Header is not identified as such. Header lines marked
with an asterisk (*), are automatically recognized as Header information and
will be ignored; other lines similarly marked (including lines of Gauge Data)
will also be ignored.
Where practical (i.e. for small data files), before Importing a raw Gauge Data
File, use an editor and mark non-numeric fields with an asterisk (*) at the start
of each line. PanSystem will then completely ignore these commented fields
when it reads the Gauge Data. For large files, just let PanSystem read in the
data and then Edit in Data Preparation if necessary.
System Files:
A System File contains all the information required to carry out Analysis, Test
Design, Simulation, Forecasting, etc. in PanSystem (Analytical Mode) and/or
Numerical Simulation using PanSystem (Numerical Mode) and PanMesh. This
includes:
Description of each Well - up to five Wells.
Description of each Layer within the Reservoir (up to five Layers) and
Boundaries (per Layer).
Description of the Fluids within each Layer.
Edited Gauge Data; up to 100 Columns of data per file, up to 20 files per
Well. Each Well can be assigned its own data sets.
Record of screen Configuration settings (e.g. Plot Title, Axes Scales, Markers
and Annotation).
Pseudo-Pressure and Pseudo-Time Tables for each Layer (Gas Wells).

PanSystem File Types B
A record of the status of the Analysis on each Plot when the file was Saved
(e.g. Lines Fitted, Flow Regime Markers, Results). This allows users to Save
the file and then continue at a later time from where they left off
previously.
Report Format.
PanSystem (Numerical Mode) introduces:
3-D Reservoir Geometry, Internal Boundaries (up to 100 Nodes).
Material and Fluid Properties per Region/Layer (up to 99 Regions per

Layer).
No limit to the number of Layers.
Description of Well Completion (Deviation, Azimuth, up to six Open

Intervals), for a single Well.
i All numerical data are written in Oilfield (Absolute) Units.
Tide Table Files (optional):
The Tide Table Files (*.SEA) contain details of the Local Tide Heights while the
Welltest was being recorded. PanSystem uses these as one way to Filter out the
effects of the Tide on the Welltest Data.
i
These files are in written in ASCII format from V-2.6 onwards. However, earlier
Binary files from 16-bit and 32-bit versions as far back as V-2.3 can still be read
in.
Text-only Report File:
The Print and Print Preview commands provide the option to strip-out
the textual content of a Report (i.e. no Graphics) and Save it in ASCII format
(*.RPT). The textual and graphical content of a Plot or Report can be saved in
HPGL/2 or Encapsulated Postscript format by selecting an appropriate Printer
Driver and Printing to File (refer to Printing to Hard Copy or File for more
details).

Type-Curve File
Word Document Report File:
The Save As Word Document command allows users to Save the Report to an
MS Word (*.DOC) file with graphics embedded. This option writes the same
items to file as are normally printed directly via the alternative Print
Preview menu option, except that in this case graphics are included. MS
Word can also be opened within PanSystem and the Report contents can be
Viewed, Edited, Printed, Saved and Re-formatted (i.e. Plot Re-sizing, Page Number
insertion, application of Headers/ Footers, etc.).
i If users do not have MS Word, this facility cannot be used. It is not possible to
specify an alternative program.
AER Compliant (*.PAS) File:
PanSystem can output a *.PAS file conforming to the Pressure ASCII

Standard, specified by the Energy Resources Conservation Board (AER). The
TRG.PAS format is available.
Saving Files and File Extensions:
The file extensions *.TPR (Gauge Data Files), *.PAN (System Files), *.PAS
(Pressure ASCII Standard Files), *.SEA (Tide Table Files) and *.RPT (Report Text
Files) are default extensions used by PanSystem. Different extensions can be
used if required. The extension *.PAX, which was used in earlier versions for
the ASCII alternative to the *.PAN system file, is no longer available for
Saving files. However, earlier *.PAX files can still be read in.
Type-Curve File
Filename Extensions and Associated Models:
In the following list, the Dimensionless Time Function is stated for each
Type-Curve, along with the curve identifier in brackets [ ].
For a more extensive definition, please refer to the relevant Type-Curve topics
in the PanSystem Equations section of the Help (e.g. Plot Axes for Data or
Plot Axes for Dataand subsequent topics).

Type-Curve File B
TCA: Dual-Permeability (Stage 2): TD/4 []
TCB: Bounded System Analysis: (all Models, Boundary Stage): TD/LD2

[Text: Geometry Type].
Default set: Four different Fault Geometries: FAULTS.TCB
Many other configurations available.
TCC: Partial-Penetration (Stage 1): TDZ [hp/h]
Default set: Perforations in middle: MPARTPEN.TCC
Perforations at top/bottom: TPARTPEN.TCC
TCD: Radial Composite (Stage 2): TD/RD2 [Outer/Inner Mobility Ratio].
Lower Mobility Outer Region, = 1: TIGHTOUT.TCD
Default set: Lower Mobility Inner Region, = 1: TIGHTIN.TCD
Gas in Inner Region (Higher Mobility) and = 0.01: GASDRIVE.TCD
TCE: Interference Testing: TD/RD2 [none]
TCF: Vertical Fracture, Finite Conductivity (Cinco format) (Stage 1): TDxf
[FCD]
TCG: Gas-Cap/Aquifer (Stage 1): TDZ [hp/h]
Default set: Perforations at top (Aquifer) or Perforations at bottom (Gas-Cap):

TGASCAP.TCG
Perforations in middle: MGASCAP.TCG
TCH: Homogeneous Radial: TD/CD [CDe2S]
Default set: Medium Range CDe2S: RADHOMOG.TCH
High Range CDe2S: RADHI.TCH
Low Range CDe2S: RADLO.TCH
TCI: Single Vertical Fracture (Infinite Conductivity) (Stage 1): TDxf [CDxf]

Type-Curve File
T*J: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow upper and

lower Boundaries - Lw not known): TDH [LWD] (* represents value of ZWD
- e.g. 5 for ZWD = 0.5)
TCK: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow upper and

lower Boundaries - Lw known): TDH [ZWD]
TCL: Dual-Porosity Model - Pressure Match Method

(Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix Flow Model) (Stage 2): TD/CD [e2S]
TCM: Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model - Drawdown

Analysis Method: [V1/V2]
TCN: Dual-Porosity Model - Derivative Match Method:

(Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix Flow Model) (Stage 2): TD/4 []
TCO: Dual-Porosity Model - Derivative Match Method: (Transient

Matrix Flow Model) (Stage 2): TD/4 []
T*P: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow and Constant

Pressure upper and lower Boundaries - Lw not known): TDH [LWD] (*
represents value of ZWD - e.g. 5 for ZWD = 0.5).
TCQ: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow and Constant

Pressure upper and lower Boundaries - Lw known): TDH [ZWD]
TCR: Not used.
TCS: Wellbore Fill-Up (Slug Test), Homogeneous Radial Flow: TD/CD

[CDe2S]
TCT: Not used.
TCU: Single Vertical Fracture (Uniform Flux) (Stage 1): TDxf [CDxf ]
TCV: Single Vertical Fracture (Finite Conductivity) (Wong et al) (Stage-1):

PDFCD versus TDxfFCD2 [FCD] (Reference 44).
TCW: Single Vertical Fracture: (Finite Conductivity) (Wong-et al)

(Stage-2): PDFCD2/3CDxf1/3 versus TDxfFCD2/3CDxf4/3 [SD] (Reference 44).
TCX: Advanced Simulation PD-TD Look-Up Tables (PD versus TD) [text
label]

Type-Curve File B
TCY: McKinley Type-Curves - Homogeneous Radial Model: t versus
Pgrp [T]
TCZ: Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model - Build-Up

Analysis Method: [V1/V2]
File Structure:
imodel ncurv ntd jaxflag ideriv [integer flags]
td(1) [TD Values]
td(ntd)
lab(1) [First Curve PD Values]
pd(1,1,1)
pd(ntd,1,1)
lab(2) [Second Curve PD Values]
pd(2,1,1)
pd(ntd,1,1)
labval(ncurv) [Last Curve PD Values]
pd(1, ncurv,1)

Type-Curve File
pd(ntd, ncurv,1)
lab(1) [First Curve Derivatives]
dpd(1,1,2)
dpd(ntd,1,2)
lab(2) [Second Curve Derivatives]
lab(ncurv) [Last Curve Derivatives]
dpd(1, ncurv,2)
dpd(ntd, ncurv,2)
Definitions of Variables:
imodel (Model Identifier):
1 = Homogeneous Radial (TCH), Two-Cell Compartmentalized (TCM, TCZ)
2 = Single Vertical Fracture - Infinite Conductivity (TCI)
3 = Single Vertical Fracture - Uniform Flux (TCU)
4 = Not used
5 = Not used
6 = Interference Testing (TCE)
7 = Single Vertical Fracture - Finite Conductivity (TCF, TCW)

Type-Curve File B
8 = Dual-Porosity - Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix Flow (TCL, TCN)
9 = Dual-Porosity - Transient Matrix Flow (TCO)
10 = Dual-Permeability (TCA)
101 = Wellbore Fill-Up (Slug Test): Radial Homogeneous (TCS)
109 = McKinley Type-Curves: Radial Homogeneous (TCY)
12 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: No-Flow/No-Flow (TCJ)
13 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: No-Flow/No-Flow (TCK)
14 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: Constant Pressure/No-Flow

(TCP)
15 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: Constant Pressure/No-Flow

(TCQ)
16 = Partially-Penetrated Radial Homogeneous (TCC)
17 = Radial Composite (TCD)
18 = Gas-Cap/Aquifer (TCG)
ncurv: Number of Curve Sets in file.
ntd: Number of TD Values in each Curve Set.
jaxflag: X-axis TD Function and Curve Label indicator.
0 = TD/CD [CDe2S Value on curve] (TCH); also general use (TCA, TCC, TCD, TCG,
TCL, TCM, TCY, TCZ)
1 = Not used
2 = Not used
3 = TD [user-defined Curve Label] (TCX)
4 = TD/LD2 [user-defined Curve Label] (TCB)
5 = TDxf [FCD Value on curve for Finite Conductivity (TCF), CDxf for Infinite
Conductivity and Uniform Flux (TCI, TCU)]
6 = TD/4 [ on curve] (CN, TCO)

Type-Curve File
9 = TDxfFCDCDxf group [SD on curve] (TCW)
10 = TDH [LWD on curve] (T*J, T*P); [ZWD on curve] (TCK, TCQ)
ideriv: Indicates the presence/absence of Derivatives:
1 = no Derivatives present
2 = Derivatives are present
lab(i): Label to identify Curve (i); this is a Number or a Text String,

depending on the Type-Curve.
i Earlier version software Type-Curve files did not contain the jaxflag and ideriv
indices, but they are still compatible with more recent versions of the software.
position of label values for P, P data curves
Where P = pressure curves; P= pressure derivative curves
Position of label values on P, P data curves
0- points are plotted on left side of the curve
1- points are plotted on right side of the curve
2- points are plotted on the extreme left side of the curve
3- points are plotted in the middle portion of the curve

*.PAN File B
Figure 255: Type Curve Plot Analysis Dialog Box
*.PAN File
General:
The PanSystem data file can be saved or imported as a *.PAN file.
From V-2.4 onwards, all *.PAN files are in ASCII format, and can be viewed
using a text editor or spreadsheet. They are interchangeable between
different platforms (e.g. Windows 95/98/2000/XP/NT) within the limitations
outlined in Open. Prior to this version, *.PAN files were in Binary format,
and an ASCII format was available with the extension *.PAX.

Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File
i Details of the current *.PAN file structure can be obtained on request.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File

General:
For the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option (also refer to Pseudo-Pressure

Table Editing), users may import an externally-generated Pseudo-Pressure file
as an alternative to using the generation facility provided in the Fluid
Parameters section of Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog. The
default file extension is *. PSP.
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is defined below in the section Definition of

Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure.
*. PSP File Structure:
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3 onwards:

Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File B
where:
NA are real numbers (not used in PanSystem, but must be present in the
first three fields),
Fluid Type is the word Oil, Gas or Condensate,
osc, wsc, gsc are the Specific Gravities of Oil, Water (Water = 1.0) and Gas (Air
= 1.0) at standard conditions,
oi, wi, gi are the Viscosities of Oil, Water and Gas (cP) at Layer P and T,
oi, wi, gi are the Densities of Oil, Water and Gas (gm/cm3) at Layer P and T,
P is the Layer Pressure (psia),
T is the Layer Temperature ( F),
Vosc, Vwsc, Vgsc are the Fractional Volumetric Surface Flow Rates of Oil, Water
and Gas (vol/ vol) at standard conditions,
zgi is the Gas Deviation Factor at Layer P and T,
So, Sw, Sg are the Saturations (decimal fractions) of Oil, Water and Gas at
Layer P and T,
kro, krw, krg are the Relative Permeabilities to Oil, Water and Gas (decimal
fractions) at Layer P and T, at Saturations So, Sw, Sg,
Boi, Bwi, Bgi are the Volume Factors of Oil, Water and Gas at Layer Conditions
(vol/ vol),
p1, p2, ... pj ... are the Pressures (from 14.7 psia to P(layer)).
(p1), (p2), ... (pj) ... are the corresponding Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures
(from 0.0 to (P(layer)).
Qmo(p1), etc., are the Oil Phase Mass Flow Rates,
Qmw(p1), etc., are the Water Phase Mass Flow Rates,
Qmg(p1), etc., are the Gas Phase Mass Flow Rates,
mph(p1), etc., are the Multi-Phase Viscosities,

*.PIC (Pressure/ z-Factor/Viscosity) File
Ch(p1), etc., are the Hydrocarbon Compressibilities,
z(p1), etc., are the Gas Deviation Factors.
Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure:
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is defined as:
For Single-Phase and Two-Phase situations, the term/s representing the absent
phase/s are excluded, because the associated Relative Permeability tends to
zero.
For Oil Fluid Type:
For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types:
Upon import into PanSystem, the appropriate conversions are applied to

make the Pseudo-Pressure compatible with the existing interpretation
equations. For Oil (Multi-Phase) Fluid Type, it is converted to Pressure (p)
Units, for Gas or Condensate Fluid Types to m(p) Units (psi2/ cP).
*.PIC (Pressure/ z-Factor/Viscosity) File

File Structure:
[n = No. of lines in table]
[Gas Gravity][Standard Temperature][Standard Pressure][Reservoir

Temperature]
[optional blank line]

*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File B
p 1 z1 1
p 2 z2 2
p 3 z3 3
...
...
pn zn n
Items may be tab- or space-separated.
Example:
50
0.7 519.67 14.696 200.0
1000.0 0.9012 0.0252
1200.0 0.9084 0.0254
1300.0 0.9107 0.0256
1400.0 0.9116 0.0258
1500.0 0.9124 0.0260
etc.
*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File

File Structure:
[18922 = Code Word]
[Local Time at 12:00 ST] [Test Start Time (Gauge)] [Test Start Time (Local)]
[Mean Tide Height]
t1 h1
t2 h2
...
...
tn-1 hn-1
tn hn

*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File
0 0
where:
tj = Time in decimal hours, hj = Tide Height - at high and low Tide Points only.
All times are cumulative decimal hours (e.g. 14:30:00 on the first day in the
table is 14.500, 14:30:00 next day is 38.500, etc.).
The file may be space-delimited or tab-delimited. The final row of zeroes

defines the end of the file. There is a maximum of 100 lines.
Example:
18922
12.000000 0.000000 9.500000 3.608920
50.266666 1.968500
56.566666 4.921260
62.700001 2.624670
68.683334 4.921260
75.300003 2.296590
81.699997 4.593180
87.933334 2.952760
... ...
... ...
193.833328 4.921260
199.833328 1.968504
206.250000 5.249344
212.433334 1.968504
0.000000 0.000000

PanSystem Test Period Analysis Workflows B
PANSYSTEM TEST PERIOD ANALYSIS

WORKFLOWS
Slug Test Analysis Workflow
General:
In a Slug Test, the Reservoir is initially Shut-In with a Downhole Valve. In the
Wellbore, a Pressure lower than Static Reservoir Pressure is established above
the Valve by partially filling the Tubing with a liquid column or Cushion.
The Well is open on surface. When the Downhole Valve is opened, the
Formation is suddenly subjected to this Underbalanced Pressure, and flow is
induced. As the Wellbore Fills-Up, the steadily increasing Back-Pressure
exerted by the rising liquid column causes the Flow Rate to decrease. The Well
will eventually die if there is not enough Formation Pressure to flow to surface,
as Wellbore Pressure approaches Layer Pressure.
The Fill-Up Period with the Well open on surface constitutes a Slug Test.
If the Well is closed on surface during the Test, such that the Pressure at the
i
top of the liquid column is increasing due to compression of the air or gas
above it, this does not represent a Slug Test, and is classified as a Closed
Chamber Tes. This is a different response type, not covered by Slug Test
Theory, although the early part of such a Test (i.e. before compression
becomes significant), may be amenable to a Slug Test Analysis.
Slug Test Theory can also be applied to a Leak-Off Test. In this case, the
initial Cushion Pressure is greater than Reservoir Pressure. When the Downhole
Valve is opened, the liquid column Leaks-Off into the Formation until Pressure
balance is achieved. The Well is open on surface.
Setting-Up a Slug Test for Analysis:
A suggested workflow is presented as follows with hyperlinks to relevant

dialogs and/or plots where data entry, selections, etc. are required:

1. Import Gauge Data, then proceed to Data Edit Plot and select the Start and End
of the required Test Period. Do not enter any Flow Rates. If the first Gauge
Pressure does not correspond exactly to the Start of the Test (i.e. Valve opened),
enter the correct Time and the Cushion Pressure
i The Cushion Pressure is not usually seen by the Gauge and may have to be
estimated from the liquid column height.
2. Double-click on the Ruler Bar above the Data Edit Plot. Select the Slug Test
Type and enter the three required parameters as described in the Test Period
Classification dialog.
3. Leave the check box unchecked to use the Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Slug Test
Type-Curves or check the check box to use the Pressure Integral Method of Peres,
Onur and Reynolds. Users may return here at any time to change their
selection.
4. Proceed to Analysis.
5. Optionally, inspect the Edit Rate Changes. Users will find the following
special set-up for Slug Tests (i.e. performed automatically on exit from the
Data Edit Plot):
Initial Pressure (i.e. Start of Slug Test) set to:
Layer Pressure for the Ramey et al Type-Curve Method (i.e. because the
Initial Sandface Pressure, on the Formation side of the Valve, is the Layer
Pressure).
Zero for the Pressure Integral Method (i.e. a consequence of the

mathematics employed).
i
The Initial Pressure must be left at Layer Pressure if the Ramey et al
Type-Curve Method is being used, and at Zero if the Pressure Integral Method is
being used.
Flow Rate (i.e. second line of Slug Test) set to a nominal value of 1. Slug
Test Analysis does not require a Flow Rate here, but PanSystem requires a
non-zero value to permit entry into the Analysis section.
These values are set-up automatically, and do not normally need to be

edited.

Slug Test Analysis Workflow B
If users decide to revise the Layer Pressure at some later stage, it should be
changed in the Layer Parameters dialog, which can be accessed via the
Analytical Model, or Well, Reservoir & Fluid Description Dialog
options. If the Ramey et al Type-Curve Method is being used, update the
Initial Pressure in the Edit Rate Changes accordingly, via the Change T0
icon on the Ramey Type-Curve Plot, or by going to the table itself via Data
Preparation.
6. Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Type-Curve Method: In Analysis, go to the

Type-Curves Plot section and bring up the Ramey Slug Test Type-Curve
set. Shift the curves sideways (no vertical movement is possible) to obtain a
Select Type-Curve Match. Results include Permeability (k), from the Time
Match versus Td/Cd, and Skin (S), from the Match Curve Identifier. The
user-defined input values of Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and
corresponding Cd are also displayed.
i Although the full range of Diagnostic Plots is accessible, no other Analysis is

possible in this particular Slug Test mode.
7. Peres, Onur and Reynolds Pressure Integral Method: This method converts the
Slug Test data to an Equivalent Constant Surface Rate Drawdown Test. The data
can then be Analyzed by all the conventional methods available for
Drawdowns; users can also access any of the Diagnostic Plots and Type-Curves
appropriate for the Reservoir Model being used.
i Implementation of the Pressure Integral Method was sponsored by Petrobras.
The method can be applied to any Reservoir Model, and all Analysis
methods are valid (e.g. Log-Log Plot, Semi-Log Plot, Square Root
Plot (including Superposition), etc.).

Proceed with Analysis in the usual way (e.g. Log-Log, Semi-Log Plots, etc).
The only difference from a conventional Welltest is that the Y-axis of these
Diagnostic Plots is the Pressure Integral Function instead of Pressure.
i Note that P0 for the Integral Function is zero.
Time Function: When using the Pressure Integral Method, the Integral
Function replaces the Pressure, and the Pressure becomes the equivalent of
the Sandface Flow Rate. The functioned data therefore resemble a Constant
Surface Rate Drawdown Test with a measured Sandface Flow Rate available.
The Time Function (Tf) option is set by default to Use Varying Rate, so that
Convolution is used on the Diagnostic Plots (i.e. Rate-Normalized Pressure
versus Equivalent Time). With good data, users should see a Pressure and
Derivative Response free of any Wellbore Storage effects, and
Line-Fit/Type-Curve Analysis can be performed on the Diagnostic Plots
appropriate for the Reservoir Model selected, to obtain Reservoir Parameters.
This corresponds to the Convolution Methods section of the Peres, Onur and
Reynolds technical paper.
If users disable the Use Varying Rate During Test control, and enable the
dP/dQ with Elapsed Time control, they will be plotting Elapsed Time
(without Superposition) on the Time axis. This corresponds to the
Deconvolution Methods section of the Peres, Onur and Reynolds technical
paper.
If users disable the controls for Use Varying Rate During Test and dP/dQ
with Elapsed Time, the Sandface Flow Rate is ignored, and users have the
equivalent of a Constant Rate Drawdown Test with Wellbore Storage, as
discussed in the Type-Curve Matching section of the Peres, Onur and
Reynolds technical paper. This has no Rate Normalization and no
Superposition, and is really only amenable to Analysis using Type-Curves
for Wellbore Storage and Skin, such as the Type-Curves for a Radial
Homogeneous Reservoir with Wellbore Storage and Skin, since the Reservoir
Signal does not develop clearly without Convolution.

Slug Test Analysis Workflow B
Build-Up Test Period After a Slug Test:
For a Shut-In Test following a Slug Test, the Wellbore Fill-Up Period constitutes
the history for the Build-Up Test. Since the Flow Rate during the Slug Test is
continuously decreasing, the Build-Up can only be correctly analyzed with the
Varying Rate History correctly configured. This workflow assumes that
Pressure Data has been recorded during the Fill-Up Period (necessary to
calculate the Flow Rate).
To prepare the Shut-In data for Analysis, proceed as follows:
1. On the Data Edit Plot, pick the start and end of the Flowing Period before the
Shut-In. Leave the Rate values at zero. Do not pick the end of the Build-Up
yet. If the Slug Test Period has already been set-up for Analysis (refer to earlier
workflow), reset the Flow Rate at the end of the Slug Test to zero.
2. Compute Flow Rate#1 from dp/dt with the Create Rate Column Dialog,
using the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) value appropriate for the Flowing
Period (Slug Test). The computed Flow Rates for the Build-Up Period will be
zero because the end of the Build-Up was not picked.
3. The Test Type should be left as Normal in the Test Period Classification
dialog.
4. In the Edit Rate Changes, select the Pressure at the end of the Flowing Period
(= instant of Shut-In) and Copy {Ctrl-C} to store in the system memory (or
write it down).
5. Use the Transfer option to import Rate#1 into the table.
i The Flow Rate calculated by the Create Rate tool, conforms to the default Ends
of Rate Periods format.
6. Delete the bottom two lines in the table (i.e. these are the original user-defined
selections made for the start and end of the Flowing Period).
7. Now Delete all the lines for the Shut-In Period except the very first (= T0) and
last ones (= Tend). Next, Paste {Ctrl-V) the final Flowing Pressure into the
penultimate line (= T0), to include the Pressure (P0) at the start of the Build-Up.
The Edit Rate Changes should now begin at the start of the Flowing Period,
with a large number of entries during the Flowing Period, an entry for the end
of the Flowing Period (= T0 for the Shut-In), followed by an entry for the end of
the Shut-In Period at Tend.

Gas Analysis (Linear Flow)
8. Delete any lines near the beginning of the Flowing Period containing any
obviously spurious Rate Values (i.e. Flow Rates computed from dp/dt are often
noisy at the start).
i
Do not Delete the first line representing the start of the Slug Test Period. The
Flow Rate corresponding to the Start Time of the Slug Test should be zero.
Check that there are no spurious Flow Rates (e.g. zero) in the next few lines.
9. Exit from the Edit Rate Changes dialog. Ensure the Master Rate Channel is
set to Rate Changes.
10. Perform Build-Up Analysis in the usual way. The plots will use Superposition
based on the Varying Rate History in the Edit Rate Changes.
11. To Analyze the Slug Test Period, it will first be necessary to merge all the
Wellbore Fill-Up Flowing Periods into a single group. This is done on the Data
Edit Plot as described in the section on the Ruler Bar. This will define a
single Slug Test that can be analyzed by the Ramey Type-Curves or the Pressure
Integral Method. Set up this Test Period as explained above, in Setting-Up a Slug
Test for Analysis.
Note that Grouping the Flowing Periods to define the Slug Test will not affect
the Analysis of the Shut-In Period, since the Flow Rate variations are still
listed in the Rate Changes Table.
Gas Analysis (Linear Flow)

Fracture Linear Flow
Fracture Half-Length:
with the usual modifications for p2 and p options.
m is the slope of the line on the Square-Root Plot.
For Superposition Plots with a Rate Normalized Y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the
above equation.

Reservoir Linear Flow B
Fracture Face Skin Factor:
For all Square-Root Plots except the Tandem Square Root Plot:
where:
(int) = intercept m(p)int(t=0) of the line on the Square-Root Plot at zero value
of the Time Function.
For plots with m(p) on the Y-axis instead of m(p):
(int) = [m(p)int(t=0) - m(p)t=0]
For Superposition Plots with a Rate-Normalized Y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the
above equation.
For the Tandem Square Root Build-Up Plot, refer to the relevant equation in
Fracture Linear Flow.
Finite Conductivity Model (for Sf > 0):
For the Finite Conductivity Fracture Model, the line fitted to the Square-Root
Plot is treated in the way described in Fracture Linear Flow.
The Dimensionless Intercept (intD) is defined by the same equations as for Sf

also described in Fracture Linear Flow.
FCD, Xf and kfw are then calculated in the same way as for Oil as described
in Fracture Linear Flow.

Square-root Time Plot
Reservoir Width:

with the usual modifications for p2 and p options.
m is the slope of the line on the Square-Root Plot.
For Superposition Plots with a Rate Normalized Y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the
above equation.
Flow Convergence Skin, Distance to Nearest Boundary, and computed Initial

Pressure are calculated as in Reservoir Linear Flow.

Appendix C
PANSYSTEM TECHNICAL REFERENCES
This appendix contains the following topic:
Technical References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206

C PANSYSTEM TECHNICAL REFERENCES
Technical References
TECHNICAL REFERENCES
General:
A list of technical references used within PanSystem is presented below; these

references also appear in the topics to which they are applicable:
1. Dake, L.P.: Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering, Developments in

Petroleum Science, Vol. 8, Elsevier, 1981 and The Practice of Reservoir
Engineering, Developments in Petroleum Science, Vol. 36, Elsevier, 1994.
2. Earlougher, R.C.: Advances in Well Test Analysis, SPE monograph series,
Vol. 5, 1977.
3. Matthews, C.S. and Russell, D.G.: Pressure Build-Up and Flow Tests in
Wells, SPE monograph series Vol. 1, 1967.
4. Agarwal, R.G.: A New Method to Account for Producing Time Effects when
Drawdown Type Curves are Used to Analyse Pressure Build-Up and Other
Test Data, paper SPE 9289, presented at the 55th Annual Fall Meeting of the
SPE, Dallas, Texas, Sept. 21-24 1980.
5. Gringarten, A.C., Bourdet, D.P., Landel, P.A. and Kniazeff, V.J.: A
Comparison Between Different Skin and Wellbore Storage Type-Curves for
Early-Time Transient Analysis, paper SPE 8205, presented at the 54th
Annual Fall Meeting of the SPE, Las Vegas, Nevada, Sept. 23-26, 1979.
6. Earlougher, R.C. Jnr. and Kersch, K.M.: Analysis of Short-Time Transient
Test Data by Type-Curve Matching, J. Pet. Tech. (July 1974) 793-800; Trans.,
AIME 257.
7. Agarwal, R.G., Al-Hussainy and Ramey, H.J.: An Investigation of Wellbore
Storage and Skin Effect in Unsteady Liquid Flow: I Analytical Treatment,
Soc. Pet. Eng. J (Sept. 1970) 279-290; Trans., AIME 249.
8. Ramey, H.J. and Cobb, W.M.: A General Pressure Build-Up Theory for a
Well in a Closed Drainage Area, J. Pet. Tech. (Dec. 1971) 1493-1505; Trans.,
AIME 251.
9. Van Everdingen, A.F. and Hurst, W.: The Application of the Laplace
Transformation to Flow Problems in Reservoirs, Trans., AIME (1949) 186,
305-324.
10. Cobb, W.M. and Smith, J.T.: An Investigation of Pressure Build-Up Tests in
Bounded Reservoirs, paper SPE 5133, presented at the 49th Annual Fall
Meeting of the SPE-AIME, Houston, Texas, Oct. 6-9 1974 (an abridged version
appears in J. Pet. Tech., Aug. 1975, 991-996; Trans., AIME 259
11. Bourdet, D., Whittle, T.M., Douglas A.A. and Pirard, Y.M.: A New Set of
Type Curves Simplifies Well Test Analysis. World Oil, (May 1983).

Technical References C
12. Stehfest, H.: Algorithm 368, Numerical Inversion of Laplace Transforms,
(Communications of the ACM), Vol. 13, No.1 (Jan., 1970), 47-49.
13. (a) Meehan: A Correlation for Water Compressibility, Pet. Eng., Nov
1980.(b) Numbere, Brigham and Standing: Correlations for Physical
Properties of Petroleum Reservoir Brines, Pet. Research Inst., Stanford Univ.,
Nov 1977.(c) Secondary Oil Recovery in the U.S., API (1950) p.127 - Van
Wingen.
14. Ramey, H.J.: Practical Use of Modern Well Test Analysis, paper SPE 5878
presented at the 46th Annual California Regional Meeting of the SPE-AIME,
April 8-9, 1976.
15. Stewart, G, Wittman, M.J, and Meunier, D.: Afterflow Measurement and
Deconvolution in Well Test Analysis, paper SPE 12174, presented at the 58th
Annual Fall Meeting of the SPE-AIME, San Francisco, CA, Oct. 5-8 1983.
16. Hall, H.N: Compressibility of Reservoir Rocks, Trans. AIME, 231.
17. Gold, D.K., McCain, W.D. Jnr., and Jennings, J.W.: An Improved Method for
the Determination of the Reservoir-Gas Specific Gravity for Retrograde
Gases, J.Pet.Tech. (July, 1989), 747-752; and paper SPE 17310 Midland, Texas,
(March 1988).
18. Raghavan, R.: Well Test Analysis for Multiphase Flow, paper SPE 14098,
Beijing, (March 1986).
19. Slider, H.C.: A Simplified Method of Pressure Build-Up Analysis for a
Stabilised Well, J. Pet. Tech. (Sept, 1971), 1155-1160; Trans. AIME 251.
20. Lee, J.W.: Welltesting, SPE of AIME publication, 1982.
21. Theory and Practice of the Testing of Gas Wells, Third Edition 1975, or
Fourth Edition 1979. Energy Resources Conservation Board, Calgary, Alberta,
Canada.
22. Standing, M.B.: Volumetric and Phase Behavior of Oil Field Hydrocarbon
Systems, SPE 1977.
23. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F.: Transient Pressure Analysis for
Fractured Wells, J.Pet.Tech. (Sept, 1981), 1749-1766. Also SPE 7490 (Houston
1978).
24. Lee, W.J. and Holditch, S.A.: Fracture Evaluation With Pressure Transient
Testing in Low-Permeability Gas Reservoirs, J. Pet. Tech. (Sept, 1981),
1776-1792. Also SPE 9975 or 7929/7930 (Denver 1979).
25. Gringarten, A.C., Ramey, H.J. Jnr. and Raghaven, R.J.: Unsteady State
Pressure Distributions Created by a Well With a Single Infinite-Conductivity
Vertical Fracture, J. Pet. Tech. (Aug, 1972), 347-360. Also Trans. AIME 257
and SPE 4051 (San Antonio, 1972).
26. Sheng-Tai Lee and Brockenbrough, J.: A New Analytic Solution for Finite
Conductivity Vertical Fractures With Real Time and Laplace Space Parameter
Estimation, paper SPE 12013, presented at the 58th Annual Tech. Conf. and

Exhib, San Fransisco, CA, Oct. 5-8, 1983.

27. Warren, J.E. and Root, P.J.: The Behavior of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs,
SPE Journal, Sept. 1963.
28. Bourdet, D. and Gringarten, A.C.: Determination of Fissure Volume and
Block Size in Fractured Reservoirs by Type-Curve Analysis. Paper SPE 9293
presented at SPE Fall Meeting, Sept. 1980 (Dallas).
29. Bourdet, D. et al: Interpreting Well Tests in Fractured Reservoirs, World
Oil, October 1983.
30. Clark, D.G. and Van Golf-Racht, T.D.: Pressure-Derivative Approach to
Transient Test Analysis: A High-Permeability North Sea Reservoir Example,
SPE Journal, November 1985.
31. Wong, D.W. et al: Pressure Transient Analysis in Finite Linear Reservoirs
Using Derivative and Conventional Techniques: Field Examples, paper SPE
15421 presented at SPE Fall Meeting, 1986 (New Orleans).
32. Jones, L.G., Blount, E.M. and Glaze, C.E.: Use of Short Term Multiple Rate
Flow Tests to Predict Performance of Wells Having Turbulence, paper SPE
6133 presented at SPE Fall Meeting, 1976.
33. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F.: Pressure Transient Analysis for
Naturally Fractured Reservoirs, paper SPE 11026 presented at SPE Fall
Meeting 1982 (New Orleans).
34. Bourdet, D., Ayoub, J.A. and Pirard, Y.M.: Use of Pressure Derivative in
Well Test Interpretation, paper SPE 12777 presented at SPE California
Regional Meeting, April 1984 (Long Beach).
35. Sutton, R.P. and Farshad, F.F.: Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT
Properties for Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils, paper SPE 13172 presented at SPE
Fall Meeting, Houston, Sept. 1984.
36. Schmidt, G, and Wenzel, H.: A Modified Van Der Waal Type Equation of
State, Chem. Eng. Sci. Vol 35 (1980) pp1503 - 1512.
37. Firoozabadi: Reservoir Fluid Phase Behaviour and Volumetric Predictions
with Equations of State, JPT, April 1988.
38. McKinley, R.M.: Wellbore Transmissibility from Afterflow-Dominated
Pressure Buildup Data, JPT, July 1971.
39. Perrine, R.L.: Analysis of Pressure Buildup Curves, Drill. and Prod. Prac,
API (1956) 482-509. Also Ref.: 2, Section 2.11.
40. Ramey, Henry J. Jnr., Agarwal, Ram G. and Martin, I.: Analysis of Slug Test
or DST Flow Period Data, J. Cdn. Pet. Tech. (July-Sept. 1975) 37-42.
41. Agarwal, R.G.: Real Gas Pseudo-Time - A New Function for Pressure
Buildup Analysis of MHF Gas Wells, paper SPE 8279 presented at Las Vegas,
Sept. 1979.
42. Yaxley, L.M.: New Stabilized Inflow Equations for Rectangular and
Wedge-Shaped Drainage Systems including Horizontal Wells, paper SPE

17082.
43. Stewart, G. and Ascharsobbi, F.: Welltest Interpretation for Naturally
Fractured Reservoirs, SPE 18173 presented in Houston, Oct. 1988.
44. Wong, D.W, Harrington, A.G. and Cinco-Ley, H.: Application of the
Pressure-Derivative Function in the Pressure Transient Testing of Fractured
Wells, SPEFE Oct 1986; paper SPE 13056 presented Houston, Sept 1984.
45. Meunier, D., Kabir, C.S. and Wittman, M.J.: Gas Well Test Analysis: The Use
of Normalised Pressure and Time Functions, paper SPE 13082 presented in
Houston, 1984.
46. Ehlig-Economides, C. and Ayoub, J.A.: Vertical Interference Testing Across
a Low-Permeability Zone, paper SPE 13251 presented in Houston, Sept 1984;
also SPEFE Oct 1986, pp 497-510.
47. Ozkan, E., Raghavan, R. and Joshi, S.D.: Horizontal Well Pressure
Analysis, paper SPE 16378 presented in Ventura, April 1987 (+ supplement
SPE 20271); also SPEFE Dec 1989, pp 567-575.
48. Bourdet, D.: Pressure Behaviour of Layered Reservoirs with Cross-flow,
paper SPE 13628 presented in Bakersfield, March 1985.
49. Fair, W.B.: Pressure Buildup Analysis With Wellbore Phase Redistribution,
paper SPE 8206 presented in Las Vegas, Sept 1979; also SPEJ April 1981, pp
259-269.
50. Hegeman, P.S., Halford, D.L. and Joseph, J.A.: Well Test Analysis With
Changing Wellbore Storage, paper SPE 21829 presented in Denver, April
1991.
51. Saleh, A.M. and Stewart, G.S.: Interpretation of Gas Condensate Well Tests
With Field Examples, paper SPE 24719 presented in Washington, Oct. 1992.
52. Kui-Fu Du and Stewart, G.S.: Transient Pressure Response of Horizontal
Wells in Layered and Naturally Fractured Reservoirs with Dual Porosity
Behaviour, paper SPE 24682 presented in Washington, Oct. 1992.
53. Odeh, A.S.: Flow Test Analysis for a Well with Radial Discontinuity, JPT,
Feb 1968.
54. Yeh and Agarwal: Pressure Transient Analysis of Injection Wells in
Reservoirs with Multiple Fluid Banks, paper SPE 19775, San Antonio, Oct
1989.
55. Bunch, D. S., Gay, D. M. and Welsch R. E.: 1993. Algorithm 717. Subroutines
for maximum likelihood and quasi-likelihood estimation of parameters in
non-linear regression models. ACM Trans. Math. Softw., 19(1), 109-130.
56. Dennis, J. E., Gay, D. M. and Welsch R. E.: 1981b. ALGORITHM 573 NL2SOL.
An adaptive non-linear least-squares algorithm [E4]. ACM Trans. Math.
Softw., 7(3), 369-383.
57. Marquardt, D.W.: 1963, J. Soc. Ind. Appl. Math., Vol. 11, 431-441.
58. Corey, A.T.: T Interrelation Between Gas and Oil Relative Permeabilities.

Prod. Mon. 19, 38, 1954.

59. Furnival, S.R. and Baillie, J.M.: Successful Prediction of Condensate
Wellbore Behaviour Using an EoS Generated From Black Oil Data. Offshore
European Conference, Aberdeen, Sept. 1993: Paper SPE 26683.
60. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F.: Transient Pressure Analysis: Finite
Conductivity Fracture Case Versus Damaged Fracture Case, paper SPE
10179 presented at San Antonio, October 1981.
61. Brons, F. and Marting, V.E.: T Effect of Restricted Fluid Entry on Well
Productivity, JPT, Feb 1961 (172-174).
62. Goode, P.A. and Kuchuk, F.J.: Ilow Performance of Horizontal Wells, paper
SPE 18300, or SPERE, Aug 91.
63. Jones, J.R. and Raghavan R.: Ierpretation of Flowing Well Responses in
Gas-Condensate Wells, SPEFE, Sep 1988 (p. 578).
64. Raghavan, R., Wei Chun Chu and Jones, J.R.: Pctical Considerations in the
Analysis of Gas-Condensate Well Tests, SPERE, June 1999 (p. 288).
65. Hemala, M.L.: Tidal Effects in Petroleum Well Testing, SPE 14607,
presented Singapore 1986.
66. Reynolds, A.C., Bratvold, R.B. and Ding, W.: Semi-Log Analysis of Gas Well
Drawdown and Buildup Data, SPEFE, Dec 1987 (p. 657) and SPE 13664
(1985).
67. Rapach, J.M., Jefferies, R., Guedroudj, A.H., Westaway, P.J.: Practical
Transient Multilayer Test Design, Implementation and Analysis of Gas Wells
in the North Sea Southern Basin, paper SPE 20534 (New Orleans Sept 1990).
68. Kabir, C.S.: Seeking Synergy Between Drawdown and Buildup Analyses,
SPEFE, June 1997 (p125) and paper SPE 30551 (Dallas, Oct 1995).
69. Salana, M.M. and Venkatesh, V.S.: Evaluation of API RP14E Erosional
Velocity Limitations for Offshore Gas Wells, OTC4485 (Houston, May 1983).
70. Turner, R.G.: Analysis and Prediction of Minimum Flow Rate for the
Continuous Removal of Liquids from Gas Wells, JPT, Nov. 1969.
71. Coleman, S.B., Clay, H.B., McCurdy, D.G. and Norris III, H.L.: A New Look
at Predicting Gas-Well Load-Up, JPT, March 1991.
72. Kuchuk, F.J., Goode, P.A., Wilkinson, D.J. and Thambyanayagam, R,K,M.:
Pressure Transient Behavior of Horizontal Wells With and Without an
Aquifer, SPEFE March 1991, paper SPE 17413 (Long Beach, March 1988).
73. Gringarten, A.C. and Ramey, H.J.: The Use of Source and Green's Functions
in Solving Unsteady-Flow Problems in Reservoirs, SPEJ October 1973, paper
SPE 3818.
74. Shaosong Xu and Lee, W.J.: Two-Phase Well Test Analysis of Gas
Condensate Reservoirs, paper SPE 56483 (Houston, October 1999).
75. Larsen, L.: A Simple Approach to Pressure Distributions in Geometric
Shapes By Images, paper SPE 10088 (San Antonio, October 1981).

76. Dietz D.N.: Determination of Average Reservoir Pressure from Build-Up
Surveys, Trans. SPE of AIME, 234, pp. 955-59 (JPT, August 1965).
77. Earlougher R.C., Jr., Ramey H.J., Jr. et al: Pressure Distribution in
Rectangular Reservoirs, pp. 199-208 (JPT, February 1968).
78. Brill, J.P. and Beggs, H.D.: Two-Phase Flow in Pipes, University of Tulsa,
INTERCOMP Course, The Hague, 1974.
79. Palacio, J.C. and Blasingame, T.A.: Decline Curve Analysis Using Type
Curves - Analysis of Gas Well Production Data, paper SPE 25909 (Denver
1993).
80. Agarwal, R.G., Gardner, D.C., Kleinsteiber, S.W. and Fussell, D.D.:
Analyzing Well Production Data Using Combined Type-Curve and
Decline-Curve Analysis Concepts, paper SPE 57916 (revised July 1999,
originally presented as SPE 49222, New Orleans, Sept 1998). Also SPERE&E 2
(5) Oct 1999.
81. Peneloux, A., Rauzy, E. and Freze R.: A Consistent Correction for
Redlich-Kwong-Soave Volumes, J. Fluid Phase Equilibria, 8, 7-23 (1982).
82. Aasberg-Petersen, K., Stenby, E. and Fredenslund, A.: Ind. Eng. Chem. Res.,
30 (1991) pps. 248- 254.
83. MacLeod, D.B.: Relation Between Surface Tension and Density, Trans.
Faraday Society, 19, 38 (1923), and Sugden, S.: The Variation of Surface
Tension with Temperature and some Related Functions, J. Chem Soc., 125, 32
(1924).
84. Petrosky, G.E. and Farshad, F.F.: Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations
for Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils, 68th Annual Technical Conference, Houston,
Oct. 1993: Paper SPE 26644.
85. Macary, S.M., El-Batanoney, M.H.: Derivation of PVT Correlations for the
Gulf of Suez Crude Oils, Egyptian Petroleum Research Institute, Jan. 1993.
86. Beal, C.: The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Oil and its
Associated Gases at Oilfield Temperatures and Pressures, Trans. AIME, 165,
94-115, 1946.
87. Chew, J. and Connally, C.A.: A Viscosity Correlation for Gas-Saturated
Crude Oils, Trans. AIME, 216, 23-25, 1959.
88. Beggs, H.D. and Robinson J.R.: Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil
Systems, JPT, 27, 1140-1141, 1975.
89. Carr, N.L., Kobayashi, R. and Burrows, D.B.: Viscosity of Hydrocarbon
Gases under Pressure. Trans AIME 201 (1954), pp 264-272.
90. Lee, A.L., Gonzalez, M.H. and Eakin, B.E.: The Viscosity of Natural Gases.
J. Pet. Tech. 18 (1966), pp 997-1000.
91. Glas, O.: Generalized Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations, JPT,
785-795, May 1980.
92. Lasater, J.A.: Bubble-Point Pressure Correlation, Trans. AIME, 213, 379-381,

1958.
93. Standing, M.B.: A Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlation for Mixtures
of Californian Oils and Gases, Drill. and Prod. Prac., API, 275-285, 1947.
94. Vasquez, M. and Beggs, H.D.: Correlations for Fluid Physical Property
Prediction, JPT, 968-970, June 1980.
95. Crafton, J.W. (Performance Sciences, Inc.): Oil and Gas Well Evaluation
Using the Reciprocal Productivity Index Method, paper SPE 37409 presented
at the SPE Production Operations Symposium, held in Oklahoma City,
Oklahoma, 9-11 March 1997.
96. Peres, A.M.M., Onur, M. and Reynolds, A.C.: A New General Pressure
Analysis Procedure for Slug Tests; paper SPE 18801, presented at the SPE
California Regional Meeting, Bakersfield, April 1989.
97. Peres, A.M.M., Onur, M. and Reynolds, A.C.: New Methods for The
Analysis of Drillstem Test Data; paper SPE 19843, presented at the 64th
ACTE, San Antonio, October 1989.
98. Al-Hussainy, R., Ramey, H.J. and Crawford, P.B.: The Flow of Real Gases
Through Porous Media, JPT (May 1966) 624-636; Trans., AIME 237.
99. Goode, P.A. and Thambynayagam, R.K.M.: Pressure Drawdown and
Buildup Analysis of Horizontal Wells in Anisotropic Media, SPE Formation
Evaluation (Dec 1987) 683-697; paper SPE 14250 (Las Vegas, Sept 1985).
100. Streltsova-Adams, T.D.: Pressure Drawdown in a Well With Limited Flow
Entry; JPT Nov 1979; paper SPE 7486 (1979).
101. Satman, A., Eggenschwiler, M. and Ramey Jr., H.J.: Interpretation of
Injection Well Pressure Transient Data In Thermal Oil Recovery, paper SPE
8908 (Log Angeles, April 9-11, 1980).
102. Cinco L.H., Samaniego V.F., Dominguez A.N.: Transient Pressure Behavior
for a Well With a Finite-Conductivity Vertical Fracture; paper SPE 6014
(New Orleans, Oct. 3-6, 1976).
103. Corey, A.T.: The Interrelation Between Gas and Oil Relative Permeabilities,
Prod. Mon. 19, 38, 1954.
104. Tjolsen, C.B.; Scheie, A. and Damsleth, E.: A Study of the Correlation
between Relative Permeability, Air Permeability and Depositional
Environment on the Core-Plug Scale, paper presented at the Second
European Core Analysis Symposium, London, May 1991. Published in
Advances in Core Evaluation II, Reservoir Appraisal, P.F. Worthington and D.
Longeron (eds.), Gordon and Breach, London (1991), 169-183.
105. Honarpour, M.; Koederitz, L. and Harvey, A.H.: Relative Permeability of
Petroleum Reservoirs, CRC Press Inc., Boca Raton, Florida, (1986).
106. Spinelli, V.D. and Peres, A.M.M.: Analysis of Slug and Drillstem Tests
Under Water-Oil Two Phase Flow Conditions; paper SPE 53934 (Caracas,
April 1999).

107. Yaxley, L.M.: Effect of a Partially Communicating Fault on Transient
Pressure Behaviour; paper SPE 14311 and SPE Formation Evaluation pp. 590
- 598 (1987).
108. Matthew, G. and Horne, R.N.: Effects of External Boundaries on the
Recognition of Reservoir Pinch-Out Boundaries by Pressure Transient
Analysis; paper SPE 11141 and SPEJ (June 1985).
109. Bidaux, P., Whittle, T.M, Coveney, P.J., and Gringarten, A.C.; Analysis of
Pressure and Rate Transient Data from Wells in Multi-Layered Reservoirs:
Theory and Application; paper SPE 24679 and 67th SPE ATCE (1992), pp.
187-196.
110. Prasad, R. K.; Pressure Transient Analysis in the Presence Of Two
Intersecting Boundaries; paper SPE 4560 and JPT pp. 89 -96, (1975).
111. Larsen, L.; Pressure Transient Behaviour of Reservoirs Forming a Pattern of
Coupled Linear Segments; paper SPE 26459 (Houston, Oct. 1993).
112. Larsen, L.; Modeling and Analyzing Source and Interference Data from
Packer-Probe and Multiprobe Tests; SPE 102698 (San Antonio 2006).
Goode, P.A. and Thambyanayagam, R.K.M.: Permeability Determination

with a Multiprobe Formation Tester; SPEFE Dec 1992.


Appendix D
SUPPLEMENTARY DOCUMENTATION
Refer to the following documents for additional information:
Mini-Frac Analysis Documentation
Multiple Hydraulic Fracture Model Documentation
Shale Oil/Gas Analysis Documentation
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure Documentation

D SUPPLEMENTARY DOCUMENTATION

INDEX
Symbols 702
Advanced Simulation - Data
(Bilinear Flow), 1092, 1161 Preparation, 676
(Horizontal Wells), 1162 Advanced Simulation Control, 702
(Linear Flow), 1087, 1202 Advanced Simulation Observation
(PanWizard Equations), 1175 Points, 708
(Pressure Extrapolation), 1073 Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative
(Radial Flow), 1134 Pressure Decline Plot, 584
(Spherical Flow), 1095, 1161 Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative
(Type Curve Analysis), 1168 Type-Curves, 587
(Type-Curve Analysis), 1103 Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time
*.PAN File, 1191 Type-Curves, 577
*.PIC (Pressure/ z-Factor/Viscosity) File, Analysis, 485, 544
1194 Analysis Tools, 635
*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File, 1195 Analytical Model, 280
Analytical Simulation, 651
Append Files, 117
Application/Window Exit Box, 906
Numerics ASCII, 84
ASCII File, 42
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window, 725 Auto Match - Points Selection, 673
Autofit Lines, 530
Automatic Flow Period Generation, 147
Automatic Matching, 668
A
Average Delta-Pressure, 1052
Average Line Slopes, 526
Active probe, 324 Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP v
Add New Well, 289 Time Plot, 846
Add Time Mark, 531 Average Reservoir Pressure and
Additional Data, 833 Cumulative Production v Time
Advanced Automatic Matching, 699 Plot, 846
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning, 197
Advanced Simulation, 675, 680, 686, 696,

B Constant Pressure Boundaries, 1033
Control, 723
Best Fit Line, 523, 635 Conventional Analysis, 485
BHP, 118 Copy, 128, 129
Bilinear Flow Plot, 499 Copy and Paste, 117
Boundary Conditions, 463 Copy Layer Pressure, 662
Boundary Parameters, 339 Copy to clipboard, 173
Boundary Type, 663 Copy Well/Layer, 290
Bounded System Type-Curves, 1108, Copy, Resample, and Paste, 128
1170 Correct for Rate Dependency, 559
Create Composite, 382
Create New Unit, 887
Create Rate Column, 139
C Creating Regions, 440
Customer-Defined Flow Models, 304
C&n Analysis Flow-After-Flow Test, 806
C&n Analysis Isochronal Test, 807
C&n Plot, 809
D
C&n Results - Additional Data, 833
C&n Results (Gas/Condensate), 829
Calculate Tidal Lag, 263 Data Conditioning Workflow, 205
Calculating Advanced Simulation, 709 Data Preparation, 392, 398, 676
Cartesian Plot, 491, 1075, 1143 Data reduction, 241
Change Extrapolated Pressure, 542 Data View Controls, 759
Change F, 559 Deconvolution, 156
Change Graph Area, 775 Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries, 461
Change Line Type, 528 Defintion of PanSystem Terms, 980
Change T0/P0, 514, 635 Delete Areal Region, 464
Classification, 100 Deleting a Region, 443
Clipboard, 73 Deliverability, 1079, 1150
Close, 31 Deliverability/Injectivity Plot, 814
Column to Copy, Resample to a New Derivative, 631
Column, 129 Derivative overlays, 182
Composite Linear Reservoir Model, 318 Derivative Selection, 538
Condensate Fluid Parameters, 354 Difference Facility, 127
Configuration View, 877 DPK/LAS Wireline Formation Tester File,
Configure, 857 75
Configure Report, 857 Dual Permeability Type-Curves, 1172
Configure Reservoir Node and Layer, Dual-Permeability Type-Curves, 1116
466 Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeablity
Confirm Results, 528, 636 Systems, 1035

Dual-Porosity Model, 1052 F
Dual-Porosity Type-Curves, 1113
File, 27, 278
Filter Type Curves, 537
E Fit Line, 635
Floating Line, 524
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate), 573 Flow Models, 295, 302
ECR Parameters, 573 Flow Period, 147, 160, 192, 247
Edit Data, 108 Flow Plane Settings, 765
Edit Gauge Data, 108 Flow Rate, 560
Edit Input Report Section, 861 Flow Rate Advisor, 1177
Edit Mesh, 773 Flow Rate and Cumulative Production v
Edit Number of Points, 776 Time Plot, 845
Edit Rate Changes, 132 Flow Rate v Time Plot, 845
Edit Report Analysis Section, 864 Flow Regime, 526
Edit Report Data File Section, 863 Flow Regime Markers, 1052
Edit Report Deliverability Section, 866 Flow-After-Flow Test, 799
Edit Report Layout, 867 Fluid Parameters, 330, 342, 348, 354
Edit Test Design, 268 Forecasting, 837
Edit the Tidal Pressure Gauge, 258 Fracture Linear Flow, 1087, 1202
Edit the Tide Table, 252 Fractured Well Type-Curves, 1110, 1171
Edit the View Title, 769 From TCX File, 784
Edit Unit System, 886
Editing Regions, 443
Ei Type-Curve, 1115 G
Enter the Co-ordinates, 771
Enter the New View/Graph Title, 769 Gas Analysis, 1132
Equivalent Constant Rate, 573 Overview, 1132
ERCB Compliant (*.PAS) File, 1184 Gas Analysis (Bilinear Flow), 1161
ERCB PRD, 77 Gas Analysis (Horizontal Wells), 1162
ERCB Report Editor, 78 Gas Analysis (Linear Flow), 1202
Example, 229 Gas Analysis (PanWizard Equations),
Excel, 48 1175
Exit, 36 Gas Analysis (Radial Flow), 1134
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR, Gas Analysis (Spherical Flow), 1161
847 Gas Analysis (Type Curve Analysis),
Export to Image File, 173 1168
External Models Supplied with Gas and Condensate Systems, 1159
PanSystem, 305 Gas Deliverability, 793
Gas Fluid Parameters, 348

Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves, 1120 I
Gauge Data, 103
Gauge Data Conditioning, 197 Import Map Wizard, 448
Gauge Data File Injectivity Plot, 814
Requirements, 1182 Input/Model Parameters, 551
Gauge Data Files, 1180 Intersecting Fault Model, 316
Gauge Details, 890 Intersection of Two Lines, 145
General Configuration, 879 IPR, 813
General Intersecting Fault Model, 316 Isochronal Test, 807
Generating Type-Curves, 696
G-Function, 626
Global Point Selection, 509
Graphical Interface, 724 K
Graphing Configuration, 893
Graphing Keys, 973 KGD/PKN Calculations, 634
Graphing Legend, 951 Known Slope Line, 525
Graphing R-Axis, 954
Graphing Results, 951
Graphing T-Axis, 954
L
Graphing Title, 950
Graphing Window, 745
Graphing X-Axis, 952 Layer Parameters, 291
Graphs, 893 Layer Pressure, 662
Graphs/Plots, 950 Layer Volumes, 755
Limited Entry and Radial Composite
Systems, 1040
Line Details, 529, 636
H Line Results, 529, 636
Linear Flow Plot, 496, 633
Half Slope Line, 520 LIT Flow-After-Flow Test, 799
History Match Plot, 606 LIT Isochronal Test, 801
History Matching, 680 LIT Plot, 802
Homogeneous layer, 320 Log, 1057, 1060
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations, Log-Log Plot, 500, 599, 630, 1050, 1164
1105, 1168
Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters,
303
M
Horizontal Well Flow Models, 302
Horizontal Well Type-Curves, 1174
Horizontal Wells, 1037 Main Menu Bar, 739
Horner Time Function, 1057 Map Wizard, 448
Maritime Tide Table, 251

Mark Exact Position, 142 Oil Analysis (Bilinear Flow), 1092
Mark Point from Intersection of Two Oil Analysis (Horizontal Wells), 1097
Lines, 145 Oil Analysis (Linear Flow), 1087
Master Data, 277 Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), 1050
Matching Progress, 699 Oil Analysis (Spherical Flow), 1095
Material Balance 1 Plot, 602 Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis), 1103
Material Balance 2 Plot, 603 Oil Fluid Parameters, 330, 363
Material Properties, 424 Open, 28
MBH Method, 1065
Menu Bar, 908
Mini_Frac Log-Log Plot, 630
P
Mini-Frac, 619
Mini-Frac Analysis Tools, 635
Model Check, 438 P0, 514
Model Parameters, 294, 551, 835 Page Setup, 33
Model Selection, 543 Pan 3.x or Earlier File, 47
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File, 1192 PanFlow Rate Simulation, 702, 710
PanFlow Rate Simulation - Progress, 709
PanFlow Start Pressures/Rates, 714
PanFlow Start Rates, 714
N PanMesh, 717, 755
PanMesh Data Preparation, 392, 398
Negative Half Slope Line, 521 PanMesh Graphic Toolbar Commands,
Negative Unit Slope Line, 523 455
New, 28 PanSystem, 22
New Column, 129 PanSystem and Windows Keys, 972
New Data, 107 PanSystem and Windows Screen
New Run, 719 Regions, 905
New Unit, 887 PanSystem Calculations, 1050
New Unit System Based On, 886 PanSystem Derivative Diagnostic
No-Flow Boundaries, 461 Library, 1032
Numerical Reporting Options, 863 PanSystem General Windows Screen
Numerical Simulation, 717, 755 Regions Overview, 906
PanSystem Test Period Analysis
Workflows, 1197
Parallel Lines, 524
O
Partially-Communicating Faults and
Linear Composite Systems, 1041
Observation Points, 708 Partial-Penetration, 1120
Observation Probe, 326 Partial-Penetration and Gas-Cap/Aquifer
ODBC, 59 Type-Curves, 1120
Oil Analysis, 1050

Paste, 128 R
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis), 563
PDA Plot, 565 Radial Composite, 306
Pick Closure Time, 637 Radial Permeability, 1058
Pick Fracture Init Time, 637 Radial Permeability (k), 1058, 1060, 1061
Pick Nearest Data Point, 144 Radial Regions Around the Wellbore, 455
Pinch-Out Model, 309 Radial-Composite Type-Curves, 1118
PKN Calculations, 634 Rate-Normalized Pressure, 1059
PLAS, 76 Regions and Areal Heterogeneity, 440
Plot Axes for Data, 1103 Replay, 779
Plot toolbar, 173 Report Cover Page, 854
Plot Types, 486 Resample, 128, 129
PO, 635 Reservoir Bilinear Flow, 1092
Points Selection, 673 Reservoir Geometry, 398
Post-Closure Plot Types, 631 Reservoir Linear Flow, 1090, 1203
Pre-Closure Plot Types, 626 Reservoir Spherical Flow, 1095
Pressure Decline Analysis, 563 Restore Box, 907
Pressure Extrapolation, 642 Ribbon, 27
Pressure Gauge, 256, 257, 258 Ruler Bar (Analysis), 973
Pressure Period, 161 Ruler Bar (Data Preparation), 973
Pressure Transformation, 640 Run Mode, 434
Print, 34
Print Graph, 173
Print Report Options, 872
Printer, 468 S
Processing, 155
Production Forecasting, 838, 1085, 1159 Save, 31
Production Rates, 755 Save All, 32
Productivity Index J, 1079 Save As, 32
Pseudo-radial Skin Factor, 1052 Save As Word Document, 871
PVT Tuning, 385 Save Tidal Filtered Data, 264
Saved Views, 767
Select Analysis Model, 544
Select Shift Stream, 195
Q
Select Sub-sea Pressure Gauge, 257
Select Test Type, 799
Quarter Slope Line, 522 Select Type-Curve Match, 532
Quick Match, 652 Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System, 1044
Semi-Log Plot, 492, 633, 1055, 1097, 1136
Semi-Log Plot (Pressure Extrapolation),
1073

Semi-Log Plot Skin Factor, 1051 Test Design, 26, 274
Semi-Steady-State Inter-Porosity Flow, Test Overview Plot, 486, 594, 621, 794
1053 Testing Time Advisor, 1130, 1175
Send as E-mail, 33 Text-only Report File, 1183
Shale Log-Log Plot, 599 THP, 118
Shale Oil/Gas, 594 THP to BHP, 118
Show Number of Points, 246 Three-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir
Simulated Column Names, 713, 777 With Internal Cross-Flow, 311
Simulation, 649, 651 Tidal Filter, 540
Simulation View, 649 Tidal Filter Mode Facility, 261
Skin Analysis, 555 Tidal Filtering, 249
Skin Factor, 1058 Tidal Lag, 263
Skin Factor (S), 1058, 1060, 1061 Tide Table, 251
Skin versus Flow Rate Plot, 560 Time Function, 515
Slanted Well Model, 305 Time Transformation, 645
Slug Test Analysis Workflow, 1197 Tools, 507
Slug Test Type-Curves, 1109 TPR, 847
Smoothing, 513 Transformation, 639
Smoothing detail, 241 Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent
Spherical Flow Plot, 500 Skin, 1147
Square Root Plot, 601, 628, 1101 Transient Well Test and LIT Results, 825
Status Bar, 751 Transient Well Test
Stress-Dependent Pseudo-Pressure Deliverability/Injectivity Results,
Method, 283 821
Sub-Layer, 418 Tutorial, 229
Subsea Pressure Gauge, 256 Two-Cell Compartmentalized
Suggest Models, 552 Type-Curves, 1121
Superposition Function, 1058 Two-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir
Switching to Another Application, 975 With Internal Cross-Flow, 313
System Radial Flow Zero-Slope Line, Type Curve Plot, 1191
1053 Type-Curve, 532
Type-Curve Confirm, 534
Type-Curve File, 85, 1184
Type-Curve Force, 536
T
Type-Curve Next, 534
Type-Curve Pd, 536
T0, 514, 635 Type-Curve Previous, 535
TCX File, 784 Type-Curves, 577, 587, 696
Technical References, 1206 Type-Curves Plot, 504, 606
Test Data Derivative overlay, 167

U W
Ungroup Flow Periods, 247 Water Fluid Parameters, 342

Unit Classes, 887 Well Configuration, 420
Unit Slope Line, 520 Well Geometry, 421
Units, 883 Well Parameters, 288
Units Detail, 889 Well Test Design, 686
User Menu, 456 Wellbore Storage Overlay, 1048
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves, 1105,
1169
Windows Commands, 899
V
Wireline formation test, 320, 323, 327
Word Document, 871
Vertical Fractured Well, 1046 Word Document Report File, 1184
Vertical Well, 295 Workflow, 477
Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters,
298
View Control Panels, 727
View Flow into Completions, 757 Z
View Layer Volumes, 755
Zero Slope Line, 519, 638

PanSystem UG 20150701 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PanSystem UG 20150701 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PanSystem 5.

This document contains information proprietary to Weatherford, with all rights

Microsoft, Windows XP and Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft

USING THIS MANUAL

2 User Guide | PanSystem

SECTION I: GETTING STARTED

SECTION II: IMPORT/EXPORT DATA

CHAPTER 2: Import/Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CHAPTER 3: Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

User Guide | PanSystem 3

CHAPTER 4: Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

CHAPTER 5: Managing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

SECTION III: DATA PREPARATION

CHAPTER 6: Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CHAPTER 7: Test Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

CHAPTER 8: Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4 PanSystem | User Guide

CHAPTER 9: Rate Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

CHAPTER 10: Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

User Guide | PanSystem 5

CHAPTER 12: Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

CHAPTER 13: Master Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

CHAPTER 14: Well Reservoir and Fluid Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

6 PanSystem | User Guide

SECTION IV: ANALYSIS

CHAPTER 15: Analysis View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

CHAPTER 16: Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

CHAPTER 17: Conventional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

CHAPTER 18: Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

User Guide | PanSystem 7

CHAPTER 19: Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

CHAPTER 20: Skin Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

CHAPTER 21: PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

8 PanSystem | User Guide

CHAPTER 22: Shale Oil/Gas 593

CHAPTER 23: Mini-Frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

User Guide | PanSystem 9

CHAPTER 24: Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

CHAPTER 25: Simulation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

CHAPTER 26: Analytical Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

10 PanSystem | User Guide

CHAPTER 27: Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

User Guide | PanSystem 11

SECTION VI: DELIVERABILITY

CHAPTER 28: Deliverability View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

CHAPTER 29: Gas Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

CHAPTER 30: IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

CHAPTER 31: Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

12 PanSystem | User Guide

CHAPTER 32: Reports View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851

SECTION VIII: CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 33: Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

CHAPTER 34: Windows System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

User Guide | PanSystem 13

SECTION IX: SCREEN REGIONS

CHAPTER 35: PanSystem and Windows Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

CHAPTER 36: PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

14 PanSystem | User Guide

CHAPTER 37: Graphing Specific Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

User Guide | PanSystem 15

CHAPTER 38: Managing Print and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

CHAPTER 39: Managing Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

SECTION XI: KEYBOARD PROCEDURES